dummyhead

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

A Few Words About Safety
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Service Information
The service and repair information contained in this manual is intended for use by qualified, professional technicians. Attempting
service or repairs without the proper training, tools, and equipment could cause injury to you or others. It could also damage the
vehicle or create an unsafe condition.
This manual describes the proper methods and procedures for performing service, maintenance and repairs. Some procedures
require the use of specially designed tools and dedicated equipment. Any person who intends to use a replacement part, service
procedure or a tool that is not recommended by Honda, must determine the risks to their personal safety and the safe operation of
the vehicle.
If you need to replace a part, use genuine Honda parts with the correct part number or an equivalent part. We strongly recommend
that you do not use replacement parts of inferior quality.

For Your Customer’s Safety
Proper service and maintenance are essential to the customer’s safety and the reliability of the vehicle. Any error or oversight while
servicing a vehicle can result in faulty operation, damage to the vehicle, or injury to others.

Improper service or repairs can create an unsafe
condition that can cause your customer or others to
be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow the procedures and precautions in this
manual and other service materials carefully.

For Your Safety
Because this manual is intended for the professional service technician, we do not provide warnings about many basic shop safety
practices (e.g., Hot parts–wear gloves). If you have not received shop safety training or do not feel confident about your knowledge
of safe servicing practice, we recommend that you do not attempt to perform the procedures described in this manual.
Some of the most important general service safety precautions are given below. However, we cannot warn you of every
conceivable hazard that can arise in performing service and repair procedures. Only you can decide whether or not you should
perform a given task.

Failure to properly follow instructions and
precautions can cause you to be seriously hurt or
killed.
Follow the procedures and precautions in this
manual carefully.

Important Safety Precautions
Make sure you have a clear understanding of all basic shop safety practices and that you are wearing appropriate clothing and
using safety equipment. When performing any service task, be especially careful of the following:
• Read all of the instructions before you begin, and make sure you have the tools, the replacement or repair parts, and the skills
required to perform the tasks safely and completely.
• Protect your eyes by using proper safety glasses, goggles or face shields any time you hammer, drill, grind, pry or work around
pressurized air or liquids, and springs or other stored-energy components. If there is any doubt, put on eye protection.
• Use other protective wear when necessary, for example gloves or safety shoes. Handling hot or sharp parts can cause severe
burns or cuts. Before you grab something that looks like it can hurt you, stop and put on gloves.
• Protect yourself and others whenever you have the vehicle up in the air. Any time you lift the vehicle, either with a hoist or a jack,
make sure that it is always securely supported. Use jack stands.
Make sure the engine is off before you begin any servicing procedures, unless the instruction tells you to do otherwise. This will
help eliminate several potential hazards:
• Carbon monoxide poisoning from engine exhaust. Be sure there is adequate ventilation whenever you run the engine
• Burns from hot parts or coolant. Let the engine and exhaust system cool before working in those areas.
• Injury from moving parts. If the instruction tells you to run the engine, be sure your hands, fingers and clothing are out of the way.
Gasoline vapors and hydrogen gases from batteries are explosive. To reduce the possibility of a fire or explosion, be careful when
working around gasoline or batteries.
• Use only a nonflammable solvent, not gasoline, to clean parts.
• Never drain or store gasoline in an open container.
• Keep all cigarettes, sparks and flames away from the battery and all fuel-related parts.

0-1

dummyhead

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

How To Use This Manual
This manual describes the service procedures for the NC700X/XA/XD/S/SA/SD-C.
Sections 1, 2 and 3 apply to the whole motorcycle. Section 2 illustrates procedures for removal/installation of components that may
be required to perform service described in the following sections.
Section 4 through 23 describe parts of the motorcycle, grouped according to location.
If you are not familiar with this motorcycle, read Technical Feature in Section 1.
Follow the Maintenance Schedule recommendations to ensure that the motorcycle is in peak operating condition.
Performing the first scheduled maintenance is very important. It compensates for the initial wear that occurs during the break-in
period.
Find the section you want on this page, then turn to the table of contents on the first page of the section.
Most sections start with an assembly or system illustration, service information and troubleshooting for the section. The subsequent
pages give detailed procedure.
Refer to the troubleshooting in each section according to the malfunction or symptom. In case of an engine trouble, refer to PGM-FI
section troubleshooting first.

Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. To help you make informed decisions we have provided safety
messages and other information throughout this manual. Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the
hazards associated with servicing this vehicle.
You must use your own good judgement.
You will find important safety information in a variety of forms including:
• Safety Labels – on the vehicle
• Safety Messages – preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of three signal words, DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:
You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
• Instructions – how to service this vehicle correctly and safely.

As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded by a
prevent damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.

symbol. The purpose of this message is to help

ALL INFORMATION, ILLUSTRATIONS, DIRECTIONS AND SPECIFICATIONS INCLUDED IN THIS PUBLICATION ARE
BASED ON THE LATEST PRODUCT INFORMATION AVAILABLE AT THE TIME OF APPROVAL FOR PRINTING. Honda
Motor Co., Ltd. RESERVES THE RIGHT TO MAKE CHANGES AT ANY TIME WITHOUT NOTICE AND WITHOUT
INCURRING ANY OBLIGATION WHATSOEVER. NO PART OF THIS PUBLICATION MAY BE REPRODUCED WITHOUT
WRITTEN PERMISSION. THIS MANUAL IS WRITTEN FOR PERSONS WHO HAVE ACQUIRED BASIC KNOWLEDGE OF
MAINTENANCE ON Honda MOTORCYCLES, MOTOR SCOOTERS OR ATVS.
© Honda Motor Co., Ltd.
SERVICE PUBLICATION OFFICE
Date of Issue: February 2012

0-2

dummyhead

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

SYMBOLS
The symbols used throughout this manual show specific service procedures. If supplementary information is required pertaining to
these symbols, it would be explained specifically in the text without the use of the symbols.
Replace the part(s) with new one(s) before assembly.

Use the recommended engine oil, unless otherwise specified.

Use molybdenum oil solution (mixture of the engine oil and molybdenum grease in a ratio of 1:1).

Use multi-purpose grease (lithium based multi-purpose grease NLGI #2 or equivalent).
Use molybdenum disulfide grease (containing more than 3% molybdenum disulfide, NLGI #2 or
equivalent).
Example:
• Molykote® BR-2 plus manufactured by Dow Corning U.S.A.
• Multi-purpose M-2 manufactured by Mitsubishi Oil, Japan
Use molybdenum disulfide paste (containing more than 40% molybdenum disulfide, NLGI #2 or
equivalent).
Example:
• Molykote® G-n Paste manufactured by Dow Corning U.S.A.
• Honda Moly 60 (U.S.A. only)
• Rocol ASP manufactured by Rocol Limited, U.K.
• Rocol Paste manufactured by Sumico Lubricant, Japan
Use silicone grease.

Apply locking agent. Use a medium strength locking agent unless otherwise specified.

Apply sealant.

Use DOT 4 brake fluid. Use the recommended brake fluid unless otherwise specified.

Use fork or suspension fluid.

0-3

dummyhead

FRAME
ELECTRICAL

CHASSIS

ENGINE/DRIVE TRAIN ELECTRICAL

CONTENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION

1

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

2

MAINTENANCE

3

PGM-FI SYSTEM

4

IGNITION SYSTEM

5

ELECTRIC STARTER

6

FUEL SYSTEM

7

COOLING SYSTEM

8

LUBRICATION SYSTEM

9

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES

10

CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)

11

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

12

ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH

13

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER

14

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER

15

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

16

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING

17

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION

18

HYDRAULIC BRAKE

19

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

20

BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM

21

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES

22

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS)

23

WIRING DIAGRAM

24

INDEX

dummyhead

MEMO

dummytext

1. GENERAL INFORMATION
1

SERVICE RULES ··········································1-2

LUBRICATION & SEAL POINTS ··············· 1-23

MODEL IDENTIFICATION ····························1-3

CABLE & HARNESS ROUTING················· 1-25

SPECIFICATIONS ·········································1-6

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS ·············· 1-86

TORQUE VALUES ······································1-15

TECHNICAL FEATURES···························· 1-87

1-1

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION

SERVICE RULES
GENERAL INFORMATION

1. Use genuine Honda or Honda-recommended parts and lubricants or their equivalents. Parts that don't meet Honda's design
specifications may cause damage to the motorcycle.
2. Use the special tools designed for this product to avoid damage and incorrect assembly.
3. Use only metric tools when servicing the motorcycle. Metric bolts, nuts and screws are not interchangeable with English
fasteners.
4. Install new gaskets, O-rings, cotter pins, and lock plates when reassembling.
5. When tightening bolts or nuts, begin with the larger diameter or inner bolt first. Then tighten to the specified torque diagonally in
incremental steps unless a particular sequence is specified.
6. Clean parts in cleaning solvent upon disassembly. Lubricate any sliding surfaces before reassembly.
7. After reassembly, check all parts for proper installation and operation.
8. Route all electrical wires as show in the Cable and Harness Routing (page 1-25).
9. Do not bend or twist control cables. Damaged control cables will not operate smoothly and may stick or bind.

ABBREVIATION
Throughout this manual, the following abbreviations are used to identify the respective parts or systems.
Abbrev. term
ABS (NC700XA/XD/SA/SD)
CKP sensor
DCT (NC700XD/SD)
DLC
DTC
ECM (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
ECT sensor
EEPROM
EOP sensor (NC700XD/SD)
EOP switch
EOT sensor (NC700XD/SD)
HDS
HISS
IACV
IAT sensor
MAP sensor
MIL
O2 sensor
PCM (NC700XD/SD)
PCV
PGM-FI
SCS connector
TP sensor
TR sensor (NC700XD/SD)
VS sensor

Full term
Anti-lock Brake System
Crankshaft Position sensor
Dual Clutch Transmission
Data Link Connector
Diagnostic Trouble Code
Engine Control Module
Engine Coolant Temperature sensor
Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
Engine Oil Pressure sensor
Engine Oil Pressure switch
Engine Oil Temperature sensor
Honda Diagnostic System
Honda Ignition Security System
Idle Air Control Valve
Intake Air Temperature sensor
Manifold Absolute Pressure sensor
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Oxygen sensor
Power Control Module
Proportional Control Valve
Programmed Fuel Injection
Service Check Short connector
Throttle Position sensor
Transmission Range Sensor
Vehicle Speed sensor

DESTINATION CODE
Throughout this manual, the following codes are used to identify individual types for each region.
DESTINATION CODE
E
III E
ED
II ED
F
II F
KO
RU
U

1-2

REGION
U.K.
U.K. type III
EUROPEAN DIRECT SALES
EUROPEAN DIRECT SALES type II
France
France type II
Korea
Russia
Australia, New Zealand

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION

MODEL IDENTIFICATION
NC700XA shown:

NC700SA shown:

This manual covers following types of NC700 models:
TYPE
Standard brake
ABS
DCT

NC700X
–
–

NC700X
NC700XA
–

NC700XD
–

–

NC700S
–
–

NC700S
NC700SA
–

NC700SD
–

–

Be sure to refer to the procedure for the appropriate version of the NC700.

1-3

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
SERIAL NUMBERS
The Vehicle Identification Number (V.I.N) [1] is stamped on the right side of
the steering head.

[1]

The registered number plate (E, F, ED, RU types) [1] and compliance plate
(U type only) is attached on the left side of the steering head.

[1]

The engine serial number [1] is stamped on the lower right side of the
crankcase.

[1]

The throttle body identification number [1] is stamped on the lower left side
of the throttle body as shown.

[1]

1-4

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
LABELS
The color label [1] is attached on the right side of the rear frame. When
ordering color-coded parts, always specify the designated color code.

[1]

The Safety Certification Label (KO type) [1] is located on the left side of the
rear frame.

The Emission Control Information Label (KO type) [2] is located on the left
side of the rear frame.

[1]

[1]

1-5

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION

SPECIFICATIONS
GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM
DIMENSIONS

Overall length
Overall width

E, ED, F,
RU, U type
KO type

Overall height
Wheelbase
Seat height
Footpeg height
Ground clearance
Curb weight

E, ED, F,
RU, U type

KO type
Maximum weight capacity
FRAME

Frame type
Front suspension
Front axle travel
Rear suspension
Rear axle travel
Front tire size
Rear tire size
Front tire brand
Rear tire brand
Front brake
Rear brake
Caster angle
Trail length
Fuel tank capacity

1-6

NC700X/XA/XD
NC700S/SA/SD
NC700X/XA/XD
NC700S/SA/SD
NC700XA
NC700X/XA/XD
NC700S/SA/SD
NC700X/XA/XD
NC700S/SA/SD
NC700X/XA/XD
NC700S/SA/SD
NC700X/XA/XD
NC700S/SA/SD
NC700X/XA/XD
NC700S/SA/SD
NC700X
NC700XA
NC700XD
NC700S
NC700SA
NC700SD
NC700XA
E, ED, F, RU, U type
KO type

NC700X/XA/XD
NC700S/SA/SD
NC700X/XA/XD
NC700S/SA/SD

BRIDGESTONE
METZELER
BRIDGESTONE
METZELER

SPECIFICATIONS
2,210 mm (87.0 in)
2,195 mm (86.4 in)
830 mm (32.7 in)
760 mm (29.9 in)
825 mm (32.5 in)
1,285 mm (50.6 in)
1,130 mm (44.5 in)
1,540 mm (60.6 in)
1,525 mm (60.0 in)
830 mm (32.7 in)
790 mm (31.1 in)
341 mm (13.4 in)
310 mm (12.2 in)
165 mm (6.5 in)
140 mm (5.5 in)
214 kg (472 lbs)
218 kg (481 lbs)
228 kg (503 lbs)
211 kg (465 lbs)
215 kg (474 lbs)
225 kg (496 lbs)
220 kg (485 lbs)
209 kg (461 lbs)
189 kg (417 lbs)
Diamond
Telescopic fork
137 mm (5.4 in)
107 mm (4.2 in)
Swingarm
150 mm (5.9 in)
120 mm (4.7 in)
120/70ZR17M/C (58W)
160/60ZR17M/C (69W)
BT023F G
ROADTEC Z8 INTERACT E
BT023R G
ROADTEC Z8 INTERACT
Hydraulic single disc
Hydraulic single disc
27°
110 mm (4.3 in)
14.1 liters (3.73 US gal, 3.1 Imp gal)

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
ENGINE

ITEM
Cylinder arrangement
Bore and stroke
Displacement
Compression ratio
Valve train
Intake valve
opens

at 1 mm (0.04 in) lift

closes
opens
closes

at 1 mm (0.04 in) lift
at 1 mm (0.04 in) lift
at 1 mm (0.04 in) lift

Exhaust valve

Lubrication system
Oil pump type
Cooling system
Air filtration
Engine dry weight

FUEL DELIVERY
SYSTEM
DRIVE TRAIN

NC700X/XA/S/SA
NC700XD/SD

Firing order
Type
Throttle bore
Clutch system
Clutch operation system
Transmission
Primary reduction
Final reduction
Gear ratio

Gearshift pattern

NC700X/XA/S/SA
NC700XD/SD
NC700X/XA/S/SA
NC700XD/SD

NC700X/XA/S/SA
NC700XD/SD
NC700X/XA/S/SA
NC700XD/SD
NC700X/XA/S/SA
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
6th
NC700XD/SD
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
6th
NC700X/XA/S/SA
NC700XD/SD

ELECTRICAL

Ignition system
Starting system
Charging system
Regulator/rectifier
Lighting system

SPECIFICATIONS
2 cylinders in-line, slant angle 55°
73.0 x 80.0 mm (2.87 x 3.15 in)
670 cm3 (40.9 cu-in)
10.7:1
Chain driven, OHC with rocker arm
No.1: – 20° BTDC
No.2: – 25° BTDC
27° ABDC
30° BBDC
No.1: – 15° ATDC
No.2: – 20° ATDC
Forced pressure and wet sump
Trochoid
Liquid cooled
Paper element
60.5 kg (133.4 lbs)
67.3 kg (148.4 lbs)
1-2
PGM-FI (Programmed Fuel Injection)
36 mm (1.4 in)
Multi-plate, wet
2 Multi-plate wet clutches
Cable operating
Automatic
Constant mesh, 6-speeds
1.731 (71/41)
1.921 (73/38)
2.687 (43/16)
2.437 (39/16)
2.812 (45/16)
1.894 (36/19)
1.454 (32/22)
1.200 (30/25)
1.033 (31/30)
0.837 (31/37)
2.666 (40/15)
1.904 (40/21)
1.454 (32/22)
1.200 (30/25)
1.033 (31/30)
0.837 (31/37)
Left foot operated return system,
1-N-2-3-4-5-6
Automatic and electric shift (left hand
operated) return system,
N-1-2-3-4-5-6
Computer-controlled digital
transistorized with electric advance
Electric starter motor
Triple phase output alternator
FET shorted/triple phase full wave
rectification
Battery

1-7

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
PGM-FI SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM
IAT sensor resistance (at 20°C/68°F)
ECT sensor resistance (at 40°C/104°F)
Injector resistance (at 20°C/68°F)

SPECIFICATIONS
2.2 – 2.7 kΩ
1.0 – 1.3 kΩ
11 – 13 Ω

IGNITION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM
Spark plug (Iridium)
Spark plug gap
Ignition coil peak voltage
CKP sensor peak voltage (at 20°C/68°F)
Ignition timing ("F" mark)

SPECIFICATIONS
IFR6G-11K (NGK)
1.0 – 1.1 mm (0.039 – 0.043 in)
100 V minimum
0.7 V minimum
12° BTDC at idle

ELECTRIC STARTER SPECIFICATION
ITEM
Starter motor brush length

STANDARD
12.0 – 13.0 (0.47 – 0.51)

Unit: mm (in)
SERVICE LIMIT
6.5 (0.26)

FUEL SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM
Throttle body identification number
Idle speed
Throttle grip freeplay
Fuel pressure at idle
Fuel pump flow (at 12 V)

SPECIFICATIONS
GQ3UA
1,200 ± 100 min-1 (rpm)
2 – 6 mm (1/16 – 1/4 in)
343 kPa (3.5 kgf/cm2, 50 psi)
230 cm3 (7.8 US oz, 8.1 Imp oz) minimum/10 seconds

COOLING SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM
Radiator and engine
At draining
Reserve tank
Radiator cap relief pressure
Thermostat
Begin to open
Fully open
Valve lift
Recommended antifreeze
Coolant capacity

Standard coolant concentration

1-8

SPECIFICATIONS
1.69 liters (1.79 US qt, 1.49 Imp qt)
1.41 liters (1.49 US qt, 1.24 Imp qt)
0.13 liter (0.14 US qt, 0.11 Imp qt)
108 – 137 kPa (1.1 – 1.4 kgf/cm2, 16 – 20 psi)
80 – 84°C (176 – 183°F)
95°C (203°F)
8 mm (0.3 in) minimum
High quality ethylene glycol antifreeze containing silicate-free
corrosion inhibitors
1:1 (mixture with distilled water)

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
LUBRICATION SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
Engine oil
capacity

ITEM
NC700X/XA/S/SA

NC700XD/SD

After draining
After draining/
filter change
After
disassembly
After draining
After draining/
filter change
After
disassembly

Recommended engine oil

Oil pressure at engine oil filter
Oil pump rotor (NC700X/XA/S/SA)

Engine oil pump rotor (NC700XD/SD)

Clutch oil pump rotor (NC700XD/SD)

Tip clearance
Body clearance
Side clearance
Tip clearance
Body clearance
Side clearance
Tip clearance
Body clearance
Side clearance

STANDARD
3.1 liters (3.3 US qt, 2.7 Imp qt)

Unit: mm (in)
SERVICE LIMIT
–

3.4 liters (3.6 US qt, 3.0 Imp qt)

–

3.7 liters (3.9 US qt, 3.3 Imp qt)

–

3.2 liters (3.4 US qt, 2.8 Imp qt)

–

3.4 liters (3.6 US qt, 3.0 Imp qt)

–

4.1 liters (4.3 US qt, 3.6 Imp qt)

–

Honda "4-stroke motorcycle oil" or an
equivalent
API service classification: SG or higher
(except oils labeled as energy conserving
on the circular API service label)
Viscosity: SAE 10W-30
JASO T 903 standard: MA
470 kPa (4.8 kgf/cm2, 68 psi)
at 5,000 min-1 (rpm)/(80°C/176°F)
0.15 (0.006)
0.15 – 0.21 (0.006 – 0.008)
0.04 – 0.09 (0.002 – 0.004)
0.15 (0.006)
0.15 – 0.21 (0.006 – 0.008)
0.04 – 0.09 (0.002 – 0.004)
0.15 (0.006)
0.15 – 0.21 (0.006 – 0.008)
0.04 – 0.09 (0.002 – 0.004)

–

–
0.20 (0.008)
0.35 (0.014)
0.12 (0.005)
0.20 (0.008)
0.35 (0.014)
0.12 (0.005)
–
–
–

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM
Cylinder compression at 470 min-1(rpm)
Valve clearance

IN
EX

Rocker arm I.D.
Rocker arm,
rocker arm
Rocker arm shaft O.D.
shaft
Rocker arm-to-shaft clearance
Cam chain tensioner wedge B length
Camshaft
Cam lobe height
IN
EX
Runout
Camshaft journal O.D.
Valve, valve
Valve stem O.D.
IN
guide
EX
Valve guide I.D.
IN/EX
Stem-to-guide
IN
clearance
EX
IN
Valve guide
projection above
EX
cylinder head
Valve seat width
IN
EX
Valve spring free length
Cylinder head warpage
Cylinder head camshaft journal I.D.
Cylinder head-to-camshaft clearance

STANDARD
1,775 kPa (18.1 kgf/cm2, 257 psi)
0.17 ± 0.02 (0.007 ± 0.001)
0.28 ± 0.02 (0.011 ± 0.001)
20.012 – 20.030 (0.7879 – 0.7886)
19.972 – 19.993 (0.7863 – 0.7871)
0.019 – 0.058 (0.0007 – 0.0023)
–
34.7897 – 35.0297 (1.36967 – 1.37912)
34.9227 – 35.1627 (1.37491 – 1.38436)
–
41.935 – 41.950 (1.6510 – 1.6516)
4.975 – 4.990 (0.1959 – 0.1965)
4.965 – 4.980 (0.1955 – 0.1961)
5.000 – 5.012 (0.1969 – 0.1973)
0.010 – 0.037 (0.0004 – 0.0015)
0.020 – 0.047 (0.0008 – 0.0019)
17.7 – 18.0 (0.70 – 0.71)
19.6 – 19.9 (0.77 – 0.78)
0.90 – 1.10 (0.035 – 0.043)
1.30 – 1.50 (0.051 – 0.059)
49.07 (1.932)
–
41.995 – 42.019 (1.6533 – 1.6543)
0.045 – 0.084 (0.0018 – 0.0033)

Unit: mm (in)
SERVICE LIMIT
–
–
–
20.041 (0.7890)
19.961 (0.7859)
0.08 (0.003)
6.0 (0.24)
34.7697
(1.36888)
34.9027
(1.37412)
0.04 (0.002)
41.927 (1.6507)
4.965 (0.1955)
4.955 (0.1951)
5.04 (0.198)
0.075 (0.0030)
0.085 (0.0033)
–
–
1.5 (0.06)
1.9 (0.07)
48.1 (1.89)
0.10 (0.004)
42.027 (1.6546)
0.10 (0.004)

1-9

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE SPECIFICATIONS (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
ITEM
Clutch lever freeplay
Clutch

Spring free length
Disc thickness
Plate warpage
Clutch outer guide
I.D.
O.D.
Mainshaft O.D. at clutch outer guide
Clutch outer guide-to-mainshaft clearance
Primary driven gear I.D.
Primary driven gear-to-clutch outer guide clearance

STANDARD
10 – 20 (3/8 – 13/16)
43.2 (1.70)
2.62 – 2.78 (0.103 – 0.109)
–
21.991 – 22.016 (0.8658 – 0.8668)
31.959 – 31.975 (1.2582 – 1.2589)
21.967 – 21.980 (0.8648 – 0.8654)
0.011 – 0.049 (0.0004 – 0.0019)
32.000 – 32.025 (1.2598 – 1.2608)
0.025 – 0.066 (0.0010 – 0.0026)

Unit: mm (in)
SERVICE LIMIT
–
41.7 (1.64)
2.3 (0.09)
0.30 (0.012)
22.03 (0.867)
31.92 (1.257)
21.95 (0.864)
0.08 (0.003)
32.09 (1.263)
0.10 (0.004)

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION SPECIFICATIONS (NC700XD/SD)
ITEM

STANDARD
0.9 – 1.1 (0.035 – 0.043)
2.5 – 2.8 kΩ

Clutch clearance
EOT sensor resistance (20°C/68°F)

Unit: mm (in)
SERVICE LIMIT
2.0 (0.08)
–

ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM
Starter driven gear boss O.D.
Starter clutch outer I.D.

STANDARD
57.749 – 57.768 (2.2736 – 2.2743)
74.412 – 74.442 (2.9296 – 2.9308)

Unit: mm (in)
SERVICE LIMIT
57.73 (2.273)
74.46 (2.931)

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER SPECIFICATIONS
NC700X/XA/S/SA

Transmission

ITEM
Gear I.D.
Gear bushing
O.D.
Gear-to-bushing
clearance
Gear bushing I.D.

Shift fork,
fork shaft

1-10

Mainshaft O.D.
Countershaft O.D.
Bushing-to-shaft
clearance
Fork I.D.
Claw thickness
Shift fork shaft O.D.

M5, M6, C1
C2, C3, C4
M5, M6
C2
C3, C4
M5, M6
C2
C3, C4
M5
C2
At M5 bushing
At C2 bushing
M5
C2

STANDARD
28.000 – 28.021 (1.1024 – 1.1032)
31.000 – 31.025 (1.2205 – 1.2215)
27.959 – 27.980 (1.1007 – 1.1016)
30.955 – 30.980 (1.2187 – 1.2197)
30.950 – 30.975 (1.2185 – 1.2195)
0.020 – 0.062 (0.0008 – 0.0024)
0.020 – 0.070 (0.0008 – 0.0028)
0.025 – 0.075 (0.0010 – 0.0030)
25.000 – 25.021 (0.9843 – 0.9851)
27.985 – 28.006 (1.1018 – 1.1026)
24.972 – 24.993 (0.9831 – 0.9840)
27.967 – 27.980 (1.1011 – 1.1016)
0.007 – 0.049 (0.0003 – 0.0020)
0.005 – 0.039 (0.0002 – 0.0015)
12.000 – 12.018 (0.4724 – 0.4731)
5.93 – 6.00 (0.233 – 0.236)
11.957 – 11.968 (0.4707 – 0.4712)

Unit: mm (in)
SERVICE LIMIT
28.04 (1.104)
31.04 (1.222)
27.94 (1.100)
30.93 (1.218)
30.93 (1.218)
0.08 (0.003)
0.10 (0.004)
0.11 (0.004)
25.04 (0.986)
28.02 (1.103)
24.95 (0.982)
27.95 (1.100)
0.09 (0.004)
0.06 (0.002)
12.03 (0.474)
5.9 (0.23)
11.95 (0.470)

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XD/SD

Transmission

ITEM
Gear I.D.

Gear bushing
O.D.

Gear-to-bushing
clearance

Gear bushing I.D.

Inner mainshaft
O.D.
Outer mainshaft
O.D.
Countershaft O.D.
Bushing-to-shaft
clearance

Shift fork,
fork shaft

M5
M6
C1
C2
C3, C4
M5
M6
C1
C2
C3, C4
M5
M6
C1
C2
C3, C4
M5
M6
C1
C2

STANDARD
33.000 – 33.025 (1.2992 – 1.3002)
43.000 – 43.025 (1.6929 – 1.6939)
31.010 – 31.035 (1.2209 – 1.2218)
25.000 – 25.021 (0.9843 – 0.9851)
31.000 – 31.025 (1.2205 – 1.2215)
32.955 – 32.980 (1.2974 – 1.2984)
42.950 – 42.975 (1.6909 – 1.6919)
30.970 – 30.995 (1.2193 – 1.2203)
24.959 – 24.980 (0.9826 – 0.9835)
30.950 – 30.975 (1.2185 – 1.2195)
0.020 – 0.070 (0.0008 – 0.0028)
0.025 – 0.075 (0.0010 – 0.0030)
0.015 – 0.065 (0.0006 – 0.0026)
0.020 – 0.062 (0.0008 – 0.0024)
0.025 – 0.075 (0.0010 – 0.0030)
29.985 – 30.006 (1.1805 – 1.1813)
40.007 – 40.028 (1.5751 – 1.5759)
28.000 – 28.021 (1.1024 – 1.1032)
21.985 – 22.006 (0.8655 – 0.8664)

Unit: mm (in)
SERVICE LIMIT
33.04 (1.301)
43.04 (1.694)
31.06 (1.223)
25.03 (0.985)
31.04 (1.222)
32.93 (1.296)
42.93 (1.690)
30.94 (1.218)
24.94 (0.982)
30.93 (1.218)
0.10 (0.004)
0.11 (0.004)
0.10 (0.004)
0.09 (0.004)
0.11 (0.004)
30.03 (1.182)
40.038 (1.5763)
28.04 (1.104)
22.02 (0.867)

At M5 bushing

29.957 – 29.970 (1.1794 – 1.1799)

29.93 (1.178)

At M6 bushing

39.975 – 39.991 (1.5738 – 1.5744)

39.965 (1.5734)

At C1 bushing
At C2 bushing
M5
M6
C1
C2

27.967 – 27.980 (1.1011 – 1.1016)
21.952 – 21.965 (0.8643 – 0.8648)
0.015 – 0.049 (0.0006 – 0.0019)
0.016 – 0.053 (0.0006 – 0.0021)
0.020 – 0.054 (0.0008 – 0.0021)
0.020 – 0.054 (0.0008 – 0.0021)
12.000 – 12.018 (0.4724 – 0.4731)
5.93 – 6.00 (0.233 – 0.236)
11.957 – 11.968 (0.4707 – 0.4712)

27.95 (1.100)
21.94 (0.864)
0.09 (0.004)
0.10 (0.004)
0.08 (0.003)
0.08 (0.003)
12.03 (0.474)
5.9 (0.23)
11.95 (0.470)

Fork I.D.
Claw thickness
Shift fork shaft O.D.

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM
Crankshaft
Connecting rod side clearance
Runout
Right side
Left side
Main journal bearing oil clearance
Cylinder
I.D.
Out-of-round
Taper
Warpage
Piston, piston
Piston O.D. at 13 mm (0.5 in) from
rings
bottom
Piston pin bore I.D.
Piston pin O.D.
Piston-to-piston pin clearance
Piston ring end
Top
gap
Second
Oil (side rail)
Piston ring-to-ring
Top
groove clearance
Second
Cylinder-to-piston clearance
Connecting rod small end I.D.
Crankpin bearing oil clearance

STANDARD
0.15 – 0.35 (0.006 – 0.014)
–
–
0.019 – 0.037 (0.0007 – 0.0015)
73.000 – 73.015 (2.8740 – 2.8746)
–
–
–

Unit: mm (in)
SERVICE LIMIT
0.45 (0.018)
0.03 (0.001)
0.03 (0.001)
0.05 (0.002)
73.07 (2.877)
0.10 (0.004)
0.10 (0.004)
0.10 (0.004)

72.976 – 72.990 (2.8731 – 2.8736)

72.970 (2.8728)

18.010 – 18.013 (0.7091 – 0.7092)
17.996 – 18.000 (0.7085 – 0.7087)
0.010 – 0.017 (0.0004 – 0.0007)
0.15 – 0.30 (0.006 – 0.012)
0.30 – 0.42 (0.012 – 0.017)
0.20 – 0.70 (0.008 – 0.028)
0.035 – 0.080 (0.0014 – 0.0032)
0.030 – 0.055 (0.0012 – 0.0022)
0.010 – 0.039 (0.0004 – 0.0015)
17.964 – 17.977 (0.7072 – 0.7078)
0.026 – 0.044 (0.0010 – 0.0017)

18.023 (0.7096)
17.988 (0.7082)
0.035 (0.0014)
0.6 (0.02)
0.6 (0.02)
0.8 (0.03)
0.15 (0.006)
0.13 (0.005)
0.05 (0.002)
17.985 (0.7081)
0.05 (0.002)

1-11

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM
Minimum tire tread depth
Cold tire
Driver only
pressure
Driver and passenger
Axle runout
Wheel rim runout
Radial
Axial
Wheel balance weight
Fork

Spring free
NC700X/XA/XD
length
NC700S/SA/SD
Tube runout
Recommended fork fluid
Fluid level

NC700X/XA/XD
NC700S/SA/SD

Fluid capacity

NC700X/XA/XD
NC700S/SA/SD

STANDARD
–
250 kPa (2.50 kgf/cm2, 36 psi)
250 kPa (2.50 kgf/cm2, 36 psi)
–
–
–
–
394.9 (15.55)
357.0 (14.06)
–
Honda ULTRA CUSHION OIL SS-47
(10W) or equivalent
104 (4.1)
103 (4.1)
514 ± 2.5 cm3 (17.4 ± 0.08 US oz, 18.1 ±
0.09 Imp oz)
518 ± 2.5 cm3 (17.5 ± 0.08 US oz, 18.2 ±
0.09 Imp oz)

Unit: mm (in)
SERVICE LIMIT
1.5 (0.06)
–
–
0.2 (0.01)
2.0 (0.08)
2.0 (0.08)
60 g (2.1 oz)
max.
387.0 (15.24)
349.9 (13.78)
0.20 (0.008)
–
–
–
–
–

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM
Minimum tire tread depth
Cold tire pressure
Axle runout
Wheel rim runout

Driver only
Driver and passenger
Radial
Axial

STANDARD
–
290 kPa (2.90 kgf/cm2, 42 psi)
290 kPa (2.90 kgf/cm2, 42 psi)
–
–
–

Wheel balance weight
Drive
chain

Size/link

Slack

1-12

–
NC700X/
DID
XA/S/SA
RK
NC700XD
DID
/SD
RK
NC700X/XA/XD
NC700S/SA/SD

DID520V0-114LE
RK520MKO-114LE
DID520V0-112LE
RK520MKO-112LE
30 – 40 (1.2 – 1.6)
25 – 35 (1.0 – 1.4)

Unit: mm (in)
SERVICE LIMIT
2.0 (0.08)
–
–
0.2 (0.01)
2.0 (0.08)
2.0 (0.08)
60 g (2.1 oz)
max.
–
–
–
–
–
–

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
HYDRAULIC BRAKE SPECIFICATIONS
Front

Rear

ITEM
Specified brake fluid
Brake disc thickness
Brake disc warpage
Master cylinder I.D.
Master piston O.D.
Caliper cylinder I.D. (NC700X/S)
Caliper piston O.D. (NC700X/S)
Caliper cylinder I.D.
Cylinder A
(NC700XA/XD/SA/SD)
Cylinder B
Caliper piston O.D.
Piston A
(NC700XA/XD/SA/SD)
Piston B
Specified brake fluid
Brake disc thickness
Brake disc warpage
Master cylinder I.D.
Master piston O.D.
Caliper cylinder I.D.
Caliper piston O.D.
Brake pedal height

STANDARD
DOT 4
4.8 – 5.2 (0.19 – 0.20)
–
11.000 – 11.043 (0.4331 – 0.4348)
10.957 – 10.984 (0.4314 – 0.4324)
27.000 – 27.050 (1.0630 – 1.0650)
26.918 – 26.968 (1.0598 – 1.0617)
22.650 – 22.700 (0.8917 – 0.8937)
27.000 – 27.050 (1.0630 – 1.0650)
22.585 – 22.618 (0.8892 – 0.8905)
26.918 – 26.968 (1.0598 – 1.0617)
DOT 4
4.8 – 5.2 (0.19 – 0.20)
–
14.000 – 14.043 (0.5512 – 0.5529)
13.957 – 13.984 (0.5495 – 0.5506)
38.18 – 38.23 (1.503 – 1.505)
38.098 – 38.148 (1.4999 – 1.5019)
85.0 – 87.0 (3.35 – 3.43)

Unit: mm (in)
SERVICE LIMIT
–
4.0 (0.16)
0.30 (0.012)
11.055 (0.4352)
10.945 (0.4309)
27.060 (1.0654)
26.91 (1.059)
22.712 (0.8941)
27.060 (1.0654)
22.56 (0.888)
26.91 (1.059)
–
4.0 (0.16)
0.30 (0.012)
14.055 (0.5533)
13.945 (0.5490)
38.24 (1.506)
38.09 (1.500)
–

BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS
Battery

ITEM
Type
Capacity
Current leakage
Voltage
(20°C/68°F)
Charging current

Alternator

Fully charged
Needs
charging
Normal
Quick

Capacity
Charging coil resistance (20°C/68°F)

SPECIFICATIONS
YTZ12S
12 V – 11 Ah
1.2 mA maximum
13.0 – 13.2 V
Below 12.4 V
1.1 A/5 – 10 h
5.5 A/1 h
0.42 kW/5,000 min-1 (rpm)
0.1 – 0.5 Ω

1-13

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM
Headlight
Position light
Brake/tail/license light
Turn signal light
Instrument light
Turn signal indicator
High beam indicator
Neutral indicator
Engine oil pressure indicator
High coolant temperature indicator
MIL
HISS indicator
ABS indicator (NC700XA/XD/SA/SD)
Parking brake indicator (NC700XD/SD)
Fuse
Main fuse
PGM-FI fuse
Sub fuse
ABS fuse (NC700XA/XD/SA/SD)
DCT fuse (NC700XD/SD)
ECT sensor resistance
40°C (104°F)
100°C (212°F)
Fuel level sensor resistance
Full
Empty
Bulbs

1-14

SPECIFICATIONS
12 V – 60/55 W
12 V – 5 W
12 V – 21/5 W
12 V – 21 W x 4
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
30 A
15 A
15 A x 2, 7.5 A x 4
30 A x 2, 7.5 A
30 A, 7.5 A
1.0 – 1.3 kΩ
0.1 – 0.2 kΩ
4–6Ω
80 – 83 Ω

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION

TORQUE VALUES
STANDARD TORQUE VALUES
FASTENER TYPE
5 mm bolt and nut
6 mm bolt (Include SH flange bolt)
and nut
8 mm bolt and nut
10 mm bolt and nut
12 mm bolt and nut

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
5.2 (0.5, 3.8)
10 (1.0, 7)
22 (2.2, 16)
34 (3.5, 25)
54 (5.5, 40)

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
4.2 (0.4, 3.1)
9.0 (0.9, 6.6)
12 (1.2, 9)

FASTENER TYPE
5 mm screw
6 mm screw
6 mm flange bolt (Include NSHF) and
nut
8 mm flange bolt and nut
10 mm flange bolt and nut

27 (2.8, 20)
39 (4.0, 29)

ENGINE & FRAME TORQUE VALUES
FRAME BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

2
1

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
4
6

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
0.9 (0.1, 0.7)
10 (1.0, 7)

1
4
9
2

5
6
4
6

1.7 (0.2, 1.3)
2.5 (0.3, 1.8)
0.9 (0.1, 0.7)
4.0 (0.4, 3.0)

3

6

12 (1.2, 9)

1
1

6
6

12 (1.2, 9)
12 (1.2, 9)

1
1
3
3

6
8
8
8

10 (1.0, 7)
17.5 (1.8, 13)
28 (2.9, 21)
–

ITEM

Q'TY

Seat cowl assembly screw
Brake/tail/license light mounting
socket bolt
Reflector mounting nut
Turn signal light mounting screw
Luggage box lid assembly screw
Luggage box lid lock plate
mounting screw
Luggage box lid mounting socket
bolt
Luggage box lid hinge nut
Gearshift arm pinch bolt
(NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Muffler cover socket bolt
Muffler band bolt
Exhaust pipe joint nut
Exhaust pipe stud bolt

REMARKS

U-nut
ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.

See page 2-34
See page 2-35

1-15

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
MAINTENANCE

Air cleaner housing cover screw
Spark plug
Valve adjusting screw lock nut

6
2
8

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
5
14
7

Camshaft maintenance cap
Timing hole cap
Crankshaft hole cap
Engine oil drain bolt
Engine oil filter cartridge
Oil filter boss

1
1
1
1
1
1

36
14
30
12
20
20

4.0 (0.4, 3.0)
10 (1.0, 7)
15 (1.5, 11)
30 (3.1, 22)
26 (2.7, 19)
–

Rear axle nut
Drive chain adjuster lock nut
Drive sprocket bolt
Driven sprocket nut
Master cylinder reservoir cover
screw
Rear brake reservoir mounting bolt
Rear master cylinder push rod lock
nut
Parking brake adjuster bolt lock
nut (NC700XD/SD)
Sidestand pivot bolt

1
2
1
5
4

18
8
10
12
4

98 (10.0, 72)
21 (2.1, 15)
54 (5.5, 40)
108 (11.0, 80)
1.5 (0.2, 1.1)

1
1

6
8

10 (1.0, 7)
17 (1.7, 13)

1

8

17 (1.7, 13)

1

10

–

Sidestand pivot nut
Sidestand switch bolt

1
1

10
6

39 (4.0, 29)
10 (1.0, 7)

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
10
6
12

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
12 (1.2, 9)
10 (1.0, 7)
24.5 (2.5, 18)

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
14
6

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
10 (1.0, 7)
12 (1.2, 9)

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
6

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
10 (1.0, 7)

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
12 (1.2, 9)
1.5 (0.2, 1.1)
–

ITEM

Q'TY

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
1.1 (0.1, 0.8)
22 (2.2, 16)
14 (1.4, 10)

REMARKS

Apply engine oil to the threads and
seating surface.
See page 3-12
Apply grease to the threads.
Apply grease to the threads.
Apply engine oil to the threads.
See page 3-14
Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) from tip
U-nut

U-nut

See page 3-27
Apply grease to the sliding surface.
U-nut
ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.

PGM-FI SYSTEM
ITEM

Q'TY

ECT sensor
Bank angle sensor mounting bolt
O2 sensor

1
2
1

REMARKS

IGNITION SYSTEM
ITEM

Q'TY

Timing hole cap
Right crankcase cover wire clamp
bolt (NC700XD/SD)

1
2

REMARKS
Apply grease to the threads.
Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip

ELECTRIC STARTER
ITEM
Starter motor terminal nut

Q'TY
1

REMARKS

FUEL SYSTEM
ITEM

Q'TY

Fuel pump mounting nut
Air cleaner connecting hose band
screw
Insulator band screw

6
1

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
6
4

2

5

1-16

REMARKS
For tightening sequence (page 7-14)

See page 7-18

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
COOLING SYSTEM

Water hose band screw

6

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
–

Fan motor shroud mounting bolt
Fan motor mounting screw
Cooling fan mounting nut

3
3
1

6
4
3

8.4 (0.9, 6.2)
2.7 (0.3, 2.0)
1.0 (0.1, 0.7)

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
20

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
26 (2.7, 19)

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
10 (1.0, 7)
12 (1.2, 9)

ITEM

Q'TY

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
–

REMARKS
See page 8-9
See page 8-10
See page 8-14

Apply locking agent to the threads.

LUBRICATION SYSTEM
ITEM
Engine oil filter cartridge

Q'TY
1

REMARKS
Apply engine oil to the threads.

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES

Cylinder head cover socket bolt
Breather plate mounting bolt

3
8

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
6
6

Rocker arm shaft bolt

3

8

29 (3.0, 21)

Camshaft maintenance cap

1

36

4.0 (0.4, 3.0)

Cam chain tensioner bolt
Cam sprocket bolt

2
1

6
10

12 (1.2, 9)
56 (5.7, 41)

Water hose band screw
Insulator band screw
Cylinder head special bolt

6
1
6

–
5
9

–
–
44 (4.5, 32)

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
128 (13.1, 94)

ITEM

Q'TY

REMARKS
Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Apply engine oil to the threads and
seating surface.
See page 10-11
See page 10-28
Apply engine oil to the threads and
seating surface.
See page 10-16
See page 10-25
Apply molybdenum oil solution to the
threads and seating surface.

CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)

Clutch center lock nut

1

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
18

Clutch lifter plate bolt
Primary drive gear mounting bolt

4
1

6
10

12 (1.2, 9)
93 (9.5, 69)

Shift drum stopper arm pivot bolt

1

6

12 (1.2, 9)

Shift drum center socket bolt

1

8

23 (2.3, 17)

Gearshift pedal adjuster lock nut
Gearshift pedal pivot bolt

2
1

6
8

10 (1.0, 7)
27 (2.8, 20)

ITEM

Q'TY

REMARKS
Apply engine oil to the threads and
seating surface.
Lock nut; replace with a new one and
stake.
Apply engine oil to the threads and
seating surface.
Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip

1-17

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

Solenoid valve stopper plate bolt

1

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
6

Right crankcase cover wire clamp
bolt

2

6

12 (1.2, 9)

Linear solenoid valve body
mounting bolt
Shift spindle angle sensor bolt
Primary drive gear mounting bolt

6

6

–

1
1

6
10

12 (1.2, 9)
93 (9.5, 69)

Reduction gear cover bolt
TR sensor bolt
Shift control motor bolt
Shift drum center bolt

3
1
3
1

6
6
6
8

14 (1.4, 10)
12 (1.2, 9)
14 (1.4, 10)
23 (2.3, 17)

Drum shifter guide plate bolt

2

6

12 (1.2, 9)

Clutch line EOP sensor
EOT sensor

3
1

10
10

19.6 (2.0, 14)
14 (1.4, 10)

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
157 (16.0, 116)

ITEM

Q'TY

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
12 (1.2, 9)

REMARKS
Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width: 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width: 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
For tightening sequence (page 12101)
Apply engine oil to the threads and
seating surface.

Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width: 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width: 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Apply engine oil to the threads and
seating surface.

ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH

Flywheel mounting bolt

1

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
12

Starter clutch socket bolt

6

8

30 (3.1, 22)

Alternator stator mounting bolt

4

6

10 (1.0, 7)

Alternator wire clamp bolt

1

6

10 (1.0, 7)

ITEM

1-18

Q'TY

REMARKS
Left hand thread
Apply engine oil to the threads and
seating surface.
Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER

Mainshaft bearing set plate bolt

3

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
6

Shift drum bearing set plate bolt

2

6

12 (1.2, 9)

Balancer shaft bearing set plate
bolt

3

6

12 (1.2, 9)

Crankcase main journal bolt (new)

6

9

20 (2.0, 15) + 150°

Crankcase 10 mm bolt
Crankcase 8 mm bolt
Crankcase 8 x 45 mm bolt

1
3
1

10
8
8

39 (4.0, 29)
24 (2.4, 18)
24 (2.4, 18)

Crankcase 6 mm bolt

8

6

12 (1.2, 9)

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
10 (1.0, 7) + 90°

ITEM

Q'TY

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
12 (1.2, 9)

REMARKS
Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
See page 14-30
Replace with a new one.

Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) from tip

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER

Crankpin bearing cap bolt

4

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
6

Crankcase main journal bolt
(retightening)

6

9

20 (2.0, 15) + 120°

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
12
12
12
12
8
10
6
–

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
59 (6.0, 44)
54 (5.5, 40)
54 (5.5, 40)
54 (5.5, 40)
32 (3.3, 24)
54 (5.5, 40)
10 (1.0, 7)
–

ITEM

Q'TY

REMARKS
See page 15-7
See page 15-12
Replace with a new one.
Apply engine oil to the threads and
seating surface.
See page 15-9
Apply engine oil to the threads and
seating surface.

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
ITEM

Q'TY

Rear lower engine hunger nut
Front lower engine hunger bolt
Upper engine hunger bolt
Rear upper engine hunger nut
Step holder mounting socket bolt
Drive sprocket bolt
Starter motor terminal nut
Water hose band screw

1
2
2
1
4
1
1
2

REMARKS

See page 16-18
See page 16-19
See page 16-24
See page 16-25

1-19

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING

4
4
2
2

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
8
5
6
6

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
22 (2.2, 16)
2.5 (0.3, 1.8)
12 (1.2, 9)
10 (1.0, 7)

Front brake disc mounting bolt
Front axle
Front axle pinch bolt
Fork socket bolt
Bottom bridge pinch bolt
Fork cap
Top bridge pinch bolt
Front brake caliper mounting bolt
Steering stem adjusting nut

5
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
1

8
18
8
8
10
37
8
8
26

42 (4.3, 31)
74 (7.5, 55)
22 (2.2, 16)
20 (2.0, 15)
39 (4.0, 29)
22 (2.2, 16)
22 (2.2, 16)
30 (3.1, 22)
23 (2.3, 17)

Steering stem adjusting lock nut
Steering stem nut
Clutch lever pivot bolt
(NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Clutch lever pivot nut
(NC700X/XA/S/SA)

1
1
1

26
24
6

–
103 (10.5, 76)
1.0 (0.1, 0.7)

1

6

6.0 (0.6, 4.4)

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
12
8
18
10
10
10
5
18
8
6

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
108 (11.0, 80)
42 (4.3, 31)
98 (10.0, 72)
44 (4.5, 32)
44 (4.5, 32)
44 (4.5, 32)
5.9 (0.6, 4.4)
98 (10.0, 72)
32 (3.3, 24)
12 (1.2, 9)

ITEM

Q'TY

Handlebar holder bolt
Handlebar switch housing screw
Front master cylinder holder bolt
Handlebar weight mounting screw

REMARKS

ALOC screw; replace with a new
one.
ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.
Apply grease to the sliding surface.
Apply locking agent to the threads.

ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.
See page 17-38
Apply engine oil to the threads.
See page 17-38
See page 17-38
Apply grease to the sliding surface.

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
ITEM

Q'TY

Driven sprocket nut
Rear brake disc mounting bolt
Rear axle nut
Shock absorber mounting nut
Shock arm nut
Shock link nut
Drive chain slider mounting screw
Swingarm pivot nut
Step holder mounting socket bolt
Gearshift arm pinch bolt
(NC700X/XA/S/SA)

5
5
1
2
1
2
2
1
4
1

1-20

REMARKS
U-nut
ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.
U-nut
U-nut
U-nut
U-nut
U-nut
ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
HYDRAULIC BRAKE

2

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
8

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
5.4 (0.6, 4.0)

3

8

5.4 (0.6, 4.0)

4

4

1.5 (0.2, 1.1)

1
2
1
2
4

6
10
8
6
10

10 (1.0, 7)
17 (1.7, 13)
22 (2.2, 16)
12 (1.2, 9)
34 (3.5, 25)

5

10

34 (3.5, 25)

1
1

4
6

1.2 (0.1, 0.9)
1.0 (0.1, 0.7)

1
2

6
6

5.9 (0.6, 4.4)
12 (1.2, 9)

4
1

8
4

32 (3.3, 24)
1.5 (0.2, 1.1)

1

8

17 (1.7, 13)

1

8

22 (2.2, 16)

Front brake caliper bracket pin

1

8

12 (1.2, 9)

Front brake caliper mounting bolt
Rear brake caliper pin

2
1

8
12

30 (3.1, 22)
27 (2.8, 20)

Parking brake caliper mounting
bolt (NC700XD/SD)
Parking brake caliper pin bolt
(NC700XD/SD)
Parking brake pad pin
(NC700XD/SD)
Parking brake adjuster bolt lock
nut (NC700XD/SD)
Parking brake cable mounting nut
(NC700XD/SD)

2

8

31 (3.2, 23)

Apply locking agent to the threads.
Apply 0.4 g (0.01 oz) silicone grease
to the sliding surface.
Apply locking agent to the threads.
Apply 0.4 g (0.01 oz) silicone grease
to the sliding surface.
ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.
Apply 0.4 g (0.01 oz) silicone grease
to the sliding surface.
ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.

1

8

22 (2.2, 16)

Apply locking agent to the threads.

2

8

17 (1.7, 13)

ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.

1

8

17 (1.7, 13)

1

10

10 (1.0, 7)

ITEM

Q'TY

Brake caliper bleed valve
(NC700X/S)
Brake caliper bleed valve
(NC700XA/XD/SA/SD)
Master cylinder reservoir cover
screw
Rear brake reservoir mounting bolt
Brake pad pin
Rear brake caliper mounting bolt
Front master cylinder holder bolt
Brake hose oil bolt
(NC700X/S)
Brake hose oil bolt
(NC700XA/XD/SA/SD)
Front brake light switch screw
Front brake lever pivot bolt
Front brake lever pivot nut
Rear master cylinder mounting
bolt
Step holder mounting socket bolt
Rear master cylinder hose joint
screw
Rear master cylinder push rod lock
nut
Front brake caliper pin

REMARKS

ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.

Apply 0.10 g (0.004 oz) silicone
grease to the sliding surface.

Apply locking agent to the threads.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS) (NC700XA/XD/SA/SD)

4
14

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
8
10

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
32 (3.3, 24)
14 (1.4, 10)

2
2

6
6

12 (1.2, 9)
12 (1.2, 9)

ITEM

Q'TY

Step holder mounting socket bolt
Brake pipe joint nut
PCV mounting bolt
Delay valve mounting bolt

REMARKS
Apply brake fluid to the threads and
sliding surface.

1-21

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES

4
3

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
6
5

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
2.5 (0.3, 1.8)
1.0 (0.1, 0.7)

4

3

0.3 (0.03, 0.2)

1
2

PT 1/8
8

18 (1.8, 13)
25 (2.5, 18)

1
1

10
4

12 (1.2, 9)
1.2 (0.1, 0.9)

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
12 (1.2, 9)

30 (3.1, 22)
23 (2.3, 17)
5.1 (0.5, 3.8)
12 (1.2, 9)

ITEM

Q'TY

Turn signal light mounting screw
Combination meter mounting
screw
Combination meter back cover
mounting screw (NC700S/SA/SD)
EOP switch
Ignition switch mounting bolt
Neutral switch
Parking brake switch screw
(NC700XD/SD)

REMARKS

Apply sealant to the threads.
One way bolt; replace with a new
one.

OTHERS
ITEM

Q'TY

Cam chain tensioner set plate bolt

1

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
6

Camshaft cap
Gearshift spindle return spring pin
Main step rubber mounting bolt
Main step cap bolt

1
1
2
2

20
8
5
6

1-22

REMARKS
Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip

ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION

LUBRICATION & SEAL POINTS
ENGINE
MATERIAL
Liquid sealant
(Three Bond 1207B or
equivalent)

Multi-purpose grease
Locking agent

LOCATION
Oil pan mating surface
Right crankcase cover mating surface
CKP sensor wire grommet
Linear solenoid valve wire grommet (NC700XD/SD)
Alternator wire grommet
Alternator cover mating surface
Crankcase mating surface
Rocker arm sliding surface
Rocker arm shaft outer surface
Camshaft lobes, journals and thrust surface
Valve stem (valve guide sliding surface) and stem end
Clutch outer guide sliding surface (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Starter reduction and idle gear shaft outer surface
M3/4, C5, C6 gear (shift fork grooves) (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
M3, M4, C5, C6 gear (shift fork grooves) (NC700XD/SD)
Each transmission spline collar outer surface
Each transmission collar inner and outer surface
Shift fork guide area and guide pin
Shift fork shaft outer surface
Main journal bearing sliding surface
Crankpin bearing sliding surface
Crankshaft thrust surface
Oil filter cartridge O-ring
Oil filler cap O-ring
Timing hole cap O-ring
Crankshaft hole cap O-ring
Clutch oil filter cover O-ring (NC700XD/SD)
Oil joint pipe O-ring (NC700XD/SD)
Clutch oil guide collar O-rings (NC700XD/SD)
Oil strainer seal ring
Starter motor O-ring
Injector seal ring
Water pump large O-ring
Valve stem seal
Clutch disc entire surface (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Clutch lifter rod A sliding surface (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Clutch lifter rod B sliding surface (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Mainshaft seal rings (NC700XD/SD)
Starter one-way clutch
Piston sliding surface
Piston ring sliding surface
Piston pin outer surface
Each bearing
Each gear teeth and rotating surface
Each O-ring (except water sealing)
Other rotating area and sliding surface
Each oil seal lips
CKP sensor mounting bolt threads

Templex N3 grease (ESSO)

Electric shift reduction gear teeth and journal (NC700XD/SD)

Molybdenum oil solution
(a mixture of 1/2 engine oil
and 1/2 molybdenum
disulfide grease)

Engine oil

REMARKS
See page 9-12
See page 11-6

See page 13-7
See page 14-28

Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0
mm (0.26 ± 0.04 in)
except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08
± 0.04 in) from tip
2 – 4 g (0.07 – 0.14 oz)

1-23

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
FRAME
MATERIAL
Urea based multi-purpose
grease with extreme
pressure
(example: Kyodo Yushi
EXCELITE EP2, Shell
Stamina EP2 or equivalent)
Molybdenum disulfide grease

Multi-purpose grease

Cable lubricant

Honda bond A, Cemedine
#540 or equivalent
Silicone grease

DOT 4 brake fluid

Fork fluid
Drive chain lubricant
designed specifically for use
with O-ring chains, #80 – 90
gear oil or equivalent

1-24

LOCATION
Steering head bearing sliding surface
Steering head dust seal lips

Shock arm needle bearings
Rear shock absorber needle bearing
Rear shock absorber dust seal lips
Swingarm pivot needle bearings
Swingarm pivot ball bearing
Swingarm pivot dust seal lips
Seat catch hook sliding area
Luggage box lid catch sliding area
Gearshift pedal pivot and dust seal lips (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Gearshift pedal tie-rod ball joint area (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Throttle cable end and throttle grip pipe flange groove
Front wheel dust seal lips
Rear wheel hub O-ring
Rear wheel dust seal lips
Rear axle sliding surface
Swingarm pivot sliding surface
Rear brake pedal pivot sliding area
Parking brake ratchet A, B teeth and sliding surface
(NC700XD/SD)
Parking brake lever, washer sliding surface (NC700XD/SD)
Parking brake switch spring sliding surface (NC700XD/SD)
Main step sliding area
Pillion step sliding area
Seat lock cable inside
Luggage box lid lock cable inside
Throttle cable A, B inside
Clutch cable inside (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Parking brake cable inside (NC700XD/SD)
Handlebar grip rubber inside
Brake pad retainer mating surface
Front brake lever sliding surface and lever-to-master piston
contacting area
Rear brake master cylinder push rod sliding surface and boot
fitting area
Brake caliper dust seals
Rear brake caliper boot inside
Brake pad pin stopper ring
Parking brake shaft outer surface (NC700XD/SD)
Parking brake adjuster bolt threads and caliper piston sliding
surface (NC700XD/SD)
Parking brake shaft boot lips (NC700XD/SD)
Parking brake caliper bracket pin sliding surface (NC700XD/
SD)
Parking brake caliper sleeve sliding surface (NC700XD/SD)
Brake caliper piston and piston seals
Brake master piston and cups
Brake master cylinder inside
Rear master cylinder reservoir hose joint O-ring
Fork cap O-ring
Fork dust seal and oil seal lips
Drive chain whole surface

REMARKS
3 – 5 g (0.1 – 0.2 oz)

0.10 g (0.004 oz)

0.4 g (0.01 oz)
0.4 g (0.01 oz) minimum
0.4 g (0.01 oz) minimum
0.4 g (0.01 oz) minimum
0.4 g (0.01 oz) minimum
0.4 g (0.01 oz) minimum

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION

CABLE & HARNESS ROUTING
NC700X/XA:
CLUTCH SWITCH WIRE

BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH
CONNECTOR

RIGHT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

LEFT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

NC700XD:
THROTTLE CABLE A

RIGHT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH
CONNECTOR

THROTTLE CABLE B
LEFT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

RIGHT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

1-25

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700S/SA:
CLUTCH SWITCH WIRE

BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH
CONNECTOR

RIGHT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

LEFT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

NC700SD:
BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH
CONNECTOR
RIGHT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

THROTTLE CABLE A

THROTTLE CABLE B

LEFT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

1-26

RIGHT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700X/XA/XD:
FRONT LEFT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT
3P (ORANGE) CONNECTOR

FRONT SUB HARNESS
6P (BROWN) CONNECTOR

POSITION
LIGHT WIRE
FRONT RIGHT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT
3P (BLUE) CONNECTOR

FRONT SUB HARNESS

NC700S/SA/SD:
FRONT LEFT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT
3P (ORANGE) CONNECTOR
POSITION
LIGHT WIRES
FRONT SUB HARNESS
6P (BROWN) CONNECTOR

FRONT SUB HARNESS

FRONT RIGHT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT
3P (BLUE) CONNECTOR

1-27

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700X:

MAIN WIRE HARNESS
COMBINATION METER
16P (GRAY) CONNECTOR
Front
side

THROTTLE CABLES

BRAKE HOSE

CLUTCH CABLE

RIGHT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

LEFT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE
LEFT HANDLEBAR SWITCH
10P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

IMMOBILIZER
RECEIVER WIRE

IGNITION SWITCH
2P (BROWN) CONNECTOR

FRONT SUB HARNESS
6P (BROWN) CONNECTOR

Front
side
HEADLIGHT
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

MAIN WIRE HARNESS

1-28

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XA:

MAIN WIRE HARNESS
COMBINATION METER
16P (GRAY) CONNECTOR
Front
side

THROTTLE CABLES

FRONT BRAKE HOSE A
(to ABS MODULATOR)
CLUTCH CABLE

RIGHT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

LEFT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE
LEFT HANDLEBAR SWITCH
10P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

IMMOBILIZER
RECEIVER WIRE

IGNITION SWITCH
2P (BROWN) CONNECTOR

FRONT SUB HARNESS
6P (BROWN) CONNECTOR

Front
side
HEADLIGHT
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

MAIN WIRE HARNESS

1-29

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XD:

COMBINATION METER
16P (GRAY) CONNECTOR
MAIN WIRE HARNESS
FRONT BRAKE HOSE A
(to ABS MODULATOR)

Front
side

THROTTLE CABLES

PARKING BRAKE CABLE

LEFT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

RIGHT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

LEFT HANDLEBAR SWITCH
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
IMMOBILIZER
RECEIVER WIRE

IGNITION SWITCH
2P (BROWN) CONNECTOR
LEFT HANDLEBAR SWITCH
10P (GRAY) CONNECTOR
FRONT SUB HARNESS
6P (BROWN) CONNECTOR

Front
side
HEADLIGHT
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

MAIN WIRE HARNESS

1-30

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700S:
RIGHT HANDLEBAR SWITCH
8P (BLUE) CONNECTOR

FRONT SUB HARNESS
6P (BROWN) CONNECTOR

IGNITION SWITCH
2P (BROWN) CONNECTOR

LEFT HANDLEBAR SWITCH
10P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

IMMOBILIZER RECEIVER
4P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
MAIN WIRE HARNESS

HEADLIGHT
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

BRAKE HOSE

NC700SA:
RIGHT HANDLEBAR SWITCH
8P (BLUE) CONNECTOR

FRONT SUB HARNESS
6P (BROWN) CONNECTOR

IGNITION SWITCH
2P (BROWN) CONNECTOR

LEFT HANDLEBAR SWITCH
10P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

IMMOBILIZER RECEIVER
4P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

MAIN WIRE HARNESS
HEADLIGHT
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

FRONT WHEEL SPEED
SENSOR WIRE

FRONT BRAKE HOSE D
(from ABS MODULATOR)

BRAKE SUB HOSE C
(from DELAY VALVE)

1-31

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700SD:
RIGHT HANDLEBAR SWITCH
8P (BLUE) CONNECTOR

FRONT SUB HARNESS
6P (BROWN) CONNECTOR

IGNITION SWITCH
2P (BROWN) CONNECTOR

LEFT HANDLEBAR SWITCH
10P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

IMMOBILIZER RECEIVER
4P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

MAIN WIRE HARNESS
RIGHT HANDLEBAR SWITCH
7P (GREEN) CONNECTOR

HEADLIGHT
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

LEFT HANDLEBAR SWITCH
7P (GREEN) CONNECTOR
FRONT WHEEL SPEED
SENSOR WIRE

BRAKE SUB HOSE C
(from DELAY VALVE)

FRONT BRAKE HOSE D
(from ABS MODULATOR)

NC700S:
THROTTLE CABLE A

CLUTCH SWITCH
CONNECTORS

FRONT BRAKE HOSE

CLUTCH CABLE
THROTTLE CABLE B

LEFT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

IMMOBILIZER
RECEIVER WIRE
RIGHT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

1-32

IGNITION SWITCH WIRE

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700SA:
CLUTCH SWITCH
CONNECTORS

THROTTLE CABLE A
FRONT BRAKE HOSE A
(to ABS MODULATOR)

CLUTCH CABLE
THROTTLE CABLE B

LEFT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

IMMOBILIZER
RECEIVER WIRE
RIGHT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

IGNITION SWITCH WIRE

NC700SD:
THROTTLE CABLE B
FRONT BRAKE HOSE A
(to ABS MODULATOR)

THROTTLE CABLE A
PARKING BRAKE CABLE

LEFT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE
IMMOBILIZER
RECEIVER WIRE
RIGHT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

IGNITION SWITCH WIRE

1-33

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700X/XA:

CLUTCH CABLE
LEFT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

COMBINATION METER
16P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD RELAY

No.1 IGNITION COIL

LEFT HANDLEBAR SWITCH
10P (GRAY) CONNECTOR
IGNITION SWITCH
2P (BROWN) CONNECTOR

FRONT SUB HARNESS
6P (BROWN) CONNECTOR
IGNITION SWITCH WIRE

LEFT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

1-34

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XD:

LEFT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE
LEFT HANDLEBAR SWITCH
10P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

PARKING BRAKE CABLE

COMBINATION METER
16P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD RELAY

No.1 IGNITION COIL

LEFT HANDLEBAR SWITCH
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

IGNITION SWITCH
2P (BROWN) CONNECTOR

FRONT SUB HARNESS
6P (BROWN) CONNECTOR
IGNITION SWITCH WIRE

LEFT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

1-35

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700S/SA:

CLUTCH CABLE

IAT SENSOR
2P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD RELAY

No.2 IGNITION COIL
MAIN WIRE HARNESS

No.1 IGNITION COIL

No.1 SPARK PLUG WIRE

BATTERY BOX DRAIN HOSE

1-36

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700SD:

PARKING BRAKE CABLE

IAT SENSOR
2P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD RELAY

No.2 IGNITION COIL
MAIN WIRE HARNESS

No.1 IGNITION COIL

No.1 SPARK PLUG WIRE
BATTERY BOX DRAIN HOSE

1-37

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700X:

THROTTLE CABLE A

THROTTLE CABLE B

RIGHT HANDLEBAR SWITCH
8P (BLUE) CONNECTOR

RIGHT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

BRAKE HOSE

THROTTLE CABLE B
IMMOBILIZER RECEIVER
4P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

THROTTLE CABLE A

THROTTLE CABLE A

THROTTLE CABLE B
RIGHT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

BRAKE HOSE
IMMOBILIZER
RECEIVER WIRE

1-38

CLUTCH CABLE

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XA:

THROTTLE CABLE B

RIGHT HANDLEBAR SWITCH
8P (BLUE) CONNECTOR

THROTTLE CABLE A
RIGHT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE
FRONT BRAKE HOSE A
(to ABS MODULATOR)

IMMOBILIZER RECEIVER
4P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

FRONT BRAKE HOSE A
(to ABS MODULATOR)

THROTTLE CABLE B

THROTTLE CABLE A

THROTTLE
CABLE A

FRONT WHEEL SPEED
SENSOR WIRE
BRAKE SUB HOSE C
(from DELAY VALVE)

THROTTLE
CABLE B
FRONT BRAKE HOSE D
(from ABS MODULATOR)

CLUTCH CABLE
FRONT BRAKE HOSE D
(from ABS MODULATOR)
BRAKE SUB HOSE C
(from DELAY VALVE)
FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
2P (BLUE) CONNECTOR

RIGHT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

FRONT WHEEL SPEED
SENSOR WIRE

IMMOBILIZER
RECEIVER WIRE
FRONT WHEEL SPEED
SENSOR WIRE

1-39

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XD:

THROTTLE CABLE A
FRONT BRAKE HOSE A
(to ABS MODULATOR)

RIGHT HANDLEBAR SWITCH
8P (BLUE) CONNECTOR

THROTTLE CABLE B
RIGHT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

RIGHT HANDLEBAR SWITCH
6P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

FRONT BRAKE HOSE A
(to ABS MODULATOR)
THROTTLE CABLE B

IMMOBILIZER RECEIVER
4P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

THROTTLE CABLE A
THROTTLE
CABLE A

FRONT WHEEL SPEED
SENSOR WIRE
BRAKE SUB HOSE C
(from DELAY VALVE)

THROTTLE
CABLE B

FRONT BRAKE HOSE D
(from ABS MODULATOR)

PARKING BRAKE CABLE

FRONT BRAKE HOSE D
(from ABS MODULATOR)
BRAKE SUB HOSE C
(from DELAY VALVE)

FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
2P (BLUE) CONNECTOR

FRONT WHEEL SPEED
SENSOR WIRE

RIGHT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

IMMOBILIZER
RECEIVER WIRE

FRONT WHEEL SPEED
SENSOR WIRE

1-40

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700X:

CLUTCH CABLE

BRAKE HOSE

1-41

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XA:

CLUTCH CABLE

FRONT BRAKE HOSE A
(to ABS MODULATOR)

Parallel
FRONT WHEEL SPEED
SENSOR WIRE
FRONT BRAKE HOSE D
(from ABS MODULATOR)
BRAKE SUB HOSE C
(from DELAY VALVE)

1-42

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XD:

PARKING BRAKE CABLE

FRONT BRAKE HOSE A
(to ABS MODULATOR)

Parallel
FRONT WHEEL SPEED
SENSOR WIRE
FRONT BRAKE HOSE D
(from ABS MODULATOR)
BRAKE SUB HOSE C
(from DELAY VALVE)

1-43

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700S:

LEFT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE

CLUTCH CABLE

THROTTLE CABLE A

THROTTLE CABLE B

CLUTCH SWITCH WIRE
IGNITION COIL
PRIMARY WIRES

BRAKE HOSE

No.2 IGNITION COIL
SIPHON HOSE

RESERVE TANK
OVERFLOW HOSE

HORN WIRES
O2 SENSOR
1P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

1-44

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700SA:

LEFT HANDLEBAR
SWITCH WIRE
CLUTCH CABLE

THROTTLE CABLE A

THROTTLE CABLE B

FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
2P (BLUE) CONNECTOR
CLUTCH SWITCH WIRE
IGNITION COIL
PRIMARY WIRES

FRONT BRAKE HOSE A
(to ABS MODULATOR)

FRONT BRAKE HOSE D
(from ABS MODULATOR)

No.2 IGNITION COIL
SIPHON HOSE

RESERVE TANK
OVERFLOW HOSE

FRONT WHEEL SPEED
SENSOR WIRE

BRAKE SUB HOSE C
(from DELAY VALVE)

Parallel

1-45

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700SD:

PARKING BRAKE CABLE

FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
2P (BLUE) CONNECTOR
THROTTLE CABLE A
IGNITION COIL
PRIMARY WIRES

THROTTLE CABLE B
FRONT BRAKE HOSE A
(to ABS MODULATOR)
FRONT BRAKE HOSE D
(from ABS MODULATOR)

No.2 IGNITION COIL
SIPHON HOSE

RESERVE TANK
OVERFLOW HOSE

FRONT WHEEL SPEED
SENSOR WIRE

BRAKE SUB HOSE C
(from DELAY VALVE)

Parallel

1-46

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700X/XA/XD:
SEAT LOCK CABLE

LUGGAGE BOX LID LOCK CABLE

NC700X/XA/XD:

TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD RELAY

TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD RELAY
4P CONNECTOR

IGNITION COIL
PRIMARY WIRE
No.1 IGNITION COIL

SEAT LOCK CABLE

1-47

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700S/SA/SD:

LUGGAGE BOX LID LOCK CABLE

No.2 IGNITION COIL

NC700S/SA/SD:
LUGGAGE BOX LID LOCK CABLE

SIDESTAND SWITCH
3P (GREEN) CONNECTOR

FUEL PUMP
1P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

SEAT LOCK CABLE

1-48

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700S/SA/SD:

LUGGAGE BOX LID LOCK CABLE

TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD RELAY

No.2 IGNITION COIL

No.1 IGNITION COIL

DLC
JUNCTION B
14P (ORANGE) CONNECTOR
JUNCTION G
14P (ORANGE) CONNECTOR

1-49

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700X/XA:

IAT SENSOR
2P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
DLC
JUNCTION B
14P (ORANGE) CONNECTOR

TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD RELAY

JUNCTION G
14P (ORANGE) CONNECTOR
No.2 IGNITION COIL
IGNITION COIL
PRIMARY WIRES
LEFT HANDLEBAR SWITCH
10P (GRAY) CONNECTOR
STARTER RELAY
SWITCH

IGNITION SWITCH
2P (BROWN) CONNECTOR

IGNITION COIL
PRIMARY WIRES

FUEL FEED HOSE

No.1 IGNITION COIL

GROUND CABLE
FUSE BOX
STARTER MOTOR CABLE
MAIN WIRE HARNESS
CKP SENSOR
2P (RED) CONNECTOR

1-50

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XD:

IAT SENSOR
2P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
DLC
JUNCTION B
14P (ORANGE) CONNECTOR

TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD RELAY

JUNCTION G
14P (ORANGE) CONNECTOR
No.2 IGNITION COIL
IGNITION COIL
PRIMARY WIRES
LEFT HANDLEBAR SWITCH
10P (GRAY) CONNECTOR
STARTER RELAY
SWITCH

LEFT HANDLEBAR SWITCH
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

IGNITION COIL
PRIMARY WIRES

FUEL FEED HOSE

No.1 IGNITION COIL
IGNITION SWITCH
2P (BROWN) CONNECTOR
GROUND CABLE
FUSE BOX
STARTER MOTOR CABLE
MAIN WIRE HARNESS
CKP SENSOR
2P (RED) CONNECTOR

1-51

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
FAN MOTOR
3P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

AIR CLEANER HOUSING
DRAIN HOSE

FUEL FEED HOSE

RADIATOR LOWER
WATER HOSE
No.1 SPARK PLUG WIRE

BATTERY BOX DRAIN HOSE

1-52

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XD/SD:
FAN MOTOR
3P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

AIR CLEANER HOUSING
DRAIN HOSE

FUEL FEED HOSE

RADIATOR LOWER
WATER HOSE
No.1 SPARK PLUG WIRE
BATTERY BOX DRAIN HOSE

SHIFT PEDAL ANGLE SENSOR
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR (Optional)

1-53

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700X/XA:

RADIATOR UPPER
WATER HOSE

CLUTCH CABLE

SIPHON HOSE

FUEL FEED HOSE
No.2 SPARK PLUG WIRE

ECT SENSOR
2P CONNECTOR

RESERVE TANK
OVERFLOW HOSE

O2 SENSOR WIRE
HORN WIRES
O2 SENSOR
1P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
EOP SWITCH
1P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

EOP SWITCH
1P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

1-54

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XD:

RADIATOR UPPER
WATER HOSE
PARKING BRAKE CABLE

SIPHON HOSE

FUEL FEED HOSE
No.2 SPARK PLUG WIRE
ECT SENSOR
2P CONNECTOR

RESERVE TANK
OVERFLOW HOSE

O2 SENSOR WIRE
HORN WIRES
O2 SENSOR
1P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
EOP SWITCH
1P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

EOP SWITCH
1P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

1-55

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700S/SA:

Upper
side
RADIATOR UPPER
WATER HOSE

CLUTCH CABLE

SIPHON HOSE

FUEL FEED HOSE
No.2 SPARK PLUG WIRE

ECT SENSOR
2P CONNECTOR

RESERVE TANK
OVERFLOW HOSE

O2 SENSOR WIRE
HORN WIRES
O2 SENSOR
1P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
EOP SWITCH
1P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

EOP SWITCH
1P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

1-56

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700SD:

PARKING BRAKE CABLE

Upper
side
RADIATOR UPPER
WATER HOSE

SIPHON HOSE

FUEL FEED HOSE
No.2 SPARK PLUG WIRE
ECT SENSOR
2P CONNECTOR

RESERVE TANK
OVERFLOW HOSE

O2 SENSOR WIRE
HORN WIRES
O2 SENSOR
1P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
EOP SWITCH
1P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

EOP SWITCH
1P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

1-57

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XD/SD:

MAIN WIRE HARNESS
No.2 CLUTCH EOP SENSOR
3P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

SHIFT SPINDLE ANGLE SENSOR WIRE

CLUTCH LINE EOP SENSOR
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

MAIN WIRE HARNESS
No.1 CLUTCH EOP SENSOR
3P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

1-58

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700X/XA:

OPTION
6P CONNECTOR
VS SENSOR
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
NEUTRAL SWITCH WIRE
ALTERNATOR WIRE
SIDESTAND
SWITCH WIRE
NEUTRAL SWITCH CONNECTOR

SIDESTAND
SWITCH WIRE
BATTERY BOX DRAIN HOSE
NEUTRAL
SWITCH WIRE

FUEL TANK
DRAIN HOSE B

SIDESTAND SWITCH WIRE

FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE B

1-59

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XD/SD:
FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE B
SIDESTAND SWITCH WIRE
TR SENSOR WIRE

MAIN WIRE HARNESS

SIDESTAND
SWITCH WIRE

TR SENSOR WIRE

MAIN WIRE HARNESS

SHIFT PEDAL ANGLE SENSOR
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR (Optional)
NEUTRAL SWITCH

TR SENSOR

SIDESTAND
SWITCH WIRE

BATTERY BOX DRAIN HOSE

Upper
side
SHIFT CONTROL MOTOR
2P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

MAIN WIRE HARNESS

BATTERY BOX DRAIN HOSE
FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE B

1-60

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700X:

CRANKCASE BREATHER HOSE
THROTTLE CABLES

No.2 SPARK PLUG WIRE

IACV
4P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
No.1 SPARK PLUG WIRE
SENSOR UNIT
5P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

Upper
side

Upper
side

Right
side

Left
side

INJECTOR
2P (GRAY) CONNECTORS

BATTERY BOX
DRAIN HOSE

ECT SENSOR
2P CONNECTOR

FUEL FEED HOSE

WATER BYPASS HOSE
GROUND CABLE

STARTER MOTOR CABLE

1-61

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XA/XD:

CRANKCASE BREATHER HOSE
THROTTLE CABLES

No.2 SPARK PLUG WIRE

IACV
4P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
No.1 SPARK PLUG WIRE
SENSOR UNIT
5P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

Upper
side

Upper
side

Right
side

Left
side

INJECTOR
2P (GRAY) CONNECTORS

BATTERY BOX
DRAIN HOSE

ECT SENSOR
2P CONNECTOR

FUEL FEED HOSE

WATER BYPASS HOSE
GROUND CABLE

STARTER MOTOR CABLE

1-62

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700S:

CRANKCASE BREATHER HOSE
MAIN WIRE
HARNESS

THROTTLE CABLES

Upper
side

IACV
4P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

No.2 SPARK PLUG WIRE
SENSOR UNIT
5P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
CLUTCH CABLE

Upper
side

No.1 SPARK PLUG WIRE
Upper
side

Right
side
Left
side

INJECTOR
2P (GRAY) CONNECTORS

BATTERY BOX
DRAIN HOSE

ECT SENSOR
2P CONNECTOR

FUEL FEED HOSE

WATER BYPASS HOSE
GROUND CABLE

STARTER MOTOR CABLE

1-63

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700SA:

CRANKCASE BREATHER HOSE
MAIN WIRE
HARNESS

THROTTLE CABLES

Upper
side

IACV
4P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

No.2 SPARK PLUG WIRE

SENSOR UNIT
5P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
CLUTCH CABLE

Upper
side

No.1 SPARK PLUG WIRE
Upper
side

Right
side
Left
side

INJECTOR
2P (GRAY) CONNECTORS

BATTERY BOX
DRAIN HOSE

ECT SENSOR
2P CONNECTOR

FUEL FEED HOSE

WATER BYPASS HOSE
GROUND CABLE

STARTER MOTOR CABLE

1-64

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700SD:

CRANKCASE BREATHER HOSE
MAIN WIRE
HARNESS

THROTTLE CABLES

Upper
side

IACV
4P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

No.2 SPARK PLUG WIRE

SENSOR UNIT
5P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

PARKING BRAKE CABLE

Upper
side

No.1 SPARK PLUG WIRE
Upper
side

Right
side
Left
side

INJECTOR
2P (GRAY) CONNECTORS

BATTERY BOX
DRAIN HOSE

ECT SENSOR
2P CONNECTOR

FUEL FEED HOSE

WATER BYPASS HOSE
GROUND CABLE

STARTER MOTOR CABLE

1-65

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700X:
FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE A
REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

OPTION
6P CONNECTOR

SEAT LOCK CABLE
FUEL PUMP
1P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
SIDESTAND SWITCH
3P (GREEN) CONNECTOR
GROUND TERMINALS

NC700S:
REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
OPTION
6P CONNECTOR

FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE A

SEAT LOCK CABLE
FUEL PUMP
1P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
SIDESTAND SWITCH
3P (GREEN) CONNECTOR
GROUND TERMINALS

1-66

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XA:

FRONT BRAKE PIPE C
(to FRONT BRAKE CALIPER)
ABS MODULATOR
25P CONNECTOR
FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE A
FRONT BRAKE PIPE B
(from FRONT MASTER CYLINDER)
BRAKE SUB PIPE A
(to DELAY VALVE)

BRAKE SUB PIPE B
(to FRONT BRAKE CALIPER)

DELAY VALVE
SEAT LOCK CABLE
FUEL PUMP
1P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
SIDESTAND SWITCH
3P (GREEN) CONNECTOR
GROUND TERMINALS

REAR BRAKE PIPE C
(to PCV)
REAR BRAKE PIPE B
(from REAR MASTER CYLINDER)
OPTION
6P CONNECTOR

1-67

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XD:

SHIFT SPINDLE ANGLE SENSOR
3P (GRAY) CONNECTOR
FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE A
ABS MODULATOR
25P CONNECTOR
FRONT BRAKE PIPE C
(to FRONT BRAKE CALIPER)
BRAKE SUB PIPE A
(to DELAY VALVE)

LINEAR SOLENOID VALVE
4P (GREEN) CONNECTOR

SEAT LOCK CABLE
FUEL PUMP
1P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
BRAKE SUB PIPE B
(to FRONT BRAKE CALIPER)

SIDESTAND SWITCH
3P (GREEN) CONNECTOR

DELAY VALVE

GROUND TERMINALS
OPTION
6P CONNECTOR

REAR BRAKE PIPE C
(to PCV)
REAR BRAKE PIPE B
(from REAR MASTER CYLINDER)
FRONT BRAKE PIPE B
(from FRONT MASTER CYLINDER)

1-68

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700SA:

FRONT BRAKE PIPE C
(to FRONT BRAKE CALIPER)
ABS MODULATOR
25P CONNECTOR
FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE A

BRAKE SUB PIPE A
(to DELAY VALVE)

OPTION
6P CONNECTOR

BRAKE SUB PIPE B
(to FRONT BRAKE CALIPER)

SEAT LOCK CABLE
FUEL PUMP
1P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
SIDESTAND SWITCH
3P (GREEN) CONNECTOR

OPTION WIRE

GROUND TERMINALS

REAR BRAKE PIPE C
(to PCV)
REAR BRAKE PIPE B
(from REAR MASTER CYLINDER)
DELAY VALVE
FRONT BRAKE PIPE B
(from FRONT MASTER CYLINDER)

1-69

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700SD:

ABS MODULATOR
25P CONNECTOR
FRONT BRAKE PIPE C
(to FRONT BRAKE CALIPER)

SHIFT SPINDLE ANGLE SENSOR
3P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

BRAKE SUB PIPE A
(to DELAY VALVE)
FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE A

LINEAR SOLENOID VALVE
4P (GREEN) CONNECTOR

OPTION
6P CONNECTOR

SEAT LOCK CABLE
FUEL PUMP
1P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
SIDESTAND SWITCH
3P (GREEN) CONNECTOR

OPTION WIRE

GROUND TERMINALS
REAR BRAKE PIPE C
(to PCV)
REAR BRAKE PIPE B
(from REAR MASTER CYLINDER)

BRAKE SUB PIPE B
(to FRONT BRAKE CALIPER)

FRONT BRAKE PIPE B
(from FRONT MASTER CYLINDER)
DELAY VALVE

1-70

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700X:
ECM
33P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

OPTION
6P CONNECTOR
VS SENSOR
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

FUEL TANK
BREATHER HOSE
REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
GROUND TERMINALS

CLUTCH CABLE

NC700S:
ECM
33P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

VS SENSOR
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

OPTION WIRE

FUEL TANK
BREATHER HOSE
REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
GROUND TERMINALS

OPTION WIRE
OPTION
6P CONNECTOR

CLUTCH CABLE

1-71

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XA:
REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
2P (GRAY) CONNECTOR
REAR BRAKE PIPE B
(REAR MASTER CYLINDER to ABS MODULATOR)

ECM
33P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
REAR BRAKE PIPE D
(PCV to REAR BRAKE CALIPER)
REAR BRAKE PIPE C
(to PCV)

FUEL TANK
BREATHER HOSE

BRAKE SUB PIPE A
(to DELAY VALVE)
REAR BRAKE PIPE B
(from REAR MASTER CYLINDER)

PCV

GROUND TERMINAL

DELAY VALVE
REAR BRAKE PIPE D
(PCV to REAR BRAKE CALIPER)

BRAKE SUB PIPE B
(to FRONT BRAKE CALIPER)

GROUND TERMINAL
FRONT BRAKE PIPE B
(from FRONT MASTER CYLINDER)

Upper
side

FRONT BRAKE PIPE C
(to FRONT BRAKE CALIPER)

FRONT BRAKE PIPE C
(ABS MODULATOR to FRONT BRAKE CALIPER)
REAR BRAKE PIPE B
(REAR MASTER CYLINDER to ABS MODULATOR)

1-72

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XD:
PCM
33P (GRAY) CONNECTOR
PCM
33P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

REAR BRAKE PIPE B
(REAR MASTER CYLINDER to ABS MODULATOR)

JUNCTION D
24P CONNECTOR

REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
2P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

REAR BRAKE PIPE D
(PCV to REAR BRAKE CALIPER)
REAR BRAKE PIPE C
(to PCV)
FUEL TANK
BREATHER HOSE

BRAKE SUB PIPE A
(to DELAY VALVE)
REAR BRAKE PIPE B
(from REAR MASTER CYLINDER)
PCV

DELAY VALVE

GROUND TERMINAL

BRAKE SUB PIPE B
(to FRONT BRAKE CALIPER)

REAR BRAKE PIPE D
(PCV to REAR BRAKE CALIPER)

Upper
side

GROUND TERMINAL
LINEAR SOLENOID VALVE
4P (GREEN) CONNECTOR

FRONT BRAKE PIPE B
(from FRONT MASTER CYLINDER)
FRONT BRAKE PIPE C
(to FRONT BRAKE CALIPER)

SHIFT SPINDLE ANGLE SENSOR
3P (GRAY) CONNECTOR
PARKING BRAKE CABLE
FRONT BRAKE PIPE C
(ABS MODULATOR to FRONT BRAKE CALIPER)
REAR BRAKE PIPE B
(REAR MASTER CYLINDER to ABS MODULATOR)

1-73

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700SA:
REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
2P (GRAY) CONNECTOR
REAR BRAKE PIPE B
(REAR MASTER CYLINDER to ABS MODULATOR)

ECM
33P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
REAR BRAKE PIPE D
(PCV to REAR BRAKE CALIPER)
REAR BRAKE PIPE C
(to PCV)

FUEL TANK
BREATHER HOSE

BRAKE SUB PIPE A
(to DELAY VALVE)
REAR BRAKE PIPE B
(from REAR MASTER CYLINDER)

PCV

GROUND TERMINAL

DELAY VALVE
REAR BRAKE PIPE D
(PCV to REAR BRAKE CALIPER)

BRAKE SUB PIPE B
(to FRONT BRAKE CALIPER)

GROUND TERMINAL
FRONT BRAKE PIPE B
(from FRONT MASTER CYLINDER)

Upper
side

FRONT BRAKE PIPE C
(to FRONT BRAKE CALIPER)

FRONT BRAKE PIPE C
(ABS MODULATOR to FRONT BRAKE CALIPER)
REAR BRAKE PIPE B
(REAR MASTER CYLINDER to ABS MODULATOR)

1-74

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700SD:
PCM
33P (GRAY) CONNECTOR
PCM
33P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
REAR BRAKE PIPE B
(REAR MASTER CYLINDER to ABS MODULATOR)

REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
JUNCTION D
24P CONNECTOR

REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
2P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

REAR BRAKE PIPE D
(PCV to REAR BRAKE CALIPER)
REAR BRAKE PIPE C
(to PCV)
FUEL TANK
BREATHER HOSE

BRAKE SUB PIPE A
(to DELAY VALVE)
REAR BRAKE PIPE B
(from REAR MASTER CYLINDER)
PCV

DELAY VALVE

GROUND TERMINAL

BRAKE SUB PIPE B
(to FRONT BRAKE CALIPER)

REAR BRAKE PIPE D
(PCV to REAR BRAKE CALIPER)

Upper
side

GROUND TERMINAL
LINEAR SOLENOID VALVE
4P (GREEN) CONNECTOR

FRONT BRAKE PIPE B
(from FRONT MASTER CYLINDER)
FRONT BRAKE PIPE C
(to FRONT BRAKE CALIPER)

SHIFT SPINDLE ANGLE SENSOR
3P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

PARKING BRAKE CABLE
FRONT BRAKE PIPE C
(ABS MODULATOR to FRONT BRAKE CALIPER)
REAR BRAKE PIPE B
(REAR MASTER CYLINDER to ABS MODULATOR)

1-75

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700X/S:
SIDESTAND SWITCH
3P (GREEN) CONNECTOR

BANK ANGLE SENSOR
2P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

FUEL PUMP
1P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

FUEL FEED HOSE

GROUND TERMINALS

FUEL PUMP UNIT
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
MAIN WIRE HARNESS
ALTERNATOR WIRE

NC700XA/SA:
SIDESTAND SWITCH
3P (GREEN) CONNECTOR

BANK ANGLE SENSOR
2P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
2P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

FUEL PUMP
1P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

FUEL FEED HOSE

GROUND TERMINALS

FUEL PUMP UNIT
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
MAIN WIRE HARNESS
ALTERNATOR WIRE

1-76

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XD/SD:
SIDESTAND SWITCH
3P (GREEN) CONNECTOR

BANK ANGLE SENSOR
2P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
2P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

FUEL PUMP
1P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

FUEL FEED HOSE

JUNCTION D
24P CONNECTOR

GROUND TERMINALS

TR SENSOR
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
MAIN WIRE HARNESS
ALTERNATOR WIRE

FUEL PUMP UNIT
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

1-77

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700X/XA:

FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE A
FUEL TANK
BREATHER HOSE

Front
side

FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE B

FUEL FEED HOSE
FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE A

SEAT LOCK CABLE

SEAT LOCK CABLE

FUEL TANK
BREATHER HOSE

1-78

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XD:

VS SENSOR
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
INNER MAINSHAFT SENSOR
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
EOT SENSOR
2P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
OUTER MAINSHAFT SENSOR
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE A
FUEL TANK
BREATHER HOSE

Front
side

FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE B

FUEL FEED HOSE
FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE A

SEAT LOCK CABLE

SEAT LOCK CABLE

FUEL TANK
BREATHER HOSE

1-79

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700S/SA:

FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE A
FUEL TANK
BREATHER HOSE

Front
side

FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE B

FUEL FEED HOSE
FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE A

SEAT LOCK CABLE

SEAT LOCK CABLE

FUEL TANK
BREATHER HOSE

1-80

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700SD:

VS SENSOR
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
INNER MAINSHAFT SENSOR
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
EOT SENSOR
2P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
OUTER MAINSHAFT SENSOR
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE A
FUEL TANK
BREATHER HOSE

Front
side

FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE B

FUEL FEED HOSE
FUEL TANK DRAIN HOSE A

SEAT LOCK CABLE

SEAT LOCK CABLE

FUEL TANK
BREATHER HOSE

1-81

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700X/S:

ALTERNATOR
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH WIRE

REAR BRAKE HOSE

REGULATOR/RECTIFIER
2P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

NC700XA/XD/SA/SD:

ALTERNATOR
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH WIRE

REAR BRAKE HOSE A
(to ABS MODULATOR)

REGULATOR/RECTIFIER
2P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

1-82

REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR WIRE
REAR BRAKE HOSE E
(PCV to REAR BRAKE CALIPER)

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700X/S:

REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH WIRE

REAR BRAKE HOSE

NC700XA/SA:

REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH WIRE

REAR BRAKE HOSE A
(to ABS MODULATOR)

REAR BRAKE HOSE E
(from PCV)
REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR WIRE

1-83

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700XD/SD:
REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH WIRE
REAR BRAKE HOSE E
(from PCV)
REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR WIRE

REAR BRAKE HOSE A
(to ABS MODULATOR)

PARKING BRAKE CABLE

NC700X/XA/XD/S/SA/SD:

REAR LEFT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT
2P (ORANGE) CONNECTOR

MAIN WIRE HARNESS

REAR RIGHT TURN SIGNAL LIGHT
2P (LIGHT BLUE) CONNECTOR
BRAKE/TAIL/LICENSE LIGHT
3P CONNECTOR

1-84

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
NC700X/XA/XD/S/SA/SD:

Upper
side
Right
side

Upper
side

Front
side
Right
side
180 ± 22.5°
Lower
side
INDEX MARK

Left
side

Front
side

Front
side
30 ± 22.5°
Front
side

Left
side

Upper
side

1-85

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
SOURCE OF EMISSIONS
The combustion process produces carbon monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen (NOX) and hydrocarbons (HC). Control of carbon
monoxide, oxides of nitrogen and hydrocarbons is very important because, under certain conditions, they react to form
photochemical smog when subject to sunlight. Carbon monoxide does not react in the same way, but it is toxic.
Honda Motor Co., Ltd. utilizes various systems (page 1-87) to reduce carbon monoxide, oxides of nitrogen and hydrocarbons.

CRANKCASE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
The engine is equipped with a closed crankcase system to prevent discharging crankcase emissions into the atmosphere.
Blow-by gas is returned to the combustion chamber through the air cleaner and throttle body.

AIR CLEANER HOUSING

THROTTLE BODY

FRESH AIR
BLOW-BY GAS

1-86

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
EXHAUST EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
The exhaust emission control system is composed of a three-way catalytic converter and PGM-FI system.
The exhaust emission control system is separate from the crankcase emission control system.
THREE-WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER
This motorcycle also equipped with a three-way catalytic converter.
The three-way catalytic converter is in the exhaust system. Through chemical reactions, it converts HC, CO, and NOx in the
engine's exhaust to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen (N2), and water vapor.
No adjustment to these systems should be made although periodic inspection of the components is recommended.

NOISE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
TAMPERING WITH THE NOISE EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM IS PROHIBITED: Local law prohibits the following acts or the
causing thereof: (1) The removal or rendering inoperative by any person, other than for the purposes of maintenance, repair or
replacement, of any device or element of design incorporated into any vehicle for the purpose of noise control prior to its sale or
delivery to the ultimate customer or while it is in use; or (2) the use of the vehicle after such device or element of design has been
removed or rendered inoperative by any person.
AMONG THOSE ACTS PRESUMED TO CONSTITUTE TAMPERING ARE THE ACTS LISTED BELOW:
1.
2.
3.
4.

Removal of or puncturing of the muffler, baffles, header pipes or any other component which conducts exhaust gases.
Removal of or puncturing of any part of the intake system.
Lack of proper maintenance.
Replacing any moving parts of the vehicle, or parts of the exhaust or intake system, with parts other than those specified by the
manufacturer.

TECHNICAL FEATURES
CRACKING CONNECTING ROD
This motorcycle provides cracking connecting rods to utilize productivity
improvement and to trim weight.
The cracking connecting rod is split from the single-piece connecting rod
assembly into connecting rod and bearing cap.
Since the connecting rod and bearing cap have complex mating surfaces to
hold them each other, the dowel pin is not required when assembling
connecting rod.

In the following case, the mating surfaces of connecting rod and bearing
cap are damaged. Replace them if false installed.
– Bearing cap is installed oppositely.
– Interchange the connecting rods or bearing caps.

1-87

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
ECM-to-COMBINATION METER TWO-WAY SERIAL COMMUNICATION (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
This motorcycle is equipped with the ECM-to-combination meter two-way serial communication system.
ECM sends the following information to combination meter:
– Engine speed signal
– HISS indicator signal, MIL signal, Engine oil pressure indicator signal, High coolant temperature indicator signal
Combination meter sends the following information to the ECM.
– VS sensor signal
– EOP switch line open circuit information
• The combination meter detects a problem in the VS sensor and EOP switch line.
• The combination meter diagnosis the VS sensor failure, then send the DTC 11-1 to the ECM and ECM send the MIL signal to
the combination meter.
• The combination meter send the EOP switch line open circuit information to the ECM, then ECM diagnosis the EOP switch line
failure and send the DTC 87-1 signal to the combination meter.
These signals are forwarded to the combination meter or ECM by asynchronous communication via one wire. This wire is called the
TXD/RXD line (serial communication line).

COMBINATION
METER

ECT SENSOR
TXD/RXD LINE

VS SENSOR

To COMBINATION METER:
– Engine speed signal
– HISS indicator signal
– MIL signal
– Engine oil pressure indicator signal
– High coolant temperature indicator signal

EOP SWITCH

ECM

To ECM:
– VS sensor signal
– EOP switch line open circuit information

CKP SENSOR

IMMOBILIZER
RECEIVER

WHEN THERE IS A PROBLEM IN THE TXD/RXD LINE
When an open or short circuit occurs in the TXD/RXD line, the combination
meter indicate the following:
–
–
–
–
–

MIL [1] come on.
Engine oil pressure indicator [2] come on.
Tachometer go off.
High coolant temperature indicator go off.
HISS indicator go off.

When the ECM did not receive the meter information, the ECM store the
DTC 86-1. Check the DTC 86-1 with the HDS pocket tester (page 4-12).
Check the ECM by ECM communication diagnostic mode (page 22-11).
Check the combination meter by combination meter communication
diagnostic mode (page 22-11).

1-88

[1]

[2]

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
PCM-to-COMBINATION METER TWO-WAY SERIAL COMMUNICATION (NC700XD/SD)
This motorcycle is equipped with the PCM-to-combination meter two-way serial communication system.
The PCM sends the following information to combination meter:
–
–
–
–
–
–

High coolant temperature indicator signal
Engine oil pressure indicator signal
Engine speed signal
MIL signal
HISS indicator signal
Gear position indicator signal

Combination meter sends the ignition switch OFF time information (elapsed time after the ignition switch is turned OFF) to the
PCM. The PCM uses this information for the EOP switch line open circuit detection with the VS sensor signal.
These signals are communicated between the combination meter and PCM via one wire. This wire is called the TXD/RXD line
(serial communication line).

COMBINATION
METER

ECT SENSOR
TXD/RXD LINE
To COMBINATION METER:
– High coolant temperature indicator signal
– Engine oil pressure indicator signal
– Engine speed signal
– HISS indicator signal
– MIL signal
– Gear position indicator signal

EOP SWITCH

CKP SENSOR

PCM
To PCM:
– Ignition switch OFF time information

TR SENSOR

IMMOBILIZER
RECEIVER

WHEN THE SERIAL COMMUNICATION IS ABNORMAL
If there is any problem in the TXD/RXD line, the combination meter shows
following:

[1]

[2]

– MIL [1] and engine oil pressure indicator [2] stay on.
– Shift indicator "–" [3] is blinking.
– Tachometer, high coolant temperature indicator and HISS indicator do
not come on.
TXD/RXD line troubleshooting (page 22-11)
If there is any problem in the serial communication, the PCM stores the
DTC 86-1. Read the DTC (page 4-12).
DTC troubleshooting (page 4-40)
MIL troubleshooting (page 4-60)
[3]

1-89

dummyhead

GENERAL INFORMATION
DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION
The dual clutch transmission on this motorcycle uses new dual clutch assembly and its hydraulic system is improved.
The dual clutch assembly consists of the primary driven gear assembly, two clutch guides and hydraulic clutch assemblies.
The linear solenoid valves are located inside the right crankcase cover and inner mainshaft has to oil passages instead of the oil
feed pipes.
– For linear solenoid valve location (page 12-100)
– For clutch operating oil flow (page 9-3)
The transmission shift mechanism and electric shift control system are same as the conventional dual clutch transmission.
PRIMARY DRIVEN GEAR ASSEMBLY

No.2 CLUTCH ASSEMBLY
No.1 CLUTCH ASSEMBLY

CLUTCH GUIDE 1

OIL PASSAGE FOR
No.1 CLUTCH
CLUTCH GUIDE 2
OIL PASSAGE FOR
No.2 CLUTCH

1-90

dummytext

2. FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM
BODY PANEL LOCATIONS
(NC700X/XA) ·················································2-2

CENTER COVER (NC700X/XA/XD) ··········· 2-16
LUGGAGE BOX LID ··································· 2-17

BODY PANEL LOCATIONS
(NC700XD)·····················································2-3
BODY PANEL LOCATIONS
(NC700S/SA) ·················································2-4
BODY PANEL LOCATIONS
(NC700SD)·····················································2-5
SERVICE INFORMATION ·····························2-6
TROUBLESHOOTING···································2-6
PILLION SEAT ··············································2-7
SINGLE SEAT ···············································2-7

LUGGAGE BOX LID/
HINGE ASSEMBLY ···································· 2-19
LUGGAGE BOX ·········································· 2-19
WINDSCREEN ············································ 2-23
FRONT SIDE COWL (NC700X/XA/XD) ······ 2-24
METER STAY (NC700X/XA/XD)················· 2-24
FRONT UNDER COVER
(NC700X/XA/XD) ········································· 2-25
INNER UPPER COVER
(NC700X/XA/XD) ········································· 2-25

GRAB RAIL ···················································2-8
CENTER SEAT COWL··································2-8
SEAT COWL··················································2-9

HEADLIGHT/FRONT CENTER COWL
(NC700X/XA/XD) ········································· 2-26
HEADLIGHT/HEADLIGHT STAY
(NC700S/SA/SD) ········································· 2-27

REAR FENDER MUD GUARD (U type) ·····2-10
HEADLIGHT COVER (NC700S/SA/SD) ····· 2-27
BRAKE/TAIL/LICENSE LIGHT/TAIL LIGHT
COVER ························································2-10

FRONT FENDER········································· 2-28

MUD GUARD···············································2-11

LOWER COWL ··········································· 2-28

REAR FENDER A········································2-12

LEFT REAR COVER ··································· 2-29

REAR FENDER B········································2-12

RIGHT ENGINE SIDE COVER
(NC700XD/SD) ············································ 2-30

AIR DUCT (NC700X/XA/XD) ·······················2-13
GUARD PIPE (NC700XD/SD) ····················· 2-30
SIDE COWL (NC700S/SA/SD)····················2-13
BATTERY BOX ··········································· 2-31
SHROUD/SIDE COVER
(NC700X/XA/XD) ·········································2-14
SHELTER/SIDE COVER
(NC700S/SA/SD) ·········································2-15

CENTER CROSS PLATE ··························· 2-32
EXHAUST PIPE/MUFFLER ························ 2-32

2-1

2

dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

BODY PANEL LOCATIONS (NC700X/XA)
FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

[16]

[13]

[4]

[14]

[10]

[18]
[20]

[8]

[1]

[2]

[6]
[7]

[17]
[21]

[3]
[5]
[19]
[9]
[12]

[26]
[15]

[11]
[22]

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]

Pillion seat
Single seat
Grab rail
Center seat cowl
Seat cowl
Tail light cover
Mud guard
Rear fender A
Rear fender B

[23]

[25]

page 2-7
page 2-7
page 2-8
page 2-8
page 2-9
page 2-10
page 2-11
page 2-12
page 2-12

[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]

Air duct
Shroud
Side cover
Center cover
Luggage box lid
Luggage box
Windscreen
Front side cowl
Meter stay

[24]

page 2-13
page 2-14
page 2-14
page 2-16
page 2-17
page 2-19
page 2-23
page 2-24
page 2-24

[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
[25]
[26]

Front under cover
Inner upper cover
Front center cowl
Front fender
Lower cowl
Left rear cover
Battery box
Center cross plate

page 2-25
page 2-25
page 2-26
page 2-28
page 2-28
page 2-29
page 2-31
page 2-32

BODY PANEL REMOVAL CHART
This chart shows removal order of frame covers by means of arrow.
[1] Pillion seat

[2] Single seat

[3] Grab rail

[6] Tail light cover

[5] Seat cowl

[10] Air duct

[7] Mud guard

[11] Shroud
[12] Side cover

[13] Center cover

[8] Rear fender A

[15] Luggage box

[9] Rear fender B

[25] Battery box

[26] Center cross
plate

[17] Front side cowl

[16] Windscreen

[4] Center seat cowl

[14] Luggage box lid

[22] Front fender

[20] Inner upper
cover

[18] Meter stay

[23] Lower cowl

[24] Left rear cover

[19] Front under
cover

[21] Front center
cowl

2-2

dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

BODY PANEL LOCATIONS (NC700XD)
[2]
[4] [1]

[14]

[13]

[10]

[16]

[15]

[6]

[18]

[28]

[20]
[17]
[21]

[8]
[7]
[3]
[5]
[9]

[19]
[12]

[27]
[25]
[24]

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]
[10]

Pillion seat
Single seat
Grab rail
Center seat cowl
Seat cowl
Tail light cover
Mud guard
Rear fender A
Rear fender B
Air duct

page 2-7
page 2-7
page 2-8
page 2-8
page 2-9
page 2-10
page 2-11
page 2-12
page 2-12
page 2-13

[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]

[22]

[11]
[23]

[26]

Shroud
Side cover
Center cover
Luggage box lid
Luggage box
Windscreen
Front side cowl
Meter stay
Front under cover
Inner upper cover

page 2-14
page 2-14
page 2-16
page 2-17
page 2-19
page 2-23
page 2-24
page 2-24
page 2-25
page 2-25

[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
[25]
[26]
[27]
[28]

Front center cowl
Front fender
Lower cowl
Left rear cover
Right engine side
cover
Guard pipe
Battery box
Center cross plate

page 2-26
page 2-28
page 2-29
page 2-30
page 2-30
page 2-30
page 2-31
page 2-32

BODY PANEL REMOVAL CHART
This chart shows removal order of frame covers by means of arrow.
[1] Pillion seat

[2] Single seat

[3] Grab rail

[6] Tail light cover

[5] Seat cowl

[10] Air duct

[14] Luggage box lid

[7] Mud guard

[11] Shroud
[12] Side cover

[13] Center cover

[22] Front fender

[8] Rear fender A

[15] Luggage box

[9] Rear fender B

[27] Battery box

[28] Center cross
plate

[17] Front side cowl

[16] Windscreen

[26] Guard pipe

[20] Inner upper
cover

[18] Meter stay

[25] Right engine
side cover

[19] Front under
cover

[21] Front center
cowl

[23] Lower cowl

[24] Left rear cover

[4] Center seat cowl

2-3

dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

BODY PANEL LOCATIONS (NC700S/SA)
E, ED, F, KO, RU type shown:
[15]

[10]
[2]

[17]

[4]

[1]

[8]
[6]

[13]

[16]

[7]

[18]
[3]
[5]
[9]
[11]
[12]
[22]
[21]

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]

Pillion seat
Single seat
Grab rail
Center seat cowl
Seat cowl
Tail light cover
Mud guard
Rear fender A

page 2-7
page 2-7
page 2-8
page 2-8
page 2-9
page 2-10
page 2-11
page 2-12

[9]
[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]

[14]

Rear fender B
Side cowl
Shelter
Side cover
Luggage box lid
Luggage box
Windscreen
Headlight stay

[19]

[20]

page 2-12
page 2-13
page 2-15
page 2-15
page 2-18
page 2-20
page 2-23
page 2-27

[17]
[18]
[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]

Headlight cover
Front fender
Lower cowl
Left rear cover
Battery box
Center cross plate
Rear fender mud
guard (U type)

page 2-27
page 2-28
page 2-28
page 2-29
page 2-31
page 2-32
page 2-10

BODY PANEL REMOVAL CHART
This chart shows removal order of frame covers by means of arrow.
[23] Rear fender mud
guard (U type)

[3] Grab rail

[2] Single seat

[4] Center seat cowl

[1] Pillion seat

[6] Tail light cover

[5] Seat cowl

[10] Side cowl

[7] Mud guard

[11] Shelter
[12] Side cover

[8] Rear fender A

[9] Rear fender B

[13] Luggage box lid

[19] Lower cowl

[18] Front fender

[20] Left rear cover

2-4

[15] Windscreen

[14] Luggage box

[16] Headlight stay

[17] Headlight cover

[21] Battery box

[22] Center cross plate

dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

BODY PANEL LOCATIONS (NC700SD)
E, ED, F, KO, RU type shown:
[4]

[1] [2]

[13]

[14]

[15]

[10]

[6]

[17]

[24]

[16]

[18]
[8]
[7]
[3]
[5]
[9]
[11]
[12]

[23]

[21]
[19]

[20]

[1]
[2]
[3]
[4]
[5]
[6]
[7]
[8]
[9]

Pillion seat
Single seat
Grab rail
Center seat cowl
Seat cowl
Tail light cover
Mud guard
Rear fender A
Rear fender B

page 2-7
page 2-7
page 2-8
page 2-8
page 2-9
page 2-10
page 2-11
page 2-12
page 2-12

[10]
[11]
[12]
[13]
[14]
[15]
[16]
[17]
[18]

[22]

Side cowl
Shelter
Side cover
Luggage box lid
Luggage box
Windscreen
Headlight stay
Headlight cover
Front fender

page 2-13
page 2-15
page 2-15
page 2-18
page 2-20
page 2-23
page 2-27
page 2-27
page 2-28

[19]
[20]
[21]
[22]
[23]
[24]
[25]

Lower cowl
Left rear cover
Right engine side
cover
Guard pipe
Battery box
Center cross plate
Rear fender mud
guard (U type)

page 2-29
page 2-30
page 2-30
page 2-30
page 2-31
page 2-32
page 2-10

BODY PANEL REMOVAL CHART
This chart shows removal order of frame covers by means of arrow.
[25] Rear fender mud
guard (U type)

[4] Center seat cowl

[13] Luggage box lid

[6] Tail light cover

[3] Grab rail

[2] Single seat

[7] Mud guard

[1] Pillion seat

[5] Seat cowl

[10] Side cowl

[8] Rear fender A

[11] Shelter
[12] Side cover

[15] Windscreen

[19] Lower cowl

[20] Left rear cover

[18] Front fender

[16] Headlight stay

[9] Rear fender B

[21] Right engine side
cover

[14] Luggage box

[17] Headlight cover

[22] Guard pipe

[23] Battery box

[24] Center cross plate

2-5

dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
•
•
•
•

This section covers removal and installation of the body panels and exhaust system.
Serious burns may result if the exhaust system is not allowed to cool before components are removed or serviced.
Always replace the exhaust pipe gasket with new ones after removing the exhaust pipe from the engine.
When installing the exhaust system, loosely install all of the exhaust pipe fasteners. Always tighten the exhaust pipe joint nuts
first, then tighten the mounting bolts.
• Always inspect the exhaust system for leaks after installation.

TORQUE VALUES

2
1

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
4
6

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
0.9 (0.1, 0.7)
10 (1.0, 7)

1
4
9
2

5
6
4
6

1.7 (0.2, 1.3)
2.5 (0.3, 1.8)
0.9 (0.1, 0.7)
4.0 (0.4, 3.0)

3

6

12 (1.2, 9)

1
1

6
6

12 (1.2, 9)
12 (1.2, 9)

1
1
3
3

6
8
8
8

10 (1.0, 7)
17.5 (1.8, 13)
28 (2.9, 21)
–

ITEM

Q'TY

Seat cowl assembly screw
Brake/tail/license light mounting
socket bolt
Reflector mounting nut
Turn signal light mounting screw
Luggage box lid assembly screw
Luggage box lid lock plate
mounting screw
Luggage box lid mounting socket
bolt
Luggage box lid hinge nut
Gearshift arm pinch bolt
(NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Muffler cover socket bolt
Muffler band bolt
Exhaust pipe joint nut
Exhaust pipe stud bolt

TROUBLESHOOTING
Excessive exhaust noise
• Broken exhaust system
• Exhaust gas leak
Poor performance
• Deformed exhaust system
• Exhaust gas leak
• Clogged muffler

2-6

REMARKS

U-nut
ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.

See page 2-34
See page 2-35

dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

PILLION SEAT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Open the pillion seat [1] using the ignition key.

[1]

Remove the nuts [2], collars [3] and pillion seat.
Remove the grommets [4] from the pillion seat stay.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Apply grease to the pillion seat catch hook sliding area
if necessary.

[2]/[3]

[4]

SINGLE SEAT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700X/
XA/XD)
Open the pillion seat using the ignition key.

[5]

[2]

[1]

Remove the mounting bolts [1].
Remove the single seat [2] by pulling it rearward.

[6]

Remove the collars [3] and grommets [4] from the
single seat.
Install the grommets and collars to the single seat.
Install the single seat by inserting its hook [5] into the
seat bracket [6] under the luggage box hinge bracket.
Install and tighten the mounting bolts securely.
Close the pillion seat.

[3]/[4]

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700S/
SA/SD)
Open the pillion seat using the ignition key.

[6]

[3]

[1]/[2]

Remove the mounting socket bolts [1] and washers [2].
Remove the single seat [3] by pulling it rearward.
Remove the collars [4] and grommets [5] from the
single seat.

[7]

Install the grommets and collars to the single seat.
Install the single seat by inserting its hook [6] into the
seat bracket [7] under the luggage box hinge bracket.
Install and tighten the mounting socket bolts securely.
Close the pillion seat.

[4]/[5]

2-7

dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

GRAB RAIL
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Open the pillion seat using the ignition key.
Right grab rail:

Remove the clip [1], washer [2], spring [3] and pillion seat hinge [4] from the pillion seat stay.
Remove the caps [5] from the mounting socket bolts [6].
Remove the mounting socket bolts, washers [7] and grab rails [8] while holding the collars [9].
Be careful not to let the collars fall into the seat cowl.
Remove the collars from the grab rail.
If necessary, remove the clips [10], washers [11] and pillion seat hinge from the right grab rail.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
[10]

[4]

[1]
[2]
[3]

[5]
[6]
[7]

[11]
[8]

[9]

CENTER SEAT COWL
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Open the pillion seat using the ignition key.

[1]

[2]

[4]

Remove the socket bolts [1].
Pull up the center seat cowl rear end and release the
center seat cowl tabs [2] from the seat cowl slits [3] by
pulling the center seat cowl [4] rearward.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

[3]

2-8

dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

SEAT COWL
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the following:
– Single seat (page 2-7)
– Grab rail (page 2-8)
Remove the socket bolts [1] and trim clips [2].
Release the seat cowl front side slits [3] and tabs [4] from the side cover tabs [5] and slits [6].
Remove the seat cowl assembly [7] by releasing the its rear side tabs [8] and slits [9] from the rear fender B slits
[10] and tabs [11].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
[1]

[10]

[7]
[2]

[11]

[8]
[9]
[6]

[5]

[2]
[4]

[3]

DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Remove the center seat cowl (page 2-8).
Remove the seat cowl assembly screws [1] and separate the right and left seat cowls [2].
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
TORQUE:
Seat cowl assembly screw:
0.9 N·m (0.1 kgf·m, 0.7 lbf·ft)

[1]

[2]

2-9

dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

REAR FENDER MUD GUARD (U type)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the screw [1], socket bolts [2] and rear fender
mud guard [3].

[1]

[3]

[2]

BRAKE/TAIL/LICENSE LIGHT/TAIL LIGHT COVER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the rear fender mud guard (U type) (page 210).

E, ED, F, KO, RU type shown:

[3]/[4]/[5]

Remove the screw [1] and open the cover [2].
Disconnect the following:
– Rear right turn signal light 2P (Light blue) connector
[3]
– Rear left turn signal light 2P (Orange) connector [4]
– Brake/tail/license light 3P connector [5]

[2]

Remove the brake/tail/license light mounting socket bolt
[1] and collar [2].

[1]

E, ED, F, KO, RU type shown:

Remove the socket bolts (E, ED, F, KO, RU type) [3]
and brake/tail/license light assembly [4] and release the
wire harnesses from the rear fender A.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Route the wire harness properly (page 1-25).
TORQUE:
Brake/tail/license light mounting socket bolt:
10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)

[1]

[4]

[2]

[3]

2-10

dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Remove the reflector mounting nut [1] and reflector [2].
Remove the screw [3], nuts [4], washers [5] and socket bolts [6] and separate the tail light covers [7] and brake/
tail/license light [8].
Remove the turn signal light mounting screw [9], setting plate [10] and turn signal light [11].
Remove the mounting rubber [12].
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
• Align the tail light cover tabs with the brake/tail/license light slots.
• Align the reflector tab [13] with the left tail light cover hole [14].
TORQUE:
Reflector mounting nut:
1.7 N·m (0.2 kgf·m, 1.3 lbf·ft)
Turn signal light mounting screw:
2.5 N·m (0.3 kgf·m, 1.8 lbf·ft)

[4]/[5]

[7]

[14]
[13]
[6]

[2]

[1]

Align
[6]

[3]

[12]

[11]

[8]
[10]

[7]

[9]

MUD GUARD
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the brake/tail/license light assembly (page 210).
Remove the socket bolts [1], nuts [2], collars [3] and
mud guard [4].
If necessary, remove the brake/tail/license
assembly mounting collars [5] and grommets [6].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

[1]

[2]

light
[4]

[6]
[5]
[3]

[2]

2-11

dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

REAR FENDER A
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the following:

[7]

– Pillion seat (page 2-7)
– Mud guard (page 2-11)
Remove the clip [1], washer [2], spring [3] and pillion
seat hinge [4] from the pillion seat stay.

[1]

Remove the rubber holder [5] from the rear fender A
tabs.

[2]

Remove the socket bolts [6], pillion seat stay [7] while
holding the rear fender A [8].

[3]
[4]

Remove the rear fender A and release the wire
harnesses.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

[6]

Route the wire harness properly (page 1-25).

[8]
[5]

REAR FENDER B
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the following:
– Rear fender A (page 2-12)
– Shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA/XD) (page 2-14)
– Shelter/side cover (NC700S/SA/SD) (page 2-15)
Remove the bolt [1] and rear brake reservoir stay/reservoir [2].
Remove the socket bolts [3].
Release the tab [4] from the frame.
Release the main wire harness [5] from guides [6] and remove the rear fender B [7].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Align the rear brake reservoir stay with the frame tab.
• Route the wire harness properly (page 1-25).
[1]

[2]

[4]

[7]

Align

[3]

2-12

[5]

[6]

dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

AIR DUCT (NC700X/XA/XD)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Open the luggage box lid using the ignition key.
Remove the trim clip [1] and screw [2].
Release the air duct tabs [3] from the slits by pulling it rearward and remove the air duct [4].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
[1]

[4]

[3]

[2]

SIDE COWL (NC700S/SA/SD)
LEFT SIDE COWL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the single seat (page 2-7).
Open the luggage box lid using the ignition key.
Remove the trim clip [1] and socket bolts [2].
Remove the left side cowl [3] by releasing the side cowl tabs [4] from the right side cowl and side cover.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

[4]

[1]

[2]
[4]
[3]

2-13

dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM
RIGHT SIDE COWL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the left side cowl (page 2-13).
Remove the trim clip [1] and socket bolts [2].
Remove the right side cowl [3] by releasing the side cowl tabs [4] from the luggage box hinge bracket and side
cover.
Remove the screw [5] and center cover [6].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

[1]
[4]

[5]
[2]

[6]
[4]

[3]

SHROUD/SIDE COVER (NC700X/XA/XD)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the following:
– Seat cowl (page 2-9)
– Air duct (page 2-13)
Remove the trim clips [1], screw [2] and socket bolts [3].
Remove the shroud/side cover [4] by releasing the side cover tabs [5] from the grommet [6] and step holder [7].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
[3]

[6]

[1]

[7]

[2]

[4]

[5]

2-14

[1]

[3]

dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Remove the screws [1].
Release the shroud tabs [2] from the side cover slits [3] and remove the shroud [4] from the side cover [5].
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
[3]

[1]

[3]

[5]

[4]

[2]

[2]

SHELTER/SIDE COVER (NC700S/SA/SD)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the following:
– Seat cowl (page 2-9)
– Side cowl (page 2-13)
Right side:

Release the front wheel speed sensor 2P (Blue) connector (NC700SA/SD) [1] from the side cover.
Remove the trim clip [2] and socket bolts [3].
Remove the shelter/side cover [4] by releasing the side cover tabs [5] from the grommet [6] and step holder [7].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Route the seat lock cable [8] to the shelter mounting screws [9] upper side.
[6]

[7]

[8]

[9]
[2]
Right side:

[4]

[1]

[3]

[5]

[3]

2-15

dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Remove the screws [1].
Release the shelter tab [2] from the side cover slit [3] and remove the shelter [4] from the side cover [5].
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
[4]

[2]
[3]
[1]

[5]

CENTER COVER (NC700X/XA/XD)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the air duct (page 2-13).
Remove the trim clips [1] and socket bolts [2].
Lift the center cover [3] and remove the trim clip, screws [4], right cable under cover [5] and left cable under
cover [6]
Be careful not to damage the center cover, cable under cover and cable by lifting the center cover too far.
Disconnect the seat lock cable [7] and luggage box lid lock cable [8] from the center cover and remove it.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Route the cable properly (page 1-25).
[1]

[4]
[3]

[2]

[8]

[5]

[4]
[1]
[8]

[7]
[6]
[7]

2-16

dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Remove the screws [1] and seat lock assembly from the center cover [2].
Remove the screws [3] and center inner cover [4].
Remove the clip [5], cable guide [6] and seat lock [7].
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
Align the seat lock tab [8] with the clip and cable guide cutouts [9].
[1]

[2]

[4]

[6]

[3]

[3]

[5]

[7]

[8]
[9]

LUGGAGE BOX LID
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700X/XA/XD)
Open the luggage box lid using the ignition key.

[7]

[6]

[4]

Remove the luggage box assembly screw (long) [1] and
disconnect the band [2].
Remove the following:
–
–
–
–
–
–

Luggage box lid mounting socket bolts [3]
Luggage box lid lock plate mounting screw [4]
Luggage box lid assembly screws [5]
Inner luggage box lid [6]
Luggage box lid lock plate [7]
Luggage box lid A/B [8]

[8]

[5]
[2]
[1]
[3]

2-17

dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM
Remove the luggage box assembly screws [1].

[1]

[4]

[2]

[3]

Release the tabs [2] and remove the luggage box lids B
[3] from the luggage box lid A [4].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
TORQUE:
Luggage box lid assembly screw:
0.9 N·m (0.1 kgf·m, 0.7 lbf·ft)
Luggage box lid lock plate mounting screw:
4.0 N·m (0.4 kgf·m, 3.0 lbf·ft)
Luggage box lid mounting socket bolt:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700S/SA/SD)
Open the luggage box lid using the ignition key.
Remove the luggage box assembly screw (long) [1] and disconnect the band [2].
Remove the following:
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Luggage box lid mounting socket bolts [3]
Luggage box lid lock plate mounting screw [4]
Luggage box lid assembly screws [5]
Inner luggage box lid [6]
Luggage box lid lock plate [7]
Center luggage box lid [8]
Left luggage box lid [9]
Right luggage box lid [10]

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
TORQUE:
Luggage box lid assembly screw:
0.9 N·m (0.1 kgf·m, 0.7 lbf·ft)
Luggage box lid lock plate mounting screw:
4.0 N·m (0.4 kgf·m, 3.0 lbf·ft)
Luggage box lid mounting socket bolt:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

[10]

[8]

[9]

[7]

[6]

[4]
[5]

[3]

[3]

[2]
[1]

2-18

dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

LUGGAGE BOX LID/HINGE ASSEMBLY
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA/XD) (page
2-14).

[5]

Remove the shelter/side cover (NC700S/SA/SD) (page
2-15).
Remove the screw [1] and disconnect the band [2].

[2]

Remove the socket bolts [3] and bolts [4] and luggage
box lid/hinge assembly [5].

[4]

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
[1]

[3]

LUGGAGE BOX
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700X/XA/XD)
Remove the following:

[6]

[5]

– Shroud/side cover (page 2-14)
– Center cover (page 2-16)
Release the following:
– Turn signal/hazard relay [1] from the luggage box
tab
– Seat lock cable [2] from the luggage box cable
guides
– Option 6P connector [3] from the luggage box

[1]

Remove the bolts [4], socket bolts [5] and luggage box
[6].

[4]

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• For luggage box lid removal/installation (page 2-17).
• Route the cable properly (page 1-25).

[2]

[3]

2-19

dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700S/SA/SD)
Remove the shelter/side cover (page 2-15).
Remove the socket bolts [1], cable guide [2] and seat lock assembly [3].
Release the luggage box lid lock cable [4].
Release the following:
– Turn signal/hazard relay [5] from the luggage box tab
– Option 6P connector [6] from the luggage box
Remove the bolts [7], socket bolts [8] and luggage box [9].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• For luggage box lid removal/installation (page 2-18).
• Route the cable properly (page 1-25).

[5]

[9]

[8]

[4]

[4]

[7]

[2]
[1]
[3]
[6]

2-20

dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY (NC700X/XA/XD)
Remove the following:
– Luggage box lid (page 2-17)
– Maintenance lid (page 21-6)
Remove the screw [1] and band [2].
Remove the trim clips [3], owners manual lid [4] and luggage box lid hinge cover [5].
Remove the socket bolts [6] and luggage box lid catch [7].
Remove the socket bolts and luggage box lid hinge assembly.
Remove the luggage box lid hinge nut [8], washers [9], hinge bolt [10] and hinge [11] from the hinge bracket
[12].
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
• Align the luggage box lid catch holes [13] with the luggage box tabs [14].
• Apply grease to the luggage box lid catch sliding area.
TORQUE:
Luggage box lid hinge nut:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

[7]

[6]
[3]
[1]
[2]

[4]

[13]
[9]
[11]
[5]
[8]

[14]

[3]

[6]

[9]
[10]
[12]

2-21

dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY (NC700S/SA/SD)
Remove the following:
– Luggage box lid (page 2-18)
– Maintenance lid (page 21-6)
Remove the screw [1] and band [2].
Remove the trim clips [3] and owners manual lid [4].
Remove the socket bolts [5] and luggage box lid catch [6].
Remove the socket bolts and luggage box lid hinge assembly.
Remove the luggage box lid hinge nut [7], washers [8], hinge bolt [9] and hinge [10] from the hinge bracket [11].
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
• Align the luggage box lid catch hole [12] with the luggage box tab [13].
• Align the hinge bracket holes [14] with the luggage box tabs [15].
• Apply grease to the luggage box lid catch sliding area.
TORQUE:
Luggage box lid hinge nut:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

[6]

[5]

[3]
[1]

[4]

[2]

[12]
[5]

[13]
[10]
[7]
[8]
[15]
[9]

2-22

[8]

[14]

[11]

dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

WINDSCREEN
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700X/XA/XD)
Remove the socket bolts [1], washers [2] and windscreen [3].
Remove the special nuts [4] and cushion rubbers [5] if necessary.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
If you wish the windscreen position upward, you can choose high position.
– High position: Install the special nuts to the upper holes.
– Low position: Install the special nuts to the lower holes.
[3]

[4]

[5]

[2]
[1]

Low position High position

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700S/SA/SD)
Remove the socket bolts [1], plastic washers [2], rubbers [3] and windscreen [4].
Remove the special nuts [5] if necessary.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
[4]
[1]

[2]

[5]

[3]

2-23

dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

FRONT SIDE COWL (NC700X/XA/XD)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the shroud/side cover (page 2-14).
Remove the trim clips [1], socket bolt [2] and bolts [3].
Disconnect the front turn signal light 3P connector [4] and remove the front side cowl [5].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Route the wire harness properly (page 1-25).
[1]

[2]
[4]

[5]

[3]

METER STAY (NC700X/XA/XD)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the following:

[2]

[3]

[1]

[2]

– Windscreen (page 2-23)
– Front side cowl (page 2-24)
Disconnect the
connector [1].

combination

meter

16P

(Gray)

Remove the bolts [2] and meter stay [3].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• For combination meter removal/installation (page
22-9).
• For digital clock setting procedure (page 22-14).

2-24

dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

FRONT UNDER COVER (NC700X/XA/
XD)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the trim clips [1] and screw [2].
Release the tabs [3] and remove the front under cover
[4].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

[1]

[3]
[4]

[2]

INNER UPPER COVER (NC700X/XA/XD)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the front side cowl (page 2-24).

[1]

Remove the trim clips [1].
Release the tabs [2] and remove the inner upper cover
[3].

[2]
[1]

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

[3]

2-25

dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

HEADLIGHT/FRONT CENTER COWL (NC700X/XA/XD)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the following:
– Meter stay (page 2-24)
– Front under cover (page 2-25)
– Inner upper cover (page 2-25)
Release the front turn signal light 3P connectors [1] from the wire bands [2].
Disconnect the headlight 3P (Black) connector [3] and front sub harness 6P (Brown) connector [4].
Remove the bolts [5].
Release the headlight boss [6] from the frame grommet [7] and remove the front center cowl/headlight [8].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Route the wire harness properly (page 1-25).
[5]

[2]

[3]

[1]

[2]

[8]
[5]

[5]
[4]

[6]

[5]

[7]

DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Remove the bolts [1] and front center cowl [2] from the headlight unit [3].
Remove the socket bolts [4] and headlight stay [5] from the headlight unit.
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
[1]

[5]
[4]

[3]

[2]
[1]

2-26

dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

HEADLIGHT/HEADLIGHT STAY
(NC700S/SA/SD)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the socket bolts [1] and collars [2].

[1]

[2]

Release the headlight stay tabs [3] from the grommet
[4].

[6]

[5]

Disconnect the headlight 3P (Black) connector [5], front
sub harness 6P (Brown) connector [6] and remove the
headlight/headlight stay [7].

[4]

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Route the wire harness and hoses properly (page 125).

[3]

[7]

[2]

[1]

DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Remove the windscreen (page 2-23).

[1]

[6]

[2]

Disconnect the following:
– Front left turn signal light 3P (Orange) connector [1]
– Front right turn signal light 3P (Blue) connector [2]
Remove the bolts [3], washers [4] and headlight stays
[5] from the headlight unit [6].
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.

[3]/[4]

[5]

[5]

HEADLIGHT COVER (NC700S/SA/SD)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the headlight/headlight stay (page 2-27).

[7]

[8]

[9]

[11]

Remove the following:
–
–
–
–
–
–

Bolt [1]
Main wire harness clamp [2]
Bolts [3]
Brake hose clamp (NC700S) [4]
Washer (NC700SA/SD) [5]
Wire band (NC700SD) [6]

[10]

Release the following:
– Front sub harness 6P (Brown) connector [7]
– Right handlebar switch 8P (Blue) connector [8]
– Ignition switch 2P (Brown) connector/Left handlebar
switch 10P (Gray) connector [9]
– Immobilizer receiver 4P (Black) connector [10]

[2]

[1]

[3]

[3]

NC700SD:

[5]

Remove the headlight cover [11].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Route the wire harness and hoses properly (page 125).

[6]

NC700S:

[4]

2-27

dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

FRONT FENDER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the bolts [1], hose guide [2], socket bolts [3], washers [4] and front fender [5] from the fork legs.
Remove the flange collars (E, ED, F, KO, RU type) [6], reflector (U type) [7], grommets [8], front fender brace
[9] and collars [10] from the front fender.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Route the wire harness and hoses properly (page 1-25).
E, ED, F, KO, RU type:
[3]

[4]
[5]
[4]
[3]

[2]
[9]

[8]

[6]

[8]
[3]

U type:

[10]
[1]

[7]

LOWER COWL
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700X/
XA/S/SA)
Remove the socket bolts [1].

[3]

[1]

Release the bosses [2] from the grommets [3] and
remove the lower cowl [4].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

[1]
[2]

2-28

[4]

dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700XD/
SD)
Remove the socket bolts [1].

[3]

Release the bosses [2] from the grommets [3] and
remove the lower cowl [4].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

[1]

[2]

[4]

DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Remove the screws [1].

[1]

[3]

[2]

[8]

[5]

Release the tabs [2] from the slits [3] and separate the
left lower cowl [4], right lower cowl [5] and center lower
cowl [6].
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.

[6]

Align the left and right lower cowl holes [7] with center
lower cowl bosses [8].

[7]

[4]

[1]

LEFT REAR COVER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700X/
XA/S/SA)
Remove the gearshift arm pinch bolt [1] and gearshift
arm [2].
[3]

Remove the bolts [3] and left rear cover [4].
Remove the drive chain guide plate [5] and collar [6]
from the left rear cover.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Align the gearshift arm slit with the punch mark.
• Replace the gearshift arm pinch bolt with a new one.
TORQUE:
Gearshift arm pinch bolt:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

[5]
Align

[6]

[4]

[1]

[2]

2-29

dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700XD/
SD)
Remove the lower cowl (page 2-29).
Remove the bolts [1] and left rear cover [2].
Remove the drive chain guide plate [3] from the left rear
cover.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

[3]

[2]

[1]

RIGHT ENGINE SIDE COVER
(NC700XD/SD)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the lower cowl (page 2-29).

[2]

Remove the socket bolts [1] and right engine side cover
[2].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

[1]

GUARD PIPE (NC700XD/SD)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the lower cowl (page 2-29).

[1]

[3]

[8]

Release the shift pedal angle sensor 3P (Black)
connector (Optional) [1] from the guard pipe [2] and
clamp [3].
Remove the bolts [4], nuts [5] and guard pipe.
Release the fuel tank drain hose B [6] and battery box
drain hose [7].
If necessary, remove the socket bolts [8] and motor
guard [9].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
[4]

2-30

[2]

[7]

[6]

[4]/[5]

[9]

dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

BATTERY BOX
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the following:
– Battery (page 21-6)
– Luggage box (page 2-19)
Remove the bolts [1] and ignition coil stay [2] from the battery box [3].
Release the following:
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Fuse box [4]
Starter relay switch [5]
CKP sensor harness [6]
Battery negative (–) cable [7]
Main wire harness [8]
Junction B 14P (Orange) connector [9]
Junction G 14P (Orange) connector [10]
DLC [11]
Battery positive (+) cable [12]

Remove the socket bolts [13] and battery box while releasing the grommets [14] from the frame bosses [15].
Disconnect the battery box drain hose [16].
Remove the grommet from the battery box.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Route the cable, wire harness and hoses properly (page 1-25).

[6]

[9]

[10]

[11]
[7]

[12]

[1]
[5]
[8]
[13]

[2]

[4]
[16]

[3]

[15]
[14]

2-31

dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM

CENTER CROSS PLATE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the luggage box (page 2-19).
Disconnect the sidestand switch 3P (Green) connector [1] and remove it from the ECM box [2].
Release the fuel pump 1P (Black) connector [3] from the ECM box.
Remove the bolts [4] and ECM box from the center cross plate [5].
Disconnect the bank angle sensor 2P (Black) connector [6].
Release the fuel tank drain hose A [7] from the ECM box.
Remove the wire band (NC700S/SA/SD) [8] and seat lock cable (NC700S/SA/SD) [9] from the center cross
plate.
Remove the ABS modulator stay mounting bolts [10] and collars [11].
Remove the bolts [12] and ground terminals [13].
Remove the center cross plate to the left.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Route the wire harness and hoses properly (page 1-25).
[5]

[12]

NC700S/SA/SD:
[6]

[9]

[4]
[12]
[13]
[8]

[7]

[10]/[11]

[2]

[1]

[3]

[4]

EXHAUST PIPE/MUFFLER
MUFFLER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Loosen the muffler band bolt [1].

[1]

2-32

dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM
Remove the muffler mounting nut [1], bolt [2] and
washer [3].

[1]

Remove the muffler [4] and gasket [5].

[5]

[4]

[2]/[3]

Remove the muffler cover socket bolt.
Remove the muffler cover by releasing its slits from the muffler bosses.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Replace the gasket with a new one.
• Align the muffler band tab with the muffler upper right slit.
TORQUE:
Muffler cover socket bolt:
10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)
Muffler band bolt:
17.5 N·m (1.8 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)

MUFFLER MOUNTING NUT

WASHER

MUFFLER MOUNTING BOLT
GASKET

TAB
RIGHT
10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)
17.5 N·m (1.8 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)

2-33

dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM
EXHAUST PIPE
REMOVAL
Remove the lower cowl (page 2-28).
Disconnect the O2 sensor 1P (Black) connector [1].
Release the O2 sensor wire from the clamp [2] and
radiator reserve tank guide [3].

[1]

Remove the bolt [1] and disconnect the ground wire [2].

[2]

[7]

[1]/[2]

[3]
[4]

Loosen the exhaust pipe mounting nut [3].
Remove the exhaust pipe joint nuts [4].
Remove the exhaust pipe mounting nut, bolt [5],
washers [6] and exhaust pipe [7].
Remove the exhaust pipe gasket [8].

[5]/[6]

[3]

[8]

INSTALLATION
Install a new exhaust pipe gasket [1] to the exhaust port
of the cylinder head.

[2]

Install the exhaust pipe and exhaust pipe joint nuts [2]
but do not tighten yet.

[1]

Install the exhaust pipe mounting bolt [1], washers [2]
and nut [3] but do not tighten yet.

[4]/[5]

Install the ground wire [4] and bolt [5] but do not tighten
yet.
Route the ground wire properly (page 1-25).

[1]/[2]/[3]

2-34

dummyhead

FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM
Install the muffler, then loosely install the muffler
mounting bolt, washer, nut and band bolt (page 2-32).

[1]

Tighten the exhaust pipe joint nuts [1] to the specified
torque in numerical order by stamped number on the
exhaust pipe joint [2] in 2 or 3 steps.
TORQUE: 28 N·m (2.9 kgf·m, 21 lbf·ft)

[2]

Tighten the exhaust pipe mounting nut [1] securely.

[2]

Tighten the ground wire mounting bolt [2] securely.

[1]

Install the O2 sensor wire to the clamp [1] and radiator
reserve tank guide [2].
Route the O2 sensor wire properly (page 1-25).
Connect the O2 sensor 1P (Black) connector [3].
Tighten the muffler mounting nut and band bolt securely
(page 2-32).
Install the lower cowl (page 2-28).

[3]

[1]

[2]

STUD BOLT REPLACEMENT
Remove the exhaust pipe/muffler (page 2-32).
Thread two nuts onto the stud and tighten them
together, and use a wrench on them to turn the stud bolt
out.

30.0 – 31.0 mm
(1.18 – 1.22 in)

Install new stud bolts into the cylinder head as shown.
After installing the stud bolts, check that the length from
the bolt head to the cylinder head surface is within
specification.
Install the exhaust pipe/muffler (page 2-32).

2-35

dummyhead

MEMO

dummytext

3. MAINTENANCE

3

SERVICE INFORMATION ·····························3-2

DRIVE CHAIN ············································· 3-16

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE························3-3

DRIVE CHAIN SLIDER ······························· 3-20

FUEL LINE·····················································3-5

BRAKE FLUID ············································ 3-21

THROTTLE OPERATION······························3-5

BRAKE PADS WEAR ································· 3-22

AIR CLEANER···············································3-7

BRAKE SYSTEM ········································ 3-23

CRANKCASE BREATHER ···························3-8

BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH ····························· 3-24

SPARK PLUG················································3-8

BRAKE LOCK OPERATION
(NC700XD/SD) ············································ 3-24

VALVE CLEARANCE··································3-10
HEADLIGHT AIM ········································ 3-25
ENGINE OIL ················································3-12
CLUTCH SYSTEM (NC700X/XA/S/SA) ······ 3-26
ENGINE OIL FILTER···································3-13
SIDESTAND ················································ 3-27
CLUTCH OIL FILTER (NC700XD/SD) ········3-14
SUSPENSION ············································· 3-28
ENGINE IDLE SPEED ·································3-15
NUTS, BOLTS, FASTENERS ····················· 3-29
RADIATOR COOLANT ·······························3-15
WHEELS/TIRES ·········································· 3-29
COOLING SYSTEM·····································3-16
STEERING HEAD BEARINGS ··················· 3-30

3-1

dummyhead

MAINTENANCE

SERVICE INFORMATION
MAINTENANCE

GENERAL
• Place the motorcycle on level surface before starting any work.
• Gasoline is extremely flammable and is explosive under certain conditions.
• Work in a well ventilated area. Smoking or allowing flames or sparks in the work area or where the gasoline is stored can cause
a fire or explosion.
• The exhaust contains poisonous carbon monoxide gas that may cause loss of consciousness and may lead to death. Run the
engine in an open area or with an exhaust evacuation system in an enclosed area.

TORQUE VALUES

Air cleaner housing cover screw
Spark plug
Valve adjusting screw lock nut

6
2
8

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
5
14
7

Camshaft maintenance cap
Timing hole cap
Crankshaft hole cap
Engine oil drain bolt
Engine oil filter cartridge
Oil filter boss

1
1
1
1
1
1

36
14
30
12
20
20

4.0 (0.4, 3.0)
10 (1.0, 7)
15 (1.5, 11)
30 (3.1, 22)
26 (2.7, 19)
–

Rear axle nut
Drive chain adjuster lock nut
Drive sprocket bolt
Driven sprocket nut
Master cylinder reservoir cover
screw
Rear brake reservoir mounting bolt
Rear master cylinder push rod lock
nut
Parking brake adjuster bolt lock
nut (NC700XD/SD)
Sidestand pivot bolt

1
2
1
5
4

18
8
10
12
4

98 (10.0, 72)
21 (2.1, 15)
54 (5.5, 40)
108 (11.0, 80)
1.5 (0.2, 1.1)

1
1

6
8

10 (1.0, 7)
17 (1.7, 13)

1

8

17 (1.7, 13)

1

10

–

Sidestand pivot nut
Sidestand switch bolt

1
1

10
6

39 (4.0, 29)
10 (1.0, 7)

ITEM

3-2

Q'TY

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
1.1 (0.1, 0.8)
22 (2.2, 16)
14 (1.4, 10)

REMARKS

Apply engine oil to the threads and
seating surface.
See page 3-12
Apply grease to the threads.
Apply grease to the threads.
Apply engine oil to the threads.
See page 3-14
Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) from tip
U-nut

U-nut

See page 3-27
Apply grease to the sliding surface.
U-nut
ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.

dummyhead

MAINTENANCE

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
NC700X/XA/S/SA
Perform the Pre-ride inspection in the Owner's Manual at each scheduled maintenance period.
I: Inspect and Clean, Adjust, Lubricate or Replace if necessary. C: Clean. R: Replace. A: Adjust. L: Lubricate.
The following items require some mechanical knowledge. Certain items (particularly those marked * and **) may require more
technical information and tools. Consult a dealer.

ITEMS
* FUEL LINE
* THROTTLE OPERATION
* AIR CLEANER
CRANKCASE BREATHER
* SPARK PLUG
* VALVE CLEARANCE
ENGINE OIL
ENGINE OIL FILTER
* ENGINE IDLE SPEED
RADIATOR COOLANT
* COOLING SYSTEM
DRIVE CHAIN

*
*
**
**

DRIVE CHAIN SLIDER
BRAKE FLUID
BRAKE PADS WEAR
BRAKE SYSTEM
BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH
HEADLIGHT AIM
CLUTCH SYSTEM
SIDESTAND
SUSPENSION
NUTS, BOLTS, FASTENERS
WHEELS/TIRES
STEERING HEAD BEARINGS

FREQUENCY ODOMETER READING (NOTE 1)
x 1,000 km 1 12 24 36 48
NOTE
x 1,000 mi 0.6 8 16 24 32
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
NOTE 2
R
R
NOTE 3
C C C C
I
R
I
I
I
I
R R R R R
R R R R R
I
I
I
I
I
NOTE 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EVERY 1,000 km
(600 mi) I, L
I
I
I
I
NOTE 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

ANNUAL
CHECK

REGULAR REFER TO
REPLACE
PAGE

I
I
C

R
R
I
I
I

3 YEARS

3-5
3-5
3-7
3-8
3-8
3-10
3-12
3-13
3-15
3-15
3-16
3-16

I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

2 YEARS

3-20
3-21
3-22
3-23
3-24
3-25
3-26
3-27
3-28
3-29
3-29
3-30

* Should be serviced by a dealer, unless the owner has proper tools and service data and is mechanically qualified.
** In the interest of safety, we recommend these items be serviced only by a dealer.
Honda recommends that a dealer should road test your motorcycle after each periodic maintenance is carried out.
NOTES:
1.
2.
3.
4.

At higher odometer readings, repeat at the frequency interval established here.
Service more frequently when riding in unusually wet or dusty areas.
Service more frequently when riding in rain or at full throttle.
Replacement requires mechanical skill.

3-3

dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
NC700XD/SD
Perform the Pre-ride inspection in the Owner's Manual at each scheduled maintenance period.
I: Inspect and Clean, Adjust, Lubricate or Replace if necessary. C: Clean. R: Replace. A: Adjust. L: Lubricate.
The following items require some mechanical knowledge. Certain items (particularly those marked * and **) may require more
technical information and tools. Consult a dealer.

ITEMS
* FUEL LINE
* THROTTLE OPERATION
* AIR CLEANER
CRANKCASE BREATHER
* SPARK PLUG
* VALVE CLEARANCE
ENGINE OIL
ENGINE OIL FILTER
CLUTCH OIL FILTER
* ENGINE IDLE SPEED
RADIATOR COOLANT
* COOLING SYSTEM
DRIVE CHAIN

*

*
*
**
**

DRIVE CHAIN SLIDER
BRAKE FLUID
BRAKE PADS WEAR
BRAKE SYSTEM
BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH
BRAKE LOCK OPERATION
HEADLIGHT AIM
SIDESTAND
SUSPENSION
NUTS, BOLTS, FASTENERS
WHEELS/TIRES
STEERING HEAD BEARINGS

FREQUENCY ODOMETER READING (NOTE 1)
x 1,000 km 1 12 24 36 48
NOTE
x 1,000 mi 0.6 8 16 24 32
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
NOTE 2
R
R
NOTE 3
C C C C
I
R
I
I
I
I
R R R R R
R R R R R
R
R
R
I
I
I
I
I
NOTE 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
EVERY 1,000 km
(600 mi) I, L
I
I
I
I
NOTE 4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I

ANNUAL
CHECK

REGULAR REFER TO
REPLACE
PAGE

I
I
C

R
R
I
I
I

3 YEARS

3-16
I
I
I
I

2 YEARS

I
I
I
I
I
I

* Should be serviced by a dealer, unless the owner has proper tools and service data and is mechanically qualified.
** In the interest of safety, we recommend these items be serviced only by a dealer.
Honda recommends that a dealer should road test your motorcycle after each periodic maintenance is carried out.
NOTES:
1.
2.
3.
4.

At higher odometer readings, repeat at the frequency interval established here.
Service more frequently when riding in unusually wet or dusty areas.
Service more frequently when riding in rain or at full throttle.
Replacement requires mechanical skill.

3-4

3-5
3-5
3-7
3-8
3-8
3-10
3-12
3-13
3-14
3-15
3-15
3-16

3-20
3-21
3-22
3-23
3-24
3-24
3-25
3-27
3-28
3-29
3-29
3-30

dummyhead

MAINTENANCE

FUEL LINE
INSPECTION
Check the quick connect fitting [1] for looseness.

[1]

Check the fuel feed hose [2] for deterioration, damage
or leakage.
Check the quick connect fittings for dirt, and clean if
necessary.
Replace the fuel pump packing if necessary (page 713).

[2]

THROTTLE OPERATION
Check for any deterioration or damage to the throttle
cable.
Check the throttle grip for smooth operation.
Check that the throttle opens and automatically closes
in all steering positions.

2 – 6 mm (1/16 – 1/4 in)

If the throttle grip does not return properly, lubricate the
throttle cable, and overhaul and lubricate the throttle
grip housing.
If the throttle grip still do not return properly, replace the
throttle cable.
With the engine idling, turn the handlebar all the way to
the right and left to ensure that the idle speed does not
change.
If idle speed increases, check the throttle grip freeplay
and throttle cable connection.
Measure the throttle grip freeplay at the throttle grip
flange.
FREEPLAY: 2 – 6 mm (1/16 – 1/4 in)

3-5

dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
Throttle grip freeplay can be adjusted at either end of
the throttle cable.

NC700X/XA/S/SA:

[3]

Minor adjustment is made with the upper adjuster at
throttle housing adjuster.
Release the dust cover (NC700XD/SD) [1].
Loosen the lock nut [2] and turning the adjuster [3].
Tighten the lock nut while holding the adjuster and
reposition the dust cover properly on the adjuster.
Recheck the throttle operation.

[2]
NC700XD/SD:

[2]

Major adjustment is made with the lower adjuster nut at
the throttle body.
Loosen the lock nut [1] and turn the adjuster nut [2].
Tighten the lock nut while holding the adjuster nut.
Recheck the throttle operation.

3-6

[1]

[3]

[1]
[2]

dummyhead

MAINTENANCE

AIR CLEANER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700X/
XA/XD)
Remove the center cover but do not disconnect the seat
lock cable and luggage box lid lock cable (page 2-16).

[1]

[2]

[3]

Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).
Disconnect the IAT sensor 2P (Black) connector [1].
Remove the air cleaner housing cover screws [2] and
air cleaner housing cover [3].

[6]

Release the air cleaner housing cover tabs [4] and
remove the air cleaner element [5] from the air cleaner
housing cover.
Inspect the air cleaner element in accordance with the
maintenance schedule (page 3-3) or any time it is
excessively dirt or damaged.
Install the air cleaner element in the reverse order of
removal.

[4]
[5]

Check that the condition of the packings [6], replace
them if necessary.
TORQUE:
Air cleaner housing cover screw:
1.1 N·m (0.1 kgf·m, 0.8 lbf·ft)

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700S/
SA/SD)
Remove the following:

[1]

[2]

– Side cowl (page 2-13)
– Maintenance lid (page 21-6)
Remove the air cleaner housing cover screws [1].
Remove the air cleaner housing cover [2] to the left side
and disconnect the IAT sensor 2P (Black) connector [3].
[6]

Release the air cleaner housing cover tabs [4] and
remove the air cleaner element [5] from the air cleaner
housing cover.
Inspect the air cleaner element in accordance with the
maintenance schedule (page 3-3) or any time it is
excessively dirt or damaged.

[3]
[4]

Install the air cleaner element in the reverse order of
removal.
Check that the condition of the packings [6], replace
them if necessary.

[5]

TORQUE:
Air cleaner housing cover screw:
1.1 N·m (0.1 kgf·m, 0.8 lbf·ft)

3-7

dummyhead

MAINTENANCE

CRANKCASE BREATHER
Service more
frequently when
ridden in rain, at full
throttle, or after the
motorcycle is
washed or
overturned.

Check the crankcase breather hose [1] for deterioration,
damage or loose connection. Make sure that the hoses
are not kinked, pinched or cracked.
Replace the crankcase breather hose if necessary.

[1]
Service if the
deposits level can
be seen in the
transparent section
of the air cleaner
housing drain hose.

Check the air cleaner housing drain hose [1].
If necessary, remove the drain plug [2] from the air
cleaner housing drain hose and drain the deposits into
a suitable container.
Reinstall the drain plug securely.

[2]

[1]

SPARK PLUG
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the lower cowl (page 2-28).

[1]

Disconnect the spark plug caps [1].

Clean around the
spark plug base
with compressed air
before removing the
spark plug, and be
sure that no debris
is allowed to enter
the combustion
chamber.

Remove the spark plug [1] using the equipped spark
plug wrench [2].

[2]

Inspect or replace the spark plug as described in the
maintenance schedule (page 3-3).
Install and hand tighten the spark plug to the cylinder
head, then tighten the spark plug to the specified torque
using the equipped spark plug wrench.
TORQUE: 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
Connect the spark plug caps securely.
Install the lower cowl (page 2-28).
[1]

3-8

dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
INSPECTION
Check the following and replace
(recommended spark plug: page 3-9)

if

necessary

[2]

[3]

• Insulator [1] for damage
• Center electrode [2] and side electrode [3] for wear
• Burning condition, coloration
This motorcycle's
spark plug is
equipped with an
iridium center
electrode. Replace
the spark plug if the
electrodes are
contaminated.

If the electrodes are contaminated with accumulated
objects or dirt, replace the spark plug.

Always use
specified spark
plugs on this
motorcycle.

Replace the plug if the center electrode [1] is rounded
as shown in the illustration.

To prevent
damaging the
iridium center
electrode, use a
wire type feeler
gauge to check the
spark plug gap.

Check the spark plug gap between the center and side
electrodes with a wire type feeler gauge [1].

Do not adjust the
spark plug gap. If
the gap is out of
specification,
replace with a new
one.

[1]

[1]

SPECIFIED SPARK PLUG:
NGK: IFR6G-11K

[1]

Make sure that the Φ 1.0 mm (0.04 in) plug gauge does
not insert between the gap.

If the gauge can be inserted into the gap, replace the
plug with a new one.

3-9

dummyhead

MAINTENANCE

VALVE CLEARANCE
INSPECTION
• Inspect and adjust the valve clearance while the
engine is cold (below 35°C/95°F).
• After the valve clearance inspection, check the
engine idle speed (page 3-15).
• Inspection and adjustment of the valve clearance
can be serviced with the engine installed in the
frame.
Remove the cylinder head cover (page 10-5).

[2]

Remove the timing hole cap [1], crankshaft hole cap [2]
and O-rings [3].

[1]

Remove the camshaft maintenance cap [1] and O-ring
[2].

[3]

[1]

[2]
No.1 Cylinder:

Rotate the crankshaft counterclockwise and align the
"1T" mark [1] on the flywheel with the index notch [2] on
the alternator cover.

No.2 Cylinder:

Rotate the crankshaft counterclockwise and align the
"2T" mark [3] on the flywheel with the index notch on
the alternator cover.

No.1 CYLINDER:

[1]

3-10

No.2 CYLINDER:

[2]

[3]

[2]

dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
No.1 Cylinder:

Make sure that the "1" mark [1] on the cam sprocket is
aligned with the upper cylinder head index line [2].

No.2 Cylinder:

Make sure that the "2" mark [3] on the cam sprocket is
aligned with the upper cylinder head index line.

No.1 CYLINDER:

[2]

No.2 CYLINDER:

[1]

[2]

[3]

If the "1" mark or "2" mark is facing lower cylinder head
index line [4], turn the crankshaft counterclockwise one
full turn (360°) and realign the "1T" mark or "2T" mark
with the index notch.

[4]

Check the valve clearance by inserting a feeler gauge
[1] between the valve adjusting screw and valve stem.
VALVE CLEARANCE:
IN: 0.17 ± 0.02 mm (0.007 ± 0.001 in)
EX: 0.28 ± 0.02 mm (0.011 ± 0.001 in)

[1]

ADJUSTMENT
Loosen the lock nut [1] and apply engine oil to the
adjusting screw threads and seating surface.

[2]

[3]

Adjust by turning the adjusting screw [2] until there is a
slight drag on the feeler gauge [3].
Hold the adjusting screw and tighten the lock nut to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 14 N·m (1.4 kgf·m, 10 lbf·ft)
After tightening the lock nut, recheck the valve
clearance.

[1]

Apply engine oil to a new O-ring [1] and install it to the
camshaft maintenance cap [2].

[2]

Temporarily Install the camshaft maintenance cap to
the cylinder head.
If the engine is removed from the frame, tighten the
camshaft maintenance cap to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 4.0 N·m (0.4 kgf·m, 3.0 lbf·ft)

[1]

3-11

dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
If the engine is installed on the frame, insert a feeler
gauge (0.1 mm) [1] between the camshaft maintenance
cap and cylinder head.

[1]

Tighten the camshaft maintenance cap securely.
Remove the feeler gauge.
Further tighten the camshaft maintenance cap at 30°.
One concave area [2] size is equivalent with 30°.

[2]

Install the cylinder head cover (page 10-5).
Apply engine oil to new O-rings [1] and install them to
each hole cap.

[3]
[2]

Apply grease to the timing hole cap [2] and crankshaft
hole cap [3] threads.
Install and tighten the timing hole cap and crankshaft
hole cap to the specified torque.
TORQUE:
Timing hole cap:
10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)
Crankshaft hole cap:
15 N·m (1.5 kgf·m, 11 lbf·ft)

[1]

ENGINE OIL
OIL LEVEL INSPECTION
Hold the motorcycle in an upright position.

[1]

Start the engine and let it idle for 3 – 5 minutes.
Stop the engine and wait 2 – 3 minutes.
Remove the oil filler cap/dipstick [1] and wipe it clean.
Reinstall the oil filler cap/dipstick, but do not screw it.
Remove the oil filler cap/dipstick and check the oil level.
If the level is below or near the lower level [2] on the
dipstick, fill the recommended engine oil to the upper
level [3].
Check that the O-ring [4] is in good condition, replace it
if necessary.
Apply engine oil to the O-ring.
Install the oil filler cap/dipstick.
Other viscosities
shown in the chart
may be used when
the average
temperature in your
riding area is within
the indicated range.

3-12

RECOMMENDED ENGINE OIL:
Honda "4-stroke motorcycle oil" or an equivalent
API classification: SG or higher (except oils
labeled as energy conserving on the circular API
service label)
Viscosity: SAE 10W-30
JASO T 903 standard: MA

[3]
[4]

[2]

dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
ENGINE OIL CHANGE
Warm up the engine.

[1]

Stop the engine and remove the oil filler cap/dipstick [1].

Place an oil pan under the engine to catch the engine
oil, then remove the engine oil drain bolt [1]/sealing
washer [2].
Drain the engine oil completely.
Install a new sealing washer onto the drain bolt.
Apply engine oil to the drain bolt threads and seating
surface.
Install and tighten the drain bolt/sealing washer to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 30 N·m (3.1 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)
[1]/[2]

Fill the engine with the recommended engine oil (page
3-12).

[1]

ENGINE OIL CAPACITY:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
3.1 liters (3.3 US qt, 2.7 Imp qt) at draining
3.4 liters (3.6 US qt, 3.0 Imp qt) at oil filter change
3.7 liters (3.9 US qt, 3.3 Imp qt) at disassembly
NC700XD/SD:
3.2 liters (3.4 US qt, 2.8 Imp qt) at draining
3.4 liters (3.6 US qt, 3.0 Imp qt) at oil filter change
4.1 liters (4.3 US qt, 3.6 Imp qt) at disassembly
Install the oil filler cap/dipstick [1].
Check the engine oil level (page 3-12).
Make sure there are no oil leaks.

ENGINE OIL FILTER
Drain the engine oil (page 3-13).
Remove the oil filter cartridge [1] using the special tool.
TOOL:
Oil Filter Wrench [2]

07HAA-PJ70101

[2]

[1]

3-13

dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
Check that the oil filter boss protrusion from the
crankcase is specified length as shown.
SPECIFIED LENGTH: 16.5 ± 0.5 mm (0.65 ± 0.02 in)
If the oil filter boss is removed, apply locking agent to
the oil filter boss threads (page 3-2).

16.5 ± 0.5 mm
(0.65 ± 0.02 in)

Apply engine oil to a new oil filter cartridge threads and
O-ring.
Install and tighten the oil filter cartridge [1] to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 26 N·m (2.7 kgf·m, 19 lbf·ft)
Fill the engine with the recommended engine oil and
check that there are no oil leaks (page 3-12).

[1]

CLUTCH OIL FILTER (NC700XD/SD)
Replace the engine oil filter when the clutch oil filter is
replaced.
Drain the engine oil (page 3-13).
Remove the lower cowl (page 2-29).
Remove the following:
–
–
–
–
–

Bolts [1]
Clutch oil filter cover [2]
Spring [3]
Clutch oil filter [4]
O-ring [5]

Install a new clutch oil fitter with the "OUTSIDE" mark
[6] facing out.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Replace the O-ring with a new one.
• Apply engine oil to a new O-ring.

[6]

Fill the engine with the recommended engine oil and
check that there are no oil leaks (page 3-12).

[4]
[1]

[3]

[5]
[2]

3-14

dummyhead

MAINTENANCE

ENGINE IDLE SPEED
• Inspect the idle speed after all other engine
maintenance items have been performed and are
within specifications.
• Before checking the idle speed, inspect the following
items.
– No DTC and MIL blinking
– Spark plug condition (page 3-8)
– Air cleaner element condition (page 3-7)
• The engine must be warm for accurate idle speed
inspection.
• This system eliminates the need for manual idle
speed adjustment compared to previous designs.
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " ".
Start the engine and let it idle.
Check the idle speed.
IDLE SPEED: 1,200 ± 100 min-1 (rpm)
If the idle speed is out of the specification, check the
following:
– Intake air leak or engine top-end problem (page 104)
– Throttle operation and freeplay (page 3-5)
– IACV operation (page 7-22)

RADIATOR COOLANT
Check the coolant level of the reserve tank with the
engine running at normal operating temperature.
The level should be between the "UPPER" and
"LOWER" level lines with the motorcycle in an upright
position.
If necessary, add recommended coolant.
RECOMMENDED ANTIFREEZE:
High quality ethylene glycol antifreeze containing
silicate-free corrosion inhibitors

Remove the lower cowl (page 2-28).

[2]

[1]

Remove the reserve tank cap [1] and add the coolant to
the "UPPER" level line [2] with a 1:1 mixture of distilled
water and antifreeze (coolant preparation: page 8-6).
Reinstall the reserve tank cap.
Check to see if there are any coolant leaks when the
coolant level decreases very rapidly.
If the reserve tank becomes completely empty, there is
a possibility of air getting into the cooling system.
Be sure to remove any air from the cooling system
(page 8-6).

3-15

dummyhead

MAINTENANCE

COOLING SYSTEM
Check the radiator air passages for clogging or
damage.
Straighten bent fins, and remove insects, mud or other
obstructions with compressed air or low water pressure.
Replace the radiator if the air flow is restricted over
more than 20 % of the radiating surface.

Inspect the water hoses for cracks or deterioration, and
replace them if necessary.
Check the tightness of all water hose band screws
(page 8-10).

DRIVE CHAIN
DRIVE CHAIN SLACK INSPECTION
Never inspect and
adjust the drive
chain while the
engine is running.

Turn the ignition switch OFF, support the motorcycle on
its sidestand and shift the transmission into neutral.
Check the slack in the drive chain lower run midway
between the sprockets.
DRIVE CHAIN SLACK:
NC700X/XA/XD:
30 – 40 mm (1.2 – 1.6 in)
NC700S/SA/SD:
25 – 35 mm (1.0 – 1.4 in)

• NC700X/XA/XD: Excessive chain slack, 60 mm (2.4
in) or more, may damage the frame.
• NC700S/SA/SD: Excessive chain slack, 50 mm (2.0
in) or more, may damage the frame.

3-16

NC700X/XA/XD: 30 – 40 mm (1.2 – 1.6 in)
NC700S/SA/SD: 25 – 35 mm (1.0 – 1.4 in)

dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
ADJUSTMENT
Loosen the rear axle nut [1].

[5]

[1]

[2]

Loosen the lock nuts [2] and turn the adjusting nuts [3]
until the correct drive chain slack is obtained.
Make sure the index lines [4] on both adjusting plates
are aligned with the rear end of the axle slots [5] in the
swingarm.
Tighten the axle nut to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 98 N·m (10.0 kgf·m, 72 lbf·ft)
Hold the adjusting nuts and tighten the lock nuts to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 21 N·m (2.1 kgf·m, 15 lbf·ft)

[4]

[3]

Recheck the drive chain slack and free wheel rotation.
Check the drive chain wear indicator label attached on
the left swingarm.
If the drive chain adjuster arrow mark [1] reaches red
zone [2] of the indicator label, replace the drive chain
with a new one (page 3-19).

[1]

[2]

CLEANING AND LUBRICATION
Clean the drive chain [1] with a chain cleaner designed
specifically for O-ring chains or a neutral detergent. Use
a soft brush if the drive chain is dirty.

[1]

Do not use a steam cleaner, high pressure cleaner, wire
brush, volatile solvent such as gasoline and benzene,
abrasive cleaner or a chain cleaner NOT designed
specifically for O-ring chains to clean the drive chain.
Inspect the drive chain for possible damage or wear.
Replace any drive chain that has damaged rollers,
loose fitting links, or otherwise appears unserviceable.
Be sure the drive chain has dried completely before
lubricating.

[2]

Lubricate the drive chain with drive chain lubricant [2]
designed specifically for use with O-ring chains, #80 –
90 gear oil or equivalent.

Do not use a chain lubricant NOT designed specifically
for use with O-ring chains to lubricate the drive chain.
Wipe off the excess oil or drive chain lubricant.

3-17

dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
SPROCKET INSPECTION
Remove the left rear cover (page 2-29).
[1]

Inspect the drive and driven sprocket teeth for wear [1]
or damage [2], replace if necessary.
Never use a new drive chain on worn sprockets.
Both chain and sprockets must be in good condition [3],
or new replacement chain will wear rapidly.

[2]

Check the attaching bolts and nuts on the drive and
driven sprockets.

[3]

[1]

If any are loose, torque them.
TORQUE:
Drive sprocket bolt [1]:
54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)
Driven sprocket nut [2]:
108 N·m (11.0 kgf·m, 80 lbf·ft)
Install the left rear cover (page 2-29).

[2]

3-18

dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
REPLACEMENT
This motorcycle uses a drive chain with a staked master
link.
Fully slacken the drive chain (page 3-17).
Remove the drive chain using the special tool.

1 LINK

When using the special tool, follow the manufacturer's
instruction.
TOOL:
Drive chain tool set

07HMH-MR10103

Remove the excess drive chain links from a new drive
chain with the drive chain tool set.

NC700X/XA/S/SA: 114 LINKS
NC700XD/SD: 112 LINKS

STANDARD LINKS:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
114 LINKS
NC700XD/SD:
112 LINKS
REPLACEMENT CHAIN
DID: DID520V0
RK: RK520MKO
Never reuse the old
drive chain, master
link, master link
plate and O-rings.

Insert a new master link [1] with new O-rings [2] from
the inside of the drive chain, and install a new plate [3]
and O-rings with the identification mark facing the
outside.

[2]

[3]

Assemble the master link, O-rings and plate.
TOOL:
Drive chain tool set

07HMH-MR10103

[1]

Make sure that the master link pins [1] are installed
properly.
Measure the master link pin length projected from the
plate.

[1]

STANDARD LENGTH:
Approx. 1.3 mm (0.05 in)
Stake the master link pins.

3-19

dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
Make sure that the pins are staked properly by
measuring the diameter of the staked area using a slide
caliper [1].

[1]

DIAMETER OF THE STAKED AREA:
DID: 5.40 – 5.60 mm (0.213 – 0.220 in)
RK: 5.25 – 5.65 mm (0.207 – 0.222 in)
After staking, check the staked area of the master link
for cracks.
If there is any cracking, replace the master link, O-rings
and plate.

DRIVE CHAIN SLIDER
Check the drive chain slider for wear or damage.

[1]

The drive chain slider must be replaced if it is worn to
the wear indicator [1] (page 18-16).

[1]

3-20

dummyhead

MAINTENANCE

BRAKE FLUID
Spilled fluid can damage painted, plastic or rubber
parts. Place a rag over these parts whenever the
system is serviced.
• Do not mix different types of fluid, as they are not
compatible with each other.
• Do not allow foreign material to enter the system
when filling the reservoir.
• When the fluid level is low, check the brake pads for
wear (page 3-22).
• A low fluid level may be due to wear of the brake
pads. If the brake pads are worn and caliper pistons
are pushed out, this accounts for a low fluid level. If
the brake pads are not worn and fluid level is low,
check the entire system for leaks (page 3-23).

FRONT BRAKE
Turn the handlebar to the left so that the reservoir is
level and check the front brake fluid level through the
sight glass.
If the level is near the "LOWER" level line [1], fill the
recommended brake fluid.

[2]

[3]

Remove the following:
–
–
–
–

Screws [2]
Reservoir cover [3]
Set plate [4]
Diaphragm [5]

[4]/[5]

Fill the reservoir with DOT 4 brake fluid from a sealed
container to the casting ledge [1].

[1]

[1]

Install the diaphragm, set plate and reservoir cover.
Install and tighten the cover screws to the specified
torque.
TORQUE: 1.5 N·m (0.2 kgf·m, 1.1 lbf·ft)

REAR BRAKE
Support the motorcycle on a level surface, and check
the rear brake fluid level.
Check the brake fluid level.
If the level is near the "LOWER" level line [1], fill the
recommended brake fluid.

[1]

3-21

dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
Remove the rear brake reservoir mounting bolt [1] and
reservoir [2].

[8]

[3]
[10]

Remove the cover screws [3], reservoir cover [4], set
plate [5] and diaphragm [6].

[12]
[4]

Temporarily install the reservoir and mounting bolt to
the reservoir stay lower hole [7] using a 6 mm nut [8].

[5]
[6]

Align the reservoir tab [9] with the reservoir stay cut out
[10].
Fill the reservoir with DOT 4 brake fluid from a sealed
container to the "UPPER" level line [11].
Remove the 6 mm nut, mounting bolt and reservoir.
Install the diaphragm, set plate and reservoir cover.
Install and tighten the cover screws to the specified
torque.
TORQUE: 1.5 N·m (0.2 kgf·m, 1.1 lbf·ft)

[2]

[11]

[1]

[7]

[2]

[9]

[1]

Install the reservoir and rear brake reservoir mounting
bolt.
Align the reservoir tab with the reservoir stay upper hole
[12].
Tighten the rear brake reservoir mounting bolt to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)

BRAKE PADS WEAR
FRONT BRAKE PADS
Check the brake pads for wear.
Always replace the
brake pads as a set
to assure even disc
pressure.

Replace the brake pads if either pad is worn to the
bottom of wear limit grooves [1].
For brake pad replacement.
– NC700X/S (page 19-16)
– NC700XA/XD/SA/SD (page 19-17)

[1]

REAR BRAKE PADS
Check the brake pads for wear.
Always replace the
brake pads as a set
to assure even disc
pressure.

NC700X/S:

For brake pad replacement (page 19-18).

[1]

3-22

NC700XA/XD/SA/SD:

Replace the brake pads if either pad is worn to the
bottom of wear limit grooves [1].

[1]

dummyhead

MAINTENANCE

BRAKE SYSTEM
INSPECTION
NC700XA/XD/SA/
SD:

This model is equipped with a Combi Brake System.
Check the front and rear brake operation as follows:

[1]

Support the motorcycle securely and raise the front
wheel [1] off the ground.
Apply the brake pedal [2].
Make sure the front wheel does not turn while the brake
pedal is applied.

[2]

Firmly apply the brake lever or pedal, and check that no
air has entered the system.
If the lever or pedal feels soft or spongy when operated,
bleed the air from the system.
For brake air bleeding:
– NC700X/S (page 19-9)
– NC700XA/XD/SA/SD (page 19-12)
Inspect the brake hose [1] and fittings for deterioration,
cracks and signs of leakage.
Tighten any loose fittings.
Replace hoses and fittings as required.
[1]

BRAKE PEDAL HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
Loosen the lock nut [1] and turn the push rod [2] until
the correct pedal height is obtained.

[2]

[1]

3-23

dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
If the brake pedal [1] is adjusted to the lower position
[2], make sure that the clearance between the lower
end of the push rod and the brake pedal does not fall
below 1 mm (0.04 in).

[2]

[3]

[4]

If the brake pedal is adjusted to the higher position [3],
make sure that the lower end of the push rod thread [4]
is visible inside the joint.

1 mm
(0.04 in)

After adjustment, tighten the rear master cylinder push
rod lock nut to the specified torque.
[4]

TORQUE: 17 N·m (1.7 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)

[1]

BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH
The front brake light
switch does not
require adjustment.

Adjust the brake light switch [1] so that the brake light
comes on just prior to the brake actually being
engaged.
If the light fails to come on, adjust the switch so that the
light comes on at the proper time.

[1]

Hold the switch body and turn the adjuster [2]. Do not
turn the switch body.

[2]

BRAKE LOCK OPERATION (NC700XD/
SD)
INSPECTION
Support the motorcycle using a safety stand or hoist,
raise the rear wheel off the ground.

[1]

Turn the rear wheel with your hands and pull the
parking brake lever [1] slowly.
Check the parking brake lever " " mark [2] within the
index lines [3] at the rear wheel stopped.
If the parking brake lever " " mark not within the index
lines, adjust the parking brake as follows (page 3-25).

[2]

[3]

3-24

dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
ADJUSTMENT
Parking brake lever position can be adjusted at the
upper end of the parking brake cable and at the parking
brake caliper adjuster bolt.
Minor adjustment is made with the upper adjuster.
Release the dust cover [1].
Adjust the lever position by loosening the lock nut [2],
and turning the adjuster [3].
After adjustment, tighten the lock nut securely.
If the correct freeplay cannot be gained from the upper
adjuster, turn the adjuster all the way in.
Make major adjustments with the parking brake caliper
adjuster bolt.

[1]

[3]

[2]

Major adjustment is made with the parking brake caliper
adjuster bolt [1].
Loosen the lock nut [2].
Turn the adjuster bolt clockwise until bolt resistance is
felt (brake pads contact with the brake disc).
Then turn the adjuster bolt 1/4 turn counterclockwise
and tighten the lock nut to the specified torque while
holding the adjuster bolt.
TORQUE: 17 N·m (1.7 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)
Recheck the parking brake operation.
[2]

[1]

HEADLIGHT AIM
Support the motorcycle in an upright position.
Adjust the headlight
aim as specified by
local laws and
regulations.

NC700X/XA/XD:

Adjust the headlight aim vertically by turning the vertical
beam adjusting screw [1].
A clockwise rotation moves the beam up and
counterclockwise rotation moves the beam down.

[1]

NC700S/SA/SD:
[1]

3-25

dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
Adjust the headlight aim horizontally by turning the
horizontal beam adjusting screw [1].
A clockwise rotation moves the beam toward the right
and counterclockwise rotation moves the beam toward
the left.

NC700X/XA/XD:
[1]

NC700S/SA/SD:
[1]

CLUTCH SYSTEM (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Measure the clutch lever freeplay at the end of the
clutch lever.

10 – 20 mm (3/8 – 13/16 in)

FREEPLAY:10 – 20 mm (3/8 – 13/16 in)

The adjuster may
be damaged if it is
positioned too far
out, leaving minimal
thread
engagement.

Minor adjustment is made with the upper adjuster at the
clutch lever.
Loosen the lock nut [1] and turn the adjuster [2].
If the adjuster is threaded out near its limit and the
correct freeplay cannot be obtained, turn the adjuster all
the way in and back out one turn.
Tighten the lock nut while holding the adjuster.
Recheck the clutch lever freeplay.

3-26

[1]

[2]

dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
Major adjustment is made with the lower adjusting nut
[1] at the clutch lifter arm.

[1]

Loosen the lock nut [2] and turn the adjusting nut to
adjust the freeplay.
Tighten the lock nut while holding the adjusting nut.
If proper freeplay cannot be obtained, or the clutch slips
during test ride, disassemble and inspect the clutch
(page 11-7).

[2]

SIDESTAND
INSPECTION
Support the motorcycle using a safety stand or hoist.

[1]

Check the sidestand spring [1] for damage or loss of
tension.
Check the sidestand [2] assembly for freedom of
movement and lubricate the sidestand pivot if
necessary.
Check the sidestand ignition cut-off system:
– Sit astride the motorcycle and raise the sidestand.
– Start the engine with the transmission in neutral,
then, with the clutch lever fully squeezed, shift the
transmission into gear.
– Move the sidestand full down.
– The engine should stop as the sidestand is lowered.

[2]

If there is a problem with the system, check the
sidestand switch (page 22-28).

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Support the motorcycle upright on a level surface.
Remove the sidestand switch bolt [1] and sidestand
switch [2].

[1]

[2]

3-27

dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
Remove the sidestand springs [1].
Remove the sidestand pivot nut [2], bolt [3] and
sidestand [4].
Apply grease to the sidestand pivot bolt sliding surface.
Install the sidestand and sidestand pivot bolt.
Tighten the sidestand pivot bolt to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)

[2]
[3]

Loosen the sidestand pivot bolt 45 – 90°.
Install and tighten the sidestand pivot nut to the
specified torque while holding the pivot bolt.
[4]

TORQUE: 39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft)

[1]

Install the sidestand springs.
Install the sidestand switch [1].

Align

• Align the sidestand switch groove with the frame pin.
• Align the sidestand switch tab with the sidestand
hole.
Install and tighten a new sidestand switch bolt [2] to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)

Align

SUSPENSION
FRONT SUSPENSION INSPECTION
Check the action of the forks by operating the front
brake and compressing the front suspension several
times.
Check the entire assembly for signs of leaks, damage
or loose fasteners.
Replace damaged components which cannot be
repaired.
Loose, worn or damaged suspension parts impair
motorcycle stability and control.
Tighten all nuts and bolts.
For fork service (page 17-25).

3-28

[1]

[2]

dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
REAR SUSPENSION INSPECTION
Check the action of the rear shock absorber by
compressing the rear end several times.
Check the entire shock absorber assembly for leaks,
damage or loose fasteners.
Replace damaged components which cannot be
repaired.
Loose, worn or damaged suspension parts impair
motorcycle stability and control.
Tighten all nuts and bolts.
For shock absorber service (page 18-14).
Support the motorcycle using a safety stand or hoist,
raise the rear wheel off the ground.
Check for worn swingarm bearings by grabbing the rear
wheel and attempting to move the wheel side to side.
Replace the bearings if any looseness to noted.
For swingarm service (page 18-16).

NUTS, BOLTS, FASTENERS
Check that all chassis nuts, screws and bolts are
tightened to their correct torque values (page 1-15).
Check that all cotter pins, safety clips, hose clamps and
cable stays are in place and properly secured.

WHEELS/TIRES
Support the motorcycle using a safety stand or hoist,
raise the front wheel off the ground.
Hold the front fork leg and move the front wheel
sideways with force to see if the wheel bearings are
worn.
For front wheel service (page 17-20).
Support the motorcycle using a safety stand or hoist,
raise the rear wheel off the ground.
Hold the swingarm and move the rear wheel sideways
with force to see if the wheel and driven flange bearings
are worn.
For rear wheel service (page 18-6).

3-29

dummyhead

MAINTENANCE
Check the tire pressure with a tire pressure gauge when
the tires are cold.
RECOMMENDED TIRE PRESSURE:
DRIVER ONLY:
FRONT: 250 kPa (2.50 kgf/cm2, 36 psi)
REAR: 290 kPa (2.90 kgf/cm2, 42 psi)
DRIVER AND PASSENGER:
FRONT: 250 kPa (2.50 kgf/cm2, 36 psi)
REAR: 290 kPa (2.90 kgf/cm2, 42 psi)
RECOMMENDED TIRE SIZE:
FRONT: 120/70ZR17M/C (58W)
REAR: 160/60ZR17M/C (69W)
RECOMMENDED TIRE BRAND:
BRIDGESTONE
FRONT: BT023F G
REAR: BT023R G
METZELER
FRONT: ROADTEC Z8 INTERACT E
REAR: ROADTEC Z8 INTERACT
Check the tires for cuts, embedded nails, or other
damage.
Check the front and rear wheels for trueness.
Measure the tread depth at the center of the tires.
Replace the tires when the tread depth reaches the
following limits.
MINIMUM TIRE TREAD DEPTH
FRONT: 1.5 mm (0.06 in)
REAR: 2.0 mm (0.08 in)

STEERING HEAD BEARINGS
Support the motorcycle using a safety stand or hoist,
raise the front wheel off the ground.
Check that the handlebar moves freely from side to
side. Make sure the control cables do not interfere with
the handlebar rotation.
Check for steering stem bearings by grabbing the fork
legs and attempting to move the front fork forward to
backward.
If the handlebar moves unevenly, binds, or has vertical
movement, inspect the steering head bearings (page
17-33).

3-30

dummytext

4. PGM-FI SYSTEM

4

PGM-FI SYSTEM LOCATION ·······················4-2

DTC TROUBLESHOOTING ························ 4-21

PGM-FI SYSTEM DIAGRAM·························4-4

MIL TROUBLESHOOTING ························· 4-43

SERVICE INFORMATION ·····························4-6

MIL CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING ········· 4-63

PGM-FI SYMPTOM
TROUBLESHOOTING···································4-7

FUEL CUT RELAY ······································ 4-64
ECT SENSOR ············································· 4-64

PGM-FI CONNECTOR LOCATIONS ············4-8
BANK ANGLE SENSOR····························· 4-65
PGM-FI TROUBLESHOOTING
INFORMATION············································4-11

ECM (NC700X/XA/S/SA)/
PCM (NC700XD/SD) ··································· 4-67

DTC INDEX··················································4-15
O2 SENSOR················································· 4-69
SENSOR UNIT POWER LINE
INSPECTION ···············································4-17

4-1

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM

PGM-FI SYSTEM LOCATION
PGM-FI SYSTEM

NC700X/XA/S/SA:

IACV
IAT SENSOR
SENSOR UNIT:
– MAP SENSOR
– TP SENSOR

INJECTOR

ECT SENSOR

IGNITION SWITCH

ECM
FUEL PUMP

DLC

O2 SENSOR
EOP SWITCH
CKP SENSOR
BANK ANGLE SENSOR

VS SENSOR

SIDESTAND SWITCH

4-2

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
NC700XD/SD:

IACV
IAT SENSOR
SENSOR UNIT:
– MAP SENSOR
– TP SENSOR

INJECTOR

ECT SENSOR

IGNITION SWITCH

PCM
FUEL PUMP

DLC

O2 SENSOR
EOP SWITCH
CKP SENSOR
BANK ANGLE SENSOR

VS SENSOR

SIDESTAND SWITCH

4-3

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM

PGM-FI SYSTEM DIAGRAM
NC700X/XA/S/SA:

Bl

MAIN FUSE
30A

Bl

IGNITION SWITCH
R

8P
(BLUE)

ENG STOP
7.5A W/Y

R/Bl

R/Bl

FI
15A

Bl
Bl/W

ENGINE STOP SWITCH
W/Y

FUEL
PUMP
UNIT

Bl/R

COMBINATION METER

BATTERY

R/Bl Bl/W

ILLUMI/STOP/HORN
7.5A
P/Bu

3P
(BLACK)

MIL
FAN
15A

Y/R

HISS INDICATOR
P/Bu

Bl/G

(86)

R/W

G/R

TXD/RXD
P/G

(54)

Bl/W

P/Bu

G/R

BANK ANGLE SENSOR
Bl/Bu

21
VCC
RxDT
TxCT
SG

IMMOBILIZER
RECEIVER

BA

M-TXD/RXD 13

R/Bu

(11)

Y/R

Y/R
P

P

O/Bu

Bu

G/O

1P
(BLACK)

VS SENSOR
26

IMOID

10

IMOAU

SENSOR UNIT

Bl/W

K-LINE

25

SCS

27

FLR

7

Br

W
Br
G

DLC

(1)

Y/R

MAP SENSOR

G/Y
5P
(BLACK)

V/R
R/Y

(8)

14

VCC

22

SG

32
33

PB
TH

FUEL CUT
RELAY

IGP

Bl

Br/Bl

Bl/W

Br

G/Y

Bl/W

Bl/Bu

R/W

23

ECM

TP SENSOR

(9)

FANC

Gr/Bu

IAT SENSOR

9

18

G/Y
Bu

TA

Bl

(7)
(87)

3P
(GRAY)

P/W

ECT SENSOR

20

TW

Lg

31

EOP SWITCH

INJ1

5

INJ2

4

IG1

1

IG2

2

Bl

P/Y

W/G

Bl

O2 SENSOR
Y

2P
(RED)

(12)

No.2 INJECTOR

(13)

Bl

O2
Br

1P
(BLACK)

Bu/Y
Y
G/O

W/Y

CKP SENSOR

29

No.1 INJECTOR

OIL P
V/Y

(21)

FAN CONT.
RELAY

G

11
6

PCP
LG

30

NLSW

Br
Y/Bu

G/O

IGNITION COIL /SPARK PLUG
Lg

NEUTRAL
SWITCH

G/R

NEUTRAL
DIODE

Bl

10P
(GRAY)

Bl

CLUTCH
SWITCH
G/W
G

IACV1A

17

IACV1B

16

IACV2A

15

IACV2B

3

PG

12

Y/G
V/W

IACV

Gr/R
P/Bl

G

28 SSTAND

(29)

SIDESTAND
SWITCH

( ) = DTC/MIL number

1

11

12

22

23

33

= Engine does not start
when detecting DTC/MIL

= Short terminals for
reading DTC/MIL

ECM 33P CONNECTOR
ECM side of male terminals

4-4

Bl : Black
Br : Brown
Bu : Blue
G : Green
Gr : Gray
Lg : Light green
O : Orange

P
R
V
W
Y

: PINK
: Red
: Violet
: White
: Yellow

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
NC700XD/SD:

Bl

MAIN FUSE
30A

Bl

IGNITION SWITCH
R

8P
(BLUE)

ENG STOP
7.5A W/Y

R/Bl

R/Bl

FI
15A

Bl
Bl/W

ENGINE STOP SWITCH
W/Y

FUEL
PUMP
UNIT

Bl/R

COMBINATION METER

BATTERY

R/Bl Bl/W

ILLUMI/STOP/HORN
7.5A

P/Bu

P/Bu

3P
(BLACK)

MIL
FAN
15A

Y/R

HISS INDICATOR

Bl/G

(86)

R/W

G/R

TXD/RXD
P/G

(54)

Bl/W
P/G

BANK ANGLE SENSOR

A32

RVW

B21

BA

B14

VCC

Bl/Bu
Y/R

VCC
RxDT
TxCT
SG

IMMOBILIZER
RECEIVER

4P
(BLACK)

M-TXD/RXD B13

R/Bu

(11)

Y/R

P

P

O/Bu

Bu

G/O

B26

IMOID

B10

IMOAU

Bl/W

(84)
(1)

K-LINE

B25

SCS

B27

G/Y
5P
(BLACK)

V/R
R/Y

(8)
Y/V

TP SENSOR

B22

SG

B32
B33

PB
TH

A8

VCCPB

B9

Br
G

DLC
B7

FUEL CUT
RELAY

Gr/Bu

IAT SENSOR

Br

W

PCM
FLR

MAP SENSOR

Y/R
1P
(BLACK)

VS SENSOR

SENSOR UNIT

(9)

G/R

P/Bu

IGP

B23

FANC

B18

G/Y
Bu

TA

Bl

Br/Bl

Bl/W

Br

G/Y

Bl/W

Bl/Bu

R/W

Bl

(7)
(87)

FAN MOTOR

P/W

ECT SENSOR

B20

TW

Lg

INJ1

B5

INJ2

B4

IG1

B1

IG2

B2

P/Y

3P
(GRAY)

G

Bl

FAN CONT.
RELAY

No.1 INJECTOR

(12)

No.2 INJECTOR

(13)

B31 POILSW

EOP SWITCH

V/Y

(21)

Bl

O2 SENSOR
Y

W/G

B29

O2
Br

1P
(BLACK)

2P
(RED)

Bl

Bu/Y
Y

W/Y

G/O

CKP SENSOR

B11
B6

PCP
LG

B30

NLSW

Br
Y/Bu

G/O

IGNITION COIL /SPARK PLUG
Lg

Lg

IACV1A B17

NEUTRAL
SWITCH

IACV1B B16
IACV2A B15

G/W
G

IACV2B

B3

PG1

B12

Y/G
V/W
Gr/R

IACV

P/Bl

G

B28 SSTAND

(29)

SIDESTAND
SWITCH

( ) = DTC/MIL number

11

1

12

22

12

22

23

33

23

33

1

11

= Engine does not start
when detecting DTC/MIL

= Short terminals for

Bl : Black
Br : Brown
Bu : Blue
G : Green
Gr : Gray
Lg : Light green
O : Orange

P
R
V
W
Y

: PINK
: Red
: Violet
: White
: Yellow

reading DTC/MIL
PCM 33P (BLACK) CONNECTOR
PCM side of male terminals

PCM 33P (GRAY) CONNECTOR
PCM side of male terminals

4-5

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM

SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
• Work in a well ventilated area. Smoking or allowing flames or sparks in the work area or where gasoline is stored can cause a
fire or explosion.
• A faulty PGM-FI system is often related to poorly connected or corroded connectors. Check those connections before
proceeding.
• When disassembling the PGM-FI system parts, note the location of the O-rings. Replace them with new ones upon reassembly.
• Use a digital tester for PGM-FI system inspection.
• The following color codes are used throughout this section.
Bl = Black
Br = Brown

Bu = Blue
G = Green

Gr = Gray
Lg = Light green

O = Orange
P = Pink

R = Red
V = Violet

W = White
Y = Yellow

SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM
IAT sensor resistance (at 20°C/68°F)
ECT sensor resistance (at 40°C/104°F)
Injector resistance (at 20°C/68°F)

SPECIFICATIONS
2.2 – 2.7 kΩ
1.0 – 1.3 kΩ
11 – 13 Ω

TORQUE VALUES
ITEM

Q'TY

ECT sensor
Bank angle sensor mounting bolt
O2 sensor

1
2
1

4-6

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
10
6
12

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
12 (1.2, 9)
10 (1.0, 7)
24.5 (2.5, 18)

REMARKS

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM

PGM-FI SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING
When the motorcycle has one of these symptoms, check the DTC or MIL blinking, refer to the DTC index (page 4-15) and begin the
appropriate troubleshooting procedure. If there are no DTC/MIL blinking stored in the ECM/PCM memory, do the diagnostic
procedure for the symptom, in sequence listed below, until you find cause.
Symptom
Engine cranks but won’t start
(No DTC and MIL blinking)

Diagnosis procedure
1. Inspect the spark plug condition (page 38).
2. Inspect the ignition system (page 5-6).
3. Inspect the cylinder compression (page
10-5).
4. Inspect the IACV (page 7-22).
5. Inspect the fuel supply system (page 7-10).

Engine cranks but won’t start
(No fuel pump operation sound
when the turning the ignition
ON)

1. ECM/PCM power/ground circuits
malfunction (page 4-68).
2. Inspect the fuel supply system (page 7-10).

Engine stalls, hard to start,
rough idling

1.
2.
3.
4.

Afterburn when engine braking
is used
Backfiring or misfiring during
acceleration
Poor performance (driveability)
and poor fuel economy
Idle speed is below
specifications or fast idle too low
(No DTC and MIL blinking)
Idle speed is above
specifications or fast idle too
high (No DTC and MIL blinking)
MIL stays ON but no DTCs set,
or MIL never comes ON at all

Inspect the engine idle speed (page 3-15).
Inspect the IACV (page 7-22).
Inspect the fuel supply system (page 7-4).
Inspect the battery charging system (page
21-7).
5. Inspect the ignition system (page 5-6).
Inspect the ignition system (page 5-6).

Also check for
• No fuel to injector
– Clogged fuel filter
– Pinched or clogged fuel feed
hose
– Faulty fuel pump
– Faulty fuel pump circuits
• Intake air leak
• Contaminated/deteriorated fuel
• Faulty fuel injector
• Open circuit in the power input
and/or ground wire of the ECM/
PCM
• Blown main fuse (30 A)
• Blown sub fuse 15 A (FI)
• Blown sub fuse 7.5 A (ENG STOP)
• Restricted fuel feed hose
• Contaminated/deteriorated fuel
• Intake air leak
• Faulty MAP sensor
• Restricted fuel tank breather hose

Inspect the ignition system (page 5-6).
1. Inspect the fuel supply system (page 7-4).
2. Inspect the air cleaner element (page 3-7).
3. Inspect the ignition system (page 5-6).
1.
2.
3.
1.
2.

Inspect the engine idle speed (page 3-15).
Inspect the IACV (page 7-22).
Inspect the ignition system (page 5-6).
Inspect the engine idle speed (page 3-15).
Inspect the throttle operation and freeplay
(page 3-5).
3. Inspect the IACV (page 7-22).
4. Inspect the ignition system (page 5-6).
Inspect the MIL circuit (page 4-63).

• Faulty pressure regulator (fuel
pump)
• Faulty injector
• Faulty MAP sensor

• Intake air leak
• Engine top-end problem
• Air cleaner element condition

4-7

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM

PGM-FI CONNECTOR LOCATIONS
NOTE 1: Remove the shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA) (page 2-14).
NOTE 1: Remove the side cowl (NC700S/SA) (page 2-13).
ECM 33P (BLACK) CONNECTOR (NOTE 1)

NOTE 2: Remove the luggage box lid/hinge assembly (NC700XD/SD) (page 2-19).
PCM 33P (GRAY) CONNECTOR (NOTE 2)

4-8

PCM 33P (BLACK) CONNECTOR (NOTE 2)

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
NOTE 3: Remove the ECM box (page 4-65).
BANK ANGLE SENSOR
2P (BLACK) CONNECTOR (NOTE 3)

NOTE 4: Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).
NOTE 5: Remove the center cover (NC700X/XA/XD) (page 2-16).
NOTE 5: Remove the luggage box (NC700S/SA/SD) (page 2-20).
IAT SENSOR
2P (BLACK) CONNECTOR (NOTE 5)

DLC (NOTE 4)

NOTE 6: Remove the lower cowl (page 2-28).
ECT SENSOR
2P CONNECTOR

O2 SENSOR
1P (BLACK) CONNECTOR (NOTE 6)
EOP SWITCH
1P (GRAY) CONNECTOR (NOTE 6)

4-9

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
NOTE 7: Remove the air cleaner housing (page 7-14).
IACV
4P (BLACK) CONNECTOR (NOTE 7)

SENSOR UNIT
5P (BLACK) CONNECTOR (NOTE 7)

INJECTOR
2P (GRAY) CONNECTOR
VS SENSOR
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

NOTE 8: Remove the windscreen (page 2-23).
COMBINATION METER
16P (GRAY) CONNECTOR (NOTE 8)

4-10

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM

PGM-FI TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION
GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING
Intermittent Failure
The term "intermittent failure" means a system may have had a failure, but it checks OK now. If the MIL does not come on, check
for poor contact or loose pins at all connectors related to the circuit that of the troubleshooting. If the MIL was on, but then went out,
the original problem may be intermittent.
Opens and Shorts
"Opens" and "Shorts" are common electrical terms. An open is a break in a wire or at a connection. A short is an accidental
connection of a wire to ground or to another wire. In simple electronics, this usually means something will not work at all. With ECM/
PCMs this can something mean something work, but not the way it’s supposed to.
If the MIL has come on
Refer to DTC READOUT (page 4-12).
If the MIL did not stay on
If the MIL did not stay on, but there is a driveability problem, do the SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING (page 4-7).

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SELF-DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
The PGM-FI system is equipped with the self-diagnostic system. When any abnormality occurs in the system, the ECM/PCM turns
on the MIL and stores a DTC in its erasable memory.
FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION
The PGM-FI system is provided with a fail-safe function to secure a minimum running capability even when there is trouble in the
system. When any abnormality is detected by the self-diagnosis function, running capability is maintained by pre-programed value
in the simulated program map. When any abnormality is detected in the injector, the fail-safe function stops the engine to protect it
from damage.
DTC
• The DTC is composed of a main code and a sub code and it is displayed as a hyphenated number when retrieved from the
ECM/PCM with the HDS pocket tester.
The digits in front of the hyphen are the main code, they indicate the component of function failure.
The digits behind the hyphen are the sub code, they detail the specific symptom of the component or function failure.
For example, in the case of the TP sensor:
– DTC 08 – 1 = (TP sensor voltage) – (lower than the specified value)
– DTC 08 – 2 = (TP sensor voltage) – (higher than the specified value)
• The MAP, ECT, TP and IAT sensor diagnosis will be made according to the voltage output of the affected sensor.
If a failure occurs, the ECM/PCM determines the Function Failure, compares the sensor voltage output to the standard value,
and then outputs the corresponding DTC to the HDS pocket tester.
For example:
– If the input voltage line (A) on the MAP sensor is opened, the ECM/PCM detects the output voltage is about 5 V, then the DTC
1-2 (MAP sensor circuit high voltage) will be displayed.
– If the input voltage line (B) on the TP sensor is opened, the ECM/PCM detects the output voltage is 0 V, then the DTC 8-1 (TP
sensor circuit low voltage) will be displayed.
MIL Blink Pattern
• If the HDS pocket tester is not available, DTC can be read from the
ECM/PCM memory by the MIL [1] blink pattern.
• The number of MIL blinks is the equivalent the main code of the DTC
(the sub code cannot be displayed by the MIL).
• The MIL will blink the current DTC, in case the ECM/PCM detects the
problem at present, when the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" " or idling with the sidestand down. The MIL will stay ON when the
engine speed is over 1,850 min-1 (rpm) or with the sidestand up.
• The MIL has two types of blinks, a long blink and short blink. The long
blinking lasts for 1.3 seconds, the short blinking lasts for 0.3 seconds.
One long blink is the equivalent of ten short blinks. For example, when
two long blinks are followed by five short blinks, the MIL is 25 (two long
blinks = 20 blinks, plus five short blinks).
• When the ECM/PCM stores more than one DTC, the MIL will indicate
them by blinking in the order from the lowest number to highest number.

[1]

MIL Check
When the ignition switch is turned ON and engine stop switch " " the MIL will stay on for a few seconds, then go off. If the MIL does
not come on, troubleshoot the MIL circuit (page 4-63).

4-11

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
CURRENT DTC/FREEZE DTC
The DTC is indicated in two ways according to the failure status.
• In case the ECM/PCM detects the problem at present, the MIL will come on and the MIL will start to blink as its DTC when the
sidestand is lowered. It is possible to readout the MIL blink pattern as the current DTC.
• In case the ECM/PCM does not detect any problem at present but has a problem stored in its memory, the MIL will not light and
blink. If it is necessary to retrieve the past problem, readout the freeze DTC by following the DTC readout procedure (page 412).

HDS POCKET TESTER INFORMATION
• The HDS pocket tester can readout the DTC, freeze data, current data and other ECM/PCM condition.
How to connect the HDS pocket tester
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).
Remove the DLC [1] from the battery box.
Connect the HDS pocket tester to the DLC.
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " " check the DTC and
freeze data.
Freeze data indicates the engine conditions when the first malfunction was
detected.
ECM/PCM reset

[1]

The HDS pocket tester can reset the ECM/PCM data including the DTC,
freeze data and some learning memory.
After the ECM/PCM reset, perform the TP sensor reset procedure (page 7-19).

DTC READOUT
Start the engine and check the MIL [1].

[1]

When the ignition switch is turned ON and engine stop switch " ", the MIL
will stay on for a few seconds, then go off.
If the MIL stays on or blinks, connect the HDS pocket tester to the DLC
(page 4-12).
Read the DTC, freeze data and follow the troubleshooting index (page 415).
To read the DTC with the MIL blinking, refer to the following procedure.

Reading DTC with the MIL
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).
Remove the DLC [1] from the battery box.
Short the DLC terminals using a special tool.
CONNECTION: Brown – Green
TOOL:
SCS connector [2]

070PZ-ZY30100

Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " ", read, note the MIL
blinks and refer to the DTC index (page 4-15).
If the ECM/PCM has any DTC in its memory, the MIL will start blinking.

4-12

[1]

[2]

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
ERASING DTC
Connect the HDS pocket tester to the DLC (page 4-12).
Erase the DTC with the HDS pocket tester while the engine is stopped.
To erase the DTC without HDS pocket tester, refer to the following procedure.
How to erase the DTC with SCS connector
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove the DLC [1] from the battery box.
Short the DLC terminals using a special tool.
Connection: Brown – Green
TOOL:
SCS connector [2]

070PZ-ZY30100

3. Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " ".
4. Remove the special tool from the DLC.
5. The MIL will light for approximately 5 seconds. While the MIL lights,
short the DLC terminals again with a special tool. The self-diagnostic
memory is erased if the MIL goes off and starts blinking.

[1]

[2]

• The DLC must be jumped while the MIL lights. If not, the MIL will not start blinking.
• Note that the self-diagnostic memory cannot be erased if the ignition switch is turned OFF before the MIL starts blinking.

CIRCUIT INSPECTION
INSPECTION AT ECM/PCM CONNECTOR
• Always clean around and keep any foreign material away from the ECM/
PCM 33P connector(s) before disconnecting it.
• A faulty PGM-FI system is often related to poorly connected or corroded
terminals. Check those connections before proceeding.
• In testing at ECM/PCM 33P connector(s) (wire harness side) terminal,
always use the test probe [1]. Insert the test probe into the connector
terminal, then attach the digital multimeter probe to the test probe.
TOOL:
Test probe

07ZAJ-RDJA110

[1]

TEST HARNESS CONNECTION (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Remove the shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA) (page 2-14).

[1]

Remove the side cowl (NC700S/SA) (page 2-13).
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the ECM 33P (Black) connector [1].

4-13

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
Connect the ECM test harness [1] between the main wire harness [2] and
ECM [3].
TOOL:
ECM test harness 33P

[2]

[1]

070MZ-MCA0100

[3]

TEST HARNESS CONNECTION (NC700XD/SD)
Remove the luggage box lid/hinge assembly (page 2-19).
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Black) connector [1] and PCM 33P (Gray)
connector [2].

Connect the ECM test harness [1] between the main wire harness [2] and
PCM [3].
TOOL:
ECM test harness 33P

[1]

[2]

[3]

[1]

070MZ-MCA0100

[2]

TEST HARNESS TERMINAL LAYOUT
The ECM/PCM 33P connector [1] terminals are numbered as shown in this
illustration.
The ECM test harness terminals are same layout as for the ECM/PCM 33P
connector terminals as shown.

[1]

1

12

23

4-14

11

22

33

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM

DTC INDEX
DTC
(MIL
blinks)
1-1 (1)

1-2 (1)

7-1 (7)

7-2 (7)

8-1 (8)

8-2 (8)
9-1 (9)

9-2 (9)

11-1
(11)

12-1
(12)
13-1
(13)
21-1
(21)
29-1
(29)
33-2 (–)

Function Failure

Symptom/Fail-safe function

MAP sensor circuit low voltage (less than
0.029 V)
• MAP sensor or its circuit malfunction
MAP sensor circuit high voltage (more
than 3.809 V)
• Loose or poor contact of the sensor
unit connector
• MAP sensor or its circuit malfunction
ECT sensor circuit low voltage (less than
0.049 V)
• ECT sensor or its circuit malfunction

• Engine operates normally
• Pre-program value: 225 mmHg/
30 kPa
• Engine operates normally
• Pre-program value: 225 mmHg/
30 kPa

ECT sensor circuit high voltage (more
than 4.946 V)
• Loose or poor contact of the ECT
sensor connector
• ECT sensor or its circuit malfunction
TP sensor circuit low voltage (less than
0.122 V)
• Loose or poor contact of the sensor
unit connector
• TP sensor or its circuit malfunction
TP sensor circuit high voltage (more than
4.966 V)
• TP sensor or its circuit malfunction
IAT sensor circuit low voltage (less than
0.049 V)
• IAT sensor or its circuit malfunction
IAT sensor circuit high voltage (more
than 4.946 V)
• Loose or poor contact of the IAT
sensor connector
• IAT sensor or its circuit malfunction
VS sensor no signal
• Loose or poor contact of the VS
sensor connector
• Open or short circuit in the VS sensor
wire
• Faulty VS sensor
No.1 Injector circuit malfunction
• Loose or poor contact of the injector
connector
• Injector or its circuit malfunction
No.2 Injector circuit malfunction
• Loose or poor contact of the injector
connector
• Injector or its circuit malfunction
O2 sensor malfunction
• Loose or poor contact of the O2
sensor connector
• O2 sensor or its circuit malfunction
IACV circuit malfunction
• Loose or poor contact of the IACV
connector
• IACV or its circuit malfunction
ECM/PCM EEPROM malfunction

• Hard start at a low temperature
• Pre-program value: 110°C/
230°F
• Cooling fan turns on
• Hard start at a low temperature
• Pre-program value: 110°C/
230°F
• Cooling fan turns on

Refer
to
(DTC)

Refer to
(MIL)

4-21
4-43
4-22

4-23
4-45
4-24

• Poor engine acceleration
• Pre-program value: 0°
4-26
4-47
• Poor engine acceleration
• Pre-program value: 0°

4-27

• Engine operates normally
• Pre-program value: 35°C/95°F

4-28

• Engine operates normally
• Pre-program value: 35°C/95°F

4-48
4-29

• Engine operates normally

• Engine does not start
• Injector, fuel pump and ignition
coil shut down
• Engine does not start
• Injector, fuel pump and ignition
coil shut down

4-30

NC700X/XA/
S/SA: 4-50
NC700XD/SD:
4-51

4-32

4-53

4-33

4-54

4-34

4-54

4-35

4-56

4-37

–

• Engine operates normally

• Engine stalls, hard to start, rough
idling
• Engine operates normally

4-15

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
DTC
(MIL
blinks)
54-1
(54)

54-2
(54)
84-1
(84)
86-1
(86)

87-1
(87)

4-16

Function Failure
Bank angle sensor circuit low voltage
(less than 0.020 V)
• Bank angle sensor or its circuit
malfunction
Bank angle sensor circuit high voltage
(more than 4.986 V)
• Loose or poor contact of the bank
angle sensor connector
• Bank angle sensor or its circuit
malfunction
CPC in the PCM malfunction
• Faulty PCM
Meter communication malfunction
• Open or short circuit in the TXD/RXD
wire
• Faulty combination meter
EOP switch high voltage (more than
1.001 V)
• Loose or poor contact of the EOP
switch connector
• Open circuit in the EOP switch wire
• EOP switch or its circuit malfunction

Symptom/Fail-safe function
• Engine operates normally
• Engine stop function does not
operate
• Engine operates normally
• Engine stop function does not
operate

• Gearshift system stops

Refer
to
(DTC)

Refer to
(MIL)

4-37
4-58
4-38

4-40

4-59

4-40

4-60

4-42

4-62

• Engine operates normally

• Engine operates normally
• Oil pressure indicator stays on

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM

SENSOR UNIT POWER LINE
INSPECTION
BEFORE DTC TROUBLESHOOTING
• When the DTC displays 1-1, 1-2, 8-1 and 8-2, check
the following before DTC troubleshooting.
• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the sensor unit 5P (Black) connector
and ECM 33P (Black) connector.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the sensor unit 5P (Black) connector
and PCM 33P connectors.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. Sensor Unit Power Input Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[1]

Disconnect the sensor unit 5P (Black) connector [1].
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Measure the voltage at the wire harness side.
Connection:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Yellow/red (+) – Green/yellow (–)
NC700XD/SD:
Yellow/violet (+) – Green/yellow (–)

Y/R or Y/V

G/Y

Standard: 4.75 – 5.25 V
If the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES

– Turn the ignition switch OFF. Connect the
sensor unit 5P (Black) connector and start
the DTC troubleshooting (page 4-21).

NO

– GO TO STEP 2.

2. Sensor Unit Input Voltage Line Short Circuit
Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Check for continuity between the sensor unit 5P
(Black) connector [1] of the wire harness side and
ground.
Connection:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Yellow/red – Ground
NC700XD/SD:
Yellow/violet – Ground

[1]

Y/R or Y/V

Is there continuity?
YES

– • Short circuit in the Yellow/red wire
• Short circuit in the Yellow/violet wire

NO

– GO TO STEP 3.

4-17

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
3. Sensor Unit Power Line Open Circuit Inspection
Disconnect the following:

NC700X/XA/S/SA:

[1]

– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
[1]
– PCM 33P (Black) connector (NC700XD/SD) [2]
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD) [3]
Check for continuities between the sensor unit 5P
(Black) connector [4] and ECM/PCM 33P connector.
Connection:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Yellow/red – Yellow/red
Green/yellow – Green/yellow
NC700XD/SD:
Yellow/violet – Yellow/violet
Green/yellow – Green/yellow

Y/R
Y/R
G/Y
G/Y

[4]
NC700XD/SD:

TOOL:
Test probe

[2]

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Y/V

Is there continuity?
YES
NO

– Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.

Y/V

– • Open circuit in the Yellow/red wire
• Open circuit in the Yellow/violet wire
• Open circuit in the Green/yellow wire

G/Y

G/Y
[4]

4-18

[3]

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
BEFORE MIL TROUBLESHOOTING
• When the MIL blinks 1 and 8 times, check the
following before MIL troubleshooting.
• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the sensor unit 5P (Black) connector
and ECM 33P (Black) connector.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the sensor unit 5P (Black) connector
and PCM 33P connectors.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. Sensor Unit Power Input Voltage Inspection 1
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

NC700X/XA/S/SA:

Connect the ECM test harness to the ECM/PCM
33P connector(s).
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 4-13)
– NC700XD/SD (page 4-14)
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Measure the voltage at the ECM test harness
terminals.
Connection:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
14 (+) – 22 (–)
NC700XD/SD:
A8 (+) – B22 (–)

14

22

NC700XD/SD:

Standard: 4.75 – 5.25 V
Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– GO TO STEP 3.

A8

B22

2. Sensor Unit Power Input Voltage Inspection 2
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[1]

Disconnect the sensor unit 5P (Black) connector [1].
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Measure the voltage at the wire harness side.
Connection:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Yellow/red (+) – Green/yellow (–)
NC700XD/SD:
Yellow/violet (+) – Green/yellow (–)

Y/R or Y/V

G/Y

Standard: 4.75 – 5.25 V
Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES

– Turn the ignition switch OFF. Connect the
sensor unit 5P (Black) connector and start
the MIL troubleshooting (page 4-43).

NO

– GO TO STEP 4.

4-19

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
3. Sensor Unit Input Voltage Line Short Circuit
Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[1]

Check for continuity between the sensor unit 5P
(Black) connector [1] of the wire harness side and
ground.
Connection:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Yellow/red – Ground
NC700XD/SD:
Yellow/violet – Ground

Y/R or Y/V

Is there continuity?
YES

– • Short circuit in the Yellow/red wire
• Short circuit in the Yellow/violet wire

NO

– Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.

4. Sensor Unit Input Voltage Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Check for continuities between the ECM test
harness [1] and sensor unit 5P (Black) connector [2]
of the wire harness side.
Connection:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
14 – Yellow/red
22 – Green/yellow
NC700XD/SD:
A8 – Yellow/violet
B22 – Green/yellow

NC700X/XA/S/SA:

22

G/Y
Y/R

14

Is there continuity?
YES

– Intermittent failure

NO

– • Open circuit in the Yellow/red wire
• Open circuit in the Yellow/violet wire
• Open circuit in the Green/yellow wire

[1]

[2]

NC700XD/SD:

[2]
A8
Y/V
G/Y
B22

[1]

4-20

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM

DTC TROUBLESHOOTING
DTC 1-1 (MAP SENSOR LOW
VOLTAGE)
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. MAP Sensor System Inspection
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Check the MAP sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is about 0 V indicated?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Intermittent failure

2. Sensor Unit Power Line Inspection
Check the sensor unit power line inspection (page
4-17).
Is the sensor unit power line normal?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Replace or repair the abnormal circuit.

3. MAP Sensor Output Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[1]

Disconnect the sensor unit 5P (Black) connector [1].
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Measure the voltage at the sensor unit 5P (Black)
connector of the wire harness side.
Connection: Violet/red (+) – Green/yellow (–)
Standard:
4.75 – 5.25 V

V/R

G/Y

Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES

– GO TO STEP 5.

NO

– GO TO STEP 4.

4. MAP Sensor
Inspection

Output

Line

Short

Circuit

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Check for continuity between the sensor unit 5P
(Black) connector [1] of the wire harness side and
ground.
Connection: Violet/red – ground

[1]

V/R

Is there continuity?
YES

– Short circuit in the Violet/red wire

NO

– GO TO STEP 5.

4-21

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
5. MAP Sensor Inspection
Replace the sensor unit with a known good one
(page 7-15).
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Connect the sensor unit 5P (Black) connector.
Erase the DTCs (page 4-13).
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Check the MAP sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 1-1 indicated?
YES

– Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.

NO

– Faulty original sensor unit (MAP sensor)

DTC 1-2 (MAP SENSOR HIGH
VOLTAGE)
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. MAP Sensor System Inspection 1
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Check the MAP sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is about 5 V indicated?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– • Intermittent failure
• Loose or poor contact on the sensor
unit 5P (Black) connector

2. Sensor Unit Power Line Inspection
Check the sensor unit power line inspection (page
4-17).
Is the sensor unit power line normal?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Replace or repair the abnormal circuit.

3. MAP Sensor System Inspection 2
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[2]

Disconnect the sensor unit 5P (Black) connector [1].
Connect the sensor unit 5P (Black) connector
terminals at the wire harness side with a jumper wire
[2].
Connection: Violet/red – Green/yellow

G/Y

Turn the ignition switch ON.
Check the MAP sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is about 0 V indicated?

4-22

YES

– Faulty sensor unit (MAP sensor)

NO

– GO TO STEP 4.

[1]

V/R

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
4. MAP Sensor
Inspection

Output

Line

Open

Circuit

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Remove the jumper wire.
Disconnect the following:
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
[1]
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD) [1]

V/R

Check for continuity between the ECM/PCM 33P
connector and sensor unit 5P (Black) connector [2]
of the wire harness side.
Connection: Violet/red – Violet/red
TOOL:
Test probe

07ZAJ-RDJA110

V/R

[2]

[1]

Is there continuity?
YES

– Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.

NO

– Open circuit in the Violet/red wire

DTC 7-1 (ECT SENSOR LOW
VOLTAGE)
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. ECT Sensor System Inspection
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Check the ECT sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is about 0 V indicated?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Intermittent failure

2. ECT Sensor Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the ECT sensor 2P connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Check the ECT sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is about 0 V indicated?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– GO TO STEP 3.

4-23

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
3. ECT Sensor Resistance Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[1]

Measure the resistance at the ECT sensor [1]
terminals.
Standard: 1.0 – 1.3 kΩ (40°C/104°F)
Is the resistance within 1.0 – 1.3 kΩ (40°C/
104°F)?
YES

– Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.

NO

– Faulty ECT sensor

4. ECT Sensor Output Line Short Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[1]

Check for continuity between the ECT sensor 2P
connector [1] of the wire harness side and ground.
Connection: Pink/white – Ground
Is there continuity?
YES

– Short circuit in the Pink/white wire

NO

– Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.

DTC 7-2 (ECT SENSOR HIGH
VOLTAGE)
• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the ECT sensor 2P connector and
ECM 33P (Black) connector, then recheck the DTC.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the ECT sensor 2P connector and
PCM 33P (Gray) connector, then recheck the DTC.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. ECT Sensor System Inspection
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Check the ECT sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is about 5 V indicated?

4-24

YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Intermittent failure

P/W

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
2. ECT Sensor Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[1]

Disconnect the ECT sensor 2P connector [1].
Connect the ECT sensor 2P connector terminals at
the wire harness side with a jumper wire [2].
Connection: Pink/white – Green/yellow
Turn the ignition switch ON.

G/Y

P/W

Check the ECT sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is about 0 V indicated?
YES

– Inspect the ECT sensor (page 22-19).

NO

– GO TO STEP 3.
[2]

3. ECT Sensor Line Open Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Remove the jumper wire.
Disconnect the following:
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
[1]
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD) [1]

G/Y
G/Y

Check for continuities between the ECM/PCM 33P
connector and ECT sensor 2P connector [2] of the
wire harness side.
Connection: Pink/white – Pink/white
Green/yellow – Green/yellow
TOOL:
Test probe

P/W
P/W

[2]

[1]

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Is there continuity?
YES

– Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.

NO

– • Open circuit in the Pink/white wire
• Open circuit in the Green/yellow wire

4-25

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
DTC 8-1 (TP SENSOR LOW VOLTAGE)
• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the sensor unit 5P (Black) connector
and ECM 33P (Black) connector, then recheck the
DTC.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the sensor unit 5P (Black) connector
and PCM 33P (Gray) connector, then recheck the
DTC.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. TP Sensor System Inspection
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Check the TP sensor with the HDS pocket tester
with the throttle fully closed.
Is about 0 V indicated?
YES

– Intermittent failure

NO

– GO TO STEP 2.

2. Sensor Unit Power Line Inspection
Check the sensor unit power line inspection (page
4-17).
Is the sensor unit power line normal?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Replace or repair the abnormal circuit.

3. TP Sensor Output Line Short Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[1]

Disconnect the sensor unit 5P (Black) connector [1].
Check for continuity between the sensor unit 5P
(Black) connector of the wire harness side and
ground.
Connection: Red/yellow – Ground
Is there continuity?

4-26

YES

– Short circuit in the Red/yellow wire

NO

– GO TO STEP 4.

R/Y

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
4. TP Sensor Output Line Open Circuit Inspection
Disconnect the following:
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
[1]
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD) [1]
Check for continuity between the ECM/PCM 33P
connector and sensor unit 5P (Black) connector [2]
of the wire harness side.
Connection: Red/yellow – Red/yellow
TOOL:
Test probe

R/Y
R/Y

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 5.

NO

– Open circuit in the Red/yellow wire

[2]

[1]

5. TP Sensor Inspection
Replace the sensor unit with a known good one
(page 7-15).
Connect the following:
– Sensor unit 5P connector
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD)
Erase the DTCs (page 4-13).
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Check the TP sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 8-1 indicated?
YES

– Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.

NO

– Faulty original sensor unit (TP sensor)

DTC 8-2 (TP SENSOR HIGH VOLTAGE)
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. TP Sensor System Inspection
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Check the TP sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is about 5 V indicated?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– GO TO STEP 2.

2. TP Sensor Inspection
Check that the TP sensor voltage increases
continuously when moving the throttle from fully
closed to fully opened using the data list menu of the
HDS pocket tester.
Is the voltage increase continuously?
YES

– Intermittent failure

NO

– Replace the TP sensor (sensor unit) with a
known good one, and recheck.

4-27

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
3. TP Sensor Resistance Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the following:
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
[1]
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD) [1]

G/Y

Measure the resistance at the ECM/PCM 33P
connector of the wire harness side.
Connection: Red/yellow – Green/yellow
Standard:
0.29 – 0.71 Ω (20°C/68°F)

R/Y

Is the resistance within 0.29 – 0.71 Ω (20°C/
68°F)?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– Faulty sensor unit (TP sensor)

[1]

4. TP Sensor Power Input Voltage Inspection
Connect the following:

[1]

– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD)
Disconnect the sensor unit 5P (Black) connector [1].
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Measure the voltage at the sensor unit 5P (Black)
connector of the wire harness side.
Connection: Yellow/red (+) – Green/yellow (–)
Standard:
4.75 – 5.25 V
Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES

– Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.

NO

– • Open circuit in the Green/yellow wire
• Open circuit in the Yellow/red wire

DTC 9-1 (IAT SENSOR LOW VOLTAGE)
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. IAT Sensor System Inspection
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Check the IAT sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is about 0 V indicated?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Intermittent failure

2. IAT Sensor Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the IAT sensor 2P (Black) connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Check the IAT sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is about 0 V indicated?

4-28

YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Faulty IAT sensor

Y/R

G/Y

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
3. IAT Sensor Voltage Output Line Short Circuit
Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[1]

Check for continuity between the IAT sensor 2P
(Black) connector [1] of the wire harness side and
ground.
Connection: Gray/blue – Ground

Gr/Bu

Is there continuity?
YES

– Short circuit in the Gray/blue wire

NO

– Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.

DTC 9-2 (IAT SENSOR HIGH
VOLTAGE)
• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the IAT sensor 2P (Black) connector
and ECM 33P (Black) connector, then recheck the
DTC.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the IAT sensor 2P (Black) connector
and PCM 33P (Gray) connector, then recheck the
DTC.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. IAT Sensor System Inspection
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Check the IAT sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is about 5 V indicated?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Intermittent failure

2. IAT Sensor Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[1]

Disconnect the IAT sensor 2P (Black) connector [1].
Connect the IAT sensor 2P (Black) connector
terminals at the wire harness side with a jumper wire
[2].
Connection: Gray/blue – Green/yellow

Gr/Bu

G/Y

Turn the ignition switch ON.
Check the IAT sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is about 0 V indicated?
YES

– Faulty IAT sensor

NO

– GO TO STEP 3.

[2]

4-29

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
3. IAT Sensor Line Open Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the following:
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
[1]
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD) [1]

Gr/Bu
Gr/Bu

Check for continuity between the ECM/PCM 33P
connector and IAT sensor 2P (Black) connector [2]
of the wire harness side.
Connection: Gray/blue – Gray/blue
Green/yellow – Green/yellow
TOOL:
Test probe

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Is there continuity?
YES

– Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.

NO

– • Open circuit in the Gray/blue wire
• Open circuit in the Green/yellow wire

DTC 11-1 (VS SENSOR)
• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the VS sensor 3P (Black) and
combination meter 16P (Gray) connector, then
recheck the DTC.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the VS sensor 3P (Black) and PCM
33P (Black) connector, then recheck the DTC.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. VS Sensor System Inspection
Erase the DTCs (page 4-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle above 2,000 min-1 (rpm).
Stop the engine.
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Check the VS sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is the DTC 11-1 indicated?
YES

– • NC700X/XA/S/SA: GO TO STEP 2.
• NC700XD/SD: GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Intermittent failure

2. Speedometer Inspection
Check for operation of speedometer.
Does the speedometer operate normally?

4-30

YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Inspect the speedometer (page 22-8).

G/Y
G/Y

[2]

[1]

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
3. VS Sensor Input Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[1]

Disconnect the VS sensor 3P (Black) connector [1].
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Measure the voltage at the VS sensor 3P (Black)
connector of the wire harness side.
Connection: Pink/blue (+) – Green/red (–)
Standard:
Battery voltage

P/Bu

G/R

Is there battery voltage?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– • Open circuit in the Pink/blue wire
• Open circuit in the Green/red wire

4. VS Sensor Signal Line Short Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[1]

Check for continuity between the VS sensor 3P
(Black) connector [1] of the wire harness side and
ground.
Connection: Pink/green – Ground
P/G

Is there continuity?
YES

– Short circuit in the Pink/green wire

NO

– GO TO STEP 5.

5. VS Sensor Signal Line Open Circuit Inspection
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Disconnect the combination meter 16P (Gray)
connector [1].
Check for continuity between the VS sensor 3P
(Black) connector [2] and combination meter 16P
(Gray) connector of the wire harness side.
Connection: Pink/green – Pink/green

NC700X/XA/S/SA:

P/G

NC700XD/SD:
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Gray) connector [3].
Check for continuity between the VS sensor 3P
(Black) connector [4] and PCM 33P (Gray)
connector of the wire harness side.
Connection: Pink/green – Pink/green
TOOL:
Test probe

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 6.

NO

– Open circuit in the Pink/green wire

[1]

[2]

P/G

NC700XD/SD:

[4]

[3]

P/G
P/G

4-31

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
6. VS Sensor Inspection
Replace the VS Sensor with a known good one
(page 22-18).
Connect the following:
– Combination meter 16P (Gray) connector
(NC700X/XA/S/SA)
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD)
Erase the DTCs (page 4-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle above 2,000 min-1 (rpm).
Stop the engine.
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Check the VS sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is the DTC 11-1 indicated?
YES

– Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.

NO

– Faulty original VS sensor

DTC 12-1 (No.1 INJECTOR)
• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the injector 2P (Gray) connector and
ECM 33P (Black) connector, then recheck the DTC.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the injector 2P (Gray) connector and
PCM 33P (Gray) connector, then recheck the DTC.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. Injector System Inspection
Erase the DTCs (page 4-13).
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Check the injector with the HDS pocket tester.
Is the DTC 12-1 indicated?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Intermittent failure

2. Injector Input Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[1]

Disconnect the injector 2P (Gray) connector [1].
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Measure the voltage between the injector 2P (Gray)
connector of the wire harness side and ground.
Connection: Black (+) – Ground (–)
Standard:
Battery voltage
Does the standard voltage exist?

4-32

YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Open or short circuit in the Black wire

Bl

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
3. Injector Signal Line Short Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[1]

Check for continuity between the injector 2P (Gray)
connector [1] of wire harness side and ground.
Connection: No.1: Pink/yellow – Ground
No.2: Violet/yellow – Ground

P/Y or V/Y

Is there continuity?
YES

– • Short circuit in the Pink/yellow wire
• Short circuit in the Violet/yellow wire

NO

– GO TO STEP 4.

4. Injector Resistance Inspection
Measure the resistance between the injector 2P
(Gray) connector [1] terminals.
Standard: 11 – 13 Ω (20°C/68°F)

[1]

Is the resistance within 11 – 13 Ω (20°C/68°F)?
YES

– GO TO STEP 5.

NO

– Faulty injector

5. Injector Signal Line Open Circuit Inspection
Disconnect the following:

[2]

– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
[1]
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD) [1]

[1]

P/Y

Check for continuity between the ECM/PCM 33P
connector and injector 2P (Gray) connector [2] of
the wire harness side.
Connection: No.1: Pink/yellow – Pink/yellow
No.2: Violet/yellow – Violet/yellow
TOOL:
Test probe

P/Y

V/Y
V/Y

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Is there continuity?
YES

– Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.

NO

– • Open circuit in the Pink/yellow wire
• Open circuit in the Violet/yellow wire

[2]

DTC 13-1 (No.2 INJECTOR)
See page 4-32

4-33

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
DTC 21-1 (O2 SENSOR)
• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the O2 sensor 1P (Black) connector
or O2 sensor cap and ECM 33P (Black) connector,
then recheck the DTC.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the O2 sensor 1P (Black) connector
or O2 sensor cap and PCM 33P (Gray) connector,
then recheck the DTC.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. O2 Sensor System Inspection
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Start the engine and warm up the engine up to
coolant temperature is 80°C (176°F).
Test-ride the motorcycle and check the O2 sensor
with the HDS pocket tester.
Is the DTC 21-1 indicated?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Intermittent failure

2. O2 Sensor Short Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[1]

Disconnect the O2 sensor 1P (Black) connector [1].
Check for continuity between the O2 sensor 1P
(Black) connector of the wire harness side and
ground.
Connection: White/green – Ground

W/G

Is there continuity?
YES

– Short circuit in the White/green wire

NO

– GO TO STEP 3.

3. O2 Sensor Line Open Circuit Inspection 1
Disconnect the following:

[2]

[1]

– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
[1]
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD) [1]
Check for continuity between the ECM/PCM 33P
connector and O2 sensor 1P (Black) connector [2] of
the wire harness side.
Connection: White/green – White/green
TOOL:
Test probe

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Is there continuity?

4-34

YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– Open circuit in the White/green wire

W/G

W/G

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
4. O2 Sensor Line Open Circuit Inspection 2
Disconnect the O2 sensor cap [1].

[1]

[2]

Check for continuity between the O2 sensor cap and
O2 sensor 1P (Black) connector [2] of the sensor
side.
Connection: Black – Black
Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 5.

NO

– Open circuit in the Black wire

Bl

Bl

5. O2 Sensor Inspection
Replace the O2 sensor with a known good one
(page 4-69).
Connect the following:
– O2 sensor 1P (Black) connector
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD)
Erase the DTCs (page 4-13).
Start the engine and warm up the engine up to
coolant temperature is 80°C (176°C).
Test-ride the motorcycle and recheck the O2 sensor
with the HDS pocket tester.
Is the DTC 21-1 indicated?
YES

– Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.

NO

– Faulty original O2 sensor and/or O2 sensor
cord

DTC 29-1 (IACV)
• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the IACV 4P (Black) connector and
ECM 33P (Black) connector, then recheck the DTC.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the IACV 4P (Black) connector and
PCM 33P (Gray) connector, then recheck the DTC.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. Recheck DTC
Erase the DTCs (page 4-13).
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Check the IACV with the HDS pocket tester.
Is the DTC 29-1 indicated?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– • Intermittent failure
• Loose or poor contact on the IACV 4P
(Black) connector

4-35

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
2. IACV Short Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[1]

Disconnect the IACV 4P (Black) connector [1].
Check for continuities between the IACV 4P (Black)
connector of the wire harness side and ground.
Connection: Yellow/green – Ground
Gray/red – Ground
Violet/white – Ground
Pink/black – Ground

Y/G

Gr/R

P/Bl

V/W

Is there continuity?
YES

– • Short circuit in the Yellow/green or
Gray/red wire
• Short circuit in the Violet/white or Pink/
black wire

NO

– GO TO STEP 3.

3. IACV Open Circuit Inspection
Disconnect the following:

[2]

– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
[1]
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD) [1]

Gr/R

Check for continuities between the ECM/PCM 33P
connector and IACV 4P (Black) connector [2] of the
wire harness side.
Connection: Yellow/green – Yellow/green
Gray/red – Gray/red
Violet/white – Violet/white
Pink/black – Pink/black
TOOL:
Test probe

Gr/R

YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– • Open circuit in the Yellow/green or
Gray/red wire
• Open circuit in the Violet/white or Pink/
black wire

P/Bl

P/Bl

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Is there continuity?

Y/G

Y/G

V/W

V/W
[1]

4. IACV Resistance Inspection
Measure the resistance at the IACV 4P (Black)
connector [1] at the motor side.
Connection: A – D
B–C
Standard:
110 – 150 Ω (25°C/77°F)

A

D

B

C

Is the resistance within 110 – 150 Ω (25°C/77°F)?
YES

– Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.

NO

– Faulty IACV

[1]

4-36

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
DTC 33-2 (EEPROM)
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. Recheck DTC
Erase the DTCs (page 4-13).
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Recheck the ECM EEPROM.
Is the DTC 33-2 indicated?
YES

– Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.

NO

– Intermittent failure

DTC 54-1 (BANK ANGLE SENSOR
LOW VOLTAGE)
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. Recheck DTC
Erase the DTCs (page 4-13).
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Check the bank angle sensor with the HDS pocket
tester.
Is about 0 V indicated?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Intermittent failure

2. Bank Angle Sensor Power Input Line Short
Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[1]

Disconnect the bank angle sensor 2P (Black)
connector [1].
Check for continuity between the bank angle sensor
2P (Black) connector of the wire harness side and
ground.
Connection: Black/white – Ground

Bl/W

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Short circuit in the Black/white wire

4-37

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
3. Bank Angle Sensor Output Line Short Circuit
Inspection
Disconnect the following:

[1]

– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD)
Check for continuity between the bank angle sensor
2P (Black) connector [1] of the wire harness side
and ground.
Connection: Black/blue – Ground
Is there continuity?
YES

– Short circuit in the Black/blue wire

NO

– GO TO STEP 4.

4. Bank Angle Sensor Inspection
Replace the bank angle sensor with a known good
one (page 4-65).
Connect the following:
– Bank angle sensor 2P (Black) connector
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD)
Erase the DTCs (page 4-13).
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Check the bank angle sensor with the HDS pocket
tester.
Is DTC 54-1 indicated?
YES

– Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.

NO

– Faulty original bank angle sensor

DTC 54-2 (BANK ANGLE SENSOR
HIGH VOLTAGE)
• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the bank angle sensor 2P (Black)
connector and ECM 33P (Black) connector, then
recheck the DTC.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the bank angle sensor 2P (Black)
connector and PCM 33P (Gray) connector, then
recheck the DTC.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. Recheck DTC
Erase the DTCs (page 4-13).
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Check the bank angle sensor with the HDS pocket
tester.
Is about 5 V indicated?

4-38

YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Intermittent failure

Bl/Bu

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
2. Bank Angle
Inspection

Sensor

Power

Input

Voltage

Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[1]

Disconnect the bank angle sensor 2P (Black)
connector [1].
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Measure the voltage at the bank angle sensor
connector of the wire harness side and ground.
Connection: Black/white (+) – Ground (–)
Standard:
Battery voltage

Bl/W

Does the standard voltage exist?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Open circuit in the Black/white wire

3. Bank Angle Sensor Output Line Short Circuit
Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[1]

Disconnect the following:
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD)
Check for continuity between the bank angle sensor
2P (Black) connector [1] of the wire harness side
and ground.
Connection: Black/blue – Ground

Bl/Bu

Is there continuity?
YES

– Short circuit in the Black/blue wire

NO

– GO TO STEP 4.

4. Bank Angle Sensor Output Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Check for continuity between the ECM/PCM 33P
connector [1] and bank angle sensor 2P (Black)
connector [2] of the wire harness side.
Connection: Black/blue – Black/blue
TOOL:
Test probe

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Is there continuity?
YES

– • Inspect the bank angle sensor (page 466).
• Replace the ECM/PCM with a known
good one, and recheck.

NO

– Open circuit in the Black/blue wire

[2]

[1]

Bl/Bu
Bl/Bu

4-39

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
DTC 84-1 (CPU IN THE PCM
MALFUNCTION) (NC700XD/SD)
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Erase the DTCs (page 4-13).
Check the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 84-1 indicated?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Intermittent failure

DTC 86-1 (METER COMMUNICATION
MALFUNCTION)
• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the combination meter 16P (Gray)
connector and ECM 33P (Black) connector, then
recheck the DTC.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the combination meter 16P (Gray)
connector and PCM 33P (Gray) connector, then
recheck the DTC.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. Recheck DTC
Erase the DTCs (page 4-13).
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Check the meter communication with the HDS
pocket tester.
Is the DTC 86-1 indicated?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Intermittent failure

2. Combination Meter Serial Line Short Circuit
Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[1]

Disconnect the following:
– Combination meter 16P (Gray) connector [1]
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD)
Check for continuity between the combination meter
16P (Gray) connector of the wire harness side and
ground.
Connection: Red/blue – Ground
Is there continuity?

4-40

YES

– Short circuit in the Red/blue wire

NO

– GO TO STEP 3.

R/Bu

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
3. Combination Meter Serial Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[1]

[2]

Check for continuity between the combination meter
16P (Gray) connector [1] and ECM/PCM 33P
connector [2] of the wire harness side.
Connection: Red/blue – Red/blue
TOOL:
Test probe

R/Bu

07ZAJ-RDJA110

R/Bu

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– Open circuit in the Red/blue wire

4. Combination Meter Serial Line Output Voltage
Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Connect the
connector.

combination

meter

16P

(Gray)

Turn the ignition switch ON while pushing and
holding combination meter A button [1] and B button
[2] over 10 seconds.
The combination meter enters the communication
diagnostic mode.

[1]

Measure the voltage at the ECM/PCM 33P
connector [1] of the wire harness side and ground.
Connection: Red/blue (+) – Ground (–)
Standard:
8 V or more (Every 5 seconds)
TOOL:
Test probe

[2]

[1]

07ZAJ-RDJA110
R/Bu

Does the standard voltage exist?
YES

– GO TO STEP 5.

NO

– Inspect the combination meter (page 228).

5. ECM Serial Line Output Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the combination meter 16P (Gray)
connector.
Connect the following:
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD)
Remove the DLC [1] from the battery box.
Short the DLC terminals using a special tool.
Connection: Brown – Green
TOOL:
SCS connector [2]

070PZ-ZY30100

[1]

[2]

4-41

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
Rotate and hold the throttle grip [1] to the fully open
position.
Turn the ignition switch ON while holding the throttle
grip at the fully open position over 10 seconds.
The ECM enters the communication diagnostic
mode.

[1]

Measure the voltage at the combination meter 16P
(Gray) connector [1] of the wire harness side and
ground.
Connection: Red/blue (+) – Ground (–)
Standard:
8 V or more (Every 5 seconds)
Does the standard voltage exist?
YES

– Inspect the combination meter (page 228).

NO

– Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.

DTC 87-1 (EOP SWITCH
MALFUNCTION)
• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the combination meter 16P (Gray)
connector, EOP switch 1P (Gray) connector and
ECM 33P (Black) connector, then recheck the DTC.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the combination meter 16P (Gray)
connector, EOP switch 1P (Gray) connector and
PCM 33P (Gray) connector, then recheck the DTC.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. EOP Switch System Inspection
Erase the DTCs (page 4-13).
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Check the EOP switch with the HDS.
Is the DTC 87-1 indicated?

4-42

YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Intermittent failure

[1]

R/Bu

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
2. EOP Switch Output Line Open Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[1]

[2]

Disconnect the following:
– EOP switch 1P (Gray) connector [1]
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
[2]
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD) [2]
Check for continuity between the EOP switch 1P
(Gray) connector and ECM/PCM 33P connector of
the wire harness side.
Connection: Light green – Light green
TOOL:
Test probe

Lg

Lg

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Open circuit in the Light green wire

3. EOP Switch Inspection
Replace the EOP switch with a known good one.
Connect the following:
– EOP switch 1P (Gray) connector
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD)
Erase the DTCs (page 4-13).
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Check the EOP switch with the HDS.
Is the DTC 87-1 indicated?
YES

– Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.

NO

– Faulty original EOP switch

MIL TROUBLESHOOTING
MIL 1 BLINK (MAP SENSOR)
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. Sensor Unit Power Line Inspection
Check the sensor unit power line inspection (page
4-19).
Is the sensor unit power line normal?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Replace or repair the abnormal circuit.

4-43

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
2. MAP Sensor Output Voltage Inspection 1
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Measure the voltage at the test harness terminals.
Connection:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
32 (+) – 22 (–)
NC700XD/SD:
B32 (+) – B22 (–)

32 or B32

22 or B22

Standard: 0.50 – 3.41 V (20°C/68°F)
Is the voltage within 0.50 – 3.41 V (20°C/68°F)?
YES

– Intermittent failure

NO

– GO TO STEP 3.

3. MAP Sensor Output Voltage Inspection 2
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[1]

Disconnect the sensor unit 5P (Black) connector [1].
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Measure the voltage at the sensor unit 5P (Black)
connector of the wire harness side.
Connection: Violet/red (+) – Green/yellow (–)
Standard:
4.75 – 5.25 V

G/Y

Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES

– Faulty sensor unit (MAP sensor)

NO

– GO TO STEP 4.

4. MAP Sensor
Inspection

Output

Line

Short

Circuit

Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[1]

Check for continuity between the sensor unit 5P
(Black) connector [1] of the wire harness side and
ground.
Connection: Violet/red – Ground
Is there continuity?

4-44

YES

– Short circuit in the Violet/red wire

NO

– GO TO STEP 5.

V/R

V/R

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
5. MAP Sensor
Inspection

Output

Line

Open

Circuit

Check for continuity between the ECM test harness
and sensor unit 5P (Black) connector [1] of the wire
harness side.
Connection:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
32 – Violet/red
NC700XD/SD:
B32 – Violet/red

[1]

V/R
32 or B32

Is there continuity?
YES

– Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.

NO

– Open circuit in the Violet/red wire

MIL 7 BLINKS (ECT SENSOR)
• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the ECT sensor 2P connector and
ECM 33P (Black) connector, then recheck the MIL
blinking.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the ECT sensor 2P connector and
PCM 33P (Gray) connector, then recheck the MIL
blinking.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. ECT Sensor Output Voltage Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the ECM/PCM
33P connector(s).
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 4-13)
– NC700XD/SD (page 4-14)
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Measure the voltage at the ECM test harness
terminals.
Connection:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
20 (+) – 22 (–)
NC700XD/SD:
B20 (+) – B22 (–)

20 or B20

22 or B22

Standard: 2.7 – 3.1 V (20°C/68°F)
Is the voltage within 2.7 – 3.1 V (20°C/68°F)?
YES

– Intermittent failure

NO

– GO TO STEP 2.

4-45

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
2. ECT Sensor Input Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[1]

Disconnect the ECT sensor 2P connector [1].
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Measure the voltage at the ECT sensor 2P
connector of the wire harness side.
Connection: Pink/white (+) – Green/yellow (–)
Standard:
4.75 – 5.25 V

G/Y

P/W

Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– GO TO STEP 4.

3. ECT Sensor Resistance Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[1]

Measure the resistance at the ECT sensor [1]
terminals.
Standard: 1.0 – 1.3 kΩ (40°C/104°F)
Is the resistance within 1.0 – 1.3 kΩ (40°C/
104°F)?
YES

– Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.

NO

– Faulty ECT sensor

4. ECT Sensor Line Open Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Check for continuities between the ECM test
harness and ECT sensor 2P connector [1] of the
wire harness side.
Connection:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
20 – Pink/white
22 – Green/yellow
NC700XD/SD:
B20 – Pink/white
B22 – Green/yellow
Are there continuities?

4-46

YES

– GO TO STEP 5.

NO

– • Open circuit in the Pink/white wire
• Open circuit in the Green/yellow wire

[1]

P/W
G/Y

20 or B20

22 or B22

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
5. ECT Sensor Output Line Short Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the ECT sensor 2P
connector [1] of the wire harness side and ground.
Connection: Pink/white – Ground

[1]

Is there continuity?
YES

– Short circuit in the Pink/white wire

NO

– Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.

P/W

MIL 8 BLINKS (TP SENSOR)
1. Sensor Unit Power Line Inspection
Check the sensor unit power line inspection (page
4-19).
Is the sensor unit power line normal?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Replace or repair the abnormal circuit.

2. TP Sensor Output Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Measure the TP sensor output voltage at the ECM
test harness terminals.
Connection:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
33 (+) – 22 (–)
NC700XD/SD:
B33 (+) – B22 (–)

22 or B22

33 or B33

Standard: 0.29 – 0.71 V (throttle fully closed)
4.13 – 4.76 V (throttle fully opened)
Is there standard voltage?
YES

– Intermittent failure

NO

– GO TO STEP 3.

3. TP Sensor Output Line Short Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[1]

Disconnect the sensor unit 5P (Black) connector [1].
Check for continuity between the sensor unit 5P
(Black) connector of the wire harness side and
ground.
Connection: Red/yellow – Ground

R/Y

Is there continuity?
YES

– Short circuit in the Red/yellow wire

NO

– GO TO STEP 4.

4-47

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
4. TP Sensor Output Line Open Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the sensor unit 5P
(Black) connector [1] of the wire harness side and
ECM test harness.
Connection:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
33 – Red/yellow
NC700XD/SD:
B33 – Red/yellow

[1]

R/Y
33 or B33

Is there continuity?
YES

– Faulty sensor unit (TP sensor)

NO

– Open circuit in the Red/yellow wire

MIL 9 BLINKS (IAT SENSOR)
• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the IAT sensor 2P (Black) connector
and ECM 33P (Black) connector, then recheck the
MIL blinking.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the IAT sensor 2P (Black) connector
and PCM 33P (Gray) connector, then recheck the
MIL blinking.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. IAT Sensor Output Voltage Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the ECM/PCM
33P connector(s).
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 4-13)
– NC700XD/SD (page 4-14)
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Measure the voltage at the ECM test harness
terminals.
Connection:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
9 (+) – 22 (–)
NC700XD/SD:
B9 (+) – B22 (–)
Standard: 2.7 – 3.1 V (20°C/68°F)
Is the voltage within 2.7 – 3.1 V (20°C/68°F)?

4-48

YES

– Intermittent failure

NO

– GO TO STEP 2.

9 or B9

22 or B22

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
2. IAT Sensor Input Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[1]

Disconnect the IAT sensor 2P (Black) connector [1].
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Measure the voltage at the IAT sensor 2P (Black)
connector of the wire harness side.
Connection: Gray/blue (+) – Green/yellow (–)
Standard:
4.75 – 5.25 V

Gr/Bu

G/Y

Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– GO TO STEP 4.

3. IAT Sensor Resistance Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Measure the resistance at the IAT sensor terminals.
Standard: 2.2 – 2.7 kΩ (20°C/68°F)
Is the resistance within 2.2 – 2.7 kΩ (20°C/68°F)?
YES

– Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.

NO

– Faulty IAT sensor

4. IAT Sensor Line Open Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Check for continuity between the IAT sensor 2P
(Black) connector [1] of the wire harness side and
ECM test harness.
Connection:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
9 – Gray/blue
22 – Green/yellow
NC700XD/SD:
B9 – Gray/blue
B22 – Green/yellow

[1]

G/Y

Gr/Bu

22 or B22

9 or B9

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 5.

NO

– • Open circuit in the Gray/blue wire
• Open circuit in the Green/yellow wire

4-49

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
5. IAT Sensor Output Line Short Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the IAT sensor 2P
(Black) connector [1] of the wire harness side and
ground.
Connection: Gray/blue – Ground

[1]

Is there continuity?
YES

– Short circuit in the Gray/blue wire

NO

– Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.

Gr/Bu

MIL 11 BLINKS (VS SENSOR) (NC700X/
XA/S/SA)
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or poor
contact on the VS sensor 3P (Black) connector and
combination meter 16P (Gray) connector, then recheck
the MIL blinking.
1. Speedometer Inspection
Check for operation of speedometer.
Does the speedometer operate normally?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Inspect the combination meter (page 228).

2. VS Sensor Pulse Inspection
Support the motorcycle securely and raise the rear
wheel off the ground.

[1]

Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Measure the voltage between the combination
meter 16P (Gray) connector [1] and ground while
slowly turning the rear wheel by hand.
Connection: Pink/green (+) – Ground ( – )
Standard:
Repeat 0 to 5 V

P/G

Is the indicated voltage at the standard value?
YES

– Inspect the combination meter (page 228).

NO

– GO TO STEP 3.

3. VS Sensor Input Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[1]

Disconnect the VS sensor 3P (Black) connector [1].
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Measure the voltage at the VS sensor 3P (Black)
connector of the wire harness side.
Connection: Pink/blue (+) – Green/red ( – )
Standard:
Battery voltage
Is there battery voltage?

4-50

YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– • Open circuit in the Pink/blue wire
• Open circuit in the Green/red wire

P/Bu

G/R

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
4. VS Sensor Signal Line Open Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[2]

[1]

Disconnect the combination meter 16P (Gray)
connector [1].
Check for continuity between the VS sensor 3P
(Black) connector [2] and combination meter 16P
(Gray) connector of the wire harness side.
Connection: Pink/green – Pink/green

P/G

P/G

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 5.

NO

– Open circuit in the Pink/green wire

5. VS Sensor Signal Line Short Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the VS sensor 3P
(Black) connector [1] of the wire harness side and
ground.
Connection: Pink/green – Ground
Is there continuity?
YES

– Short circuit in the Pink/green wire

NO

– Faulty VS sensor

[1]

P/G

MIL 11 BLINKS (VS SENSOR)
(NC700XD/SD)
• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the VS sensor 3P (Black) connector
and PCM 33P (Black) connector, then recheck the
MIL blinking.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. VS Sensor Pulse Inspection
Support the motorcycle securely and raise the rear
wheel off the ground.
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM 33P
connectors (page 4-14).
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ".
Measure the voltage at the ECM test harness
terminal and ground while slowly turning the rear
wheel by hand.
Connection: A32 (+) – Ground (–)
Standard:
Repeat 0 to 5 V

A32

Is the indicated voltage at the standard value?
YES

– Intermittent failure

NO

– GO TO STEP 2.

4-51

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
2. VS Sensor Input Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[1]

Disconnect the VS sensor 3P (Black) connector [1].
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Measure the voltage at the VS sensor 3P (Black)
connector of the wire harness side.
Connection: Pink/blue (+) – Green/red (–)
Standard:
Battery voltage

P/Bu

G/R

Is there battery voltage?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– • Open circuit in the Pink/blue wire
• Open circuit in the Green/red wire

3. VS Sensor Signal Line Open Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Check for continuity between the VS sensor 3P
(Black) connector [1] of the wire harness side and
ECM test harness.
Connection: A32 – Pink/green
Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– Open circuit in the Pink/green wire

A32

P/G

[1]

4. VS Sensor Signal Line Short Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the VS sensor 3P
(Black) connector [1] of the wire harness side and
ground.
Connection: Pink/green – Ground
Is there continuity?
YES

– Short circuit in the Pink/green wire

NO

– GO TO STEP 5.

5. VS Sensor Inspection
Replace the VS sensor with a known good one
(page 22-18).
Erase the DTCs (page 4-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle above 2,000 min-1 (rpm).
Stop the engine and recheck the MIL blinking.
Does the MIL blink 11 times?

4-52

YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Faulty original VS sensor

[1]

P/G

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
MIL 12 BLINKS (No.1 INJECTOR)
• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the injector 2P (Gray) connector and
ECM 33P (Black) connector, then recheck the MIL
blinking.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the injector 2P (Gray) connector and
PCM 33P (Gray) connector, then recheck the MIL
blinking.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. Injector Input Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[1]

Disconnect the injector 2P (Gray) connector [1].
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Bl

Measure the voltage between the injector 2P (Gray)
connector of the wire harness side and ground.
Connection: Black (+) – Ground (–)
Standard:
Battery voltage
Does the standard voltage exist?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Open circuit in the Black wire

2. Injector Signal Line Short Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[1]

Check for continuity between the injector 2P (Gray)
connector [1] of the wire harness side and ground.
Connection: No.1: Pink/yellow – Ground
No.2: Violet/yellow – Ground

P/Y or V/Y

Is there continuity?
YES

– • Short circuit in the Pink/yellow wire
• Short circuit in the Violet/yellow wire

NO

– GO TO STEP 3.

3. Injector Resistance Inspection
Measure the resistance at the injector [1] terminals.
Standard: 11 – 13 Ω (20°C/68°F)

[1]

Is the resistance within 11 – 13 Ω (20°C/68°F)?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– Faulty injector

4-53

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
4. Injector Signal Line Open Circuit Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the ECM/PCM
33P connector(s).

[1]

– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 4-13)
– NC700XD/SD (page 4-14)
Check for continuity between the ECM test harness
and injector 2P (Gray) connector [1] of the wire
harness side.
Connection:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
No.1: 5 – Pink/yellow
No.2: 4 – Violet/yellow
NC700XD/SD:
No.1: B5 – Pink/yellow
No.2: B4 – Violet/yellow
Is there continuity?
YES

– Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.

NO

– • Open circuit in the Pink/yellow wire
• Open circuit in the Violet/yellow wire

MIL 13 BLINKS (No.2 INJECTOR)
See page 4-53

MIL 21 BLINKS (O2 SENSOR)
• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the O2 sensor 1P (Black) connector
or O2 sensor cap and ECM 33P (Black) connector,
then recheck the MIL blinking.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the O2 sensor 1P (Black) connector
or O2 sensor cap and PCM 33P (Gray) connector,
then recheck the MIL blinking.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. O2 Sensor System Inspection
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Start the engine and warm up the engine up to
coolant temperature is 80°C (176°F).
Test-ride the motorcycle and recheck the MIL
blinking.
Does the MIL blink 21 times?

4-54

YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Intermittent failure

P/Y
5 or B5

4 or B4
V/Y

[1]

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
2. O2 Sensor Line Short Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[1]

Disconnect the O2 sensor 1P (Black) connector [1].
Check for continuity between the O2 sensor 1P
(Black) connector of the wire harness side and
ground.
Connection: White/green – Ground

W/G

Is there continuity?
YES

– Short circuit in the White/green wire

NO

– GO TO STEP 3.

3. O2 Sensor Line Open Circuit Inspection 1
Connect the ECM test harness to the ECM/PCM
33P connector(s).

[1]

– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 4-13)
– NC700XD/SD (page 4-14)
Check for continuity between the ECM test harness
and O2 sensor 1P (Black) connector [1] of the wire
harness side.
Connection:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
29 – White/green
NC700XD/SD:
B29 – White/green

W/G

29 or B29

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– Open circuit in the White/green wire

4. O2 Sensor Line Open Circuit Inspection 2
Disconnect the O2 sensor cap [1].

[1]

[2]

Check for continuity between the O2 sensor cap and
O2 sensor 1P (Black) connector [2] of the sensor
side.
Connection: Black – Black
Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 5.

NO

– Open circuit in the Black wire

Bl

Bl

4-55

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
5. O2 Sensor Inspection
Replace the O2 sensor with a known good one
(page 4-69).
Disconnect the ECM test harness and connect the
ECM/PCM connector(s).
Erase the DTCs (page 4-13).
Start the engine and warm up the engine up to
coolant temperature is 80°C (176°F).
Test-ride the motorcycle and recheck the MIL
blinking.
Does the MIL blink 21 times?
YES

– Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.

NO

– Faulty original O2 sensor

MIL 29 BLINKS (IACV)
• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the IACV 4P (Black) connector and
ECM 33P (Black) connector, then recheck the MIL
blinking.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the IACV 4P (Black) connector and
PCM 33P (Gray) connector, then recheck the MIL
blinking.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. IACV Resistance Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the IACV 4P (Black) connector [1].
Measure the resistance at the IACV 4P (Black)
connector at the motor side.
Connection: A – D
B–C
Standard:
110 – 150 Ω (25°C/77°F)
Is the resistance within 110 – 150 Ω (25°C/77°F)?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Faulty IACV
[1]

4-56

A

D

B

C

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
2. IACV Short Circuit Inspection
Check for continuities between the IACV 4P (Black)
connector [1] of the wire harness side and ground.
Connection: Gray/red – Ground
Yellow/green – Ground
Violet/white – Ground
Pink/black – Ground

[1]

Y/G

Is there continuity?
YES

– • Short circuit in the Yellow/green or
Gray/red wire
• Short circuit in the Violet/white or Pink/
black wire

NO

– GO TO STEP 3.

Gr/R

P/Bl

V/W

3. IACV Open Circuit Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the ECM/PCM
33P connector(s).
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 4-13)
– NC700XD/SD (page 4-14)
Check for continuities between the ECM test
harness and IACV 4P (Black) connector [1] of the
wire harness side.
Connection:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
17 – Yellow/green
15 – Gray/red
16 – Violet/white
3 – Pink/black
NC700XD/SD:
B17 – Yellow/green
B15 – Gray/red
B16 – Violet/white
B3 – Pink/black

15 or B15
Gr/R

3 or B3
17 or B17

Y/G

P/Bl

V/W

16 or B16

[1]

Is there continuity?
YES

– Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.

NO

– • Open circuit in the Yellow/green or
Gray/red wire
• Open circuit in the Violet/white or Pink/
black wire

4-57

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
MIL 54 BLINKS (BANK ANGLE
SENSOR)
• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the bank angle sensor 2P (Black)
connector and ECM 33P (Black) connector, then
recheck the MIL blinking.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the bank angle sensor 2P (Black)
connector and PCM 33P (Gray) connector, then
recheck the MIL blinking.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. Bank Angle
Inspection

Sensor

Power

Input

Voltage

Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[1]

Disconnect the bank angle sensor 2P (Black)
connector [1].
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Measure the voltage at the bank angle sensor 2P
(Black) connector of the wire harness side and
ground.
Connection: Black/white (+) – Ground (–)
Standard:
Battery voltage

Bl/W

Does the standard voltage exist?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Open circuit in the Black/white wire

2. Bank Angle Sensor Output Line Short Circuit
Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[1]

Disconnect the following:
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD)
Check for continuity between the bank angle sensor
2P (Black) connector [1] of the wire harness side
and ground.
Connection: Black/blue – Ground
Is there continuity?

4-58

YES

– Short circuit in the Black/blue wire

NO

– GO TO STEP 3.

Bl/Bu

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
3. Bank Angle Sensor Output Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the ECM/PCM
33P connector(s).

[1]

– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 4-13)
– NC700XD/SD (page 4-14)
Check for continuity between the ECM test harness
and bank angle sensor 2P (Black) connector [1] of
the wire harness side.
Connection:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
21 – Black/blue
NC700XD/SD:
B21 – Black/blue

Bl/Bu

21 or B21

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– Open circuit in the Black/blue wire

4. Bank Angle Sensor Inspection
Inspect the bank angle sensor (page 4-66).
Is the bank angle sensor operation normal?
YES

– Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.

No

– Faulty bank angle sensor

MIL 84 BLINKS (CPU IN THE PCM
MALFUNCTION) (NC700XD/SD)
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Erase the DTCs (page 4-13).
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ", and check the MIL blinking.
Does the MIL blink 84 times?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Intermittent failure

4-59

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
MIL 86 BLINKS (METER
COMMUNICATION MALFUNCTION)
• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the combination meter 16P (Gray)
connector and ECM 33P (Black) connector, then
recheck the MIL blinking.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the combination meter 16P (Gray)
connector and PCM 33P (Gray) connector, then
recheck the MIL blinking.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. Combination Meter Serial Line Output Voltage
Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the ECM/PCM
33P connector(s).
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 4-13)
– NC700XD/SD (page 4-14)
Disconnect the following:
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD)
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" " while pushing and holding combination meter A
button [1] and B button [2] over 10 seconds.
The combination meter enter the communication
diagnostic mode.

[1]

[2]

Measure the voltage at the ECM test harness
terminal and ground.
Connection:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
13 (+) – Ground (–)
NC700XD/SD:
B13 (+) – Ground (–)
Standard: 8 V or more (Every 5 seconds)

13 or B13

Does the standard voltage exist?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Inspect the combination meter (page 228).

2. ECM/PCM Serial Line Output Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the combination meter 16P (Gray)
connector.
Connect the following:
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD)
Remove the DLC [1] from the battery box.
Short the DLC terminals using a special tool.
Connection: Brown – Green
TOOL:
SCS connector [2]

4-60

070PZ-ZY30100

[1]

[2]

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
Rotate and hold the throttle grip [1] to the fully open
position.
Turn the ignition switch ON while holding the throttle
grip at the fully open position over 10 seconds.
The ECM/PCM
diagnostic mode.

enters

the

communication

[1]

Measure the voltage at the combination meter 16P
(Gray) connector [1] of the wire harness side and
ground.
Connection: Red/blue (+) – Ground (–)
Standard:
8 V or more (Every 5 seconds)
Does the standard voltage exist?
YES

– Inspect the combination meter (page 228).

NO

– Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.

[1]

R/Bu

4-61

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
MIL 87 BLINKS (EOP SWITCH
MALFUNCTION)
• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the combination meter 16P (Gray)
connector, EOP switch 1P (Gray) connector and
ECM 33P (Black) connector, then recheck the MIL
blinking.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the combination meter 16P (Gray)
connector, EOP switch 1P (Gray) connector and
PCM 33P (Gray) connector, then recheck the MIL
blinking.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. EOP Switch Output Line Open Circuit Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the ECM/PCM
33P connector(s).

[1]

– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 4-13)
– NC700XD/SD (page 4-14)
Disconnect the EOP switch 1P (Gray) connector [1].
Check for continuity between the ECM test harness
and the EOP switch 1P (Gray) connector of the wire
harness side.
Connection:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
31 – Light green
NC700XD/SD:
B31 – Light green
TOOL:
Test probe

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Open circuit in the Light green wire

2. EOP Switch Inspection
Replace the EOP switch with a known good one
(page 22-20).
Erase the DTCs (page 4-13).
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Check the MIL blinking
Does the MIL blink 87 times?

4-62

YES

– Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.

NO

– Faulty original EOP switch

Lg

31 or B31

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM

MIL CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
Check that the MIL comes on for 2 seconds and goes
off when the ignition switch is turned ON and engine
stop switch " ".

NC700X/XA/S/SA:
[1]

[2]

If the MIL dose not come on at all, inspect the
combination meter (page 22-10).
NC700X/XA/S/SA:

If the MIL [1] and engine oil pressure indicator [2] are
stay on, and the tachometer, high coolant temperature
indicator and HISS indicator do not come on, inspect
the TXD/RXD line (page 22-11).

NC700XD/SD:

If the MIL [3] and engine oil pressure indicator [4] stay
on, the shift indicator "–" [5] is blinking, and the
tachometer, high coolant temperature indicator and
HISS indicator do not come on, inspect the TXD/RXD
line (page 22-11).
NC700XD/SD:
[3]

[4]

[5]

If the MIL stays on, check as follows:

[1]

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Remove the following:
– Shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA) (page 2-14)
– Side cowl (NC700S/SA) (page 2-13)
– Luggage box lid/hinge assembly (NC700XD/SD)
(page 2-19)

Br

Disconnect the following:
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA) [1]
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD) [1]
Check for continuity between the ECM/PCM 33P
connector of the wire harness side and ground.
CONNECTION: Brown – Ground
STANDARD:
No continuity
TOOL:
Test probe

07ZAJ-RDJA110

If there is continuity, check for short circuit in the Brown
wire between the DLC and ECM/PCM.
If there is no continuity, Replace the ECM/PCM with a
known good one, and recheck.

4-63

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM

FUEL CUT RELAY
INSPECTION
Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).
Open the fuse/relay box cover and remove the fuel cut
relay [1].

[1]

Connect a ohmmeter to the fuel cut relay [1] terminals.

[1]

Connect a 12 V battery to the fuel cut relay terminals as
shown.
There should be continuity only when 12 V battery is
connected.
If there is no continuity only when the 12 V battery is
connected, replace the fuel cut relay.

ECT SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Drain the coolant (page 8-6).
Remove the ECT
sensor while the
engine is cold.

Disconnect the ECT sensor 2P connector [1].
Remove the ECT sensor [2] and O-ring [3].
Install a new O-ring onto the ECT sensor and install
them.
Tighten the ECT sensor to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Connect the ECT sensor 2P connector.
Fill the cooling system with recommended coolant
(page 8-6).
[1]

4-64

[2]

[3]

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM

BANK ANGLE SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the luggage box (page 2-19).

[2]

Remove the bolts [1] and ECM box [2] from the frame.

[1]

Disconnect the bank angle sensor 2P (Black) connector
[1].

[1]

Remove the bank angle sensor mounting bolts [2] and
bank angle sensor [3].

[3]

[2]

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Install the bank angle sensor with its "UP" mark [1]
facing up.
TORQUE:
Bank angle sensor mounting bolt:
10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)

[1]

4-65

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
SYSTEM INSPECTION WITH HDS
POCKET TESTER
Connect the HDS pocket tester (page 4-12).
Remove the bank angle sensor (page 4-65).
60° BANK ANGLE POSITION

Connect the bank angle sensor 2P (Black) connector.
Place the bank angle sensor is horizontal as shown.
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " ".
Read the voltage with the HDS pocket tester.
STANDARD: 7.0 – 8.8 V
Incline the bank angle sensor approximately 60° to the
left or right with keeping the ignition switch ON.
Read the voltage with HDS pocket tester.

approximately 60°

STANDARD: 0.40 – 0.84 V

HORIZONTAL

approximately 60°

SYSTEM INSPECTION WITH ECM
TEST HARNESS
Connect the ECM test harness to the ECM/PCM 33P
connector(s).

[1]

– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 4-13)
– NC700XD/SD (page 4-14)
Remove the bank angle sensor (page 4-65).
Connect the bank angle sensor 2P (Black) connector.

6 or B6

21 or B21

Place the bank angle sensor horizontal as shown.
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " ".
Measure the output voltage at the ECM test harness [1]
terminals.
CONNECTION:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
21 (+) – 6 (–)
NC700XD/SD:
B21 (+) – B6 (–)

60° BANK ANGLE POSITION

STANDARD: 7.0 – 8.8 V
Incline the bank angle sensor approximately 60° to the
left or right with keeping the ignition switch ON and
engine stop switch " ".
Measure the output voltage at the ECM test harness
terminals.
CONNECTION:
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
21 (+) – 6 (–)
NC700XD/SD:
B21 (+) – B6 (–)
STANDARD: 0.40 – 0.84 V

4-66

approximately 60°

HORIZONTAL

approximately 60°

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM

ECM (NC700X/XA/S/SA)/PCM
(NC700XD/SD)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700X/
XA/S/SA)
Remove the shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA) (page 214).

[2]

Remove the side cowl (NC700S/SA) (page 2-13).
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the ECM 33P (Black) connector [1].
Release the band [2] from the ECM and remove the
ECM from the ECM box.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
If the ECM is replaced, perform the Key Registration
Procedures (page 23-6).

[1]

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700XD/
SD)
Remove the luggage box lid/hinge assembly (page 219).

[1]

[2]

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Black) connector [1] and
PCM 33P (Gray) connector [2].
Release the band [3] from the PCM and remove the
PCM from the ECM box.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12120)

[3]

4-67

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
ECM/PCM POWER/GROUND LINE
INSPECTION
• NC700X/XA/S/SA:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the ECM 33P (Black) connector and
recheck the MIL blinking.
• NC700XD/SD:
Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the PCM 33P (Gray) connector and
recheck the MIL blinking.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
ENGINE DOES NOT START (MIL does not blink)
1. ECM/PCM Power Input Voltage Inspection
Remove the following:

NC700X/XA/S/SA:

– Shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA) (page 2-14)
– Side cowl (NC700S/SA) (page 2-13)
– Luggage box lid/hinge assembly (NC700XD/SD)
(page 2-19)
Disconnect the following:
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
[1]
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD) [2]

[1]
NC700XD/SD:

[2]

Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".

[1]

Measure the voltage at the ECM/PCM 33P
connector [1] of the wire harness side and ground.
Connection: Black (+) – Ground (–)
Standard:
Battery voltage
Bl

TOOL:
Test probe

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Does the standard voltage exist?

4-68

YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– •
•
•
•
•

Open or short circuit in the Black wire
Faulty ignition switch
Blown main fuse 30 A
Blown sub fuse 7.5 A (ENG STOP)
Faulty engine stop switch

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
2. ECM/PCM Ground Line Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[1]

Check for continuities between the ECM/PCM 33P
connector [1] of the wire harness side and ground.
Connection: Green/orange – Ground
Green – Ground
TOOL:
Test probe

G/O

07ZAJ-RDJA110

G

Is there continuity?
YES

– Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.

NO

– • Open circuit in the Green/orange wire
• Open circuit in the Green wire

O2 SENSOR
• Do not get grease, oil or other materials in the O2
sensor air hole.
• The O2 sensor may be damaged if dropped. Replace
it with a new one, if dropped.
• Handle the O2 sensor with care.
• Do not service the O2 sensor while it is hot.

REMOVAL
Remove the lower cowl (page 2-28).
Release the O2 sensor wire from the clamp [1] and
radiator reserve tank guide [2].
Remove the radiator reserve tank (page 8-14).
Disconnect the O2 sensor cap [3].

[1]

[2]

[3]

Remove the O2 sensor [1].

Do not use an impact wrench while removing or
installing the O2 sensor, or it may be damaged.

[1]

4-69

dummyhead

PGM-FI SYSTEM
INSTALLATION
Install and hand tighten the O2 sensor [1].
Tighten the O2 sensor to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 24.5 N·m (2.5 kgf·m, 18 lbf·ft)

[1]

Connect the O2 sensor cap [1].

[1]

• Take care not to tilt the O2 sensor cap when
connecting the cap to the O2 sensor.
• Do not turn the O2 sensor cap, after connecting it.
Install the radiator reserve tank (page 8-14).
Install the O2 sensor wire to the clamp [2] and radiator
reserve tank guide [3].
Install the lower cowl (page 2-28).
[2]

4-70

[3]

dummytext

5. IGNITION SYSTEM

5

SYSTEM LOCATION·····································5-2

IGNITION SYSTEM INSPECTION ················ 5-6

SYSTEM DIAGRAM ······································5-3

IGNITION TIMING ········································· 5-9

SERVICE INFORMATION ·····························5-4

IGNITION COIL ··········································· 5-10

TROUBLESHOOTING···································5-5

CKP SENSOR ············································· 5-11

5-1

dummyhead

IGNITION SYSTEM

SYSTEM LOCATION
IGNITION SYSTEM

NC700X/XA/S/SA:
IGNITION SWITCH

ENGINE STOP SWITCH
IGNITION COILS

CLUTCH SWITCH

MAIN FUSE 30 A
BATTERY
ECM

FUSE BOX
SPARK PLUGS
CKP SENSOR
NEUTRAL SWITCH

BANK ANGLE SENSOR
SIDESTAND SWITCH

NC700XD/SD:
ENGINE STOP SWITCH
IGNITION COILS
MAIN FUSE 30 A
BATTERY
PCM

IGNITION SWITCH

FUSE BOX
SPARK PLUGS
CKP SENSOR
NEUTRAL SWITCH

BANK ANGLE SENSOR
SIDESTAND SWITCH

5-2

dummyhead

IGNITION SYSTEM

SYSTEM DIAGRAM
NC700X/XA/S/SA:

Bl

Bl

R
MAIN FUSE IGNITION
30 A
SWITCH

ECM
FI
15 A

R/Bl
BATTERY

Bl/Bu

8P
(BLUE)

W/Y
ENGINE STOP
SWITCH

Br/Bl
Bl

W/Y

Y/Bu
Bu/Y

G/W
G

Y
G/R

BANK
ANGLE
SENSOR

ENG STOP
7.5 A

Bl/R
Bl: Black
Br: Brown
Bu: Blue
G: Green
Lg: Light green
O: Orange
R: Red
W: White
Y: Yellow

Bl/W

Bl

G/O
2P (RED)
Y

W/Y
CKP
SENSOR

Br/Bl

Br
FUEL CUT RELAY
Br

To NEUTRAL
INDICATOR

Br
Bu/Y

Y/Bu

No 1.
IGNITION
COIL

10P/14P
(GRAY)

No 2.
IGNITION
COIL

Lg
Bl

SPARK
PLUG

SPARK
PLUG

NEUTRAL
DIODE

SIDESTAND SWITCH

G

Bl

NEUTRAL
SWITCH

CLUTCH
SWITCH

NC700XD/SD:

Bl

R
Bl MAIN FUSE
30 A

PCM
IGNITION
SWITCH

FI
15 A

R/Bl
BATTERY

Bl/W

Bl/Bu

8P
(BLUE)

W/Y
ENGINE STOP
SWITCH

Br/Bl
Bl

W/Y
ENG STOP
7.5 A

Bl

Bl/R

Y/Bu
Bu/Y

G/W
G

Y
Lg

BANK
ANGLE
SENSOR

G/O
2P (RED)
Y

W/Y
CKP
SENSOR

Br/Bl

Br
FUEL CUT RELAY

Br

Br
Bu/Y

Y/Bu
G

No 1.
IGNITION
COIL
SPARK
PLUG

No 2.
IGNITION
COIL
SPARK
PLUG

SIDESTAND
SWITCH

Lg
NEUTRAL
SWITCH

Bl: Black
Br: Brown
Bu: Blue
G: Green
Lg: Light green
O: Orange
R: Red
W: White
Y: Yellow

5-3

dummyhead

IGNITION SYSTEM

SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
• The ECM/PCM may be damaged if dropped. Also if the connector is disconnected when current is flowing, the excessive
voltage may damage the module. Always turn off the ignition switch before servicing.
• Use spark plug of the correct heat range. Using a spark plug with an incorrect heat range can damage the engine.
• When servicing the ignition system, always follow the steps in the troubleshooting table (page 5-5).
• Some electrical components may be damaged if terminals or connectors are connected or disconnected while the ignition switch
is turned to ON position and current is present.
• A faulty ignition system is often related to poorly connected or corroded connections. Check those connections before
proceeding.
• Make sure the battery is adequately charged. Using the starter motor with a weak battery results in a slower engine cranking
speed as well as no spark at the spark plug.
• For ECM/PCM service (page 4-67).
• Refer to following components informations:
– Ignition switch (page 22-24)
– Engine stop switch (page 22-25)
– Bank angle sensor (page 4-65)
– Sidestand switch (page 22-28)
– Neutral switch (page 22-27)
• The following color codes are used throughout this section.
Bl = Black
Br = Brown

Bu = Blue
G = Green

Lg = Light green
O = Orange

R = Red
W = White

Y = Yellow

SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM
Spark plug (Iridium)
Spark plug gap
Ignition coil peak voltage
CKP sensor peak voltage (at 20°C/68°F)
Ignition timing ("F" mark)

SPECIFICATIONS
IFR6G-11K (NGK)
1.0 – 1.1 mm (0.039 – 0.043 in)
100 V minimum
0.7 V minimum
12° BTDC at idle

TORQUE VALUE
ITEM

Q'TY

Timing hole cap
Right crankcase cover wire clamp
bolt (NC700XD/SD)

1
2

5-4

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
14
6

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
10 (1.0, 7)
12 (1.2, 9)

REMARKS
Apply grease to the threads.
Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip

dummyhead

IGNITION SYSTEM

TROUBLESHOOTING
• Inspect the following before diagnosing the system.
– Faulty spark plug
– Loose spark plug cap or spark plug wire connection
– Water got into the spark plug cap (Leaking the ignition coil secondary voltage)
• If there is no spark at cylinder, temporarily exchange the ignition coil with a known-good one and perform the spark test. If there
is spark, the original ignition coil is faulty.
• "Initial voltage" of the ignition primary coil is the battery voltage with the ignition switch turned ON and engine stop switch " "
(The engine is not cranked by the starter motor).
No spark at spark plug
Ignition coil
primary voltage

Unusual condition
No initial voltage with the ignition
switch turned ON and engine
stop switch " " (Other electrical
components are normal).

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Initial voltage is normal, but it
drops by 2 – 4 V while cranking
the engine.

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

8.
9.
Initial voltage is normal but there
is no peak voltage while cranking
the engine.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Initial voltage is normal but peak
voltage is lower than the
standard value.

1.
2.
3.
4.

Initial and peak voltages are
normal but no spark jumps.
CKP sensor

Peak voltage is lower than
standard value.

1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.

No peak voltage

1.
2.

Probable cause (Check in numerical order)
Faulty ignition switch
Faulty engine stop switch
Faulty fuel cut relay or its related circuits
An open circuit in Brown wire between the ignition coil and fuel
cut relay
Loose or poor connection of the primary terminal, or an open
circuit in the primary coil
Faulty ECM/PCM (in case when the initial voltage is normal with
the ECM/PCM connector disconnected).
Incorrect peak voltage adaptor connections (System is normal if
measured voltage is over the specifications with reverse
connections).
Battery is undercharged (Voltage drops largely when the engine
is started).
No voltage between the Black (+) wire and body ground (–) at the
ECM/PCM connector or loosen ECM/PCM connection
An open circuit or loose connection in Green/orange wire at the
ECM/PCM
An open circuit or loose connection in Blue/yellow or Yellow/blue
wire between the ignition coil and ECM/PCM
Faulty sidestand switch, neutral diode (NC700X/XA/S/SA) or
neutral switch
Loose or poor connection or an open circuit in No. 6 related wires
– Sidestand switch line: Green/white and Green
– Neutral switch line (NC700X/XA/S/SA): Green/red and Light
green
– Neutral switch line (NC700XD/SD): Light green
Faulty CKP sensor (Measure peak voltage)
Faulty ECM/PCM (in case when above No. 1 through 8 are
normal).
Incorrect peak voltage adaptor connections
Faulty peak voltage adaptor
Faulty CKP sensor
Faulty ECM/PCM (in case when above No. 1 through 3 are
normal).
The multimeter impedance is too low; below 10 MΩ/DCV.
Cranking speed is too slow (Battery is undercharged).
The sampling timing of the tester and measured pulse were not
synchronized (System is normal if measured voltage is over the
standard voltage at least once).
Faulty ECM/PCM (in case when above No. 1 through 3 are
normal).
Faulty spark plug or leaking ignition coil secondary current
ampere
Faulty ignition coil
The multimeter impedance is too low; below 10 MΩ/DCV.
Cranking speed is too low. (Battery is undercharged.)
The sampling timing of the tester and measured pulse were not
synchronized (System is normal if measured voltage is over the
standard voltage at least once).
Faulty CKP sensor (in case when above No.1 through 3 are
normal).
Faulty peak voltage adapter
Faulty CKP sensor

5-5

dummyhead

IGNITION SYSTEM

IGNITION SYSTEM INSPECTION
• If there is no spark at the plug, check all connections
for loose or poor contact before measuring the peak
voltage.
• Use a commercially available digital multimeter with
an impedance of 10 MΩ/DCV minimum.
• The display value differs depending upon the
internal impedance of the multimeter.
• If using the Imrie diagnostic tester (model 625),
follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
Connect the peak voltage adaptor [1] to the digital
multimeter [2], or use the Imrie diagnostic tester.

[2]

TOOL:
Imrie diagnostic tester (model 625) or
Peak voltage adaptor
07HGJ-0020100
with commercially available digital multimeter
(impedance 10 MΩ/DCV minimum)

[1]

IGNITION COIL PRIMARY PEAK
VOLTAGE
• Check all system connections before performing this
inspection. Loose connectors can cause incorrect
readings.
• If the system is disconnected, incorrect peak voltage
might be measured.
• Check the cylinder compression and check that the
spark plug is installed correctly in the cylinder head.
Disconnect the spark plug caps (page 3-8).
Connect a known good spark plug [1] to the spark plug
cap and ground it to the cylinder head as done in a
spark test.

[1]

5-6

dummyhead

IGNITION SYSTEM
Remove the shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA/XD) (page
2-14).
Remove the side cowl (NC700S/SA/SD) (page 2-13)
Do not disconnect
the ignition coil
primary wire.

With the ignition coil primary wire connected, connect
the peak voltage adaptor or Imrie tester to the ignition
coil primary terminal [1] and ground.
TOOL:
Imrie diagnostic tester (model 625) or
Peak voltage adaptor
07HGJ-0020100
with commercially available digital multimeter
(impedance 10 MΩ/DCV minimum)
CONNECTION:
No.1: Blue/yellow (+) – Ground (–)
No.2: Yellow/blue (+) – Ground (–)

[1]

Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " ".
Check the initial voltage at this time.
The battery voltage should be measured.
If the initial voltage cannot be measured, follow the
checks described in the troubleshooting table (page 55).
Shift the transmission into neutral.
Avoid touching the
spark plug and
tester probes to
prevent electric
shock.

Crank the engine with the starter motor and measure
the ignition coil primary peak voltage.
PEAK VOLTAGE: 100 V minimum
If the peak voltage is abnormal, follow the checks
described in the troubleshooting table (page 5-5).
Install the shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA/XD) (page 214).
Install the side cowl (NC700S/SA/SD) (page 2-13).

CKP SENSOR PEAK VOLTAGE
(NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Check the cylinder compression and check that the
spark plugs are installed correctly in the cylinder head.
Disconnect the ECM 33P (Black) connector [1] (page 467).

[2]

Connect the peak voltage tester or adaptor probes to
the ECM 33P (Black) connector terminals of the wire
harness side.
TOOLS:
Imrie diagnostic tester (model 625) or
Peak voltage adaptor [2]
07HGJ-0020100
with commercially available digital multimeter
(impedance 10 MΩ/DCV minimum)
Test probe
07ZAJ-RDJA110
CONNECTION: Yellow (+) – Green/orange (–)

Y

G/O

[1]

Shift the transmission into neutral.
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " ".
Crank the engine with the starter motor and measure
the CKP sensor peak voltage.
PEAK VOLTAGE: 0.7 V minimum
If the peak voltage measured at the ECM 33P (Black)
connector is abnormal, measure the peak voltage at the
CKP sensor connector.

5-7

dummyhead

IGNITION SYSTEM
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[1]

Disconnect the CKP sensor 2P (Red) connector [1] and
connect the tester probes to the connector terminals of
the CKP sensor side.
CONNECTION: Yellow (+) – White/yellow (–)
In the same manner as at the ECM 33P (Black)
connector, measure the peak voltage and compare it to
the voltage measured at the ECM 33P (Black)
connector.
– If the peak voltage measured at the ECM is
abnormal and the one measured at the CKP sensor
is normal, the wire harness has an open or short
circuit or loose connection.
– If the peak voltage of the CKP sensor side is lower
than standard value, follow the checks described in
the troubleshooting table (page 5-5).
For CKP sensor replacement (page 5-11).
Install the removed parts in the reverse order of
removal.

CKP SENSOR PEAK VOLTAGE
(NC700XD/SD)
Check the cylinder compression and check that the
spark plugs are installed correctly in the cylinder head.
Disconnect the spark plug caps (page 3-8).

[2]

Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM 33P
connectors (page 4-14).
Connect the peak voltage tester or adaptor probes to
the ECM test harness [1] terminals.
TOOL:
Imrie diagnostic tester (model 625) or
Peak voltage adaptor [2]
07HGJ-0020100
with commercially available digital multimeter
(impedance 10 MΩ/DCV minimum)

B6
B11

CONNECTION: B11 (+) – B6 (–)
Shift the transmission into neutral.
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " ".
Crank the engine with the starter motor and measure
the CKP sensor peak voltage.
PEAK VOLTAGE: 0.7 V minimum
If the peak voltage measured at the ECM test harness
is abnormal, measure the peak voltage at the CKP
sensor connector.

5-8

[1]

dummyhead

IGNITION SYSTEM
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[1]

Disconnect the CKP sensor 2P (Red) connector [1] and
connect the tester probes to the connector terminals of
the CKP sensor side.
CONNECTION: Yellow (+) – White/yellow (–)
In the same manner as at the ECM test harness,
measure the peak voltage and compare it to the voltage
measured at the ECM test harness.
– If the peak voltage measured at the ECM test
harness is abnormal and the one measured at the
CKP sensor is normal, the wire harness has an open
or short circuit or loose connection.
– If the peak voltage of the CKP sensor side is lower
than standard value, follow the checks described in
the troubleshooting table (page 5-5).
For CKP sensor replacement (page 5-11).
Install the removed parts in the reverse order of
removal.

IGNITION TIMING
Warm up the engine.
Stop the engine and remove the timing hole cap.
Connect the timing light [1] to the spark plug wire.
Read the instructions for timing light operation.
Start the engine and let it idle.
IDLE SPEED: 1,200 ± 100 min-1 (rpm)
The ignition timing is correct if the "F" mark [2] on the
flywheel aligns with the index notch [3] on the alternator
cover.
[2]

[3]

Apply engine oil to a new O-ring [1] and install it to the
timing hole cap.

[1]
[1]

Apply grease to the timing hole cap [2] threads.
Install and tighten the timing hole cap to the specified
torque.
TORQUE: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)

[2]

5-9

dummyhead

IGNITION SYSTEM

IGNITION COIL
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
No.1 IGNITION COIL
Remove the following:

[5]

[2]

– Lower cowl (page 2-28)
– Air cleaner housing (page 7-14)

[3]

Disconnect the spark plug cap [1].
Release the spark plug wire [2] from the clamp [3].
Release the clamp [4] from the frame tab.
Release the clamp [5] from the fan motor stay.

[1]
NC700S/SA/SD:

Remove the wire band [1] and spark plug wire [2] from
the main wire harness.

NC700S/SA/SD:

[4]
[1]

[2]

Disconnect the primary wire connectors [1] from the
ignition coil.

[4]

[1]

Remove the bolts [2], spacers [3] and ignition coil [4]
from the ignition coil stay.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Route the wire properly (page 1-25).

[2]/[3]

No.2 IGNITION COIL
Remove the following:
– Lower cowl (page 2-28)
– Air cleaner housing (page 7-14)
Disconnect the spark plug cap [1].
Release the clamp [2] from the frame tab.

[2]

5-10

[1]

dummyhead

IGNITION SYSTEM
Disconnect the primary wire connectors [1] from the
ignition coil.

[5]

[2]

Release the clamp [2] from the frame tab.
Remove the bolts [3], spacers [4] and ignition coil [5]
from the ignition coil stay.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Route the wire properly (page 1-25).

[1]

[3]/[4]

CKP SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700X/
XA/S/SA)
Remove the right crankcase cover (page 11-5).

[3]

[1]

Remove the wire grommet [1] from the right crankcase
cover.
Remove the CKP sensor mounting bolts [2] and CKP
sensor [3].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Apply locking agent to the CKP sensor mounting
bolts threads (page 1-23).
• Apply liquid sealant (Three bond 1207B or
equivalent) to the CKP sensor wire grommet sealing
surface.

[2]

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700XD/
SD)
Remove the right crankcase cover (page 12-97).

[2]

Remove the right crankcase cover wire clamp bolts [1]
and wire clamp [2].

[1]

5-11

dummyhead

IGNITION SYSTEM
Remove the wire grommet [1] from the right crankcase
cover.

[3]

[1]

Remove the CKP sensor mounting bolts [2] and CKP
sensor [3].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Apply locking agent to the CKP sensor mounting bolt
threads (page 1-23).
• Apply locking agent to the right crankcase cover wire
clamp bolt threads (page 5-4).
• Apply sealant to the wire grommet seating surface
and grommet mating surface.
TORQUE:
Right crankcase cover wire clamp bolt:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

5-12

[2]

dummytext

6. ELECTRIC STARTER

6
SYSTEM LOCATION·····································6-2

STARTER MOTOR ······································· 6-8

SYSTEM DIAGRAM ······································6-3

STARTER RELAY SWITCH ······················· 6-10

SERVICE INFORMATION ·····························6-4

NEUTRAL DIODE (NC700X/XA/S/SA) ······· 6-12

TROUBLESHOOTING···································6-5

STARTER RELAY (NC700XD/SD) ············· 6-12

6-1

dummyhead

ELECTRIC STARTER

SYSTEM LOCATION
ELECTRIC STARTER

NC700X/XA/S/SA:
ENGINE STOP SWITCH
STARTER SWITCH
CLUTCH SWITCH

MAIN FUSE 30 A
STARTER RELAY SWITCH

IGNITION SWITCH

BATTERY

FUSE BOX
STARTER MOTOR

NEUTRAL SWITCH
SIDESTAND SWITCH

NC700XD/SD:
ENGINE STOP SWITCH
STARTER SWITCH
MAIN FUSE 30 A
STARTER RELAY SWITCH
BATTERY

IGNITION SWITCH

FUSE BOX
STARTER MOTOR

6-2

dummyhead

ELECTRIC STARTER

SYSTEM DIAGRAM
NC700X/XA/S/SA:

Bl

Bl

Bl

Bl

STARTER
MOTOR

STARTER RELAY SWITCH

BATTERY

MAIN FUSE
30 A

G/R
10P
(GRAY)

CLUTCH
SWITCH

Y/R

Bl

G/R

ENG STOP
7.5 A

NEUTRAL
DIODE

G/W
Lg/R

SIDESTAND
SWITCH

R/Bl
Bl/R
W/Y
STARTER
ENGINE STOP
SWITCH
SWITCH

Bl

G

R

IGNITION
SWITCH

Lg
Bl: Black
G: Green
Lg: Light green
R: Red
Y: Yellow
W: White

NEUTRAL
SWITCH

To NEUTRAL
INDICATOR

NC700XD/SD:

Bl

Bl

Bl

Bl

STARTER
MOTOR

STARTER RELAY SWITCH

BATTERY

Bl: Black
G: Green
R: Red
V: Violet
W: White
Y: Yellow

MAIN FUSE
30 A

Y/R

R

R/Bl
IGNITION
SWITCH

G/R
STARTER
SWITCH
V/W

To PCM
G

Bl/R
ENGINE STOP
SWITCH

W/Y
ENG STOP
7.5 A

Bl/W
START
RELAY

FI
15 A

6-3

dummyhead

ELECTRIC STARTER

SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
If the current is kept flowing through the starter motor turn it while the engine is not cranking over, the starter motor may be
damaged.
•
•
•
•
•

The starter motor can be serviced with the engine installed in the frame.
Always turn the ignition switch OFF before servicing the starter motor. The motor could suddenly start, causing serious injury.
A weak battery may be unable to turn the starter motor quickly enough, or supply adequate ignition current.
When servicing the starter system, always follow the steps in the troubleshooting flow chart (page 6-5).
Refer to the following components information:
– Ignition switch (page 22-24)
– Starter switch (page 22-25)
– Engine stop switch (page 22-25)
– Neutral switch (NC700X/XA/S/SA) (page 22-27)
– Sidestand switch (NC700X/XA/S/SA) (page 22-28)
– Clutch switch (NC700X/XA/S/SA) (page 22-26)

SPECIFICATION
ITEM
Starter motor brush length

STANDARD
12.0 – 13.0 (0.47 – 0.51)

Unit: mm (in)
SERVICE LIMIT
6.5 (0.26)

TORQUE VALUE
ITEM
Starter motor terminal nut

6-4

Q'TY
1

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
6

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
10 (1.0, 7)

REMARKS

dummyhead

ELECTRIC STARTER

TROUBLESHOOTING
Starter motor does not turn (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
1. Fuse Inspection
Check for blown main fuse 30 A or sub fuse 7.5 A (ENG STOP).
Is the fuse blown?
YES

– Replace the fuse.

NO

– GO TO STEP 2.

2. Battery Inspection
Make sure the battery is fully charged and in good condition (page 21-6).
Is the battery in good condition?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Charge or replace the battery.

3. Starter Relay Switch Operation
Check the starter relay switch operation.
You should hear the relay "CLICK" when the starter switch button is depressed.
Is there a "CLICK"?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– GO TO STEP 5.

4. Starter Motor Inspection
Apply battery voltage directly to the starter motor and check the operation.
Does the starter motor turn?
YES

– • Poorly contacted starter motor cable
• Faulty starter relay switch (page 6-10)

NO

– Faulty starter motor (page 6-8)

5. Relay Coil Ground Lines Inspection
Disconnect the starter relay switch connector, and check the relay coil ground wire line as below for
continuity:
1. Green/red terminal – neutral diode – neutral switch line (with the transmission in neutral and clutch lever
released).
2. Green/red terminal – clutch switch – sidestand switch (in any gear except neutral, and with the clutch
lever pulled in and sidestand up.)
Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 6.

NO

– •
•
•
•
•
•

Loose or poor contact connector
Open circuit in wire harness
Faulty neutral diode (page 6-12)
Faulty neutral switch (page 22-27)
Faulty sidestand switch (page 22-28)
Faulty clutch switch (page 22-26)

6. Starter Relay Input Voltage Inspection
Connect the starter relay switch connector.
With the ignition switch turned ON and engine stop switch " " and the starter switch is pushed, measure the
voltage at the starter relay switch connector (between Yellow/red (+) and ground (–)).
Does the battery voltage exist?
YES

– GO TO STEP 7.

NO

– •
•
•
•
•

Faulty ignition switch (page 22-24)
Faulty starter switch (page 22-25)
Faulty engine stop switch (page 22-25)
Loose or poor contact connector
Open circuit in wire harness

6-5

dummyhead

ELECTRIC STARTER
7. Starter Relay Switch Continuity Inspection
Remove and check the operation of the starter relay switch (page 6-11).
Is there continuity?
YES

– Loose or poor contact starter relay switch connector

NO

– Faulty starter relay switch

Starter motor does not turn (NC700XD/SD)
1. Fuse Inspection
Check for blown main fuse (30 A), ENG STOP fuse (7.5 A) and FI fuse (15 A).
Are the fuses in good condition?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Replace the blown fuse.

2. Battery Inspection
Make sure the battery is fully charged and in good condition (page 21-6).
Is the battery in good condition?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Charge or replace the battery.

3. Starter Relay Switch Operation Inspection
Check the starter relay switch operation (page 6-10).
Does the starter relay switch click?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– GO TO STEP 5.

4. Starter Motor Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Apply battery voltage directly to the starter motor and check the operation.
Does the starter motor turn?
YES

– • Poorly contacted battery positive cable or starter motor cable
• Faulty starter relay switch

NO

– Faulty starter motor (page 6-8)

5. Relay Coil Input Line Inspection
Check the relay coil input line of the starter relay switch (page 6-10).
Is the input line normal?
YES

– GO TO STEP 6.

NO

– •
•
•
•
•

Faulty ignition switch (page 22-24)
Faulty starter switch (page 22-25)
Faulty engine stop switch (page 22-25)
Loose or poor connected connector
Open circuit in the wire harness

6. Relay Coil Ground Line Inspection
Check the relay coil ground line of the starter relay switch (page 6-11).
Is the ground line normal?
YES

– GO TO STEP 7.

NO

– GO TO STEP 8.

7. Starter Relay Switch Continuity Inspection
Check the starter relay switch (page 6-11).
Is there continuity?

6-6

YES

– Loose or poor contact starter relay switch connector

NO

– Faulty starter relay switch

dummyhead

ELECTRIC STARTER
8. Starter Relay Inspection
Check the starter relay (page 6-12).
Is the starter relay normal?
YES

– •
•
•
•

NO

– Faulty starter relay

Loose or poor connected connector
Open circuit in the wire harness
Faulty neutral switch or its circuit
Faulty PCM

The starter motor turns when the transmission is in neutral, but does not turn with the transmission in
any position except neutral, with the sidestand up and the clutch lever pulled in. (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
1. Clutch Switch Inspection
Check the clutch switch operation (page 22-26).
Is the clutch switch operation normal?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Faulty clutch switch

2. Sidestand Switch Inspection
Check the sidestand switch operation (page 22-28).
Is the sidestand switch operation normal?
YES

– • Loose or poor contact connector
• Open circuit in wire harness

NO

– Faulty sidestand switch

Starter motor turns slowly
• Low battery voltage
• Poorly connected battery terminal cable
• Poorly connected starter motor cable
• Faulty starter motor
• Poorly connected battery ground cable
Starter motor turns, but engine does not turn
• Starter motor is running backwards
– Case assembled improperly
– Terminals connected improperly
• Faulty starter clutch
• Damaged or faulty starter reduction gear/shaft
• Damaged or faulty starter idle gear/shaft
Starter relay switch "Clicks", but engine does not turn over
• Crankshaft does not turn due to engine problems

6-7

dummyhead

ELECTRIC STARTER

STARTER MOTOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Disconnect the battery negative cable (page 21-6).

[1]

[2]/[3]

Release the rubber cap [1].
Remove the starter motor terminal nut [2] and starter
motor cable [3].
Remove the stater motor mounting bolts [4] and ground
cable [5].
Remove the starter motor [6].

[4]

[4]/[5]

[6]

Remove the O-ring [1].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Apply engine oil to a new O-ring.
• Route the cables properly (page 1-25).
TORQUE:
Starter motor terminal nut:
10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)

[1]

DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
MOTOR CASE
SEAL RING
SEAL RING
FRONT COVER
O-RING
BOLTS

O-RING

NEGATIVE BRUSHES

NUT
WASHER
INSULATOR

SCREW

TERMINAL STOPPER
BRUSH HOLDER
SPRING
ARMATURE

POSITIVE BRUSHES
TERMINAL BOLT

6-8

REAR COVER

dummyhead

ELECTRIC STARTER
INSPECTION
FRONT COVER
Check the oil seal [1] in the front cover for deterioration,
wear or damage.

[1]

Turn the inner race of bearing [2] in the front cover with
your finger.
The bearings should turn smoothly and quietly.
Also check that the outer race fits tightly in the front
cover.
Replace the starter motor as an assembly if necessary.

[2]

REAR COVER
Inspect the brushes for damage and measure the brush
length.

[3]

[2]

[1]

SERVICE LIMIT: 6.5 mm (0.26 in)
Check for continuity or no continuity for each part of
rear cover [1] as below:
– Between the positive brush [2] and cable terminal
[3]: should be continuity.
– Between the cable terminal and the rear cover:
should be No continuity.
– Between the positive brush and rear cover: should
be No continuity.
– Between positive brush and negative brush [4]:
should be No continuity.

[4]

ARMATURE
Clean the metallic debris off between commutator bars
[1].

[1]

Check the commutator bars of the armature for
discoloration.
Check for continuity or no continuity for each part of
armature as below:
– Between pair of commutator bars: should be
continuity.
– Between each commutator bar and the armature
shaft [2]: should be No continuity.
Replace the starter motor as an assembly if necessary.
[2]

6-9

dummyhead

ELECTRIC STARTER

STARTER RELAY SWITCH
INSPECTION
Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).

[1]

Shift the transmission into neutral.
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " ".
Push the starter switch.
The coil is normal if the starter relay switch [1] clicks.
If you don't hear the starter relay switch "CLICK",
release the starter relay switch/shock rubber from the
battery box tabs [2] and inspect the starter relay switch
using a procedure below.

[2]

STARTER RELAY INPUT VOLTAGE
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " ".
Measure the voltage between the Yellow/red (+) wire
terminal at the starter relay switch 4P (Red) connector
[1] and ground (–).
If the battery voltage appears only when the starter
switch is pushed with the ignition switch turned ON and
engine stop switch " ", the starter relay input voltage is
normal.

[1]

GROUND LINE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Disconnect the starter relay switch 4P (Red) connector
[1].
Check for continuity between the Green/red wire of the
wire harness side (ground line) and ground.
If there is continuity when the transmission is in neutral
or when the clutch is disengaged and the sidestand is
retracted, the ground circuit of the relay coil is normal.
(In neutral, there is a slight resistance due to the diode.)

[1]

6-10

dummyhead

ELECTRIC STARTER
GROUND LINE (NC700XD/SD)
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " ".

[1]

Measure the voltage between the Yellow/red (+) and
Green/red (–) wire terminals at the starter relay switch
4P (Red) connector [1].

G/R

Y/R

If the battery voltage appears only when the starter
switch is pushed with the ignition switch turned ON and
engine stop switch " ", the starter relay ground line is
normal.

OPERATION CHECK
Remove the starter relay switch (page 6-11).
Connect a 12 V battery to the starter relay switch as
shown.
There should be continuity between the cable terminals
when the battery is connected, and not continuity when
the battery is disconnected.

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).

[2]

[3]

Release the starter relay switch/shock rubber from the
battery box tabs [1].
[6]

Release the rubber cover [2].
Disconnect the starter relay switch 4P (Red) connector
[3].
Remove the bolts [4] and cables [5].
Remove the starter relay switch [6] from the shock
rubber [7].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
[1]

[4]/[5]

[7]

6-11

dummyhead

ELECTRIC STARTER

NEUTRAL DIODE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
INSPECTION
Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).
Open the fuse/relay box cover and remove the neutral
diode [1].

[1]

Check for continuity between the neutral diode
terminals.
When there is continuity, a small resistance value will
register.
If there is continuity, in direction shown by the arrow,
the neutral diode is normal.

B
A
A

B

C

C

STARTER RELAY (NC700XD/SD)
INSPECTION
Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).
Open the fuse/relay box cover and remove the START
RELAY [1].

[1]

Connect an ohmmeter to the START RELAY [1]
connector terminals.
Connect a 12 V battery to the START RELAY connector
terminals as shown.
There should be continuity only when 12 V battery is
connected.
If there is no continuity only when the 12 V battery is
connected, replace the START RELAY.

6-12

[1]

dummytext

7. FUEL SYSTEM

COMPONENT LOCATION ····························7-2

AIR CLEANER HOUSING ·························· 7-14

SERVICE INFORMATION ·····························7-3

THROTTLE BODY ······································ 7-15

FUEL LINE REPLACEMENT ························7-4

INJECTOR··················································· 7-20

FUEL TANK···················································7-8

IACV ···························································· 7-22

FUEL PUMP UNIT ·······································7-10

7-1

7

dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM

COMPONENT LOCATION
FUEL SYSTEM

7-2

dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM

SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
• Work in a well ventilated area. Smoking or allowing flames or sparks in the work area or where gasoline is stored can cause a
fire or explosion.
• Before disconnecting the fuel feed hose, relieve fuel pressure from the system (page 7-4).
• Bending or twisting the control cables will impair smooth operation and could cause the cables to stick or bind, resulting in loss
of vehicle control.
• Do not snap the throttle valve from full open to full close after the throttle cable has been removed. It may cause incorrect idle
operation.
• Seal the intake ports with tape or a clean cloth to keep dirt and debris from entering the engine after the throttle body or fuel rail
has been removed.
• Do not damage the throttle body. It may cause incorrect throttle valve operation.
• Prevent dirt and debris from entering the throttle bore and air passages after the throttle body has been removed. Clean them
using a compressed air if necessary.
• Do not loosen or tighten the white painted nut and screw of the throttle body. Loosening or tightening them can cause throttle
valve and idle control failure.
• The parts of the throttle body not shown in this manual should not be disassembled.
• For fuel level sensor inspection (page 22-21).
• The following color codes are used throughout this section.
G = Green

P = Pink

R = Red

W = White

Y = Yellow

SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM
Throttle body identification number
Idle speed
Throttle grip freeplay
Fuel pressure at idle
Fuel pump flow (at 12 V)

SPECIFICATIONS
GQ3UA
1,200 ± 100 min-1 (rpm)
2 – 6 mm (1/16 – 1/4 in)
343 kPa (3.5 kgf/cm2, 50 psi)
230 cm3 (7.8 US oz, 8.1 Imp oz) minimum/10 seconds

TORQUE VALUES

6
1

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
6
4

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
12 (1.2, 9)
1.5 (0.2, 1.1)

2

5

–

ITEM

Q'TY

Fuel pump mounting nut
Air cleaner connecting hose band
screw
Insulator band screw

REMARKS
For tightening sequence (page 7-14)

See page 7-18

7-3

dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM

FUEL LINE REPLACEMENT
FUEL PRESSURE RELIEVING
Before disconnecting fuel feed hose, relieve pressure
from the system as follows.
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
2. Remove the following:
– Shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA/XD) (page 2-14)
– Shelter/side cover (NC700S/SA/SD) (page 2-15)
3. Disconnect the fuel pump 1P (Black) connector [1].
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
4. Start the engine, and let it idle until the engine stalls.
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
6. Disconnect the battery negative (–) cable (page 216).

[1]

QUICK CONNECT FITTING REMOVAL
Do not bend or twist fuel feed hose.
FUEL PUMP SIDE
Refer to fuel tank removal (page 7-8).
INJECTOR SIDE
1. Relieve the fuel pressure (page 7-4).

[1]

Check the fuel quick connect fitting [1] for dirt, and
clean if necessary.
Place a shop towel over the quick connect fitting.

2. Pull and release the joint rubber [1] tabs from the
retainer.

[1]

3. Squeeze the retainer tabs [2] with the hand to
release them from the locking pawls [3].
Pull the fuel feed hose off and remove the retainer.
• Absorb the remaining fuel in the fuel feed hose from
flowing out with a shop towel.
• Be careful not to damage the hose or other parts.
• Do not use tools.
• If the connector does not move, keep the retainer
tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push
the connector until it comes off easily.

7-4

[3]

[2]

dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM
4. To prevent damage and keep foreign matter out,
cover the disconnected connector and pipe end with
the plastic bags [1].

[1]

QUICK CONNECT FITTING
INSTALLATION
FUEL PUMP SIDE
Refer to fuel tank installation (page 7-8).
INJECTOR SIDE
• Always replace the retainer and joint rubber of the
quick connect fitting when the fuel feed hose is
disconnected.
• Replace the retainer and joint rubber with the same
manufacturer’s item that was removed.
• Do not bent or twist fuel feed hose.
1. Insert a new retainer [1] into the connector [2].

Align

[1]

• Align new retainer locking pawls with the connector
grooves.

[2]

2. Set a new joint rubber [1] as shown.

Align
[1]

Then press the fuel feed hose into the quick connect
fitting until both retainer pawls [2] lock with a
"CLICK".
• Align retainer tabs with joint rubber grooves.
If it is hard to connect, put a small amount of engine
oil on the injector joint.

[2]

7-5

dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM
3. Make sure the connection is secure and that the
pawls are firmly locked into place; check visually and
by pulling the fuel feed hose [1].
4. Make sure the joint rubber [2] is in place (between
the retainer tabs).
5. Increase the fuel pressure and check that there is no
leakage in fuel supply system (page 7-6).

[2]

[1]

FUEL PRESSURE NORMALIZATION
1. Connect the fuel pump 1P (Black) connector [1].
Connect the battery negative (–) cable (page 21-6).
2. Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
• Do not start the engine.
The fuel pump will run for about 2 seconds, and fuel
pressure will rise.
3. Repeat 2 or 3 times, and check that there is no
leakage in the fuel supply system.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Install the following:
– Shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA/XD) (page 2-14)
– Shelter/side cover (NC700S/SA/SD) (page 2-15)

7-6

[1]

dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM
FUEL PRESSURE TEST
Relieve the fuel pressure and disconnect the quick
connect fitting from the injector (page 7-4).

[3]

[5]

[1]

Attach the fuel pressure gauge, attachments and
manifold.
TOOLS:
Fuel pressure gauge, 0 – 100 psi
[1]
07406-0040004
Pressure gauge manifold [2]
07ZAJ-S5A0111
Hose attachment, 9 mm/9 mm [3] 07ZAJ-S5A0120
Hose attachment, 8 mm/9 mm [4] 07ZAJ-S7C0100
Attachment joint, 8 mm/9 mm [5] 07ZAJ-S7C0200
Temporarily connect the battery negative (–) cable and
fuel pump 1P (Black) connector.

[2]

[4]

Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " ".
Start the engine and let it idle.
Read the fuel pressure.
STANDARD: 343 kPa (3.5 kgf/cm2, 50 psi)
If the fuel pressure is higher than specified, replace the
fuel pump assembly.
If the fuel pressure is lower than specified, inspect the
following:
– Fuel line leaking
– Pinched or clogged fuel feed hose or fuel tank
breather hose
– Fuel pump unit (page 7-10)
– Clogged fuel filter (page 7-11)
After inspection, relieve the fuel pressure (page 7-4).
Remove the fuel pressure gauge, attachment and
manifold from the injector.
Connect the quick connect fitting (page 7-5).

FUEL FLOW INSPECTION
Relieve the fuel pressure and disconnect the quick
connect fitting from the injector (page 7-4).
Wipe off spilled out
gasoline.

Place the end of the hose [1] into an approved gasoline
container.
Temporarily connect the battery negative (–) cable and
fuel pump 1P (Black) connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " ".
Measure the amount of fuel flow.
• The fuel pump operates for 2 seconds. Repeat 5
times so that the total measuring time.
• Return fuel to the fuel tank when the first fuel is
flowed.
Amount of fuel flow:
230 cm3 (7.8 US oz, 8.1 Imp oz) minimum/
10 seconds at 12 V
If fuel flow is less than specified, inspect the following:
– Fuel pump unit (page 7-10)
– Clogged fuel filter (page 7-11)
Connect the quick connect fitting (page 7-5).

[1]

7-7

dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM

FUEL TANK
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Relieve the fuel pressure (page 7-4).

[4]

[1]

[3]

[1]

[7]

Remove the bolts [1], fuel cap [2] and fuel cap tray [3].
[5]

Release the following:
– Fuel tank drain hose A [4]
– Fuel tank breather hose [5]
– Seat lock cable [6]

[6]

Remove the fuel tank mounting bolts [7], washers [8],
upper mounting rubbers [9], lower mounting rubbers
[10] and collars [11].

[13]

[8]

[9]

Lift the rear end of the fuel tank and disconnect the
following:
– Fuel pump unit 3P (Black) connector [12]
– Quick connect fitting (page 7-8)

[10]
[11]

Do not bend or twist fuel feed hose.
Remove the fuel tank [13].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Connect the quick connect fitting (page 7-9).
• Route the hose and wire properly (page 1-25).

[2]
[12]

FUEL PUMP SIDE QUICK CONNECT FITTING
REMOVAL
1. Relieve the fuel pressure (page 7-4).
2. Check the fuel quick connect fitting [1] for dirt, and
clean if necessary.
Place a shop towel over the quick connect fitting.

[1]

3. Pull and release the joint rubber [1] from the
retainer.

[1]

[2]

4. Hold the connector with one hand and squeeze the
retainer tabs [2] with the other hand to release them
from the locking pawls [3].
Pull the connector off and remove the retainer.
• Absorb the remaining fuel in the fuel feed hose from
flowing out with a shop towel.
• Be careful not to damage the hose or other parts.
• Do not use tools.
• If the connector does not move, keep the retainer
tabs pressed down, and alternately pull and push
the connector until it comes off easily.

7-8

[3]

dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM
5. To prevent damage and keep foreign matter out,
cover the disconnected connector and pipe end with
the plastic bags [1].

[1]

FUEL PUMP SIDE QUICK CONNECT FITTING
INSTALLATION
• Always replace the retainer and joint rubber of the
quick connect fitting when the fuel feed hose is
disconnected.
• Replace the retainer and joint rubber with the same
manufacturer’s item that was removed.
• Do not bent or twist fuel feed hose.
1. Insert a new retainer [1] into the connector [2].

[1]

• Align new retainer locking pawls with the connector
grooves.

[2]

Align

2. Set a new joint rubber [1] as shown.
Then press the quick connect fitting onto the pipe
until both retainer pawls [2] lock with a "CLICK".
• Align the quick connect fitting with the pipe.
• If it is hard to connect, put a small amount of engine
oil on the pipe end.

[1]
[2]

7-9

dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM
3. Make sure the connection is secure and that the
pawls are firmly locked into place; check visually and
by pulling the connector [1].

[2]

4. Make sure the joint rubber [2] is in place (between
the retainer tabs [3]).
5. Increase the fuel pressure and check that there is no
leakage in fuel supply system (page 7-6).

[2]

[3]

FUEL PUMP UNIT
INSPECTION
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " "
and confirm that the fuel pump operates for 2 seconds.
If the fuel pump does not operate, inspect as follows:
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Lift and support the fuel tank (page 7-8).
Do not disconnect the quick connect fitting.
Disconnect the fuel pump unit 3P (Black) connector [1].

[1]

Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " ".

[1]

Measure the voltage at the fuel pump unit 3P (Black)
connector [1] terminals of the wire side.
CONNECTION: Yellow/red (+) – Green/red (–)
STANDARD:
Battery voltage
There should be standard voltage for a few seconds.
If there is standard voltage, replace the fuel pump unit.
If there is no standard voltage, inspect the following:
– Loose or poor contact on the fuel pump 1P (Black)
connector
– Main fuse 30 A
– Sub fuse 15 A (FI)
– Sub fuse 7.5 A (ENG STOP)
– Ignition switch
– Engine stop switch
– Fuel cut relay (page 4-64)
– Open circuit in Yellow/red or Green/red wire
– ECM/PCM (page 4-68)

7-10

Y/R

G/R

[1]

dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM
REMOVAL
Remove the fuel tank (page 7-8).

[2]

[1]

Clean around the fuel pump.
Loosen the fuel pump mounting nuts [1] in a crisscross
pattern in 2 or 3 steps and remove the nuts.
Remove the fuel pump unit [2] and packing [3].
Be careful not to damage the fuel level sensor float arm.

[3]

DISASSEMBLY/INSPECTION
Remove the screws [1] and Black wire terminals [2].

[1]/[2]

[1]/[2]

Disconnect the Pink wire connector [3] and Blue wire
connector [4].

[3]

Remove the fuel pump unit assembly [1] and O-ring [2]
from the fuel pump stay [3].

[4]

[1]

[3]

Remove the chamber [1].

[2]
[1]

Release the tab [2] and remove the fuel level sensor
assembly [3] from the fuel filter [4].
[2]

[3]

[4]

7-11

dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM
Remove the fuel pump [1] and O-ring [2].

[1]

[3]

Visually inspect the fuel pump filter [3] for dirt, debris or
any clogging.
Replace fuel pump unit as an assembly if necessary.

[2]

Remove the pressure regulator [1] and O-ring [2] from
the fuel filter [3].

[2]

[1]

[3]

ASSEMBLY
Replace the fuel filter [1] with a new one.

[2]

[3]

Install a new O-ring [2] to the pressure regulator [3].
Install the pressure regulator.

[1]

Install a new O-ring [1] to the fuel pump [2].

[2]

Install the fuel pump.
Align the Blue wire with the fuel filter groove.

Align

[1]

7-12

dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM
Insert the fuel pump filter edge [1] between the fuel
pump and pressure regulator [2].

[2]

[4]

Install the fuel level sensor assembly [3].
Install the chamber [4].
[1]

[3]

Install a new O-ring [1] to the fuel pump stay [2].

Align

[3]

Install the fuel pump unit assembly [3] to the fuel pump
stay.
Align the fuel pump stay with fuel pump assembly
grooves.

[2]

Install the screws [1] and Black wire terminals [2].

[1]/[2]

[1]
[1]/[2]

Tighten the screws securely.
Connect the Pink wire connector [3] and Blue wire
connector [4].

[3]

[4]

INSTALLATION
Install a new packing [1] onto the fuel pump unit [2].

[2]

• Always replace the packing with a new one.
• Be careful not to pinch the dirt and debris between
the fuel pump unit and packing.
• Align the packing tab with the fuel pipe.

[1]

Align

7-13

dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM
Install the fuel pump unit [1] into the fuel tank.
Be careful not to damage the fuel level sensor float arm
[2].

[1]

[2]

Install and tighten the fuel pump mounting nuts [1] to
the specified torque in the sequence as shown.
3

TORQUE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

6

Install the fuel tank (page 7-8).
1

2

5

4
[1]

AIR CLEANER HOUSING
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the air cleaner (page 3-7).

[1]

[2]

Remove the bolts [1] and radiator lower stay [2].
Release the radiator boss from the radiator mounting
rubber [3].

[3]

SLITS

Release the fan motor 3P (Gray) connector [1], air
cleaner housing drain hose [2] and spark plug wire [3]
from the radiator.

Align
[1]

[2]

7-14

[1]

[3]

dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM
Lower the radiator and disconnect the crankcase
breather hose [1].

[1]

Be careful not to damage the radiator fins.

Loosen the air cleaner connecting hose band screw [1].

[4]

[2]

[3]

Remove the bolts [2] and collar [3].
[1]

Disconnect connecting hose and remove the air cleaner
housing [4].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Route the wire harness and hoses properly (page 125).
• Make sure the radiator mounting rubber slits facing
down.
• Align radiator lower stay slit with cylinder head tab.
TORQUE:
Air cleaner connecting hose band screw:
1.5 N·m (0.2 kgf·m, 1.1 lbf·ft)

THROTTLE BODY
REMOVAL
Remove the air cleaner housing (page 7-14).

[2]

[1]

Disconnect the sensor unit 5P (Black) connector [1] and
IACV 4P (Black) connector [2].

Loosen the throttle cable A adjuster lock nut [1] and
adjusting nut [2] then disconnect the throttle cable A [3]
from the throttle drum and cable stay.

[1]

[2]

Loosen the throttle cable B lock nut [4] then disconnect
the throttle cable B [5] from the throttle drum and cable
stay.

[3]

[5]

[4]

7-15

dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM
Loosen the insulator band screw [1] and remove the
throttle body assembly [2].

[1]

[2]

DISASSEMBLY
• Do not remove the sensor unit unless it is replaced.
• The throttle body/sensor unit is factory pre-set. Do
not disassemble in a way other than shown in this
manual.
• Do not snap the throttle valve from full open to full
close after the throttle cable has been removed. It
may cause incorrect idle operation.
• Do not damage the throttle body. It may cause
incorrect throttle valve operation.
• Do not loosen or tighten the white painted nut and
screw [1] of the throttle body. Loosening or
tightening it can cause throttle valve and idle control
failure.
• Always clean around the throttle body before each
sensor removal to prevent dirt and debris from
entering the air passage.

[1]

For IACV removal (page 7-22).
Remove the sensor unit torx screws [1], sensor unit [2]
and O-ring [3].

[1]

[3]
Cleaning the air
passages and
sensor hole with a
piece of wire will
damage the throttle
body.

7-16

Clean the air passage of the throttle body using a
compressed air.
Check the air passage for clogs.

[2]

dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM
ASSEMBLY
For IACV installation (page 7-23).

TORX SCREWS
THROTTLE BODY
O-RING

SENSOR UNIT
SETTING PLATE

IACV

O-RING

TORX SCREWS
If the O-ring is not
installed properly,
the idle air will leaks
and engine idle
speed will be
unstable.

Install a new O-ring [1] to the throttle body properly.

Align

[2]

When installing the sensor unit [2] to the throttle body,
align the following:
– The TP sensor clip with the throttle valve boss
– The sensor unit tab with the throttle body hole

[1]

Install and tighten the sensor unit torx screws [1]
securely.

Align

[1]

7-17

dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM
INSTALLATION
Install the throttle body assembly [1] to the cylinder
head.
• Align the throttle body tab with the insulator groove.
• Align the insulator band hole with the insulator tab.

Align

[1]

Align

Tighten the insulator band screw to the specified range.
11 – 13 mm (0.4 – 0.5 in)

Connect the throttle cables [1] to the throttle drum and
throttle cable stay.

[3]

Route the cables properly (page 1-25).
Tighten the throttle cable B lock nut [2] securely.
Tighten the throttle cable A adjuster lock nut [3]
securely.

[1]

Connect the sensor unit 5P (Black) connector [1] and
IACV 4P (Black) connector [2].
Route the wire harness properly (page 1-25).
Install the air cleaner housing (page 7-14).
Adjust the throttle grip freeplay (page 3-5).

7-18

[2]

[2]
[1]

dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM
THROTTLE VALVE FULLY CLOSED
POSITION RESET PROCEDURE
If the sensor unit is removed, reset the throttle valve
fully closed position as following.
1. Erase the DTC’s (page 4-13).
2. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
3. Short the DLC [1] terminals using a special tool.
Connection: Brown – Green
TOOL:
SCS connector [2]

070PZ-ZY30100

[1]

4. Disconnect the ECT sensor 2P connector [1].

[2]
[1]

Short the ECT sensor 2P connector terminals of the
wire harness side with a jumper wire [2].
Connection: Pink/white – Green/yellow
5. Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ", then MIL will start blinking.

G/Y

Disconnect the jumper wire while the MIL blinking
(within 10 seconds).

[1]

6. After disconnection of the jumper wire, the MIL [1]
start to short blinking.

P/W

[2]

[1]

7-19

dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM
7. Check if the MIL blinks.
If the MIL begins short blink (0.3 seconds), the throttle valve fully closed position is reset.
0.3 seconds
0.3 seconds

within 10 seconds
0.1
seconds
MIL ON

1.2
seconds

MIL OFF
RESET RECEIVING PATTERN

SUCCESSFUL PATTERN

If the MIL stays lit, the throttle valve fully closed position is not reset, repeat the reset procedure from step 1.

8. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
9. Connect the ECT sensor 2P connector [1].

[1]

INJECTOR
REMOVAL
Relieve the fuel pressure and disconnect the quick
connect fitting from the injector side (page 7-4).

[3]

[2]

[4]

[3]

Remove the battery box (page 2-31).
Disconnect the injector 2P (Gray) connectors [1].
Remove the clip [2] from the fuel rail.
Remove the bolts [3], collars [4] and injector assembly
[5].

[4]

Remove the retainers [1] from the injector/fuel rail.

7-20

[1]
[1]

[5]

dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM
Remove the injectors [1] from the fuel rail.

[1]

Remove the O-ring [1], cushion rubber [2] and seal ring
[3] from the injector [4].

[2]

[1]

Check the removed parts for wear or damage and
replace them if necessary.

[3]

[4]

INSTALLATION
Apply engine oil to a new O-ring [1] and a new seal ring
[2].

[3]

[4]

[1]

Install the cushion rubber [3] until it is fully seated.
Align the cushion rubber cut out with the injector
connector.
Install the seal ring to the injector [4], being careful not
to damage them.
Install the O-ring to the injector.

[2]

Install the injectors [1] to the fuel rail [2], being careful
not to damage the O-ring.

Align

[1]

[2]

Align the injector body with the fuel rail tab [3] as
shown.

[3]

7-21

dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM
Install the retainers [1] to the injector/fuel rail.

Install the injector assembly [1], bolts [2] and collars [3].

[1]

[2]

[5]

[3]

[2]

[1]

Tighten the fuel rail mounting bolts securely.
Connect the injector 2P (Gray) connectors [4] while
aligning their grooves with the fuel rail tabs.
Install the clip [5] to the fuel rail.
Install the battery box (page 2-31).
Connect the quick connect fitting to the injector side
(page 7-5).

[3]

[4]

IACV
REMOVAL/INSPECTION
Remove the air cleaner housing (page 7-14).

[1]

[2]

The IACV is installed on the throttle body and is
operated by the step motor. When the ignition switch is
turned ON and engine stop switch " ", the IACV
operates for a few seconds.
Check the step motor operating (beep) sound with the
ignition switch turned ON and engine stop switch " ".
Disconnect the IACV 4P (Black) connector [1].
Remove the IACV setting plate torx screws [2] and
setting plate [3].
Remove the IACV [4] and O-ring [5].
[5]

Check the IACV [1] for wear or damage.

[3]
[1]

The IACV operation can be checked visually as follows:
1. Connect the IACV 4P (Black) connector [2].
2. Turn ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " ",
check the IACV operation.
Disconnect the IACV 4P (Black) connector.

[2]

7-22

[4]

dummyhead

FUEL SYSTEM
INSTALLATION
Turn the slide valve [1] clockwise until lightly seated on
IACV.

Install a new O-ring [1] to the IACV [2].

[1]

Align

[5]

[1]

Install the IACV by aligning its groove with the slide
valve housing pin.
Install the setting plate [3] while aligning its cut-out with
the tab on the IACV.

[3]

Install and tighten the IACV setting plate torx screws [4]
securely.
Connect the IACV 4P (Black) connector [5].
Install the air cleaner housing (page 7-14).

[2]

[4]

Align

7-23

dummyhead

MEMO

dummytext

8. COOLING SYSTEM

SYSTEM FLOW PATTERN···························8-2

THERMOSTAT/THERMOSTAT
HOUSING ······················································ 8-7

SERVICE INFORMATION ·····························8-3
RADIATOR ···················································· 8-9
TROUBLESHOOTING···································8-4
WATER PUMP ············································ 8-12
SYSTEM TESTING········································8-5
RADIATOR RESERVE TANK····················· 8-14
COOLANT REPLACEMENT ·························8-6
FAN CONT. RELAY ···································· 8-15

8-1

8

dummyhead

COOLING SYSTEM

SYSTEM FLOW PATTERN
COOLING SYSTEM

RADIATOR CAP

RADIATOR

RADIATOR RESERVE TANK

THERMOSTAT

WATER PUMP

8-2

dummyhead

COOLING SYSTEM

SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL

Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can allow the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.

Using coolant with silicate inhibitors may cause premature wear of water pump seals or blockage of radiator passages. Using tap
water may cause engine damage.
•
•
•
•
•

Add coolant at the reserve tank. Do not remove the radiator cap except to refill or drain the system.
All cooling system services can be done with the engine installed in the frame.
Avoid spilling coolant on painted surfaces.
After servicing the system, check for leaks with a cooling system tester.
Refer to the ECT sensor inspection (page 22-18).

SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM
Radiator and engine
At draining
Reserve tank
Radiator cap relief pressure
Thermostat
Begin to open
Fully open
Valve lift
Recommended antifreeze

SPECIFICATIONS
1.69 liters (1.79 US qt, 1.49 Imp qt)
1.41 liters (1.49 US qt, 1.24 Imp qt)
0.13 liter (0.14 US qt, 0.11 Imp qt)
108 – 137 kPa (1.1 – 1.4 kgf/cm2, 16 – 20 psi)
80 – 84°C (176 – 183°F)
95°C (203°F)
8 mm (0.3 in) minimum
High quality ethylene glycol antifreeze containing silicate-free
corrosion inhibitors
1:1 (mixture with distilled water)

Coolant capacity

Standard coolant concentration

TORQUE VALUES

Water hose band screw

6

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
–

Fan motor shroud mounting bolt
Fan motor mounting screw
Cooling fan mounting nut

3
3
1

6
4
3

ITEM

Q'TY

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
–
8.4 (0.9, 6.2)
2.7 (0.3, 2.0)
1.0 (0.1, 0.7)

REMARKS
See page 8-9
See page 8-10
See page 8-14

Apply locking agent to the threads.

8-3

dummyhead

COOLING SYSTEM

TROUBLESHOOTING
Engine temperature too high
• Faulty high coolant temperature indicator or ECT sensor
• Thermostat stuck closed
• Faulty radiator cap
• Insufficient coolant
• Passage blocked in radiator, hoses or water jacket
• Air in system
• Faulty cooling fan motor
• Faulty FAN CONT. RELAY
• Faulty water pump
Engine temperature too low
• Faulty high coolant temperature indicator or ECT sensor
• Thermostat stuck open
• Faulty FAN CONT. RELAY
Coolant leak
• Faulty water pump mechanical seal
• Deteriorated O-rings
• Faulty radiator cap
• Damaged or deteriorated cylinder head gasket
• Loose hose connection or clamp
• Damaged or deteriorated hose
• Damaged radiator

8-4

dummyhead

COOLING SYSTEM

SYSTEM TESTING
COOLANT (HYDROMETER TEST)
Remove the screw [1] and radiator cap [2].

[2]

[1]

Test the coolant gravity using a hydrometer (see below
for "Coolant gravity chart").
For maximum corrosion protection, a 1:1 solution of
ethylene glycol and distilled water is recommended
(page 8-6).
Look for contamination and replace the coolant if
necessary.

Coolant ratio%

COOLANT GRAVITY CHART

5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60

0
(32)
1.009
1.018
1.028
1.036
1.045
1.053
1.063
1.072
1.080
1.086
1.095
1.100

5
(41)
1.009
1.017
1.027
1.035
1.044
1.052
1.062
1.070
1.078
1.084
1.093
1.098

10
(50)
1.008
1.017
1.026
1.034
1.043
1.051
1.060
1.068
1.076
1.082
1.091
1.095

Coolant temperature °C (°F)
15
20
25
30
35
(59)
(68)
(77)
(86)
(95)
1.008 1.007 1.006 1.005 1.003
1.016 1.015 1.014 1.013 1.011
1.025 1.024 1.022 1.020 1.018
1.033 1.031 1.029 1.027 1.025
1.042 1.040 1.038 1.036 1.034
1.049 1.047 1.045 1.043 1.041
1.058 1.056 1.054 1.052 1.049
1.066 1.064 1.062 1.059 1.056
1.074 1.072 1.069 1.066 1.063
1.080 1.077 1.074 1.071 1.068
1.088 1.085 1.082 1.079 1.076
1.092 1.089 1.086 1.083 1.080

40
(104)
1.001
1.009
1.016
1.023
1.031
1.038
1.046
1.053
1.060
1.065
1.073
1.077

45
(113)
0.999
1.007
1.014
1.021
1.028
1.035
1.043
1.050
1.057
1.062
1.070
1.074

50
(122)
0.997
1.005
1.012
1.019
1.025
1.032
1.040
1.047
1.054
1.059
1.067
1.071

8-5

dummyhead

COOLING SYSTEM
RADIATOR CAP/SYSTEM PRESSURE
INSPECTION
Remove the radiator cap (page 8-5).
Wet the sealing surfaces of the cap, then install the cap
onto the tester [1].
Pressure test the radiator cap.
Replace the radiator cap if it does not hold pressure, or
if relief pressure is too high or too low.
It must hold specified pressure for at least 6 seconds.
RADIATOR CAP RELIEF PRESSURE:
108 – 137 kPa (1.1 – 1.4 kgf/cm2, 16 – 20 psi)
Install the tester to the radiator.
Pressure the radiator, engine and hoses, and check for
leaks.

[1]

Excessive pressure can damage the cooling system
components. Do not exceed 137 kPa (1.4 kgf/cm2, 20
psi).
Repair or replace components if the system will not hold
specified pressure for at least 6 seconds.

COOLANT REPLACEMENT
PREPARATION
• The effectiveness of coolant [1] decreases with the
accumulation of rust or if there is a change in the
mixing proportion during usage. Therefore, for best
performance change the coolant regularly as
specified in the maintenance schedule.
• Mix only distilled, low mineral water [2] with the
antifreeze [3].

[3]
[2]

RECOMMENDED ANTIFREEZE:
High quality ethylene glycol antifreeze containing
silicate-free corrosion inhibitors
RECOMMENDED MIXTURE:
1:1 (mixture with distilled water)
[1]

REPLACEMENT/AIR BLEEDING
When filling the system or reserve tank with coolant or
checking the coolant level, place the motorcycle in an
upright position on a flat, level surface.
Remove the lower cowl (page 2-28).

[2]

Remove the screw [1] and radiator cap [2].

[1]

8-6

dummyhead

COOLING SYSTEM
Remove the drain bolt [1], sealing washer [2] and drain
the coolant.
Reinstall the drain bolts with a new sealing washer.
Tighten the drain bolt securely.
Remove the radiator reserve tank (page 8-14).
Empty the coolant and rinse the inside of the reserve
tank with water.
Install the reserve tank (page 8-14).

[1]/[2]

Fill the system with the recommended coolant through
the filler opening up to filler neck [1].

[1]

[2]

Remove the radiator reserve tank cap [2] and fill the
reserve tank to the upper level line.
Bleed air from the system as follows:
1. Shift the transmission into neutral.
Start the engine and let it idle for 2 – 3 minutes.
2. Snap the throttle 3 or 4 times to bleed air from the
system.
3. Stop the engine and add coolant up to the filler neck
if necessary.
Install the radiator cap.
4. Check the level of coolant in the reserve tank and fill
to the upper level if it is low.
After installation, check that there are no coolant leaks.
Install the lower cowl (page 2-28).

THERMOSTAT/THERMOSTAT
HOUSING
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Drain the coolant (page 8-6).

[1]

[3]

Remove the battery box (page 2-31).
Disconnect the ECT sensor 2P connector [1].
Loosen the water hose band screw [2] and disconnect
the radiator upper water hose [3].

[2]

8-7

dummyhead

COOLING SYSTEM
Loosen the water hose band screw [1] and disconnect
the water bypass hose [2].

[2]

Align

[3]

Remove the bolts [3], stay [4] and thermostat housing
[5].

[1]

[5]

[4]

Remove the O-ring [1].

[1]

Remove the bolts [1] and thermostat housing cover [2].

Remove the thermostat [1] from the housing.

[2]

[1]

Align

[1]

8-8

dummyhead

COOLING SYSTEM
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Align the thermostat air bleed hole with the rib side
bolt hole.
• Replace the O-ring with a new one.
• Align the water bypass hose index mark with the
thermostat housing tab.
• Tighten the water hose band screws to the specified
range as shown.
• Route the wire harness and hoses properly (page 125).
0 – 1 mm
(0 – 0.04 in)

Fill the recommended coolant mixture to the filler neck
and bleed the air (page 8-6).

INSPECTION
Visually inspect the thermostat [1] for damage.

[1]

[2]

Check for damage of the seal ring [2].
Wear insulated gloves and adequate eye protection.
Keep flammable materials away from the electric
heating element.

Do not let the
thermostat or
thermometer [1]
touch the pan, or
you will get false
reading.

Heat the water with an electric heating element to
operating temperature for 5 minutes.
Suspend the thermostat [2] in heated water to check its
operation.
Replace the thermostat if the valve stays open at room
temperature, or if it responds at temperatures other
than those specified.
[1]

THERMOSTAT BEGIN TO OPEN:
80 – 84°C (176 – 183°F)
VALVE LIFT:
8 mm (0.3 in) minimum at 95°C (203°F)
[2]

RADIATOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the lower cowl (page 2-28).

[1]

[4]

Drain the coolant (page 8-6).
Loosen the water hose band screw [1] and disconnect
the radiator lower water hose [2] and radiator upper
water hose [3].
Disconnect the siphon hose [4].

[2]

[3]

[1]

8-9

dummyhead

COOLING SYSTEM
Remove the bolts [1] and radiator lower stay [2].

[1]

[2]

Release the radiator boss from the radiator mounting
rubber [3].

[3]

SLITS

Release the fan motor 3P (Gray) connector [1], air
cleaner housing drain hose [2] and spark plug wire [3]
from the radiator [4].

[1]

Align
[1]

[3]

Disconnect the fan motor 3P (Gray) connector and
remove the radiator.
Be careful not to damage the radiator fins.

[4]

[2]

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Tighten the water hose band screws to the specified
range as shown.
• Route the wire harness and hoses properly (page 125).
• Make sure the radiator mounting rubber slits facing
down.
• Align radiator lower stay slit with cylinder head tab.
Fill the recommended coolant mixture to the filler neck
and bleed the air (page 8-6).

8-10

0 – 1 mm
(0 – 0.04 in)

dummyhead

COOLING SYSTEM
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Disassemble and assemble the radiator as following the
illustration.

RADIATOR

1.0 N·m (0.1 kgf·m, 0.7 lbf·ft)
COOLING FAN

2.7 N·m (0.3 kgf·m, 2.0 lbf·ft)
FAN MOTOR
SHROUD

8.4 N·m (0.9 kgf·m, 6.2 lbf·ft)

• Align the cooling fan and fan motor shaft flat
surfaces.
• Apply locking agent to the cooling fan mounting nut
threads.
TORQUE:
Fan motor shroud mounting bolt:
8.4 N·m (0.9 kgf·m, 6.2 lbf·ft)
Fan motor mounting screw:
2.7 N·m (0.3 kgf·m, 2.0 lbf·ft)
Cooling fan mounting nut:
1.0 N·m (0.1 kgf·m, 0.7 lbf·ft)

8-11

dummyhead

COOLING SYSTEM

WATER PUMP
MECHANICAL SEAL INSPECTION
Check the bleed hole [1] of the water pump for signs of
coolant leakage.
• A small amount of coolant weeping from the bleed
hole is normal.
• Make sure that there are no continuous coolant
leakage from the bleed hole while operating the
engine.
Replace the water pump as an assembly if necessary.

[1]

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the lower cowl (page 2-28).

[1]

[3]

Align

[2]

Drain the coolant (page 8-6).
Loosen the water hose band screw [1] and disconnect
the radiator lower water hose [2] and water bypass
hose [3].

[1]

Remove the following:

[4]

[1]

[2]

[3]

– 6 x 50 mm bolt [1]
– 6 x 32 mm bolt [2]
Loosen the 6 x 32 mm bolt [3] and 6 x 35 mm bolts [4].

8-12

dummyhead

COOLING SYSTEM
Remove and slide the water pump assembly.

[1]

Remove the 6 x 35 mm bolts [1].
Reinstall the water pump assembly.
Remove the 6 x 32 mm bolt [2] and sealing washer [3].

[2]/[3]

Remove the following:

[3]

– Water pump cover [1]
– Gasket [2]
– Plate [3]

[2]

[1]

Remove the gasket [1] and dowel pins [2] from the
water pump body.

[1]

[2]

Remove the water pump body [1] and O-rings [2] from
the cylinder head.

Align

[2]

Do not disassemble the water pump body.

[2]

[1]

8-13

dummyhead

COOLING SYSTEM
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Replace the O-rings, gaskets and sealing washer
with new ones.
• Apply engine oil to the large O-ring.
• Align the water pump slit with camshaft tab.
• Align the water bypass hose index mark with the
water pump tab.
• Tighten the water hose band screws to the specified
range as shown.
• Route the hoses properly (page 1-25).
0 – 1 mm
(0 – 0.04 in)

Fill the recommended coolant mixture to the filler neck
and bleed the air (page 8-6).

DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
When engine removed, remove the water pump
assembly.

[2]

[1]

Remove the following:
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

6 x 32 mm bolts [1]
Sealing washer [2]
Water pump cover [3]
Gasket [4]
Plate [5]
Gasket [6]
Dowel pins [7]
Water pump body [8]

[3]

Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
• Do not disassemble the water pump body.
• Replace the gasket and sealing washer with new
ones

[4]

[5]
[6]

[7]

[8]

RADIATOR RESERVE TANK
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the lower cowl (page 2-28).

[3]

[4]

Release the O2 sensor wire [1] from the radiator reserve
tank [2].
Release the reserve tank overflow hose [3].
Remove the bolt [4] and radiator reserve tank.

Align

8-14

[2]

[1]

dummyhead

COOLING SYSTEM
Disconnect the siphon hose [1] and drain the coolant
from the reserve tank.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Align the radiator reserve tank tab with stay hole.
• Route the hoses properly (page 1-25).
Fill the radiator reserve tank with the recommended
coolant (page 3-15).

[1]

FAN CONT. RELAY
INSPECTION
Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).
Open the fuse/relay box cover and remove the FAN
CONT. RELAY [1].

[1]

Connect an ohmmeter to the FAN CONT. RELAY [1]
connector terminals.

[1]

Connect a 12 V battery to the FAN CONT. RELAY
connector terminals as shown.
There should be continuity only when 12 V battery is
connected.
If there is no continuity only when the 12 V battery is
connected, replace the FAN CONT. RELAY.

8-15

dummyhead

MEMO

dummytext

9. LUBRICATION SYSTEM

LUBRICATION SYSTEM DIAGRAM ············9-2

OIL PUMP (NC700X/XA/S/SA) ····················· 9-6

SERVICE INFORMATION ·····························9-4

OIL PUMP (NC700XD/SD) ···························· 9-8

TROUBLESHOOTING···································9-5

OIL STRAINER ··········································· 9-11

9

OIL PRESSURE INSPECTION ·····················9-6

9-1

dummyhead

LUBRICATION SYSTEM

LUBRICATION SYSTEM DIAGRAM
LUBRICATION SYSTEM

NC700X/XA/S/SA:

ROCKER ARM SHAFT

CAMSHAFT

PISTON

EOP SWITCH

OIL FILTER CARTRIDGE

PRESSURE
RELIEF VALVE
CRANKSHAFT

OIL PUMP

OIL STRAINER

MAINSHAFT
COUNTERSHAFT

9-2

dummyhead

LUBRICATION SYSTEM
NC700XD/SD:

ROCKER ARM SHAFT

CAMSHAFT

EOP SWITCH
OIL FILTER CARTRIDGE

PISTON
PRESSURE
RELIEF VALVES

EOP SENSOR
CRANKSHAFT

CLUTCH
OIL PUMP

ENGINE
OIL PUMP
OIL STRAINER

MAINSHAFT
COUNTERSHAFT
LINEAR SOLENOID VALVE

9-3

dummyhead

LUBRICATION SYSTEM

SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL

Used engine oil may cause skin cancer if repeatedly left in contact with the skin for prolonged periods. Although this is unlikely
unless you handle used oil on a daily basis, it is still advisable to thoroughly wash your hands with soap and water as soon as
possible after handling used oil.
•
•
•
•
•
•

This section covers service of the oil pump and oil strainer.
The oil pump and oil strainer can be serviced with the engine installed in the frame.
The service procedures in this section must be performed with the engine oil drained.
When removing and installing the oil pump, use care not to allow dust or dirt to enter the engine.
If any portion of the oil pump is worn beyond the specified service limits, replace the oil pump as an assembly.
After the oil pump has been installed, check that there are no oil leaks and that oil pressure is correct.

SPECIFICATIONS
Engine oil
capacity

ITEM
NC700X/XA/S/SA

NC700XD/SD

After draining
After draining/
filter change
After
disassembly
After draining
After draining/
filter change
After
disassembly

Recommended engine oil

Oil pressure at engine oil filter
Oil pump rotor (NC700X/XA/S/SA)

Engine oil pump rotor (NC700XD/SD)

Clutch oil pump rotor (NC700XD/SD)

Tip clearance
Body clearance
Side clearance
Tip clearance
Body clearance
Side clearance
Tip clearance
Body clearance
Side clearance

Unit: mm (in)
SERVICE LIMIT
–

STANDARD
3.1 liters (3.3 US qt, 2.7 Imp qt)
3.4 liters (3.6 US qt, 3.0 Imp qt)

–

3.7 liters (3.9 US qt, 3.3 Imp qt)

–

3.2 liters (3.4 US qt, 2.8 Imp qt)

–

3.4 liters (3.6 US qt, 3.0 Imp qt)

–

4.1 liters (4.3 US qt, 3.6 Imp qt)

–

Honda "4-stroke motorcycle oil" or an
equivalent
API service classification: SG or higher
(except oils labeled as energy conserving
on the circular API service label)
Viscosity: SAE 10W-30
JASO T 903 standard: MA
470 kPa (4.8 kgf/cm2, 68 psi)
at 5,000 min-1 (rpm)/(80°C/176°F)
0.15 (0.006)
0.15 – 0.21 (0.006 – 0.008)
0.04 – 0.09 (0.002 – 0.004)
0.15 (0.006)
0.15 – 0.21 (0.006 – 0.008)
0.04 – 0.09 (0.002 – 0.004)
0.15 (0.006)
0.15 – 0.21 (0.006 – 0.008)
0.04 – 0.09 (0.002 – 0.004)

–

–
0.20 (0.008)
0.35 (0.014)
0.12 (0.005)
0.20 (0.008)
0.35 (0.014)
0.12 (0.005)
–
–
–

TORQUE VALUE
ITEM
Engine oil filter cartridge

9-4

Q'TY
1

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
20

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
26 (2.7, 19)

REMARKS
Apply engine oil to the threads.

dummyhead

LUBRICATION SYSTEM

TROUBLESHOOTING
Oil level too low
• Oil consumption
• External oil leak
• Worn piston rings
• Improperly installed piston rings
• Worn cylinders
• Worn valve stem seals
• Worn valve guide
Low oil pressure
• Oil level low
• Clogged oil strainer
• Faulty oil pump
• Internal oil leak
• Incorrect oil being used
No oil pressure
• Oil level too low
• Oil pressure relief valve stuck open
• Damaged oil pump
• Internal oil leak
High oil pressure
• Oil pressure relief valve stuck closed
• Clogged oil filter, oil gallery or metering orifice
• Incorrect oil being used
Oil contamination
• Oil or filter not changed often enough
• Worn piston rings
Oil emulsification
• Blown cylinder head gasket
• Leaky coolant passage
• Entry of water

9-5

dummyhead

LUBRICATION SYSTEM

OIL PRESSURE INSPECTION
Remove the following:

[3]

[1]

– Lower cowl (page 2-28)
– Engine oil filter cartridge (page 3-13)
Apply engine oil to the O-ring and install the oil pressure
attachment [1] onto the oil filter boss.
TOOL:
Oil pressure gauge attachment

070MJ-0010101

Apply engine oil to the O-ring and install the engine oil
filter cartridge [2] onto the oil pressure attachment.
TOOL:
Oil filter wrench

[2]

07HAA-PJ70101

[4]

TORQUE: 26 N·m (2.7 kgf·m, 19 lbf·ft)
Connect the oil pressure gauge [3] and attachment [4]
to the oil pressure gauge attachment.
TOOLS:
Oil pressure gauge set

Oil pressure gauge attachment

07506-3000001 or
equivalent
commercially
available
07406-0030000 or
equivalent
commercially
available

Fill the engine with the recommended engine oil (page
3-12).
Warm the engine to normal operating temperature
(approximately 80°C/176°F) and increase the engine
speed to 6,000 min-1 (rpm) and read the oil pressure.
STANDARD:
470 kPa (4.8 kgf/cm2, 68 psi) at 5,000 min-1 (rpm)/
(80°C/176°F)
Stop the engine and remove the tools.
Install the following:
– Engine oil filter cartridge (page 3-13)
– Lower cowl (page 2-28)

OIL PUMP (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the right crankcase cover (page 11-5).
Remove the bolts [1] and oil pump [2].

[1]

9-6

[2]

dummyhead

LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Remove the O-rings [1] and dowel pins [2].

Align

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Replace the O-rings with a new one.
• Align the oil pump shaft tab with the balancer shaft
slit.

[1]

[2]

DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Remove the bolts [1], oil pump cover [2] and dowel pins
[3].

[9]
[3]

Remove the thrust washer [4], oil pump shaft [5], drive
pin [6], outer rotor [7] and inner rotor [8] from the oil
pump body [9].

[7]
[8]

Clean all disassembled parts thoroughly.
[5]

Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
[4]

Dip all parts in clean engine oil.

[2]

[6]
[1]

INSPECTION
If any portion of the oil pump is worn beyond the service
limit, replace the oil pump as an assembly.
Temporarily install the outer and inner rotors into the oil
pump body.

TIP CLEARANCE:

Temporarily install the drive pin and oil pump shaft.
Measure the rotor tip clearance.
SERVICE LIMIT: 0.20 mm (0.008 in)

9-7

dummyhead

LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Measure the pump body clearance.

BODY CLEARANCE:

SERVICE LIMIT: 0.35 mm (0.014 in)

Measure the side clearance using a straight edge and
feeler gauge.

SIDE CLEARANCE:

SERVICE LIMIT: 0.12 mm (0.005 in)

OIL PUMP (NC700XD/SD)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the right crankcase cover (page 12-97).
Remove the bolts [1] and oil pump [2].

[1]

Remove the O-rings [1] and dowel pins [2].

[2]
Align

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Replace the O-rings with new ones.
• Align the oil pump shaft end with the balancer shaft
groove.
[2]

[1]

9-8

dummyhead

LUBRICATION SYSTEM
DISASSEMBLY
Remove the bolts [1] and oil pump cover [2].

[1]

[2]

Remove the clutch oil pump inner rotor [1] and outer
rotor [2].

[1]

[2]

Remove the drive pin [1], oil pump plate [2] and dowel
pins [3].

[3]

[2]

Remove the oil pump shaft [1], drive pin [2], engine oil
pump inner rotor [3] and outer rotor [4].

[1]
[1]

[4]

[2]

[3]

9-9

dummyhead

LUBRICATION SYSTEM
INSPECTION
Engine oil pump: Temporarily install the inner rotor,
outer rotor, drive pin and oil pump shaft into the oil
pump body.

TIP CLEARANCE:

Clutch oil pump: Temporarily install the inner rotor,
outer rotor, drive pin and oil pump shaft into the oil
pump cover.
Measure the rotor tip clearance.
Engine oil pump
SERVICE LIMIT: 0.20 mm (0.008 in)
Clutch oil pump
STANDARD:
0.15 mm (0.006 in)

Measure the pump body clearance.

BODY CLEARANCE:

Engine oil pump
SERVICE LIMIT: 0.35 mm (0.014 in)
Clutch oil pump
STANDARD:
0.15 – 0.21 mm (0.006 – 0.008 in)

Measure the side clearance using a straight edge and
feeler gauge.
Engine oil pump
SERVICE LIMIT: 0.12 mm (0.005 in)
Clutch oil pump
STANDARD:
0.04 – 0.09 mm (0.002 – 0.004 in)

9-10

SIDE CLEARANCE:

dummyhead

LUBRICATION SYSTEM
ASSEMBLY
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
Dip all parts in clean engine oil.
CLUTCH OIL PUMP
INNER ROTOR

OIL PUMP PLATE
DRIVE PIN

CLUTCH OIL PUMP
OUTER ROTOR
DOWEL PIN

DRIVE PIN

OIL PUMP BODY
ENGINE OIL PUMP
OUTER ROTOR

DOWEL PIN

ENGINE OIL PUMP
INNER ROTOR

OIL PUMP COVER

OIL PUMP SHAFT

OIL STRAINER
REMOVAL
Drain the engine oil (page 3-13).

[2]

Remove the exhaust pipe/muffler (page 2-32).
Loosen the bolts [1] in a crisscross pattern in 2 or 3
steps, and remove the bolts and oil pan [2].

[1]

9-11

dummyhead

LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Remove the oil strainer [1] and seal ring [2].

[2]

Clean the oil strainer screen and check for damage,
replace it if necessary.

[1]

INSTALLATION
Apply engine oil to a new seal ring [1] and install it onto
the oil strainer [2].

[1]

Install the oil strainer into the crankcase while aligning
the oil strainer boss with the crankcase groove.

[2]

Clean the oil pan mating surface thoroughly.
Apply liquid sealant (Three Bond 1207B or equivalent)
to the oil pan mating surface as shown.
Do not apply more liquid sealant than necessary.

Install the oil pan [1] and bolts [2].

[1]

Tighten the bolts in a crisscross pattern in 2 or 3 steps.
Install the exhaust pipe/muffler (page 2-32).
Fill the engine with the recommended engine oil and
check that there are no oil leaks (page 3-12).

[2]

9-12

Align

dummytext

10. CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES

COMPONENT LOCATION ··························10-2

ROCKER ARM ············································ 10-8

SERVICE INFORMATION ···························10-3

CAM CHAIN TENSIONER ························ 10-11

TROUBLESHOOTING·································10-4

CAMSHAFT··············································· 10-13

CYLINDER COMPRESSION TEST·············10-5

CYLINDER HEAD ····································· 10-16

10

CYLINDER HEAD COVER··························10-5

10-1

dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES

COMPONENT LOCATION
CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES

10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

56 N·m (5.7 kgf·m, 41 lbf·ft)
4.0 N·m (0.4 kgf·m, 3.0 lbf·ft)

44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 32 lbf·ft)

29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m, 21 lbf·ft)

10-2

dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES

SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
• This section covers service of the cylinder head, valves, camshaft and rocker arm.
• The rocker arm services can be done with the engine installed in the frame. The cylinder head, valves and camshaft service
requires engine removal.
• When disassembling, mark and store the disassembled parts to ensure that they are reinstalled in their original locations.
• Clean all disassembled parts with cleaning solvent and dry them by blowing them off with compressed air before inspection.
• Camshaft lubricating oil is fed through oil passages in the cylinder head. Clean the oil passages before assembling cylinder
head.
• Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces when removing the cylinder head cover and cylinder head.

SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM
Cylinder compression at 470 min-1(rpm)
Valve clearance

STANDARD
1,775 kPa (18.1 kgf/cm2, 257 psi)
0.17 ± 0.02 (0.007 ± 0.001)
0.28 ± 0.02 (0.011 ± 0.001)
20.012 – 20.030 (0.7879 – 0.7886)
19.972 – 19.993 (0.7863 – 0.7871)
0.019 – 0.058 (0.0007 – 0.0023)
–

IN
EX

Rocker arm I.D.
Rocker arm,
rocker arm
Rocker arm shaft O.D.
shaft
Rocker arm-to-shaft clearance
Cam chain tensioner wedge B length
Camshaft
Cam lobe height
IN

34.7897 – 35.0297 (1.36967 – 1.37912)

EX

34.9227 – 35.1627 (1.37491 – 1.38436)

Runout
Camshaft journal O.D.
Valve, valve
Valve stem O.D.
IN
guide
EX
Valve guide I.D.
IN/EX
Stem-to-guide
IN
clearance
EX
IN
Valve guide
projection above
EX
cylinder head
Valve seat width
IN
EX
Valve spring free length
Cylinder head warpage
Cylinder head camshaft journal I.D.
Cylinder head-to-camshaft clearance

–
41.935 – 41.950 (1.6510 – 1.6516)
4.975 – 4.990 (0.1959 – 0.1965)
4.965 – 4.980 (0.1955 – 0.1961)
5.000 – 5.012 (0.1969 – 0.1973)
0.010 – 0.037 (0.0004 – 0.0015)
0.020 – 0.047 (0.0008 – 0.0019)
17.7 – 18.0 (0.70 – 0.71)

Unit: mm (in)
SERVICE LIMIT
–
–
–
20.041 (0.7890)
19.961 (0.7859)
0.08 (0.003)
6.0 (0.24)
34.7697
(1.36888)
34.9027
(1.37412)
0.04 (0.002)
41.927 (1.6507)
4.965 (0.1955)
4.955 (0.1951)
5.04 (0.198)
0.075 (0.0030)
0.085 (0.0033)
–

19.6 – 19.9 (0.77 – 0.78)

–

0.90 – 1.10 (0.035 – 0.043)
1.30 – 1.50 (0.051 – 0.059)
49.07 (1.932)
–
41.995 – 42.019 (1.6533 – 1.6543)
0.045 – 0.084 (0.0018 – 0.0033)

1.5 (0.06)
1.9 (0.07)
48.1 (1.89)
0.10 (0.004)
42.027 (1.6546)
0.10 (0.004)

TORQUE VALUES

Cylinder head cover socket bolt
Breather plate mounting bolt

3
8

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
6
6

Rocker arm shaft bolt

3

8

29 (3.0, 21)

Camshaft maintenance cap

1

36

4.0 (0.4, 3.0)

Cam chain tensioner bolt
Cam sprocket bolt

2
1

6
10

12 (1.2, 9)
56 (5.7, 41)

Water hose band screw
Insulator band screw
Cylinder head special bolt

6
1
6

–
5
9

–
–
44 (4.5, 32)

ITEM

Q'TY

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
10 (1.0, 7)
12 (1.2, 9)

REMARKS
Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Apply engine oil to the threads and
seating surface.
See page 10-11
See page 10-28
Apply engine oil to the threads and
seating surface.
See page 10-16
See page 10-25
Apply molybdenum oil solution to the
threads and seating surface.

10-3

dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES

TROUBLESHOOTING
• Engine top-end problems usually affect engine performance. These problems can be diagnosed by a compression test or by
tracing engine noises to the top-end with a sounding rod stethoscope.
• If the performance is poor at low speeds, check for white smoke in the crankcase breather hose. If the hose is smoky, check for
a seized piston ring (page 15-16).
Compression too low, hard starting or poor performance at low speed
• Valves:
– Incorrect valve clearance adjustment
– Burned or bent valve
– Incorrect valve timing
– Broken valve spring
– Uneven valve seating
• Cylinder head:
– Leaking or damaged cylinder head gasket
– Warped or cracked cylinder head
– Loose spark plug
• Worn cylinder, piston or piston rings (page 15-16)
Compression too high, overheating or knocking
• Excessive carbon build-up on piston crown or on combustion chamber
Excessive smoke
• Cylinder head:
– Worn valve stem or valve guide
– Damaged stem seal
• Worn cylinder, piston or piston rings (page 15-16)
Excessive noise
• Cylinder head:
– Incorrect valve clearance adjustment
– Sticking valve or broken valve spring
– Damaged or worn camshaft
– Loose or worn cam chain
– Worn or damaged cam chain
– Worn or damaged cam chain tensioner
– Worn cam sprocket teeth
– Worn rocker arm and/or shaft
– Worn rocker arm and valve stem end
• Worn cylinder, piston or piston rings (page 15-16)
Rough idle
• Low cylinder compression

10-4

dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES

CYLINDER COMPRESSION TEST
Remove the following:
– Shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA/XD) (page 2-14)
– Shelter/side cover (NC700S/SA/SD) (page 2-15)
– Lower cowl (page 2-28)
Warm the engine to normal operating temperature.
Stop the engine and remove the all spark plug caps and
spark plugs (page 3-8).
Disconnect the fuel pump 1P (Black) connector [1].

[1]

Install a compression gauge [1] into the spark plug hole.

[1]

Open the throttle all the way and crank the engine with
the starter motor until the gauge reading stops rising.
The maximum reading is usually reached within 4 – 7
seconds.
STANDARD:
1,775 kPa (18.1 kgf/cm2, 257 psi) at 470 min-1 (rpm)
Low compression can be caused by:
–
–
–
–

Blown cylinder head gasket
Improper valve clearance adjustment
Valve leakage
Worn piston ring or cylinder

High compression can be caused by:
– Carbon deposits in combustion chamber or on
piston head

CYLINDER HEAD COVER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the bolts [1] and radiator lower stay [2].

[1]

[2]

Release the radiator boss from the radiator mounting
rubber [3].

[3]

SLITS

[1]

Align

10-5

dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
Release the fan motor 3P (Gray) connector [1], air
cleaner housing drain hose [2] and spark plug wire [3]
from the radiator.

[1]

[2]

Lower the radiator and disconnect the crankcase
breather hose [1].

[1]

Be careful not to damage the radiator fins.

Remove the cylinder head cover socket bolts [1] and
mounting rubbers [2].

[1]/[2]

Be careful not to damage the radiator fins.

Remove the cylinder head cover [1] from the cylinder
head.

[1]

Be careful not to damage the radiator fins.
Remove the cylinder head cover packing [2] from the
cylinder head cover.

[2]

10-6

[3]

dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

[2]

• Replace the cylinder head cover packing with a new
one.
• Check the mounting rubbers [1] are in good
condition, replace them if necessary.
• Install the mounting rubbers with their "UP" mark [2]
facing up.
• Route the wire harness and hoses properly (page 125).
• Make sure the radiator mounting rubber slits facing
down.
• Align radiator lower stay slit with cylinder head tab.
TORQUE:
Cylinder head cover socket bolts:
10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)

[1]

DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Remove the breather plate mounting bolts [1].

[1]

Remove the breather plate [1] and gasket [2].
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
• Replace the breather plate gasket with a new one.
• Apply locking agent to the breather plate mounting
bolt threads (page 10-3).
TORQUE:
Breather plate mounting bolt:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

[2]

[1]

10-7

dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES

ROCKER ARM
REMOVAL
Remove the cylinder head cover (page 10-5).

[1]

Remove the camshaft maintenance cap [1] and O-ring
[2].

[2]

Remove the crankshaft hole cap (page 3-10).
Turn the crankshaft counterclockwise and align the " "
mark [1] on the cam sprocket with the lower cylinder
head index line [2].

[1]

[2]

Remove the rocker arm shaft bolts [1].

[1]

Remove the rocker arm assembly [1].

[2]

Be careful not to let the dowel pin [2] fall into the
crankcase.
Remove the dowel pin from the rocker arm shaft.

[1]

10-8

dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Remove the washers [1] and rocker arms from the
rocker arm shaft [2].
Apply molybdenum oil solution to the rocker arm sliding
surface and rocker arm shaft outer surface.
Install the washers and rocker arms to the rocker arm
shaft.
Rocker arm identification tips
•
•
•
•

"PWC-A" mark: exhaust rocker arm A [3]
White paint mark: Intake rocker arm S [4]
No mark: Intake rocker arm P [5]
"PWC-B" mark: exhaust rocker arm B [6]
[3]
[4]

[5]

[3]
[6]

[4]
[5]

[1]
[6]

[1]

[2]

INSPECTION
Check the sliding surface of each rocker arm for wear
or damage.
Check the oil hole for clog of each rocker arm.
Measure the rocker arm I.D.
SERVICE LIMIT: 20.041 mm (0.7890 in)

10-9

dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
Check the sliding surface of the rocker arm shaft for
wear or damage.
Check the oil hole for clog of the rocker arm shaft.
Measure the rocker arm shaft O.D. at the rocker arm
sliding area.
SERVICE LIMIT: 19.961 mm (0.7859 in)
Calculate the rocker arm-to-shaft clearance.
SERVICE LIMIT: 0.08 mm (0.003 in)

INSTALLATION
Make sure the " " mark [1] on the cam sprocket facing
the lower cylinder head index line [2].
If it does not align, turn the crankshaft counterclockwise
and align it.

[1]

Install the dowel pin [1] to the rocker arm shaft.

[4]

[2]
[1]

[2]

Install the rocker arm assembly [2].
• Align boss [3] and dowel pin with the cylinder head
holes [4].
• Make sure the washers [5] are installed in correct
position.
• Be careful not to let the dowel pin fall into the
crankcase.

[5]

[3]

Apply engine oil to the rocker arm shaft bolts threads
and seating surface.
Install and tighten rocker arm shaft bolts [1] to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 29 N·m (3.0 kgf·m, 21 lbf·ft)

[1]

10-10

dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
Apply engine oil to a new O-ring [1] and install it to the
camshaft maintenance cap [2].

[2]

Temporarily Install the camshaft maintenance cap to
the cylinder head.
If the engine is removed from the frame, tighten the
camshaft maintenance cap to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 4.0 N·m (0.4 kgf·m, 3.0 lbf·ft)

[1]

If the engine is installed on the frame, insert a feeler
gauge (0.1 mm) [1] between the camshaft maintenance
cap and cylinder head.

[1]

Tighten the camshaft maintenance cap securely.
Remove the feeler gauge.
Further tighten the camshaft maintenance cap at 30°.
One concave area [2] size is equivalent with 30°.
Install the following:
– Cylinder head cover (page 10-5)
– Crankshaft hole cap (page 3-12)

[2]

CAM CHAIN TENSIONER
CAM CHAIN INSPECTION
Remove the cylinder head cover (page 10-5).

[1]

Measure the cam chain tensioner wedge B [1] length.
SERVICE LIMIT: 6.0 mm (0.24 in)

6.0 mm (0.24 in)

Replace the cam chain with a new one if the projection
exceeds the service limit.
For the cam chain replacement, remove the following:
– Cam sprocket (page 10-13)
– Primary drive gear
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 11-15)
– NC700XD/SD (page 12-108)

RELEASING CAM CHAIN TENSION
Remove the cylinder head cover (page 10-5).

[2]

Install an O.D. 2 mm pin [1] into the cam chain
tensioner wedge A hole while pulling the wedge A [2]
straight up and pushing down the wedge B [3].
Be careful not to let the 2 mm pin fall into the
crankcase.

[1]

[3]

10-11

dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the thermostat housing (page 8-7).

[3]

Release the cam chain tension (page 10-11).
Remove the cam chain tensioner bolts [1] and sealing
washers [2].
Remove the cam chain tensioner [3].

[1]/[2]

Install the cam chain tensioner [1] while aligning
tensioner end with the groove in the crankcase.
Install new sealing washers, cam chain tensioner bolts
and tighten the cam chain tensioner bolts to the
specified torque.

Align

TORQUE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Apply the cam chain tension (page 10-12).
Install the thermostat housing (page 8-7).

[1]

INSPECTION
Remove the cam chain tensioner (page 10-12).

[2]

Check the cam chain tensioner [1] for wear or damage.
Replace the cam chain tensioner if necessary.
Remove the cam chain guide (page 10-16).
Check the cam chain guide [2] for wear or damage.
Replace the cam chain guide if necessary.

[1]

APPLYING CAM CHAIN TENSION
Remove the O.D. 2 mm pin [1] from the cam chain
tensioner wedge A hole while pulling the wedge A [2]
straight up and pushing down the wedge B [3].

[2]

Be careful not to let the 2 mm pin fall into the
crankcase.
Install the cylinder head cover (page 10-5).

[1]

10-12

[3]

dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES

CAMSHAFT
REMOVAL
Remove the engine.

[1]

– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 16-5)
– NC700XD/SD (page 16-9)
Loosen the water hose band screw [1] and disconnect
the water bypass hose.
Remove the bolts [2], water pump [3] and O-rings [4].

[3]

Remove the rocker arm (page 10-8).

[2]

[4]
[2]

Release the cam chain tension (page 10-11).
Loosen the cam sprocket bolt [1] by holding the
flywheel mounting bolt and remove it.
Remove the cam sprocket bolt and cam sprocket [2] by
removing the cam chain [3] from the cam sprocket.
Attach a piece of wire to the cam chain to prevent it
from falling into the crankcase.

[1]

Remove the camshaft [1].

[3]
[1]

INSPECTION
CAMSHAFT
Check the cam and journal surfaces of the camshaft for
scoring, scratches or evidence of insufficient
lubrication.
Support both sides of the camshaft (at journals) with Vblocks and check the camshaft runout with a dial
gauge.
SERVICE LIMIT: 0.04 mm (0.002 in)

10-13

dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
Using a micrometer, measure each cam lobe height.
SERVICE LIMITS:
IN: 34.7697 mm (1.36888 in)
EX: 34.9027 mm (1.37412 in)

Measure the camshaft journals O.D.
SERVICE LIMIT: 41.927 mm (1.6507 in)

CYLINDER HEAD
Measure the cylinder head camshaft journal I.D.
SERVICE LIMIT: 42.027 mm (1.6546 in)
Calculate the cylinder head-to-camshaft clearance.
SERVICE LIMIT: 0.10 mm (0.004 in)

CAM SPROCKET
Check the cam sprocket teeth for wear or damage.

10-14

dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
INSTALLATION
Apply molybdenum oil solution to the camshaft lobes,
journals and thrust surfaces.
Install the camshaft [1].

[1]

Align the "1T" mark on the flywheel with the index notch
on the alternator cover (page 3-10).

[2]

[1]

Align the "1" mark [1] on the cam sprocket with the
upper index line [2] on the cylinder head and install the
cam chain onto the cam sprocket.
Install the cam sprocket onto the camshaft by aligning
the groove with the pin.

Align

Apply engine oil to the cam sprocket bolt threads and
seating surface.

[1]

Install the cam sprocket bolt [1].
Hold the flywheel mounting bolt and tighten the cam
sprocket bolt to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 56 N·m (5.7 kgf·m, 41 lbf·ft)
Apply the cam chain tension (page 10-12).
Install the rocker arm (page 10-10).

Apply engine oil to a new large O-ring [1] and install it to
the water pump [2].

[1]

Align

Install a new O-ring [3] to the water pump.
[3]

Install the water pump to the cylinder head.
Align the water pump shaft groove with camshaft tab.

[2]

10-15

dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
Install and tighten the bolts [1].

[2]

Connect the water bypass hose [2].
• Align the water bypass hose index mark with the
water pump tab.
• Route the hoses properly (page 1-25).

[1]

Tighten the water hose band screws to the specified
range as shown.
Install the engine.
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 16-15)
– NC700XD/SD (page 16-21)

0 – 1 mm
(0 – 0.04 in)

CYLINDER HEAD
REMOVAL
Remove the following:

[1]

– Engine
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 16-5)
– NC700XD/SD (page 16-9)
– Cylinder head cover (page 10-5)
– Right crankcase cover
– NC700X/XA/S/SA(page 11-5)
– NC700XD/SD (page 12-97)
Remove the camshaft maintenance cap [1] and O-ring
[2].

[2]

10-16

Align

dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
Turn the crankshaft clockwise and align the index lines
[1] with the crankcase matting surface, while the "TOP"
mark [2] is facing down.

NC700X/XA/S/SA:

[1]

Align

[2]
NC700XD/SD:

[1]

[2]

Align

Make sure the " " mark [1] on the cam sprocket facing
the lower cylinder head index line [2].

[3]

If the " " mark on the cam sprocket is facing the upper
cylinder head index line [3], turn the crankshaft
clockwise one full turn (360°) and realign the " " mark
with the lower cylinder head index line.

[1]

Remove the cam chain tensioner (page 10-12).

[2]
[1]

[4]

Insert the gear holder [1] between the primary drive
gear and driven gear.
TOOL:
Gear holder, 2.5

[3]

07724-0010100

Remove the cam sprocket bolt [2].
Remove the cam sprocket [3] by removing the cam
chain [4] from the cam sprocket.
Attach a piece of wire to the cam chain to prevent it
from falling into the crankcase.

[2]

10-17

dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
Remove the 6 mm bolts [1].

[1]

Remove the cylinder head special bolts [1].

[1]

[2]

Loosen the cylinder head special bolts in a crisscross
pattern in 2 or 3 steps.
Remove the cylinder head [2].
• Attach a piece of wire to the cam chain to prevent it
from falling into the crankcase.
• Do not strike the cylinder too hard and do not
damage the mating surface with a screwdriver.

Remove the gasket [1], dowel pins [2] and cam chain
guide [3].

[1]

[3]

Remove the partition plate [1].
Check the partition plate for deterioration or damage.

10-18

[2]
[1]

dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
DISASSEMBLY
Remove the following:
–
–
–
–

[2]

Cylinder head (page 10-16)
Spark plug (page 3-8)
Injector (page 7-20)
Camshaft (page 10-13)

Loosen the insulator band screws [1] and remove the
insulator [2].

[1]

Remove the valve spring cotters using the special tool
as shown.
TOOL:
Valve spring compressor

07757-0010000

To prevent loss of tension, do not compress the valve
springs more than necessary to remove the cotters.

Remove the following:
–
–
–
–
–

[3] [5] [4]

Spring retainer [1]
Valve spring [2]
Valve [3]
Stem seal [4]
Valve spring seat [5]

[2]

[1]

Mark all parts during disassembly so they can be
placed back in their original locations.

INSPECTION
CYLINDER HEAD
Remove carbon
chambers [1].

deposits

from

the

combustion

Avoid damaging the gasket surface.
Check the spark plug hole and valve areas for cracks.

[1]

10-19

dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
Check the cylinder head for warpage with a straight
edge and feeler gauge.
SERVICE LIMIT: 0.10 mm (0.004 in)

VALVE SPRING
Measure the free length of the valve spring.
SERVICE LIMIT: 48.1 mm (1.89 in)
Replace the springs if they are shorter than the service
limits.

VALVE/VALVE GUIDE
Check that the valve moves smoothly in the guide.
Inspect each valve for bending, burning or abnormal
stem wear.
Measure and record each valve stem O.D.
SERVICE LIMITS:
IN: 4.965 mm (0.1955 in)
EX: 4.955 mm (0.1951 in)

Ream the guides to remove any carbon deposits before
checking clearances.
Insert the reamer [1] from the combustion chamber side
of the cylinder head and always rotate the reamer
clockwise.
TOOL:
Valve guide reamer, 5.010 mm

10-20

07984-MA60001

[1]

dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
Measure and record each valve guide I.D.
SERVICE LIMIT: 5.04 mm (0.198 in)
Subtract each valve stem O.D. from the corresponding
guide I.D. to obtain the stem-to-guide clearance.
SERVICE LIMITS:
IN: 0.075 mm (0.0030 in)
EX: 0.085 mm (0.0033 in)
Reface the valve
seats whenever the
valve guides are
replaced (page 1022).

If the stem-to-guide clearance is out of standard,
determine if a new guide with standard dimensions
would bring the clearance within tolerance. If so,
replace any guides as necessary and ream to fit.
If the stem-to-guide clearance exceeds the service limit
with the new guides, replace the valves and guides.

VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT
Chill the replacement valve guides in the freezer
section of a refrigerator for about an hour.
Do not use a torch
to heat the cylinder
head; it may cause
warping.

[1]

Heat the cylinder head to 100 – 150°C (212 – 302°F)
with a hot plate or oven.
To avoid burns, wear heavy gloves when handling the
heated cylinder head.
Support the cylinder head and drive out the valve
guides from combustion chamber side of the cylinder
head.
TOOL:
Valve guide driver [1]

07942-8920000

Drive in the valve guides to the specified depth from the
top of the cylinder head.
SPECIFIED DEPTH:
IN: 17.7 – 18.0 mm (0.70 – 0.71 in)
EX: 19.6 – 19.9 mm (0.77 – 0.78 in)
TOOL:
Valve guide driver [1]

07743-0020000

Let the cylinder head cool to room temperature.

[1]
Use cutting oil on
the reamer during
this operation.

Ream new valve guides after installation.

[1]

Insert the reamer [1] from the combustion chamber side
of the cylinder head and always rotate the reamer
clockwise.
TOOL:
Valve guide reamer, 5.010 mm

07984-MA60001

Clean the cylinder head thoroughly to remove any
metal particles.
Reface the valve seat (page 10-22).

10-21

dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
VALVE SEAT INSPECTION/REFACING
Clean the intake and exhaust valves thoroughly to
remove carbon deposits.

[1]

Apply a light coating of Prussian Blue to the valve
seats.
Tap the valves and seats using a rubber hose or other
hand-lapping tool [1].

Remove the valve and inspect the valve seat face.
The valve seat contact should be within the specified
width and even all around the circumference.
STANDARD:
IN: 0.90 – 1.10 mm (0.035 – 0.043 in)
EX: 1.30 – 1.50 mm (0.051 – 0.059 in)
SERVICE LIMITS:
IN: 1.5 mm (0.06 in)
EX: 1.9 mm (0.07 in)
If the seat width is not within specification, reface the
valve seat (page 10-23).
Inspect the valve seat face for:
• Uneven seat width:
– Replace the valve and reface the valve seat.
• Damaged face:
– Replace the valve and reface the valve seat.
The valves cannot be ground.
If a valve face is burned or badly worn or if it contacts
the seat unevenly, replace the valve.
• Contact area (too high or too low)
– Reface the valve seat.

10-22

SEAT WIDTH

dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
Follow the refacing
manufacturer's
operating
instructions.

VALVE SEAT REFACING
Valve seat cutters/grinders or equivalent valve seat
refacing equipment are recommended to correct worn
valve seats.
If the contact area is too high on the valve, the seat
must be lowered using a 32° flat cutter.

45°

If the contact area is too low on the valve, the seat must
be raised using a 60° interior cutter.
Refinish the seat to specifications, using a 45° finish
cutter.
Reface the seat with
a 45° cutter
whenever a valve
guide is replaced.

60°
32°

Use a 45° cutter to remove any roughness or
irregularities from the seat.
TOOLS:
Seat cutter, 27.5 mm (45° IN)
Seat cutter, 24 mm (45° EX)
Cutter holder, 5.0 mm

07780-0010200
07780-0010600
07781-0010400

Use a 32° cutter to remove the top 1/4 of the existing
valve seat material.
TOOLS:
Flat cutter, 28 mm (32° IN)
Flat cutter, 25 mm (32° EX)
Cutter holder, 5.0 mm

07780-0012100
07780-0012000
07781-0010400

Use a 60° cutter to remove the bottom 1/4 of the old
seat.
TOOLS:
Interior cutter, 26 mm (60° IN)
Interior cutter, 22 mm (60° EX)
Cutter holder, 5.0 mm

07780-0014500
07780-0014202
07781-0010400

Using a 45° seat cutter, cut the seat to the proper width.
Make sure that all pitting and irregularities are removed.
Refinish if necessary.
After cutting the seat, apply lapping compound to the
valve face, and lap the valve using light pressure.

• Excessive lapping pressure may deform or damage
the seat.
• Change the angle of lapping tool [1] frequently to
prevent uneven seat wear.
• Do not allow lapping compound to enter the guides.
After lapping, wash all residual compound off the
cylinder head and valve.
Recheck the seat contact after lapping.
[1]

10-23

dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
ASSEMBLY
INSULATOR

COTTERS
RETAINER
VALVE SPRING

STEM SEAL
SPRING SEAT
VALVE GUIDE

INTAKE VALVE

EXHAUST VALVE

Install the valve spring seats [1].

[2]

Apply engine oil to new stem seals [2] inside and install
them.

[4]

Apply molybdenum oil solution to the valve stem sliding
surface and stem end.
Insert the valve [3] into the valve guide while turning it
slowly to avoid damage to the stem seal.

[5]

Install the valve springs [4] with the tightly wound coils
facing the combustion chamber.
Install the valve spring retainer [5].
[3]

[1]
[4]

COMBUSTION CHAMBER SIDE

10-24

dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
Install the valve cotters using the special tool as shown.
TOOL:
Valve spring compressor

07757-0010000

• To prevent loss of tension, do not compress the
valve spring more than necessary.
• Grease the cotters to ease installation.

Tap the valve stems gently with plastic hammer and
shaft as shown to seat the cotters firmly.
Support the cylinder head above the work bench
surface to prevent possible valve damage.

Install the insulator [1] while aligning its slit with cylinder
head tab.

[1]
11 – 13 mm
(0.4 – 0.5 in)

Tighten the band screw [2] to the specified range.
Install the following:
–
–
–
–

Camshaft (page 10-15)
Injector (page 7-21)
Spark plug (page 3-8)
Cylinder head (page 10-25)

[2]

Align

INSTALLATION
Install the partition plate [1] to the No.1 cylinder intake
side.

[2]

[1]

Install the partition plate with its tab [2] side facing
inside.

10-25

dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
Install the cam chain guide [1].

[1]

• Align the cam chain guide end with the groove in the
crankcase.
• Align the cam chain guide tabs with the grooves in
the crankcase.

Align

Align

Install the dowel pins [1] and new gasket [2].

[2]

[1]

Route the cam chain through the cylinder head and
install the cylinder head [1] onto the cylinder.
Apply molybdenum oil solution to the cylinder head
special bolts [2] threads and seating surface.

[1]
[2]

Install and tighten the cylinder head special bolts in a
crisscross pattern in 2 or 3 steps to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 32 lbf·ft)

Install and tighten the 6 mm bolts [1].

[1]

10-26

dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
Turn the crankshaft clockwise and align the index lines
[1] with the crankcase matting surface, while the "TOP"
mark [2] is facing down.

NC700X/XA/S/SA:

[1]

Align

[2]
NC700XD/SD:

[1]

[2]

Install the cam sprocket to the camshaft while installing
cam chain [1] onto the cam sprocket.

Align

Align
[3]

• Install the cam sprocket with its "MGS" mark [2]
facing out.
• Align the cam sprocket slit with camshaft pin.
• Align the cam sprocket " " mark with cylinder head
lower index line.
Apply engine oil to the cam sprocket bolt threads and
seating surface.
Install the cam sprocket bolt [3].
Insert the gear holder [4] between the primary drive
gear and driven gear, then tighten the cam sprocket bolt
to the specified torque.
TOOL:
Gear holder, 2.5

Align
[1]

[2]

07724-0010100

TORQUE: 56 N·m (5.7 kgf·m, 41 lbf·ft)
Install the cam chain tensioner (page 10-12).

[3]
[4]

10-27

dummyhead

CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES
Apply engine oil to a new O-ring [1] and install it to the
camshaft maintenance cap [2].

[2]

Temporarily Install the camshaft maintenance cap to
the cylinder head.
If the engine is removed from the frame, tighten the
camshaft maintenance cap to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 4.0 N·m (0.4 kgf·m, 3.0 lbf·ft)

[1]

If the engine is installed on the frame, insert a feeler
gauge (0.1 mm) [1] between the camshaft maintenance
cap and cylinder head.

[1]

Tighten the camshaft maintenance cap securely.
Remove the feeler gauge.
Further tighten the camshaft maintenance cap at 30°.
One concave area [2] size is equivalent with 30°.
Install the following:
– Cylinder head cover (page 10-5)
– Right crankcase cover
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 11-5)
– NC700XD/SD (page 12-103)
– Engine
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 16-15)
– NC700XD/SD (page 16-21)

10-28

[2]

dummytext

11. CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)

COMPONENT LOCATION ··························11-2

CLUTCH ······················································ 11-7

SERVICE INFORMATION ···························11-3

PRIMARY DRIVE GEAR/CKP SENSOR
ROTOR······················································ 11-15

TROUBLESHOOTING·································11-4
GEARSHIFT LINKAGE ····························· 11-16
RIGHT CRANKCASE COVER ····················11-5
GEARSHIFT PEDAL ································· 11-19

11

11-1

dummyhead

CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)

COMPONENT LOCATION
CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)

23 N·m (2.3 kgf·m, 17 lbf·ft)

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

93 N·m (9.5 kgf·m, 69 lbf·ft)

128 N·m (13.1 kgf·m, 94 lbf·ft)

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

11-2

dummyhead

CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)

SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
• This section covers service of the clutch and gearshift linkage. All service can be done with the engine installed in the frame.
• Engine oil viscosity and level have an effect on clutch disengagement. Oil additives also effect clutch performance and are not
recommended. When the clutch does not disengage or the motorcycle creeps with the clutch lever pulled in, inspect the engine
oil level before servicing the clutch system.

SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM

STANDARD
10 – 20 (3/8 – 13/16)
43.2 (1.70)
2.62 – 2.78 (0.103 – 0.109)
–
21.991 – 22.016 (0.8658 – 0.8668)
31.959 – 31.975 (1.2582 – 1.2589)
21.967 – 21.980 (0.8648 – 0.8654)
0.011 – 0.049 (0.0004 – 0.0019)
32.000 – 32.025 (1.2598 – 1.2608)
0.025 – 0.066 (0.0010 – 0.0026)

Clutch lever freeplay
Clutch

Spring free length
Disc thickness
Plate warpage
Clutch outer guide
I.D.
O.D.
Mainshaft O.D. at clutch outer guide
Clutch outer guide-to-mainshaft clearance
Primary driven gear I.D.
Primary driven gear-to-clutch outer guide clearance

Unit: mm (in)
SERVICE LIMIT
–
41.7 (1.64)
2.3 (0.09)
0.30 (0.012)
22.03 (0.867)
31.92 (1.257)
21.95 (0.864)
0.08 (0.003)
32.09 (1.263)
0.10 (0.004)

TORQUE VALUES

Clutch center lock nut

1

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
18

Clutch lifter plate bolt
Primary drive gear mounting bolt

4
1

6
10

12 (1.2, 9)
93 (9.5, 69)

Shift drum stopper arm pivot bolt

1

6

12 (1.2, 9)

Shift drum center socket bolt

1

8

23 (2.3, 17)

Gearshift pedal adjuster lock nut
Gearshift pedal pivot bolt

2
1

6
8

10 (1.0, 7)
27 (2.8, 20)

ITEM

Q'TY

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
128 (13.1, 94)

REMARKS
Apply engine oil to the threads and
seating surface.
Lock nut; replace with a new one and
stake.
Apply engine oil to the threads and
seating surface.
Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip

11-3

dummyhead

CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)

TROUBLESHOOTING
Clutch lever is too hard to pull in
• Damaged, kinked or dirty clutch cable
• Improperly routed clutch cable
• Damaged clutch lifter mechanism
• Faulty clutch lifter bearing
• Clutch lifter piece installed improperly
Clutch slips when accelerating
• Clutch lifter sticking
• Worn clutch disc
• Weak clutch springs
• No clutch lever freeplay
• Engine oil mixed with molybdenum or graphite additive
Clutch will not disengage or motorcycle creeps with clutch disengaged
• Excessive clutch lever freeplay
• Clutch plate warped
• Engine oil level too high, improper engine oil viscosity or additive used
• Loose clutch center lock nut
• Damaged clutch lifter mechanism
• Clutch lifter rod installed improperly
• Worn clutch outer slot and clutch center grooves
• Improper clutch operation
Hard to shift
• Misadjusted clutch cable
• Improper clutch operation
• Improper engine oil viscosity
• Damaged or bent shift fork
• Bent shift fork shaft
• Bent shift fork claw
• Loose shift drum stopper plate bolt
• Damaged shift drum stopper plate
• Damaged shift drum guide grooves
• Damaged or bent gearshift spindle
Transmission jumps out of gear
• Worn shift drum stopper arm
• Weak or broken shift drum stopper arm return spring
• Loose shift drum stopper plate bolt
• Damaged shift drum stopper plate
• Bent shift fork shaft
• Damaged or bent shift forks
• Worn gear engagement dogs or slots
Gearshift pedal will not return
• Weak or broken gearshift spindle return spring
• Damaged or bent gearshift spindle

11-4

dummyhead

CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)

RIGHT CRANKCASE COVER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the following:
– Right shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA) (page 2-14)
– Maintenance lid (page 21-6)
Drain the engine oil (page 3-13).
Disconnect the CKP sensor 2P (Red) connector [1] and
release the CKP sensor harness.

[1]

Release the reserve tank overflow hose [1] from the
stay [2].

[1]

Remove the bolt [3] and stay.

[2]

Remove the bolts [1] and clutch cable guide [2], then
disconnect the clutch cable [3] from the clutch lifter arm
[4].

[4]

[3]
[3]

[2]

[1]

Loosen the right crankcase cover bolts [1] in a
crisscross pattern in 2 or 3 steps, and remove the bolts
and sealing washer [2].
Remove the right crankcase cover [3].

[1]/[2]

[3]

[1]

11-5

dummyhead

CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Remove the dowel pins [1].
Clean off any sealant from the right crankcase cover
mating surfaces.

[1]

[1]

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Apply liquid sealant (Three bond 1207B or
equivalent) to the right crankcase cover mating
surface as shown.
• Do not apply more liquid sealant than necessary.
• Apply liquid sealant (Three bond 1207B or
equivalent) to the CKP sensor wire grommet sealing
surface.
• Replace the sealing washer with a new one.
• Route the cables and wire harness properly (page 125).
Adjust the clutch lever freeplay (page 3-26).
Fill the engine with the recommended engine oil and
check that there are no oil leaks (page 3-12).

CLUTCH LIFTER ARM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION
Remove the clutch lifter rod A [1].
Remove the snap ring [2], clutch lifter arm [3] and return
spring [4] from the right crankcase cover.
Check the return spring for fatigue or damage.

[3]

[2]

[4]

Check the lifter arm spindle [1] for wear or damage.

[2]

Check the lifter arm oil seal [2] and needle bearings [3]
for wear or damage.

[3]

11-6

[1]

[1]

dummyhead

CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Install the clutch lifter arm [1], return spring [2] and snap
ring [3].

[4]

• Align the return spring hook [4] with right crankcase
cover.
• Align the return spring end [5] with clutch lifter arm
groove.
• Make sure the snap ring is firmly seated in the
groove.

[1]

Apply engine oil to the clutch lifter rod A sliding surface.
Install the clutch lifter rod A [6].

[6]
[3]

[5]

[2]

CLUTCH
REMOVAL
Remove the right crankcase cover (page 11-5).

[2]

[4]

Remove the clutch lifter rod B [1].
Loosen the clutch lifter plate bolts [2] in a crisscross
pattern in 2 or 3 steps, and remove the bolts, lifter plate/
bearing [3] and clutch springs [4].

[1]

[3]

Unstake the clutch center lock nut [1].
Be careful not to damage the mainshaft threads.
Unstake

[1]

Hold the clutch pressure plate with the special tool and
loosen the clutch center lock nut [1].
TOOL:
Clutch center holder [2]

07JMB-MN50302

Remove and discard the lock nut.

[2]

[1]

11-7

dummyhead

CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Remove the lock washer [1] and thrust washer [2].

[2]

Remove the clutch assembly [1].

Remove the following:
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

[1]

[1]

[8]

[2]/[3]

Clutch center [1]
Spring seat [2]
Judder spring [3]
Clutch disc B [4]
Seven clutch plates [5]
Six clutch discs C [6]
Clutch disc A [7]
Pressure plate [8]

[4]

Remove the thrust washer [1].

11-8

[1]

[1]

[7]

[5]/[6]

dummyhead

CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Remove the clutch outer guide [1].

[1]

INSPECTION
CLUTCH LIFTER BEARING
Turn the inner race of the clutch lifter bearing [1] with
your finger.

[1]

The bearing should turn smoothly and quietly.
Also check that the outer race of the bearing fits tightly
in the pressure plate.
Replace the clutch lifter bearing if the inner race does
not turn smoothly, quietly, or if the outer race fits loosely
in the lifter plate.

CLUTCH SPRING
Replace the clutch Measure the clutch spring free length.
springs as a set.

SERVICE LIMIT: 41.7 mm (1.64 in)

CLUTCH CENTER
Check the grooves [1] of the clutch center for damage
or wear caused by the clutch plates.
Replace it if necessary.

[1]

11-9

dummyhead

CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
CLUTCH LIFTER ROD B
Check the clutch lifter rod B for damage or abnormal
wear.

CLUTCH DISC
Replace the clutch Replace the clutch discs if they show signs of scoring or
discs and plates as discoloration.
a set.

Measure the disc thickness of each disc.
SERVICE LIMIT: 2.3 mm (0.09 in)

Replace the clutch
discs and plates as
a set.

CLUTCH PLATE
Check the plates for discoloration.
Check the plate warpage on a surface plate using a
feeler gauge.
SERVICE LIMIT: 0.30 mm (0.012 in)

JUDDER SPRING/SPRING SEAT
Check the judder spring and
deformation, warpage or damage.

spring

seat

for

• A damaged or warped spring seat will cause the
judder spring to be pressed unevenly.
• A damaged judder spring also causes the weak
contact between the discs and plates or uneven
disc/plate contact.

11-10

dummyhead

CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
CLUTCH OUTER/PRIMARY DRIVEN GEAR/CLUTCH
OUTER GUIDE
Check the slots of the clutch outer for damage or wear
caused by the clutch discs.
Check the primary driven gear for abnormal wear or
damage.
Measure the I.D. of the primary driven gear.
SERVICE LIMIT: 32.09 mm (1.263 in)
Replace the clutch outer assembly if necessary.
Measure the O.D. and I.D. of the clutch outer guide.
SERVICE LIMITS:
O.D.: 31.92 mm (1.257 in)
I.D.: 22.03 mm (0.867 in)
Calculate the primary driven gear-to-clutch outer guide
clearance.
SERVICE LIMIT: 0.10 mm (0.004 in)

MAINSHAFT
Measure the mainshaft O.D. at clutch outer guide
sliding surfaces.
SERVICE LIMIT: 21.95 mm (0.864 in)
Calculate
clearance.

the

clutch

outer

guide-to-mainshaft

SERVICE LIMIT: 0.08 mm (0.003 in)

11-11

dummyhead

CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
INSTALLATION
CLUTCH OUTER GUIDE

CLUTCH OUTER
THRUST WASHER
PRESSURE PLATE
CLUTCH DISC A

CLUTCH DISC C
CLUTCH DISC B
JUDDER SPRING
SPRING SEAT
CLUTCH CENTER
CLUTCH PLATE

THRUST WASHER
LOCK WASHER

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
CLUTCH LIFTER ROD B

128 N·m (13.1 kgf·m, 94 lbf·ft)
CLUTCH SPRING
LIFTER PLATE

CLUTCH LIFTER BEARING

Apply molybdenum oil solution to the clutch outer guide
sliding surface.

[1]

Install the clutch outer guide [1] to the mainshaft.

Install the thrust washer [1] to the clutch outer.

11-12

[1]

dummyhead

CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Apply engine oil to the clutch discs entire surface.
Install the spring seat [1], judder spring [2] and clutch
disc B [3] to the clutch center [4].
Install the clutch discs C [5] and clutch plates [6]
alternately, starting with the clutch plate.
Install the clutch disc A [7] and pressure plate [8].

[6]
7° 30’
CLUTCH DISC A:

[8]
CLUTCH DISC B:
[7]
5.3 – 5.9 mm (0.21 – 0.23 in)
9°
CLUTCH DISC C:

[1]

[2]

[3]

[5]

[4]

Install the clutch center assembly [1] to the clutch outer
[2].

[1]

• Align the clutch disc A/C tabs with clutch outer slits
[3].
• Align the clutch disc B tabs with clutch outer shallow
slots [4].

[3]

Install the clutch assembly [1] to the clutch outer guide.

[4]

[2]

[1]

11-13

dummyhead

CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Install the thrust washer [1].

[3]

Install the lock washer [2] with its "OUTSIDE" mark [3]
facing out.

[1]

[2]

Apply engine oil to a new clutch center lock nut threads
and seating surface.

[1]

Install the clutch center lock nut [1] onto the mainshaft.
Hold the pressure plate with the special tool and tighten
the lock nut to the specified torque.
TOOL:
Clutch center holder [2]

07JMB-MN50302

TORQUE: 128 N·m (13.1 kgf·m, 94 lbf·ft)

[2]

Stake the clutch center lock nut [1] into the mainshaft
groove.
Be careful not to damage the mainshaft threads.
Stake

[1]

Install the clutch springs [1], lifter plate/bearing [2] and
clutch lifter plate bolts [3].

[3]

[1]

Tighten the clutch lifter plate bolts to the specified
torque in a crisscross pattern in 2 or 3 steps.
TORQUE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Apply engine oil to the clutch lifter rod B sliding surface.
Install the clutch lifter rod B [4].
Install the right crankcase cover (page 11-5).

[4]

11-14

[2]

dummyhead

CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)

PRIMARY DRIVE GEAR/CKP SENSOR
ROTOR
REMOVAL
Remove the right crankcase cover (page 11-5).

[4]

[3]

[1]

Hold the primary drive gear [1] using a special tool and
remove the primary drive gear mounting bolt [2] and
washer [3].
TOOL:
Gear holder, 2.5 [4]

07724-0010100

Remove the gear holder.
Remove the CKP sensor rotor [5] and primary drive
gear.

[2]

[5]

INSPECTION
Check the primary drive gear [1] for wear or damage.
Check the CKP sensor rotor [2] for wear or damage.

[1]

[2]

INSTALLATION
Install the primary drive gear [1] on the crankshaft.

[2]

• Align the primary drive gear wide groove with the
crankshaft wide tooth.
• Install the primary drive gear with its "OUT" mark [2]
facing out.
Align

[1]

11-15

dummyhead

CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Install the CKP sensor rotor [1] on the crankshaft.

[1]

• Align the CKP sensor rotor wide groove with the
crankshaft wide tooth.
• Install the CKP sensor rotor with its "MGS" mark [2]
facing out.
Align

[2]

Apply engine oil to the primary drive gear mounting bolt
threads and seating surface.

[2]

[1]

Install the washer [1] and primary drive gear mounting
bolt [2].
Hold the primary drive gear using a special tool and
tighten the primary drive gear mounting bolt to the
specified torque.
TOOL:
Gear holder, 2.5 [3]

07724-0010100

TORQUE: 93 N·m (9.5 kgf·m, 69 lbf·ft)
Remove the gear holder.

[3]

Install the right crankcase cover (page 11-5).

GEARSHIFT LINKAGE
REMOVAL
Remove the following:

[1]

– Left rear cover (page 2-29)
– Right crankcase cover (page 11-5)
Clean the gearshift spindle [1].

Remove the gearshift spindle [1] and washer [2].

[2]

[1]

11-16

dummyhead

CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Remove the following:
–
–
–
–

[5]

[3]

[4]

Shift drum stopper arm pivot bolt [1]
Washers [2]
Stopper arm [3]
Return spring [4]

Remove the shift drum center socket bolt [5], shift drum
stopper plate [6] and dowel pin [7].

[6]

Remove the bolt [1] and setting plate [2].

[7]

[1]/[2]

[3]

Remove the gearshift spindle oil seal [3].

[2]

[1]

INSPECTION
Check the gearshift spindle for bend, wear or damage.
Check the return springs for fatigue or damage.

INSTALLATION
Install the gearshift spindle oil seal [1] as shown.
0.4 – 1.6 mm
(0.02 – 0.06 in)

• Install the oil seal with its marked side facing out.
• Apply grease to the oil seal lips.

[1]

11-17

dummyhead

CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Install the setting plate [1] and a new bolt [2].
Align the setting plate hole with the crankcase boss.
Align

[1]

[2]

Install the following:
–
–
–
–

[1]

[2]

[3]

Return spring [1]
Stopper arm [2]
Washers [3]
Shift drum stopper arm pivot bolt [4]

• Apply locking agent to the shift drum stopper arm
pivot bolt threads (page 11-3).
• Align the return spring hook [5] with stopper arm cutout.
• Install the stopper arm with its "MGS" mark [6] facing
out.
TORQUE:
Shift drum stopper arm pivot bolt:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Hold the stopper arm [1] with a screwdriver.

[4]
[5]

[6]

[3]

[2]

Install the dowel pin [2] into the shift drum hole.
Install the shift drum stopper plate [3] while aligning its
slit with the dowel pins.

Align

Apply locking agent to the shift drum center socket bolt
threads (page 11-3).
Install and tighten the shift drum center socket bolt [1] to
the specified torque.
TORQUE: 23 N·m (2.3 kgf·m, 17 lbf·ft)

[1]

11-18

[1]

dummyhead

CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Install the washer [1] and gearshift spindle [2].

[1]

Align the return spring ends with the spring pin.
Install the following:
– Right crankcase cover (page 11-5)
– Left rear cover (page 2-29)

Align
[2]

GEARSHIFT PEDAL
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Loosen the gearshift pedal adjuster lock nuts [1] and
remove the tie-rod [2].

[2]

[4]

Remove the gearshift pedal pivot bolt [3] and gearshift
pedal [4].

[1]

[3]

Remove the dust seals [1].

[1]

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

[1]

• Apply grease to the gearshift pedal pivot and dust
seal lips.
• Apply grease to the gearshift pedal tie-rod ball joint
area.

8 mm (0.3 in)

TORQUE:
Gearshift pedal pivot bolt:
27 N·m (2.8 kgf·m, 20 lbf·ft)
91.1 mm (3.59 in)

Adjust the tie-rod length so that the distance between
the ball joint ends is standard length as shown.
After adjustment tighten the gearshift pedal adjuster
lock nut [1] to the specified torque.

[1]

TORQUE: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)

11-19

dummyhead

MEMO

dummytext

12. DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

COMPONENT LOCATION ··························12-2

RIGHT CRANKCASE COVER ·················· 12-97

SERVICE INFORMATION ···························12-3

DUAL CLUTCH ······································· 12-105

DCT SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING ·····12-5

PRIMARY DRIVE GEAR/CKP SENSOR
ROTOR···················································· 12-108

DCT ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
LOCATION ··················································12-6

SHIFT CONTROL MOTOR/REDUCTION
GEARS ···················································· 12-109

12

DCT SYSTEM DIAGRAM····························12-7
GEARSHIFT LINKAGE ··························· 12-112
DCT CONNECTOR LOCATIONS ···············12-8
MAINSHAFT SENSOR ··························· 12-115
DCT TROUBLESHOOTING
INFORMATION··········································12-11

TR SENSOR············································ 12-115

DTC INDEX················································12-15

SHIFT SPINDLE ANGLE SENSOR ········ 12-116

DTC TROUBLESHOOTING ······················12-20

CLUTCH EOP SENSOR ························· 12-117

SHIFT INDICATOR
TROUBLESHOOTING·······························12-61

EOT SENSOR ········································· 12-118
DCT SHIFT PEDAL (OPTIONAL) ··········· 12-118

MODE/SHIFT INDICATOR CIRCUIT
TROUBLESHOOTING·······························12-95

CLUTCH INITIALIZE LEARNING
(PCM) ······················································ 12-120

AT/MT MODE SWITCH
TROUBLESHOOTING·······························12-96

12-1

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

COMPONENT LOCATION
DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

23 N·m (2.3 kgf·m, 17 lbf·ft)

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

93 N·m (9.5 kgf·m, 69 lbf·ft)

12-2

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
• This section covers service of the electrical and mechanical systems of the Dual Clutch Transmission (DCT).
• A faulty DCT system is often related to poorly connected or corroded connectors. Check those connections before proceeding.
• Read the "DCT Troubleshooting Information" carefully, and inspect and troubleshoot the DCT system according to the DTC.
Observe each step of the procedures one by one. Note the DTC and probable faulty part before starting diagnosis and
troubleshooting.
• The PCM may be damaged if dropped. Also, if a connector is disconnected when current is flowing, the excessive voltage may
damage the PCM. Always turn off the ignition switch before servicing.
• The drive mode AT or MT are changed electrically with the AT/MT mode switch.
• Be sure to use the recommended tires, and the specified drive and driven sprocket to operate the dual clutch transmission
system normally.
• For oil pump service (page 9-8).
• For neutral switch service (page 22-27).
• For VS sensor service (page 22-18).
• Description of the system (page 1-90).
• The following color codes are used throughout this section.
Bl = Black
Br = Brown

Bu = Blue
G = Green

Gr = Gray
Lg = Light green

O = Orange
P = Pink

R = Red
V = Violet

W = White
Y = Yellow

For DCT System Troubleshooting
• The DCT system is controlled by the PCM. Therefore some detection items are shared in the PGM-FI and DCT systems, and
they may affect the operation of both systems.
• Before starting any troubleshooting, check the following items and refer to the appropriate troubleshooting.
– MIL blinks or DTC for the PGM-FI system (page 4-12).
– Shift indicator blinks or DTC for the DCT system (page 12-11)
– Symptom of the DCT system operation (page 12-5)
– TXD/RXD line (page 22-11)
• Refer to the "PGM-FI Troubleshooting Information" for the "CIRCUIT INSPECTION" information (page 4-13).
• The gearshift mechanism included the following items. If the gearshift mechanism is faulty, refer to each component service.
– Shift control motor/reduction gears (page 12-109)
– Gearshift linkage (page 12-112)
– Shift drum/shift fork (page 14-17)
Shift Control Motor Function Procedures
• If the PCM has a DTC, the function test does not work.
• The function test is not for the quality check of the shift control motor.
Conduct a test of the shift control motor when the following items have been serviced or replaced.
–
–
–
–

Shift control motor
Reduction gears
TR sensor
Shift spindle angle sensor

1. Connect the HDS pocket tester.
2. Select the "DRIVE TRAIN MODE MENU".
3. Select the "FUNCTION TEST" and then select the "SHIFT CONTROL MOTOR".
4. Place the motorcycle on its centerstand to raise the rear wheel off the ground.
5. Select the "Shift Up" or "Shift Down" mode while turning the rear wheel above 5 km/h (3 mph) with your hands. Measure the shift
spindle angle sensor voltage at this time. This also tests the mechanical function of the DCT to shift between gears.

12-3

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
Linear Solenoid Valve Function Procedures
• If the PCM has a DTC, the function test does not work.
• The function test is not for the quality check of the linear solenoid valve.
• Do not open the throttle while testing the linear solenoid valve function.
Conduct a test of the linear solenoid valves when the linear solenoid valves have been serviced or replaced.
1. Connect the HDS pocket tester.
2. Select the "DRIVE TRAIN MODE MENU".
3. Select the "FUNCTION TEST" and then select the "Linear Solenoid".
4. Select the "Linear Solenoid 1" or "Linear Solenoid 2".
5. Start the engine and let it idle.
6. Make sure that the transmission is in neutral position.
7. Select the "Drive Linear Solenoid To 0 kPa", "Drive Linear Solenoid To 400 kPa" or "Drive Linear Solenoid To 800 kPa" mode.
Measure the linear solenoid current at each mode.

SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM

STANDARD
0.9 – 1.1 (0.035 – 0.043)
2.5 – 2.8 kΩ

Clutch clearance
EOT sensor resistance (20°C/68°F)

Unit: mm (in)
SERVICE LIMIT
2.0 (0.08)
–

TORQUE VALUES

Solenoid valve stopper plate bolt

1

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
6

Right crankcase cover wire clamp
bolt

2

6

12 (1.2, 9)

Linear solenoid valve body
mounting bolt
Shift spindle angle sensor bolt
Primary drive gear mounting bolt

6

6

–

1
1

6
10

12 (1.2, 9)
93 (9.5, 69)

Reduction gear cover bolt
TR sensor bolt
Shift control motor bolt
Shift drum center bolt

3
1
3
1

6
6
6
8

14 (1.4, 10)
12 (1.2, 9)
14 (1.4, 10)
23 (2.3, 17)

Drum shifter guide plate bolt

2

6

12 (1.2, 9)

Clutch line EOP sensor
EOT sensor

3
1

10
10

19.6 (2.0, 14)
14 (1.4, 10)

ITEM

12-4

Q'TY

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
12 (1.2, 9)

REMARKS
Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width: 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width: 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
For tightening sequence (page 12101)
Apply engine oil to the threads and
seating surface.

Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width: 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width: 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Apply engine oil to the threads and
seating surface.

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

DCT SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING
Check the shift indicator "–" blinking of the combination meter (page 12-11).
If the shift indicator "–" is blinking, refer to the DTC index (page 12-15) and begin the appropriate troubleshooting procedure.
If there are no "–" blinking, inspect the engine oil condition and follow the symptom troubleshooting described below.

CLUTCH SLIPS AND MOTORCYCLE DOES NOT ACCELERATE
Check the clutch clearance (page 12-106).

EXCESSIVE NOISE OR VIBRATION AROUND THE DCT SYSTEM
Inspect the following components:
–
–
–
–
–

Clutch clearance
Dual clutch needle bearings for wear or damage
Primary drive/sub-gear for wear or damage
Primary driven gear for wear or damage
Each fasteners are tightened to their correct torque values

Replace the damaged components if necessary and tighten the loose fasteners to the specified torque.

12-5

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

DCT ELECTRICAL SYSTEM LOCATION

PCM
CKP SENSOR
ABS MODULATOR
VS SENSOR
INNER MAINSHAFT SENSOR
No.2 LINEAR SOLENOID VALVE

DLC

EOT SENSOR
CLUTCH EOP SENSORS

NEUTRAL SWITCH
OUTER MAINSHAFT SENSOR
SHIFT CONTROL MOTOR
TR SENSOR

SHIFT SPINDLE ANGLE SENSOR

No.1 LINEAR SOLENOID VALVE

12-6

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

DCT SYSTEM DIAGRAM
ILLUMI/STOP/HORN
FUSE 7.5A

FRONT BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH
P/Bu

Bl

Bl

G/Y

REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH
MAIN FUSE 30A

Bl

R

R/Bl

ENG STOP
FUSE 7.5A

P/Bu
W/Y

Bl

G/Y
Bl

Bl/R

ENGINE STOP SWITCH

IGNITION
SWITCH

Bl/W
FI FUSE 15A
SUB PVB
FUSE 7.5A

R

Br/R
Y/R

From STARTER
RELAY
SWITCH

PVB FUSE 30A
Lg

COMBINATION
METER

Lg

Y/R

R/Bu

Br/R

Y/R

NEUTRAL
SWITCH
P/G
P/Bu
P/G
G/R

Bl/W

G/R

STARTER
RELAY
Bl

V/W

G

P/G
Bu/Y

VS SENSOR
Bu

Y

W

W/Y

FRONT WHEEL
SPEED SENSOR

V/R

ABS
MODULATOR

W/Y

G/O

Br

LG

V/W
P/Bu
P/Bu
Y/Bu
Y/Bu

Y/R
G/Bu

DLC

G

G/O

Lg/R

Lg/R

DOWN UP

N-D SHIFT SWITCH

W

Br
Y

CKP SENSOR

SHIFT SWITCH

Bu/Y

P/Bu

SHIFT CONTROL
MOTOR

Y/Bu

Bu/W
Gr/W

Gr
Bu

No.1 LINEAR SOLENOID
VALVE

Br/W
P/W

W/R
Y

No.2 LINEAR SOLENOID
VALVE

Y/R
Bl/Y
Lg/Bu
R
Bu/Bl
Bl/W

AT/MT
MODE
SWITCH

Bl/W
W

SHIFT PEDAL
ANGLE SENSOR
(OPTIONAL)

Bl/Y
Lg/Bl
W/Y

Lg/Bl
Y/R
W/Y

No.1 CLUTCH DOES NOT DISENGAGE
No.2 CLUTCH DOES NOT DISENGAGE

Y/R
Y/V
G/Y

Y/R
Y/Bu
Bu/G

G/Y

Y/V

SFTPANG

MAINSHAFT/COUNTERSHAFT SPEED RATIO
V/G
G/Y
Y/R

G/Y
V/G
Y/R

CLUTCH
LINE EOP
SENSOR

SG

FAIL SAFE RELAY
IGNITION HOLD RELAY

No.1 CLUTCH
EOP SENSOR

G/Y
Y/G
Y/R

Y/G

No.2 CLUTCH
EOP SENSOR

G/Y
Bl/G
Y/R

Bl/G

No.1 CLUTCH SLIPS
No.2 CLUTCH SLIPS

SHIFT SPINDLE ANGLE SENSOR

TR SENSOR

No.1 CLUTCH OIL PRESSURE

G
Bu
Bl/W

G/Y
V/R
Y/R

V/R

G
Bu
Bl/W

G/Y
Bl/P
Y/R

Bl/P

No.2 CLUTCH OIL PRESSURE
FRONT/REAR WHEEL SPEED

GEARSHIFT MECHANISM
OUTER MAINSHAFT
SENSOR

G/Y
P/Y
W/Bu

P/Y
W/Bu

TP SENSOR
G/W

INNER MAINSHAFT
SENSOR

UP

G/Y
Gr/Y
Br/Y

Gr/Y
Br/Y

DOWN

SIDESTAND
SWITCH

G
G/Bu

EOT SENSOR

( ) :DTC/Number of shift
indicator blinks
:Short terminals for
reading DTC / shift indicator

Bu/G
G/Y

G/Bu

Bu/G

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33

PCM 33P (BLACK)
CONNECTOR A

PCM 33P (GRAY)
CONNECTOR B

G

Br : Brown
Bl : Black
Y : Yellow
Bu : Blue
G : Green
R : Red
W : White
O : Orange
Lg : Light green
P : Pink
Gr : Gray
V : Violet

12-7

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

DCT CONNECTOR LOCATIONS
NOTE 1: Remove the shroud/side cover (NC700XD) (page 2-14).

RIGHT HANDLEBAR SWITCH
6P (BLACK) CONNECTOR (NOTE 1)

NOTE 2: Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).
NOTE 3: Remove the shroud/side cover (NC700XD) (page 2-14).

LEFT HANDLEBAR SWITCH
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR (NOTE 3)

DLC (NOTE 2)

CKP SENSOR
2P (RED) CONNECTOR (NOTE 2)

NOTE 4: Remove the headlight/headlight stay (NC700SD) (page 2-27).

RIGHT HANDLEBAR SWITCH
7P (GREEN) CONNECTOR (NOTE 4)

LEFT HANDLEBAR SWITCH
7P (GREEN) CONNECTOR (NOTE 4)

12-8

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
NOTE 5: Remove the lower cowl (page 2-29).
No.2 CLUTCH EOP SENSOR
3P (GRAY) CONNECTOR (NOTE 5)

CLUTCH LINE EOP SENSOR
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR (NOTE 5)

No.1 CLUTCH EOP SENSOR
3P (GRAY) CONNECTOR (NOTE 5)

NOTE 6: Remove the lower cowl (page 2-29).
NOTE 7: Remove the left rear cover (page 2-30).
NEUTRAL SWITCH (NOTE 7)
TR SENSOR (NOTE 7)

SHIFT PEDAL ANGLE SENSOR
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR (NOTE 6)

SHIFT CONTROL MOTOR
2P (BLACK) CONNECTOR (NOTE 7)

NOTE 8: Remove the luggage box (page 2-19).
INNER MAINSHAFT SENSOR
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR (NOTE 8)
VS SENSOR
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

OUTER MAINSHAFT SENSOR
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

EOT SENSOR
2P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

12-9

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
NOTE 9: Remove the luggage box (page 2-19).
NOTE 10: Remove the center cross plate (page 2-32).
NOTE 11: Remove the shroud/side cover (NC700XD) (page 2-14).
NOTE 11: Remove the side cowl (NC700SD) (page 2-13).
ABS MODULATOR
25P CONNECTOR (NOTE 9)

LINEAR SOLENOID VALVE
4P (GREEN) CONNECTOR (NOTE 11)

PCM
33P (GRAY) CONNECTOR (NOTE 10)

PCM
33P (BLACK) CONNECTOR (NOTE 10)

SHIFT SPINDLE ANGLE SENSOR
3P (GRAY) CONNECTOR (NOTE 11)

NOTE 12: Remove the center cross plate (page 2-32).

TR SENSOR
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR (NOTE 12)

12-10

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

DCT TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION
GENERAL TROUBLESHOOTING
Intermittent Failure
The term "intermittent failure" means a system may have had a failure, but it checks OK now. If the shift indicator "–" does not come
on, check for poor contact or loose pins at all connectors related to the circuit that you are troubleshooting. If the shift indicator "–"
was on, but then went out, the original problem may be intermittent.
Opens and Shorts
"Opens" and "Shorts" are common electrical terms. An open is a break in a wire or at a connection. A short is an accidental
connection of a wire to ground or to another wire. In simple electronics, this usually means something will not work at all. With
PCMs this can sometimes mean something works, but not the way it’s supposed to.
If the shift indicator "–" has come on
Refer to DTC READOUT (page 12-12).
If the shift indicator "–" did not stay on
If the shift indicator "–" did not stay on, but there is a driveability problem, do the SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING (page 12-5).

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SELF-DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
The DCT system is equipped with the self-diagnostic system. When any
abnormality occurs in the DCT system, the PCM have the shift indicator [1]
blinking "–" and stores a DTC in its erasable memory for the relevant
system failure.

[1]

FAIL-SAFE FUNCTION
The DCT system is provided with a fail-safe function to secure a minimum running capability even when there is trouble in the
system.
When the PCM detects a problem in the DCT system, the PCM stops the gearshift function, and hold the gear position. Also, the
shift indicator blinks "–" to indicate the DTC.
DTC (Diagnostic Trouble Code)
• The DTC is composed of a main code and a sub code and it is displayed as a hyphenated number when retrieved from the PCM
with the HDS pocket tester.
The digits in front of the hyphen are the main code, they indicate the component of function failure.
The digits behind the hyphen are the sub code, they detail the specific symptom of the component or function failure.
For example, in the case of the shift spindle angle sensor:
– DTC 21 – 1 = (Shift spindle angle sensor voltage) – (lower than the specified value)
– DTC 21 – 2 = (Shift spindle angle sensor voltage) – (higher than the specified value)

12-11

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
Shift indicator "–" Blink Pattern
• If the HDS pocket tester is not available, DTC can be read from the PCM memory by the shift indicator "–" blink pattern.
• The number of shift indicator "–" blinks is the equivalent of the main code of the DTC (the sub code cannot be displayed by the
shift indicator "–").
• The shift indicator "–" has two types of blinks, a long blink and short blink. The long blinking lasts for 1.2 seconds, the short
blinking lasts for 0.4 seconds. One long blink is the equivalent of ten short blinks. For example, DTC 14 and DTC 8 are indicated
in the following blink pattern.
• When there isn’t a DTC, the shift indicator "–" stay lights.

2 sec.

1.2 sec.

0.4 sec.

0.4 sec.

2 sec.

1.2 sec.

0.4 sec.

ON

OFF
2.5 sec.

2.5 sec.

0.4 sec. 2.5 sec.

DTC 14
One long blink = 10 blinks,
plus four short blinks

0.4 sec.
DTC 8
Eight short blinks

2.5 sec.

2.5 sec.

0.4 sec.
DTC 14

Pattern repeated
1 cycle

Shift indicator Check
When the ignition switch is turned ON with the engine stop switch to " ", the shift indicator will stay on for a few seconds, then go
off.
CURRENT DTC/STORED DTC
The DTC is indicated in two ways according to the failure status.
• If the PCM detects a current problem, the shift indicator "–" will come on and begin to blink when the sidestand is lowered. The
shift indicator "–" blink pattern will indicate the current DTC.
• If the PCM does not detect any current but has a problem stored in its memory, the shift indicator "–" will not light and blink. If it
is necessary to retrieve the past problem, readout the stored DTC by following the DTC readout procedure (page 12-12).

HDS POCKET TESTER INFORMATION
Refer to the PGM-FI system (page 4-12).
The front wheel speed sensor signal can be disabled with the HDS for testing. Never ride the motorcycle with the PCM in this mode.

DTC READOUT
• If the shift indicator [1] blinks, check the PGM-FI DTC (page 4-12). If
there is any problem in the PGM-FI system, troubleshoot it first. Then
recheck the DCT system after erasing the PGM-FI DTC.
• After performing diagnostic troubleshooting, erase the problem code(s)
(page 12-13) and test-ride the motorcycle to be sure that the problem(s)
have been removed.
Read the DTC and stored data with the HDS Pocket Tester, and follow the
troubleshooting index (page 12-15).
To read the DTC without the HDS pocket tester, use the following
procedure.

[1]

12-12

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
Reading DTC with the shift indicator "–"
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).
2. Remove the DLC [1] from the battery box.
Short the DLC terminals using a special tool.
Connection: Brown – Green
TOOL:
SCS connector [2]

070PZ-ZY30100

[1]

3. Make sure the engine stop switch is turned to " ".
While pushing the shift switch (+) [1], turn the ignition switch ON. Read,
note the shift indicator "–" blinks and refer to the troubleshooting index
(page 12-15).

[2]
[1]

[1]

• If the PCM has no DTC in its memory, the shift indicator "–" will start
blinking (page 12-14).
4. Release the shift switch (+).

ERASING DTC
Connect the HDS pocket tester to the DLC (page 4-12).
Erase the DTC with the HDS while the engine is stopped.
To erase the DTC without HDS, refer to the following procedure.
How to erase the DTC without HDS
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).
2. Remove the DLC [1] from the battery box.
Short the DLC terminals using a special tool.
Connection: Brown – Green
TOOL:
SCS connector [2]

070PZ-ZY30100

[1]

[2]

12-13

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
3. Make sure the engine stop switch is turned to " ".
While pushing the shift switch (+) [1], turn the ignition switch to ON.

[1]

[1]

4. Push the shift switch (–) [1].

[2]

5. Push the shift switch (+) [2].
[2]

[1]

6. The self-diagnostic memory is erased if the shift indicator "–" goes off and starts blinking as shown.
2 sec.

2 sec.

2 sec.

ON

OFF
3 sec.

3 sec.

3 sec.

Pattern repeated
1 cycle

Note that the self-diagnostic memory cannot be erased if the ignition switch is turned to "OFF" before the shift indicator "–" starts
blinking.
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
8. Remove the special tool from the DLC.

12-14

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

DTC INDEX
DTC
("–" blinks)
8-1 (8)

9-1 (9)

9-2 (9)

19-1 (19)

21-1 (21)

21-2 (21)

22-1 (22)

23-1 (23)

24-1 (24)

27-1 (27)

31-1 (31)

32-1 (32)

37-1 (37)

Function Failure
TP sensor abnormal voltage
• Loose or poor contact of the TP sensor connector
• TP sensor or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty PCM
Clutch line EOP sensor low voltage
• Clutch line EOP sensor or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty PCM
Clutch line EOP sensor high voltage
• Loose or poor contact of the clutch line EOP
sensor connector
• Clutch line EOP sensor or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty PCM
CKP sensor no signal
• Loose or poor contact of the CKP sensor
connector
• Electromagnetic interference at CKP sensor
• CKP sensor or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty PCM
Shift spindle angle sensor low voltage
• Loose or poor contact of the shift spindle angle
sensor connector
• Shift spindle angle sensor or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty PCM
Shift spindle angle sensor high voltage
• Shift spindle angle sensor or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty PCM
Shift spindle operation malfunction (after operating
gearshift mechanism)
• Gearshift mechanism malfunction
• Shift spindle angle sensor malfunction
Shift spindle operation malfunction (while operating
gearshift mechanism)
• Gearshift mechanism malfunction
• Shift spindle angle sensor malfunction
Shift control motor drive circuit
• Shift control motor or its circuit malfunction
• Shift control motor drive circuit in the PCM
malfunction
• Faulty PCM
Shift drum position malfunction
• TR sensor malfunction
• Gearshift mechanism malfunction
• Faulty PCM
Shift control motor low voltage
• Shift control motor circuit malfunction
• Ignition hold relay circuit in the PCM malfunction
• Blown PVB fuse (30 A)
• Loose or poor contact of the PCM 33P (Black)
connector
• Faulty PCM
Fail safe relay circuit malfunction
• PCM (DCT drive circuit) power input line
malfunction
• Blown PVB fuse (30 A)
• Fail safe relay in the PCM malfunction
• Faulty PCM
Ignition hold relay malfunction
• PCM (DCT drive circuit) sub power input line
malfunction
• Blown SUB PVB fuse (7.5 A)
• Ignition hold relay in the PCM malfunction
• Faulty PCM

Symptom/Fail-safe
function
• Gearshift function
works normally
• Gearshift function
works normally

Refer
to
DTC

Refer
to
"–"

12-20

4-47

12-20

• Gearshift function
works normally

12-61
12-21

• Gearshift function does
not work (while driving)
• Engine does not
operate
• Gearshift function does
not work (while driving)
• Only shifted into 1st
gear

12-22

12-62

12-23
12-63

• Gearshift function does
not work (while driving)
• Only shifted into 1st
gear
• Gearshift function does
not work (while driving)
• Only shifted into 1st
gear
• Gearshift function does
not work (while driving)
• Only shifted into 1st
gear
• Gearshift function does
not work (while driving)
• Engine does not
operate
• Gearshift function does
not work (while driving)
• Engine does not
operate
• Gearshift function does
not work (while driving)
• Engine does not
operate

• Gearshift function does
not work (while driving)
• Engine does not
operate
• Gearshift function does
not work (while driving)
• Engine does not
operate

12-24

12-25
12-64
12-26

12-27

12-65

12-28

12-66

12-29

12-67

12-30

12-68

12-30

12-68

12-15

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
DTC
("–" blinks)

41-1 (41)

42-1 (42)

44-1 (44)

44-2 (44)

47-1 (47)

47-2 (47)

48-1 (48)

48-2 (48)

49-1 (49)

49-2 (49)

51-1 (51)

51-2 (51)

52-1 (52)

52-2 (52)

12-16

Function Failure
N-D shift switch malfunction
• Loose or poor contact of the N-D shift switch
connector
• N-D shift switch or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty PCM
Shift switch malfunction
• Loose or poor contact of the shift switch connector
• Shift switch or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty PCM
EOT sensor low voltage
• EOT sensor or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty PCM
EOT sensor high voltage
• Loose or poor contact of the EOT sensor
connector
• EOT sensor or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty PCM
No.1 clutch EOP sensor low voltage
• No.1 clutch EOP sensor or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty PCM
No.1 clutch EOP sensor high voltage
• Loose or poor contact of the No.1 clutch EOP
sensor connector
• No.1 clutch EOP sensor or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty PCM
No.2 clutch EOP sensor low voltage
• No.2 clutch EOP sensor or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty PCM
No.2 clutch EOP sensor high voltage
• Loose or poor contact of the No.2 clutch EOP
sensor connector
• No.2 clutch EOP sensor or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty PCM
Clutch line low oil pressure (when clutch engage)
• Engine oil level low
• Faulty oil pump
• Faulty clutch oil circuit
• Clutch line EOP sensor malfunction
• Faulty PCM
Clutch line low oil pressure (when engine running)
• Engine oil level low
• Faulty oil pump
• Faulty clutch oil circuit
• Clutch line EOP sensor malfunction
• Faulty PCM
TR sensor low voltage
• Loose or poor contact of the TR sensor connector
• TR sensor or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty PCM
TR sensor high voltage
• TR sensor or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty PCM
Neutral switch stuck OFF
• Loose or poor contact of the neutral switch
connector
• Neutral switch or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty PCM
Neutral switch stuck ON
• Neutral switch or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty PCM

Symptom/Fail-safe
function

Refer
to
DTC

Refer
to
"–"

12-31

12-69

12-33

12-71

• N-D shift switch does
not operate

• Shift switch does not
operate
• Gearshift function
works normally

12-34

• Gearshift function
works normally

12-73
12-35

• Gearshift function does
not work

12-37

• Gearshift function does
not work

12-74
12-38

• Gearshift function does
not work

12-37

• Gearshift function does
not work

12-74
12-38

• Engine does not
operate

• Engine does not
operate

• Gearshift function does
not work (while driving)
• Engine does not
operate
• Gearshift function does
not work (while driving)
• Engine does not
operate
• Operates normally
• Shift indicator blinking

12-39

12-76

12-40
12-77
12-41

12-42
12-78
• Gearshift function does
not work (while driving)
• Engine does not
operate

12-43

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
DTC
("–" blinks)

53-1 (53)

54-1 (54)

55-1 (55)

55-2 (55)

56-1 (56)

56-2 (56)

57-1 (57)

57-2 (57)

58-1 (58)
59-1 (59)

Function Failure
Inner mainshaft sensor speed low
• Loose or poor contact of the inner mainshaft
sensor connector
• Inner mainshaft sensor or its circuit malfunction
• Electromagnetic interference
• Faulty PCM
Outer mainshaft sensor speed low
• Loose or poor contact of the outer mainshaft
sensor connector
• Outer mainshaft sensor or its circuit malfunction
• Electromagnetic interference
• Faulty PCM
No.1 linear solenoid valve current failure
• Loose or poor contact of the No.1 linear solenoid
valve connector
• No.1 linear solenoid valve or its circuit malfunction
• No.1 linear solenoid valve drive circuit in the PCM
malfunction
• Faulty PCM
No.1 linear solenoid valve driver in the PCM failure
• Loose or poor contact of the No.1 linear solenoid
valve connector
• Loose or poor contact of the PCM 33P connector
• No.1 linear solenoid valve or its circuit malfunction
• No.1 linear solenoid valve drive circuit in the PCM
malfunction
• Faulty PCM
No.2 linear solenoid valve current failure
• Loose or poor contact of the No.1 linear solenoid
valve connector
• No.2 linear solenoid valve or its circuit malfunction
• No.2 linear solenoid valve drive circuit in the PCM
malfunction
• Faulty PCM
No.2 linear solenoid valve driver in the PCM failure
• Loose or poor contact of the No.2 linear solenoid
valve connector
• Loose or poor contact of the PCM 33P connector
• No.2 linear solenoid valve or its circuit malfunction
• No.2 linear solenoid valve drive circuit in the PCM
malfunction
• Faulty PCM
Gearshift mechanism malfunction
• Gearshift mechanism malfunction
• TR sensor or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty PCM
Gear position malfunction (jumps out of gear)
• Gearshift mechanism malfunction
• TR sensor or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty PCM
No.1 clutch does not disengage (when shifting gear)
• No.1 clutch sticking
• Faulty clutch oil circuit
No.2 clutch does not disengage (when shifting gear)
• No.2 clutch sticking
• Faulty clutch oil circuit

Symptom/Fail-safe
function

Refer
to
DTC

Refer
to
"–"

12-43

12-79

12-46

12-82

12-48

12-84

12-49

12-85

• Gearshift function does
not work

• Gearshift function does
not work

• Gearshift function does
not work

• Gearshift function does
not work

• Gearshift function does
not work

• Gearshift function does
not work

• Gearshift function does
not work (while driving)
• Engine does not
operate
• Gearshift function does
not work (while driving)
• Engine does not
operate
• Engine does not
operate

12-51

12-86

• Engine does not
operate

12-51

12-86

12-50
12-86
12-50

12-17

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
DTC
("–" blinks)

61-1 (61)

61-2 (61)

61-3 (61)

61-4 (61)

62-1 (62)

62-2 (62)

63-1 (63)

63-2 (63)

63-3 (63)

63-4 (63)

12-18

Function Failure
No.1 clutch oil pressure malfunction (at clutch initial
diagnosis)
• No.1 clutch EOP sensor malfunction
• Faulty clutch oil circuit
• Faulty PCM
No.1 clutch no oil pressure
• No.1 clutch EOP sensor malfunction
• Faulty clutch oil circuit
• No.1 linear solenoid valve or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty PCM
No.1 clutch oil pressure degradation
• No.1 clutch EOP sensor malfunction
• Faulty clutch oil circuit
• No.1 linear solenoid valve malfunction
• Faulty PCM
No.1 clutch oil pressure canceling malfunction
• No.1 clutch EOP sensor malfunction
• Faulty clutch oil circuit
• Loose or poor contact of the linear solenoid valve
and No.1 clutch EOP sensor connectors
• No.1 linear solenoid valve malfunction
• Faulty PCM
No.1 clutch oil pressure high
• No.1 clutch EOP sensor malfunction
• Faulty clutch oil circuit
• No.1 linear solenoid valve malfunction
• Faulty PCM
No.1 clutch oil pressure high (Prevention of
motorcycle creeps)
• No.1 clutch EOP sensor malfunction
• Faulty clutch oil circuit
• No.1 linear solenoid valve malfunction
• Faulty PCM
No.2 clutch oil pressure malfunction (at clutch initial
diagnosis)
• No.2 clutch EOP sensor malfunction
• Faulty clutch oil circuit
• Faulty PCM
No.2 clutch no oil pressure
• No.2 clutch EOP sensor malfunction
• Faulty clutch oil circuit
• No.2 linear solenoid valve or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty PCM
No.2 clutch oil pressure degradation
• No.2 clutch EOP sensor malfunction
• Faulty clutch oil circuit
• No.2 linear solenoid valve malfunction
• Faulty PCM
No.2 clutch oil pressure canceling malfunction
• No.2 clutch EOP sensor malfunction
• Faulty clutch oil circuit
• Loose or poor contact of the linear solenoid valve
and No.2 clutch EOP sensor connectors
• No.2 linear solenoid valve or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty PCM

Symptom/Fail-safe
function

Refer
to
DTC

Refer
to
"–"

12-51

12-86

12-51

12-86

12-52

12-87

• Gearshift function does
not work

• Gearshift function does
not work

• Gearshift function does
not work

• Engine does not
operate

• Gearshift function does
not work (while driving)
• Engine does not
operate
• Gearshift function does
not work (while driving)
• Engine does not
operate
• Gearshift function does
not work

• Gearshift function does
not work

• Gearshift function does
not work

• Engine does not
operate

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
DTC
("–" blinks)

64-1 (64)

64-2 (64)

65-1 (65)

66-1 (66)

67-1 (67)

68-1 (68)

69-1 (69)

71-1 (71)

72-1 (72)
84-1 (84)

1-1 (1)

Function Failure
No.2 clutch oil pressure high
• No.2 clutch EOP sensor malfunction
• Faulty clutch oil circuit
• No.2 linear solenoid valve malfunction
• Faulty PCM
No.2 clutch oil pressure high (Prevention of
motorcycle creeps)
• No.2 clutch EOP sensor malfunction
• Faulty clutch oil circuit
• No.2 linear solenoid valve malfunction
• Faulty PCM
Front and rear wheel speed signal malfunction
• Front wheel speed sensor or its circuit malfunction
• VS sensor or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty ABS modulator
• Faulty PCM
VS sensor no signal
• VS sensor or its circuit malfunction
• Loose or poor contact of the VS sensor connector
• Electromagnetic interference at VS sensor
• Faulty PCM
Front wheel speed sensor no signal
• Front wheel speed sensor or its circuit malfunction
• Loose or poor contact of the front wheel speed
sensor connector
• Electromagnetic interference at front wheel speed
sensor
• Faulty ABS modulator
• Faulty pulser ring
• Faulty PCM
No.1 clutch operation malfunction (clutch slips)
• VS sensor or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty No.1 clutch
• Faulty PCM
No.2 clutch operation malfunction (clutch slips)
• VS sensor or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty No.2 clutch
• Faulty PCM
Inner mainshaft / countershaft speed ratio failure
• VS sensor or its circuit malfunction
• Inner mainshaft sensor or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty PCM
Outer mainshaft / countershaft speed ratio failure
• VS sensor or its circuit malfunction
• Outer mainshaft sensor or its circuit malfunction
• Faulty PCM
CPU in the PCM malfunction
• Faulty PCM
Shift pedal angle sensor (Optional) malfunction
• Shift pedal angle sensor or its circuit malfunction
• DCT shift pedal (Optional) mechanism
malfunction
• Loose or poor contact of the shift pedal angle
sensor connector
• Faulty PCM

Symptom/Fail-safe
function

Refer
to
DTC

Refer
to
"–"

12-52

12-87

12-53

12-88

12-54

12-89

12-55

12-90

12-56

12-91

12-57

12-92

12-57

12-92

12-58

12-93

12-58

12-93

• Gearshift function does
not work (while driving)
• Engine does not
operate
• Engine does not
operate

• Gearshift function does
not work

• Gearshift function does
not work

• Gearshift function does
not work

• Gearshift function does
not work
• Gearshift function does
not work
• Gearshift function does
not work
• Gearshift function does
not work
• Gearshift system stops
• DCT shift pedal
(Optional) function
does not work

12-19

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

DTC TROUBLESHOOTING
DTC 8-1 (TP SENSOR ABNORMAL
VOLTAGE)
1. TP Sensor System Inspection
Check the TP sensor with the HDS pocket tester
when the throttle is fully closed.
Is Low voltage (about 0 V) or High voltage (about
5 V) indicated?
YES

– • About 0 V: See DTC 8-1 (page 4-26)
• About 5 V: See DTC 8-2 (page 4-27)

NO

– Intermittent failure

DTC 9-1 (CLUTCH LINE EOP SENSOR
LOW VOLTAGE)
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Clutch Line EOP Sensor System Inspection
Connect the HDS pocket tester and start the engine.
Check the clutch line EOP sensor with the HDS
pocket tester.
Is about 0 V indicated?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Intermittent failure

2. Clutch Line EOP Sensor Inspection
Stop the engine.
Disconnect the clutch line EOP sensor 3P (Black)
connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Check the clutch line EOP sensor with the HDS
pocket tester.
Is about 0 V indicated?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Replace the clutch line EOP sensor with a
known good one, and recheck.

3. Clutch Line EOP Sensor Input Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
clutch line EOP sensor 3P (Black) connector [1]
terminals.
Connection: Yellow/red (+) – Green/yellow (–)
Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– Open circuit in the Yellow/red wire
Y/R

G/Y

[1]

12-20

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
4. Clutch Line EOP Sensor Output Line Short
Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
clutch line EOP sensor 3P (Black) connector [1]
terminal and ground.
Connection: Violet/green – Ground

[1]

Is there continuity?
YES

– Short circuit in the Violet/green wire

NO

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

V/G

DTC 9-2 (CLUTCH LINE EOP SENSOR
HIGH VOLTAGE)
• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the clutch line EOP sensor 3P
(Black) and PCM 33P connectors, and recheck the
DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Clutch Line EOP Sensor System Inspection
Check the clutch line EOP sensor with the HDS
pocket tester.
Is about 5 V indicated?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Intermittent failure

2. Clutch Line EOP Sensor Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the clutch line EOP sensor 3P (Black)
connector.
Connect the wire harness side clutch line EOP
sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] terminals with a
jumper wire [2].
Connection: Violet/green – Green/yellow
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Check the clutch line EOP sensor with the HDS
pocket tester.

[1]

G/Y

V/G

Is the 0 V indicated?
YES

– Faulty clutch line EOP sensor

NO

– GO TO STEP 3.

[2]

12-21

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
3. Clutch Line EOP Sensor Ground Line Open
Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Gray) connector.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
clutch line EOP sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
PCM 33P (Gray) connector [2] terminals.

B22

[1]

[2]

Connection: Green/yellow – B22
TOOL:
Test probe

G/Y

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– Open circuit in the Green/yellow wire

4. Clutch Line EOP Sensor Output Line Open
Circuit Inspection
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Black) connector.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
clutch line EOP sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
PCM 33P (Black) connector [2] terminals.

[2]

Connection: Violet/green – A17
TOOL:
Test probe

V/G

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Is there continuity?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Open circuit in the Violet/green wire

[1]

A17

DTC 19-1 (CKP SENSOR NO SIGNAL)
• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the CKP sensor 2P (Red) and PCM
33P (Gray) connectors, then recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. CKP sensor Peak Voltage Inspection
Disconnect the CKP sensor 2P (Red) connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ".
Crank the engine with the starter motor, and
measure the CKP sensor peak voltage at the CKP
sensor 2P (Red) connector [1] terminals of the CKP
sensor side.
Connection: Yellow (+) – White/yellow (–)
TOOL:
Imrie diagnostic tester (model 625) or
Peak voltage adaptor [2]
07HGJ-0020100
with commercially available digital multimeter
(impedance 10 MΩ/DCV minimum)
Is the voltage more than 0.7 V?

12-22

YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Faulty CKP sensor

[1]
W/Y

Y

[2]

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
2. CKP sensor Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Gray) connector.
Check for continuity between the CKP sensor 2P
(Red) connector [1] and PCM 33P (Gray) connector
[2] terminals.
Connection: Yellow – B11
Green/orange – B6
TOOL:
Test probe

B11

B6

[1]

G/O
Y

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Is there continuity?
YES

– Short circuit in the Yellow wire

NO

– • Open circuit in the Yellow wire
• Open circuit in the Green/orange wire

[2]

DTC 21-1 (SHIFT SPINDLE ANGLE
SENSOR LOW VOLTAGE)
• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the shift spindle angle sensor 3P
(Gray) and PCM 33P connectors, and recheck the
DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Shift Spindle Angle Sensor System Inspection
Check the shift spindle angle sensor with the HDS
pocket tester.
Is about 0 V indicated?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Intermittent failure

2. Shift Spindle Angle Sensor Input Line Open
Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the shift spindle angle sensor 3P (Gray)
connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
shift spindle angle sensor 3P (Gray) connector [1]
terminals.
Connection: Yellow/red (+) – Green/yellow (–)

[1]

G/Y

Y/R

Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Open circuit in the Yellow/red wire

12-23

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
3. Shift Spindle Angle Sensor Output Line Open
Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Black) connector.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
shift spindle angle sensor 3P (Gray) connector [1]
and PCM 33P (Black) connector [2] terminals.
TOOL:
Test probe
07ZAJ-RDJA110

[2]

V/R

Connection: Violet/red – A16
Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– Open circuit in the Violet/red wire

[1]

A16

4. Shift Spindle Angle Sensor Output Line Short
Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
shift spindle angle sensor 3P (Gray) connector [1]
terminal and ground.
Connection: Violet/red – ground

[1]

Is there continuity?
YES

– Short circuit in the Violet/red wire

NO

– GO TO STEP 5.

5. Shift Spindle Angle Sensor Inspection
Replace the shift spindle angle sensor with a known
good one (page 12-116).
Connect the shift spindle angle sensor 3P (Gray)
connector and PCM 33P (Black) connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Check the shift spindle angle sensor with the HDS
pocket tester.
Is about 0 V indicated?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Faulty original shift spindle angle sensor

DTC 21-2 (SHIFT SPINDLE ANGLE
SENSOR HIGH VOLTAGE)
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Shift Spindle Angle Sensor System Inspection
Check the shift spindle angle sensor with the HDS
pocket tester.
Is about 5 V indicated?

12-24

YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Intermittent failure

V/R

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
2. Shift Spindle Angle Sensor Ground Line Open
Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the shift spindle angle sensor 3P (Gray)
connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
shift spindle angle sensor 3P (Gray) connector [1]
terminals.
Connection: Yellow/red (+) – Green/yellow (–)

[1]

G/Y

Y/R

Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Open circuit in the Green/yellow wire

3. Shift Spindle Angle Sensor System Inspection
Replace the shift spindle angle sensor with a known
good one (page 12-116).
Connect the shift spindle angle sensor 3P (Gray)
connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Check the shift spindle angle sensor with the HDS
pocket tester.
Is about 5 V indicated?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Faulty shift spindle angle sensor

DTC 22-1 (SHIFT SPINDLE
OPERATION MALFUNCTION: AFTER
OPERATING GEARSHIFT
MECHANISM)
1. Shift Spindle Angle Sensor System Inspection
Check the shift spindle angle sensor with the HDS
pocket tester.
Is Low voltage (about 0 V) or High voltage (about
5 V) indicated?
YES

– • About 0 V: See DTC 21-1 (page 12-23).
• About 5 V: See DTC 21-2 (page 12-24).

NO

– GO TO STEP 2.

2. Shift Control Motor/Reduction Gear Condition
Check the shift control motor and reduction gears
are installed properly and are not damaged.
Are the shift control motor and reduction gears
in normal condition?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Install the shift control motor and reduction
gears properly or replace faulty parts.

12-25

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
3. Shift Control Motor Condition Inspection
Remove the shift control motor (page 12-109).
Connect a fully charged 12 V battery [1] to the shift
control motor [2] 2P connector terminals to check
the motor operation.
Change the battery connection to check the reverse
operation.
Does the shift control motor turn in both
directions?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– Faulty shift control motor

[2]

4. Shift Spindle Angle Sensor System Inspection
Remove the shift spindle angle sensor with the
connector connected (page 12-116).
Turn the ignition switch ON.
While turning the shift spindle angle sensor shaft,
check the shift spindle angle sensor voltage with the
HDS pocket tester.
When turning the sensor shaft clockwise:
Voltage increase
When turning the sensor shaft
counterclockwise:
Voltage decrease
Does the voltage vary properly?
YES

– GO TO STEP 5.

NO

– Faulty shift spindle angle sensor

5. Shift Spindle Angle Sensor Condition Inspection
Check that the shift spindle angle sensor is installed
properly.
Is the shift spindle angle sensor in normal
condition?
YES

– GO TO STEP 6.

NO

– Install the shift spindle angle sensor
properly.

6. DTC Recheck
Recheck the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 22-1 indicated?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Intermittent failure

DTC 23-1 (SHIFT SPINDLE
OPERATION MALFUNCTION: WHILE
OPERATING GEARSHIFT
MECHANISM)
Refer to DTC 22-1 (page 12-25)

12-26

[1]

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
DTC 24-1 (SHIFT CONTROL MOTOR
DRIVE CIRCUIT)
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Shift Control Motor Line Open Circuit Inspection
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Black) connector and
shift control motor 2P (Black) connector.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
shift control motor 2P (Black) connector [1] and
PCM 33P (Black) connector [2] terminals.
Connection: Pink/blue – A1
Pink/blue – A2
Yellow/blue – A4
Yellow/blue – A15
TOOL:
Test probe

A2

A1

P/Bu

Y/Bu

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– • Open circuit in the Pink/blue wire
• Open circuit in the Yellow/blue wire

[1]

[2]

A4

A15

2. Shift Control Motor Line Short Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
shift control motor 2P (Black) connector [1]
terminals and ground.
Connection: Pink/blue – Ground
Yellow/blue – Ground

Y/Bu

P/Bu

Is there continuity?
YES

– • Short circuit in the Pink/blue wire
• Short circuit in the Yellow/blue wire

NO

– GO TO STEP 3.

[1]

3. Shift Control Motor Inspection
Remove the shift control motor (page 12-109).
Connect a fully charged 12 V battery [1] to the shift
control motor [2] 2P connector terminals to check
the motor operation.
Change the battery connection to check the reverse
operation.
Does the shift control motor turn in both
directions?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one.

NO

– Faulty shift control motor

[2]

[1]

12-27

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
DTC 27-1 (SHIFT DRUM POSITION
MALFUNCTION)
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. TR Sensor System Inspection
Check the TR sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is Low voltage (about 0 V) or High voltage (about
5 V) indicated?
YES

– • About 0 V: See DTC 51-1 (page 12-40).
• About 5 V: See DTC 51-2 (page 12-41).

NO

– GO TO STEP 2.

2. Shift Control Motor/Reduction gear condition
Check the shift control motor and reduction gears
are installed properly and are not damaged.
Are the shift control motor and reduction gears
in normal condition?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Install the shift control motor and reduction
gears properly or replace faulty parts.

3. Shift Control Motor Condition Inspection
Remove the shift control motor (page 12-109).
Connect a fully charged 12 V battery [1] to the shift
control motor [2] 2P connector terminals to check
the motor operation.
Change the battery connection to check the reverse
operation.
Does the shift control motor turn in both
directions?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– Faulty shift control motor

[2]

4. TR Sensor System Inspection
Remove the TR sensor with the connector
connected (page 12-115).
Turn the ignition switch ON.
While turning the TR sensor shaft, check the TR
sensor voltage with the HDS pocket tester.
When turning the sensor shaft clockwise:
Voltage increase
When turning the sensor shaft
counterclockwise:
Voltage decrease
Does the voltage vary properly?

12-28

YES

– GO TO STEP 5.

NO

– Faulty TR sensor

[1]

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
5. TR Sensor Condition Inspection
Check that the TR sensor is installed properly and is
not damaged.
Is the TR sensor in normal condition?
YES

– GO TO STEP 6.

NO

– Install the TR sensor properly.

6. DTC Recheck
Recheck the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 27-1 indicated?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Intermittent failure

DTC 31-1 (SHIFT CONTROL MOTOR
LOW VOLTAGE)
• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the shift control motor 2P (Black)
and PCM 33P (Black) connectors, and recheck the
DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Check the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 32-1 or 37-1 indicated?
YES

– • DTC 32-1 indicated (page 12-30).
• DTC 37-1 indicated (page 12-30).

NO

– GO TO STEP 2.

2. Shift Control Motor Line Open Circuit Inspection
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Black) connector and
shift control motor 2P (Black) connector.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
shift control motor 2P (Black) connector [1] and
PCM 33P (Black) connector [2] terminals.
Connection: Pink/blue – A1
Pink/blue – A2
Yellow/blue – A4
Yellow/blue – A15
TOOL:
Test probe

A2

A1

P/Bu

Y/Bu

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Is there continuity?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– • Open circuit in the Pink/blue wire
• Open circuit in the Yellow/blue wire

[1]

[2]

A4

A15

12-29

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
DTC 32-1 (FAIL SAFE RELAY CIRCUIT
MALFUNCTION)
• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the PCM 33P (Black) connector and
recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Shift Control Motor Power Supply Voltage
Inspection
Check the shift control motor power supply voltage
with the HDS pocket tester.
Is there battery voltage?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– • Open circuit in the Yellow/red wire
between the PCM 33P (Black)
connector and fuse/relay box
• Open circuit in the Red wire between
the fuse/relay box and starter relay
switch 4P (Red) connector
• Blown PVB fuse (30 A)

2. DTC Recheck
Recheck the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 32-1 indicated?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Intermittent failure

DTC 37-1 (IGNITION HOLD RELAY
MALFUNCTION)
• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the PCM 33P (Black) connector and
recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. PCM (DCT Drive Circuit) Sub Power Voltage
Inspection
Check the PCM sub power voltage with the HDS
pocket tester.
Is the battery voltage indicated?

12-30

YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– • Open circuit in the Brown/red wire
between the PCM 33P (Black)
connector and fuse/relay box
• Open circuit in the Red wire between
the fuse/relay box and starter relay
switch 4P (Red) connector
• Blown SUB PVB fuse (7.5 A)

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
2. DTC Recheck
Recheck the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 37-1 indicated?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Intermittent failure

DTC 41-1 (N-D SHIFT SWITCH
MALFUNCTION)
• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the right handlebar switch and PCM
33P connectors, and recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. N-D Shift Switch Power Input Voltage Inspection
Disconnect the following:
– Right handlebar switch 6P (Black) connector
(NC700XD) [1]
– Right handlebar switch 7P (Green) connector
(NC700SD) [2]

NC700XD:

NC700SD:

[1]

[2]

Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ".
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
right handlebar switch connector terminal and
ground.
Connection: Yellow/red (+) – Ground (–)

Y/R

Y/R

Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Open circuit in the Yellow/red wire

2. N-D Shift Switch Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Check for continuity between the switch side right
handlebar switch connector [1] terminals in each
switch position.
Connection:
N switch:
Light green/blue – Red
D switch:
Black/yellow – Red

NC700XD:
[1]
R

Lg/Bu
Bl/Y

Is there continuity with the switch pushed and
no continuity with the switch released?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Faulty N-D shift switch

NC700SD:
[1]

R

Bl/Y
Lg/Bu

12-31

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
3. N-D Shift Switch Input Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Black) connector.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
right handlebar switch connector [1] and PCM 33P
(Black) connector [2] terminals.
Connection: Light green/black – A18
Black/yellow – A29
TOOL:
Test probe

NC700XD:

A18

[1]
Lg/Bl

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Bl/Y

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– • Open circuit in the Light green/black
wire
• Open circuit in the Black/yellow wire

A29

[2]

NC700SD:
A18
[1]
Lg/Bl

Bl/Y

A29

[2]

4. N-D Shift Switch Input Line Short Circuit
Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
PCM 33P (Black) connector [1] terminals and
ground.
Connection: A18 – Ground
A29 – Ground
TOOL:
Test probe

A18

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Is there continuity?

12-32

YES

– • Short circuit in the Light green/black
wire
• Short circuit in the Black/yellow wire

NO

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

A29

[1]

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
DTC 42-1 (SHIFT SWITCH
MALFUNCTION)
• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the left handlebar switch and PCM
33P connectors, then recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Shift Switch Power Input Voltage Inspection
Disconnect the following:
– Left handlebar switch 3P (Black) connector
(NC700XD) [1]
– Left handlebar switch 7P (Green) connector
(NC700SD) [2]

NC700XD:

NC700SD:

[1]

[2]

Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ".
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
left handlebar switch connector terminal and
ground.
Connection: Yellow/red (+) – Ground (–)

Y/R
Y/R

Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Open circuit in the Yellow/red wire

2. Shift Switch Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Check for continuity between the switch side left
handlebar switch connector [1] terminals in each
switch position.
Connection:
"+" switch:
Green/blue – Yellow/red
"–" switch:
Light green/red – Yellow/red

NC700XD:
[1]
Y/R

Lg/R
G/Bu

Is there continuity with the switch pushed and
no continuity with the switch released?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Faulty shift switch

Y/R

NC700SD:
[1]

Lg/R
G/Bu
Y/R

12-33

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
3. Shift Switch Input Line Open Circuit Inspection
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Black) connector.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
left handlebar switch connector [1] and PCM 33P
(Black) connector [2] terminals.
Connection: Blue/yellow – A7
Light green/red – A30
TOOL:
Test probe

NC700XD:
[1]

A7

Bu/Y

07ZAJ-RDJA110
Lg/R

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– • Open circuit in the Blue/yellow wire
• Open circuit in the Light green/red wire

A30

[2]

NC700SD:
[1]

A7

Bu/Y

Lg/R

A30

[2]

4. Shift Switch Input Line Short Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
PCM 33P (Black) connector [1] terminals and
ground.
Connection: A7 – Ground
A30 – Ground
TOOL:
Test probe

A7

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Is there continuity?
YES

– • Short circuit in the Blue/yellow wire
• Short circuit in the Light green/red wire

NO

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

DTC 44-1 (EOT SENSOR LOW
VOLTAGE)
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. EOT Sensor System Inspection
Check the EOT sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is about 0 V indicated?

12-34

YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Intermittent failure

A30

[1]

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
2. EOT Sensor Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the EOT sensor 2P (Black) connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Check the EOT sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is about 0 V indicated?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– GO TO STEP 3.

3. EOT Sensor Resistance Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Measure the resistance at the EOT sensor [1]
terminals.

[1]

Is the resistance within 2.5 – 2.8 kΩ (20°C/68°F)?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Faulty EOT sensor

4. EOT Sensor Input Line Short Circuit Inspection
Check the continuity between the wire harness side
2P (Black) connector [1] terminal and ground.
Connection: Blue/green – Ground
Is there continuity?
YES

– Short circuit in the Blue/green wire

NO

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

[1]

Bu/G

DTC 44-2 (EOT SENSOR HIGH
VOLTAGE)
• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the EOT sensor 2P (Black) and
PCM 33P connectors, and recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. EOT Sensor System Inspection
Check the EOT sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is about 5 V indicated?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Intermittent failure

12-35

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
2. EOT Sensor Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the EOT sensor 2P (Black) connector.
Short the wire harness side EOT sensor 2P (Black)
connector [1] terminals with a jumper wire [2].
Connection: Blue/green – Green/yellow

[1]

Turn the ignition switch ON.
Check the EOT sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Bu/G

Is about 0 V indicated?
YES

– Faulty EOT sensor.

NO

– GO TO STEP 3.

G/Y

[2]

3. EOT Sensor Input Line Open Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Black) connector.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
EOT sensor 2P (Black) connector [1] and PCM 33P
(Black) connector [2] terminals.
Connection: Blue/green – A19

[2]

Bu/G

TOOL:
Test probe

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– Open circuit in the Blue/green wire

4. EOT Sensor
Inspection

Ground

Line

Open

[1]

Circuit

Disconnect the PCM 33P (Gray) connector.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
EOT sensor 2P (Black) connector [1] and PCM 33P
(Gray) connector [2] terminals.
Connection: Green/yellow – B22
TOOL:
Test probe

A19

07ZAJ-RDJA110

[1]

[2]

G/Y

Is there continuity?

12-36

YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Open circuit in the Green/yellow wires

B22

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
DTC 47-1 or 48-1 (No.1 or No.2
CLUTCH EOP SENSOR LOW
VOLTAGE)
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Clutch EOP Sensor System Inspection
Connect the HDS pocket tester and start the engine.
Check the clutch EOP sensor with the HDS pocket
tester.
Is about 0 V indicated?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Intermittent failure

2. Clutch EOP Sensor Inspection
Stop the engine.
Disconnect the clutch EOP sensor 3P (Gray)
connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Check the clutch EOP sensor with the HDS pocket
tester.
Is about 0 V indicated?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Faulty clutch EOP sensor

3. Clutch EOP Sensor Input Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
clutch EOP sensor 3P (Gray) connector [1]
terminals.
Connection: Yellow/red (+) – Green/yellow (–)
Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– Open circuit in the Yellow/red wire
G/Y

Y/R

[1]

4. Clutch EOP Sensor Output Line Short Circuit
Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
clutch EOP sensor 3P (Gray) connector [1] terminal
and ground.
Connection:
No.1 clutch EOP sensor:
Yellow/green – Ground
No.2 clutch EOP sensor:
Black/green – Ground

[1]

Y/G or Bl/G

Is there continuity?
YES

– • Short circuit in the Yellow/green wire
• Short circuit in the Black/green wire

NO

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

12-37

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
DTC 47-2 or 48-2 (No.1 or No.2
CLUTCH EOP SENSOR HIGH
VOLTAGE)
• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the clutch EOP sensor 3P (Gray)
and PCM 33P connectors, and recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Clutch EOP Sensor System Inspection
Check the clutch EOP sensor with the HDS pocket
tester.
Is about 5 V indicated?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Intermittent failure

2. Clutch EOP Sensor Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the clutch EOP sensor 3P (Gray)
connector.
Short the wire harness side clutch EOP sensor 3P
(Gray) connector [1] terminals with a jumper wire
[2].
Connection:
No.1 clutch EOP sensor:
Yellow/green – Green/yellow
No.2 clutch EOP sensor:
Black/green – Green/yellow

[1]

G/Y

Turn the ignition switch ON.
Check the clutch EOP sensor with the HDS pocket
tester.

Y/G or Bl/G

[2]

Is about 0 V indicated?
YES

– Faulty clutch EOP sensor

NO

– GO TO STEP 3.

3. Clutch EOP Sensor Ground Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Gray) connector.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
clutch EOP sensor 3P (Gray) connector [1] and
PCM 33P (Gray) connector [2] terminals.
Connection: Green/yellow – B22
TOOL:
Test probe

[1]

[2]

G/Y

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Is there continuity?

12-38

YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– Open circuit in the Green/yellow wire

B22

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
4. Clutch EOP Sensor Output Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Black) connector.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
clutch EOP sensor 3P (Gray) connector [1] and
PCM 33P (Black) connector [2] terminals.
Connection:
No.1 clutch EOP sensor:
Yellow/green – A6
No.2 clutch EOP sensor:
Black/green – A5
TOOL:
Test probe

[1]

A6

[2]

Y/G

Bl/G

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Is there continuity?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– • Open circuit in the Yellow/green wire
• Open circuit in the Black/green wire

A5

DTC 49-1, 49-2 (CLUTCH LINE LOW
OIL PRESSURE)
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Clutch Line EOP Sensor System Inspection
Check the clutch line EOP sensor with the HDS
pocket tester.
Is Low voltage (about 0 V) or High voltage (about
5 V) indicated?
YES

– • About 0 V (while engine running): See
DTC 9-1 (page 12-20).
• About 5 V: See DTC 9-2 (page 12-21).

NO

– GO TO STEP 2.

2. Engine Oil Level Inspection
Check the engine oil level (page 3-12).
Is the engine oil level correct?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Add the recommended oil to the upper
level.

3. Clutch Line Oil Filter Condition Inspection
Check the clutch oil filter (page 3-14).
Is the oil filter in good condition?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– Replace the clutch oil filter.

12-39

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
4. Clutch Line EOP Sensor Inspection
Replace the clutch line EOP sensor with a known
good one (page 12-117).
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle above 2,000 min-1 (rpm)
and stop the engine.
Check the clutch line EOP sensor with the HDS
pocket tester.
Is DTC 49-1 or 49-2 indicated?
YES

– GO TO STEP 5.

NO

– Faulty original clutch line EOP sensor

5. PCM Inspection
Replace the PCM with a known good one (page 467).
Test-ride the motorcycle above 2,000 min-1 (rpm)
and stop the engine.
Check the clutch line EOP sensor with the HDS
pocket tester.
Is DTC 49-1 or 49-2 indicated?
YES

– • Oil pressure relief valve stuck open
• Damaged oil pump
• Internal oil leak in the clutch oil line

NO

– Faulty original PCM

DTC 51-1 (TR SENSOR LOW
VOLTAGE)
• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the TR sensor 3P (Black) and PCM
33P connectors, and recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. TR Sensor System Inspection
Check the TR sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is the voltage about 0 V?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Intermittent failure

2. TR Sensor Input Line Open Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the TR sensor 3P (Black) connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
TR sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] terminals.
Connection: Yellow/red (+) – Green/yellow (–)
Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?

12-40

YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Open circuit in the Yellow/red wire

[1]

G/Y

Y/R

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
3. TR Sensor Output Line Open Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Black) connector.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
TR sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and PCM 33P
(Black) connector [2] terminals.
Connection: Black/pink – A28
TOOL:
Test probe

[1]

[2]

Bl/P

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– Open circuit in the Black/pink wire

A28

4. TR Sensor Output Line Short Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
TR sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] terminal and
ground.
Connection: Black/pink – Ground

[1]

Is there continuity?
YES

– Short circuit in the Black/pink wire

NO

– GO TO STEP 5.

Bl/P

5. TR Sensor Inspection
Replace the TR sensor with a known good one
(page 12-115).
Connect the TR sensor 3P (Black) connector and
PCM 33P (Black) connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Check the TR sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is the voltage about 0 V?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Faulty original TR sensor

DTC 51-2 (TR SENSOR HIGH
VOLTAGE)
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. TR Sensor System Inspection
Check the TR sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is about 5 V indicated?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Intermittent failure

12-41

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
2. TR Sensor Ground Line Open Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the TR sensor 3P (Black) connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
TR sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] terminals.
Connection: Yellow/red (+) – Green/yellow (–)

[1]

G/Y

Y/R

Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Open circuit in the Green/yellow wire

3. TR Sensor Inspection
Replace the TR sensor with a known good one
(page 12-115).
Connect the TR sensor 3P (Black) connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Check the TR sensor with the HDS pocket tester.
Is about 5 V indicated?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Faulty original TR sensor

DTC 52-1 (NEUTRAL SWITCH STUCK
OFF)
• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the neutral switch and PCM 33P
(Gray) connectors, and recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Recheck the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 52-1 indicated?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Intermittent failure

2. Neutral Switch Line Open Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Gray) connector and
neutral switch connector.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
PCM 33P (Gray) connector [1] and neutral switch
connector [2] terminals.
Connection: B30 – Light green
TOOL:
Test probe

B30

[2]

Lg

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Is there continuity?

12-42

[1]

YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Open circuit in the Light green wire

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
3. Neutral Switch Inspection
Replace the neutral switch with a known good one
(page 22-28).
Connect the PCM 33P (Gray) connector and neutral
switch connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Recheck the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 52-1 indicated?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Faulty original neutral switch

DTC 52-2 (NEUTRAL SWITCH STUCK
ON)
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Neutral Switch Line Short Circuit Inspection
Disconnect the neutral switch connector.
Check for continuity between the neutral switch
connector terminal and ground.
Connection: Light green – Ground
Is there continuity?
YES

– Short circuit in the Light green wire.

NO

– GO TO STEP 2.

2. Neutral Switch Inspection
Replace the neutral switch with a known good one
(page 22-28).
Connect the neutral switch connector.
Check the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 52-2 indicated?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Faulty original neutral switch

DTC 53-1 (INNER MAINSHAFT
SENSOR SPEED LOW)
• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the inner mainshaft sensor 3P
(Black) and PCM 33P connectors, and recheck the
DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle and stop the engine.
Check the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 53-1 indicated?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Intermittent failure

12-43

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
2. Inner Mainshaft Sensor Input Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the inner mainshaft sensor 3P (Black)
connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
inner mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1]
terminals.
Connection: Brown/yellow (+) – Green/yellow (–)

[1]

Br/Y

G/Y

Is there about battery voltage?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– GO TO STEP 4.

3. Inner Mainshaft Sensor Output Line Inspection
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
3P (Black) connector [1] terminal and ground.
Connection: Gray/yellow (+) – Ground (–)

[1]

Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES

– GO TO STEP 8.

NO

– GO TO STEP 6.

Gr/Y

4. Inner Mainshaft Sensor Input Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Black) connector.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
inner mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
PCM 33P (Black) connector [2] terminals.
Connection: Brown/yellow – A14
TOOL:
Test probe

07ZAJ-RDJA110

[1]

A14

Br/Y

Is there continuity?

12-44

YES

– GO TO STEP 5.

NO

– Open circuit in the Brown/yellow wire

[2]

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
5. Inner Mainshaft Sensor Ground Line Open
Circuit Inspection
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Gray) connector.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
inner mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
PCM 33P (Gray) connector [2] terminals.
Connection: Green/yellow – B22
TOOL:
Test probe

[2]

G/Y

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Is there continuity?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Open circuit in the Green/yellow wire

[1]

B22

6. Inner Mainshaft Sensor Output Line Open
Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Black) connector.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
inner mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
PCM 33P (Black) connector [2] terminals.
Connection: Gray/yellow – A20
TOOL:
Test probe

[2]

Gr/Y

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 7.

NO

– Open circuit in the Gray/yellow wire

A20

[1]

7. Inner Mainshaft Sensor Output Line Short
Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
inner mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1]
terminal and ground
Connection: Gray/yellow – Ground

[1]

Is there continuity?
YES

– Short circuit in the Gray/yellow wire

NO

– GO TO STEP 8.

Gr/Y

8. Inner Mainshaft Sensor Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Replace the inner mainshaft sensor with a known
good one (page 12-115).
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle and stop the engine.
Check the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 53-1 indicated?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Faulty original inner mainshaft sensor

12-45

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
DTC 54-1 (OUTER MAINSHAFT
SENSOR SPEED LOW)
• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the outer mainshaft sensor 3P
(Black) and PCM 33P connectors, and recheck the
DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle and stop the engine.
Check the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 54-1 indicated?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Intermittent failure

2. Outer
Mainshaft
Inspection

Sensor

Input

Voltage

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the outer mainshaft sensor 3P (Black)
connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
outer mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1]
terminals.
Connection: White/blue (+) – Green/yellow (–)

[1]

W/Bu

G/Y

Is there about battery voltage?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– GO TO STEP 4.

3. Outer Mainshaft Sensor Output Line Inspection
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
3P (Black) connector [1] terminal and ground.
Connection: Pink/yellow (+) – Ground (–)
Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?

12-46

YES

– GO TO STEP 8.

NO

– GO TO STEP 6.

[1]

P/Y

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
4. Outer Mainshaft Sensor Input Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Black) connector.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
outer mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
PCM 33P (Black) connector [2] terminals.
Connection: White/blue – A25
TOOL:
Test probe

[1]

[2]

W/Bu

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 5.

NO

– Open circuit in the White/blue wire

A25

5. Outer Mainshaft Sensor Ground Line Open
Circuit Inspection
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Gray) connector.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
outer mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
PCM 33P (Gray) connector [2] terminals.
Connection: Green/yellow – B22
TOOL:
Test probe

[1]

[2]

G/Y

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Is there continuity?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Open circuit in the Green/yellow wire

B22

6. Outer Mainshaft Sensor Output Line Open
Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Black) connector.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
outer mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
PCM 33P (Black) connector [2] terminals.
Connection: Pink/yellow – A21
TOOL:
Test probe

[2]

P/Y

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 7.

NO

– Open circuit in the Pink/yellow wire

A21

[1]

12-47

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
7. Outer Mainshaft Sensor Output Line Short
Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
outer mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1]
terminal and ground
Connection: Pink/yellow – Ground

[1]

Is there continuity?
YES

– Short circuit in the Pink/yellow wire

NO

– GO TO STEP 8.

P/Y

8. Outer Mainshaft Sensor Condition Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Replace the outer mainshaft sensor with a known
good one (page 12-115).
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle and stop the engine.
Check the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 54-1 indicated?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Faulty original outer mainshaft sensor

DTC 55-1, 55-2 (No.1 LINEAR
SOLENOID VALVE)
• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the linear solenoid valve 4P (Green)
and PCM 33P (Black) connectors, and recheck the
DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Recheck the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 55-1 or 55-2 indicated?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Intermittent failure

2. No.1 Linear Solenoid Valve Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the linear solenoid valve 4P (Green)
connector.
Measure the resistance between the linear solenoid
valve side 4P (Green) connector [1] terminals.
Connection: Blue – Gray

[1]
Bu

Standard: 5.0 – 5.6 Ω (20°C/68°F)
Is the resistance within standard range?

12-48

YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Faulty linear solenoid valve

Gr

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
3. No.1 Linear Solenoid Valve Input/ground Line
Open Circuit Inspection
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Black) connector.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
linear solenoid valve 4P (Green) connector [1] and
PCM 33P (Black) connector [2] terminals.
Connection: Gray/white – A9
Blue/white – A10
TOOL:
Test probe

07ZAJ-RDJA110

[1]

A9

[2]

Gr/W

Bu/W

Is the continuity normal?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– • Open circuit in the Gray/white wire
• Open circuit in the Blue/white wire

A10

4. No.1 Linear Solenoid Valve Input/ground Line
Short Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
linear solenoid valve 4P (Green) connector [1]
terminals and ground.
Connection: Gray/white – Ground
Blue/white – Ground

[1]

Gr/W

Is there continuity?
YES

– • Short circuit in the Gray/white wire
• Short circuit in the Blue/white wire

NO

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

Bu/W

DTC 56-1, 56-2 (No.2 LINEAR
SOLENOID VALVE)
• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the linear solenoid valve 4P (Green)
and PCM 33P (Black) connectors, and recheck the
DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Recheck the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 56-1 or 56-2 indicated?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Intermittent failure

12-49

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
2. No.2 Linear Solenoid Valve Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the linear solenoid valve 4P (Green)
connector.
Measure the resistance between the linear solenoid
valve side 4P (Green) connector [1] terminals.
Connection: Yellow – White/red

[1]

Y

Standard: 5.0 – 5.6 Ω (20°C/68°F)
Is the resistance within standard range?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Faulty linear solenoid valve

W/R

3. No.2 Linear Solenoid Valve Input/ground Line
Open Circuit Inspection
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Black) connector.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
linear solenoid valve 4P (Green) connector [1] and
PCM 33P (Black) connector [2] terminals.
Connection: Pink/white – A11
Brown/white – A22
TOOL:
Test probe

[1]

A11

P/W

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Br/W

Is the continuity normal?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– • Open circuit in the Pink/white wire
• Open circuit in the Brown/white wire

A22

4. No.2 Linear Solenoid Valve Input/ground Line
Short Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
linear solenoid valve 4P (Green) connector [1]
terminals and ground.
Connection: Pink/white – Ground
Brown/white – Ground
Is there continuity?
YES

– • Short circuit in the Pink/white wire
• Short circuit in the Brown/white wire

NO

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

DTC 57-1 (GEARSHIFT MECHANISM
MALFUNCTION)
See page 12-28

DTC 57-2 (GEAR POSITION
MALFUNCTION; JUMPS OUT OF
GEAR)
See page 12-28

12-50

[1]

P/W
Br/W

[2]

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
DTC 58-1 (No.1 CLUTCH DOES NOT
DISENGAGE; WHEN SHIFTING GEAR)
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Clutch Condition Inspection
Remove the dual clutch assembly and inspect the
clutch for sticking (page 12-105).
Is the No.1 clutch stuck?
YES

– Faulty clutch

NO

– GO TO STEP 2.

2. Clutch Oil Line Inspection
Check the clutch oil passages in the right crankcase
cover and mainshaft for clogging.
Is the oil passage clogged?
YES

– Clean the oil passage.

NO

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

DTC 59-1 (No.2 CLUTCH DOES NOT
DISENGAGE; WHEN SHIFTING GEAR)
See page 12-51

DTC 61-1, 61-2, 61-3, 61-4, 62-1, 62-2
(No.1 CLUTCH OIL PRESSURE
MALFUNCTION)
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Recheck the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 47-1, 47-2, 55-1 or 55-2 indicated?
YES

– •
•
•
•

NO

– GO TO STEP 2.

DTC 47-1 is indicated (page 12-37).
DTC 47-2 is indicated (page 12-38).
DTC 55-1 is indicated (page 12-48).
DTC 55-2 is indicated (page 12-48).

2. No.1 Clutch EOP Sensor Inspection
Replace the No.1 clutch EOP sensor with a known
good one (page 12-117).
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle and stop the engine.
Check the No.1 clutch EOP sensor with the HDS
pocket tester.
Is DTC 61-1, 61-2, 61-3, 61-4, 62-1 or 62-2
indicated?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Faulty original No.1 clutch EOP sensor

12-51

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
3. PCM Inspection
Replace the PCM with a known good one (page 467).
Test-ride the motorcycle and stop the engine.
Check the No.1 clutch EOP sensor with the HDS
pocket tester.
Is DTC 61-1, 61-2, 61-3, 61-4, 62-1 or 62-2
indicated?
YES

– • Faulty No.1 linear solenoid valve
• Clogged No.1 clutch oil line
• Internal oil leak in the No.1 clutch oil
line

NO

– Faulty original PCM

DTC 63-1, 63-2, 63-3, 63-4, 64-1, 64-2
(No.2 CLUTCH OIL PRESSURE
MALFUNCTION)
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Recheck the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 48-1, 48-2, 56-1 or 56-2 indicated?
YES

– •
•
•
•

NO

– GO TO STEP 2.

DTC 48-1 is indicated (page 12-37).
DTC 48-2 is indicated (page 12-38).
DTC 56-1 is indicated (page 12-49).
DTC 56-2 is indicated (page 12-49).

2. No.2 Clutch EOP Sensor Inspection
Replace the No.2 clutch EOP sensor with a known
good one (page 12-117).
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle and stop the engine.
Check the No.2 clutch EOP sensor with the HDS
pocket tester.
Is DTC 63-1, 63-2, 63-3, 63-4, 64-1 or 64-2
indicated?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Faulty original No.2 clutch EOP sensor

3. PCM Inspection
Replace the PCM with a known good one (page 467).
Test-ride the motorcycle and stop the engine.
Check the No.2 clutch EOP sensor with the HDS
pocket tester.
Is DTC 63-1, 63-2, 63-3, 63-4, 64-1 or 64-2
indicated?

12-52

YES

– • Faulty No.2 linear solenoid valve
• Clogged No.2 clutch oil line
• Internal oil leak in the No.2 clutch oil
line

NO

– Faulty original PCM

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
DTC 65-1 (FRONT AND REAR WHEEL
SPEED SIGNAL MALFUNCTION)
• Before starting the inspection, check that the tire
sizes are correct, and the drive and driven sprockets
are the specified ones.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle above 18 km/h (11 mph)
for more than 30 seconds.
Stop the engine.
Check the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 66-1 or 67-1 indicated?
YES

– • DTC 66-1 is indicated (page 12-54).
• DTC 67-1 is indicated (page 12-55).

NO

– GO TO STEP 2.

2. Front Wheel Speed Sensor Air Gap Inspection
Measure the front wheel speed sensor air gap (page
20-24).
Is the air gap correct?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Check each part for deformation and
looseness and correct accordingly.
Recheck the air gap.

3. Front Wheel Speed Sensor Condition Inspection
Inspect the area around the front wheel speed
sensor.
Check that there is no iron or other magnetic
deposits between the pulser ring and wheel speed
sensor, and check the pulser ring slots for
obstructions.
Check installation condition of the pulser ring or
wheel speed sensor for looseness.
Check the pulser ring and sensor tip for deformation
or damage.
Are the sensor and pulser ring in good
condition?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– Remove any deposits. Install properly or
replace faulty part.

4. VS Sensor Condition Inspection
Remove the VS sensor (page 22-18).
Check the VS sensor for damage or contaminated.
Is the VS sensor in good condition?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Replace the VS sensor with a known good
one, and recheck.

12-53

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
DTC 66-1 (VS SENSOR NO SIGNAL)
• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the VS sensor 3P (Black) and PCM
33P (Black) connectors, and recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle above 18 km/h (11 mph)
for more than 30 seconds.
Stop the engine.
Check the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 66-1 indicated?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Intermittent failure

2. VS Sensor Input Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the VS sensor 3P (Black) connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
VS sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] terminals.
Connection: Pink/blue (+) – Green/red (–)

[1]

P/Bu

G/R

Is there battery voltage?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– • Open circuit in the Pink/blue wire
• Open circuit in the Green/red wire

3. VS Sensor Output Line Inspection
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
3P (Black) connector [1] terminal and ground.
Connection: Pink/green (+) – Ground (–)
Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?

12-54

YES

– GO TO STEP 6.

NO

– GO TO STEP 4.

[1]

P/G

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
4. VS Sensor Output Line Open Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Black) connector.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
VS sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and PCM 33P
(Black) connector [2] terminals.
Connection: Pink/green – A32
TOOL:
Test probe

[2]

[1]

P/G

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 5.

NO

– Open circuit in the Pink/green wire

A32

5. VS Sensor Output Line Short Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
VS sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] terminal and
ground
Connection: Pink/green – Ground

[1]

Is there continuity?
YES

– Short circuit in the Pink/green wire

NO

– GO TO STEP 6.

P/G

6. VS Sensor Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Replace the VS sensor with a known good one
(page 22-18).
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle and stop the engine.
Check the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 66-1 indicated?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Faulty original VS sensor

DTC 67-1 (FRONT WHEEL SPEED
SENSOR NO SIGNAL)
• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the front wheel speed sensor 2P
(Blue), ABS modulator 25P and PCM 33P (Black)
connectors, and recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle above 18 km/h (11 mph).
Stop the engine.
Check the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 67-1 indicated?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Intermittent failure

12-55

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
2. ABS Problem Code Inspection
Check the ABS problem code (page 20-8).
Does the ABS modulator have any problem
code?
YES

– Follow the problem code index (page 2010).

NO

– GO TO STEP 3.

3. Front Wheel Speed Sensor Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the ABS modulator 25P connector and
PCM 33P (Black) connector.
Check for continuity between the ABS modulator
25P connector [1] and PCM 33P (Black) connector
[2] terminals.
Connection: Violet/red – A33
TOOL:
Test probe

A33

[2]

V/R

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– Open circuit in the Violet/red wire

[1]

4. Front Wheel Speed Sensor Line Short Circuit
Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
PCM 33P (Black) connector [1] and ground.
Connection: A33 – Ground
TOOL:
Test probe

[1]

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Is there continuity?
YES

– Short circuit in the Violet/red wire

NO

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
A33

DTC 68-1 (No.1 CLUTCH OPERATION
MALFUNCTION; CLUTCH SLIPS)
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle above 18 km/h (11 mph).
Stop the engine.
Check the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 66-1 indicated?

12-56

YES

– Refer to DTC 66-1 troubleshooting (page
12-54).

NO

– GO TO STEP 2.

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
2. Clutch Clearance Inspection
Remove the No.1 clutch assembly and measure the
clutch clearance (page 12-105).
Is the clearance within the standard range?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Faulty No.1 clutch assembly

DTC 69-1 (No.2 CLUTCH OPERATION
MALFUNCTION; CLUTCH SLIPS)
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle above 18 km/h (11 mph).
Stop the engine.
Check the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 66-1 indicated?
YES

– Refer to DTC 66-1 troubleshooting (page
12-54).

NO

– GO TO STEP 2.

2. Clutch Condition Inspection
Remove the No.2 clutch assembly and measure the
clutch clearance (page 12-105).
Is the clearance within the standard range?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Faulty No.2 clutch assembly.

DTC 71-1, 72-1 (INNER, OUTER
MAINSHAFT/COUNTERSHAFT SPEED
RATIO FAILURE)
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck 1
Check the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 53-1, 54-1 or 66-1 indicated?
YES

– • DTC 53-1 is indicated (page 12-43).
• DTC 54-1 is indicated (page 12-46).
• DTC 66-1 is indicated (page 12-54).

NO

– GO TO STEP 2.

12-57

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
2. DTC Recheck 2
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle above 18 km/h (11 mph).
Stop the engine.
Check the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 71-1 or 72-1 indicated?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Intermittent failure

DTC 84-1 (CPU IN THE PCM
MALFUNCTION)
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Check the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is DTC 84-1 indicated?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Intermittent failure

DTC 1-1 (SHIFT PEDAL ANGLE
SENSOR (OPTIONAL) MALFUNCTION)
• Before starting this inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the shift pedal angle sensor 3P
(Black) connector and PCM 33P connectors, and
recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
– DCT Shift Pedal (Optional) Registration (page 12118)
• If the DCT shift pedal (optional) is removed from the
vehicle, perform the DCT Shift Pedal Registration
Cancellation (page 12-119).
1. Recheck the DTC
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Operate the DCT shift pedal up and down several
times with the engine stopped.
Recheck the DTC with the HDS pocket tester.
Is the DTC 1-1 indicated?

12-58

YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Intermittent failure

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
2. Shift Pedal
Inspection

Angle

Sensor

Input

Voltage

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the shift pedal angle sensor 3P (Black)
connector [1].
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
shift pedal angle sensor 3P (Black) connector
terminals.
Connection: Yellow/red (+) – Green/yellow (–)

[1]

Y/R

G/Y

Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– GO TO STEP 3.

3. Shift Pedal
Inspection

Angle

Sensor

Open

Circuit

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Gray) connector [1].
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
shift pedal angle sensor 3P (Black) connector [2]
and PCM 33P (Gray) connector terminals.
Connection: Green/yellow – B22
Yellow/red – B14
TOOL:
Test probe

[1]

Y/R

07ZAJ-RDJA110

G/Y

Is there continuity?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– • Open circuit in Green/yellow wire
• Open circuit in Yellow/red wire

[2]

B22

B14

4. Shift Pedal Angle Sensor Output Line Open
Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Gray) connector [1].
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
shift pedal angle sensor 3P (Black) connector [2]
and PCM 33P (Gray) connector terminals.
Connection: Yellow/violet – B19
TOOL:
Test probe

Y/V

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 5.

NO

– Open circuit in Yellow/violet wire

[2]

B19

[1]

12-59

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
5. Shift Pedal Angle Sensor Output Line Short
Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
shift pedal angle sensor 3P (Black) connector [1]
and ground.
Connection: Yellow/violet – Ground

[1]

Is there continuity?
YES

– Short circuit in Yellow/violet wire.

NO

– GO TO STEP 6.

Y/V

6. Shift Pedal Angle Sensor Resistance Inspection
Measure the
pedal angle
terminals.
Connection:
Standard:

resistance at the sensor side shift
sensor 3P (Black) connector [1]
Yellow/red – Blue/green
4 – 6 kΩ (20°C/68°F)

Operate the DCT shift pedal to check that the
resistance changes in accordance with the pedal
operation.
Connection: Yellow/blue – Blue/green
When moving the pedal up:
Resistance increases
When moving the pedal down:
Resistance decreases
Are the resistance inspections normal?

12-60

YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Faulty shift pedal angle sensor, replace the
DCT shift pedal as an assembly.

[1]

Y/R

Bu/G

Y/Bu

Bu/G

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

SHIFT INDICATOR
TROUBLESHOOTING
DTC 9 (CLUTCH LINE EOP SENSOR)
• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the clutch line EOP sensor 3P
(Black) and PCM 33P connectors, and recheck the
DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Clutch Line
Inspection

EOP

Sensor

Input

Voltage

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the clutch line EOP sensor 3P (Black)
connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ".
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
clutch line EOP sensor 3P (Black) connector [1]
terminal and ground.
Connection: Yellow/red (+) – Green/yellow (–)

YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– GO TO STEP 5.

Y/R

G/Y

Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?

[1]

2. Clutch Line EOP Sensor Output Line Open
Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
connectors (page 4-14).
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
clutch line EOP sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
test harness [2] terminals.

[1]

Connection: Violet/green – A17

V/G

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Open circuit in the Violet/green wire
[2]

A17

3. Clutch Line EOP Sensor Output Line Short
Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
clutch line EOP sensor 3P (Black) connector [1]
terminal and ground.
Connection: Violet/green – Ground

[1]

Is there continuity?
YES

– Short circuit in the Violet/green wire

NO

– GO TO STEP 4.

V/G

12-61

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
4. Clutch Line EOP Sensor Inspection
Replace the clutch line EOP sensor with a known
good one (page 12-117).
Connect the clutch line EOP sensor 3P (Black)
connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ", lower the sidestand and check the shift
indicator.
Is DTC 9 indicated?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one
and recheck.

NO

– Faulty original clutch line EOP sensor.

5. Clutch Line EOP Sensor Power/Ground Line
Open Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
connectors (page 4-14).
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
clutch line EOP sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
test harness [2] terminals.

[1]

[2]

B22

Y/R

Connection: Yellow/red – B14
Green/yellow – B22
Is there continuity?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one
and recheck.

NO

– • Open circuit in the Yellow/red wire
• Open circuit in the Green/yellow wire

G/Y

B14

DTC 19 (CKP SENSOR)
• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the CKP sensor 2P (Red) and PCM
33P connectors, and recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. CKP Sensor Peak Voltage Inspection at PCM
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
connectors (page 4-14).
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ".
Crank the engine and measure the CKP sensor
peak voltage between the test harness [1] terminal
and ground.

[2]

Connection: B11 (+) – B6 (–)
TOOL:
Imrie diagnostic tester (model 625) or
Peak voltage adaptor [2]
07HGJ-0020100
with commercially available digital multimeter
(impedance 10 MΩ/DCV minimum)
Is the voltage more than 0.7 V?

12-62

YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one
and recheck.

NO

– GO TO STEP 2.

B6
B11

[1]

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
2. CKP Sensor Peak Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the CKP sensor 2P (Red) connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Crank the engine and measure the CKP sensor
peak voltage between the CKP sensor 2P (Red)
connector [1] terminals.

[1]
W/Y

Connection: Yellow (+) – White/yellow (–)

Y

Is the voltage more than 0.7 V?
YES

– • Open or short circuit in the Yellow wire
• Open circuit in the White/yellow wire

NO

– Faulty CKP sensor

DTC 21 (SHIFT SPINDLE ANGLE
SENSOR)
• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the shift spindle angle sensor 3P
(Gray) and PCM 33P connectors, and recheck the
DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Shift Spindle Angle Sensor Input Voltage
Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the shift spindle angle sensor 3P (Gray)
connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ".
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
shift spindle angle sensor 3P (Blue) connector [1]
terminals.
Connection: Yellow/red (+) – Green/yellow (–)

[1]

G/Y

Y/R

Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– GO TO STEP 5.

2. Shift Spindle Angle Sensor Output Line Open
Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
connectors (page 4-14).
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
shift spindle angle sensor 3P (Gray) connector [1]
and test harness [2] terminals.
Connection: Violet/red – A16

[2]

V/R

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Open circuit in the Violet/red wire
[1]

A16

12-63

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
3. Shift Spindle Angle Sensor Output Line Short
Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
shift spindle angle sensor 3P (Gray) connector [1]
terminal and ground.
Connection: Violet/red – Ground

[1]

Is there continuity?
YES

– Short circuit in the Violet/red wire

NO

– GO TO STEP 4.

V/R

4. Shift Spindle Angle Sensor Inspection
Replace the shift spindle angle sensor with a known
good one (page 12-116).
Connect the shift spindle angle sensor 3P (Gray)
connector and PCM 33P (Black) connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ", lower the sidestand and check the shift
indicator.
Is DTC 21 indicated?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Faulty original shift spindle angle sensor

5. Shift Spindle Angle Sensor Power/Ground Line
Open Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
connectors (page 4-14).
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
shift spindle angle sensor 3P (Gray) connector [1]
and test harness [2] terminals.
Connection: Yellow/red – B14
Green/yellow – B22
Is there continuity?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one
and recheck.

NO

– • Open circuit in the Yellow/red wire
• Open circuit in the Green/yellow wire

DTC 22, 23 (SHIFT SPINDLE
OPERATION MALFUNCTION)
1. Shift Control Motor/Reduction gear condition
Check the shift control motor and reduction gears
are installed properly and are not damaged.
Are the shift control motor and reduction gears
in normal condition?

12-64

YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Install the shift control motor and reduction
gears properly or replace faulty parts.

[1]

B14

[2]

Y/R
G/Y

B22

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
2. Shift Control Motor Condition Inspection
Remove the shift control motor (page 12-109).
Connect a fully charged 12 V battery [1] to the shift
control motor [2] 2P connector terminals to check
the motor operation.
Change the battery connection to check the reverse
operation.
Does the shift control motor turn in both
directions?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Faulty shift control motor

[2]

[1]

3. Shift Spindle Angle Sensor Condition Inspection
Check that the shift spindle angle sensor is installed
properly.
Is the shift spindle angle sensor in normal
condition?
YES

– Faulty shift spindle angle sensor

NO

– Install the shift spindle angle sensor
properly.

DTC 24 (SHIFT CONTROL MOTOR
DRIVE CIRCUIT)
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Shift Control Motor Line Open Circuit Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
connectors (page 4-14).
Disconnect the shift control motor 2P (Black)
connector.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
shift control motor 2P (Black) connector [1] and test
harness [2] terminals.
Connection: Pink/blue – A1
Pink/blue – A2
Yellow/blue – A4
Yellow/blue – A15

A1

A2

[2]

P/Bu
A4
Y/Bu

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– • Open circuit in the Pink/blue wire
• Open circuit in the Yellow/blue wire

[1]

A15

12-65

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
2. Shift Control Motor Line Short Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
shift control motor 2P (Black) connector [1] and
ground.
Connection: Pink/blue – Ground
Yellow/blue – Ground

Y/Bu

P/Bu

Is there continuity?
YES

– • Short circuit in the Pink/blue wire
• Short circuit in the Yellow/blue wire

NO

– GO TO STEP 3.

[1]

3. Shift Control Motor Inspection
Remove the shift control motor (page 12-109).
Connect a fully charged 12 V battery [1] to the shift
control motor [2] 2P connector terminals to check
the motor operation.
Change the battery connection to check the reverse
operation.
Does the shift control motor turn in both
directions?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one.

NO

– Faulty shift control motor

[2]

[1]

[2]

[1]

DTC 27 (SHIFT DRUM POSITION)
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Shift Control Motor/Reduction gear condition
Check the shift control motor and reduction gears
are installed properly and are not damaged.
Are the shift control motor and reduction gears
normal condition?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Install the shift control motor and reduction
gears properly or replace faulty parts.

2. Shift Control Motor Condition Inspection
Remove the shift control motor (page 12-109).
Connect a fully charged 12 V battery [1] to the shift
control motor [2] 2P connector terminals to check
the motor operation.
Change the battery connection to check the reverse
operation.
Does the shift control motor turn in both
directions?

12-66

YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Faulty shift control motor

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
3. TR Sensor Condition Inspection
Check that the TR sensor is installed properly and is
not damage.
Is the TR sensor normal condition?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– Install the TR sensor properly.

4. DTC Recheck
Replace the TR sensor with a known good one
(page 12-115).
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle and stop the engine.
Read the DTC with the shift indicator (page 12-13).
Is DTC 27 indicated?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Faulty original TR sensor

DTC 31 (SHIFT CONTROL MOTOR)
• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the shift control motor 2P (Black)
and PCM 33P connectors, and recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. PVB Fuse Inspection
Check the PVB fuse (30 A).
Is the PVB fuse in good condition?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Faulty PVB fuse (30 A)

2. Shift Control Motor Line Open Circuit Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
connectors (page 4-14).
Disconnect the shift control motor 2P (Black)
connector.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
shift control motor 2P (Black) connector [1] and test
harness [2] terminals.
Connection: Pink/blue – A1
Pink/blue – A2
Yellow/blue – A4
Yellow/blue – A15

A1

A2

[2]

P/Bu
A4
Y/Bu

Is there continuity?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– • Open circuit in the Pink/blue wire
• Open circuit in the Yellow/blue wire

[1]

A15

12-67

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
DTC 32 (FAIL SAFE RELAY)
• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the PCM 33P (Black) connector and
recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. PVB Fuse Inspection
Check the PVB fuse (30 A).
Is the PVB fuse in good condition?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Faulty PVB fuse (30 A)

2. Shift Control Motor Power Supply Voltage
Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
connectors (page 4-14).
Measure the voltage between the test harness [1]
terminals and ground.
Connection: A12 (+) – Ground (–)
A13 (+) – Ground (–)
Is there battery voltage?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one
and recheck.

NO

– • Open circuit in the Yellow/red wire
between the PCM 33P (Black)
connector and fuse/relay box
• Open circuit in the Red wire between
the fuse/relay box and starter relay
switch 4P (Red) connector

DTC 37 (IGNITION HOLD RELAY)
• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the PCM 33P (Black) connector and
recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. SUB PVB Fuse Inspection
Check the SUB PVB fuse (7.5 A).
Is the SUB PVB fuse in good condition?

12-68

YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Faulty SUB PVB fuse (7.5 A)

A12

A13

[1]

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
2. PCM (DCT Drive Circuit) Sub Power Voltage
Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
connectors (page 4-14).
Measure the voltage between the test harness [1]
terminals and ground.
Connection: A3 (+) – Ground (–)

A3

Is there battery voltage?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one
and recheck.

NO

– • Open circuit in the Brown/red wire
between the PCM 33P (Black)
connector and fuse/relay box
• Open circuit in the Red wire between
the fuse/relay box and starter relay
switch 4P (Red) connector

[1]

DTC 41 (N-D SHIFT SWITCH)
• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the right handlebar switch and PCM
33P (Black) connectors, and recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. N-D Shift Switch Power Input Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the following:
– Right handlebar switch 6P (Black) connector
(NC700XD) [1]
– Right handlebar switch 7P (Green) connector
(NC700SD) [2]
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ".
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
right handlebar switch connector terminal and
ground.
Connection: Yellow/red (+) – Ground (–)

NC700XD:

NC700SD:

[1]

[2]

Y/R

Y/R

Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Open circuit in the Yellow/red wire

12-69

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
2. N-D Shift Switch Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Check for continuity between the switch side right
handlebar switch connector [1] terminals in each
switch position.
Connection:
N switch:
Light green/blue – Red
D switch:
Black/yellow – Red

NC700XD:
[1]
R

Lg/Bu
Bl/Y

Is there continuity with the switch pushed and
no continuity with the switch released?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Faulty N-D shift switch
NC700SD:
[1]

R
Bl/Y
Lg/Bu

3. N-D Shift Switch Input Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
connectors (page 4-14).
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
right handlebar switch connector [1] and test
harness [2] terminals.
Connection: Light green/black – A18
Black/yellow – A29

NC700XD:

A18

[1]

Lg/Bl

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– • Open circuit in the Light green/black
wire
• Open circuit in the Black/yellow wire

Bl/Y

A29
NC700SD:

[2]
A18

[1]

Lg/Bl

Bl/Y

A29

12-70

[2]

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
4. N-D Shift Switch Input Line Short Circuit
Inspection
Check for continuity between the test harness [1]
terminals and ground.
Connection: A18 – Ground
A29 – Ground

A18

Is there continuity?
YES

– • Short circuit in the Light green/black
wire
• Short circuit in the Black/yellow wire

NO

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.
A20

[1]

DTC 42 (SHIFT SWITCH)
• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the left handlebar switch and PCM
33P (Black) connectors, and recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Shift Switch Power Input Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the following:
– Left handlebar switch 3P (Black) connector
(NC700XD) [1]
– Left handlebar switch 7P (Green) connector
(NC700SD) [2]
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ".
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
left handlebar switch connector terminal and
ground.
Connection: Yellow/red (+) – Ground (–)

NC700XD:

NC700SD:

[1]

[2]

Y/R
Y/R

Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Open circuit in the Yellow/red wire

12-71

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
2. Shift Switch Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Check for continuity between the switch side left
handlebar switch connector [1] terminals in each
switch position.
Connection:
"+" switch:
Green/blue – Yellow/red
"–" switch:
Light green/red – Yellow/red

NC700XD:
[1]
Y/R

Lg/R
G/Bu

Is there continuity with the switch pushed and
no continuity with the switch released?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Faulty shift switch

Y/R

NC700SD:
[1]

Lg/R
G/Bu
Y/R

3. Shift Switch Input Line Open Circuit Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
connectors (page 4-14).
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
left handlebar switch connector [1] and test harness
[2] terminals.
Connection: Blue/yellow – A7
Light green/red – A30

NC700XD:
[1]

A7

[2]

Bu/Y

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– • Open circuit in the Blue/yellow wire
• Open circuit in the Light green/red wire

Lg/R

A30
NC700SD:
[1]

A7

[2]

Bu/Y

Lg/R

A30

12-72

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
4. Shift Switch Input Line Short Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the test harness [1]
terminals and ground.
Connection: A7 – Ground
A30 – Ground

A7

[1]

Is there continuity?
YES

– • Short circuit in the Blue/yellow wire
• Short circuit in the Light green/red wire

NO

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

A30

DTC 44 (EOT SENSOR)
• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the EOT sensor 2P (Black) and
PCM 33P connectors, and recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. EOT Sensor Input Line Open Circuit Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
connectors (page 4-14).
Disconnect the EOT sensor 2P (Black) connector.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
EOT sensor 2P (Black) connector [1] and test
harness [2] terminals.
Connection: Blue/green – A19
Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Open circuit in the Blue/green wire

[2]

Bu/G

[1]

A19

2. EOT Sensor Input Line Short Circuit Inspection
Check the continuity between the wire harness side
EOT sensor 2P (Black) connector [1] terminal and
ground.
Connection: Blue/green – Ground

[1]

Bu/G

Is there continuity?
YES

– Short circuit in the Blue/green wire

NO

– GO TO STEP 3.

12-73

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
3. EOT Sensor
Inspection

Ground

Line

Open

Circuit

Check for continuity between the wire harness side
EOT sensor 2P (Black) connector [1] and test
harness [2] terminals.
Connection: Green/yellow – B22
Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– Open circuit in the Green/yellow wire

G/Y

[2]

[1]

B22

4. EOT Sensor Resistance Inspection
Measure the resistance between the EOT sensor [1]
connector terminals.

[1]

Is the resistance within 2.5 – 2.8 kΩ (20°C/68°F)?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Faulty EOT sensor

DTC 47 or 48 (No.1 or No.2 CLUTCH
EOP SENSOR)
• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the clutch EOP sensor 3P (Gray)
and PCM 33P connectors, and recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Clutch EOP Sensor Input Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the clutch EOP sensor 3P (Gray)
connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ".
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
clutch EOP sensor 3P (Gray) connector [1]
terminals.
Connection: Yellow/red (+) – Green/yellow (–)
Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– GO TO STEP 5.

G/Y

[1]

12-74

Y/R

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
2. Clutch EOP Sensor Output Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
connectors (page 4-14).
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
clutch EOP sensor 3P (Gray) connector [1] and test
harness [2] terminals.
Connection:
No.1 clutch EOP sensor:
Yellow/green – A6
No.2 clutch EOP sensor:
Black/green – A5

[1]

A6
Y/G

Bl/G

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– • Open circuit in the Yellow/green wire
• Open circuit in the Black/green wire

[2]

A5

3. Clutch EOP Sensor Output Line Short Circuit
Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
clutch EOP sensor 3P (Gray) connector [1] terminal
and ground.
Connection:
No.1 clutch EOP sensor:
Yellow/green – Ground
No.2 clutch EOP sensor:
Black/green – Ground

[1]

Y/G or Bl/G

Is there continuity?
YES

– • Short circuit in the Yellow/green wire
• Short circuit in the Black/green wire

NO

– GO TO STEP 4.

4. Clutch EOP Sensor Inspection
Replace the clutch EOP sensor with a known good
one (page 12-117).
Connect the clutch EOP sensor 3P (Gray)
connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ", lower the sidestand and check the shift
indicator.
Is DTC 47 or 48 indicated?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one
and recheck.

NO

– Faulty original clutch EOP sensor

5. Clutch EOP Sensor Power/Ground Line Open
Circuit Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
connectors (page 4-14).
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
clutch EOP sensor 3P (Gray) connector [1] and test
harness [2] terminals.
Connection: Yellow/red – B14
Green/yellow – B22

[1]

[2]

B14

B22

Y/R

Is there continuity?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one
and recheck.

NO

– • Open circuit in the Yellow/red wire
• Open circuit in the Green/yellow wire

G/Y

12-75

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
DTC 49 (CLUTCH LINE LOW OIL
PRESSURE)
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Engine Oil Level Inspection
Check the engine oil level (page 3-12).
Is the engine oil level correct?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Add the recommended oil to the upper
level.

2. Clutch Line Oil Filter Condition Inspection
Check the clutch oil filter (page 3-14).
Is the oil filter in good condition?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Replace the clutch oil filter

3. Clutch Line EOP Sensor Inspection
Replace the clutch line EOP sensor with a known
good one (page 12-117).
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle above 2,000 min-1 (rpm)
and stop the engine.
Read the DTC with the shift indicator (page 12-13).
Is DTC 49 indicated?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– Faulty original clutch line EOP sensor

4. PCM Inspection
Replace the PCM with a known good one (page 467).
Test-ride the motorcycle above 2,000 min-1 (rpm)
and stop the engine.
Read the DTC with the shift indicator (page 12-13).
Is DTC 49 indicated?

12-76

YES

– • Oil pressure relief valve stuck open
• Damaged oil pump
• Internal oil leak in the clutch oil line

NO

– Faulty original PCM

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
DTC 51 (TR SENSOR)
• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the TR sensor 3P (Black) and PCM
33P connectors and recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. TR Sensor Input Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the TR sensor 3P (Black) connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ".
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
TR sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] terminals.
Connection: Yellow/red (+) – Green/yellow (–)

[1]

G/Y

Y/R

Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– GO TO STEP 5.

2. TR Sensor Output Line Open Circuit Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
connectors (page 4-14).
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
TR sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and test
harness [2] terminals
Connection: Black/pink – A28
Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Open circuit in the Black/pink wire

[1]

[2]

Bl/P

A28

3. TR Sensor Output Line Short Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
TR sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] terminal and
ground.
Connection: Black/pink – Ground

[1]

Is there continuity?
YES

– Short circuit in the Black/pink wire

NO

– GO TO STEP 4.

Bl/P

12-77

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
4. TR Sensor Inspection
Replace the TR sensor with a known good one
(page 12-115).
Connect the TR sensor 3P (Black) connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ", lower the sidestand and check the shift
indicator.
Is DTC 51 indicated?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Faulty original TR sensor

5. TR Sensor Power/Ground Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
connectors (page 4-14).
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
TR sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and test
harness [2] terminals.
Connection: Yellow/red – B14
Green/yellow – B22

[1]

B14

[2]

Y/R

Is there continuity?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one
and recheck.

NO

– • Open circuit in the Yellow/red wire
• Open circuit in the Green/yellow wire

G/Y

B22

DTC 52 (NEUTRAL SWITCH)
• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the neutral switch and PCM 33P
(Gray) connectors, and recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ", lower the sidestand and check the shift
indicator.
Is DTC 52 indicated?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Intermittent failure

2. Neutral Switch Line Open Circuit Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
connectors (page 4-14).
Disconnect the neutral switch connector.
Check for continuity between the neutral switch
connector [1] and test harness [2] terminals.
Connection: Light green – B30

[2]

[1]

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Open circuit in the Light green wire

Lg

B30

12-78

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
3. Neutral Switch Line Short Circuit Inspection
Disconnect the neutral switch connector [1].
Check for continuity between the neutral switch
connector terminal and ground.
Connection: Light green – Ground

[1]

Is there continuity?
YES

– Short circuit in the Light green wire

NO

– GO TO STEP 4.

Lg

4. Neutral Switch Inspection
Replace the neutral switch with a know good one
(page 22-28).
Connect the neutral switch connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ", lower the sidestand and check the shift
indicator.
Is DTC 52 indicated?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Faulty original neutral switch

DTC 53 (INNER MAINSHAFT SENSOR
SPEED LOW)
• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the inner mainshaft sensor 3P
(Black) and PCM 33P connectors, and recheck the
DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Inner Mainshaft Sensor Input Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the inner mainshaft sensor 3P (Black)
connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ".
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
inner mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1]
terminals.
Connection: Brown/yellow (+) – Green/yellow (–)

[1]

Br/Y

G/Y

Is there about battery voltage?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– GO TO STEP 3.

12-79

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
2. Inner Mainshaft Sensor Output Line Inspection
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
inner mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1]
terminal and ground.
Connection: Gray/yellow (+) – Ground (–)

[1]

Gr/Y

Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES

– GO TO STEP 7.

NO

– GO TO STEP 5.

3. Inner Mainshaft Sensor Input Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
connectors (page 4-14).
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
inner mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
test harness [2] terminals.
Connection: Brown/yellow – A14

[1]

Br/Y

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– Open circuit in the Brown/yellow wire

A14

[2]

4. Inner Mainshaft Sensor Ground Line Open
Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
inner mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
test harness [2] terminals.
Connection: Green/yellow – B22

[1]

[2]

Is there continuity?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Open circuit in the Green/yellow wire

G/Y

B22

12-80

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
5. Inner Mainshaft Output Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
connectors (page 4-14).
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
inner mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
test harness [2] terminals.
Connection: Gray/yellow – A20

[2]

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 6.

NO

– Open circuit in the Gray/yellow wire

Gr/Y

A20

[1]

6. Inner Mainshaft Sensor Output Line Short
Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
inner mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1]
terminal and ground.
Connection: Gray/yellow – Ground

[1]

Is there continuity?
YES

– Short circuit in the Gray/yellow wire

NO

– GO TO STEP 7.

Gr/Y

7. Inner Mainshaft Sensor Inspection
Replace the inner mainshaft sensor with a known
good one (page 12-115).
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle and read the DTC with the
shift indicator (page 12-13).
Is DTC 53 indicated?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a new one, and
recheck.

NO

– Faulty original inner mainshaft sensor

12-81

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
DTC 54 (OUTER MAINSHAFT SENSOR
SPEED LOW)
• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the outer mainshaft sensor 3P
(Black) and PCM 33P connectors, and recheck the
DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Outer
Mainshaft
Inspection

Sensor

Input

Voltage

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the outer mainshaft sensor 3P (Black)
connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ".
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
outer mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1]
terminals.
Connection: White/blue (+) – Green/yellow (–)

[1]

G/Y

W/Bu

Is there about battery voltage?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– GO TO STEP 3.

2. Outer Mainshaft Sensor Output Line Inspection
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
outer mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1]
terminal and ground.
Connection: Pink/yellow (+) – Ground (–)

[1]

P/Y

Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES

– GO TO STEP 7.

NO

– GO TO STEP 5.

3. Outer Mainshaft Sensor Input Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
connectors (page 4-14).
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
outer mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
test harness [2] terminals.
Connection: White/blue – A25
Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– Open circuit in the White/blue wire

[1]

A25

W/Bu

[2]

12-82

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
4. Outer Mainshaft Sensor Ground Line Open
Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
outer mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
test harness [2] terminals.
Connection: Green/yellow – B22

[1]

[2]

Is there continuity?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Open circuit in the Green/yellow wire

G/Y

B22

5. Outer Mainshaft Output Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
connectors (page 4-14).
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
outer mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
test harness [2] terminals.
Connection: Pink/yellow – A21

[2]

P/Y

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 6.

NO

– Open circuit in the Pink/yellow wire

A21

[1]

6. Outer Mainshaft Sensor Output Line Short
Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
outer mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1]
terminal and ground.
Connection: Pink/yellow – Ground

[1]

Is there continuity?
YES

– Short circuit in the Pink/yellow wire

NO

– GO TO STEP 7.

P/Y

7. Outer Mainshaft Sensor Inspection
Replace the outer mainshaft sensor with a known
good one (page 12-115).
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle and read the DTC with the
shift indicator (page 12-13).
Is DTC 54 indicated?
YES

– Replace the PCM sensor with a new one,
and recheck.

NO

– Faulty original outer mainshaft sensor

12-83

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
DTC 55 (No.1 LINEAR SOLENOID
VALVE)
• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the linear solenoid valve 4P (Green)
and PCM 33P (Black) connectors, and recheck the
DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. No.1 Linear Solenoid Valve Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the linear solenoid valve 4P (Green)
connector.
Measure the resistance between the linear solenoid
valve side 4P (Green) connector [1] terminals.
Connection: Blue – Gray

[1]
Bu

Standard: 5.0 – 5.6 Ω (20°C/68°F)
Is the resistance within standard range?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Faulty linear solenoid valve

Gr

2. No.1 Linear Solenoid Valve Input/ground Line
Open Circuit Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
connectors (page 4-14).
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
linear solenoid valve 4P (Green) connector [1] and
test harness [2] terminals.
Connection: Gray/white – A9
Blue/white – A10

[2]

A9

[1]

Gr/W

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– • Open circuit in the Gray/white wire
• Open circuit in the Blue/white wire

Bu/W

A10

3. No.1 Linear Solenoid Valve Input/ground Line
Short Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
linear solenoid valve 4P (Green) connector [1]
terminals and ground.
Connection: Gray/white – Ground
Blue/white – Ground

[1]

Gr/W

Is there continuity?
YES
NO

12-84

– • Short circuit in the Gray/white wire
• Short circuit in the Blue/white wire
– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

Bu/W

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
DTC 56 (No.2 LINEAR SOLENOID
VALVE)
• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the linear solenoid valve 4P (Green)
and PCM 33P (Black) connectors, and recheck the
DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. No.2 Linear Solenoid Valve Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the linear solenoid valve 4P (Green)
connector.
Measure the resistance between the linear solenoid
valve side 4P (Green) connector [1] terminals.
Connection: Yellow – White/red

[1]
Y

Standard: 5.0 – 5.6 Ω (20°C/68°F)
Is the resistance within standard range?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Faulty linear solenoid valve

W/R

2. No.2 Linear Solenoid Valve Input/ground Line
Open Circuit Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
connectors (page 4-14).
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
linear solenoid valve 4P (Green) connector [1] and
test harness [2] terminals.
Connection: Pink/white – A11
Brown/white – A22

[1]

[2]

P/W

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– • Open circuit in the Pink/white wire
• Open circuit in the Brown/white wire

A11

Br/W

A22

3. No.2 Linear Solenoid Valve Input/ground Line
Short Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
linear solenoid valve 4P (Green) connector [1]
terminals and ground.
Connection: Pink/white – Ground
Brown/white – Ground
Is there continuity?
YES

– • Short circuit in the Pink/white wire
• Short circuit in the Brown/white wire

NO

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

[1]

P/W
Br/W

12-85

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
DTC 57 (GEARSHIFT MECHANISM/
GEAR POSITION MALFUNCTION)
See page 12-66

DTC 58 (No.1 CLUTCH DOES NOT
DISENGAGE; WHEN SHIFTING GEAR)
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. Clutch Condition Inspection
Remove the dual clutch assembly and inspect the
clutch for sticking (page 12-105).
Is the No.1 clutch stuck?
YES

– Faulty clutch assembly

NO

– GO TO STEP 2.

2. Clutch Oil Line Inspection
Check the clutch oil passages in the right crankcase
cover and mainshaft for clogging.
Is the oil passage clogged?
YES

– Clean the oil passage.

NO

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

DTC 59 (No.2 CLUTCH DOES NOT
DISENGAGE; WHEN SHIFTING GEAR)
See page 12-86

DTC 61, 62 (No.1 CLUTCH OIL
PRESSURE MALFUNCTION)
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ", lower the sidestand and check the shift
indicator.
Is DTC 47 or 55 indicated?
YES

– • DTC 47 indicated (page 12-74).
• DTC 55 indicated (page 12-84).

NO

– GO TO STEP 2.

2. No.1 Clutch EOP Sensor Inspection
Replace the No.1 clutch EOP sensor with a known
good one (page 12-117).
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle and stop the engine.
Read the DTC with the shift indicator (page 12-13).
Is DTC 61 or 62 indicated?

12-86

YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Faulty original No.1 clutch EOP sensor

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
3. PCM Inspection
Replace the PCM with a known good one (page 467).
Test-ride the motorcycle and stop the engine.
Read the DTC with the shift indicator (page 12-13).
Is DTC 61 or 62 indicated?
YES

– • Faulty No.1 linear solenoid valve
• Clogged No.1 clutch oil line
• Internal oil leak in the No.1 clutch oil
line

NO

– Faulty original PCM

DTC 63, 64 (No.2 CLUTCH OIL
PRESSURE MALFUNCTION)
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ", lower the sidestand and check the shift
indicator.
Is DTC 48 or 56 indicated?
YES

– • DTC 48 indicated (page 12-74).
• DTC 56 indicated (page 12-85).

NO

– GO TO STEP 2.

2. No.2 Clutch EOP Sensor Inspection
Replace the No.2 clutch EOP sensor with a known
good one (page 12-117).
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle and stop the engine.
Read the DTC with the shift indicator (page 12-13).
Is DTC 63 or 64 indicated?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Faulty original No.2 clutch EOP sensor

3. PCM Inspection
Replace the PCM with a known good one (page 467).
Test-ride the motorcycle and stop the engine.
Read the DTC with the shift indicator (page 12-13).
Is DTC 63 or 64 indicated?
YES

– • Faulty No.2 linear solenoid valve
• Clogged No.2 clutch oil line
• Internal oil leak in the No.2 clutch oil
line

NO

– Faulty original PCM

12-87

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
DTC 65 (FRONT AND REAR WHEEL
SPEED SENSOR SIGNAL
MALFUNCTION)
• Before starting the inspection, check that the tire
sizes are correct, and the drive and driven sprockets
are the specified ones.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle above 18 km/h (11 mph).
Stop the engine.
Read the DTC with the shift indicator (page 12-13).
Is DTC 66 or 67 indicated?
YES

– • DTC 66 indicated (page 12-89).
• DTC 67 indicated (page 12-90).

NO

– GO TO STEP 2.

2. Speed Sensor Air Gap Inspection
Measure the front wheel speed sensor air gap (page
20-24).
Is the air gap correct?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Check each part for deformation and
looseness and correct accordingly.
Recheck the air gap.

3. Speed Sensor Condition Inspection
Inspect the area around the front wheel speed
sensor.
Check that there is no iron or other magnetic
deposits between the pulser ring and wheel speed
sensor, and check the pulser ring slots for
obstructions.
Check installation condition of the pulser ring or
wheel speed sensor for looseness.
Check the pulser ring and sensor tip for deformation
or damage.
Are the sensor and pulser ring in good
condition?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– Remove any deposits. Install properly or
replace faulty part.

4. VS Sensor Condition Inspection
Remove the VS sensor (page 22-18).
Check the VS sensor for damage or contaminated.
Is the VS sensor in good condition?

12-88

YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Replace the VS sensor with a known good
one, and recheck.

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
DTC 66 (VS SENSOR NO SIGNAL)
• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the VS sensor 3P (Black) and PCM
33P connectors, and recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle above 18 km/h (11 mph).
Stop the engine.
Read the DTC with the shift indicator (page 12-13).
Is DTC 66 indicated?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Intermittent failure

2. VS Sensor Input Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the VS sensor 3P (Black) connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
VS sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] terminals.
Connection: Pink/blue (+) – Green/red (–)

[1]

P/Bu

G/R

Is there battery voltage?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– • Open circuit in the Pink/blue wire
• Open circuit in the Green/red wire

3. VS Sensor Output Line Inspection
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
3P (Black) connector [1] terminal and ground.
Connection: Pink/green (+) – Ground (–)
Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES

– GO TO STEP 6.

NO

– GO TO STEP 4.

[1]

P/G

12-89

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
4. VS Sensor Output Line Open Circuit Inspection
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
connectors (page 4-14).
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
VS sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and test
harness [2] terminals.
Connection: Pink/green – A32

[2]

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 5.

NO

– Open circuit in the Pink/green wire

P/G

A32

[1]

5. VS Sensor Output Line Short Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
VS sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] terminal and
ground.
Connection: Pink/green – Ground

[1]

Is there continuity?
YES

– Short circuit in the Pink/green wire

NO

– GO TO STEP 6.

6. VS Sensor Inspection
Replace the VS sensor with a known good one
(page 22-18).
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle and stop the engine.
Read the DTC with the shift indicator (page 12-13).
Is DTC 66 indicated?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Faulty original VS sensor

DTC 67 (FRONT WHEEL SPEED
SENSOR NO SIGNAL)
• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the front wheel speed sensor 2P
(Blue), ABS modulator 25P and PCM 33P
connectors, and recheck the DTC.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle above 18 km/h (11 mph).
Stop the engine.
Read the DTC with the shift indicator (page 12-13).
Is DTC 67 indicated?

12-90

YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Intermittent failure

P/G

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
2. ABS Problem Code Inspection
Check the ABS problem code (page 20-8).
Does the ABS modulator have any problem
code?
YES

– Follow the problem code index (page 2010).

NO

– GO TO STEP 3.

3. Front Wheel Speed Sensor Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the ABS modulator 25P connector.
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
connectors (page 4-14).
Check for continuity between the ABS modulator
25P connector [1] and test harness [2] terminals.
Connection: Violet/red – A33

A33

V/R

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– Open circuit in the Violet/red wire
[2]

[1]

4. Front Wheel Speed Sensor Line Short Circuit
Inspection
Check for continuity between the test harness [1]
terminal and ground.
Connection: A33 – Ground

[1]

A33

Is there continuity?
YES

– Short circuit in the Violet/red wire

NO

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

DTC 68 (No.1 CLUTCH OPERATION
MALFUNCTION; CLUTCH SLIPS)
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle above 18 km/h (11 mph).
Stop the engine.
Read the DTC with the shift indicator (page 12-13).
Is DTC 66 indicated?
YES

– Refer to DTC 66 troubleshooting (page 1289).

NO

– GO TO STEP 2.

12-91

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
2. Clutch Condition Inspection
Remove the No.1 clutch assembly and measure the
clutch clearance (page 12-105).
Is the clearance within the standard range?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Faulty No.1 clutch assembly

DTC 69 (No.2 CLUTCH OPERATION
MALFUNCTION; CLUTCH SLIPS)
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle above 18 km/h (11 mph).
Stop the engine.
Read the DTC with the shift indicator (page 12-13).
Is DTC 66 indicated?
YES

– Refer to DTC 66 troubleshooting (page 1289).

NO

– GO TO STEP 2.

2. Clutch Condition Inspection
Remove the No.2 clutch assembly and measure the
clutch clearance (page 12-105).
Is the clearance within the standard range?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Faulty No.2 clutch assembly

DTC 71, 72 (INNER, OUTER
MAINSHAFT/COUNTERSHAFT SPEED
RATIO FAILURE)
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck 1
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ", lower the sidestand and check the shift
indicator.
Is DTC 53, 54 or 66 indicated?

12-92

YES

– • Refer to DTC 53 troubleshooting (page
12-79).
• Refer to DTC 54 troubleshooting (page
12-82).
• Refer to DTC 66 troubleshooting (page
12-89).

NO

– GO TO STEP 2.

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
2. DTC Recheck 2
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Test-ride the motorcycle above 18 km/h (11 mph)
for more than 30 seconds.
Stop the engine.
Read the DTC with the shift indicator (page 12-13).
Is DTC 71 or 72 indicated?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Intermittent failure

DTC 84 (CPU IN THE PCM
MALFUNCTION)
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. DTC Recheck
Erase the DTCs (page 12-13).
Read the DTC with the shift indicator (page 12-13).
Is DTC 84 indicated?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Intermittent failure

DTC 1 (SHIFT PEDAL ANGLE SENSOR
(OPTIONAL) MALFUNCTION)
• Before starting this inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the shift pedal angle sensor 3P
(Black) connector and PCM 33P (Gray) connector
and recheck the MIL.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following
procedure.
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
– DCT Shift Pedal (Optional) Registration (page 12118)
• If the DCT shift pedal (optional) is removed from the
vehicle, perform the DCT Shift Pedal Registration
Cancellation (page 12-119).
1. DTC Recheck
Erase the DTC’s (page 12-13).
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Operate the DCT shift pedal up and down several
times with the engine stopped.
Recheck the DTC with the shift indicator (page 1213).
Is the DTC 1 indicated?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Intermittent failure

12-93

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
2. Shift Pedal
Inspection

Angle

Sensor

Input

Voltage

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the shift pedal angle sensor 3P (Black)
connector [1].
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
shift pedal angle sensor 3P (Black) connector
terminals.
Connection: Yellow/red (+) – Green/yellow (–)

[1]

Y/R

G/Y

Is the voltage within 4.75 – 5.25 V?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– GO TO STEP 3.

3. Shift Pedal
Inspection

Angle

Sensor

Open

Circuit

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
connectors (page 4-14).
Check for continuity between the shift pedal angle
sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and test harness [2]
terminals.
Connection: Green/yellow – B22
Yellow/red – B14

B14

Y/R

Is there continuity?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– • Open circuit in Green/yellow wire
• Open circuit in Yellow/red wire

[2]

G/Y

[1]

B22

4. Shift Pedal Angle Sensor Output Line Open
Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Connect the ECM test harness to the PCM
connectors (page 4-14).
Check for continuity between the shift pedal angle
sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and test harness [2]
terminals.
Connection: Yellow/violet – B19

[2]

Y/V

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 5.

NO

– Open circuit in Yellow/violet wire
[1]

12-94

B19

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
5. Shift Pedal Angle Sensor Output Line Short
Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
shift pedal angle sensor 3P (Black) connector [1]
and ground.
Connection: Yellow/violet – Ground

[1]

Is there continuity?
YES

– Short circuit in Yellow/violet wire

NO

– GO TO STEP 6.

Y/V

6. Shift Pedal Angle Sensor Resistance Inspection
Measure the
pedal angle
terminals.
Connection:
Standard:

resistance at the sensor side shift
sensor 3P (Black) connector [1]

[1]

Yellow/red – Blue/green
4 – 6 kΩ (20°C/68°F)

Operate the DCT shift pedal to check that the
resistance changes in accordance with the pedal
operation.
Connection: Yellow/blue – Blue/green

Y/R

Bu/G

Y/Bu

Bu/G

When moving the pedal up:
Resistance increases
When moving the pedal down:
Resistance decreases
Are the resistance inspections normal?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Faulty shift pedal angle sensor, replace the
DCT shift pedal as an assembly.

MODE/SHIFT INDICATOR CIRCUIT
TROUBLESHOOTING
If the mode indicator does not operate, check that the
combination meter shows following when the ignition
switch is turned ON with the engine stop switch " ".

[1]

[2]

– MIL [1] and engine oil pressure indicator [2] stay on.
– Shift indicator "–" [3] is blinking.
– Tachometer, high coolant temperature indicator and
HISS indicator do not come on.
If so, check the TXD/RXD line (page 22-11).
If not so, replace the combination meter.

[3]

12-95

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

AT/MT MODE SWITCH
TROUBLESHOOTING
If the engine can be started but AT/MT mode cannot be
changed, perform this troubleshooting.
• Before starting the inspection, check for loose or
poor contact on the right handlebar switch and PCM
33P connectors, and recheck the AT/MT mode
switch operation.
• If the PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (page 12-120)
1. AT/MT mode
Inspection

switch

Power

Input

Voltage

Disconnect the following:
– Right handlebar switch 6P (Black) connector
(NC700XD) [1]
– Right handlebar switch 7P (Green) connector
(NC700SD) [2]

NC700XD:

NC700SD:

[1]

Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " ".
Measure the voltage between the wire harness side
right handlebar switch connector terminal and
ground.
Connection: Black/white (+) – Ground (–)

[2]

Bl/W

Bl/W

Is there battery voltage?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Open circuit in the Black/white wire
between the right handlebar switch
connector and fuse/relay box (FI fuse)

2. AT/MT mode switch Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Check for continuity between the switch side right
handlebar switch connector [1] terminals in each
switch position.
Connection: Black/white – Blue/black

NC700XD:
Bl/W

Is there continuity with the switch pushed and
no continuity with the switch released?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Faulty AT/MT mode switch
Bu/Bl
[1]
NC700SD:
Bl/W

Bu/Bl
[1]

12-96

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
3. AT/MT mode switch Input Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Black) connector.
Check for continuity between the wire harness side
right handlebar switch connector [1] and PCM 33P
(Black) connector [2] terminals.
Connection: White/yellow – A27
TOOL:
Test probe

NC700XD:
[1]

07ZAJ-RDJA110

[2]

W/Y

Is there continuity?
YES

– Replace the PCM with a known good one,
and recheck.

NO

– Open circuit in the White/yellow wire

A27

NC700SD:
[1]

[2]

W/Y

A27

RIGHT CRANKCASE COVER
REMOVAL
Drain the engine oil (page 3-13).

[1]

Remove the following:
–
–
–
–

Maintenance lid (page 21-6)
Shroud/side cover (NC700XD) (page 2-14)
Shelter/side cover (NC700SD) (page 2-15)
Right engine side cover (page 2-30)

Disconnect the linear solenoid valve 4P (Green)
connector [1] and remove it from the ABS modulator
stay.

Disconnect the CKP sensor 2P (Red) connector [1] and
release the CKP sensor harness.

[1]

12-97

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
Disconnect the clutch EOP sensor 3P connectors [1].

[5]/[6]

Remove the following:
– Bolt and shift spindle angle sensor [2]
– Bolt [3] and wire clip stay [4]
– Bolts [5] and wire clamps [6]
Remove the wire harness and shift spindle angle
sensor wire from the right crankcase cover.

[2]
Do not allow dust or
dirt to enter the oil
passages.

Remove the bolts [1] and hose clamp [2].

[3]/[4]

[1]

[1]
[2]

Remove the right crankcase cover [3].

[3]

Remove the oil joint pipe [1] and dowel pins [2].

[2]

Remove the O-rings from the joint pipe.
Remove the seal rings [3] from the mainshaft end.

[1]

[3]

LINEAR SOLENOID VALVE BODY
DISASSEMBLY
• Keep dust and dirt away from all the parts.
• Be careful not to damage the mating surfaces of the
valve body components.
Remove the right crankcase cover (page 12-97).

[3]

[2]

Remove the right crankcase cover wire clamp bolt [1]
and wire clamp [2].
Remove the wire grommets [3] from the right crankcase
cover.

[1]

12-98

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
Remove the bolts [1] and linear solenoid valve body [2].

[1]

[2]

Remove the separate plate [1] and dowel pins [2],

Remove the bolts [1] and valve body cover [2].

[1]

[2]

[1]

[3]

Remove the wire grommet [3] from the valve body
cover.

[2]

Remove the bolt [1], linear solenoid valves [2] and
stopper plate [3] from the valve body.

[1]

[3]

Remove the stopper plate from the linear solenoid
valves.

[2]

12-99

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
Wash all the parts with a high flash point or nonflammable solvent and blow through all oil passages
with compressed air to clean completely.

[1]

Check the linear solenoid valves [1] and valve body [2]
for scratches, scoring or damage.

[2]

LINEAR SOLENOID VALVE BODY
ASSEMBLY
Clean all the parts with compressed air. Make sure that
there is no dust or lint on any parts.

VALVE BODY

LINEAR SOLENOID VALVES
VALVE BODY COVER

STOPPER PLATE

CKP SENSOR MOUNTING BOLTS

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

SEPARATE PLATE

WIRE CLAMP

DOWEL PIN

Coat linear solenoid valves [1] with engine oil.

[2]

Set the stopper plate [2] into the grooves in the solenoid
valves.

[1]

12-100

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
Install the linear solenoid valves [1] and stopper plate
[2] into the valve body.

[3]

[2]

Apply locking agent to the threads of the stopper plate
bolt [3] (page 12-4).
Install the stopper plate bolt and tighten it.
TORQUE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

[1]

Set the wire grommet [1] into the groove in the body
cover [2].

[1]

Install the valve body cover onto the valve body and
tighten the bolts securely.

[2]

Check the oil filter screen [1] and packing [2] for
damage and replace them if necessary.

[3]

[4]

Install the dowel pins [3] and separate plate [4] onto the
right crankcase cover.

[2]

Install the valve body [1] and bolts [2], and tighten the
bolts in the sequence as shown.

[1]

[2]
4
2
6
1
5
3
[1]

12-101

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
Apply liquid sealant (Three bond 1207B or equivalent)
to the CKP sensor wire grommet and linear solenoid
valve wire grommet sealing surface.

[1]/[2]

[4]

Set the linear solenoid valve wire grommet [1] and CKP
sensor wire grommet [2] into the groove in the right
crankcase cover.
Apply locking agent to the threads of the right
crankcase cover wire clamp bolts [3] (page 12-4).
Install the wire clamp [4] and tighten bolts.
TORQUE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Install the right crankcase cover (page 12-103).
[3]

OIL GUIDE COLLAR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION
Remove the right crankcase cover (page 12-97).

[1]

Remove the snap ring [1] from the right crankcase
cover.

Remove the oil guide collar [1] from the right crankcase
cover with the special tool.
TOOL:
Bearing remover, 20 mm [2]

[2]

07931-MA70000

Remove the O-rings from the oil guide collar.

[1]

Coat new O-rings [1] with engine oil and install them
into the grooves in the oil guide collar [2].

[1]

Install the oil guide collar into the right crankcase cover
until it is seated.

[2]

12-102

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
Install the snap ring [1] into the right crankcase cover
groove with the chamfered edge facing in.

[1]

Install the right crankcase cover (page 12-103).

INSTALLATION
Do not allow dust or
dirt to enter the oil
passages.

Coat new O-rings [1] with engine oil and install them
onto the oil joint pipe [2].

[2]

Install the oil joint pipe into the oil pump.

[1]

Install the dowel pins [1].

[1]

Apply engine oil to new seal rings [2] and install them
into the mainshaft grooves.
Push in the seal rings to seat them into the grooves.

[2]

Clean the right crankcase cover mating surfaces
thoroughly.
Apply liquid sealant (Three Bond 1207B or equivalent)
to the right crankcase cover mating surface as shown.

12-103

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
Install the right crankcase cover [1].

[2]

[3]

Install the bolts [2] with the hose clamp [3] and tighten
them in a crisscross pattern in 2 or 3 steps.

[1]

Route the wire harness and shift spindle angle sensor
wire on the right crankcase cover properly (page 1-25).

Align

Coat a new O-ring [1] with engine oil and install it onto
the shift spindle angle sensor [2].
Install the shift spindle angle sensor by aligning the flat
surfaces of the sensor and spindle.

[1]

[2]

Install the following:

[1]/[2]

– Wire clamps [1] and bolts [2]
– Wire clip stay [3] and bolt [4]
Install the shift spindle angle sensor bolt [5] and tighten
it.
TORQUE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Connect the clutch EOP sensor 3P connectors [6].
(Connector with no mark to the upper sensor, connector
with "P" mark to the middle sensor and connector with
"1" mark to the lower sensor.)
[5]

[3]/[4]

[6]

Connect the CKP sensor 2P (Red) connector [1].

[1]

12-104

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
Connect the linear solenoid valve 4P (Green) connector
[1] and install it to the ABS modulator stay.

[1]

Install the following:
–
–
–
–

Maintenance lid (page 21-6)
Shroud/side cover (NC700XD) (page 2-14)
Shelter/side cover (NC700SD) (page 2-15)
Right engine side cover (page 2-30)

Fill the engine with the recommended engine oil and
check that there are no oil leaks (page 3-12).

DUAL CLUTCH
REMOVAL
Remove the right crankcase cover (page 12-97).

[2]

[1]

Align the gear teeth of the primary drive gear and subgear [1] by prying the gears through the holes [2] and
hold them with a 6 mm socket bolt [3].

[3]

Remove the ball bearing [1].

[1]

Remove the dual clutch assembly [2] from the
mainshaft.

[2]

Remove the seal rings [1] from the mainshaft grooves.

[1]

12-105

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
DISASSEMBLY
Remove clutch guide 1 [1], clutch guide 2 [2] and
washers [3] from the clutches.

[1]

[2]

Remove the clutch assemblies [1] and O-rings [2] from
the primary driven gear.

[3]
[1]

• Do not disassemble the clutch assembly.
• The No.1 clutch assembly (for inner mainshaft) and
No.2 clutch assembly (for outer mainshaft) are the
same parts.

[2]

CLUTCH CLEARANCE INSPECTION
Set a dial indicator on the end plate [1] with the plate
bottomed.
Measure the clearance by lifting the end plate against
the snap ring and record it.
Perform this inspection at three points in 120° apart.
SERVICE LIMIT: 2.0 mm (0.08 in)
If the measured value exceeds the service limit, replace
the clutch assembly.

120°

120°
120°
[1]

ASSEMBLY
Coat new O-rings [1] with engine oil and install them
into the grooves in the primary driven gear.

[2]

Install the clutch assemblies [2] onto the primary driven
gear.

[1]

12-106

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
Apply engine oil to the needle bearings in the primary
driven gear.

[3]

The primary driven gear has the index line [1] on its
flange for the installation direction. The dual clutch
assembly should be installed with the index line facing
the outside.
Line up the clutch disc tabs with the two wide grooves
[2] aligned as shown.
Install the washer [3] onto the clutch assembly.
Install clutch guide 1 [4] into the clutch on the index line
side by aligning the gear teeth with the clutch disc tabs.
Turn over the dual clutch assembly while holding clutch
guide 1.

[1]

[2]

[4]

[2]

Apply engine oil to the needle bearings in the primary
driven gear.
Line up the clutch disc tabs with the two wide grooves
[1] aligned as shown.
Install the washer [2] onto the clutch assembly.
Install clutch guide 2 [3] into the clutch by aligning the
gear teeth with the clutch disc tabs.

[1]

[3]

INSTALLATION
Apply engine oil to new seal rings [1] and install them
into the mainshaft grooves.
Push in the seal rings to seat them into the grooves.

Install the dual clutch assembly [1] onto the mainshaft,
being careful not to damage the seal rings.

[1]

[2]

Install the ball bearing [2] onto clutch guide 1 with the
marked side facing out.

[1]

12-107

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
Remove the 6 mm socket bolt [1] to free the primary
drive gear and sub-gear [2].

[2]

Install the right crankcase cover (page 12-103).

[1]

PRIMARY DRIVE GEAR/CKP SENSOR
ROTOR
REMOVAL
Remove the right crankcase cover (page 12-97).

[4]

[2]

[3]

[5]

Hold the primary drive gear and sub-gear with a 6 mm
socket bolt (page 12-105).
Install the special tool between the primary drive and
driven gears, and loosen the primary drive gear bolt [1].
TOOL:
Gear holder, M2.5 [2]
Do not separate the
sub-gear from the
primary drive gear
unless necessary.

07724-0010100

Remove the primary drive gear bolt, washer [3], CKP
sensor rotor [4] and primary drive gear/sub-gear [5]
from the crankshaft.
[1]

INSTALLATION
Install the primary drive gear/sub-gear [1] and CKP
sensor rotor [2] onto the crankshaft by aligning their
wide grooves with the wide tooth.

[2]

[1]

Align

Apply engine oil to the primary drive gear bolt threads
and seating surface.
Install the washer [1] and primary drive gear bolt [2].

[2]

[1]

Install the special tool between the primary drive and
driven gears, and tighten the primary drive gear bolt.
TOOL:
Gear holder, M2.5 [3]

07724-0010100

TORQUE: 93 N·m (9.5 kgf·m, 69 lbf·ft)
Remove the 6 mm socket bolt [4] to free the primary
drive gear and sub-gear.
Install the right crankcase cover (page 12-103).

12-108

[3]

[4]

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

SHIFT CONTROL MOTOR/REDUCTION
GEARS
REMOVAL
Remove the following:

[3]

– Guard pipe (page 2-30)
– Left rear cover (page 2-30)
Disconnect the shift control motor 2P (Black) connector
[1].
Remove the bolts [2] and shift control motor [3].

[2]

Remove the bolt [1], wire clip stay [2] and TR sensor [3].

[1]

[3]

[1]

[2]

Remove the bolts [1] and reduction gear cover [2].

[1]

[2]

Remove the dowel pins [1] and gasket [2].

[3]

[2]

Remove the reduction gears [3].

[1]

12-109

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
INSTALLATION

O-RING

REDUCTION GEAR
CASE COVER

TR SENSOR

GASKET

REDUCTION GEAR C
REDUCTION GEAR B
REDUCTION GEAR A

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

O-RING
14 N·m (1.4 kgf·m, 10 lbf·ft)
14 N·m (1.4 kgf·m, 10 lbf·ft)

Apply 2 – 4 g (0.07 – 0.14 oz) of specified grease to the
reduction gear journals and teeth.

SHIFT CONTROL MOTOR
Align

[2]

[4]

[1]

[3]

SPECIFIED GREASE: Templex N3 grease (ESSO)
Install reduction gear B [1] and align the gear ends with
the ribs of the crankcase. Then install reduction gear C
[2] so the punch marks [3] on the gear and shift spindle
line up as shown.
Install reduction gear A [4].

Install the dowel pins [1] and a new gasket [2].

Align

[2]

[1]

12-110

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
Install the reduction gear cover [1] and bolts [2], and
tighten the bolts.

[2]

TORQUE: 14 N·m (1.4 kgf·m, 10 lbf·ft)

[1]

Coat a new O-ring [1] with engine oil and install it into
the groove in the TR sensor [2].

[1]

Install the TR sensor into the crankcase by aligning the
flat surfaces of the sensor and shift drum end.

[2]

Install the wire clip stay [1] and TR sensor bolt [2], and
tighten the bolt.

Align
[2]

TORQUE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

[1]

Coat a new O-ring [1] with engine oil and install it into
the groove in the shift control motor [2].

[1]

[2]

12-111

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
Install the shift control motor [1] and bolts [2], and
tighten the bolts.

[1]

TORQUE: 14 N·m (1.4 kgf·m, 10 lbf·ft)
Connect the shift control motor 2P (Black) connector
[3].
Install the following:
– Guard pipe (page 2-30)
– Left rear cover (page 2-30)

[2]

[3]

GEARSHIFT LINKAGE
REMOVAL
Remove the following:
–
–
–
–

[2]

Shift control motor/reduction gears (page 12-109)
Dual clutch (page 12-105)
Gearshift spindle [1]
Washer [2]

[1]

– Drum shifter collar [1]
– Bolts [2]
– Drum shifter guide plate/drum shifter assembly [3]

[2]

[3]

–
–
–
–

Guide plate distance collar [1]
Stopper arm side collar [2]
Shift drum center bolt [3]
Shift drum center [4]

[1]
[1]

[4]

[3]

12-112

[2]

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
–
–
–
–
–

Shift drum stopper arm [1]
Stopper arm return spring [2]
Stopper arm distance collar [3]
Shift drum center dowel pins [4]
8 x 20 mm dowel pins [5] if necessary

[4]

[3]

[5]

[1]

[2]

INSPECTION
Check the gearshift spindle [1] and gearshift arm [2] for
wear or damage.
Check the return spring [3] for fatigue or damage.

[3]

[1]

[2]

Check the drum shifter guide plate [1], drum shifter [2],
ratchet pawls [3] and plungers [4] for wear or damage.
Check the plunger springs [5] for fatigue or damage.

[3]

[4]

[5]

[1]

[2]

INSTALLATION
Install the following:
–
–
–
–
–

[2]

[3]

8 x 20 mm dowel pins [1]
Shift drum center dowel pins [2]
Stopper arm distance collar [3]
Stopper arm return spring [4]
Shift drum stopper arm [5]

[1]

[5]

[4]

12-113

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
Hold the shift drum stopper arm [1] with a screwdriver
and install the shift drum center [2] by aligning the
groove [3] with the dowel pin [4].

[3]

[4]

[2]

Apply locking agent to the threads of the shift drum
center bolt [1] (page 12-4).
Install the shift drum center bolt and tighten it.

[1]

[3]

TORQUE: 23 N·m (2.3 kgf·m, 17 lbf·ft)
Install the stopper arm side collar [2] and guide plate
distance collar [3].

[1]

Install the plunger springs [1], plungers [2] and ratchet
pawls [3] into the drum shifter [4] and set them in the
drum shifter guide plate [5].

[3]

[2]
[2]

[1]

[5]

[4]

Install the drum shifter guide plate/drum shifter
assembly [1].

[2]

Apply locking agent to the threads of the guide plate
bolts [2] (page 12-4).
Install the guide plate bolts and tighten them.
TORQUE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Install the drum shifter collar [3] onto the drum shifter.

[1]

12-114

[3]

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
Install the washer [1] onto the gearshift spindle [2] and
insert the spindle into the crankcase while aligning the
return spring ends with spring pin and the spindle arm
hole with the drum shifter collar.

[1]

Align

Install the following:
– Dual clutch (page 12-107)
– Reduction gears/shift control motor (page 12-110)

[2]

Align

MAINSHAFT SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
The mainshaft sensors and VS sensor are the same
parts.
Inner mainshaft
sensor:

Remove the luggage box (page 2-19).

[1]

Disconnect the outer mainshaft sensor 3P (Black)
connector [1] from the outer mainshaft sensor [2].
Disconnect the inner mainshaft sensor 3P (Black)
connector [3] from the inner mainshaft sensor [4].

[5]
[2]

Remove the bolt [5] and mainshaft sensor.
Remove the O-ring [6] from the mainshaft sensor.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

[6]

• Replace the O-ring with a new one.
• Apply engine oil to a new O-ring.

[5]
[4]
[6]

[3]

TR SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the following:

[1]

– Center cross plate (page 2-32)
– Left rear cover (page 2-30)
Disconnect the TR sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
remove it from the ABS modulator stay.

12-115

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
Remove the wire band [1] and release the wires and
hose from the stay [2].

Remove the bolt [1], wire clip stay [2] and TR sensor [3].

[1]

[3]

[2]

[1]

Remove the O-ring [4] from the TR sensor.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
[4]

• Replace the O-ring with a new one.
• Apply engine oil to a new O-ring.
• Align the flat surfaces of the TR sensor and shift
drum end.
TORQUE:
TR sensor bolt:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
[2]

Align

SHIFT SPINDLE ANGLE SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the following:
– Shroud/side cover (NC700XD) (page 2-14)
– Side cowl (NC700SD) (page 2-13)
– Right engine side cover (page 2-30)
Disconnect the shift spindle angle sensor 3P (Gray)
connector [1] and remove it from the ABS modulator
stay.

[1]

Remove the bolts [1] and clamps [2].

[1]/[2]

Remove the bolts [3] and wire clip stay [4].
Remove the shift spindle angle sensor wire clip [5] from
the clip stay.
Remove the shift spindle angle sensor bolt [6] and shift
spindle angle sensor [7].
[7]

[6]

12-116

[3]/[4]

[5]

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
Remove the O-ring [1] from the shift spindle angle
sensor [2].

Align

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Replace the O-ring with a new one.
• Apply engine oil to a new O-ring.
• Align the flat surfaces of the shift spindle angle
sensor and gearshift spindle end.
• Route the wire harness properly (page 1-25).
TORQUE:
Shift spindle angle sensor bolt:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

[1]

[2]

CLUTCH EOP SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the lower cowl (page 2-29).
The No.1 clutch
EOP sensor [1],
clutch line EOP
sensor [2] and No.2
clutch EOP sensor
[3] are the same
parts.

[3]

Disconnect the 3P connector [4] from the clutch EOP
sensor.
Remove the clutch EOP sensor and O-rings from the
right crankcase cover.

[2]
[1]

[4]

Coat a new O-ring [1] with engine oil and install it into
the right crankcase cover.

[2]

Install the clutch EOP sensor [2] and tighten it.
TORQUE: 19.6 N·m (2.0 kgf·m, 14 lbf·ft)
Connect the 3P connector to the proper sensor.
Each sensor wires has the following identification mark
near the connector.
• 1: No.1 clutch (lower) EOP sensor
• P: Clutch line (middle) EOP sensor
• No mark: No.2 clutch (upper) EOP sensor
Install the lower cowl (page 2-29).

[1]

12-117

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)

EOT SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Disconnect the EOT sensor 2P (Black) connector [1].

[1]

[2]

Remove the EOT sensor [2] and sealing washer [3]
from the crankcase.
Apply engine oil to the EOT sensor threads and seating
surface.
Install the EOT sensor with a new sealing washer and
tighten it.
TORQUE: 14 N·m (1.4 kgf·m, 10 lbf·ft)
Connect the EOT sensor 2P (Black) connector.

[3]

DCT SHIFT PEDAL (OPTIONAL)
REGISTRATION (TO ENABLE THE
PEDAL)
• The following registration procedure must be
performed in order to enable the optional shift pedal.
• Make sure that the CLUTCH INITIALIZE LEARNING
(PCM) (page 12-120) is complete before starting the
registration.
• The registration will fail if any of the following
condition presents during the procedure.
– The vehicle is moved.
– The engine is started.
– The transmission is in gear.
– The shift pedal is operated incorrectly.
– The shift pedal angle sensor 3P (black) connector
is disconnected.
1. Install the shift pedal to the vehicle and connect the
shift pedal angle sensor 3P (black) connector.
2. Turn the ignition switch ON.
After 2 seconds, "S" [1] and "D" [2] indicators will
start short blinking (0.5 seconds) simultaneously.

Indicators start blinking
simultaneously.

• The short blinking lasts 5 seconds.
Within 5 seconds after blinking starts, move the shift
pedal [3] up and hold for 1 second.
Within 5 seconds after moving the shift pedal up,
move it down and hold for 1 second.
[2]

[1]

1: UP for 1 second.

[3]
2: DOWN for 1 second.

12-118

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
3. If the "S" and "D" indicators start short blinking (0.5
seconds) alternately, registration is successful.

Successful:

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
• If the "S" and "D" indicators go OFF during the
procedure, registration is unsuccessful. Turn the
ignition switch OFF and perform the registration
procedure from step 2 again.
Indicators blink alternately.

Unsuccessful:

Both go OFF

REGISTRATION CANCELLATION (TO
DISABLE THE PEDAL)
• The registration must be cancelled after removing
the optional shift pedal from the vehicle. If the
registration is not cancelled, DTC 1-1 (DTC 1 blink)
"SHIFT PEDAL ANGLE SENSOR MALFUNCTION"
will be indicated.
• The cancellation will fail if any of the following
condition presents during the procedure.
– The vehicle is moved.
– The engine is started.
– The transmission is in gear.
– The shift switch (+)/(–) is operated incorrectly.
– The shift pedal angle sensor 3P (black) connector
is connected.
1. Remove the shift pedal from the vehicle and
disconnect the shift pedal angle sensor 3P (black)
connector.
2. While pressing down and holding the shift switch (+)
[1] and shift switch (–) [2], turn the ignition switch
ON.
The "S" [3] and "D" [4] indicators will start short
blinking (0.5 seconds) simultaneously.

[1]

• Do not release the shift switch (+) and shift switch
(–) until the successful pattern described in the next
step is indicated.
[2]

[4]

[3]

12-119

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
3. After 5 seconds, the "S" and "D" indicators will start
short blinking (0.5 seconds) alternately.

Successful:

If so, cancellation is successful.
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
• If the "S" and "D" indicators go OFF during the
procedure, cancellation is unsuccessful. Turn the
ignition switch OFF and perform the cancellation
procedure from step 1 again.

Indicators blink alternately.

Unsuccessful:

Both go OFF

CLUTCH INITIALIZE LEARNING (PCM)
• If the PCM and/or clutch assembly are replaced,
perform this procedure.
• Before starting this procedure, check the following:
– PGM-FI system and DCT system have no DTC.
– Engine idle speed is normal.
– Transmission is in neutral and cooling fan stops.
• Do not operate the throttle during clutch initialize
learning
1. Warm up the engine to the normal operating
temperature (engine oil temperature: 50 – 110°C/
122 – 230°F) and stop it.

Extremely low oil
temperature:
[1]

Low oil temperature:
[1]

If the PCM is replaced with a new one, the "D" and "S"
indicators [1] come on to indicate that the clutch
initialize learning is necessary when the ignition switch
is turned ON. Further the large "L" [2] (extremely low oil
temperature) or small "L" [3] (low oil temperature) is
displayed on the shift indicator to indicate that the
engine warming up is necessary if it is not warmed.

[2]

12-120

[3]

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
2. Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop
switch " " while pushing the D switch [1] of the N-D
shift switch. The MIL [2] will come on.
Release the D switch after the MIL goes off.
• When only the dual clutch assembly is replaced:
No indication appears on the shift indicator [3].
• When the PCM is replaced:
The "D" and "S" indicators [4] come on.
[1]
[2]

[4]

[3]

3. Operate the N-D shift switch [1] in the sequence as
follows:
–
–
–
–
–

Push the D switch
Push the D switch
Push the N switch
Push the D switch
Push the N switch

• When only the dual clutch assembly is replaced:
The PCM is ready to clutch initialize learning when
the "D" and "S" indicators [2] lights, and the "–" [3] is
displayed on the shift indicator and blinks at interval
of 2 seconds.
• When the PCM is replaced:
The PCM is ready to clutch initialize learning when
the "–" is displayed on the shift indicator and blinks
at interval of 2 seconds.

[1]
[2]
[3]

When the engine is not warmed up enough, the large
"L" [4] (extremely low oil temperature) or small "L" [5]
(low oil temperature) is displayed on the shift indicator.
If so, warm up it until the "L" on the shift indicator goes
off. Stop the engine and perform the steps 2 and 3
again.

[4]

[5]

12-121

dummyhead

DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT) (NC700XD/SD)
4. Start the engine and let it idle. The "–" [1] on the shift
indicator starts blinking at interval of 2 seconds. The
Clutch Initialize Learning is successful, when the "–",
"D" and "S" indicators [2] go off.
Stop the engine.
The clutch initialize learning is unsuccessful, if the "–"
starts blinking at interval of 0.5 second or it goes off,
and the "D" and "S" indicators stay on. Perform the
initialize learning procedure from step 2 again.
5. Stop the engine.
6. Restart the engine, push the D switch of the N-D
shift switch and check that the "D" indicator comes
on.

12-122

[1]

[2]

dummytext

13. ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH

COMPONENT LOCATION ··························13-2

FLYWHEEL ················································· 13-7

SERVICE INFORMATION ···························13-4

STARTER CLUTCH ·································· 13-10

TROUBLESHOOTING·································13-4

STATOR ···················································· 13-13

ALTERNATOR COVER·······························13-5

13

13-1

dummyhead

ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH

COMPONENT LOCATION
ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH

NC700X/XA/S/SA:

157 N·m (16.0 kgf·m, 116 lbf·ft)

13-2

dummyhead

ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH
NC700XD/SD:

157 N·m (16.0 kgf·m, 116 lbf·ft)

13-3

dummyhead

ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH

SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
•
•
•
•

This section covers service of the alternator and starter clutch. All service can be done with the engine installed in the frame.
For alternator inspection (page 21-9).
For CKP sensor inspection (page 5-6).
For starter motor service (page 6-8).

SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM
Starter driven gear boss O.D.
Starter clutch outer I.D.

STANDARD
57.749 – 57.768 (2.2736 – 2.2743)
74.412 – 74.442 (2.9296 – 2.9308)

Unit: mm (in)
SERVICE LIMIT
57.73 (2.273)
74.46 (2.931)

TORQUE VALUES

Flywheel mounting bolt

1

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
12

Starter clutch socket bolt

6

8

30 (3.1, 22)

Alternator stator mounting bolt

4

6

10 (1.0, 7)

Alternator wire clamp bolt

1

6

10 (1.0, 7)

ITEM

Q'TY

TROUBLESHOOTING
Starter motor turns, but engine does not turn
• Faulty starter clutch
• Damaged starter reduction gear/shaft
• Damaged starter idle gear/shaft
• Damaged or faulty starter motor pinion gear
• Damaged starter driven gear

13-4

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
157 (16.0, 116)

REMARKS
Left hand thread
Apply engine oil to the threads and
seating surface.
Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip

dummyhead

ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH

ALTERNATOR COVER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the following:
–
–
–
–

[3]

[1]

[3]

Shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA/XD) (page 2-14)
Shelter/side cover (NC700S/SA/SD) (page 2-15)
Left rear cover (page 2-29)
Guard pipe (NC700XD/SD) (page 2-30)

Remove the bolt [1] and rear brake reservoir stay/
reservoir [2].

Align

Remove the socket bolts [3].

[2]

Lower the rear fender B [1].

[2]

[1]

Disconnect the alternator 3P (Black) connector [2].

Release the sidestand switch wire harness clamp [1].

[1]

Release the alternator wire harness [2].

[2]

13-5

dummyhead

ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH
Release the battery box drain hose (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
[1] from the stay.
Loosen the alternator cover bolts [2] in a crisscross
pattern in 2 or 3 steps, and remove the bolts and stays
[3].

NC700X/XA/S/SA:

[3]

[4]
[2]

Remove the alternator cover [4].
The alternator cover (stator) is magnetically attracted to
the flywheel, be careful during removal.

[1]
NC700XD/SD:
[4]

[2]

Remove the dowel pins [1], oil orifice [2] and O-ring [3].

[3]

[1]

[2]/[3]

Clean off any sealant from the alternator cover mating
surfaces.

[1]

Do not loosen the alternator cover sealing bolt [1].

[1]

13-6

dummyhead

ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Apply liquid sealant (Three bond 1207B or
equivalent) to the alternator cover mating surface as
shown.
• Apply liquid sealant (Three bond 1207B or
equivalent) to the alternator wire grommet sealing
surface.
• Do not apply more liquid sealant than necessary.
• Replace the O-ring with a new one.
• Route the cables and wire harness properly (page 125).
• Align the rear brake reservoir stay with the frame
tab.
Fill the engine with the recommended engine oil and
check that there are no oil leaks (page 3-12).

FLYWHEEL
REMOVAL
Remove the alternator cover (page 13-5).

[4]

[2]

Remove the starter idle gear shaft [1] and starter idle
gear [2].
Remove the starter reduction gear shaft [3] and starter
reduction gear [4].

[3]

Hold the flywheel [1] using the special tool and loosen
the flywheel mounting bolt [2].
TOOL:
Flywheel holder [3]

[3]

[1]

[2]/[4]

07725-0040001

The flywheel mounting bolt has left hand threads.
Remove the flywheel mounting bolt and washer [4].

[1]

Remove the flywheel [1] using the special tool.
TOOL:
Rotor puller [2]

[1]

07933-3290001

[2]

13-7

dummyhead

ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH
Remove the washer [1] and needle bearing [2].

[2]

[3]

Remove the woodruff key [3].
Be careful not to damage the key groove and
crankshaft.

[1]

INSPECTION
STARTER REDUCTION GEAR/STARTER IDLE
GEAR
Check the starter reduction gear [1] and shaft [2] for
wear or damage and replace it if necessary.
Check the starter idle gear [3] and shaft [4] for wear or
damage and replace it if necessary.

[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

NEEDLE BEARING
Check the needle bearing [1] for abnormal wear or
damage.

[1]

Replace it if necessary.

STARTER CLUTCH OPERATION
Check the operation of the one-way clutch by turning
the starter driven gear [1].
You should be able to turn the starter driven gear
counterclockwise smoothly, but the gear should not turn
clockwise.
For starter clutch service (page 13-10).

13-8

[1]

dummyhead

ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH
INSTALLATION
Install the woodruff key [1].

[2]

[1]

Be careful not to damage the key groove and
crankshaft.
Apply engine oil to the needle bearing rotating area.
Install the needle bearing [2] and washer [3].

[3]

Clean any oil from the crankshaft tapered area and
flywheel thoroughly.

[1]

Install the flywheel [1] to the crankshaft.
Align

Align the woodruff key with flywheel keyway.

Apply engine oil to the flywheel mounting bolt threads
and seating surface.

[4]

[1]/[2]

Install the washer [1] and flywheel mounting bolt [2].
Hold the flywheel [3] using the special tool and tighten
the flywheel mounting bolt to the specified torque.
TOOL:
Flywheel holder [4]

07725-0040001

TORQUE: 157 N·m (16.0 kgf·m, 116 lbf·ft)
The flywheel mounting bolt has left hand threads.
[3]

Apply molybdenum oil solution to the starter reduction
and idle gear shaft outer surface.

[1]

[3]

[5]

Install the starter reduction gear [1] and shaft [2].
Install the starter idle gear [3] and shaft [4].
Install the starter reduction gear with its "OUT" mark [5]
facing out.
Install the alternator cover (page 13-5).

[2]

[4]

13-9

dummyhead

ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH

STARTER CLUTCH
REMOVAL
Remove the flywheel (page 13-7).

[1]

Remove the starter driven gear [1] while turning the
starter driven gear counterclockwise.

Hold the flywheel [1] using the special tool and remove
the starter clutch socket bolt [2].
TOOL:
Flywheel holder [3]

[1]

[3]

07725-0040001

[2]

Remove the starter clutch assembly [1].

Remove the starter one-way clutch [1] from the starter
clutch outer [2].

13-10

[1]

[2]

[1]

dummyhead

ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH
INSPECTION
Check the starter driven gear for abnormal wear or
damage.
Measure the starter driven gear boss O.D.
SERVICE LIMIT: 57.73 mm (2.273 in)

Check the starter clutch outer [1] inner surface for
abnormal wear or damage and replace them if
necessary.
Measure the clutch outer I.D.
SERVICE LIMIT: 74.46 mm (2.931 in)
Check the starter one-way clutch [2] for abnormal wear
or damage and replace them if necessary.

[1]

[2]

INSTALLATION

STARTER DRIVEN GEAR
STARTER CLUTCH OUTER
ONE-WAY CLUTCH

FLYWHEEL
30 N·m (3.1 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)

13-11

dummyhead

ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH
Apply engine oil to the starter one-way clutch [1] sliding
surface.

[1]

Install the starter one-way clutch to the starter clutch
outer [2].

[2]

Install the starter clutch assembly [1].

Hold the flywheel [1] using the special tool.
TOOL:
Flywheel holder [2]

[1]

[1]

[2]

07725-0040001

Apply locking agent to the starter clutch socket bolt
threads (page 13-4).
Install and tighten the starter clutch socket bolt [3] to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 30 N·m (3.1 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)

[3]

Install the starter driven gear [1] into the starter clutch
outer while turning the starter driven gear
counterclockwise.
Recheck the one-way clutch operation (page 13-8).
Install the flywheel (page 13-9).

13-12

[1]

dummyhead

ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH

STATOR
REMOVAL
Remove the alternator cover (page 13-5).

[5]

Remove the alternator wire clamp bolt [1], wire clamp
[2] and grommet [3] from the alternator cover.
Remove the alternator stator mounting bolts [4] and
stator [5].
[3]
[1]

[2]

[4]

INSTALLATION
10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)

10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)

WIRE CLAMP
STATOR

ALTERNATOR COVER

Install the stator [1] to the alternator cover.

[3]

[1]

Apply locking agent to the alternator stator mounting
bolt threads (page 13-4).
Tighten the alternator stator mounting bolts [2] to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)
Apply liquid sealant (Three bond 1207B or equivalent)
to the alternator wire grommet [3] sealing surface, then
install it into the alternator cover groove securely.

[5]

Apply locking agent to the alternator wire clamp bolt
threads (page 13-4).
Install the wire clamp [4] and alternator wire clamp bolt
[5].

[4]

[2]

Tighten the bolt to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)
Install the alternator cover (page 13-5).

13-13

dummyhead

MEMO

dummytext

14. CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER

COMPONENT LOCATION ··························14-2

TRANSMISSION (NC700X/XA/S/SA) ········· 14-8

SERVICE INFORMATION ···························14-4

TRANSMISSION (NC700XD/SD)·············· 14-17

TROUBLESHOOTING·································14-6

BALANCER··············································· 14-26

CRANKCASE SEPARATION······················14-7

CRANKCASE ASSEMBLY ······················· 14-28

14

14-1

dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER

COMPONENT LOCATION
CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER

NC700X/XA/S/SA:
39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft)
24 N·m (2.4 kgf·m, 18 lbf·ft)

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

20 N·m (2.0 kgf·m, 15 lbf·ft) + 150°
24 N·m (2.4 kgf·m, 18 lbf·ft)
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
24 N·m (2.4 kgf·m, 18 lbf·ft)

14-2

dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
NC700XD/SD:
24 N·m (2.4 kgf·m, 18 lbf·ft)
20 N·m (2.0 kgf·m, 15 lbf·ft) + 150°

39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft)
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
24 N·m (2.4 kgf·m, 18 lbf·ft)

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
24 N·m (2.4 kgf·m, 18 lbf·ft)

14-3

dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER

SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
• The crankcase must be separated to service the following:
– Transmission
– Balancer
– Crankshaft (page 15-5)
– Piston/cylinder (page 15-14)
• The following components must be removed before separating the crankcase:
– Engine (page 16-5)
– Clutch (page 11-7)
– Primary drive gear/CKP sensor rotor (page 11-15)
– Gearshift linkage (page 11-16)
– Flywheel (page 13-7)
– Cylinder head (page 10-16)
– Oil strainer (page 9-11)
– Oil pump (page 9-6)
– Engine oil filter (page 3-13)
– Starter motor (page 6-8)
– EOP switch (page 22-20)
– VS sensor (page 22-18)
– Neutral switch (page 22-28)
• Be careful not to damage the crankcase mating surfaces when servicing.
• Prior to assembling the crankcase halves, apply sealant to their mating surfaces. Wipe off excess sealant thoroughly.

GENERAL (NC700XD/SD)
• The crankcase must be separated to service the following:
– Transmission
– Balancer
– Crankshaft (page 15-5)
– Piston/cylinder (page 15-14)
• The following components must be removed before separating the crankcase:
– Engine (page 16-9)
– Engine oil filter (page 3-13)
– EOP switch (page 22-20)
– Starter motor (page 6-8)
– Cylinder head (page 10-16)
– Flywheel (page 13-7)
– Shift control motor/reduction gears (page 12-109)
– Neutral switch (page 22-28)
– Dual clutch (page 12-105)
– Primary drive gear/CKP sensor rotor (page 12-108)
– Gearshift linkage (page 12-112)
– Oil pump (page 9-8)
– Mainshaft sensors (page 12-115)
– VS sensor (page 22-18)
– EOT sensor (page 12-118)
– Oil strainer (page 9-11)
• Be careful not to damage the crankcase mating surfaces when servicing.
• Prior to assembling the crankcase halves, apply sealant to their mating surfaces. Wipe off excess sealant thoroughly.

14-4

dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
SPECIFICATIONS (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Transmission

ITEM
Gear I.D.
Gear bushing
O.D.
Gear-to-bushing
clearance
Gear bushing I.D.

Shift fork,
fork shaft

Mainshaft O.D.
Countershaft O.D.
Bushing-to-shaft
clearance
Fork I.D.
Claw thickness
Shift fork shaft O.D.

STANDARD
28.000 – 28.021 (1.1024 – 1.1032)
31.000 – 31.025 (1.2205 – 1.2215)
27.959 – 27.980 (1.1007 – 1.1016)
30.955 – 30.980 (1.2187 – 1.2197)
30.950 – 30.975 (1.2185 – 1.2195)
0.020 – 0.062 (0.0008 – 0.0024)
0.020 – 0.070 (0.0008 – 0.0028)
0.025 – 0.075 (0.0010 – 0.0030)
25.000 – 25.021 (0.9843 – 0.9851)
27.985 – 28.006 (1.1018 – 1.1026)
24.972 – 24.993 (0.9831 – 0.9840)
27.967 – 27.980 (1.1011 – 1.1016)
0.007 – 0.049 (0.0003 – 0.0020)
0.005 – 0.039 (0.0002 – 0.0015)
12.000 – 12.018 (0.4724 – 0.4731)
5.93 – 6.00 (0.233 – 0.236)
11.957 – 11.968 (0.4707 – 0.4712)

Unit: mm (in)
SERVICE LIMIT
28.04 (1.104)
31.04 (1.222)
27.94 (1.100)
30.93 (1.218)
30.93 (1.218)
0.08 (0.003)
0.10 (0.004)
0.11 (0.004)
25.04 (0.986)
28.02 (1.103)
24.95 (0.982)
27.95 (1.100)
0.09 (0.004)
0.06 (0.002)
12.03 (0.474)
5.9 (0.23)
11.95 (0.470)

M5
M6
C1
C2
C3, C4
M5
M6
C1
C2
C3, C4
M5
M6
C1
C2
C3, C4
M5
M6
C1
C2

STANDARD
33.000 – 33.025 (1.2992 – 1.3002)
43.000 – 43.025 (1.6929 – 1.6939)
31.010 – 31.035 (1.2209 – 1.2218)
25.000 – 25.021 (0.9843 – 0.9851)
31.000 – 31.025 (1.2205 – 1.2215)
32.955 – 32.980 (1.2974 – 1.2984)
42.950 – 42.975 (1.6909 – 1.6919)
30.970 – 30.995 (1.2193 – 1.2203)
24.959 – 24.980 (0.9826 – 0.9835)
30.950 – 30.975 (1.2185 – 1.2195)
0.020 – 0.070 (0.0008 – 0.0028)
0.025 – 0.075 (0.0010 – 0.0030)
0.015 – 0.065 (0.0006 – 0.0026)
0.020 – 0.062 (0.0008 – 0.0024)
0.025 – 0.075 (0.0010 – 0.0030)
29.985 – 30.006 (1.1805 – 1.1813)
40.007 – 40.028 (1.5751 – 1.5759)
28.000 – 28.021 (1.1024 – 1.1032)
21.985 – 22.006 (0.8655 – 0.8664)

Unit: mm (in)
SERVICE LIMIT
33.04 (1.301)
43.04 (1.694)
31.06 (1.223)
25.03 (0.985)
31.04 (1.222)
32.93 (1.296)
42.93 (1.690)
30.94 (1.218)
24.94 (0.982)
30.93 (1.218)
0.10 (0.004)
0.11 (0.004)
0.10 (0.004)
0.09 (0.004)
0.11 (0.004)
30.03 (1.182)
40.038 (1.5763)
28.04 (1.104)
22.02 (0.867)

At M5 bushing

29.957 – 29.970 (1.1794 – 1.1799)

29.93 (1.178)

At M6 bushing

39.975 – 39.991 (1.5738 – 1.5744)

39.965 (1.5734)

At C1 bushing
At C2 bushing
M5
M6
C1
C2

27.967 – 27.980 (1.1011 – 1.1016)
21.952 – 21.965 (0.8643 – 0.8648)
0.015 – 0.049 (0.0006 – 0.0019)
0.016 – 0.053 (0.0006 – 0.0021)
0.020 – 0.054 (0.0008 – 0.0021)
0.020 – 0.054 (0.0008 – 0.0021)
12.000 – 12.018 (0.4724 – 0.4731)
5.93 – 6.00 (0.233 – 0.236)
11.957 – 11.968 (0.4707 – 0.4712)

27.95 (1.100)
21.94 (0.864)
0.09 (0.004)
0.10 (0.004)
0.08 (0.003)
0.08 (0.003)
12.03 (0.474)
5.9 (0.23)
11.95 (0.470)

M5, M6, C1
C2, C3, C4
M5, M6
C2
C3, C4
M5, M6
C2
C3, C4
M5
C2
At M5 bushing
At C2 bushing
M5
C2

SPECIFICATIONS (NC700XD/SD)
Transmission

ITEM
Gear I.D.

Gear bushing
O.D.

Gear-to-bushing
clearance

Gear bushing I.D.

Inner mainshaft
O.D.
Outer mainshaft
O.D.
Countershaft O.D.
Bushing-to-shaft
clearance

Shift fork,
fork shaft

Fork I.D.
Claw thickness
Shift fork shaft O.D.

14-5

dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
TORQUE VALUES

Mainshaft bearing set plate bolt

3

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
6

Shift drum bearing set plate bolt

2

6

12 (1.2, 9)

Balancer shaft bearing set plate
bolt

3

6

12 (1.2, 9)

Crankcase main journal bolt (new)

6

9

20 (2.0, 15) + 150°

Crankcase 10 mm bolt
Crankcase 8 mm bolt
Crankcase 8 x 45 mm bolt

1
3
1

10
8
8

39 (4.0, 29)
24 (2.4, 18)
24 (2.4, 18)

Crankcase 6 mm bolt

8

6

12 (1.2, 9)

ITEM

Q'TY

TROUBLESHOOTING
Hard to shift
• Improper clutch operation
• Incorrect engine oil weight
• Bent shift fork
• Bent shift fork shaft
• Bent shift fork claw
• Damaged shift drum groove
• Bent gearshift spindle
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 11-16)
– NC700XD/SD (page 12-112)
Transmission jumps out of gear
• Worn gear dogs
• Worn gear shifter groove
• Bent shift fork shaft
• Worn or bent shift forks
• Broken shift drum stopper arm
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 11-16)
– NC700XD/SD (page 12-112)
• Broken shift drum stopper arm return spring
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 11-16)
– NC700XD/SD (page 12-112)
• Broken gearshift spindle return spring
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 11-16)
– NC700XD/SD (page 12-112)
Excessive engine noise
• Worn or damaged transmission gear
• Worn or damaged transmission bearings

14-6

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
12 (1.2, 9)

REMARKS
Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) except 2.0 ± 1.0 mm (0.08 ±
0.04 in) from tip
See page 14-30
Replace with a new one.

Apply locking agent to the threads.
Coating width; 6.5 ± 1.0 mm (0.26 ±
0.04 in) from tip

dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER

CRANKCASE SEPARATION
For Service Information for removal of necessary parts
before separating the crankcase (page 14-4).
Remove the cam chain [1] from the crankshaft.

[1]

Remove the crankcase 8 mm bolts [1] and sealing
washer [2].

[1]

[1]/[2]

Place the engine upside down.

[3]

[4]

Loosen the crankcase 10 mm bolt [1], 8 mm bolts [2], 8
x 45 mm bolts [3] and 6 mm bolts [4] in a crisscross
pattern in 2 or 3 steps, and remove the bolts.
[2]

[1]

Loosen the crankcase main journal bolt [1] in a
crisscross pattern in 2 or 3 steps, and remove them.

[1]

Separate the lower crankcase [2] from the upper
crankcase.
Do not ply the crankcase halves with a screwdriver.

[2]

14-7

dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
Remove the dowel pins [1] and oil orifices [2].

NC700X/XA/S/SA:

[1]

Clean any sealant off from the crankcase mating
surface.
Clean the oil orifices in solvent thoroughly.
Check the oil orifices for clogs, and replace them if
necessary.

[1]

[2]

NC700XD/SD:

[1]

[1]

[2]

[3]

[1]

TRANSMISSION (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
REMOVAL/DISASSEMBLY
MAINSHAFT/COUNTERSHAFT
Separate the crankcase halves (page 14-7).
Remove the countershaft assembly [1].
Remove the dowel pin [2] and countershaft bearing set
ring [3].
Disassemble the countershaft assembly.
Clean all disassembled parts in solvent thoroughly.
• Keep track of the disassembled parts (gears,
bushings, washers, and snap rings) by sliding them
onto a tool or a piece of wire.
• Do not expand the snap ring more than necessary
for removal. To remove a snap ring, expand the
snap ring and pull it off using the gear behind it.

[2]

Remove the mainshaft bearing set plate bolts [1] and
set plate [2].

[2]

[1]

14-8

dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
Remove the right mainshaft bearing [1] from the upper
crankcase.

[1]

Remove the mainshaft assembly [1].

[1]

Disassemble the mainshaft assembly.
Clean all disassembled parts in solvent thoroughly.
• Keep track of the disassembled parts (gears,
bushings, washers, and snap rings) by sliding them
onto a tool or a piece of wire.
• Do not expand the snap ring more than necessary
for removal. To remove a snap ring, expand the
snap ring and pull it off using the gear behind it.

SHIFT DRUM/SHIFT FORK
Remove the shift drum bearing set plate bolts [1] and
set plate [2].

[1]

[2]

Remove the fork shaft [1] and shift forks [2].

[2]

[1]

14-9

dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
Remove the shift drum [1] and shift drum bearing [2].

[1]

INSPECTION
SHIFT DRUM/SHIFT FORK
Check the shift fork guide pin for abnormal wear or
damage.
Measure the shift fork I.D.
SERVICE LIMIT: 12.03 mm (0.474 in)
Measure the shift fork claw thickness.
SERVICE LIMIT: 5.9 mm (0.23 in)

Measure the shift fork shaft O.D.
SERVICE LIMIT: 11.95 mm (0.470 in)

Inspect the shift drum guide grooves for abnormal wear
or damage.
Turn the outer race of the shift drum bearing with your
finger.
The bearing should turn smoothly and quietly.
Also check that the inner race of the bearing fits tightly
on the shift drum.
Replace the bearing if the inner race does not turn
smoothly, quietly, or if the inner race fits loosely on the
shift drum.

14-10

[2]

dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
TRANSMISSION
Check the gear shifter groove [1] and gear dogs [2] for
abnormal wear or damage.
Check the dog holes and teeth for abnormal wear or
damage.

[1]

[2]

Measure the I.D. of each gear.
SERVICE LIMITS:
M5, M6, C1: 28.04 mm (1.104 in)
C2, C3, C4: 31.04 mm (1.222 in)
Measure the O.D. of each gear bushing.
SERVICE LIMITS:
M5, M6:
27.94 mm (1.100 in)
C2, C3, C4: 30.93 mm (1.218 in)
Measure the I.D. of each gear bushing.
SERVICE LIMITS:
M5: 25.04 mm (0.986 in)
C2: 28.02 mm (1.103 in)
Calculate the gear-to-bushing clearance.
SERVICE LIMITS:
M5, M6: 0.08 mm (0.003 in)
C2:
0.10 mm (0.004 in)
C3, C4: 0.11 mm (0.004 in)

Check the mainshaft and countershaft for abnormal
wear or damage.

M5

Measure the mainshaft O.D. at the M5 bushing.
SERVICE LIMIT: 24.95 mm (0.982 in)
Measure the countershaft O.D. at the C2 bushing.
SERVICE LIMIT: 27.95 mm (1.100 in)
Calculate the gear bushing-to-shaft clearance.
SERVICE LIMITS:
M5: 0.09 mm (0.004 in)
C2: 0.06 mm (0.002 in)

C2

14-11

dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
MAINSHAFT BEARING
Temporarily install the right mainshaft bearing [1] onto
the mainshaft.

[1]

Turn the outer race of the right mainshaft bearing with
your finger.
The bearing should turn smoothly and quietly.
Also check that the inner race of the bearing fits tightly
on the mainshaft.
Replace the bearing if the inner race does not turn
smoothly, quietly, or if the inner race fits loosely on the
mainshaft.

Turn the inner race of the left mainshaft bearing [1] with
your finger.

[1]

The bearing should turn smoothly and quietly.
Also check that the outer race of the bearing fits tightly
in the upper crankcase.
Replace the bearing (page 14-12) if the inner race does
not turn smoothly, quietly, or if the outer race fits loosely
in the crankcase.

COUNTERSHAFT BEARING
Turn the outer race of countershaft bearing [1] with your
finger.
The bearing should turn smoothly and quietly.
Also check that the bearing inner race fits tightly on the
countershaft.
Replace the countershaft, collar, and bearing as an
assembly, if the race does not turn smoothly, quietly, or
if the inner race fits loosely on the countershaft.
The countershaft bearing cannot be replaced. If the
countershaft bearing is faulty, replace the countershaft
as an assembly.

[1]

LEFT MAINSHAFT BEARING
REPLACEMENT
Remove the following:
– Crankshaft (page 15-5)
– Piston (page 15-14)
– Countershaft/mainshaft (page 14-8)
To avoid burns, wear heavy gloves when handling the
heated upper crankcase.
Do not use a torch
to heat the upper
crankcase; it may
cause warping.

14-12

Heat the upper crankcase to 80°C (176°F) evenly using
a heat gun.
Tap the upper crankcase lightly and remove the left
mainshaft bearing [1].

[1]

dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
Apply engine oil to a new left mainshaft bearing [1].
Drive in a new
bearing squarely
with the marking
side facing toward
the inside of the
crankcase.

[2]

Drive the left mainshaft bearing into the upper
crankcase until it is fully seated using the special tools.
TOOLS:
Driver, 15 x 280L [2]
Attachment, 42 x 47 mm [3]
Pilot, 20 mm [4]

07949-3710001
07746-0010300
07746-0040500

[3]/[4]

Install the removed parts in the reverse order of
removal.

[1]

TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
Clean all parts in solvent, and dry them thoroughly.
Apply engine oil to the gear teeth, rotating surface and
bearing.
Apply molybdenum oil solution to the spline bushing
outer surface, bushing inner and outer surface, shift fork
grooves.
Assemble the mainshaft and countershaft.
MAINSHAFT
MAINSHAFT/M1 GEAR (16T)

THRUST WASHER
M5 GEAR BUSHING
M5 GEAR (30T)

SPLINE WASHER
SNAP RING

M3/4 GEAR (22/25T)
SNAP RING
SPLINE WASHER
M6 GEAR BUSHING
M6 GEAR (37T)
SPLINE WASHER
LOCK WASHER
THRUST WASHER

M2 GEAR (19T)

14-13

dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
COUNTERSHAFT
NEEDLE BEARING CAP
NEEDLE BEARING
THRUST WASHER
NEEDLE BEARING
C1 GEAR (45T)
LOCK WASHER
THRUST WASHER
SPLINE WASHER

C5 GEAR (31T)

C3 GEAR (32T)

SNAP RING
SPLINE WASHER
C4 GEAR BUSHING
C6 GEAR (31T)

C4 GEAR (30T)

C3 GEAR BUSHING
SNAP RING
SPLINE WASHER

SPLINE WASHER

SNAP RING
COUNTERSHAFT

C2 GEAR BUSHING
C2 GEAR (36T)

COUNTERSHAFT BEARING SET RING
OIL SEAL

Assemble the transmission gears and shafts.
CORRECT

INCORRECT

• Coat each gear with clean engine oil and check for
smooth movement.
• Align the lock washer tabs with the spline washer
grooves.
• Always install the thrust washers and snap rings with
the chamfered (rolled) edge facing away from the
thrust load.
• Install the snap rings [1] so that the end gap aligns
with the groove of the splines.
• Make sure that the snap rings are fully seated in the
shaft groove after installing them.
[1]

14-14

dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
INSTALLATION
MAINSHAFT/COUNTERSHAFT
Install the mainshaft assembly [1] into the upper
crankcase.

[1]

Apply engine oil to the right mainshaft bearing [1].
Install the right mainshaft bearing into the upper
crankcase.
Install the bearing into the crankcase with the marked
side facing out.

[1]

Apply locking agent to the mainshaft bearing set plate
bolts threads (page 14-6).

[2]

[1]

Install the mainshaft bearing set plate [1] with its "OUT
SIDE" mark [2] facing out.
Install and tighten the mainshaft bearing set plate bolts
[3] to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

[3]

Install the dowel pin [1] onto the upper crankcase hole.

[2]

[3]

Install the countershaft bearing set ring [2] to the
countershaft bearing groove.
Install the countershaft assembly [3].
• Align the needle bearing cap hole with the dowel pin.
• Align the set ring with the upper crankcase groove.
Install the shift drum/shift fork (page 14-16).
Assemble the crankcase (page 14-28).

[1]

14-15

dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
SHIFT DRUM/SHIFT FORK
Apply engine oil to the shift drum bearing [1].
Install the shift drum [2] and shift drum bearing into the
lower crankcase.

[2]

[1]

The shift forks have the following identification marks:
– "L" mark [1]: left shift fork
– "C" mark [2]: center shift fork
– "R" mark [3]: right shift fork
Apply molybdenum oil solution to the shift fork guide
area and guide pin.

[1] [2]

[3]

Apply molybdenum oil solution to the shift fork shaft
outer surface.
Install the shift forks [1] into the shift drum guide
grooves with the identification marks facing toward the
right side of the engine and insert the fork shaft [2].

[1]

Apply locking agent to the shift drum bearing set plate
bolt threads (page 14-6).

[2]
[2]

Install the set plate [1] and shift drum bearing set plate
bolts [2].
Tighten the shift drum bearing set plate bolts to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Install the mainshaft/countershaft (page 14-15).
Assemble the crankcase (page 14-28).
[1]

14-16

dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER

TRANSMISSION (NC700XD/SD)
REMOVAL/DISASSEMBLY
MAINSHAFT/COUNTERSHAFT
Separate the crankcase halves (page 14-7).

[1]

[3]

Remove the countershaft assembly [1].
Remove the dowel pin [2] and countershaft bearing set
ring [3].
Disassemble the countershaft assembly.
Clean all disassembled parts in solvent thoroughly.
• Keep track of the disassembled parts (gears,
bushings, washers, and snap rings) by sliding them
onto a tool or a piece of wire.
• Do not expand the snap ring more than necessary
for removal. To remove a snap ring, expand the
snap ring and pull it off using the gear behind it.

[2]

Remove the mainshaft bearing set plate bolts [1] and
set plate [2].

[2]

[1]

Remove the right mainshaft bearing [1] from the upper
crankcase.

[1]

Remove the mainshaft assembly [1].
Disassemble the mainshaft assembly.
Clean all disassembled parts in solvent thoroughly.
• Keep track of the disassembled parts (gears,
bushings, washers, and snap rings) by sliding them
onto a tool or a piece of wire.
• Do not expand the snap ring more than necessary
for removal. To remove a snap ring, expand the
snap ring and pull it off using the gear behind it.

[1]

14-17

dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
SHIFT DRUM/SHIFT FORK
Remove the shift drum bearing set plate bolts [1] and
set plate [2].

[1]

[2]

Remove the fork shafts [1] and shift forks [2].

[2]

[1]

[2]

Remove the shift drum [1] and shift drum bearing [2].

[1]

INSPECTION
SHIFT DRUM/SHIFT FORK
Check the shift fork guide pin for abnormal wear or
damage.
Measure the shift fork I.D.
SERVICE LIMIT: 12.03 mm (0.474 in)
Measure the shift fork claw thickness.
SERVICE LIMIT: 5.9 mm (0.23 in)

14-18

[2]

dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
Measure the shift fork shaft O.D.
SERVICE LIMIT: 11.95 mm (0.470 in)

Inspect the shift drum guide grooves for abnormal wear
or damage.
Turn the outer race of the shift drum bearing with your
finger.
The bearing should turn smoothly and quietly.
Replace the bearing if the outer race does not turn
smoothly or quietly.

TRANSMISSION
Check the gear shifter groove and gear dogs for
abnormal wear or damage.
Check the dog holes and gear teeth for abnormal wear
or damage.

14-19

dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
Measure the I.D. of each gear.
SERVICE LIMITS:
M5:
33.04 mm (1.301 in)
M6:
43.04 mm (1.694 in)
C1:
31.06 mm (1.223 in)
C2:
25.03 mm (0.985 in)
C3, C4: 31.04 mm (1.222 in)
Measure the O.D. of each gear bushing.
SERVICE LIMITS:
M5:
32.93 mm (1.296 in)
M6
42.93 mm (1.690 in)
C1:
30.94 mm (1.218 in)
C2:
24.94 mm (0.982 in)
C3, C4: 30.93 mm (1.218 in)
Calculate the gear-to-bushing clearance.
SERVICE LIMITS:
M5:
0.10 mm (0.004 in)
M6:
0.11 mm (0.004 in)
C1:
0.10 mm (0.004 in)
C2:
0.09 mm (0.004 in)
C3, C4: 0.11 mm (0.004 in)
Measure the I.D. of each gear bushing.
SERVICE LIMITS:
M5:
30.03 mm (1.182 in)
M6:
40.038 mm (1.5763 in)
C1:
28.04 mm (1.104 in)
C2:
22.02 mm (0.867 in)
Check the mainshafts and countershaft for abnormal
wear or damage.

M5

Measure the inner mainshaft O.D. at the M5 bushing.
SERVICE LIMIT: 29.93 mm (1.178 in)

M6

Measure the outer mainshaft O.D. at the M6 bushing.
SERVICE LIMIT: 39.965 mm (1.5734 in)
Measure the countershaft O.D. at the C1 and C2
bushing.
SERVICE LIMITS:
C1: 27.95 mm (1.100 in)
C2: 21.94 mm (0.864 in)
Calculate the gear bushing-to-shaft clearance.
SERVICE LIMITS:
M5: 0.09 mm (0.004 in)
M6: 0.10 mm (0.004 in)
C1: 0.08 mm (0.003 in)
C2: 0.08 mm (0.003 in)

14-20

C1

C2

dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
MAINSHAFT BEARING
Turn the inner race of the left mainshaft bearing [1] with
your finger.

[1]

The bearing should turn smoothly and quietly.
Also check that the outer race of the bearing fits tightly
in the upper crankcase.
Replace the bearing (page 14-21) if the inner race does
not turn smoothly, quietly, or if the outer race fits loosely
in the crankcase.

COUNTERSHAFT BEARING
Turn the outer race of countershaft bearing [1] with your
finger.
The bearing should turn smoothly and quietly.
Also check that the bearing inner race fits tightly on the
countershaft.
Replace the countershaft, collar, and bearing as an
assembly, if the outer race does not turn smoothly,
quietly, or if the inner race fits loosely on the
countershaft.

[1]

LEFT MAINSHAFT BEARING
REPLACEMENT
Remove the following:

[1]

– Crankshaft (page 15-5)
– Pistons/connecting rods (page 15-14)
To avoid burns, wear heavy gloves when handling the
heated upper crankcase.
Do not use a torch
to heat the upper
crankcase; it may
cause warping.

Heat the upper crankcase to 80°C (176°F) evenly using
a heat gun.
Tap the upper crankcase lightly and remove the left
mainshaft bearing [1].

Apply engine oil to a new left mainshaft bearing [1].
Drive in a new
bearing squarely
with the marking
side facing toward
the inside of the
crankcase.

[2]

Drive the left mainshaft bearing into the upper
crankcase until it is fully seated using the special tools.
TOOLS:
Driver, 15 x 280L [2]
Attachment, 42 x 47 mm [3]
Pilot, 20 mm [4]

07949-3710001
07746-0010300
07746-0040500

[3]/[4]

Install the following:
– Pistons/connecting rods (page 15-20)
– Crankshaft (page 15-6)
[1]

14-21

dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
Clean all parts in solvent, and dry them thoroughly.
Apply engine oil to the gear teeth, rotating surface and
bearing.
Apply molybdenum oil solution to the spline bushing
outer surfaces, bushing inner and outer surfaces, and
gear shifter grooves.
Assemble the mainshaft and countershaft.
MAINSHAFT
INNER MAINSHAFT/M1 GEAR (15T)

THRUST WASHER
M5 GEAR BUSHING
M5 GEAR (30T)
SPLINE WASHER
SNAP RING
M3 GEAR (22T)
THRUST WASHER

M4 GEAR (25T)
SNAP RING
SPLINE WASHER
M6 GEAR (37T)
M6 GEAR BUSHING
SEAL RINGS

THRUST WASHER
NEEDLE BEARING
OUTER MAINSHAFT/M2 GEAR (21T)
NEEDLE BEARING

: Gear teethe, rotating surfaces and bearing
: Bushing surfaces and gear shifter grooves

14-22

dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
COUNTERSHAFT
OIL SEAL
COUNTERSHAFT
BEARING SET RING

COUNTERSHAFT
C5 GEAR (31T)
SNAP RING

C1 GEAR BUSHING

SPLINE WASHER
C1 GEAR (40T)

C3 GEAR BUSHING
C3 GEAR (32T)
SPLINE WASHER

SPLINE WASHER

LOCK WASHER
SNAP RING

C4 GEAR BUSHING

THRUST WASHER
C2 GEAR BUSHING

C4 GEAR (30T)
SPLINE WASHER
SNAP RING
C6 GEAR (31T)

C2 GEAR (40T)
THRUST WASHER
NEEDLE BEARING
NEEDLE BEARING CAP

: Gear teethe, rotating surfaces and bearing
: Bushing surfaces and gear shifter grooves

14-23

dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
• Coat each gear with clean engine oil and check for
smooth movement.
• Align the lock washer tabs with the spline washer
grooves.
• Always install the thrust washers and snap rings with
the chamfered (rolled) edge facing away from the
thrust load.
• Install the snap rings [1] so that the end gap aligns
with the groove of the splines.
• Make sure that the snap rings are fully seated in the
shaft groove after installing them.

CORRECT

INCORRECT

[1]

INSTALLATION
MAINSHAFT/COUNTERSHAFT
Install the mainshaft assembly [1] into the upper
crankcase.

[1]

Apply engine oil to the right mainshaft bearing [1].
Install the right mainshaft bearing into the upper
crankcase.
Install the bearing into the crankcase with the marked
side facing out.

[1]

Apply locking agent to the mainshaft bearing set plate
bolts threads (page 14-6).

[2]

[1]

Install the mainshaft bearing set plate [1] with its "OUT
SIDE" mark [2] facing out.
Install and tighten the mainshaft bearing set plate bolts
[3] to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

[3]

14-24

dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
Install the dowel pin [1] onto the upper crankcase hole.

[3]

[2]

[1]

[4]

Install the countershaft bearing set ring [2] into the
countershaft bearing groove.
Install the countershaft assembly [3].
• Align the needle bearing cap hole with the dowel pin.
• Align the set ring with the upper crankcase groove.
• Align the oil seal flange [4] with the upper crankcase
groove.
Install the shift drum/shift fork (page 14-25).
Assemble the crankcase (page 14-28).
SHIFT DRUM/SHIFT FORK
Apply engine oil to the shift drum bearing [1].
Install the shift drum [2] and shift drum bearing into the
lower crankcase.

[2]

[1]

The shift forks have the following identification marks:
–
–
–
–

[1]

[2]

"D2M L" mark [1]: Mainshaft left shift fork
"D2M R" mark [2]: Mainshaft right shift fork
"D2C L" mark [3]: Countershaft left shift fork
"D2C R" mark [4]: Countershaft right shift fork

[3]

Apply molybdenum oil solution to the shift fork shaft
outer surfaces, shift fork claws and guide pins.

[4]
[2]

Install the countershaft shift forks [1] into the shift drum
outer guide grooves with the identification marks facing
toward the right side of the engine and insert the shift
fork shaft [2].
Install the mainshaft shift forks [3] into the shift drum
inner guide grooves with the identification marks facing
toward the right side of the engine and insert the shift
fork shaft.

[1]

[3]

14-25

dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
Apply locking agent to the shift drum bearing set plate
bolt threads (page 14-6).

[2]

Install the shift drum bearing set plate [1] and bolts [2].
Tighten the bolts to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Install the mainshaft/countershaft (page 14-24).
Assemble the crankcase (page 14-28).

[1]

BALANCER
REMOVAL
Separate the crankcase halves (page 14-7).

[2]

Remove the balancer shaft bearing set plate bolts [1]
and set plate [2].

[1]

Remove the balancer shaft [1] and right balancer shaft
bearing [2].

[2]

[1]

INSPECTION
Check the balancer shaft [1] and balancer driven gear
[2] for excessive wear or damage.

[1]

Replace the balancer shaft if necessary.

[2]

14-26

dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
Turn the inner race of the left balancer shaft bearing [1]
with your finger.
The bearing should turn smoothly and quietly.
Also check that the outer race of the bearing fits tightly
in the lower crankcase.
Replace the bearing (page 14-27) if the inner race does
not turn smoothly, quietly, or if the outer race fits loosely
in the lower crankcase.

[1]

Temporarily install the right balancer shaft bearing onto
the balancer shaft.
Turn the outer race of the right balancer shaft bearing
with your finger.
The bearing should turn smoothly and quietly.
Also check that the inner race of the bearing fits tightly
on the balancer shaft.
Replace the bearing if the inner race does not turn
smoothly, quietly, or if the inner race fits loosely on the
balancer shaft.

LEFT BALANCER SHAFT BEARING
REPLACEMENT
Drive out the left balancer shaft bearing [1] from the
lower crankcase.

[1]

Apply engine oil to a new left balancer shaft bearing [1].
Drive in a new
bearing squarely
with the marking
side facing toward
the inside of the
crankcase.

[2]

Drive the left balancer shaft bearing into the lower
crankcase until it is fully seated using the special tools.
TOOLS:
Driver, 15 x 280L [2]
Attachment, 42 x 47 mm [3]
Pilot, 20 mm [4]

07949-3710001
07746-0010300
07746-0040500

[3]/[4]

[1]

14-27

dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
INSTALLATION
Apply engine oil to the right balancer shaft bearing [1].
Install the balancer shaft [2] and right balancer shaft
bearing into the lower crankcase.
Install the bearing into the crankcase with the marked
side facing out.

[1]

Apply locking agent to the balancer shaft bearing set
plate bolts threads (page 14-6).

[2]

[2]
[1]

Install the balancer shaft bearing set plate [1] with its
"OUT SIDE" mark [2] facing out.
Install and tighten the balancer shaft bearing set plate
bolts [3] to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

[3]

CRANKCASE ASSEMBLY
Apply liquid sealant (Three Bond 1207B or equivalent)
to the crankcase mating surface as shown.
• Do not apply more liquid sealant than necessary.
• Do not apply liquid sealant to the crankcase main
journal bolts area and the oil passage area as
shown.

14-28

dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
Install the oil orifices [1] onto the upper crankcase [2].

NC700X/XA/S/SA:

[1]

Install the oil orifices with its narrow hole side facing
upper crankcase.

[2]
NC700XD/SD:

[1]

[2]

Install the dowel pins [1] onto the upper crankcase [2].

NC700X/XA/S/SA:

[1]

[1]
NC700XD/SD:

[1]

[2]
[1]

[2]

14-29

dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
Align the balancer driven gear [1] and balancer driven
sub gear [2] teeth then install a 6 x 14 mm socket bolt
[3] to the balancer driven gear and balancer driven sub
gear holes at the lower crankcase inspection hole [4].

[1]/[2]

Apply molybdenum oil solution to the main journal
bearing sliding surfaces on the lower crankcase.

Align the index line [1] on balancer drive gear with
upper crankcase top surface while the " " mark [2] is
facing up.

Install the lower crankcase onto the upper crankcase.

[4]

[3]

[1]

[2]

[3]

Make sure that the index line [1] on the balancer drive
gear is positioned between the index lines [2] on the
balancer driven gear as shown.

[2]

Remove the 6 x 14 mm socket bolt [3].

[1]

Install new crankcase main journal bolts [1].
• Tighten the crankcase main journal bolts using the
Plastic Region Tightening Method.
• Do not reuse the crankcase main journal bolts,
because the correct axial tension will not be
obtained.
• The crankcase main journal bolts are pre-coated
with an oil additive for axial tension stability. Do not
remove the oil additive from the new crankcase main
journal bolt surfaces.
Make sure the upper and lower crankcase are seated
securely.
Tighten the crankcase main journal bolts in numerical
order as shown in a crisscross pattern in 2 or 3 steps to
the specified torque.
Further tighten the crankcase main journal bolts 150°.
TORQUE: 20 N·m (2.0 kgf·m, 15 lbf·ft) + 150°

14-30

[1]

2

1

3

2

1

3

dummyhead

CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER
Apply locking agent to the crankcase 8 x 45 mm bolt
threads (page 14-6).
Install and tighten the crankcase bolts to the specified
torque in a crisscross pattern in 2 or 3 steps.
TORQUE:
Crankcase 10 mm bolt [1]:
39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft)
Crankcase 8 mm bolt [2]:
24 N·m (2.4 kgf·m, 18 lbf·ft)
Crankcase 8 x 45 mm bolt [3]:
24 N·m (2.4 kgf·m, 18 lbf·ft)
Crankcase 6 mm bolt [4]
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

[4]
[3]

[2]

[1]

Place the engine with the lower side down.
Install the crankcase 8 mm bolts [1] and a new sealing
washer [2].
The sealing washer location is indicated on the upper
crankcase by the " " mark.
Tighten the crankcase 8 mm bolts to the specified
torque.
TORQUE: 24 N·m (2.4 kgf·m, 18 lbf·ft)

[1]

[1]/[2]

Install the cam chain [1] to the crankshaft.
Install the removed parts in the reverse order of
removal (page 14-4).

[1]

14-31

dummyhead

MEMO

dummytext

15. CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER

COMPONENT LOCATION ··························15-2

MAIN JOURNAL BEARING························ 15-8

SERVICE INFORMATION ···························15-3

CRANKPIN BEARING ······························ 15-11

TROUBLESHOOTING·································15-4

PISTON/CYLINDER ·································· 15-14

CRANKSHAFT ············································15-5

15

15-1

dummyhead

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER

COMPONENT LOCATION
CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER

10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft) + 90°

15-2

dummyhead

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER

SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
This motorcycle provides cracking connecting rods. Be sure to install each part in its original position, as noted during removal. Do
not reuse the improperly installed connecting rod and bearing cap, because their mating surfaces are damaged.
• The crankcase must be separated to service the following:
– Crankshaft (page 15-5)
– Piston/cylinder (page 15-14)
• Mark and store the connecting rods, bearing caps and bearing inserts to be sure of their correct locations for reassembly.
• The crankpin and main journal bearing inserts are select fit and are identified by color codes. Select replacement bearings from
the code tables. After selecting new bearings, recheck the oil clearance with a plastigauge. Incorrect oil clearance can cause
major engine damage.
• Clean the oil passages in the upper crankcase with compressed air before installing the pistons.

SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM
Crankshaft
Connecting rod side clearance
Runout
Right side
Left side
Main journal bearing oil clearance
Cylinder
I.D.
Out-of-round
Taper
Warpage
Piston O.D. at 13 mm (0.5 in) from
Piston, piston
rings
bottom
Piston pin bore I.D.
Piston pin O.D.
Piston-to-piston pin clearance
Piston ring end
Top
gap
Second
Oil (side rail)
Piston ring-to-ring
Top
groove clearance
Second
Cylinder-to-piston clearance
Connecting rod small end I.D.
Crankpin bearing oil clearance

STANDARD
0.15 – 0.35 (0.006 – 0.014)
–
–
0.019 – 0.037 (0.0007 – 0.0015)
73.000 – 73.015 (2.8740 – 2.8746)
–
–
–

Unit: mm (in)
SERVICE LIMIT
0.45 (0.018)
0.03 (0.001)
0.03 (0.001)
0.05 (0.002)
73.07 (2.877)
0.10 (0.004)
0.10 (0.004)
0.10 (0.004)

72.976 – 72.990 (2.8731 – 2.8736)

72.970 (2.8728)

18.010 – 18.013 (0.7091 – 0.7092)
17.996 – 18.000 (0.7085 – 0.7087)
0.010 – 0.017 (0.0004 – 0.0007)
0.15 – 0.30 (0.006 – 0.012)
0.30 – 0.42 (0.012 – 0.017)
0.20 – 0.70 (0.008 – 0.028)
0.035 – 0.080 (0.0014 – 0.0032)
0.030 – 0.055 (0.0012 – 0.0022)
0.010 – 0.039 (0.0004 – 0.0015)
17.964 – 17.977 (0.7072 – 0.7078)
0.026 – 0.044 (0.0010 – 0.0017)

18.023 (0.7096)
17.988 (0.7082)
0.035 (0.0014)
0.6 (0.02)
0.6 (0.02)
0.8 (0.03)
0.15 (0.006)
0.13 (0.005)
0.05 (0.002)
17.985 (0.7081)
0.05 (0.002)

TORQUE VALUES

Crankpin bearing cap bolt

4

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
6

Crankcase main journal bolt
(retightening)

6

9

ITEM

Q'TY

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
10 (1.0, 7) + 90°

20 (2.0, 15) + 120°

REMARKS
See page 15-7
Replace with a new one.
Apply engine oil to the threads and
seating surface.
See page 15-9
Apply engine oil to the threads and
seating surface.

15-3

dummyhead

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER

TROUBLESHOOTING
Cylinder compression is too low, hard to starting or poor performance at low speed
• Leaking cylinder head gasket
• Worn, stuck or broken piston ring
• Worn or damaged cylinder and piston
Cylinder compression too high, overheating or knocking
• Excessive carbon built-up on piston head or combustion chamber
Excessive smoke
• Worn cylinder, piston or piston ring
• Improper installation of piston rings
• Scored or scratched piston or cylinder wall
Abnormal noise
• Worn piston pin or piston pin hole
• Worn connecting rod small end
• Worn cylinder, piston or piston rings
• Worn main journal bearings
• Worn crankpin bearings
Engine vibration
• Excessive crankshaft runout

15-4

dummyhead

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER

CRANKSHAFT
Separate the crankcase halves (page 14-7).

SIDE CLEARANCE INSPECTION
Measure the connecting rod side clearance.
SERVICE LIMIT: 0.45 mm (0.018 in)
If the clearance exceeds the service limit, replace the
connecting rod.
Recheck and if still out of limit, replace the crankshaft.

REMOVAL
Do not interchange the bearing inserts. They must be
installed in their original locations or the correct bearing
oil clearance may not be obtained, resulting in engine
damage.
Mark the bearing caps and bearings as you remove
them to indicate the correct cylinder for reassembly.

[1]

Remove the crankpin bearing cap bolts [1] and bearing
caps [2].
Remove the crankshaft [3].

Before removal, position all the pistons at TDC (Top
Dead Center) to prevent damaging the crankpin with
the connecting rod.

[3]

Remove the main journal bearings [1] from both
crankcase halves.

[2]
[2]

Remove the crankpin bearings [2] from the connecting
rods and bearing caps.

Do not interchange the bearing inserts. They must be
installed in their original locations or the correct bearing
oil clearance may not be obtained, resulting in engine
damage.

[1]

15-5

dummyhead

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER
INSPECTION
Support the crankshaft on both end journals.
Set a dial gauge on the crankshaft.
Rotate the crankshaft two revolutions (720°) and read
the runout.

[2]

[1]

SERVICE LIMITS:
Right side [1]: 0.03 mm (0.001 in)
Left side [2]: 0.03 mm (0.001 in)
Check the balancer drive gear [3] teeth for abnormal
wear or damage.

[3]

INSTALLATION
The bearing tabs
should be aligned
with the grooves in
the crankcase.

Install the main journal bearings [1] and crankpin
bearings [2] into the original locations.

[2]

Do not interchange the bearing inserts. They must be
installed in their original locations or the correct bearing
oil clearance may not be obtained, resulting in engine
damage.
Apply molybdenum oil solution to the main journal
bearing sliding surfaces on the upper crankcase and
crankpin bearing sliding surfaces on the connecting
rods.
[1]

Apply molybdenum oil solution to the thrust surfaces of
the crankshaft as shown.

Install the crankshaft [1] onto the upper crankcase.
Set the connecting rods [2] to the crankpins.

[1]

15-6

[2]

dummyhead

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER
Clean the mating surface of the connecting rods and
crankpin bearing caps with cleaning solvent and blow
them with compressed air.

Apply molybdenum oil solution to the crankpin bearing
sliding surfaces on the crankpin bearing caps [1].

Align

Install the crankpin bearing caps.

Be sure to install each part in its original position, as
noted during removal. Do not reuse the improperly
installed connecting rod and bearing cap, because their
mating surfaces are damaged.
Align the I.D. code number on the connecting rods.
[1]
The crankpin
bearing cap bolts
cannot be reused.
Once the bolts have
been loosened
replace them with
new ones.

Apply engine oil to new crankpin bearing cap bolt
threads and seating surfaces.

[1]

Install and tighten new crankpin bearing cap bolts [1] to
the specified torque in 2 or 3 steps alternately.
Further tighten the bolts 90°.
TORQUE: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft) + 90°
Assemble the crankcase halves (page 14-28).

15-7

dummyhead

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER

MAIN JOURNAL BEARING
Do not interchange the bearing inserts. They must be
installed in their original locations or the correct bearing
oil clearance may not be obtained, resulting in engine
damage.
Remove the crankshaft (page 15-5).

BEARING INSPECTION
Inspect the main journal bearing inserts [1] on the upper
and lower crankcase halves for unusual wear or
peeling.
Check the bearing tabs for damage.

[1]

OIL CLEARANCE INSPECTION
Clean off any oil from the bearing inserts and main
journals.

[1]

Install the crankshaft [1] onto the upper crankcase.

Put a strip of plastigauge [1] lengthwise on each main
journal avoiding the oil hole.
Do not rotate the crankshaft during inspection.

15-8

[1]

dummyhead

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER
Install the dowel pins [1] and oil orifices [2] onto the
upper crankcase [3].

[1]

Install the oil orifices with its narrow hole side facing
upper crankcase.

[3]

Install the lower crankcase [1] onto the upper
crankcase.

[2]
[2]

Apply engine oil to the crankcase main journal bolt
(reuse) threads and seating surfaces.

2

1

3

2

1

3

Install the crankcase main journal bolts [2].
Make sure the upper and lower crankcase are seated
securely.
Tighten the crankcase main journal bolts in numerical
order as shown in a crisscross pattern in 2 or 3 steps to
the specified torque.
Further tighten the crankcase main journal bolts 120°.
TORQUE: 20 N·m (2.0 kgf·m, 15 lbf·ft) + 120°

[1]

Remove the crankcase main journal bolt and lower
crankcase.
Measure the compressed plastigauge at its widest point
on each main journal to determine the oil clearance.
SERVICE LIMIT: 0.05 mm (0.002 in)
If the oil clearance exceeds the service limit, select a
replacement bearing.

BEARING SELECTION
Letters (A, B or C)
on the left side of
upper crankcase
are bearing support
I.D. codes from left
to right.

Record the crankcase bearing support I.D. code letters
[1] from left side of the upper crankcase as shown.

[1]

15-9

dummyhead

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER
Numbers (1, 2 or 3)
on the crank weight
are main journal
O.D. codes from left
to right.

If you are replacing the crankshaft, record the
corresponding main journal O.D. code numbers [1] from
the crank weight.
If you are reusing the crankshaft, measure the crankpin
O.D. with a micrometer.

[1]

Cross-reference the main journal and bearing support
codes to determine the replacement bearing color code
[1].
MAIN JOURNAL BEARING THICKNESS:
A: Blue: Thickest
B: Black:
C: Brown:
D: Green:
E: Yellow: Thinnest

[1]

MAIN JOURNAL BEARING SELECTION TABLE:
BEARING SUPPORT I.D. CODE
A
B
C
37.000 – 37.006 mm 37.006 – 37.012 mm 37.012 – 37.018 mm
(1.4567 – 1.4569 in) (1.4569 – 1.4572 in) (1.4572 – 1.4574 in)
MAIN JOURNAL
O.D. CODE

34.010 – 34.016 mm
(1.3390 – 1.3392 in)
34.004 – 34.010 mm
2
(1.3387 – 1.3390 in)
33.998 – 34.004 mm
3
(1.3385 – 1.3387 in)
1

E (Yellow)

D (Green)

C (Brown)

D (Green)

C (Brown)

B (Black)

C (Brown)

B (Black)

A (Blue)

After selecting new bearings, recheck the clearance
with a plastigauge. Incorrect clearance can cause
severe engine damage.

BEARING INSTALLATION
Clean the bearing outer surfaces and crankcase
bearing supports.

Align

Install the main journal bearing inserts [1] onto the
crankcase bearing supports, aligning each tab with
each groove.

[1]

15-10

dummyhead

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER

CRANKPIN BEARING
Do not interchange the bearing inserts. They must be
installed in their original locations or the correct bearing
oil clearance may not be obtained, resulting in engine
damage.
Remove the crankshaft (page 15-5).

BEARING INSPECTION
Check the bearing inserts for unusual wear or peeling.
Check the bearing tabs for damage.

OIL CLEARANCE INSPECTION
Clean the mating surface of the connecting rod and
crankpin bearing cap with cleaning solvent and blow
them with compressed air.

Clean off any oil from the bearing inserts and crankpins.
Carefully install
crankcase.

the

crankshaft

onto

the

[1]

upper

Set the connecting rods onto the crankpins.
Put a strip of plastigauge [1] lengthwise on each
crankpin avoiding the oil hole.
Do not rotate the crankshaft during inspection.

15-11

dummyhead

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER
Install the crankpin bearing caps [1].
Align

Be sure to install each part in its original position, as
noted during removal. Do not reuse the improperly
installed connecting rod and bearing cap, because their
mating surfaces are damaged.
Align the I.D. code number on the connecting rods.

[1]
Use the removed
crankpin bearing
cap bolts when
checking the oil
clearance.

Apply engine oil to the crankpin bearing cap bolt (reuse)
threads and seating surfaces.

[1]

Install and tighten the crankpin bearing cap bolts [1] to
the specified torque in 2 or 3 steps alternately.
Further tighten the bolts 90°.
TORQUE: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft) + 90°

Remove the bearing caps and measure the
compressed plastigauge at its widest point on the
crankpin to determine the oil clearance.
SERVICE LIMIT: 0.05 mm (0.002 in)
If the oil clearance exceeds the service limit, select the
correct replacement bearings.

BEARING SELECTION
Numbers (1, 2, 3 or
4) on the
connecting rods are
the connecting rod
I.D. codes.

Record the connecting rod I.D. code number [1] or
measure the I.D. with the crankpin bearing cap installed
without bearing inserts.

[1]

15-12

dummyhead

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER
Letters (A, B, C or
D) on the crank
weight are the
crankpin O.D.
codes from left to
right.

If you are replacing the crankshaft, record the
corresponding crankpin O.D. code letter [1].
If you are reusing the crankshaft, measure the crankpin
O.D. with a micrometer.

[1]

Cross-reference the connecting rod and crankpin codes
to determine the replacement bearing color code [1].

[1]

CRANKPIN BEARING THICKNESS:
B: Black: Thickest
C: Brown:
D: Green:
E: Yellow:
F: Pink:
G: Red:
H: White: Thinnest

CRANKPIN BEARING SELECTION TABLE:
CONNECTING ROD I.D. CODE
1
2
3
4
43.000 – 43.006 mm 43.006 – 43.012 mm 43.012 – 43.018 mm 43.018 – 43.024 mm
(1.6929 – 1.6931 in) (1.6931 – 1.6934 in) (1.6934 – 1.6936 in) (1.6936 – 1.6939 in)
CRANKPIN
O.D. CODE

39.994 – 40.000 mm
(1.5746 – 1.5748 in)
39.988 – 39.994 mm
B
(1.5743 – 1.5746 in)
39.982 – 39.988 mm
C
(1.5741 – 1.5743 in)
39.976 – 39.982 mm
D
(1.5739 – 1.5741 in)
A

H (White)

G (Red)

F (Pink)

E (Yellow)

G (Red)

F (Pink)

E (Yellow)

D (Green)

F (Pink)

E (Yellow)

D (Green)

C (Brown)

E (Yellow)

D (Green)

C (Brown)

B (Black)

After selecting new bearings, recheck the clearance
with a plastigauge. Incorrect clearance can cause
severe engine damage.

BEARING INSTALLATION
Clean the bearing outer surfaces, crankpin bearing cap
and connecting rod.

[1]

Install the crankpin bearings [1] onto the bearing cap
and connecting rod, aligning each tab with each groove.

Align

15-13

dummyhead

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER

PISTON/CYLINDER
PISTON/CONNECTING ROD
REMOVAL
• Before piston removal, place a clean shop towel
around the connecting rod to prevent damaging the
cylinder sleeve.
• Do not try to remove the piston/connecting rod
assembly from bottom of the cylinder; the assembly
will get stuck in the gap between the cylinder liner
and the upper crankcase.
• Do not interchange the bearing inserts. They must
be installed in their original locations or the correct
bearing oil clearance may not be obtained, resulting
in engine damage.
Mark the bearing caps and bearings as you remove
them to indicate the correct cylinder for reassembly.

[1]

Remove the crankpin bearing cap bolts [1] and bearing
caps [2].
Remove the crankshaft [3].
Remove the countershaft.
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 14-8)
– NC700XD/SD (page 14-17)

[3]

Remove the piston/connecting rod assembly [1] from
the top of the cylinder.

Do not try to remove the connecting rod/piston
assembly from the bottom of the cylinder; the assembly
will be locked when the oil ring expands in the gap
between the cylinder liner and the upper crankcase.

PISTON RING REMOVAL
Be careful not to
damage the piston
ring by spreading
the ends too far.

15-14

Spread each piston ring ends and remove them by
lifting up at a point opposite the gap.

[2]
[1]

dummyhead

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER
Never use a wire
brush; it will scratch
the groove.

Clean carbon deposits from the piston ring grooves with
a ring that will be discarded.

PISTON REMOVAL
Assemble the special tools as shown.
TOOLS:
Piston pin tool set
– Piston base head [1]
– Piston pin pilot [2]
– Piston base spring [3]
– Piston base [4]

[2]

[4]

[3]

07PAF-0010000
07PAF-0010400
07PAF-0010300
07973-6570600
07973-6570500

Temporarily install the pilot collar [1] to the piston pin
pilot, and adjust the piston base head inserts [2] as
shown, then tighten the screws [3].
TOOLS:
Piston pin tool set
– Piston base head insert
– Pilot collar, 18 mm

[1]

[1]

[2]

[1]

[2]

[2]

07PAF-0010000
07PAF-0010500
07PAF-0010640

[3]

Remove the pilot collar.

[3]

1.0 mm (0.04 in)
[3]

Assemble and adjust the length of the insert pin [1] and
insert adjuster [2] to 44.0 mm (1.73 in).
TOOLS:
Piston pin tool set
– Insert pin
– Insert adjuster

44.0 mm (1.73 in)

07PAF-0010000
07PAF-0010700
07PAF-0010800

[1]

[2]

15-15

dummyhead

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER
Place the piston assembly [1] on the special tools [2].

[1]

[4]

[2]

[3]

Be sure to position the piston flat area against the
piston base head inserts as shown.
Place the pilot collar [3] and insert pin/insert adjuster [4]
on the piston assembly.

Press the piston pin [1] out with the insert pin [2], insert
adjuster [3], pilot collar [4] and a hydraulic press.

[2]/[3]
[4]
[1]

PISTON INSPECTION
Inspect the piston rings for free movement by rotating
them in their grooves. The rings should be able to move
freely grooves without catching.
Push the ring until the outer surface of the piston ring is
nearly flush with the piston and measure the ring-to-ring
groove clearance.
SERVICE LIMITS:
Top:
0.15 mm (0.006 in)
Second: 0.13 mm (0.005 in)

Push the rings into
the cylinder with the
top of the piston to
be sure they are
squarely in the
cylinder.

15-16

Insert the piston ring squarely into the top of the
cylinder and measure the ring end gap.
SERVICE LIMITS:
Top:
0.6 mm (0.02 in)
Second:
0.6 mm (0.02 in)
Oil (side rail): 0.8 mm (0.03 in)

dummyhead

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER
Measure the piston pin bore I.D.
SERVICE LIMIT: 18.023 mm (0.7096 in)

Measure the O.D. of the piston pin.
SERVICE LIMIT: 17.988 mm (0.7082 in)
Calculate the piston-to-piston pin clearance.
SERVICE LIMIT: 0.035 mm (0.0014 in)

Measure the diameter of the piston at 13 mm (0.5 in)
from the bottom and 90° to the piston pin hole.
SERVICE LIMIT: 72.970 mm (2.8728 in)

13 mm
(0.5 in)

CONNECTING ROD INSPECTION
Measure the connecting rod small end I.D.
SERVICE LIMIT: 17.985 mm (0.7081 in)

15-17

dummyhead

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER
CYLINDER INSPECTION
Inspect the cylinder bore for wear or damage.
Measure the cylinder I.D. in X and Y axis at three levels.
Take the maximum reading to determine the cylinder
wear.

Y

SERVICE LIMIT: 73.07 mm (2.877 in)

X

Calculate the cylinder-to-piston clearance.
Take a maximum reading to determine the clearance.
For piston O.D. measurement (page 15-17).
SERVICE LIMIT: 0.05 mm (0.002 in)
Calculate the taper and out-of-round at three levels in X
and Y axis. Take the maximum reading to determine
them.
SERVICE LIMITS:
Taper:
0.10 mm (0.004 in)
Out-of-round: 0.10 mm (0.004 in)
Inspect the top of the cylinder for warpage.
SERVICE LIMIT: 0.10 mm (0.004 in)

PISTON INSTALLATION
Face the connecting rod oil jet [1] to the piston "IN"
mark [2] side.

Temporarily install the pilot collar [1] to the piston pin
pilot, and adjust the piston base head inserts [2] as
shown, then tighten the screws [3].
TOOLS:
Piston pin tool set
– Piston base head insert
– Pilot collar, 18 mm

[1]

[1]

[2]

[1]

[2]

[2]

07PAF-0010000
07PAF-0010500
07PAF-0010640

[3]

Remove the pilot collar.

[3]

1.0 mm (0.04 in)
[3]

15-18

[2]

dummyhead

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER
Apply engine oil to the piston pin outer surface.

[4]

[1]/[2]

Adjust the length of the insert pin [1] and insert adjuster
[2] to 44.0 mm (1.73 in).
TOOLS:
Piston pin tool set
– Insert pin
– Insert adjuster

[5]

07PAF-0010000
07PAF-0010700
07PAF-0010800

44.0 mm
(1.73 in)

Insert the pilot collar [3] into the piston [4] and
connecting rod [5].
TOOL:
Piston pin tool set
– Pilot collar, 18 mm

07PAF-0010000
07PAF-0010640

[3]

Place the piston, connecting rod and pilot collar on the
special tools.
TOOLS:
Piston pin tool set [6]
– Piston base head insert
– Piston base head
– Piston pin pilot
– Piston base spring
– Piston base

07PAF-0010000
07PAF-0010500
07PAF-0010400
07PAF-0010300
07973-6570600
07973-6570500

[7]
[6]

Be sure to position the piston flat area against the
piston base head inserts as shown.
Place the piston pin [7], insert pin/insert adjuster on the
pilot collar.
Place the piston [1], connecting rod [2], piston pin [3]
and special tools on the hydraulic press.

[3]

[2]

Press the piston pin until special tools fully seated.

[1]

15-19

dummyhead

CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER
PISTON RING INSTALLATION
Clean the piston ring grooves thoroughly and install the
piston rings.

[1]

• Apply engine oil to the piston ring sliding surface.
• Avoid piston and piston ring damage during
installation.
• Install the piston rings with the marked side facing
up.
– "R" mark: top ring [1]
– "2R" mark: second ring [2]
• To install the oil ring [3], install the spacer [4] first,
then install the side rails [5].
Stagger the piston ring end gaps 120° apart from each
other.
Stagger the side rail end gaps as shown.
After installation, the rings should rotate freely in the
ring groove.

120°

[1]
[2]

[3]
[2]

[4]
20 mm (0.8 in)
OR MORE

[5]

PISTON/CONNECTING ROD
INSTALLATION
Apply engine oil to the piston and cylinder sliding
surface.
Install the piston/
connecting rod
assembly with the
"IN" mark [3] facing
the intake side.

15-20

[1]

Install the piston/connecting rod assemblies [1] into the
cylinders using a commercially available piston ring
compressor tool [2].
When reusing the connecting rods, they must be
installed in their original locations.

• While installing the piston, be careful not to damage
the top surface of the cylinder, especially around the
cylinder bore.
• Be careful not to damage the cylinder sleeve with
the connecting rod.
Make sure the
piston ring
compressor tool sits
flush on the top
surface of the
cylinder.

[3]

Use the handle of a plastic hammer or equivalent tool to
tap the piston into the cylinder.
Install the following:
– Countershaft
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 14-15)
– NC700XD/SD (page 14-24)
– Crankshaft (page 15-6)

[2]

dummytext

16. ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

COMPONENT LOCATION ··························16-2

ENGINE REMOVAL
(NC700XD/SD) ············································ 16-9

SERVICE INFORMATION ···························16-4
ENGINE REMOVAL
(NC700X/XA/S/SA)······································16-5

ENGINE INSTALLATION
(NC700X/XA/S/SA) ··································· 16-15
ENGINE INSTALLATION
(NC700XD/SD) ·········································· 16-21

16

16-1

dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

COMPONENT LOCATION
ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

NC700X/XA/S/SA:

32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)

54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)

54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)
54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)

59 N·m (6.0 kgf·m, 44 lbf·ft)
54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)
32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)
54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)

10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)

16-2

dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
NC700XD/SD:

32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)

54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)

54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)
54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)

59 N·m (6.0 kgf·m, 44 lbf·ft)
54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)
32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)

54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)

10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)

16-3

dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
• A hoist or equivalent is required to support the motorcycle when removing and installing the engine.
• When removing/installing the engine, tape the frame around the engine beforehand for frame protection.
• When installing the engine, be sure to tighten the engine mounting fasteners to the specified torque in the specified sequence. If
you mistake the torque or sequence, loosen all mounting fasteners, then tighten them again to the specified torque in the correct
sequence.
• The following components can be serviced with the engine installed in the frame.
– Starter motor (page 6-8)
– Throttle body (page 7-15)
– Water pump (page 8-12)
– Oil pump (NC700X/XA/S/SA) (page 9-6)
– Oil pump (NC700XD/SD) (page 9-8)
– Rocker arm (page 10-8)
– Clutch (NC700X/XA/S/SA) (page 11-7)
– Gearshift linkage (NC700X/XA/S/SA) (page 11-16)
– Primary drive gear/CKP sensor rotor (NC700X/XA/S/SA) (page 11-15)
– Dual clutch (NC700XD/SD) (page 12-105)
– Gearshift linkage (NC700XD/SD) (page 12-112)
– Primary drive gear/CKP sensor rotor (NC700XD/SD) (page 12-108)
– CKP sensor (page 5-11)
– Flywheel (page 13-7)
– Stator (page 13-13)
• The following components require engine removal for service.
– Camshaft (page 10-13)
– Cylinder head/valves (page 10-16)
– Transmission (NC700X/XA/S/SA) (page 14-8)
– Transmission (NC700XD/SD) (page 14-17)
– Balancer (page 14-26)
– Crankshaft (page 15-5)
– Piston/cylinder (page 15-14)

SPECIFICATIONS
Engine dry
weight
Engine oil
capacity

ITEM
NC700X/XA/S/SA
NC700XD/SD
NC700X/XA/S/SA

NC700XD/SD

Coolant
capacity

After draining
After draining/filter
change
After disassembly
After draining
After draining/filter
change
After disassembly

Radiator and engine
At draining
Reserve tank

SPECIFICATIONS
60.5 kg (133.4 lbs)
67.3 kg (148.4 lbs)
3.1 liters (3.3 US qt, 2.7 Imp qt)
3.4 liters (3.6 US qt, 3.0 Imp qt)
3.7 liters (3.9 US qt, 3.3 Imp qt)
3.2 liters (3.4 US qt, 2.8 Imp qt)
3.4 liters (3.6 US qt, 3.0 Imp qt)
4.1 liters (4.3 US qt, 3.6 Imp qt)
1.69 liters (1.79 US qt, 1.49 Imp qt)
1.41 liters (1.49 US qt, 1.24 Imp qt)
0.13 liter (0.14 US qt, 0.11 Imp qt)

TORQUE VALUES
ITEM

Q'TY

Rear lower engine hunger nut
Front lower engine hunger bolt
Upper engine hunger bolt
Rear upper engine hunger nut
Step holder mounting socket bolt
Drive sprocket bolt
Starter motor terminal nut
Water hose band screw

1
2
2
1
4
1
1
2

16-4

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
12
12
12
12
8
10
6
–

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
59 (6.0, 44)
54 (5.5, 40)
54 (5.5, 40)
54 (5.5, 40)
32 (3.3, 24)
54 (5.5, 40)
10 (1.0, 7)
–

REMARKS

See page 16-18
See page 16-19
See page 16-24
See page 16-25

dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

ENGINE REMOVAL (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Drain the engine oil (page 3-13).
Drain the coolant (page 8-6).
Fully slacken the drive chain (page 3-17).
Relieve the fuel pressure and disconnect the quick
connect fitting from the fuel injector side (page 7-4).
Remove the following:
–
–
–
–
–

Left rear cover (page 2-29)
Exhaust pipe/muffler (page 2-32)
Radiator (page 8-9)
Radiator reserve tank (page 8-14)
Throttle body (page 7-15)
[1]

Disconnect the CKP sensor 2P (Red) connector [1] and
release the CKP sensor harness.
Remove the bolt [1] and rear brake reservoir stay/
reservoir [2].

[3]

[1]

[3]

Remove the socket bolts [3].

[2]

Lower the rear fender B [1].

[2]

[1]

Disconnect the alternator 3P (Black) connector [2].

Release the sidestand switch wire harness clamp [1].

[1]

Release the alternator wire harness [2].

[2]

16-5

dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Disconnect the neutral switch connector [1].

[2]

[7]

Remove the wire band [2], bolt [3] and setting plate [4].
Release the following:
– Neutral switch wire [5]
– Sidestand switch wire [6]
– Fuel tank drain hose B [7]

[5]

[6]

[1]

[3]/[4]

Disconnect the VS sensor 3P (Black) connector [1].

[1]

Disconnect the injector 2P (Gray) connectors [1].

[2]

Release the clip [2] from the fuel rail.

[1]

Loosen the band screw [1] and disconnect the water
hose [2] from the water pump.

[4]

Disconnect the spark plug cap [3].
Release the spark plug wire clamp [4] from the frame.

[3]

16-6

[2]

[1]

dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Disconnect the spark plug cap [1].

[2]

Release the spark plug wire clamp [2] from the frame.

[1]

Remove the bolts [1] and stay [2] from the frame.
Disconnect the EOP switch 1P (Gray) connector [3].

[3]

[1]

Disconnect the ECT sensor 2P connector [1].

[2]

[4]

Loosen the band screw and disconnect the water hose
[2] from the thermostat cover.
Release the main wire harness [3] from the stay [4] and
frame [5].
[2]

[1]

Remove the bolts [1] and clutch cable guide [2], then
disconnect the clutch cable [3] from the clutch lifter arm
[4].

[4]

[3]

[3]

[5]

[2]

[1]

16-7

dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Release the rubber cap [1].

[2]/[3]

[7]

Remove the starter motor terminal nut [2] and
disconnect the starter motor cable [3].
Remove the starter motor mounting bolt [4] and
disconnect the ground cable [5].
Release the fuel feed hose [6] from the clamp [7].

[1]

Remove the drive sprocket bolt [1], washer [2] and drive
sprocket [3].

[6]

[3]

[1]

Remove the step holder mounting socket bolts [1] and
left step holder [2].

[4]/[5]

[2]

[2]

[1]

Remove the step holder mounting socket bolts [1] and
right step holder [2].
Do not twist the brake hose.

[1]

16-8

[2]

dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
The jack height
must be continually
adjusted to relieve
stress for ease of
bolt removal.

Support the engine using a jack or other adjustable
support to ease of engine hanger bolts removal.
Remove the upper engine hunger bolts [1] and collar
[2].

Remove the front lower hunger bolts [1] and collars [2].

Remove the rear engine hunger nuts [1], collars [2] and
bolts [3].

Left side:

Right side:

[1]

[1]

Left side:

Right side:

[1]

[2]

[2]

Left side:

[3]

Right side:

[2]

[1]

Carefully maneuver the engine and remove it out of the
frame to the right.
[2]

[1]

During engine removal, hold the engine securely and
be careful not to damage the frame and engine.
[2]

[3]

[1]

[2]

ENGINE REMOVAL (NC700XD/SD)
Drain the engine oil (page 3-13).
Drain the coolant (page 8-6).
Fully slacken the drive chain (page 3-17).
Relieve the fuel pressure and disconnect the quick
connect fitting from the fuel injector side (page 7-4).
Remove the following:
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Left rear cover (page 2-30)
Guard pipe (page 2-30)
Center cross plate (page 2-32)
Exhaust pipe/muffler (page 2-32)
Radiator (page 8-9)
Radiator reserve tank (page 8-14)
Throttle body (page 7-15)

[1]

Disconnect the CKP sensor 2P (Red) connector [1] and
release the CKP sensor harness.

16-9

dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the bolt [1] and rear brake reservoir stay/
reservoir [2].

[3]

[1]

[3]

Remove the socket bolts [3].

[2]

Lower the rear fender B [1].

[2]

[1]

Disconnect the alternator 3P (Black) connector [2].

Release the sidestand switch wire harness clamp [1].

[1]

Release the alternator wire harness [2].

[2]

Remove the wire band [1] and release the wires and
hose from the stay [2].

[1]

[2]

[5]

Remove the sidestand switch wire clamp [3] from the
stay.
Disconnect the shift control motor 2P (Black) connector
[4] and neutral switch connector [5].

[4]

16-10

[3]

dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Disconnect the VS sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
EOT sensor 2P (Black) connector [2].

[2]

Disconnect the injector 2P (Gray) connectors [1].

[1]

[2]

Release the clip [2] from the fuel rail.

[1]

Disconnect the TR sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
remove it from the ABS modulator stay.

[1]

Loosen the band screw [1] and disconnect the water
hose [2] from the water pump.

[4]

Disconnect the spark plug cap [3].
Release the spark plug wire clamp [4] from the frame.

[3]

[2]

[1]

16-11

dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Disconnect the spark plug cap [1].

[2]

Release the spark plug wire clamp [2] from the frame.

[1]

Remove the bolts [1] and stay [2] from the frame.
Disconnect the EOP switch 1P (Gray) connector [3].

[3]

[1]

[2]

Disconnect the clutch EOP sensor 3P connectors [1].
Remove the bolts [2] and clamps [3].

[2]/[3]

[1]

Disconnect the ECT sensor 2P connector [1].

[4]

Loosen the band screw and disconnect the water hose
[2] from the thermostat cover.
Release the main wire harness [3] from the stay [4] and
frame [5].
[2]

[1]

16-12

[3]

[5]

dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Disconnect the linear solenoid valve 4P (Green)
connector [1] and shift spindle angle sensor 3P (Gray)
connector [2] and remove them from the ABS
modulator stay.

[1]

Release the fuel feed hose [3] from the clamp [4].

[3]

[2]

Disconnect the following:

[4]
[2]

– Inner mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1]
– Outer mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [2]

[1]

Release the rubber cap [1].

[2]/[3]

[7]

Remove the starter motor terminal nut [2] and
disconnect the starter motor cable [3].
Remove the starter motor mounting bolt [4] and
disconnect the ground cable [5].
Release the fuel feed hose [6] from the clamp [7].

[1]

Remove the drive sprocket bolt [1], washer [2] and drive
sprocket [3].

[4]/[5]

[6]

[3]

[1]

[2]

16-13

dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the step holder mounting socket bolts [1] and
left step holder [2].

[2]

[1]

[1]

[2]

Remove the step holder mounting socket bolts [1] and
right step holder [2].
Do not twist the brake hose.

The jack height
must be continually
adjusted to relieve
stress for ease of
bolt removal.

Support the engine using a jack or other adjustable
support to ease of engine hanger bolts removal.

Left side:

Right side:

[2]

[1]

Remove the upper engine hunger bolts [1] and collar
[2].

Remove the front lower hunger bolts [1] and collars [2].

Left side:

[1]

16-14

[1]

Right side:

[2]

[2]

[1]

dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the rear engine hunger nuts [1], collars [2] and
bolts [3].

Left side:

[3]

Right side:

[2]

Carefully maneuver the engine and remove it out of the
frame to the right.
During engine removal, hold the engine securely and
be careful not to damage the frame and engine.

[2]

[1]

ENGINE INSTALLATION (NC700X/XA/S/
SA)
• All the engine mounting bolts and nuts loosely
install, then tighten the bolts and nuts to the
specified torque in the specified sequence.
• Note the direction of the engine hanger bolts.
– Front lower right side [1]: 12 x 55 mm bolt and 20
mm collar
– Front lower left side [2]: 12 x 80 mm bolt and 41
mm collar
– Upper right side [3]: 12 x 45 mm bolt and 10 mm
collar
– Upper left side [4]: 12 x 35 mm bolt
– Rear upper side: 12 x 276 mm bolt, 37 mm collar
(right side) [5] and 47 mm collar (left side) [6]
– Rear lower side: 12 x 168 mm bolt and 10 mm
collar (right side) [7]
• Place the jack or other adjustable support under the
engine.
• The jack height must be continually adjusted to
relieve stress for ease bolt installation.
• Carefully align the mounting points with the jack to
prevent damage to engine, frame, water hose, wires
and cables.
• Route the hoses, wires and cables properly (page 125).
During engine
installation, hold the
engine securely
and be careful not
to damage the
frame and engine.

[5]

[6]

[3]

[7]

[1]

[4]

[2]

Place the engine in the frame, then loosely install all the
bolts, nuts and collars.
Tighten the rear lower engine hunger nut [1] to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 59 N·m (6.0 kgf·m, 44 lbf·ft)

[1]

16-15

dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Tighten the left front lower engine hunger bolt [1] to the
specified torque.

Left side:

Right side:

TORQUE: 54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)
Tighten the right front lower engine hunger bolt [2] to
the specified torque.
TORQUE: 54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)

[1]

Tighten the left upper engine hunger bolt [1] to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)

[2]

Left side:

Right side:

[1]

[2]

Tighten the right upper engine hunger bolt [2] to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)

Tighten the rear upper engine hunger nut [1] to the
specified torque.

[1]

TORQUE: 54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)

Install the right step holder [1] and step holder mounting
socket bolts [2].
Tighten the step holder mounting socket bolts to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)

[2]

16-16

[1]

dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Install the left step holder [1] and step holder mounting
socket bolts [2].

[1]

Tighten the step holder mounting socket bolts to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)

[2]

Install the drive sprocket [1], washer [2] and drive
sprocket bolt [3].

[1]

Tighten the drive sprocket bolt to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)

[3]

Install the ground cable [1] and starter motor mounting
bolt [2].
Tighten the mounting bolt securely.

[2]
[3]/[4]

[7]

Install the starter motor cable [3] and starter motor
terminal nut [4].
Tighten the starter motor terminal nut to the specified
torque.
TORQUE: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)
Reposition the rubber cap [5] properly on the starter
motor terminal.
Install the fuel feed hose [6] to the clamp [7].
[5]

[1]/[2]

[6]

Align the fuel feed hose White paint with clamp.
Connect the clutch cable [1] to the clutch lifter arm [2].

[2]

[1]

[3]

Install clutch cable guide [3] and bolts [4].
Tighten the bolts securely.

[4]

16-17

dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Connect the ECT sensor 2P connector [1].

[4]

Align

Connect the water hose [2] to the thermostat cover.
Align the water hose paint mark with the thermostat
cover tab.
Install the main wire harness [3] to the stay [4] and
frame [5].

[2]

[1]

[3]

[5]

Tighten the water hose band screw to the specified
range.

0 – 1 mm
(0 – 0.04 in)

Connect the EOP switch 1P (Gray) connector [1].
Install the stay [2] and bolts [3] to the frame.
Tighten the bolts securely.

[1]

Install the spark plug wire clamp [1] to the frame.

[3]

[2]

[1]

Connect the spark plug cap [2].

[2]

16-18

dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Install the spark plug wire clamp [1] to the frame.

[1]

Connect the spark plug cap [2].
Connect the water hose [3] to the water pump.

[2]

[3]

Tighten the water hose band screw to the specified
range.

0 – 1 mm
(0 – 0.04 in)

Install the clip [1] to the fuel rail.

[1]

Connect the injector 2P (Gray) connectors [2].

[2]

Connect the VS sensor 3P (Black) connector [1].

[1]

16-19

dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Install the following:

[6]

[1]

– Fuel tank drain hose B [1]
– Sidestand switch wire [2]
– Neutral switch wire [3]
Install the setting plate [4] and a new bolt [5].

Align

Align the setting plate hole with the crankcase boss.
Install the wire band [6].
Connect the neutral switch connector [7].

[3]

[2]

Route the alternator wire harness [1].

[7]

[4]/[5]

[2]

Install the sidestand switch wire harness clamp [2].

[1]

Connect the alternator 3P (Black) connector [1].

Install the rear fender B [1] and socket bolts [2].

[1]

[2]

[1]

[4]

Tighten the socket bolts securely.
Install the rear brake reservoir stay/reservoir [3] and
bolt [4].
Align the rear brake reservoir stay with the frame tab.

Align

Tighten the bolt securely.

[3]

16-20

[2]

dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Connect the CKP sensor 2P (Red) connector [1].
Install the following:
–
–
–
–
–

Throttle body (page 7-18)
Radiator (page 8-9)
Radiator reserve tank (page 8-14)
Exhaust pipe/muffler (page 2-32)
Left rear cover (page 2-29)

Inspect the following:
– Throttle grip freeplay (page 3-5)
– Clutch lever freeplay (page 3-26)
Adjust the drive chain slack (page 3-16).
[1]

Fill the engine with the recommended engine oil (page
3-12).
Connect the quick connect fitting to the fuel injector side
(page 7-5).
Fill the recommended coolant mixture to the filler neck
and bleed the air (page 8-6).
Check the exhaust system and cooling system for
leaks.

ENGINE INSTALLATION (NC700XD/SD)
• All the engine mounting bolts and nuts loosely
install, then tighten the bolts and nuts to the
specified torque in the specified sequence.
• Note the direction of the engine hanger bolts.
– Front lower right side [1]: 12 x 55 mm bolt and 20
mm collar
– Front lower left side [2]: 12 x 80 mm bolt and 41
mm collar
– Upper right side [3]: 12 x 45 mm bolt and 10 mm
collar
– Upper left side [4]: 12 x 35 mm bolt
– Rear upper side: 12 x 276 mm bolt, 37 mm collar
(right side) [5] and 47 mm collar (left side) [6]
– Rear lower side: 12 x 168 mm bolt and 10 mm
collar (right side) [7]
• Place the jack or other adjustable support under the
engine.
• The jack height must be continually adjusted to
relieve stress for ease bolt installation.
• Carefully align the mounting points with the jack to
prevent damage to engine, frame, water hose, wires
and cables.
• Route the water hose, wires and cables properly
(page 1-25).
During engine
installation, hold the
engine securely
and be careful not
to damage the
frame and engine.

[5]

[6]

[3]

[7]

[1]

[4]

[2]

Place the engine in the frame, then loosely install all the
bolts, nuts and collars.
Tighten the rear lower engine hunger nut [1] to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 59 N·m (6.0 kgf·m, 44 lbf·ft)

[1]

16-21

dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Tighten the left front lower engine hunger bolt [1] to the
specified torque.

Left side:

Right side:

TORQUE: 54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)
Tighten the right front lower engine hunger bolt [2] to
the specified torque.
TORQUE: 54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)

[1]

Tighten the left upper engine hunger bolt [1] to the
specified torque.

[2]

Left side:

[1]

Right side:
[2]

TORQUE: 54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)
Tighten the right upper engine hunger bolt [2] to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)

Tighten the rear upper engine hunger nut [1] to the
specified torque.

[1]

TORQUE: 54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)

Install the right step holder [1] and step holder mounting
socket bolts [2].
Tighten the step holder mounting socket bolts to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)

[2]

16-22

[1]

dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Install the left step holder [1] and step holder mounting
socket bolts [2].
Tighten the step holder mounting socket bolts to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)

[1]

Install the drive sprocket [1], washer [2] and drive
sprocket bolt [3].

[2]

[1]

Tighten the drive sprocket bolt to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 54 N·m (5.5 kgf·m, 40 lbf·ft)

[3]

Install the ground cable [1] and starter motor mounting
bolt [2].
Tighten the mounting bolt securely.

[2]
[3]/[4]

[7]

Install the starter motor cable [3] and starter motor
terminal nut [4].
Tighten the starter motor terminal nut to the specified
torque.
TORQUE: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)
Reposition the rubber cap [5] properly on the starter
motor terminal.
Install the fuel feed hose [6] to the clamp [7].
[5]

[1]/[2]

[6]

Align the fuel feed hose White paint with clamp.
Connect the following:

[2]

– Inner mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [1]
– Outer mainshaft sensor 3P (Black) connector [2]

[1]

16-23

dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Install the fuel feed hose [1] to the clamp [2].

[3]

Connect the linear solenoid valve 4P (Green) connector
[3] and shift spindle angle sensor 3P (Gray) connector
[4] and install them to the ABS modulator stay.
[1]

[4]

Connect the ECT sensor 2P connector [1].

[2]
[4]

Align

Connect the water hose [2] to the thermostat cover.
Align the water hose paint mark with the thermostat
cover tab.
Install the main wire harness [3] to the stay [4] and
frame [5].

[2]

[1]

[3]

[5]

Tighten the water hose band screw to the specified
range.

0 – 1 mm
(0 – 0.04 in)

Connect the clutch EOP sensor 3P connectors [1].
Install the clamps [2] and bolts [3].
Tighten the bolts securely.

[2]/[3]

16-24

[1]

dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Connect the EOP switch 1P (Gray) connector [1].
Install the stay [2] and bolts [3] to the frame.
Tighten the bolts securely.

[1]

Install the spark plug wire clamp [1] to the frame.

[3]

[2]

[1]

Connect the spark plug cap [2].

[2]

Install the spark plug wire clamp [1] to the frame.

[1]

Connect the spark plug cap [2].
Connect the water hose [3] to the water pump.

[2]

[3]

Tighten the water hose band screw to the specified
range.

0 – 1 mm
(0 – 0.04 in)

16-25

dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Connect the TR sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
install it to the ABS modulator stay.

Install the clip [1] to the fuel rail.

[1]

[1]

Connect the injector 2P (Gray) connectors [2].

[2]

Connect the VS sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
EOT sensor 2P (Black) connector [2].

[2]

Route the wires and hose properly.

[1]
[5]

[4]

[1]

Connect the neutral switch wire connector [1] and shift
control motor 2P (Black) connector [2].
Install the sidestand switch wire clamp [3] onto the stay.
Set the hose and wires into the stay [4] and install the
wire band [5]

[2]

16-26

[3]

dummyhead

ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Route the alternator wire harness [1].

[2]

Install the sidestand switch wire harness clamp [2].

[1]

Connect the alternator 3P (Black) connector [1].

Install the rear fender B [1] and socket bolts [2].

[1]

[2]

[1]

[4]

[2]

Tighten the socket bolts securely.
Install the rear brake reservoir stay/reservoir [3] and
bolt [4].
Align the rear brake reservoir stay with the frame tab.

Align

Tighten the bolt securely.

[3]

Connect the CKP sensor 2P (Red) connector [1].
Install the following:
–
–
–
–
–
–
–

Throttle body (page 7-18)
Radiator (page 8-9)
Radiator reserve tank (page 8-14)
Exhaust pipe/muffler (page 2-32)
Center cross plate (page 2-32)
Guard pipe (page 2-30)
Left rear cover (page 2-30)

Inspect the throttle grip freeplay (page 3-5).
Adjust the drive chain slack (page 3-16).
Fill the engine with the recommended engine oil (page
3-12).

[1]

Connect the quick connect fitting to the fuel injector side
(page 7-5).
Fill the recommended coolant mixture to the filler neck
and bleed the air (page 8-6).
Check the exhaust system and cooling system for
leaks.

16-27

dummyhead

MEMO

dummytext

17. FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING

COMPONENT LOCATION ··························17-2

FRONT WHEEL ········································ 17-20

SERVICE INFORMATION ···························17-8

FORK························································· 17-25

TROUBLESHOOTING·································17-9

STEERING STEM ····································· 17-33

HANDLEBAR ············································17-10

CLUTCH LEVER (NC700X/XA/S/SA)······· 17-42

17

17-1

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING

COMPONENT LOCATION
FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING

NC700X:

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 lbf·ft)

39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft)

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

30 N·m (3.1 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
74 N·m (7.5 kgf·m, 55 lbf·ft)

17-2

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
NC700XA:

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 lbf·ft)

39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft)

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

30 N·m (3.1 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
74 N·m (7.5 kgf·m, 55 lbf·ft)

17-3

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
NC700XD:

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 lbf·ft)

39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft)

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

30 N·m (3.1 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

74 N·m (7.5 kgf·m, 55 lbf·ft)

17-4

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
NC700S:

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 lbf·ft)

39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft)

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

30 N·m (3.1 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
74 N·m (7.5 kgf·m, 55 lbf·ft)

17-5

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
NC700SA:

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 lbf·ft)

39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft)

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

30 N·m (3.1 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
74 N·m (7.5 kgf·m, 55 lbf·ft)

17-6

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
NC700SD:

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 lbf·ft)

39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft)

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

30 N·m (3.1 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
74 N·m (7.5 kgf·m, 55 lbf·ft)

17-7

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING

SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
• When servicing the front wheel, fork or steering stem, support the motorcycle using a safety stand or hoist.
• A contaminated brake disc or pad reduces stopping power. Discard contaminated pads and clean a contaminated disc with a
high quality brake degreasing agent.
• Do not operate the brake lever and pedal after removing the caliper and front wheel.
• After the front wheel installation, check the brake operation by applying the brake lever.
• Use only tires marked "TUBELESS" and tubeless valves on rim marked "TUBELESS TIRE APPLICABLE".
• For brake system information (page 19-5).

SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM

STANDARD
–
250 kPa (2.50 kgf/cm2, 36 psi)
250 kPa (2.50 kgf/cm2, 36 psi)
–
–
–

Minimum tire tread depth
Cold tire
Driver only
pressure
Driver and passenger
Axle runout
Wheel rim runout
Radial
Axial
Wheel balance weight
Fork

–

Spring free
NC700X/XA/XD
length
NC700S/SA/SD
Tube runout
Recommended fork fluid
Fluid level
Fluid capacity

NC700X/XA/XD
NC700S/SA/SD
NC700X/XA/XD
NC700S/SA/SD

394.9 (15.55)
357.0 (14.06)
–
Honda ULTRA CUSHION OIL 10W or
equivalent
104 (4.1)
103 (4.1)
514 ± 2.5 cm3 (17.4 ± 0.08 US oz, 18.1 ±
0.09 Imp oz)
518 ± 2.5 cm3 (17.5 ± 0.08 US oz, 18.2 ±
0.09 Imp oz)

Unit: mm (in)
SERVICE LIMIT
1.5 (0.06)
–
–
0.2 (0.01)
2.0 (0.08)
2.0 (0.08)
60 g (2.1 oz)
max.
387.0 (15.24)
349.9 (13.78)
0.20 (0.008)
–
–
–
–
–

TORQUE VALUES

4
4
2
2

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
8
5
6
6

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
22 (2.2, 16)
2.5 (0.3, 1.8)
12 (1.2, 9)
10 (1.0, 7)

Front brake disc mounting bolt
Front axle
Front axle pinch bolt
Fork socket bolt
Bottom bridge pinch bolt
Fork cap
Top bridge pinch bolt
Front brake caliper mounting bolt
Steering stem adjusting nut

5
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
1

8
18
8
8
10
37
8
8
26

42 (4.3, 31)
74 (7.5, 55)
22 (2.2, 16)
20 (2.0, 15)
39 (4.0, 29)
22 (2.2, 16)
22 (2.2, 16)
30 (3.1, 22)
23 (2.3, 17)

Steering stem adjusting lock nut
Steering stem nut
Clutch lever pivot bolt
(NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Clutch lever pivot nut
(NC700X/XA/S/SA)

1
1
1

26
24
6

–
103 (10.5, 76)
1.0 (0.1, 0.7)

1

6

6.0 (0.6, 4.4)

ITEM

Q'TY

Handlebar holder bolt
Handlebar switch housing screw
Front master cylinder holder bolt
Handlebar weight mounting screw

17-8

REMARKS

ALOC screw; replace with a new
one.
ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.
Apply grease to the sliding surface.
Apply locking agent to the threads.

ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.
See page 17-38
Apply engine oil to the threads.
See page 17-38
See page 17-38
Apply grease to the sliding surface.

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING

TROUBLESHOOTING
Hard steering
• Steering stem adjusting nut too tight
• Damaged steering head bearings
• Insufficient tire pressure
• Faulty tire
Steers to one side or does not track straight
• Bent fork pipe
• Bent axle
• Worn wheel bearing
• Unequal fork fluid quantity in each fork pipe
• Faulty steering head bearing
• Bent frame
• Faulty wheel bearing
• Weak front fork
• Loose steering stem adjusting nut
Front wheel wobbling
• Bent rim
• Worm wheel bearing
• Faulty tire
• Insufficient tire pressure
• Axle not tightened properly
• Unbalanced tire and wheel
Wheel hard to turn
• Faulty wheel bearing
• Bent axle
• Brake drag
Soft suspension
• Weak fork spring
• Insufficient fork fluid
• Insufficient tire pressure
• Incorrect fork fluid viscosity
Stiff suspension
• Incorrect fork fluid viscosity
• Bent fork pipe
• Clogged fork fluid passage
• Damaged fork pipe and/or fork slider
• Fork pipe binds
• High tire pressure
Front suspension noisy
• Insufficient fork fluid
• Loose fork fasteners
• Bent fork pipe

17-9

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING

HANDLEBAR
REMOVAL (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Remove the rearview mirrors [1] and wire bands [2].

[1]

[2]

Hold the handlebar weight [1] and remove the
handlebar weight mounting screw [2], then remove both
handlebar weights.

[2]

[1]

Disconnect the clutch switch connectors [1].

[3]

[4]

[1]

Remove the bolts [2], holder [3] and clutch lever bracket
[4].

[2]

Remove the screws [1] and separate the left handlebar
switch housing [2].

[1]

[3]

Remove the left handlebar grip rubber [3].

[2]

17-10

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
Disconnect the brake light switch connectors [1].

[4]

[3]

Remove the bolts [2], holder [3] and master cylinder [4].
Keep the brake master cylinder upright to prevent air
from entering the hydraulic system.

[1]

Remove the screws [1].

[2]

[1]

[2]

Separate the right handlebar switch housing [2].

Remove the screws [1].

[2]

[4]

[5]

Separate the throttle housing [2].
Disconnect the throttle cables [3] from the throttle pipe
[4], then remove the throttle pipe [5].

[1]

Hold the handlebar [1] and remove the bolts [2] and
holder [3].

[3]
[2]

[3]

[1]

17-11

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
REMOVAL (NC700XD/SD)
Remove the rearview mirrors [1] and wire bands [2].

[1]

[2]

Hold the handlebar weight [1] and remove the
handlebar weight mounting screw [2], then remove both
handlebar weights.

[1]

[2]

Disconnect the parking brake switch connectors [1].

[2]

[4]

Remove the socket bolts [2], holder [3] and parking
brake lever bracket [4].

[1]

Remove the screws [1] and separate the left handlebar
switch housing [2].

[1]

[3]
[3]

Remove the left handlebar grip rubber [3].

[2]

17-12

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
Disconnect the brake light switch connectors [1].

[4]

[3]

Remove the bolts [2], holder [3] and master cylinder [4].
Keep the brake master cylinder upright to prevent air
from entering the hydraulic system.

[1]

Remove the screws [1].

[2]

[2]

Separate the right handlebar switch housing [2].

[1]

Disconnect the throttle cables [1] from the throttle pipe
[2], then remove the throttle pipe.

[2]

[1]

Hold the handlebar [1] and remove the bolts [2] and
holder [3].

[2]

[3]

[1]

17-13

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
INSTALLATION (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Route the wires, hoses and cables properly (page 125).
Clean the inside surface of the handlebar grip and
outside surface of the handlebar and throttle pipe.
Apply Honda Bond A, Cemedine #540 or equivalent to
the inside surface of the grips and to the clean surface
of the left handlebar and throttle pipe.
Allow the adhesive
to dry for 1 hour
before using.

Wait 3 – 5 minutes and install the grip.
Rotate the grips for even application of the adhesive.

Install the handlebar [1] onto the top bridge.

[3]

Align the handlebar punch mark with the top bridge top
surface.
Hold the handlebar and install the holder [2] and
handlebar holder bolts [3] as shown.
Tighten the upper bolts first, then the lower bolts to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

Align

Apply grease to the throttle cable end and throttle pipe
flange groove.

[2]

[1]

[1]

[3]

Install the throttle pipe [1] to the handlebar.
Connect the throttle cable [2] end to the throttle pipe.
Install the throttle housing [3] and screws [4].
Align throttle housing locating pin with the handlebar
hole.
Tighten the screws securely.
[2]
Align

[4]

Install the right handlebar switch housing [1].

[1]

Align the switch housing locating pin with the handlebar
hole.

Align

17-14

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
Install the screws [1] and tighten the upper screw first,
then tighten the lower screw to the specified torque.

[1]

TORQUE: 2.5 N·m (0.3 kgf·m, 1.8 lbf·ft)

Install the master cylinder [1], holder [2] ("UP" mark [3]
facing up) and bolts [4].

[1]

Align

[2]

Align the end of the master cylinder with the punch
mark on the handlebar and tighten the upper bolt first,
then the lower bolt to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Connect the brake light switch connectors [5].

[5]

Install the left handlebar switch housing [1].

[3]

[4]
Align

Align the switch housing locating pin with the handlebar
hole.

[1]

Install the screws [1] and tighten the upper screw first,
then tighten the lower screw to the specified torque.

[1]

TORQUE: 2.5 N·m (0.3 kgf·m, 1.8 lbf·ft)

17-15

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
Install the clutch lever bracket [1], holder [2] ("UP" mark
[3] facing up) and bolts [4].

[2]

[1]

Align

[5]

Align the end of the clutch lever bracket with the punch
mark on the handlebar, and tighten the upper bolt first,
then the lower bolt.
Connect the clutch switch connectors [5].

[4]

[3]

Install the handlebar weight [1] to both handlebars
aligning each cutout.

[1]

Align

Hold the handlebar weight [1].

[2]

Install and tighten a new handlebar weight mounting
screw [2] to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)

[1]

Install the rearview mirrors [1] and wire bands [2].

[1]

Adjust the following:
– Clutch lever freeplay (page 3-26)
– Throttle grip freeplay (page 3-5)

[2]

17-16

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
INSTALLATION (NC700XD/SD)
Route the wires, hoses and cables properly (page 125).
Clean the inside surface of the handlebar grip and
outside surface of the handlebar and throttle pipe.
Apply Honda Bond A, Cemedine #540 or equivalent to
the inside surface of the grips and to the clean surface
of the left handlebar and throttle pipe.
Allow the adhesive
to dry for 1 hour
before using.

Wait 3 – 5 minutes and install the grip.
Rotate the grips for even application of the adhesive.

Install the handlebar [1] onto the top bridge.

[3]

Align the handlebar punch mark with the top bridge top
surface.
Hold the handlebar and install the holder [2] and
handlebar holder bolts [3] as shown.
Tighten the upper bolts first, then the lower bolts to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

Align

Apply grease to the throttle cable end and throttle pipe
flange groove.

[2]

[1]

[1]
[3]

Install the throttle pipe [1] to the handlebar.
Connect the throttle cable [2] end to the throttle pipe.
Install the right handlebar switch housing [3].
Align the switch housing locating pin with the handlebar
hole.

[2]

Align

Install the screws [1] and tighten the upper screw first,
then tighten the lower screw to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 2.5 N·m (0.3 kgf·m, 1.8 lbf·ft)

[1]

17-17

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
Install the master cylinder [1], holder [2] ("UP" mark [3]
facing up) and bolts [4].

[1]

Align

[2]

Align the end of the master cylinder with the punch
mark on the handlebar and tighten the upper bolt first,
then the lower bolt to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Connect the brake light switch connectors [5].

[5]

Install the left handlebar switch housing [1].

[3]

[4]
Align

Align the switch housing locating pin with the handlebar
hole.

[1]

Install the screws [1] and tighten the upper screw first,
then tighten the lower screw to the specified torque.

[1]

TORQUE: 2.5 N·m (0.3 kgf·m, 1.8 lbf·ft)

Install the parking brake lever bracket [1].

[1]

Align the parking brake lever bracket locating pin with
the handlebar hole.

Align

17-18

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
Install the holder [1] and socket bolts [2].

[2]

Tighten the socket bolts securely.
Connect the parking brake switch connectors [3].

[3]

[1]

Install the handlebar weight [1] to both handlebars
aligning each cutout.

[1]

Align

Hold the handlebar weight [1].

[1]

Install and tighten a new handlebar weight mounting
screw [2] to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)

[2]

Install the rearview mirrors [1] and wire bands [2].

[1]

Adjust the throttle grip freeplay (page 3-5).
Check the parking brake lock operation (page 3-24).

[2]

17-19

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
INNER WEIGHT REPLACEMENT
Remove the throttle pipe or grip rubber from the
handlebar.

[5]

[1]

[4]

– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 17-10)
– NC700XD/SD (page 17-12)
Straighten the retainer ring tab [1] by the screwdriver or
punch.
Apply lubricant
spray through the
tab locking hole [4]
to the rubber
cushions [5] for
easy removal.

Temporarily install the handlebar weight [2] and screw,
then remove the inner weight assembly [3] by turning
the handlebar weight.

[3]

[2]

Remove the screw [1], handlebar weight [2], retainer
ring [3] and rubber cushions [4] from the inner weight
[5].

[5]

Install the rubber cushions and new retainer ring onto
the inner weight.

[2]

Install the handlebar weight to the inner weight align
with each cut-outs of the inner weight and handlebar
weight.
Install and tighten the handlebar weight screw.

[1]
[4]

[3]

Install the inner weight assembly [1] into the handlebar.
Turn the inner weight and hook the weight retainer tab
[2] with the tab locking hole [3] in the handlebar.

[2]

[3]

Remove the screw and handlebar weight.
Install the throttle pipe and grip rubber to the handlebar.
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 17-14)
– NC700XD/SD (page 17-17)

[1]

FRONT WHEEL
REMOVAL
NC700X/S:

Remove the front brake caliper mounting bolts [1] and
slide the brake caliper/bracket assembly [2].

NC700X/S:

Do not suspend the brake caliper/bracket assembly
from the brake hose. Do not twist the brake hose.

[2]

17-20

[1]

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
NC700XA/XD/SA/
SD:

Remove the brake pads (page 19-17).
Remove the bolts [1] and front wheel speed sensor [2]
from the caliper bracket.

NC700XA/XD/SA/SD:
[1]

Check that there is no iron or other magnetic deposits
between the pulser ring and front wheel speed sensor.
Remove any deposits.
Check the sensor tip for deformation or damage (e.g.,
chipped pulser ring teeth).
Replace the front wheel speed sensor if necessary
(page 20-25).

[2]

Loosen the front axle pinch bolt [1] and front axle [2].
Support the motorcycle using a safety stand or hoist,
raise the front wheel off the ground.
Remove the front axle and front wheel.
Do not operate the brake lever after removing the front
wheel.

[1]

Remove the side collars [1].

[2]
[1]

INSPECTION
WHEEL RIM
Check the wheel rim runout by placing the wheel in a
truing stand.
Spin the wheel by hand and measure the runout using a
dial indicator.
SERVICE LIMITS:
Radial: 2.0 mm (0.08 in)
Axial: 2.0 mm (0.08 in)

AXLE
Place the axle on V-blocks.
Turn the axle and measure the runout using a dial
indicator.
Actual runout is 1/2 of the total indicator reading.
SERVICE LIMIT: 0.2 mm (0.01 in)

17-21

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
WHEEL BEARING
Turn the inner race of each bearing with your finger.
The bearings should turn smoothly and quietly.
Also check that the outer race fits tightly in the wheel
hub.
Remove and discard the bearings if the races do not
turn smoothly, quietly, or if they fit loosely in the wheel
hub.
Replace the wheel bearings, if necessary (page 17-22).
Replace the bearings in pairs.
WHEEL BALANCE
• Carefully check balance before installing the wheel.
• The wheel balance must be checked when the tire is
remounted.
• For optimum balance, the tire balance mark [1] (light
mass point: a paint dot on the side wall) must be
located next to the valve stem [2]. Remount the tire if
necessary.

[2]

[1]

Note the rotating direction marks [1] on the tire, and
upon tire installation, always fit the tire so the marks
face the same direction.

[1]

Mount the wheel, tire and brake disc assembly on an
inspection stand.
Spin the wheel, allow it to stop, and mark the lowest
(heaviest) part of the wheel with chalk.
Do this 2 or 3 times to verify the heaviest area.
If the wheel is balanced, it will not stop consistently in
the same position.
To balance the wheel, install a new balance weight on
the lightest side of the rim, on the side opposite the
chalk marks. Add just enough weight so the wheel will
no longer stop in the same position when it is spun.
Do not add more than 60 g (2.1 oz) to the wheel.

DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Loosen the front brake disc mounting bolts [1] in a
crisscross pattern in 2 or 3 steps, and remove the bolts,
pulser ring (NC700XA/XD/SA/SD) [2] and brake disc
[3].

NC700XA/XD/SA/SD shown:

[2]

[1]

Remove the front wheel dust seal [4] from the right
wheel hub.

[3]

17-22

[4]

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
Remove the front wheel dust seal [1] from the left wheel
hub.

[1]

Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
• Replace the front wheel dust seals and front brake
disc mounting bolts with new ones.
• Apply grease to the front wheel dust seal lips.
• Install the front wheel dust seal until it is flush with
the wheel hub surface.
• Install the front brake disc with the " " marked side
facing out.
TORQUE:
Front brake disc mounting bolt:
42 N·m (4.3 kgf·m, 31 lbf·ft)

42 N·m (4.3 kgf·m, 31 lbf·ft)
BRAKE DISC

BEARING (6204UU)

PULSER RING
(NC700XA/XD/SA/SD)

DISTANCE COLLAR

DUST SEAL
DUST SEAL

BEARING (6204UU)

17-23

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
WHEEL BEARING REPLACEMENT
Install the bearing remover head [1] into the bearing [2].
From the opposite side, install the bearing remover
shaft [3] and drive out the bearing from the wheel hub.
Remove the distance collar and drive out the other
bearing.
TOOLS:
Bearing remover head, 20 mm
Bearing remover shaft

07746-0050600
07GGD-0010100

[1]
Never install the old
bearing, once the
bearing has been
removed, the
bearing must be
replaced with new
ones.

[2]

[3]

Drive in a new right side bearing [1] squarely with its
marked side facing up until it is fully seated.

[2]

Install the distance collar.
Drive in a new left side bearing squarely with its marked
side facing up until it is seated on the distance collar.
TOOLS:
Driver [2]
Attachment, 42 x 47 mm [3]
Pilot, 20 mm [4]

07749-0010000
07746-0010300
07746-0040500

[1]

[3]/[4]

INSTALLATION
Install the side collars [1].

[1]

Install the front wheel between the fork legs.
Apply a thin coat of grease to the front axle sliding
surface.
Install the front axle [1] from left side.
Tighten the front axle to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 74 N·m (7.5 kgf·m, 55 lbf·ft)

[1]

17-24

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
NC700XA/XD/SA/
SD:

Install the front wheel speed sensor [1] and bolts [2].
Tighten the bolts securely.
Check the air gap between the front wheel speed
sensor and pulser ring (page 20-24).

NC700XA/XD/SA/SD:
[2]

Install the brake pads (page 19-17).

[1]
NC700X/S:

Install the front brake caliper/bracket assembly [1] and
tighten new brake caliper mounting bolts [2] to the
specified torque.

NC700X/S:
[2]

TORQUE: 30 N·m (3.1 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)

[1]

With the front brake applied, pump the forks up and
down several times to seat the axle and check brake
operation.
Tighten the front axle pinch bolt [1] to the specified
torque.
TORQUE: 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

[1]

FORK
REMOVAL
Remove the following:

NC700XA/XD/SA/SD shown:

[1]

– Front wheel (page 17-20)
– Front fender (page 2-28)
Do not suspend the
brake caliper/
bracket assembly
from the brake
hose. Do not twist
the brake hose.

Remove the brake caliper mounting bolts [1] and brake
caliper/bracket assembly [2].

[2]

17-25

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
Loosen the top bridge pinch bolts [1].

[2]

[4]

When the fork is ready to be disassembled, loosen the
fork cap [2].
Hold the fork legs [3] and loosen the bottom bridge
pinch bolts [4] and lower the fork legs, then remove it.

[1]

[3]

DISASSEMBLY
Be careful not to
scratch the fork
pipe.

Remove the dust seal [1] and stopper ring [2].

[1]

[2]

Remove the following:
–
–
–
–

Remove the fork spring [1].
Drain the fork fluid by pumping the fork pipe several
times.

17-26

[1]

[3]

[2]

[4]

Fork cap [1]
O-ring [2]
Spring collar [3]
Spring seat [4]

[1]

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
Do not over-tighten
the vise on the fork
slider.

Set the fork slider [1] in a vise with a piece of wood or
soft jaws to avoid damage.

If the fork piston
turns with the
socket bolt,
temporarily install
the fork spring,
spring seat, spring
collar and fork cap.

Remove the fork socket bolt [2] and sealing washer [3].

Do not remove the
fork piston ring [4],
unless it is
necessary to
replace with a new
one.

Remove the fork piston [1] and rebound spring [2] from
the fork pipe [3].

[1]

[4]

[2]

[2]/[3]

[1]

[3]

Using quick successive motions, pull the fork pipe out of
the fork slider.

Remove the oil lock piece [1] from the fork slider [2].

[2]

[1]

17-27

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
Remove the following:

[1]

[2]

[3]

– Oil seal [1]
– Back-up ring [2]
– Guide bushing [3]

INSPECTION
FORK SPRING
Check the fork spring for fatigue or damage.
Measure the fork spring free length.
SERVICE LIMITS:
NC700X/XA/XD: 387.0 mm (15.24 in)
NC700S/SA/SD: 349.9 mm (13.78 in)

FORK PIPE/SLIDER
Check the fork pipe [1] and slider [2] for score marks,
scratches, or excessive or abnormal wear.

[1]

[2]

Place the fork pipe on V-blocks.
Turn the fork pipe and measure the runout using a dial
indicator.
Actual runout is 1/2 of the total indicator reading.
SERVICE LIMIT: 0.20 mm (0.008 in)

17-28

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
FORK PISTON/REBOUND SPRING/OIL LOCK PIECE
Check the fork piston [1], piston ring [2] and oil lock
piece [3] for wear or damage.

[2]

[1]

[4]

[3]

Check the rebound spring [4] for fatigue or damage.
Replace any components that are worn or damage.

GUIDE BUSHING/SLIDER BUSHING/BACK-UP RING
Visually inspect the slider and guide bushings [1].
Replace the bushings if there is excessive scoring or
scratching, or if the teflon is worn so the copper surface
appears [2] on more than 3/4 of the entire surface.

[1]

Check the back-up ring [3]; replace it if there is any
distortion at the points shown.

[3]

CHECK POINTS
[2]
Do not damage the
slider bushing,
especially the
sliding surface. To
prevent loss of
tension, do not
open the bushing
more than
necessary.

If the slider bushing [1] will be removed, carefully
remove the slider bushing by prying the bushing gap
with a screwdriver until the bushing can be pulled off by
hand.
Do not remove the slider bushing, unless it is necessary
to replace with a new one.

[1]

17-29

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
ASSEMBLY
FORK PISTON RING

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

FORK PISTON

DUST SEAL
STOPPER RING
O-RING
OIL SEAL
SPRING COLLAR
BACK-UP RING
SPRING SEAT

GUIDE BUSHING
SLIDER BUSHING

FORK SLIDER

FORK SPRING

REBOUND SPRING

FORK PIPE

20 N·m (2.0 kgf·m, 15 lbf·ft)

SEALING WASHER

OIL LOCK PIECE

Do not open the
bushing slit more
than necessary.

Install the slider bushing [1] being careful not to damage
the coating of the bushing, if it has been removed.

Install the oil seal
with its marked side
facing up.

Apply fork fluid to a new oil seal lips.
Install the guide bushing [2], back-up ring [3] and oil
seal [4] onto the fork pipe.

[3]

[2]

[1]

Remove the burrs from the bushing mating surface,
being careful not to peel off the coating.

[4]

Install the rebound spring [1] to the fork piston [2] and
install them into the fork pipe [3].

17-30

[1]

[2]

[3]

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
Install the oil lock piece [1] onto the fork piston [2] end.
Install the fork pipe [3] into the fork slider [4].

Do not over-tighten
the vise on the fork
slider.

[3]

[2]

Set the fork slider in a vise with a piece of wood or soft
jaws to avoid damage.

[1]

[4]

[1]

Install a new sealing washer [1] to the fork socket bolt
[2].
Apply locking agent to the fork socket bolt threads and
install it.

[2]
If the fork piston
turns with the
socket bolt,
temporarily install
the fork spring,
spring seat, spring
collar and fork cap.

Tighten the fork socket bolt [1] to the specified torque.

[1]

TORQUE: 20 N·m (2.0 kgf·m, 15 lbf·ft)

Drive the oil seal [1] until the stopper ring groove [2] is
visible using the special tools.
TOOLS:
Fork seal driver [3]
Fork seal driver attachment [4]

[3]

[2]

[4]

[1]

07947-KA50100
07947-KF00100

17-31

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
Install the stopper ring [1] into the groove of the fork
slider securely.

[1]

Apply fork fluid to a new dust seal lips.
Install the dust seal [2].

[2]
NC700X/XA/XD: 104 mm (4.1 in)
NC700S/SA/SD: 103 mm (4.1 in)

Pour the specified amount of recommended fork fluid
into the fork pipe.
RECOMMENDED FORK FLUID:
Honda ULTRA CUSHION OIL 10W or equivalent
FORK FLUID CAPACITY:
NC700X/XA/XD: 514 ± 2.5 cm3 (17.4 ± 0.08 US oz,
18.1 ± 0.09 Imp oz)
NC700S/SA/SD: 518 ± 2.5 cm3 (17.5 ± 0.08 US oz,
18.1 ± 0.09 Imp oz)
Slowly pump the fork pipe several times to remove any
trapped air from the lower portion of the fork pipe.
Compress the fork pipe fully and measure the fluid level
from the top of the fork pipe.
FLUID LEVEL:
NC700X/XA/XD: 104 mm (4.1 in)
NC700S/SA/SD: 103 mm (4.1 in)
Pull the fork pipe up and install the fork spring [1] with
the tightly wound coil side facing down.

[3]

Install the spring seat [2] and spring collar [3].
[2]

[1]

DOWN

Apply fork fluid to a new O-ring [1] and install it onto the
fork cap [2].
Tighten the fork cap
after installing the
fork pipe into the
fork bridges.

[1]

Loosely install the fork cap by pushing it to the fork pipe
[3].

[3]

17-32

[2]

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
INSTALLATION
Route the wires and
cables properly
(page 1-25).

Install the fork leg through the bottom bridge and top
bridge while aligning top surface of fork pipe with the
top surface of top bridge.

[2]

[1]

Tighten the bottom bridge pinch bolts [1] to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft)
If the fork cap [2] is loosened, tighten the fork cap to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
Tighten the top bridge pinch bolts [3] to the specified
torque.
TORQUE: 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
NC700XA/XD/SA/
SD:

Install the front brake caliper/bracket assembly [1] and
tighten new brake caliper mounting bolts [2] to the
specified torque.

Align

[3]

NC700XA/XD/SA/SD:

[2]

TORQUE: 30 N·m (3.1 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)
Install the following:
– Front fender (page 2-28)
– Front wheel (page 17-24)

[1]

STEERING STEM
REMOVAL
NC700X/XA/XD:

Remove the following:
– Shroud/side cover (page 2-14)
– Handlebar
– NC700X/XA (page 17-10)
– NC700XD (page 17-12)

NC700X/XA:

[3]

[3]

Disconnect the ignition switch 2P (Brown) connector [1]
and immobilizer receiver 4P (Black) connector [2].
Release the each wire harness from the clamps [3].

[1]
NC700XD:

[1]

[2]
[3]

[3]

[2]

17-33

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
NC700X/XA/XD:

Remove the ignition switch wire harness clamp [1] and
immobilizer receiver wire harness clamp [2].

NC700X/XA/XD:

[1]
NC700X:

Remove the bolt [1] and brake hose clamp [2] from the
bottom bridge.

NC700X:

[2]
[1]

[2]
NC700S/SA/SD:

Remove the following:

NC700S/SA/SD:

– Headlight/headlight stay (page 2-27)
– Handlebar
– NC700S/SA (page 17-10)
– NC700SD (page 17-12)
Disconnect the ignition switch 2P (Brown) connector [1]
and immobilizer receiver 4P (Black) connector [2].

NC700S/SA/SD:

Remove the headlight cover (page 2-27).
Disconnect the
connector [1].

combination

meter

16P

(Gray)

[2]

[1]

NC700S/SA/SD:

[4]

[1]

Remove the socket bolts [2], brake hose guide [3] and
combination meter/stay [4].

[2]/[3]

17-34

[2]

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
Remove the cap.
Remove the steering stem nut [1].

[1]

Remove the fork legs (page 17-25).
NC700X/XA/XD:

[1]

[2]

[5]

[3]

Release the following:
–
–
–
–
–
–

Clutch cable (NC700X/XA) [1]
Parking brake cable (NC700XD) [1]
Left handlebar switch wire harness clamp [2]
Throttle cables [3]
Right handlebar switch wire harness clamp [4]
Brake hose [5]

[6]

Remove the top bridge [6].

[4]
NC700XA/XD/SA/
SD:

Remove the bolt [1], front wheel speed sensor wire
guide [2] and brake hose joints [3].

NC700XA/XD/SA/SD:

[2]

[1]

[3]

Straighten the lock washer tabs [1].

[1]

Remove the steering stem adjusting lock nut [2] and
lock washer.

[2]

[1]

17-35

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
Loosen the steering stem adjusting nut [1] using a
special tool.
TOOL:
Steering stem socket [2]

07916-3710101

Hold the steering stem and remove the steering stem
adjusting nut.

[1]

Remove the following:
–
–
–
–
–

[1]

[2]
[2]

[5]

Dust seal [1]
Upper bearing inner race [2]
Upper steering head bearing [3]
Steering stem [4]
Lower steering head bearing [5]

[3]

[4]

BEARING REPLACEMENT
Replace the
bearing, outer and
inner races as a
set.

Remove the upper outer race using a special tool.
TOOLS:
Ball race remover set
Remover attachment [1]
Remover handle [2]

[2]

07953-MJ10000
07953-MJ10100
07953-MJ10200

[1]

Remove the lower bearing outer race using the special
tool and suitable shaft.
TOOL:
Bearing remover [1]

07946-3710500

[1]

17-36

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
Temporarily install the steering stem nut [1] onto the
steering stem [2] to prevent the threads from being
damaged when removing the lower inner race [3] from
the steering stem.

[2]

[3]

Remove the lower inner race with a chisel or equivalent
tools, being careful not to damage the steering stem.
Remove the steering head bearing dust seal [4].

[1]

[4]

Apply specified grease to a new steering head bearing
dust seal lips (page 1-23).
Install the steering head bearing dust seal [1] to the
steering stem.
Install a new lower inner race [2] using a hydraulic
press and special tool.
TOOL:
Attachment, 30 mm I.D. [3]

07746-0030300

[1]

[3]

Drive in a new upper outer race [1] using the special
tools.
TOOLS:
Driver [2]
Attachment, 42 x 47 mm [3]

[2]
[2]

[3]

07749-0010000
07746-0010300

[1]

Drive in a new lower outer race [1] using the special
tools.
TOOLS:
Driver [2]
Attachment, 52 x 55 mm [3]

[1]

[3]

07749-0010000
07746-0010400

[2]

17-37

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
INSTALLATION
LOCK NUT
LOCK WASHER

: BEARINGS
: BEARING RACES
: DUST SEALS

ADJUSTING NUT
UPPER DUST SEAL

LOWER OUTER RACE

UPPER INNER RACE
UPPER BEARING

LOWER BEARING

UPPER OUTER RACE

LOWER INNER RACE
LOWER DUST SEAL

NC700XA/XD/SA/SD:

STEERING STEM

39 N·m (4.0 kgf·m, 29 lbf·ft)

Apply 3 – 5 g (0.1 – 0.2 oz) of specified grease to each
steering head bearing inner races and outer races
sliding surface (page 1-23).

[4]

[1]

Apply specified grease to a new steering head bearing
dust seal lips (page 1-23).
Install the bearings [1] in the lower inner race and upper
outer race.
Install the steering stem [2], upper inner race [3] and
dust seal [4].

[3]

Apply engine oil to the steering stem adjusting nut [1]
threads.

[1]

[2]

Install and tighten the steering stem adjusting nut to the
specified torque using a special tool.
TOOL:
Steering stem socket [2]

07916-3710101

TORQUE: 23 N·m (2.3 kgf·m, 17 lbf·ft)

[1]

17-38

[2]

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
Move the steering stem left and right, lock-to-lock five
times to seat the bearings.

Retighten the adjusting nut [1] to the specified torque
using a special tool.
TOOL:
Steering stem socket [2]

[2]

07916-3710101

TORQUE: 23 N·m (2.3 kgf·m, 17 lbf·ft)

[1]

Install a new lock washer [1], aligning its short bent tabs
with the grooves in the steering stem adjusting nut.

[3]

[1]

Install the lock nut [2] until it contacts with the lock
washer.
Further tighten the lock nut, within 90°, to align its
grooves with the tabs of the lock washer.
Bend up the long lock washer tabs [3] into the grooves
of the lock nut.

[2]
NC700XA/XD/SA/
SD:

Install the brake hose joints [1], front wheel speed
sensor wire guide [2] and bolt [3].

NC700XA/XD/SA/SD:

[3]
[2]

[4]

• Route the wires, hose and cable properly (page 125).
• Note the installation position of the brake hose
joints.
– Right side: Brake sub hose C (white painted [4]
hose)
– Left side: Front brake hose D
Tighten the bolt securely.
[3]

[1]

17-39

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
Install the top bridge [1].
NC700X/XA/XD:

[6]

[5]

[2]

[4]

Install the following:
–
–
–
–
–
–

Brake hose [2]
Right handlebar switch wire harness clamp [3]
Throttle cables [4]
Left handlebar switch wire harness clamp [5]
Clutch cable (NC700X/XA) [6]
Parking brake cable (NC700XD) [6]

[1]

Route the wires, hose and cable properly (page 1-25).
[3]

Install the steering stem nut [1], but do not tighten the
steering stem nut yet.
Install the fork legs (page 17-33).
Tighten the steering stem nut to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 103 N·m (10.5 kgf·m, 76 lbf·ft)
Turn the steering stem left and right, lock-to-lock
several times to make sure the steering stem moves
smoothly without play or binding.
Install the cap to the steering stem nut.

[1]
NC700X:

Install the brake hose clamp [1] and bolt [2] to the
bottom bridge.

NC700X:

[2]

Be sure to rest the brake hose clamp against the
bottom bridge tab [3].

[1]
NC700X/XA/XD:

Install the ignition switch wire harness clamp [1] and
immobilizer receiver wire harness clamp [2].

NC700X/XA/XD:

[1]

17-40

[3]

[2]

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING
NC700X/XA/XD:

Install the wire harness from the clamps [1].
Connect the ignition switch 2P (Brown) connector [2]
and immobilizer receiver 4P (Black) connector [3].

NC700X/XA:

[1]

[1]

Install the following:
– Shroud/side cover (page 2-14)
– Handlebar
– NC700X/XA (page 17-14)
– NC700XD (page 17-17)

[2]
NC700XD:

[3]
[1]

[1]

[2]
NC700S/SA/SD:

Install the combination meter/stay [1], brake hose guide
[2] and socket bolts [3].

[3]
NC700S/SA/SD:

[4]

[1]

• Route the wires, hose and cable properly (page 125).
• Install the brake hose guide against the combination
meter stay.
Connect the combination meter 16P (Gray) connector
[4].

[2]/[3]
NC700S/SA/SD:

Install the headlight cover (page 2-27).

[3]

NC700S/SA/SD:

Connect the ignition switch 2P (Brown) connector [1]
and immobilizer receiver 4P (Black) connector [2].
Install the following:
– Headlight/headlight stay (page 2-27)
– Handlebar
– NC700S/SA (page 17-14)
– NC700SD (page 17-17)
Perform the digital clock set procedure (page 22-14).

[2]

[1]

17-41

dummyhead

FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING

CLUTCH LEVER (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the clutch lever pivot nut [1] and bolt [2].

[2]

Remove the clutch lever [3] and disconnect the clutch
cable [4].

[4]

[1]

[3]

Connect the clutch cable [1] to the clutch lever [2].
Install the clutch lever to the clutch lever bracket.
Apply grease to the clutch lever pivot bolt sliding
surface.
Install and tighten the clutch lever pivot bolt to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 1.0 N·m (0.1 kgf·m, 0.7 lbf·ft)
Install and tighten the clutch lever pivot nut to the
specified torque while holding the clutch lever pivot bolt.
TORQUE: 6.0 N·m (0.6 kgf·m, 4.4 lbf·ft)
[1]

17-42

[2]

dummytext

18. REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION

COMPONENT LOCATION ··························18-2

SHOCK LINKAGE····································· 18-13

SERVICE INFORMATION ···························18-4

SHOCK ABSORBER ································ 18-14

TROUBLESHOOTING·································18-5

SWINGARM ·············································· 18-16

REAR WHEEL ·············································18-6

18

18-1

dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION

COMPONENT LOCATION
REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION

NC700X/XA/S/SA:
NC700XA/SA shown:
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 32 lbf·ft)
98 N·m (10.0 kgf·m, 72 lbf·ft)
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 32 lbf·ft)

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)

98 N·m (10.0 kgf·m, 72 lbf·ft)

32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)

44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 32 lbf·ft)

18-2

dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
NC700XD/SD:

44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 32 lbf·ft)

98 N·m (10.0 kgf·m, 72 lbf·ft)
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 32 lbf·ft)

32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)

98 N·m (10.0 kgf·m, 72 lbf·ft)

32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)

44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 32 lbf·ft)

18-3

dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION

SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
• When servicing the rear wheel and suspension, support the motorcycle using a safety stand or hoist.
• A contaminated brake disc or pad reduces stopping power. Discard contaminated pads and clean a contaminated disc with a
high quality brake degreasing agent.
• After the rear wheel installation, check the brake operation by applying the brake pedal.
• Use only tires marked "TUBELESS" and tubeless valves on rim marked "TUBELESS TIRE APPLICABLE".
• Use genuine Honda replacement bolts and nuts for all suspension pivot and mounting point.
• For brake system information (page 19-5).

SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM
Minimum tire tread depth
Cold tire pressure
Axle runout
Wheel rim runout

Driver only
Driver and passenger
Radial
Axial

STANDARD
–
290 kPa (2.90 kgf/cm2, 42 psi)
290 kPa (2.90 kgf/cm2, 42 psi)
–
–
–

Wheel balance weight
Drive
chain

Size/link

Slack

–
NC700X/
DID
XA/S/SA
RK
NC700XD
DID
/SD
RK
NC700X/XA/XD
NC700S/SA/SD

DID520V0-114LE
RK520MKO-114LE
DID520V0-112LE
RK520MKO-112LE
30 – 40 (1.2 – 1.6)
25 – 35 (1.0 – 1.4)

Unit: mm (in)
SERVICE LIMIT
2.0 (0.08)
–
–
0.2 (0.01)
2.0 (0.08)
2.0 (0.08)
60 g (2.1 oz)
max.
–
–
–
–
–
–

TORQUE VALUES
ITEM

Q'TY

Driven sprocket nut
Rear brake disc mounting bolt
Rear axle nut
Shock absorber mounting nut
Shock arm nut
Shock link nut
Drive chain slider mounting screw
Swingarm pivot nut
Step holder mounting socket bolt
Gearshift arm pinch bolt
(NC700X/XA/S/SA)

5
5
1
2
1
2
2
1
4
1

18-4

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
12
8
18
10
10
10
5
18
8
6

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
108 (11.0, 80)
42 (4.3, 31)
98 (10.0, 72)
44 (4.5, 32)
44 (4.5, 32)
44 (4.5, 32)
5.9 (0.6, 4.4)
98 (10.0, 72)
32 (3.3, 24)
12 (1.2, 9)

REMARKS
U-nut
ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.
U-nut
U-nut
U-nut
U-nut
U-nut
ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.

dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION

TROUBLESHOOTING
Steers to one side or does not track straight
• Drive chain adjusters not adjusted equally
• Bent axle
• Bent frame
• Worn swingarm pivot components
Rear wheel wobbling
• Bent rim
• Worn wheel bearing
• Worn driven flange bearing
• Faulty tire
• Bent frame or swingarm
• Axle not tightened properly
• Unbalanced tire and wheel
• Insufficient tire pressure
Wheel hard to turn
• Brake drag
• Faulty wheel bearing
• Faulty driven flange bearing
• Bent axle
• Drive chain too tight (page 3-16)
Soft suspension
• Weak shock absorber spring
• Oil leakage from damper unit
• Insufficient tire pressure
Stiff suspension
• Bent shock absorber damper rod
• Damaged suspension or swingarm pivot bearing
• Bent swingarm pivot or frame
Rear suspension noisy
• Loose suspension fasteners
• Faulty shock absorber

18-5

dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION

REAR WHEEL
REMOVAL
Support the motorcycle using a safety stand or hoist,
raise the rear wheel off the ground.
NC700XA/XD/SA/
SD:

Remove the bolts [1] and rear wheel speed sensor [2].

NC700XA/XD/SA/SD:
[2]

[1]

Loosen the lock nut [1], drive chain adjusting nut [2] and
axle nut [3].

[2]

[3]

Push the rear wheel forward.
Derail the drive chain [4] from the driven sprocket.
Remove the axle nut, washer [5] and adjusting plate [6].
Do not operate the
brake pedal after
removing the rear
wheel.

Remove the axle [7], adjusting plate and rear wheel.

[4]

[1]

[5]

Remove the side collars [1].

[1]

18-6

[6]

[7]

dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
INSPECTION
WHEEL RIM
Check the rim runout by placing the wheel in a truing
stand.
Spin the wheel by hand, and measure the runout using
a dial indicator.
SERVICE LIMITS:
Radial: 2.0 mm (0.08 in)
Axial: 2.0 mm (0.08 in)

AXLE
Place the axle on V-blocks.
Turn the axle and measure the runout using a dial
indicator.
Actual runout is 1/2 of the total indicator reading.
SERVICE LIMIT: 0.2 mm (0.01 in)

WHEEL AND DRIVEN FLANGE BEARINGS
Turn the inner race of each bearing with your finger.
The bearings should turn smoothly and quietly.
Also check that the outer race fits tightly in the wheel
hub and driven flange.
Replace the
bearings as a set.

Remove and discard the bearings if the races do not
turn smoothly, quietly, or if they fit loosely in the wheel
hub and driven flange.
WHEEL BALANCE
For wheel balance servicing (page 17-22).
DRIVEN SPROCKET
For driven sprocket inspection (page 3-18).

DISASSEMBLY
Loosen the rear brake disc mounting bolts [1] in a
crisscross pattern in 2 or 3 steps.
Remove the rear brake disc mounting bolts, brake disc
[2] and pulser ring (NC700XA/XD/SA/SD) [3].

NC700XA/XD/SA/SD shown:

[1]

[3]

Remove the dust seal [4] from the right wheel hub.

[2]

[4]

18-7

dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
Remove the dust seal [1] from the driven flange [2].
If you will
disassemble the
driven flange,
loosen the driven
sprocket nuts [3] in
a crisscross pattern
in 2 or 3 steps,
before removing the
driven flange from
the left wheel hub.

[1]

Remove the driven flange assembly.

[2]

[3]

[2]

[1]

Remove the damper rubbers [1] and O-ring [2].

Remove the driven sprocket nuts [1] and driven
sprocket [2].

[1]

[2]

Drive out the rear wheel distance collar B [1].
TOOLS:
Driver [2]
Attachment, 22 x 24 mm [3]
Pilot, 20 mm [4]

[2]

07749-0010000
07746-0010800
07746-0040500
[1]

[3]/[4]

18-8

dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
Drive out the driven flange bearing [1].

[1]

Install the bearing remover head [1] into the bearing.
From the opposite side, install the bearing remover
shaft [2] and drive out the bearing from the wheel hub.
TOOLS:
Bearing remover head, 20 mm
Bearing remover shaft

07746-0050600
07GGD-0010100

Remove the distance collar and drive out the other
bearing.

[1]

[2]

ASSEMBLY
DRIVEN FLANGE
42 N·m (4.3 kgf·m, 31 lbf·ft)

BEARING (22 x 50 x 15)
BRAKE DISC
DUST SEAL

PULSER RING
(NC700XA/XD/SA/SD)

108 N·m (11.0 kgf·m, 80 lbf·ft)

DUST SEAL

DRIVEN SPROCKET
DAMPER RUBBER

BEARING (6204UU)

REAR WHEEL
DISTANCE COLLAR B

DISTANCE COLLAR

O-RING
BEARING (6204UU)

18-9

dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
Never install the old
bearing, once the
bearing has been
removed, the
bearing must be
replaced with new
ones.

Drive in a new right side bearing [1] squarely until it is
fully seated.
TOOLS:
Driver [2]
Attachment, 42 x 47 mm [3]
Pilot, 20 mm [4]

07749-0010000
07746-0010300
07746-0040500

[6]

[2]

[5]

Install the distance collar [5].
[1]

Drive in a new left side bearing [6] squarely until it is
seated on the distance collar.

[3]/[4]

Drive the rear wheel distance collar B [1] to a new
driven flange bearing [2].
TOOLS:
Driver [3]
Attachment, 28 x 30 mm [4]
Pilot, 20 mm [5]

[3]

[4]/[5]

07749-0010000
07946-1870100
07746-0040500

[1]

[2]

Drive in the driven flange bearing/collar [1] squarely
with its collar side facing down until it is fully seated.
TOOLS:
Driver [2]
Attachment, 42 x 47 mm [3]
Pilot, 20 mm [4]

[2]

07749-0010000
07746-0010300
07746-0040500

[1]

Install the driven sprocket [1] to the driven flange.

[2]

Install the driven sprocket with its marked side facing
out.
Temporarily install the driven sprocket nuts [2].

[1]

18-10

[3]/[4]

dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
Apply grease to a new O-ring [1].
Install the damper rubbers [2] and the O-ring into the
left wheel hub.

[1]

[2]

Install the driven flange assembly [1] into the left wheel
hub.

[3]

Tighten the driven sprocket nuts [2] to the specified
torque in a crisscross pattern in 2 or 3 steps.
TORQUE: 108 N·m (11.0 kgf·m, 80 lbf·ft)
Apply grease to a new dust seal lips.
Install the dust seal [3] to the driven flange.

[1]

Install the pulser ring (NC700XA/XD/SA/SD) [1] onto
right wheel hub.

[2]

NC700XA/XD/SA/SD shown:

[4]

[3]

Install the rear brake disc [2] with its arrow mark [3]
facing out.
Install and tighten new brake disc bolts [4] to the
specified torque in a crisscross pattern in 2 or 3 steps.
TORQUE: 42 N·m (4.3 kgf·m, 31 lbf·ft)
Apply grease to a new dust seal lips.
Install the dust seal [5] to the right wheel hub.
Do not get grease on the brake disc.

[2]

[1]

[5]

INSTALLATION
Install the right side collar [1] and left side collar [2].

[2]

[1]

18-11

dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
Install the brake caliper/bracket assembly [1] to the
swingarm.

NC700XA/SA shown:

Align the bracket groove with swingarm tab.

[1]

Align

NC700XD/SD:

[1]
Be careful not to
damage the brake
pads.

Install the rear wheel in the swingarm aligning the brake
disc between the brake pads.

Align
[2]

[5]

Install the drive chain [1] over the driven sprocket.
Apply a thin coat of grease to the rear axle outer
surface.
Install the rear axle [2] from the left side through the
axle adjusting plate [3], swingarm, rear wheel and
collars.
Install the adjusting plate, washer [4] and rear axle nut
[5].
Tighten the rear axle nut to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 98 N·m (10.0 kgf·m, 72 lbf·ft)

[1]

[3]

[4]

Adjust the drive chain slack (page 3-16).
NC700XA/XD/SA/
SD:

Install the rear wheel speed sensor [1] and bolts [2].
Tighten the bolts securely.
Check the air gap between the rear wheel speed sensor
and pulser ring (page 20-24).

NC700XD/SD:

NC700XA/XD/SA/SD:
[1]

Check the parking brake lock operation (page 3-24).

[2]

18-12

[3]

dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION

SHOCK LINKAGE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Support the motorcycle using a safety stand or hoist,
raise the rear wheel off the ground.

[5]/[6]

Remove the following:
–
–
–
–

Shock link bolt [1] and nut [2]
Shock absorber lower mounting bolt [3] and nut [4]
Shock arm bolt [5] and nut [6]
Shock linkage assembly [7]

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
TORQUE:
Shock absorber mounting nut:
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 32 lbf·ft)
Shock arm nut:
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 32 lbf·ft)
Shock link nut:
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 32 lbf·ft)

[1]/[2]

[3]/[4]

[7]

DISASSEMBLY/INSPECTION/
ASSEMBLY
Remove the shock link bolt [1], nut [2] and shock links
[3] from the shock arm [4].

[4]

[3]

Remove the collars [1] from the shock arm [2].

[1]/[2]

[2]

Check the collars for wear, damage or fatigue.
Check the shock arm for cracks or damage.
Replace them if necessary.
Check the needle bearings [3] for damage or loose fit.
If the needle bearings are damaged, replace them
(page 18-14).
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
TORQUE:
Shock link nut:
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 32 lbf·ft)

[3]

[1]

18-13

dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
BEARING REPLACEMENT
Remove the needle bearings [1] using the special tools.
TOOLS:
Bearing remover set, 17 mm [2] 07936-3710300
Remover handle [3]
07936-3710100
Remover weight [4]
07741-0010201
[3]

[4]
Never install the old
bearing, once the
bearing has been
removed, the
bearing must be
replaced with new
ones.

Apply molybdenum disulfide grease to new needle
bearings rotating area.

[2]

[2]

[1]
[3]/[4]

Install the needle bearings [1] with the marked and dust
seal side facing out until it is flush with the shock arm
surface using a hydraulic press and special tools as
shown.
TOOLS:
Driver [2]
Attachment, 22 x 24 mm [3]
Pilot, 17 mm [4]

07749-0010000
07746-0010800
07746-0040400

[1]

SHOCK ABSORBER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Support the motorcycle using a safety stand or hoist,
raise the rear wheel off the ground.
Remove the shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA/XD) (page
2-14).
Remove the shelter/side cover (NC700S/SA/SD) (page
2-15).
Remove the shock arm bolt [1] and nut [2].
Remove the shock absorber lower mounting bolt [3]
and nut [4].

[3]/[4]

[1]/[2]

Remove the shock absorber upper mounting nut [1].
Remove the shock absorber upper mounting socket
bolt [2] and shock absorber.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
TORQUE:
Shock absorber mounting nut:
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 32 lbf·ft)
Shock arm nut:
44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 32 lbf·ft)

[1]/[2]

18-14

dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
INSPECTION
Visually inspect the shock absorber for wear or
damage.
Check the following:
–
–
–
–

Damper rod [1] for bend or damage
Damper unit [2] for deformation or oil leaks
Rubber bumper [3] for wear or damage
Bushing [4] for wear or damage

Replace the shock absorber as an assembly if
necessary.

[4]

[2]

[1]

[3]

Remove the collar [1] and dust seals [2].
Check the needle bearings [3] for damage or loose fit,
replace it if necessary (page 18-15).
Check the collar for wear or damage, replace it if
necessary.
Apply molybdenum disulfide grease to the needle
bearings rotating area and new dust seal lips.
Install the dust seals until it is flush with the shock
absorber surface.
Install the collar.

[3]
[1]

[2]

BEARING REPLACEMENT
Drive the needle bearing [1] out of the lower pivot using
a hydraulic press and special tool.
TOOLS:
Driver [2]
Attachment, 22 x 24 mm [3]
Pilot, 17 mm [4]

[2]
[3]

07749-0010000
07746-0010800
07746-0040400

[4]
Never install the old
bearing, once the
bearing has been
removed, the
bearing must be
replaced with new
ones.

Apply molybdenum disulfide grease to new needle
bearings rotating area.
Install the needle bearing [1] into the lower pivot to the
specified range using a hydraulic press and special
tools as shown.
TOOLS:
Driver [2]
Attachment, 22 x 24 mm [3]
Pilot, 17 mm [4]

[1]

[2]
[3]

5.0 – 5.5 mm
(0.20 – 0.22 in)

07749-0010000
07746-0010800
07746-0040400

[4]

[1]

18-15

dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
SHOCK ABSORBER DISPOSAL
PROCEDURE
Center punch the shock absorber to mark the drilling
point.
Wrap the shock absorber inside a plastic bag.
Support the shock absorber in a vise as shown.
Through the open end of the bag, insert a drill motor
with a sharp 2 – 3 mm (5/64 – 1/8 in) drill bit.

31 mm
(1.2 in)

• Do not use a dull drill bit which could cause a buildup of excessive heat and pressure inside the
damper, leading to an explosion and severe injury.
• The shock absorber contains nitrogen gas and oil
under high pressure. Do not drill any further down
the damper case than the measurement given
above, or you may drill into the oil chamber. Then
high pressure oil may cause serious injury.
• Always wear eye protection to avoid getting metal
shavings in your eyes when the gas pressure is
released. The plastic bag is only intended to shield
you from the escaping gas.
Hold the bag around the drill motor and briefly run the
drill motor inside the bag; this will inflate the bag with air
from the motor and help keep the bag from getting
caught in the bit when you start.

SWINGARM
REMOVAL
Remove the following:

NC700X/XA/S/SA:

[2]

– Rear wheel (page 18-6)
– Muffler (page 2-32)
NC700X/XA/S/SA:

Remove the gearshift arm pinch bolt [1] and gearshift
arm [2].

[1]

Remove the step holder mounting socket bolts [1] and
left step holder [2].

NC700X/XA/S/SA shown:

[2]

18-16

[1]

dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
Remove the socket bolts [1] and drive chain case [2].

[2]

[1]
NC700X/XA/S/SA:

Remove the socket bolts [1] and brake hose guide [2].
Release the brake hose [3] and rear wheel speed
sensor wire (NC700XA/SA) [4] from the brake hose
guide.

NC700XA/SA shown:
[2]

[4]

[3]

[1]
NC700XD/SD:

Remove the socket bolts [1] and brake hose guide [2].

NC700XD/SD:

[4]

[2]

Release the brake hose [3] and rear wheel speed
sensor wire [4] from the brake hose guide.
Remove the screws [5] and parking brake cable guides
[6].

[3]

[1]

[5]/[6]

Remove the shock link bolt [1] and nut [2].
Remove the shock absorber lower mounting bolt [3]
and nut [4].

[1]/[2]

[3]/[4]

18-17

dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
Remove the step holder mounting socket bolts [1] and
right step holder [2].
Do not twist the brake hose.

[1]

[2]

[4]

[1]/[2]/[3]

Remove the swingarm pivot nut [1], washer [2], pivot
bolt [3] and swingarm [4].

DISASSEMBLY/INSPECTION
Remove the drive chain slider mounting screws [1] and
washers [2].

[5]

[1]/[2]

[3]

Remove the drive chain slider [3] by releasing the slider
slit [4] from the swingarm tab and slider tabs [5] from
the swingarm holes.

[4]

Remove the pivot collars [1], dust seals [2] and distance
collar [3] from the swingarm pivot.
Check the collar for wear, damage or fatigue.

[1]

Check the needle bearings [4] for damage or loose fit,
replace it if necessary (page 18-19).

[2]

[3]

[4]

18-18

[1]

[2]

dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
Remove the collar [1] form the shock absorber bracket.
Check the collar for wear, damage or fatigue.
Check the needle bearings [2] for damage or loose fit,
replace it if necessary (page 18-19).

[2]

[1]

Turn the inner race of the right side pivot ball bearings
with your finger.
The bearing should turn smoothly and quietly.
Also check that the bearing outer race fits tightly in the
swingarm pivot.
Remove and discard the bearing if the race does not
turn smoothly and quietly, or if it fits loosely in the
swingarm pivot (page 18-19).

PIVOT BEARING REPLACEMENT
Remove the snap ring [1] from the right pivot.

[1]

Drive the needle bearing [1] and ball bearing [2] out of
the right pivot using a hydraulic press and special tool.

[3]

TOOLS:
Driver, 15 x 280L [3]
Pilot, 28 mm [4]

[4]

07949-3710001
07746-0041100

[2]

[1]

18-19

dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
Drive the needle bearing [1] out of the left pivot using a
hydraulic press and special tool.
TOOLS:
Driver, 15 x 280L [2]
Pilot, 32 mm [3]

[2]

[3]

07949-3710001
07MAD-PR90200
[1]

Remove the needle bearings [1] out of the shock
absorber bracket using the special tools.

[4]

[2]

[1]

TOOLS:
Bearing remover set, 17 mm [2] 07936-3710300
Remover handle [3]
07936-3710100
Remover weight [4]
07741-0010201

[3]

Apply molybdenum disulfide grease to a new needle
bearing rotating area.

[2]

[3]/[4]

Install the needle bearing [1] into the left pivot with the
marked side facing up to the specified range using a
hydraulic press and special tools as shown.
TOOLS:
Driver [2]
Attachment, 37 mm [3]
Pilot, 28 mm [4]

07749-0010000
07ZMD-MBW0200
07746-0041100

4.5 – 5.0 mm
(0.18 – 0.20 in)

[1]

Apply grease to a new ball bearing rotating area.

[2]

Install the ball bearing [1] into the right pivot with the
marked side facing out until it is fully seated using a
hydraulic press and special tools as shown.
TOOLS:
Driver [2]
Attachment, 37 mm [3]
Pilot, 20 mm [4]

[3]/[4]

07749-0010000
07ZMD-MBW0200
07746-0040500

[1]

18-20

dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
Apply molybdenum disulfide grease to a new needle
bearing rotating area.

[2]

[3]/[4]

Install the needle bearing [1] into the right pivot with the
marked side facing out until it is fully seated using a
hydraulic press and special tools as shown.
TOOLS:
Driver [2]
Attachment, 37 mm [3]
Pilot, 30 mm [4]

07749-0010000
07ZMD-MBW0200
07746-0040700

[1]

Apply molybdenum disulfide grease to a new needle
bearing rotating area.

[2]

Install the needle bearings [1] into the shock absorber
bracket with the marked side facing out until it is flush
with the bracket surface using a hydraulic press and
special tools as shown.
TOOLS:
Driver [2]
Attachment, 22 x 24 mm [3]
Pilot, 17 mm [4]

[3]/[4]

07749-0010000
07746-0010800
07746-0040400

[1]

Install the snap ring [1] into the right pivot groove
securely.

[1]

• Do not reuse the snap ring which could easily spin in
the groove.
• Make sure that the snap ring is firmly seated in the
groove.

18-21

dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
ASSEMBLY
SNAP RING

DUST SEAL

NEEDLE BEARING

PIVOT COLLAR

BEARING
DISTANCE COLLAR

NEEDLE BEARING

NEEDLE BEARING
SWINGARM

DUST SEAL
PIVOT COLLAR

DRIVE CHAIN SLIDER

WASHER
5.9 N·m (0.6 kgf·m, 4.4 lbf·ft)

NEEDLE BEARING
DRIVE CHAIN ADJUSTERS
COLLAR

Install the collar [1] to the shock absorber bracket.

[1]

Apply molybdenum disulfide grease to new dust seal
rips.
Install the distance collar [1] and dust seals [2] to the
swingarm pivot.

[4]

Install the dust seal flush with the pivot surface.
Install the wide pivot collar [3] to the swingarm right
pivot.
Install the narrow pivot collar [4] to the swingarm left
pivot.

[1]

[2]

18-22

[3]

dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
Install the drive chain slider [1].

[3]

[4]/[5]

[1]

• Align the drive chain slider slit [2] from the swingarm
tab.
• Align the drive chain slider tabs [3] from the
swingarm holes.
Install the washers [4] and drive chain slider mounting
screws [5].
Tighten the drive chain slider mounting screws to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 5.9 N·m (0.6 kgf·m, 4.4 lbf·ft)
[2]

INSTALLATION
Apply a thin coat of grease to the swingarm pivot bolt
sliding surface.

[1]

Set the drive chain [1] onto the swingarm [2] and install
the swingarm to the frame.
Install the swingarm pivot bolt [3] from the left side.

[3]

[2]

Install the washer [1] and swingarm pivot nut [2].
Tighten the swingarm pivot nut to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 98 N·m (10.0 kgf·m, 72 lbf·ft)

[1]/[2]

Install the right step holder [1] and step holder mounting
socket bolts [2].
Tighten the step holder mounting socket bolts to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)

[2]

[1]

18-23

dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
Install the shock arm [1] and shock absorber lower
mounting bolt [2] to the shock absorber.

[4]

Install and tighten the shock absorber lower mounting
nut [3] to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 32 lbf·ft)
Install the shock links [4] and shock link bolt [5] to the
swingarm.
Install and tighten the shock link nut [6] to the specified
torque.
TORQUE: 44 N·m (4.5 kgf·m, 32 lbf·ft)
[5]/[6]
NC700X/XA/S/SA:

Install the rear wheel speed sensor wire (NC700XA/SA)
[1] and brake hose [2] to the brake hose guide [3].
Install the brake hose guide and socket bolts [4].

[2]/[3]

[1]

NC700XA/SA shown:
[3]

[1]

Tighten the socket bolts securely.
[2]

[4]
NC700XD/SD:

Install the rear wheel speed sensor wire [1] and brake
hose [2] to the brake hose guide [3].

NC700XD/SD:

[1]

[3]

Install the brake hose guide and socket bolts [4].
Tighten the socket bolts securely.
Install the parking brake cable guides [5] and screws
[6].
Tighten the screws securely.
[2]

[4]

Install the drive chain case [1] and socket bolts [2].

[1]

Tighten the socket bolts securely.

[2]

18-24

[5]/[6]

dummyhead

REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION
Install the left step holder [1] and step holder mounting
socket bolts [2].

NC700X/XA/S/SA shown:

Tighten the step holder mounting socket bolts to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)

[1]
NC700X/XA/S/SA:

Install the gearshift arm [1] to the gearshift spindle.

[2]

NC700X/XA/S/SA:

Align

[1]

Align the gearshift arm slit with the gearshift spindle
punch mark.
Install and tighten a new gearshift arm pinch bolt [2] to
the specified torque.
TORQUE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Install the following:
– Muffler (page 2-32)
– Rear wheel (page 18-11)
[2]

18-25

dummyhead

MEMO

dummytext

19. HYDRAULIC BRAKE

COMPONENT LOCATION ··························19-2

REAR MASTER CYLINDER ····················· 19-23

SERVICE INFORMATION ···························19-5

FRONT BRAKE CALIPER
(NC700X/S) ··············································· 19-26

TROUBLESHOOTING·································19-7
BRAKE FLUID REPLACEMENT/AIR
BLEEDING (NC700X/S) ······························19-8

FRONT BRAKE CALIPER
(NC700XA/XD/SA/SD) ······························ 19-28
REAR BRAKE CALIPER ·························· 19-30

BRAKE FLUID REPLACEMENT/AIR
BLEEDING (NC700XA/XD/SA/SD) ···········19-11

PARKING BRAKE CALIPER
(NC700XD/SD) ·········································· 19-32

BRAKE PAD/DISC ····································19-16
BRAKE PEDAL ········································· 19-37
FRONT MASTER CYLINDER ···················19-20
PARKING BRAKE LEVER
(NC700XD/SD) ·········································· 19-38

19

19-1

dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE

COMPONENT LOCATION
HYDRAULIC BRAKE

NC700XA/SA shown:

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)

34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)

17 N·m (1.7 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)

NC700X/S:
34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)

30 N·m (3.1 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)

19-2

dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
NC700X/XA/S/SA:
NC700XA/SA shown:

34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)
10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)
32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)

12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

19-3

dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
NC700XD/SD:

10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)

34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)

32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)

22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

31 N·m (3.2 kgf·m, 23 lbf·ft)

19-4

dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE

SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL

Frequent inhalation of brake pad dust, regardless of material composition, could be hazardous to your health.
• Avoid breathing dust particles.
• Never use an air hose or brush to clean brake assemblies. Use an OSHA-approved vacuum cleaner.

Spilling brake fluid will severely damage instrument lenses and painted surface. It is also harmful to some rubber parts. Be careful
whenever you remove the reservoir cover; make sure the front reservoir is horizontal first.
• A contaminated brake disc or pad reduces stopping power. Discard contaminated pads and clean a contaminated disc with a
high quality brake degreasing agent.
• Check the brake system by applying the brake lever or pedal after the air bleeding.
• Never allow contaminates (dirt, water, etc.) to get into an open reservoir.
• Once the hydraulic system has been opened, or if the brake feels spongy, the system must be bled.
• Always use fresh DOT 4 brake fluid from a sealed container when servicing the system. Do not mix different types of fluid, they
may not be compatible.
• Always check brake operation before riding the motorcycle.
• This section covers service of the conventional brake components of the brake system. For Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
service (page 20-4).

SPECIFICATIONS
Front

Rear

ITEM
Specified brake fluid
Brake disc thickness
Brake disc warpage
Master cylinder I.D.
Master piston O.D.
Caliper cylinder I.D. (NC700X/S)
Caliper piston O.D. (NC700X/S)
Caliper cylinder I.D.
Cylinder A
(NC700XA/XD/SA/SD)
Cylinder B
Caliper piston O.D.
Piston A
(NC700XA/XD/SA/SD)
Piston B
Specified brake fluid
Brake disc thickness
Brake disc warpage
Master cylinder I.D.
Master piston O.D.
Caliper cylinder I.D.
Caliper piston O.D.
Brake pedal height

STANDARD
DOT 4
4.8 – 5.2 (0.19 – 0.20)
–
11.000 – 11.043 (0.4331 – 0.4348)
10.957 – 10.984 (0.4314 – 0.4324)
27.000 – 27.050 (1.0630 – 1.0650)
26.918 – 26.968 (1.0598 – 1.0617)
22.650 – 22.700 (0.8917 – 0.8937)
27.000 – 27.050 (1.0630 – 1.0650)
22.585 – 22.618 (0.8892 – 0.8905)
26.918 – 26.968 (1.0598 – 1.0617)
DOT 4
4.8 – 5.2 (0.19 – 0.20)
–
14.000 – 14.043 (0.5512 – 0.5529)
13.957 – 13.984 (0.5495 – 0.5506)
38.18 – 38.23 (1.503 – 1.505)
38.098 – 38.148 (1.4999 – 1.5019)
85.0 – 87.0 (3.35 – 3.43)

Unit: mm (in)
SERVICE LIMIT
–
4.0 (0.16)
0.30 (0.012)
11.055 (0.4352)
10.945 (0.4309)
27.060 (1.0654)
26.91 (1.059)
22.712 (0.8941)
27.060 (1.0654)
22.56 (0.888)
26.91 (1.059)
–
4.0 (0.16)
0.30 (0.012)
14.055 (0.5533)
13.945 (0.5490)
38.24 (1.506)
38.09 (1.500)
–

19-5

dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
TORQUE VALUES

2

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
8

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
5.4 (0.6, 4.0)

3

8

5.4 (0.6, 4.0)

4

4

1.5 (0.2, 1.1)

1
2
1
2
4

6
10
8
6
10

10 (1.0, 7)
17 (1.7, 13)
22 (2.2, 16)
12 (1.2, 9)
34 (3.5, 25)

5

10

34 (3.5, 25)

1
1

4
6

1.2 (0.1, 0.9)
1.0 (0.1, 0.7)

1
2

6
6

5.9 (0.6, 4.4)
12 (1.2, 9)

4
1

8
4

32 (3.3, 24)
1.5 (0.2, 1.1)

1

8

17 (1.7, 13)

1

8

22 (2.2, 16)

Front brake caliper bracket pin

1

8

12 (1.2, 9)

Front brake caliper mounting bolt
Rear brake caliper pin

2
1

8
12

30 (3.1, 22)
27 (2.8, 20)

Parking brake caliper mounting
bolt (NC700XD/SD)
Parking brake caliper pin bolt
(NC700XD/SD)
Parking brake pad pin
(NC700XD/SD)
Parking brake adjuster bolt lock
nut (NC700XD/SD)
Parking brake cable mounting nut
(NC700XD/SD)

2

8

31 (3.2, 23)

Apply locking agent to the threads.
Apply 0.4 g (0.01 oz) silicone grease
to the sliding surface.
Apply locking agent to the threads.
Apply 0.4 g (0.01 oz) silicone grease
to the sliding surface.
ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.
Apply 0.4 g (0.01 oz) silicone grease
to the sliding surface.
ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.

1

8

22 (2.2, 16)

Apply locking agent to the threads.

2

8

17 (1.7, 13)

ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.

1

8

17 (1.7, 13)

1

10

10 (1.0, 7)

ITEM

Q'TY

Brake caliper bleed valve
(NC700X/S)
Brake caliper bleed valve
(NC700XA/XD/SA/SD)
Master cylinder reservoir cover
screw
Rear brake reservoir mounting bolt
Brake pad pin
Rear brake caliper mounting bolt
Front master cylinder holder bolt
Brake hose oil bolt
(NC700X/S)
Brake hose oil bolt
(NC700XA/XD/SA/SD)
Front brake light switch screw
Front brake lever pivot bolt
Front brake lever pivot nut
Rear master cylinder mounting
bolt
Step holder mounting socket bolt
Rear master cylinder hose joint
screw
Rear master cylinder push rod lock
nut
Front brake caliper pin

19-6

REMARKS

ALOC bolt; replace with a new one.

Apply 0.10 g (0.004 oz) silicone
grease to the sliding surface.

Apply locking agent to the threads.

dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE

TROUBLESHOOTING
Brake lever/pedal soft or spongy
• Air in hydraulic system
• Leaking hydraulic system
• Contaminated brake pad/disc
• Worn caliper piston seal
• Worn master cylinder piston cups
• Worn brake pad/disc
• Contaminated caliper
• Contaminated master cylinder
• Caliper not sliding properly
• Low brake fluid level
• Clogged fluid passage
• Warped/deformed brake disc
• Sticking/worn caliper piston
• Sticking/worn master cylinder piston
• Bent brake lever/pedal
Brake lever/pedal hard
• Clogged/restricted hydraulic system
• Sticking/worn caliper piston
• Caliper not sliding properly
• Worn caliper piston seal
• Sticking/worn master cylinder piston
• Bent brake lever/pedal
Brake drags
• Contaminated brake pad/disc
• Misaligned wheel
• Badly worn brake pad/disc
• Warped/deformed brake disc
• Caliper not sliding properly
• Clogged/restricted hydraulic system
• Sticking/worn caliper piston
• Clogged master cylinder port
• Sticking master cylinder piston

19-7

dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE

BRAKE FLUID REPLACEMENT/AIR
BLEEDING (NC700X/S)
• Do not allow foreign material to enter the system
when filling the reservoir.
• When using a commercially available brake bleeder,
follow the manufacture’s operating instructions.

BRAKE FLUID DRAINING
Front brake:

Turn the handlebar until the reservoir is parallel to the
ground.
Remove the reservoir cover screws [1], reservoir cover
[2], set plate [3] and diaphragm [4].

Front:

[3]/[4]

[1]

[2]
Rear brake:

Support the motorcycle in an upright position.
Remove the rear brake reservoir mounting bolt [1] and
reservoir [2].

Rear:

[3]

[8]

[10]
[4]

Remove the cover screws [3], reservoir cover [4], set
plate [5] and diaphragm [6].

[5]

Temporarily install the reservoir and mounting bolt to
the reservoir stay lower hole [7] using a 6 mm nut [8].

[6]

Align the reservoir tab [9] with the reservoir stay cut out
[10].

[2]

Connect a bleed hose [1] to the caliper bleed valve [2].

[1]

[7]

[2]

[9]

[1]

Front shown:

Loosen the bleed valve and pump the brake lever/pedal
until no more fluid flows out of the bleed valve.

[1]

19-8

[2]

dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
BRAKE FLUID FILLING/AIR BLEEDING
Do not mix different
types of fluid. There
are not compatible.

Fill the reservoir with DOT 4 brake fluid from a sealed
container.

Front shown:

Connect a automatic refill system to the reservoir.
If an automatic refill system is not used, add fluid when
the fluid level in the reservoir is low.
• Check the fluid level often while bleeding the brake
to prevent air from being pumped into the system.
• When using a brake bleeding tool, follow the
manufacturer’s operating instructions.

Connect a commercially available brake bleeder [1] to
the bleed valve [2].
Operate the brake bleeder and loosen the bleed valve.
If air enters the
bleeder from
around the bleed
valve threads, seal
the threads with
teflon tape.

Front shown:
[1]

Perform the bleeding procedure until the system is
completely flushed/bled.
Close the bleed valve and operate the brake lever/
pedal. If it still feels spongy, bleed the system again.
After bleeding the system completely, tighten the brake
caliper bleed valve to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 5.4 N·m (0.6 kgf·m, 4.0 lbf·ft)

[2]

If the brake bleeder is not available, perform the
following procedure.

Front shown:

Pump up the system pressure with the brake lever/
pedal until the lever/pedal resistance is felt.
Connect a bleed hose [1] to the bleed valve [2].
1. Squeeze the brake lever/pedal all the way and
loosen the bleed valve 1/4 turn. Wait several
seconds and then close the bleed valve.
• Do not release the brake lever/pedal until the bleed
valve has been closed.
2. Release the brake lever/pedal slowly and wait
several seconds after it reaches the end of its travel.

[1]

[2]

3. Repeat the steps 1 and 2 until there are no air
bubbles in the bleed hose.
After bleeding the system completely, tighten the brake
caliper bleed valve to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 5.4 N·m (0.6 kgf·m, 4.0 lbf·ft)

19-9

dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
Do not mix different
types of fluid. There
are not compatible.

Fill the reservoir with DOT 4 brake fluid from a sealed
container to the casting ledge [1].

Front brake:

Install the diaphragm [1], set plate [2], reservoir cover
[3] and reservoir cover screws [4], then tighten the
screws to the specified torque.

Front shown:
[1]

Front:

[1]/[2]

[4]

TORQUE: 1.5 N·m (0.2 kgf·m, 1.1 lbf·ft)

[3]
Rear brake:

Remove the 6 mm nut [1], rear brake reservoir
mounting bolt [2] and reservoir [3].
Install the diaphragm [4], set plate [5] and reservoir
cover [6].
Install and tighten the cover screws [7] to the specified
torque.

Rear:

[9]

[7]

[1]
[6]
[5]

TORQUE: 1.5 N·m (0.2 kgf·m, 1.1 lbf·ft)

[4]

Install the reservoir and rear brake reservoir mounting
bolt.
Align the reservoir tab [8] with the reservoir stay upper
hole [9].
Tighten the bolt to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)
[3]

19-10

[2]

[3]

[8]

[2]

dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE

BRAKE FLUID REPLACEMENT/AIR
BLEEDING (NC700XA/XD/SA/SD)
• Do not allow foreign material to enter the system
when filling the reservoir.
• When using a commercially available brake bleeder,
follow the manufacture’s operating instructions.

BRAKE FLUID DRAINING
LEVER BRAKE LINE
Turn the handlebar until the reservoir is parallel to the
ground.

[1]

[3]/[4]

Remove the reservoir cover screws [1], reservoir cover
[2], set plate [3] and diaphragm [4].

[2]

Connect a bleed hose [1] to the front brake caliper
upper bleed valve [2].

[1]

Loosen the upper bleed valve and pump the brake lever
until no more fluid flows out of the bleed valve.

[2]

PEDAL (COMBI) BRAKE LINE
Support the motorcycle in an upright position.

[8]

[3]

Remove the rear brake reservoir mounting bolt [1] and
reservoir [2].

[10]
[4]

Remove the cover screws [3], reservoir cover [4], set
plate [5] and diaphragm [6].

[5]

Temporarily install the reservoir and mounting bolt to
the reservoir stay lower hole [7] using a 6 mm nut [8].

[6]

Align the reservoir tab [9] with the reservoir stay cut out
[10].

[2]

[1]

[7]

[2]

[9]

[1]

19-11

dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
Connect a bleed hose [1] to the front brake caliper
center bleed valve [2].
Loosen the center bleed valve and pump the brake
pedal until no more fluid flows out of the bleed valve.
Tighten the bleed valve.

[1]

[2]

Connect a bleed hose [1] to the rear brake caliper bleed
valve [2].
Loosen the bleed valve and pump the brake pedal until
no more fluid flows out of the bleed valve.
Tighten the bleed valve.

[1]

[2]

BRAKE FLUID FILLING/AIR BLEEDING
BRAKE FLUID LINE

FRONT MASTER CYLINDER

ABS MODULATOR

DELAY VALVE

REAR BRAKE CALIPER

PCV

REAR MASTER CYLINDER

19-12

FRONT BRAKE CALIPER

dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
LEVER BRAKE LINE
Close the bleed valves.

[1]

Fill the reservoir with DOT 4 brake fluid from a sealed
container.
Connect an automatic refill system to the reservoir.
• If an automatic refill system is not used, add brake
fluid when the fluid level in the reservoir is low.
• Check the fluid level often while bleeding the brakes
to prevent air from being pumped into the system.
• When using a brake bleeding tool, follow the
manufacturer's operating instructions.
• If air is entering the bleeder from around the bleed
valve threads, seal the threads with teflon tape.
Connect a commercially available brake bleeder [1] to
the front brake caliper upper bleed valve.
Operate the brake bleeder and loosen the bleed valve.
Perform the bleeding procedure until the system is
completely flushed/bled.
Close the bleed valve and operate the brake lever. If it
is still spongy, bleed the system again.
After bleeding the air completely, tighten the brake
caliper bleed valve to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 5.4 N·m (0.6 kgf·m, 4.0 lbf·ft)
If a brake bleeder is not available, use the following
procedure:

[1]

Fill the reservoir with DOT 4 brake fluid from a sealed
container.
Connect a bleed hose [1] to the front brake caliper
upper bleed valve [2].
Pressurize the system with the brake lever until lever
resistance is felt.
1. Squeeze the brake lever all the way and loosen the
bleed valve 1/4 turn and then close the bleed valve.
• Do not release the lever until the bleed valve has
been closed.

[2]

2. Release the brake lever slowly and wait several
seconds after it reaches the end of its travel.
3. Repeat steps 1. and 2. until air bubbles do not
appear in the bleed hose.
After bleeding the air completely, tighten the brake
caliper bleed valve to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 5.4 N·m (0.6 kgf·m, 4.0 lbf·ft)
Fill the reservoir with DOT 4 brake fluid from a sealed
container to the casting ledge [1].

[1]

Install the diaphragm and set plate.
Install the reservoir cover and tighten the screws to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 1.5 N·m (0.2 kgf·m, 1.1 lbf·ft)

19-13

dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
PEDAL (COMBI) BRAKE FLUID FILLING
Add fluid and bleed any air from the pedal brake line in
the sequence as follow:
1. Front brake caliper center bleed valve
2. Rear brake caliper bleed valve
Fill the reservoir with DOT 4 brake fluid from a sealed
container.
Operate the brake pedal several times to bleed any air
from the master cylinder.

Connect a commercially available brake bleeder [1] to
the front brake caliper center bleed valve.

[1]

If air is entering the bleeder from around the bleed valve
threads, seal the threads with teflon tape.
1. Operate the brake bleeder and loosen the front
brake caliper center bleed valve. Add fluid when the
fluid level in the master cylinder is low to prevent
drawing air into the system.
2. Repeat the above procedures until a sufficient
amount of fluid flows out of the front brake caliper
center bleed valve.
It is not problem if the fluid flowing out from the center
bleed valve contains air bubbles because the lines will
be bled later (page 19-15).
Connect a commercially available brake bleeder [1] to
the rear brake caliper bleed valve.

[1]

Repeat above step 1. and 2. for rear brake caliper bleed
valve.
Bleed the hydraulic system (page 19-15).

If a brake bleeder is not available, use the following
procedure:
Connect a bleed hose [1] to the front brake caliper
center bleed valve [2].
1. Pump the brake pedal several (5 – 10) times quickly,
then push the brake pedal all the way down, loosen
the front brake caliper center bleed valve 1/4 of turn.
Wait several seconds and close the bleed valve.
Release the brake pedal slowly and wait several
seconds after it reaches the end of its travel.
2. Repeat the above procedures until a sufficient
amount of the fluid flows out from the front brake
caliper center bleed valve.
It is not a problem if the fluid flowing out from the front
brake caliper center bleed valve contains air bubbles
because the lines will be bled later (page 19-15).

19-14

[1]

[2]

dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
Connect a bleed hose [1] to the rear brake caliper bleed
valve [2].

[1]

Repeat above steps 1. and 2. for the rear brake caliper
bleed valve.
Bleed the rear hydraulic system (page 19-15).

[2]

PEDAL (COMBI) BRAKE AIR BLEEDING
Connect a bleed hose [1] to the front brake caliper
center bleed valve [2].
1. Pump the brake pedal several (5 – 10) times quickly,
then push the brake pedal all the way down, loosen
the front brake caliper center bleed valve 1/4 of turn.
Wait several seconds and close the bleed valve.
Release the brake pedal slowly and wait several
seconds after it reaches the end of its travel.
2. Repeat the above procedures until air bubbles do
not appear in the transparent hose.
[1]

Connect a bleed hose [1] to the rear brake caliper bleed
valve [2].

[2]
[1]

Repeat above steps 1. and 2. for the rear brake caliper
bleed valve.
Note that you may feel strong resistance on the rear
(combi) brake pedal during pumping when bleeding air
from the caliper. This symptom is caused by the PCV
function. Be sure to apply the brake pedal fully.

[2]

After there are no more air bubbles in the fluid, repeat
the air bleeding procedure about 2 or 3 times at each
bleed valve.
Make sure the bleed valves are closed and operate the
brake pedal. If it still feels spongy, bleed the system
again.
After bleeding the air completely, tighten the brake
caliper bleed valve to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 5.4 N·m (0.6 kgf·m, 4.0 lbf·ft)
Fill the reservoir [1] with DOT 4 brake fluid from a
sealed container to the "UPPER" level [2].
[1]

[2]

19-15

dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
Remove the 6 mm nut [1], rear brake reservoir
mounting bolt [2] and reservoir [3].

[1]

[9]

[7]

Install the diaphragm [4], set plate [5] and reservoir
cover [6].
Install and tighten the cover screws [7] to the specified
torque.

[6]
[5]

TORQUE: 1.5 N·m (0.2 kgf·m, 1.1 lbf·ft)

[4]

Install the reservoir and rear brake reservoir mounting
bolt.
Align the reservoir tab [8] with the reservoir stay upper
hole [9].
Tighten the bolt to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)
[3]

[2]

[3]

[8]

[2]

BRAKE PAD/DISC
FRONT BRAKE PAD REPLACEMENT
(NC700X/S)
• Always replace the brake pads in pairs to assure
even disc pressure.
• Check the brake fluid level in the brake master
cylinder reservoir as this operation causes the level
to rise.
Remove the brake pad pin [1] and brake pads [2].
Do not operate the brake lever after removing the brake
pads.

Align

Install new brake pads to the brake caliper so their ends
seat against the retainer.
Make sure that the retainer and pad spring are installed
to the brake caliper.
Check that the brake pad pin stopper ring [3] is in good
condition, replace if necessary.
Apply silicone grease to the brake pad pin stopper ring
and install it to the brake pad pin groove.
Install the brake pad pin by pushing the pads against
the pad spring to align the brake pad pin holes in the
pads and brake caliper.
Tighten the brake pad pin to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 17 N·m (1.7 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)
Operate the brake lever to seat the caliper piston
against the pads.

[1]
[2]

19-16

[3]

dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
FRONT BRAKE PAD REPLACEMENT
(NC700XA/XD/SA/SD)
• Always replace the brake pads in pairs to assure
even disc pressure.
• Check the brake fluid level in the brake master
cylinder reservoir as this operation causes the level
to rise.
Do not operate the
brake lever after
removing the brake
pads.

Remove the brake pad pin [1] and brake pads [2].

[2]

[1]

Install new brake pads [1] to the brake caliper so their
ends seat against the retainer.

Align

Make sure that the retainer is installed to the caliper
bracket.
Check that the brake pad pin stopper ring [2] is in good
condition, replace if necessary.
Apply silicone grease to the brake pad pin stopper ring
and install it to the brake pad pin [3] groove.
Install the brake pad pin by pushing the pads against
the pad spring to align the brake pad pin holes in the
pads and brake caliper.

[1]
[2]

[3]

Tighten the front brake pad pin to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 17 N·m (1.7 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)
Operate the brake lever to seat the caliper piston
against the pads.

19-17

dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
REAR BRAKE PAD REPLACEMENT
• Always replace the brake pads in pairs to assure
even disc pressure.
• Check the brake fluid level in the brake master
cylinder reservoir as this operation causes the level
to rise.
Remove the brake pad pin [1] and rear brake caliper
mounting bolt [2].

[1]

[2]
Do not operate the
brake pedal after
removing the brake
pads.

Lift the caliper [1] and remove the brake pads [2].

[1]

[3]

Install new brake pads to the brake caliper so their ends
seat against the retainer.
Make sure that the retainer and pad spring [3] are
installed to the brake caliper.
Lower the caliper.

[2]

Align

Loosely install a new rear brake caliper mounting bolt
[1].

[3]

Check that the brake pad pin stopper ring [2] is in good
condition, replace it if necessary.
Apply silicone grease to the brake pad pin stopper ring.
Install the brake pad pin [3] by pushing the pads against
the pad spring to align the brake pad pin holes in the
pads and brake caliper.

[2]

19-18

[1]

dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
Tighten the rear brake caliper mounting bolt [1] to the
specified torque.

[2]

TORQUE: 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
Tighten the brake pad pin [2] to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 17 N·m (1.7 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)
Operate the brake pedal to seat the caliper pistons
against the pads.

[1]

PARKING BRAKE PAD
REPLACEMENT (NC700XD/SD)
Loosen the parking brake pad pins [1].

Remove the brake caliper mounting bolt [1] and caliper
[2] from the bracket.

[1]

[1]

[2]

Remove the parking brake pad pins [1] and pads [2].

[1]

Make sure the pad spring is installed in position.
Install new parking brake pads and pad pins.
Install the parking brake caliper and new mounting bolts
and tighten the bolt to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 31 N·m (3.2 kgf·m, 23 lbf·ft)
Tighten the parking brake pad pins to the specified
torque.
TORQUE: 17 N·m (1.7 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)
[2]

19-19

dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
BRAKE DISC INSPECTION
Visually inspect the brake discs for damage or crack.
Measure the brake disc thickness using a micrometer.
SERVICE LIMITS:
Front: 4.0 mm (0.16 in)
Rear: 4.0 mm (0.16 in)
Replace the brake disc if the smallest measurement is
less than the service limit.

Measure the brake discs warpage using a dial indicator.
SERVICE LIMITS:
Front: 0.30 mm (0.012 in)
Rear: 0.30 mm (0.012 in)
Check the wheel bearings for excessive play, if the
warpage exceeds the service limit.
Replace the brake disc if the wheel bearings are
normal.

FRONT MASTER CYLINDER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Drain the brake fluid from the hydraulic system:

[2]

[1]

[3]

– NC700X/S (page 19-8)
– NC700XA/XD/SA/SD (page 19-11)
Release the dust cover [1].
Loosen the lock nut [2] and remove the rearview mirror.
Disconnect the brake light switch connectors [3].

Remove the brake hose oil bolt [1], sealing washers [2]
and brake hose [3].

[2]

When removing the oil bolt, cover the end of the brake
hose to prevent contamination.

[3]

19-20

[1]

dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
Remove the bolts [1], holder [2] and master cylinder [3].

[3]

[2]

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Install the master cylinder holder with the "UP" mark
[4] facing up.
• Align the end of the master cylinder with the
handlebar punch mark.
• Tightening the front master cylinder holder bolts,
upper bolt first, then the lower bolt to the specified
torque.
• Replace the sealing washers with new ones.
• Install the brake hose eyelet joint against the master
cylinder stopper.

Align

[4]

[1]

TORQUE:
Front master cylinder holder bolt:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Brake hose oil bolt:
34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)
Fill the reservoir to the upper level and bleed the front
brake system:
– NC700X/S (page 19-9)
– NC700XA/XD/SA/SD (page 19-12)

19-21

dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Disassemble and assemble the front master cylinder as
following the illustration.
• Be careful not to damage the boot.
• When removing and installing the snap ring, use the
special tool.
TOOL:
Snap ring pliers

07914-SA50001

•
•
•
•
•

Replace the piston and cups as a set.
Apply brake fluid to the master piston and cups.
Apply brake fluid to the master cylinder inside.
Do not allow the piston cup lips to turn inside out.
Make sure the snap ring is firmly seated in the
groove.
• Align the brake light switch boss and master cylinder
hole.
• Apply 0.10 g (0.004 oz) of silicone grease to the
brake lever sliding surface and lever-to-master
piston contacting area.
• Apply 0.10 g (0.004 oz) of silicone grease to the
brake lever pivot bolt sliding surface.

SCREWS

1.0 N·m (0.1 kgf·m, 0.7 lbf·ft)

RESERVOIR COVER

SET PLATE
BOOT
SNAP RING
DIAPHRAGM

WASHER
CUPS
MASTER PISTON

SPRING

MASTER CYLINDER
BRAKE LEVER
BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH
5.9 N·m (0.6 kgf·m, 4.4 lbf·ft)

19-22

1.2 N·m (0.1 kgf·m, 0.9 lbf·ft)

dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
INSPECTION
Check the master cylinder [1] for scoring, scratches or
damage.

[1]

[3]

Check the master piston [2] for scoring, scratches or
damage.
Check the piston cups [3] for wear, deterioration or
damage.

[2]

Measure the master cylinder I.D.
SERVICE LIMIT: 11.055 mm (0.4352 in)
Measure the master piston O.D.
SERVICE LIMIT: 10.945 mm (0.4309 in)

REAR MASTER CYLINDER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Drain the brake fluid from the hydraulic system:

[1]

[3]

– NC700X/S (page 19-8)
– NC700XA/XD/SA/SD (page 19-11)
Remove the muffler (page 2-32).
Remove the brake hose oil bolt [1], sealing washers [2]
and brake hose [3].
When removing the oil bolt, cover the end of the brake
hose to prevent contamination.

[2]

Remove the step holder mounting socket bolts [1] and
right step holder [2].

[1]

[2]

19-23

dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
Unhook the brake light switch spring [1].

[3]

[2]

Remove the brake light switch [2] from the right step
holder [3], then remove the right step holder.

[1]

Remove and discard the cotter pin [1].
Remove the joint pin [2] and disconnect the push rod
joint from the brake pedal.
Remove the master cylinder mounting bolts [3] and
master cylinder [4] from the right step holder.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

[1]

• Replace the cotter pin and sealing washers with new
ones.
• Install the brake hose eyelet joint against the master
cylinder stopper.
TORQUE:
Rear master cylinder mounting bolt:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Step holder mounting socket bolt:
32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)
Brake hose oil bolt:
34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)
Fill the reservoir to the upper level and bleed the rear
brake system:
– NC700X/S (page 19-9)
– NC700XA/XD/SA/SD (page 19-12)

19-24

[2]

[4]

[3]

dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Disassemble and assemble the rear master cylinder as
following the illustration.
• Be careful not to damage the boot.
• When removing and installing the snap ring, use the
special tool.
TOOL:
Snap ring pliers
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

07914-SA50001

Replace the piston, spring and cup as a set.
Apply brake fluid to the master piston and cups.
Apply brake fluid to the master cylinder inside.
Do not allow the piston cup lips to turn inside out.
Apply silicone grease to the push rod sliding area
and boot fitting area.
Make sure the snap ring is firmly seated in the
groove.
Replace the hose joint O-ring with a new one.
Apply brake fluid to a new hose joint O-ring.
Apply locking agent to the rear master cylinder hose
joint screw threads.

HOSE JOINT

MASTER CYLINDER
SPRING

1.5 N·m (0.2 kgf·m, 1.1 lbf·ft)

O-RING
RESERVOIR COVER

PISTON CUP
SET PLATE
MASTER PISTON

DIAPHRAGM

PUSH ROD
RESERVOIR
SNAP RING
BOOT

17 N·m (1.7 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)
PUSH ROD JOINT

1.5 N·m (0.2 kgf·m, 1.1 lbf·ft)

If the push rod joint is disassembled, adjust the push
rod length so that the distance from the center of the
master cylinder lower mounting hole to the center of the
joint pin hole is standard length as shown.

[1]

STANDARD LENGTH: 85.0 – 87.0 mm (3.35 – 3.43 in)
After adjustment tighten the push rod lock nut [1] to the
specified torque.
TORQUE: 17 N·m (1.7 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)
85.0 – 87.0 mm
(3.35 – 3.43 in)

19-25

dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
INSPECTION
Check the master cylinder [1] for scoring, scratches or
damage.

[2]

Check the master piston [2] for scoring, scratches or
damage.
Check the piston cup [3] for wear, deterioration or
damage.
Measure the master cylinder I.D.
SERVICE LIMIT: 14.055 mm (0.5533 in)
Measure the master piston O.D.
SERVICE LIMIT: 13.945 mm (0.5490 in)
[1]

Check the following:

[3]

[1]

[3]

– Push rod [1] for bent
– Boot [2] for damage
– Rod joint [3] for damage
Replace the damaged part if necessary.

[2]

FRONT BRAKE CALIPER (NC700X/S)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Drain the brake fluid from the hydraulic system (page
19-8).
Remove the brake pads (page 19-16).
When removing the
oil bolt, cover the
end of brake hose to
prevent
contamination.

[1]

Remove the brake hose oil bolt [1], sealing washers [2]
and brake hose.
Remove the brake caliper mounting bolts [3] and brake
caliper/bracket assembly [4].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Replace the front brake caliper mounting bolts and
sealing washers with new ones.
• Install the brake hose eyelet joint between the brake
caliper body.
• Route the hoses properly (page 1-25).

[2]

TORQUE:
Front brake caliper mounting bolt:
30 N·m (3.1 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)
Brake hose oil bolt:
34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)
Fill the reservoir to the upper level and bleed the front
brake system (page 19-9).

19-26

[3]

[4]

dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Disassemble the front brake caliper as following the
illustration.
• Be careful not to damage the piston sliding surface.
• If the caliper pin boot and bracket pin boot are hard
or deteriorated, replace it with a new one.

CALIPER PIN BOOT
PAD RETAINER
CALIPER PISTON

CALIPER BRACKET

DUST SEAL
PISTON SEAL
BLEED VALVE
5.4 N·m (0.6 kgf·m, 4.0 lbf·ft)

CALIPER BODY
BRACKET PIN
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

STOPPER RING
BRAKE PAD PIN
17 N·m (1.7 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)

BRACKET PIN BOOT

CALIPER PIN
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

BRAKE PADS

PAD SPRING

Place a shop towel over the pistons.
Do not use high
pressure air or bring
the nozzle too close
to the inlet.

Position the caliper body with the pistons down and
apply small squirts of air pressure to the fluid inlet to
remove the pistons.
Clean the seal grooves with clean brake fluid.
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
• Apply locking agent to the caliper pin and bracket
pin threads.
• Replace the piston seals and dust seals with new
ones.
• Apply brake fluid to the caliper pistons and new
piston seals.
• Apply silicone grease to new dust seals.
• Install the pistons with the opening toward the pads.
• Apply Honda Bond A, Cemedine #540 or equivalent
to the brake pad retainer mating surface.
• Apply 0.4 g (0.01 oz) of silicone grease to the caliper
pin and bracket pin sliding surface.

19-27

dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
INSPECTION
Check the caliper cylinder for scoring or other damage.
Measure the each caliper cylinder I.D.
SERVICE LIMIT: 27.060 mm (1.0654 in)
Check the caliper pistons for scratches, scoring or other
damage.
Measure the each caliper piston O.D.
SERVICE LIMIT: 26.91 mm (1.059 in)

FRONT BRAKE CALIPER (NC700XA/
XD/SA/SD)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Drain the brake fluid from the hydraulic system (page
19-11).

[1]

[2]

Remove the brake pads (page 19-17).
Remove the bolt [1] and front wheel speed sensor wire
guide [2].

[3]

Remove the bolts [3] and front wheel speed sensor [4].

[4]

Remove the brake hose oil bolts [1], sealing washers [2]
and brake hoses.

[1]

When removing the oil bolt, cover the end of brake hose
to prevent contamination.

[2]

19-28

dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
Remove the brake caliper mounting bolts [1] and brake
caliper/bracket assembly [2].

[2]

[1]

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Replace the front brake caliper mounting bolts and
sealing washers with new ones.
• Install the brake hose eyelet stopper against the
caliper body.
• Route the hoses and wire properly (page 1-25).
TORQUE:
Front brake caliper mounting bolt:
30 N·m (3.1 kgf·m, 22 lbf·ft)
Brake hose oil bolt:
34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)
Fill the reservoir to the upper level and bleed the front
brake system (page 19-12).
Check the air gap between the front wheel speed
sensor and pulser ring (page 20-24).

DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Disassemble the front brake caliper as following the
illustration.
• Be careful not to damage the piston sliding surface.
• If the caliper pin boot and bracket pin boot are hard
or deteriorated, replace it with a new one.

CALIPER PISTONS

CALIPER PIN BOOT
DUST SEALS

PAD RETAINER

BLEED VALVE
5.4 N·m (0.6 kgf·m, 4.0 lbf·ft)
PISTON SEALS
CALIPER PIN
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)
BLEED VALVE
5.4 N·m (0.6 kgf·m, 4.0 lbf·ft)
BRACKET

CALIPER BODY

BRACKET PIN
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

STOPPER RING
BRACKET PIN BOOT

BRAKE PAD PIN
17 N·m (1.7 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)

PAD SPRING

BRAKE PADS

19-29

dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
Place a shop towel over the pistons.
Do not use high
pressure air or bring
the nozzle too close
to the inlet.

Position the caliper body with the pistons facing down
and apply small squirts of air pressure to the fluid inlet
to remove the pistons.
Clean the seal grooves with clean brake fluid.
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
• Apply locking agent to the caliper pin and bracket
pin threads.
• Replace the piston seals and dust seals with new
ones.
• Apply brake fluid to the caliper pistons and new
piston seals.
• Apply silicone grease to new dust seals.
• Install the pistons with the opening toward the pads.
• Apply Honda Bond A, Cemedine #540 or equivalent
to the brake pad retainer mating surface.
• Apply 0.4 g (0.01 oz) of silicone grease to the caliper
pin and bracket pin sliding surface.

INSPECTION
Check the caliper cylinders for scoring or other
damage.

[2]

[1]

[2]

[4]

Measure the each caliper cylinder I.D.
SERVICE LIMIT:
Cylinder A [1]: 22.712 mm (0.8941 in)
Cylinder B [2]: 27.060 mm (1.0654 in)
Check the caliper pistons for scratches, scoring or other
damage.
Measure the each caliper piston O.D.
SERVICE LIMIT:
Piston A [3]: 22.56 mm (0.888 in)
Piston B [4]: 26.91 mm (1.059 in)

[4]

[3]

REAR BRAKE CALIPER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Drain the brake fluid from the hydraulic system:
– NC700X/S (page 19-8)
– NC700XA/XD/SA/SD (page 19-11)
Remove the brake hose oil bolt [1], sealing washers [2]
and brake hose.
When removing the oil bolt, cover the end of brake hose
to prevent contamination.
Remove the brake pads (page 19-18).

[2]

19-30

[1]

dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
Remove the brake caliper [1] from the caliper bracket.

[1]

Remove the rear wheel (page 18-6).
Remove the caliper bracket from the swingarm.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Replace the sealing washers with new ones.
• Apply 0.4 g (0.01 oz) of silicone grease to the brake
caliper pin sliding surface.
• Install the brake hose eyelet stopper against the
caliper body.
• Route the hoses and wire properly (page 1-25).
TORQUE:
Brake hose oil bolt:
34 N·m (3.5 kgf·m, 25 lbf·ft)
Fill the reservoir to the upper level and breed the rear
brake system:
– NC700X/S (page 19-9)
– NC700XA/XD/SA/SD (page 19-12)
NC700XA/XD/SA/
SD:

Check the air gap between the rear wheel speed sensor
and pulser ring (page 20-24).

DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
Disassemble the rear brake caliper as following the
illustration.
• Be careful not to damage the piston sliding surface.
• If the caliper pin boot and sleeve boot are hard or
deteriorated, replace it with a new one.
NC700XA/XD/SA/SD shown:
DUST SEAL

PISTON SEAL

BLEED VALVE
5.4 N·m (0.6 kgf·m, 4.0 lbf·ft)

CALIPER PISTON
CALIPER BODY
CALIPER PIN
27 N·m (2.8 kgf·m, 20 lbf·ft)

STOPPER RING

BRAKE PAD PIN
17 N·m (1.7 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)

BRAKE PADS

PAD SPRING
SLEEVE
BOOT

19-31

dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
Place a shop towel over the piston.
Do not use high
pressure air or bring
the nozzle too close
to the inlet.

Position the caliper body with the piston facing down
and apply small squirts of air pressure to the fluid inlet
to remove the piston.
Clean the seal grooves with clean brake fluid.
Assembly is in the reverse order of disassembly.
• Replace the piston seal and dust seal with new
ones.
• Apply brake fluid to the caliper piston and new piston
seal.
• Apply silicone grease to new dust seal.
• Install the piston with the opening toward the pads.
• Apply Honda Bond A, Cemedine #540 or equivalent
to the brake pad retainer mating surface.
• Apply 0.4 g (0.01 oz) of silicone grease to the boot
inside.

INSPECTION
Check the caliper cylinder for scoring, scratches or
damage.
Measure the caliper cylinder I.D.
SERVICE LIMIT: 38.24 mm (1.506 in)
Check the caliper piston for scoring, scratches or
damage.
Measure the caliper piston O.D.
SERVICE LIMIT: 38.09 mm (1.500 in)

PARKING BRAKE CALIPER (NC700XD/
SD)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the parking brake pads (page 19-19).

[2]

[3]

Disconnect the parking brake cable [1] from the brake
arm [2] and remove it from cable stay [3] of the caliper
body.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Check the parking brake lock operation (page 3-24).

[1]

19-32

dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
DISASSEMBLY
Remove the caliper pin bolt [1].

[1]

Remove the following:
–
–
–
–
–

[2]

[1]

Caliper bracket [1]
Pad spring [2]
Bracket pin boot [3]
Caliper pin boot [4]
Sleeve [5]

[3]

[5]

[4]

Remove the parking brake adjuster bolt lock nut [1]
while holding the brake arm [2].
Remove the brake arm.

[2]

Remove the brake shaft boot [1].

[1]
[1]

19-33

dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
Remove the adjuster bolt/piston [1] while holding the
brake shaft [2].

[2]

[1]

Remove the brake shaft.
Do not disassemble the adjuster bolt/piston.

Remove the dust seal [1].
Clean the caliper cylinder and brake shaft sliding
surface.

[1]

INSPECTION
Check the caliper cylinder [1] and piston [2] for scoring,
scratches or damage.

[2]

[1]

19-34

dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
ASSEMBLY
BRACKET

DUST SEAL

ADJUSTER BOLT/PISTON
PAD PIN
17 N·m (1.7 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)
PAD SPRING

SLEEVE

CALIPER PIN BOOT

CALIPER PIN BOOT

CALIPER PIN BOLT
22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

LOCK NUT
17 N·m (1.7 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)
BRAKE PADS
CALIPER BODY

BRAKE ARM

BRACKET PIN BOOT

BRAKE SHAFT BOOT

BRAKE SHAFT

Install a new dust seal [1] into the seal groove in the
caliper.

[1]

Apply 0.4 g (0.01 oz) minimum of silicone grease to the
outer surface of the brake shaft [1].
Position the brake shaft so that the punch mark [2] is
between the index lines [3] (installation range), and
screw the shaft into the caliper.
Make sure that the punch mark is positioned between
the index lines with the shaft fully installed.

[1]

[2]
[3]

Installation
range

[3]

19-35

dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
Apply 0.4 g (0.01 oz) minimum of silicone grease to the
adjuster bolt threads and piston sliding surface.

[2]

Install the adjuster bolt/piston [1] while holding the
brake shaft [2].

[1]

Apply 0.4 g (0.01 oz) minimum of silicone grease to the
brake shaft boot lips.

[1]

Install the brake shaft boot [1] to the caliper groove.

Install the brake arm [1] by aligning with the punch
marks.

Align

[1]

Install the lock nut [1] and tighten it to the specified
torque while holding the brake arm [2].
TORQUE: 17 N·m (1.7 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)

[2]

19-36

[1]

dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
Apply 0.4 g (0.01 oz) minimum of silicone grease of
silicone grease to the bracket pin and sleeve sliding
surface.

[4]

[5]

Install the following:
–
–
–
–
–

Sleeve [1]
Caliper pin boots [2]
Bracket pin boot [3]
Pad spring [4]
Caliper bracket [5]
[3]
[1]

[2]

Apply locking agent to the parking brake caliper pin bolt
threads.
Install the parking brake caliper pin bolt [1] and tighten it
to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 22 N·m (2.2 kgf·m, 16 lbf·ft)

[1]

BRAKE PEDAL
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the muffler (page 2-32).

[1]

Remove the step holder mounting socket bolts [1] and
right step holder [2].

[2]

Unhook the brake light switch spring [1] from the brake
pedal.

[1]

Remove and discard the cotter pin [2].
Remove the joint pin [3] and disconnect the push rod
lower joint from the brake pedal [4].

[2]

Remove the snap ring [5], washer [6], return spring [7]
and brake pedal.

[4]

[7]

[5]/[6]

[3]

19-37

dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Apply grease to the brake pedal pivot sliding area.
• Replace the cotter pin with a new one.
TORQUE:
Step holder mounting socket bolt:
32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)

PARKING BRAKE LEVER (NC700XD/
SD)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the following:

[4]

[2]

– Left rearview mirror (page 17-12)
– Parking brake switch (page 22-23)
Loosen the parking brake cable mounting nut [1].
Remove the socket bolts [2], holder [3] and parking
brake lever bracket [4].

[1]

[3]

Remove the parking brake adjuster bolt lock nut [1]
while holding the brake arm [2].
Remove the brake arm and release the parking brake
cable [3] from the cable guide [4].

[3]

[2]

Turn the parking brake lever bracket [1] and remove the
parking brake cable joint [2] from the bracket.

[1]

[4]

[2]

Disconnect the parking brake cable [3].

[1]

19-38

[3]

dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Align the parking brake lever bracket locating pin
with the handlebar hole.
• Route the cables and wire harness properly (page 125).
TORQUE:
Parking brake adjuster bolt lock nut:
17 N·m (1.7 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)
Parking brake cable mounting nut:
10 N·m (1.0 kgf·m, 7 lbf·ft)
Check the parking brake lock operation (page 3-24).

Align

DISASSEMBLY
Remove the lower holder cap [1].

[1]

Remove the spring pin [1] and release shaft [2].

[2]

Remove the E-clip [1], washer [2] and parking brake
lever [3].

[1]

[3]

[1]

[2]

19-39

dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
Remove the ratchet B [1].

[1]

Remove the ratchet A [1] and springs [2].

[1]

[2]

ASSEMBLY
Apply grease to the ratchet A teeth and sliding surface.
Install the springs [1] and ratchet A [2].

[1]

Apply grease to the ratchet B teeth and sliding surface.
Install the ratchet B [1] with its tab [2] facing up.

19-40

[2]
[2]

[1]

dummyhead

HYDRAULIC BRAKE
Apply grease to the parking brake lever sliding surface.

Align

Install the parking brake lever [1].
Align the parking brake lever hole with the ratchet B tab.

[1]

Apply grease to the washer sliding surface.
Install the washer [1] and E-clip [2].

[2]

Install the release shaft [1] and new spring pin [2] while
aligning the hole of the release shaft, ratchet A and
parking brake lever bracket.

[1]

[1]

[2]

Align

Install the lower holder cap [1].

[1]

19-41

dummyhead

MEMO

dummytext

20. ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

ABS SYSTEM LOCATION ··························20-2

ABS INDICATOR CIRCUIT
TROUBLESHOOTING ······························ 20-12

ABS SYSTEM DIAGRAM····························20-3
ABS TROUBLESHOOTING······················ 20-15
SERVICE INFORMATION ···························20-4
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR ························ 20-24
ABS CONNECTOR LOCATIONS ···············20-5
PCV ··························································· 20-28
ABS TROUBLESHOOTING
INFORMATION············································20-7
ABS INDICATOR PROBLEM CODE
INDEX ························································20-10

DELAY VALVE·········································· 20-28
ABS MODULATOR ··································· 20-29

20

20-1

dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

ABS SYSTEM LOCATION
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

BATTERY

DLC
FUSE BOX

ABS MODULATOR
PCV

DELAY VALVE

FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR

REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR

20-2

dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

ABS SYSTEM DIAGRAM
FUSE BOX
CLOCK/TURN
(7.5A)

MAIN
(30 A)
R

R/W
FRONT BRAKE
LIGHT SWITCH

R
Bl

IGNITION
SWITCH

Bl

8P
(BLUE)
REAR BRAKE
LIGHT SWITCH

ILLUMI/
STOP/HORN
(7.5A)

Bl

R/Bl

BRAKE/TAIL LIGHT

P/Bu
G/Y

(81)

ABS MODULATOR

ABS MAIN
(7.5A)
R/Bl

R/Bl

BLS

4

IND

21

G
G/R

IG

16

(61,62)

Bl

BATTERY

PUMP MOTOR

ABS M.
(30 A)

ABS
INDICATOR

O/Bl

COMBINATION METER

(51,52,53)

Bl

V/W

9

MR+B
MOTOR GND 25

G/Bu

GND

24

G/Y

FSR+B

DIAG

10

W

(54)

SCS

13

Br

ABS SOL.
(30 A)
Bl

Bl/W

8

G
DLC

SOLENOID VALVE

(31,32,33,
34,37,38)

FVW S (-)

W/Y

3

Bu/Y

12 FVW B (+)

2P
(BLUE)

(11,12)

TIRE SIZE

(71)
W

Bu

FRONT WHEEL
SPEED SENSOR

(41,42)

Bu

18 RVW S (-)

W

2 RVW B (+)

(13,14)

2P
(GRAY)
Bu

(21)
FRONT PULSER RING

W

REAR WHEEL
SPEED SENSOR

(43)

(23)
REAR PULSER RING
ABS MODULATOR 25P CONNECTOR (MODULATOR SIDE)

( ) = ABS Problem code number
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

24

25

= Short terminals for reading
ABS problem code

10 11

12 13

17 18 19 20

14 15 16

21 22 23

Bl : Black
Br : Brown
Bu : Blue
G : Green
O : Orange
P : Pink
R : Red
V : Violet
W : White
Y : Yellow

20-3

dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
The ABS modulator may be damaged if dropped. Also if a connector is disconnected when current is flowing, the excessive voltage
may damage the control unit. Always turn off the ignition switch before servicing.
• This section covers service of the Anti-lock Brake System (ABS). Refer to information for the combi brake system servicing
(page 19-5).
• Pre-start self-diagnosis starts when the ignition switch is turned ON. The ABS modulator control unit receives signals and
detects whether the ABS system functions normally. Pre-start self-diagnosis starts when the vehicle speed goes above 6 km/h
(4 mph) approximately. The ABS system and the vehicle running condition are monitored constantly after pre-start selfdiagnosis until the ignition switch is turned OFF.
• When the ABS modulator control unit detects a problem, the ABS indicator blinks to notify the rider of the problem. To detect the
faulty part, retrieve the problem code by shorting the DLC terminals.
• When the ABS control unit detects a problem, it stops the ABS function and switches back to the combi brake operation, and the
ABS indicator blinks or stays on. Take care during the test ride.
• Read "ABS TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION" carefully, inspect and troubleshoot the ABS system according to the
Diagnostic Troubleshooting flow chart. Observe each step of the procedures one by one. Write down the problem code and
probable faulty part before starting diagnosis and troubleshooting.
• Use a fully charged battery. Do not diagnose with a charger connected to the battery.
• After troubleshooting, erase the problem code and perform the pre-start self-diagnosis to be sure that the ABS indicator is
operating normally.
• Troubles not resulting from a faulty ABS (e.g. brake disc squeak, unevenly worn brake pad) cannot be recognized by the ABS
diagnosis system.
• When the wheel speed sensor and/or pulser ring is replaced, check the clearance (air gap) between both components.
• The ABS control unit (ECU) is mounted on the modulator (the modulator with the built-in ECU). Do not disassemble the ABS
modulator. Replace the ABS modulator as an assembly when the it is faulty.
• Be careful not to damage the wheel speed sensor and pulser ring when removing and installing the wheel.
• The following color codes are used throughout this section.
Bl = Black
Br = Brown

Bu = Blue
G = Green

O = Orange
P = Pink

R = Red
V = Violet

W = White
Y = Yellow

TORQUE VALUES

4
14

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
8
10

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
32 (3.3, 24)
14 (1.4, 10)

2
2

6
6

12 (1.2, 9)
12 (1.2, 9)

ITEM

Q'TY

Step holder mounting socket bolt
Brake pipe joint nut
PCV mounting bolt
Delay valve mounting bolt

20-4

REMARKS
Apply brake fluid to the threads and
sliding surface.

dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

ABS CONNECTOR LOCATIONS
NOTE 1: Remove the shroud/side cover (NC700XA/XD) (page 2-14).
NOTE 1: Remove the shelter/side cover (NC700SA/SD) (page 2-15).

ABS MODULATOR

REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
2P (GRAY) CONNECTOR (NOTE 1)

NOTE 2: Remove the luggage box (page 2-19).

ABS MODULATOR 25P CONNECTOR (NOTE 2)

20-5

dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
NOTE 3: Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).
FUSE BOX (NOTE 3)
– ABS fuse 30 A (ABS M.)
– ABS fuse 30 A (ABS SOL.)
– ABS fuse 7.5 A (ABS MAIN)

DLC
(NOTE 3)

NOTE 4: Remove the shroud/side cover (NC700XA/XD) (page 2-14).
NOTE 5: Remove the side cowl (NC700SA/SD) (page 2-13).
NC700XA/XD:

NC700SA/SD:

FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
2P (BLUE) CONNECTOR (NOTE 4)

NOTE 6: Remove the windscreen (page 2-23).
COMBINATION METER
16P (GRAY) CONNECTOR (NOTE 6)

20-6

FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
2P (BLUE) CONNECTOR (NOTE 5)

dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

ABS TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION
SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
SUMMARY OF ABS PRE-START SELF-DIAGNOSIS SYSTEM
The ABS pre-start self-diagnosis system diagnoses the electrical system as well as the operating status of the
modulator. When there is any abnormality, the problem and the associated part can be detected by reading the
problem code.
When the motorcycle is running, pulse signals generated at the front/rear wheel speed sensor are sent to the
ABS Control Unit. When the ABS Control Unit detects that vehicle speed reaches 6 km/h (4 mph), the pump
motor is temporarily operated to check if the ABS system functions normally. If the system is normal, pre-start
self-diagnosis is complete by the time the vehicle speed reaches 10 km/h (6 mph) approximately.
If a problem is detected, the ABS indicator blinks or comes on and stays on to notify the rider of the problem.
The self-diagnosis is also made while the motorcycle is running, and the ABS indicator blinks when a problem
is detected.
When the ABS indicator blinks, the cause of the problem can be identified by retrieving the problem code
following the specified retrieval procedure (page 20-8).
If the ABS indicator does not come on when the ignition switch is turned ON, or the ABS indicator stays on after
the pre-start self-diagnosis procedure is complete, the ABS indicator may be faulty. Follow the troubleshooting
(page 20-12).
Pre-start serf-diagnosis when normal:
IGNITION
SWITCH

ON
OFF

Running
ENGINE

VEHICLE
SPEED

Stop

Start

6 km/h (4 mph) or above

0

PUMP
MOTOR

ON

ABS
INDICATOR

ON

OFF

OFF
10 km/h (6 mph) or above, Pre-start
serf-diagnosis completes

PRE-START SELF-DIAGNOSIS PROCEDURE
1. Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
to " ".

[1]

2. Make sure the ABS indicator [1] comes on.
3. Start the engine.
4. Ride the motorcycle and increase the vehicle speed
to approximately 10 km/h (6 mph).
5. The ABS is normal if the ABS indicator goes off.

20-7

dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
PROBLEM CODE INDICATION PATTERN
• The ABS indicator denotes the problem codes from 11 to 81. the ABS indicator has two types of blinks, a
long blink and short blink. The long blink lasts for 1.3 seconds, the short blink lasts for 0.3 seconds. When
two long blinks occur, and three short blinks, that problem code is 23 (two long blinks = 20 blinks, three short
blinks = 3 blinks). Then, go to the troubleshooting and see problem code 23.
• When the ABS control unit stores some problem codes, the ABS indicator shows the problem codes in the
order from the lowest number to highest number. For example, when the ABS indicator indicates code 12,
then indicates code 23, two failures have occurred.

IGNITION
SWITCH

ON

1.3 sec.

OFF
1.3 sec.

1.3 sec.
2 sec.
ABS
INDICATOR

3.6 sec.

ON
OFF

Pattern repeated

0.3 sec.

Problem code
start signal

0.4 sec.

3.6 sec.

Lowest number problem code
(Example: Code 12)

0.5 sec.
Highest number problem code
(Example: Code 23)

When the problem code is not stored:
2 sec.
ABS
INDICATOR

3.6 sec.

ON
OFF

PROBLEM CODE READOUT
• The ABS indicator indicates the problem code by blinking a specified number of times.
• The problem code is not erased by turning the ignition switch to OFF while the problem code is being output.
Note that turning the ignition switch to ON again does not indicate the problem code. To show the problem
code again, repeat the problem code retrieval procedures from the beginning.
• Be sure to make a note of the retrieval problem code(s).
• After diagnostic troubleshooting, erase the problem code(s) and perform the pre-start self-diagnosis to be
sure that there is no problem in the ABS indicator (indicator is operating normally).
• Do not apply the front or rear brake during retrieval.
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch to " ".
Start the engine and test ride the motorcycle above 10 km/h (6 mph).
If the ABS indicator blinks or stays on, follow the step s described below:
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).
Remove the DLC [1] from the battery box.
Short the DLC terminals using a special tool.
Connection: Brown – Green
TOOL:
SCS connector [2]

070PZ-ZY30100

[1]

20-8

[2]

dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
2. Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
to " ".

[1]

The ABS indicator [1] should come on 2 seconds
(start signal) (then goes off 3.6 seconds) and starts
problem code indication.
3. The problem code is indicated by the number of the
times of the ABS indicator blinking.
If the problem code is not stored, the ABS indicator
stays on.
4. Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the special
tool from the DLC.
Install the DLC to the battery box.
Install the maintenance lid (page 21-6).

ERASING PROBLEM CODE
1. Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).
Remove the DLC [1] from the battery box.
Short the DLC terminals using a special tool.
Connection: Brown – Green
TOOL:
SCS connector [2]

070PZ-ZY30100

2. Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
to " " while squeezing the brake lever. The ABS
indicator should come on 2 seconds and go off.
3. Release the brake lever immediately after the ABS
indicator is off. The ABS indicator should come on.

[1]

[2]

4. Squeeze the brake lever immediately after the ABS indicator is on. The ABS indicator should go off.
5. Release the brake lever immediately after the ABS indicator is off.
When code erasure is complete, the ABS indicator blinks 2 times and stays on.
If the ABS indicator does not blink 2 times, the data has not been erased, so try again.
If the ABS indicator blinks 2 times and blinks, faulty ABS system, go to ABS troubleshooting (page 20-10)
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the special tool from the DLC.
Install the DLC to the battery box.
Install the maintenance lid (page 21-6).

20-9

dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

ABS INDICATOR PROBLEM CODE INDEX
• The ABS indicator might blink in the following cases. Correct the faulty part.
– Incorrect tire pressure.
– Tires not recommended for the motorcycle were installed (incorrect tire size).
– Deformation of the wheel or tire.
• The ABS indicator might blink while riding under the following conditions. This is temporary failure. Be sure to erase the problem
code (page 20-9).
Then, test ride the motorcycle above 10 km/h (6 mph) and check the problem code by retrieving the self-diagnosis system (page
20-8). Ask the rider for the riding conditions in detail when the motorcycle is brought in for inspection.
– The motorcycle has continuously run bumpy roads.
– The front wheel leaves the ground for a long time when riding (wheelie).
– Only either the front or rear wheel rotates.
– The ABS operates continuously.
– The ABS control unit has been disrupted by an extremely powerful radio wave (electromagnetic interference).
Problem
Code

–

11
13
12

14
21
23
31
32
33
34
37
38
41
42
43
51

52

53

54

20-10

Function failure
• ABS modulator voltage input line
• Indicator related wires
• Speedometer
• ABS modulator
• ABS fuse 7.5 A (ABS MAIN)
Front wheel speed sensor circuit malfunction
• Wheel speed sensor or related wires
Rear wheel speed sensor malfunction
• Wheel speed sensor or related wires
Front wheel speed sensor circuit malfunction
• Wheel speed sensor or related wires
• Electromagnetic interference
Rear wheel speed sensor malfunction
• Wheel speed sensor, pulser ring or related
wires
• Electromagnetic interference
Front pulser ring
• Pulser ring or related wires
Rear pulser ring
• Pulser ring or related wires
Solenoid valve malfunction (ABS modulator)

Detection
A
B

• ABS indicator never come
ON at all
• ABS indicator stays ON at all

Refer
to
20-12
20-13

O

O

O

O

• Stops ABS operation

20-15
20-17

• Stops ABS operation
O

20-15

O

20-17

O

• Stops ABS operation

O

20-15
20-17

• Stops ABS operation
O

Front wheel lock
• Riding condition
Front wheel lock (Wheelie)
• Riding condition
Rear wheel lock
• Riding condition
Motor lock
• Pump motor (ABS modulator) or related
wires
• ABS fuse 30 A (ABS M.)
Motor stuck off
• Pump motor (ABS modulator) or related
wires
• ABS fuse 30 A (ABS M.)
Motor stuck on
• Pump motor (ABS modulator) or related
wires
• ABS fuse 30 A (ABS M.)
Fail-safe relay malfunction
• Fail-safe relay (ABS modulator) or related
wires
• ABS fuse 30 A (ABS SOL.)

Symptom/Fail-safe function

O

O

20-19

• Stops ABS operation
20-15

O
O

20-17
• Stops ABS operation

O

O

O

O

O

O

20-20

• Stops ABS operation
O

O

20-21

dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
Problem
Code
61
62
71
81

Function failure
Power circuit/Under voltage
• Input voltage (too low)
• ABS fuse 7.5 A (ABS MAIN)
Power circuit/Over voltage
• Input voltage (too high)
Tire malfunction
• Tire size
ABS control unit
• ABS control unit malfunction (ABS
modulator)

Detection
A
B

Symptom/Fail-safe function

Refer
to

• Stops ABS operation
O

O
20-22

O

O
O

• Stops ABS operation
• Stops ABS operation

20-24

• Stops ABS operation
O

O

20-24

(A) Pre-start self-diagnosis (page 20-7)
(B) Ordinary self-diagnosis: diagnoses while the motorcycle is running (after pre-start self-diagnosis)

20-11

dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

ABS INDICATOR CIRCUIT
TROUBLESHOOTING
ABS INDICATOR DOES NOT COME ON
(when the ignition switch turned ON)
1. Combination
Inspection

Meter

Power/ground

Line

Check the combination meter power and ground
lines (page 22-10).
Are the wires normal?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Open circuit in related wires

2. Indicator Operation Inspection
Pull up the lock lever [1] and disconnect the ABS
modulator 25P connector [2].

[1]

Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
to " ".
Check the ABS indicator.
Does the ABS indicator come on?
YES

– Faulty ABS modulator

NO

– GO TO STEP 3.

[2]

3. Indicator Signal Line Short Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Check for continuity between the ABS modulator
25P connector [1] of the wire harness side and
ground.
Connection: Orange/black – Ground
TOOL:
Test probe

O/Bl

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Is there continuity?
YES

– Short circuit in Orange/black wire

NO

– Faulty combination meter
[1]

20-12

dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
ABS INDICATOR STAYS ON (Indicator
does not go off when the motorcycle is
running, Problem code is not indicated
by the retrieval procedure)
1. Service Check Line Short Circuit Inspection
Disconnect the ABS modulator 25P connector [1].

[1]

Check for continuity between the ABS modulator
25P connector of the wire harness side and ground.
Connection: Brown – Ground
TOOL:
Test probe

Br

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Is there continuity?
YES

– Short circuit in Brown wire

NO

– GO TO STEP 2.

2. Indicator Operation Inspection
With the connector connected, short the
combination meter 16P (Gray) connector [1] of the
wire harness side and ground with a jumper wire [2].
Connection: Orange/black – Ground

[1]

Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
to " ".
Check the ABS indicator.

O/Bl

Does it go off?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Faulty combination meter
[2]

3. Indicator Signal Line Open Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Remove the jumper wire from the combination
meter 16P (Gray) connector.
Short the ABS modulator 25P connector [1] of the
wire harness side and ground with a jumper wire [2].
Connection: Orange/black – Ground
TOOL:
Test probe

O/Bl

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
to " ".
Check the ABS indicator.
Does it go off?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– Open circuit in Orange/black wire

[1]

[2]

20-13

dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
4. Logic Ground Line Open Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Remove the jumper wire from the ABS modulator
25P connector [1].
Check for continuity between the ABS modulator
25P connector of the wire harness side and ground.
Connection: Green/yellow – Ground
TOOL:
Test probe

G/Y

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 5.

NO

– Open circuit in Green/yellow wire

[1]

5. Fuse Inspection
Check the ABS fuse 7.5 A (ABS MAIN) [1] in the
fuse box for blown.

NC700XA/SA shown:
[1]

Is the fuse blown?
YES

– GO TO STEP 6.

NO

– GO TO STEP 7.

6. Power Input Line Short Circuit Inspection
With the ABS fuse 7.5 A (ABS MAIN) removed,
check for continuity between the ABS modulator
25P connector [1] of the wire harness side and
ground.
Connection: Red/black – Ground
TOOL:
Test probe

R/Bl

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Is there continuity?

20-14

[1]

YES

– Short circuit in Red/black wire. Replace
the ABS fuse 7.5 A (ABS MAIN) with a
new one, and recheck.

NO

– Intermittent failure. Replace the ABS fuse
7.5 A (ABS MAIN) with a new one, and
recheck.

dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
7. Power Input Line Open Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Measure the voltage between the ABS modulator
25P connector [1] of wire harness side and ground.
Connection: Red/black (+) – Ground (–)
Standard:
Battery voltage
TOOL:
Test probe

[1]

R/Bl

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Does the standard voltage exist?
YES

– Faulty ABS modulator.

NO

– Open circuit in Red/black wire between the
ABS modulator 25P connector and ignition
switch

ABS TROUBLESHOOTING
• Perform inspection with the ignition switch OFF,
unless otherwise specified.
• Refer to the ABS connector locations (page 20-5).
• All connector diagrams in the troubleshooting are
viewed from the terminal side.
• Use a fully charged battery. Do not diagnose with a
charger connected to the battery.
• When the ABS modulator assembly is detected to be
faulty, recheck the wire harness and connector
connections closely before replacing it.
• After diagnostic troubleshooting, erase the problem
code (page 20-9) then test ride the motorcycle
above 30 km/h (18 mph) and check the other
problem code by retrieving the self-diagnosis system
(page 20-8).
• Before starting the diagnosis and troubleshooting,
check the ABS indicator circuit (page 20-12).

PROBLEM CODE 11, 12, 21, 41 or 42
(Front Wheel Speed Sensor/Front
Pulser Ring/Front Wheel Lock)
• The ABS indicator might blink under unusual riding
or conditions (page 20-10). This is temporary failure.
Erase the problem code (page 20-9) then test ride
the motorcycle above 30 km/h (18 mph) and check
the problem code by retrieving the self-diagnosis
system (page 20-8).
• If the problem code 41 is indicated, check the front
brake for drag.
1. Speed Sensor Air Gap Inspection
Measure the air gap between the speed sensor and
pulser ring (page 20-24).
Is the air gap correct?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Check each part for deformation and
looseness and correct accordingly.
Recheck the air gap.

20-15

dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
2. Speed Sensor Condition Inspection
Inspect the area around the speed sensor:

[2]

Check that there is iron or other magnetic deposits
between the pulser ring [1] and wheel speed sensor
[2], and the pulser ring slots for obstructions.
Check the installation condition of the pulser ring or
wheel speed sensor for looseness.
Check the pulser ring and sensor tip for deformation
or damage (e.g., chipped pulser ring teeth).
Are the sensor and pulser ring in good
condition?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Remove any deposits. Install properly or
replace faulty part.

[1]

3. Front Wheel Speed Sensor Line Short Circuit
Inspection (at sensor side)
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the front wheel speed sensor 2P (Blue)
connector [1].

[1]

Check for continuity between each terminal of the
sensor side front wheel speed sensor 2P (Blue)
connector and ground.
Connection: Blue – Ground
White – Ground

Bu

W

Is there continuity?
YES

– Faulty front wheel speed sensor

NO

– GO TO STEP 4.

4. Front Wheel Speed Sensor Line Short Circuit
Inspection (at wire harness side)
Disconnect the ABS modulator 25P connector.
Check for continuity between each terminal of the
wire harness side front wheel speed sensor 2P
(Blue) connector [1] and ground.
Connection: Blue/yellow – Ground
White/yellow – Ground
Is there continuity?

20-16

YES

– • Short circuit in Blue/yellow wire
• Short circuit in White/yellow wire

NO

– GO TO STEP 5.

[1]

W/Y

Bu/Y

dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
5. Speed Sensor Line Open Circuit Inspection
Short the ABS modulator 25P connector [1]
terminals of the wire harness side with a jumper wire
[2].
Connection: Blue/yellow – White/yellow
TOOL:
Test probe

[2]

[1]

Bu/Y

[3]
W/Y

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Check for continuity between the terminals of the
wire harness side front wheel speed sensor 2P
(Blue) connector [3].
Connection: Blue/yellow – White/yellow

W/Y

Bu/Y

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 6.

NO

– Open circuit in Blue/yellow or White/yellow
wire

6. Failure Reproduction with a New Speed Sensor
Replace the front wheel speed sensor with a new
one (page 20-25).
Connect the ABS modulator 25P and front wheel
speed sensor 2P (Blue) connectors.

[1]

Erase the problem code (page 20-9).
Test ride the motorcycle above 30 km/h (18 mph).
Retrieve the problem code (page 20-8) and recheck
the ABS indicator [1].
Dose the ABS indicator indicate the code "11,
12, 21, 41 or 42"?
YES

– Faulty ABS modulator.

NO

– Faulty removed wheel speed sensor

PROBLEM CODE 13, 14, 23 or 43 (Rear
Wheel Speed Sensor/Rear Pulser Ring/
Rear Wheel Lock)
• The ABS indicator might blink under unusual riding
or conditions (page 20-10). This is temporary failure.
Erase the problem code (page 20-9) then test ride
the motorcycle above 30 km/h (18 mph) and check
the problem code by retrieving the self-diagnosis
system (page 20-8).
• If the problem code 43 is indicated, check the rear
brake for drag.
1. Speed Sensor Air Gap Inspection
Measure the air gap between the speed sensor and
pulser ring (page 20-24).
Is the air gap correct?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Check each part for deformation and
looseness and correct accordingly.
Recheck the air gap.

20-17

dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
2. Speed Sensor Condition Inspection
Inspect the area around the speed sensor:

[1]

[2]

Check that there is iron or other magnetic deposits
between the pulser ring [1] and wheel speed sensor
[2], and the pulser ring slots for obstructions.
Check installation condition of the pulser ring or
wheel speed sensor for looseness.
Check the pulser ring and sensor tip for deformation
or damage (e.g., chipped pulser ring teeth).
Are the sensor and pulser ring in good
condition?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Remove any deposits. Install properly or
replace faulty part.

3. Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Line Short Circuit
Inspection (at sensor side)
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor 2P (Gray)
connector [1].

[1]

Check for continuity between each terminal of the
sensor side rear wheel speed sensor 2P (Gray)
connector and ground.
Connection: Blue – Ground
White – Ground

Bu

W

Is there continuity?
YES

– Faulty rear wheel speed sensor

NO

– GO TO STEP 4.

4. Rear Wheel Speed Sensor Line Short Circuit
Inspection (at wire harness side)
Disconnect the ABS modulator 25P connector.
Check for continuity between each terminal of the
wire harness side rear wheel speed sensor 2P
(Gray) connector [1] and ground.
Connection: Blue – Ground
White – Ground
Is there continuity?

20-18

YES

– • Short circuit in Blue wire
• Short circuit in White wire

NO

– GO TO STEP 5.

[1]

W

Bu

dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
5. Speed Sensor Line Open Circuit Inspection
Short the ABS modulator 25P connector [1]
terminals of the wire harness side with a jumper wire
[2].
Connection: Blue – White
TOOL:
Test probe

[2]

[1]

Bu

[3]
W

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Check for continuity between the terminals of the
wire harness side rear wheel speed sensor 2P
(Gray) connector [3].
Connection: Blue – White

W

Bu

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 6.

NO

– Open circuit in Blue or White wire

6. Failure Reproduction with a New Speed Sensor
Replace the rear wheel speed sensor with a new
one (page 20-26).
Connect the ABS modulator 25P and rear wheel
speed sensor 2P (Gray) connectors.

[1]

Erase the problem code (page 20-9).
Test ride the motorcycle above 30 km/h (18 mph).
Retrieve the problem code (page 20-8) and recheck
the ABS indicator [1].
Dose the ABS indicator indicate the code "13,
14, 23 or 43"?
YES

– Faulty ABS modulator

NO

– Faulty removed wheel speed sensor

PROBLEM CODE 31, 32, 33, 34, 37 or
38 (Solenoid Valve)
1. Failure Reproduction
Erase the problem code (page 20-9).
Test ride the motorcycle above 30 km/h (18 mph).
Retrieve the problem code (page 20-8) and recheck
the ABS indicator [1].

[1]

Does the ABS indicator indicate the code "31,
32, 33, 34, 37 or 38"?
YES

– Faulty ABS modulator

NO

– Solenoid valve is normal (intermittent
failure).

20-19

dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
PROBLEM CODE 51, 52 or 53 (Pump
Motor)
1. Fuse Inspection
Check the ABS fuse 30 A (ABS M.) [1] in the fuse
box for blown.

NC700XA/SA shown:

[1]

Is the fuse blown?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– GO TO STEP 3.

2. Motor Power Input Line Short Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the ABS modulator 25P connector [1].
Check for continuity between the ABS modulator
25P connector of the wire harness side and ground.
Connection: Violet/white – Ground
V/W

TOOL:
Test probe

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Is there continuity?
YES

– Short circuit in Violet/white wire

NO

– Intermittent failure. Replace the ABS fuse
30 A (ABS M.) with a new one, and
recheck.

[1]

3. Motor Power Input Line Open Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the ABS modulator 25P connector [1].
Measure the voltage between the ABS modulator
25P connector of the wire harness side and ground.
Connection: Violet/white (+) – Ground (–)
Standard:
Battery voltage
TOOL:
Test probe

V/W

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Does the standard voltage exist?

20-20

YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– Open circuit in Violet/white or Black wire
between the battery and ABS modulator
25P connector

[1]

dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
4. Failure Reproduction
Connect the ABS modulator 25P connector.

[1]

Erase the problem code (page 20-9).
Test ride the motorcycle above 30 km/h (18 mph).
Retrieve the problem code (page 20-8) and recheck
the ABS indicator [1].
Does the ABS indicator indicate the code "51, 52
or 53"?
YES

– Faulty ABS modulator

NO

– Pump motor is normal (intermittent failure).

PROBLEM CODE 54 (Fail-safe Relay)
1. Fuse Inspection
Check the ABS fuse 30 A (ABS SOL.) [1] in the fuse
box for blown.

NC700XA/SA shown:

[1]

Is the fuse blown?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– GO TO STEP 3.

2. Relay Power Input Line Short Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the ABS modulator 25P connector [1].
Check for continuity between the ABS modulator
25P connector of the wire harness side and ground.
Connection: Black/white – Ground
Bl/W

TOOL:
Test probe

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Is there continuity?
YES

– Short circuit in Black/white wire

NO

– Intermittent failure. Replace the ABS fuse
30 A (ABS SOL.) with a new one, and
recheck.

[1]

20-21

dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
3. Relay Power Input Line Open Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the ABS modulator 25P connector [1].
Measure the voltage between the ABS modulator
25P connector of the wire harness side and ground.
Connection: Black/white (+) – Ground (–)
Standard:
Battery voltage
TOOL:
Test probe

Bl/W

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Does the standard voltage exist?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– Open circuit in Black/white or Black wire
between the battery and ABS modulator
25P connector

[1]

4. Failure Reproduction
Connect the ABS modulator 25P connector.
Erase the problem code (page 20-9).
Test ride the motorcycle above 30 km/h (18 mph).
Retrieve the problem code (page 20-8) and recheck
the ABS indicator [1].

[1]

Does the ABS indicator indicate the code "54"?
YES

– Faulty ABS modulator

NO

– Fail-safe relay is normal (intermittent
failure)

PROBLEM CODE 61 or 62 (Power
Circuit)
1. Fuse Inspection
Check the ABS fuse 7.5 A (ABS MAIN) [1] in the
fuse box for blown.
Is the fuse blown?

20-22

YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– GO TO STEP 3.

NC700XA/SA shown:
[1]

dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
2. Power Input Line Short Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the ABS modulator 25P connector [1].
With the ABS fuse 7.5 A (ABS MAIN) removed,
check for continuity between the ABS modulator
25P connector of the wire harness side and ground.
Connection: Red/black – Ground
TOOL:
Test probe

[1]

R/Bl

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Is there continuity?
YES

– Short circuit in Red/black wire

NO

– Intermittent failure. Replace the ABS fuse
7.5 A (ABS MAIN) with a new one, and
recheck.

3. Power Input Line Open Circuit Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the ABS modulator 25P connector [1].

[1]

Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" ".
Measure the voltage between the ABS modulator
25P connector of the wire harness side and ground.
Connection: Red/black (+) – Ground (–)
Standard:
Battery voltage
TOOL:
Test probe

R/Bl

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Does the standard voltage exist?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– Open circuit in Red/black wire between the
ABS modulator 25P connector and ignition
switch

4. Failure Reproduction
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Connect the ABS modulator 25P connector.

[1]

Erase the problem code (page 20-9).
Test ride the motorcycle above 30 km/h (18 mph).
Retrieve the problem code (page 20-8) and recheck
the ABS indicator [1].
Does the ABS indicator indicate the code "61 or
62"?
YES

– Faulty ABS modulator

NO

– Power circuit is normal (intermittent failure)

20-23

dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
PROBLEM CODE 71 (Tire Size)
• Check the following and correct the faulty part.
– Incorrect tire pressure.
– Tires not recommended for the motorcycle were
installed (incorrect tire size).
– Deformation of the wheel or tire.
1. Failure Reproduction
If the above items are normal, recheck the problem
code indication:
Erase the problem code (page 20-9).
Test ride the motorcycle above 30 km/h (18 mph).
Retrieve the problem code (page 20-8) and recheck
the ABS indicator [1].

[1]

Does the ABS indicator indicate the code "71"?
YES

– Faulty ABS modulator

NO

– Tire size is normal (intermittent failure)

PROBLEM CODE 81 (ABS Control
Unit)
1. Failure Reproduction
Erase the problem code (page 20-9).
Test ride the motorcycle above 30 km/h (18 mph).
Retrieve the problem code (page 20-8) and recheck
the ABS indicator [1].

[1]

Does the ABS indicator indicate the code "81"?
YES

– Faulty ABS modulator

NO

– ABS control unit is normal (intermittent
failure)

WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
AIR GAP INSPECTION
Support the motorcycle securely using a hoist or
equivalent and raise the wheel off the ground.
Measure the clearance (air gap) between the sensor
and pulser ring at several points by turning the wheel
slowly.
It must be within specification.
STANDARD: 0.54 – 1.14 mm (0.021 – 0.045 in)
The clearance (air gap) cannot be adjusted.
If it is not within specification, check each part for
deformation, looseness or damage.
Check the wheel speed sensor for damage, and
replace if necessary.
Check the pulse ring for deformation or damage, and
replace if necessary.
– Front pulser ring (page 17-22)
– Rear pulser ring (page 18-7)

20-24

Front shown:

dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR
REPLACEMENT
Refer to procedure for the pulser ring removal/
installation.
– Front pulser ring (page 17-22)
– Rear pulser ring (page 18-7)
FRONT WHEEL SPEED SENSOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION
Remove the bolts [1] and radiator lower stay [2].

[1]

[2]

Release the radiator boss from the radiator mounting
rubber [3].

[3]

SLITS

[1]

Release the fan motor 3P (Gray) connector [1], air
cleaner housing drain hose [2] and spark plug wire [3]
from the radiator.

Align
[1]

[3]

[2]
NC700XA/XD:

Remove the shroud/side cover (page 2-14).

NC700XA:

NC700XD:

Remove the front wheel speed sensor 2P (Blue)
connector [1] from the frame and disconnect the
connector.

[1]

[1]

20-25

dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
NC700SA/SD:

Remove the side cowl (page 2-13).

NC700SA/SD:

Remove the front wheel speed sensor 2P (Blue)
connector [1] from the side cover and disconnect the
connector.
Release the sensor wire from the guide [2].

[1]

Release the sensor wire [1] from the clamps [2].

[1]

[2]
[2]

[4]

[1]

Remove the bolt [3] and speed sensor wire clamp [4],
then release the speed sensor wire.
Remove the bolt [5] and brake hose clamp [6], then
release the speed sensor wire.

[3]

[2]
[5]

[6]

Release the sensor wire [1] from the clamp [2].

[1]

[4]

Remove the bolt [3] and front wheel speed sensor wire
guide [4].
Remove the bolts [5] and front wheel speed sensor [6].
Clean around the mounting area of the caliper bracket
thoroughly, and be sure that no foreign material is
allowed to enter the mounting hole.

[2]

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Route the wire and hoses properly (page 1-25).
• Make sure the radiator mounting rubber slits facing
down.
• Align radiator lower stay slit with cylinder head tab.

[3]

[5]

[6]

REAR WHEEL SPEED SENSOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION
Remove the following:
– Shroud/side cover (NC700XA/XD) (page 2-14)
– Shelter/side cover (NC700SA/SD) (page 2-15)
– Muffler (page 2-32)
Remove the step holder mounting socket bolts [1] and
right step holder [2].

[1]

20-26

[2]

dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
Disconnect the rear wheel speed sensor 2P (Gray)
connector [1].
Release the rear wheel speed sensor 2P (Gray)
connector from the ECM box [2].
Release the clamp [3].

[2]
[1]
[3]

Remove the socket bolts [1] and brake hose guide [2].

[2]

[4]

[3]

Release the brake hose [3] and rear wheel speed
sensor wire [4] from the brake hose guide.

[1]

Remove the clamp [1] and release the rear wheel
speed sensor wire [2].

[4]

[1]

Remove the bolts [3] and rear wheel speed sensor [4].
Clean around the mounting area of the caliper bracket
thoroughly, and be sure that no foreign material is
allowed to enter the mounting hole.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Route the wire and hoses properly (page 1-25).
TORQUE:
Step holder mounting socket bolt:
32 N·m (3.3 kgf·m, 24 lbf·ft)

[3]

[2]

20-27

dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

PCV
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Drain the brake fluid from the lever/pedal brake line
hydraulic systems (page 19-11).

[1]

Remove the luggage box (page 2-19).
Loosen the brake pipe joint nuts [1] and disconnect the
brake pipe from the PCV [2].
Remove the PCV mounting bolt (long) [3], PCV
mounting bolt (short) [4] and PCV.
Be careful not to bent or damage the brake pipes.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
TORQUE:
PCV mounting bolt:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Brake pipe joint nut:
14 N·m (1.4 kgf·m, 10 lbf·ft)
Apply brake fluid to the joint nut threads and sliding
surface.
[2]
[4]

[3]

DELAY VALVE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Drain the brake fluid from the lever/pedal brake line
hydraulic systems (page 19-11).

[1]

Remove the luggage box (page 2-19).
Loosen the brake pipe joint nut [1], and disconnect the
brake pipe from the delay valve [2].
Remove the delay valve mounting bolts [3] and delay
valve.
Be careful not to bent or damage the brake pipes.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
TORQUE:
Delay valve mounting bolt:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Brake pipe joint nut:
14 N·m (1.4 kgf·m, 10 lbf·ft)
Apply brake fluid to the joint nut threads and sliding
surface.

20-28

[3]

[2]

dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)

ABS MODULATOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700XA/
SA)
Be careful not to bend or damage the brake pipes
during assembly or removal.
Remove the following:
– Delay valve (page 20-28)
– PCV (page 20-28)

NC700XA shown:

[1]

[3]

Pull up the lock lever [1] and disconnect the ABS
modulator 25P connector [2].
Release the main wire harness clamp(s) [3] from the
ABS modulator stay.

[2]

[3] (NC700XA only)

Loosen the brake pipe joint nuts [1] and disconnect the
brake pipes from the ABS modulator.

[1]

Remove the ABS modulator stay mounting bolts [1],
collars [2] and ABS modulator assembly [3].
Be careful not to bent or damage the brake pipes.

[1]/[2]

[3]

20-29

dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
Remove the ABS modulator mounting bolts [1] and
ABS modulator [2] from the ABS modulator stay [3].

[3]

[2]

[1]

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Apply brake fluid to the joint nut threads and sliding
surface.
• Route the wire harness properly (page 1-25).
TORQUE:
PCV mounting bolt:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Delay valve mounting bolt:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Brake pipe joint nut:
14 N·m (1.4 kgf·m, 10 lbf·ft)

BRAKE PIPE JOINT NUT
14 N·m (1.4 kgf·m, 10 lbf·ft)

PCV MOUNTING BOLT (LONG)
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
PCV MOUNTING BOLT (SHORT)
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

ABS MODULATOR STAY
MOUNTING BOLTS/COLLARS

PCV

ABS MODULATOR
25P CONNECTOR

DELAY VALVE MOUNTING BOLTS
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
DELAY VALVE
ABS MODULATOR/STAY

20-30

dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700XD/
SD)
Be careful not to bend or damage the brake pipes
during assembly or removal.
Remove the following:

[1]

– Delay valve (page 20-28)
– PCV (page 20-28)
Remove the linear solenoid valve 4P (Green) connector
[1] and shift spindle angle sensor 3P (Gray) connector
[2] from the ABS modulator stay.

[2]

Pull up the lock lever [1] and disconnect the ABS
modulator 25P connector [2].

NC700XD shown:

[1]

[3] (NC700XD only)

Release the main wire harness clamps [3] from the ABS
modulator stay.

[3]

[2]

Loosen the brake pipe joint nuts [1] and disconnect the
brake pipes from the ABS modulator.

[1]

Remove the center cross plate (page 2-32).
Remove the TR sensor 3P (Black) connector [1] and
Junction D 24P connector [2] from the ABS modulator
stay.
Remove the ABS modulator assembly [3].
Be careful not to bent or damage the brake pipes.

[3]

[1]

[2]

20-31

dummyhead

ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)
Remove the ABS modulator mounting bolts [1] and
ABS modulator [2] from the ABS modulator stay [3].

[3]

[2]

[1]

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Apply brake fluid to the joint nut threads and sliding
surface.
• Route the wire harness properly (page 1-25).
TORQUE:
PCV mounting bolt:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Delay valve mounting bolt:
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Brake pipe joint nut:
14 N·m (1.4 kgf·m, 10 lbf·ft)

TR SENSOR
3P (BLACK) CONNECTOR

JUNCTION D
24P CONNECTOR

PCV MOUNTING BOLT (LONG)
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

ABS MODULATOR STAY
MOUNTING BOLTS/COLLARS

PCV

PCV MOUNTING BOLT (SHORT)
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)

BRAKE PIPE JOINT NUT
14 N·m (1.4 kgf·m, 10 lbf·ft)

DELAY VALVE MOUNTING BOLTS
12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
DELAY VALVE
ABS MODULATOR/STAY
LINEAR SOLENOID VALVE
4P (GREEN) CONNECTOR
ABS MODULATOR
25P CONNECTOR

20-32

SHIFT SPINDLE ANGLE SENSOR
3P (GRAY) CONNECTOR

dummytext

21. BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM

SYSTEM LOCATION···································21-2

BATTERY ···················································· 21-6

SYSTEM DIAGRAM ····································21-2

CHARGING SYSTEM INSPECTION ·········· 21-7

SERVICE INFORMATION ···························21-3

REGULATOR/RECTIFIER ·························· 21-8

TROUBLESHOOTING·································21-5

ALTERNATOR CHARGING COIL ·············· 21-9

21

21-1

dummyhead

BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM

SYSTEM LOCATION
BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM

BATTERY
MAIN FUSE 30 A

REGULATOR/RECTIFIER

ALTERNATOR

SYSTEM DIAGRAM

MAIN FUSE 30 A

G

BATTERY

R

Y

Y

Y

REGULATOR/RECTIFIER

ALTERNATOR

G: Green
R: Red
Y: Yellow

21-2

dummyhead

BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM

SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL

• The battery gives off explosive gases; keep sparks, flames and cigarettes away. Provide adequate ventilation when
charging.
• The battery contains sulfuric acid (electrolyte). Contact with skin or eyes may cause severe burns. Wear protective clothing
and a face shield.
– If electrolyte gets on your skin, flush with water.
– If electrolyte gets in your eyes, flush with water for at least 15 minutes and call a physician immediately.
• Electrolyte is poisonous.
– If swallowed, drink large quantities of water or milk and call your local Poison Control Center or call a physician
immediately.

• Always turn OFF the ignition switch before disconnecting any electrical component.
• Some electrical components may be damaged if terminals or connectors are connected or disconnected while the ignition switch
is ON and current is present.
• For extended storage, remove the battery, give it a full charge, and store it in a cool, dry space. For maximum service life,
charge the stored battery every two weeks.
• For a battery remaining in a stored motorcycle, disconnect the negative battery cable from the battery terminal.
• The maintenance free (MF) battery must be replaced when it reaches the end of its service life.
• The battery can be damaged if overcharged or undercharged, or if left to discharge for long period. These same conditions
contribute to shortening the "life span" of the battery. Even under normal use, the performance of the battery deteriorates after 2
– 3 years.
• Battery voltage may recover after battery charging, but under heavy load, the battery voltage will drop quickly and eventually die
out. For this reason, the charging system is often suspected as the problem. Battery overcharge often results from problems in
the battery itself, which may appear to be an overcharging symptom. If one of the battery cells is shorted and battery voltage
does not increase, the regulator/rectifier supplies excess voltage to the battery. Under these conditions, the electrolyte level
goes down quickly.
• Before troubleshooting the charging system, check for proper use and maintenance of the battery. Check if the battery is
frequently under heavy load, such as having the headlight and taillight ON for long periods of time without riding the motorcycle.
• The battery will self-discharge when the motorcycle is not in use. For this reason, charge the battery every two weeks to prevent
sulfation from occurring.
• When checking the charging system, always follow the steps in the troubleshooting flow chart (page 21-5).
• For alternator service (page 13-13).
• The following color codes are used throughout this section.
G = Green

R = Red

Y = Yellow

BATTERY CHARGING
• Turn power ON/OFF at the charger, not at the battery terminal.
• For battery charging, do not exceed the charging current and time specified on the battery. Using excessive current or extending
the charging time may damage the battery.
• Quick charging should only be done in an emergency; slow charging is preferred.
BATTERY TESTING
Refer to the battery tester’s Operation Manual for the recommended battery testing procedure.
The recommended battery tester puts a "load" on the battery so the actual battery condition of the load can be measured.
RECOMMENDED BATTERY TESTER: BM-210 or BATTERY MATE or equivalent

21-3

dummyhead

BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM
SPECIFICATIONS
Battery

ITEM
Type
Capacity
Current leakage
Voltage
(20°C/68°F)
Charging current

Alternator

21-4

Fully charged
Needs
charging
Normal
Quick

Capacity
Charging coil resistance (20°C/68°F)

SPECIFICATIONS
YTZ12S
12 V – 11 Ah
1.2 mA maximum
13.0 – 13.2 V
Below 12.4 V
1.1 A/5 – 10 h
5.5 A/1 h
0.42 kW/5,000 min-1 (rpm)
0.1 – 0.5 Ω

dummyhead

BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM

TROUBLESHOOTING
BATTERY IS DAMAGED OR WEAK
1. BATTERY TEST
Remove the battery (page 21-6).
Check the battery condition using the recommended battery tester.
RECOMMENDED BATTERY TESTER: BM-210 or BATTERY MATE or equivalent
Is the battery good condition?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Faulty battery

2. CURRENT LEAKAGE TEST
Install the battery (page 21-6).
Check the battery current leakage test (page 21-7).
Is the current leakage below 1.2 mA?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– GO TO STEP 6.

3. CHARGING VOLTAGE INSPECTION
Measure and record the battery voltage using a digital multimeter (page 21-6).
Start the engine.
Measure the charging voltage (page 21-7).
Compare the measurement to result of the following calculation.
STANDARD:
Measured BV < Measured CV < 15.5 V
• BV = Battery Voltage
• CV = Charging Voltage
Is the measured charging voltage within the standard voltage?
YES

– Faulty battery

NO

– GO TO STEP 4.

4. REGULATOR/RECTIFIER SYSTEM INSPECTION
Check the voltage and resistance at the regulator/rectifier connector (page 21-8).
Are the results of checked voltage and resistance correct?
YES

– GO TO STEP 5.

NO

– • Open circuit in related wire
• Loose or poor contacts of related terminal
• Shorted wire harness

5. ALTERNATOR CHARGING COIL INSPECTION
Check the alternator charging coil (page 21-9).
Is the alternator charging coil resistance within 0.1 – 0.5 Ω (20°C/68°F)?
YES

– Faulty regulator/rectifier

NO

– Faulty charging coil

6. CURRENT LEAKAGE TEST WITHOUT REGULATOR/RECTIFIER CONNECTOR
Disconnect the regulator/rectifier 2P (Black) connector and recheck the battery current leakage.
Is the current leakage below 1.2 mA?
YES

– Faulty regulator/rectifier

NO

– • Shorted wire harness
• Faulty ignition switch

21-5

dummyhead

BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM

BATTERY
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Open the luggage box lid using the ignition key.
Remove the screws [1] and maintenance lid [2].
Always turn the
ignition switch OFF
before removing the
battery.

Remove the battery holder band [3].
[1]

Disconnect the battery negative (–) cable [4] first, then
disconnect the battery positive (+) cable [5].

[4]

Remove the battery [6].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Connect the positive (+) cable first, then connect the
negative (–) cable.
• For digital clock setting procedure (page 22-14).

[6]
[3]
[5]
[2]

VOLTAGE INSPECTION
Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).
Measure the battery voltage using a commercially
available digital multimeter.
VOLTAGE (20°C/68°F):
Fully charged: 13.0 – 13.2 V
Needs charging: Below 12.4 V

BATTERY TESTING
Remove the battery (page 21-6).
Refer to the instructions that are appropriate to the
battery testing equipment available to you.
TOOL:
Battery tester

21-6

BM-210 or
BATTERY MATE
or equivalent

dummyhead

BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM

CHARGING SYSTEM INSPECTION
CURRENT LEAKAGE TEST
Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).

[3]

[1]

Turn the ignition switch OFF, disconnect the negative
(–) cable [1] from the battery.
Connect the ammeter (+) probe [2] to the negative (–)
cable and the ammeter (–) probe [3] to the battery (–)
terminal.
With the ignition switch OFF, check for current leakage.
• When measuring current using a tester, set it to a
high range, and then bring the range down to an
appropriate level. Current flow higher than the range
selected may blow the fuse in the tester.
• While measuring current, do not turn the ignition
switch ON. A sudden surge of current may blow the
fuse in the tester.

[2]

SPECIFIED CURRENT LEAKAGE: 1.2 mA maximum
If current leakage exceeds the specified value, a
shorted circuit is the probable cause.
Locate the short by disconnecting connections one by
one and measuring the current.

CHARGING VOLTAGE INSPECTION
Make sure the battery is in good condition before
performing this test.
Start the engine and warm it up to the operating
temperature; then stop the engine.

[1]

[2]

Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).
Connect the multimeter between the positive terminal
[1] and negative terminal [2] of the battery.
• To prevent a short, make absolutely certain which
are the positive and negative terminals or cable.
• Do not disconnect the battery or any cable in the
charging system without first switching off the
ignition switch. Failure to follow this precaution can
damage the tester or electrical components.
With the headlight on high beam, restart the engine.
Measure the voltage on the multimeter when the engine
runs at 5,000 min-1 (rpm).
STANDARD:
Measured BV < Measured CV < 15.5 V
• BV = Battery Voltage (page 21-6)
• CV = Charging Voltage
If the charging voltage reading is out of the
specification, inspect the regulator/rectifier (page 21-8).

21-7

dummyhead

BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM

REGULATOR/RECTIFIER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA/XD) (page
2-14).

[3]

[1]

[3]

Remove the shelter/side cover (NC700S/SA/SD) (page
2-15).
Remove the bolt [1] and rear brake reservoir stay/
reservoir [2].
Remove the socket bolts [3].

Align

[2]

Lower the rear fender B [1].

[4]

[2]

[1]

Remove the bolts [2] and regulator/rectifier [3].
Disconnect the alternator 3P (Black) connector [4] and
regulator/rectifier 2P (Black) connector [5].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Route the wire harness and hoses properly (page 125).
• Align the rear brake reservoir stay with the frame
tab.
[5]

SYSTEM INSPECTION
Check connectors for loose contact or corroded
terminals.
Inspect the following items:
– Battery charging line (page 21-8)
– Ground line (page 21-9)
– Charging coil (page 21-9)
If all components of the charging system are normal
and there are no loose connections at the regulator/
rectifier connectors, replace the regulator/rectifier.

BATTERY CHARGING LINE
INSPECTION
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[1]

Disconnect the regulator/rectifier 2P (Black) connector
[1] (page 21-8).
Measure the voltage between the regulator/rectifier 2P
(Black) connector terminal at the wire side and ground.
CONNECTION: Red (+) – Ground (–)
STANDARD:
Battery voltage
There should be battery voltage at all times.

21-8

R

[3]

dummyhead

BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM
GROUND LINE INSPECTION
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

[1]

Disconnect the regulator/rectifier 2P (Black) connector
[1] (page 21-8).
Check for continuity between the regulator/rectifier 2P
(Black) connector at the wire side and ground.

G

CONNECTION: Green – Ground
There should be continuity at all times.

ALTERNATOR CHARGING COIL
CHARGING COIL INSPECTION
It is not necessary
to remove the stator
coil to make this
test.

Disconnect the alternator 3P (Black) connector [1]
(page 21-8).

[1]

Measure the resistance between the alternator 3P
(Black) connector each terminals at the wire side.

Y

CONNECTION: Yellow – Yellow
STANDARD:
0.1 – 0.5 Ω (20°C/68°F)

Check for continuity between the alternator 3P (Black)
connector [1] each terminals at the wire side and
ground.
CONNECTION: Yellow – Ground
STANDARD:
No continuity
Replace the stator if the resistance is out of
specification, or if any wire has continuity to ground.

Y

Y

[1]

Y

Y
Y

For alternator/starter replacement (page 13-13).

21-9

dummyhead

MEMO

dummytext

22. LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES

SYSTEM LOCATION···································22-2

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR/EOP
SWITCH····················································· 22-19

SERVICE INFORMATION ···························22-3
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR····························· 22-21
TROUBLESHOOTING·································22-4
HEADLIGHT ················································22-5

PARKING BRAKE INDICATOR/SWITCH
(NC700XD/SD) ·········································· 22-22

TURN SIGNAL LIGHT·································22-6

IGNITION SWITCH···································· 22-24

POSITION LIGHT ········································22-7

HANDLEBAR SWITCHES ························ 22-25

BRAKE/TAIL/LICENSE LIGHT ···················22-8

BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH ··························· 22-26

COMBINATION METER······························22-8

CLUTCH SWITCH (NC700X/XA/S/SA) ···· 22-26

SPEEDOMETER/VS SENSOR··················22-16

NEUTRAL SWITCH ·································· 22-27

TACHOMETER··········································22-18

SIDESTAND SWITCH ······························· 22-28

HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR/ECT SENSOR·······················22-18

HORN ························································ 22-29
TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD RELAY ············· 22-30

22

22-1

dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES

SYSTEM LOCATION
LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES

NC700X/XA/S/SA:
FRONT BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH
HORN
ECT SENSOR
CLUTCH SWITCH

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR

IGNITION SWITCH

TURN SIGNAL/
HAZARD RELAY

EOP SWITCH
NEUTRAL SWITCH
REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH
VS SENSOR
SIDESTAND SWITCH

NC700XD/SD:
FRONT BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH
HORN
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH

ECT SENSOR
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR

IGNITION SWITCH

TURN SIGNAL/
HAZARD RELAY

EOP SWITCH
NEUTRAL SWITCH
REAR BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH
VS SENSOR
SIDESTAND SWITCH

22-2

dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES

SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
• Note the following when replacing the halogen headlight bulb.
– Wear clean gloves while replacing the bulb. Do not put fingerprints on the headlight bulb, as they may create hot spots on the
bulb and cause it to fail.
– If you touch the bulb with your bare hands, clean it with a cloth moistened with alcohol to prevent its early failure.
• Be sure to install the dust cover after replacing the headlight bulb.
• A halogen headlight bulb becomes very hot while the headlight is ON, and remains hot for a while after it is turned OFF. Be sure
to let it cool down before servicing.
• Check the battery condition before performing any inspection that requires proper battery voltage.
• Use an electric heating element to heat the water/coolant mixture for the ECT sensor inspection. Keep flammable materials
away from the electric heating element. Wear protective clothing, insulated gloves and eye protection.
• A continuity test can be made with the switches installed on the motorcycle.
• The following color codes are used throughout this section.
Bu = Blue
Bl = Black

G = Green
Gr = Gray

P = Pink
R = Red

V = Violet
W = White

Y = Yellow

SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM
Headlight
Position light
Brake/tail/license light
Turn signal light
Instrument light
Turn signal indicator
High beam indicator
Neutral indicator
Engine oil pressure indicator
High coolant temperature indicator
MIL
HISS indicator
ABS indicator (NC700XA/XD/SA/SD)
Parking brake indicator (NC700XD/SD)
Fuse
Main fuse
PGM-FI fuse
Sub fuse
ABS fuse (NC700XA/XD/SA/SD)
DCT fuse (NC700XD/SD)
ECT sensor resistance
40°C (104°F)
100°C (212°F)
Fuel level sensor resistance
Full
Empty

SPECIFICATIONS
12 V – 60/55 W
12 V – 5 W
12 V – 21/5 W
12 V – 21 W x 4
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
LED
30 A
15 A
15 A x 2, 7.5 A x 4
30 A x 2, 7.5 A
30 A, 7.5 A
1.0 – 1.3 kΩ
0.1 – 0.2 kΩ
4–6Ω
80 – 83 Ω

Bulbs

TORQUE VALUES

4
3

THREAD
DIA. (mm)
6
5

TORQUE
N·m (kgf·m, lbf·ft)
2.5 (0.3, 1.8)
1.0 (0.1, 0.7)

4

3

0.3 (0.03, 0.2)

1
2

PT 1/8
8

18 (1.8, 13)
25 (2.5, 18)

1
1

10
4

12 (1.2, 9)
1.2 (0.1, 0.9)

ITEM

Q'TY

Turn signal light mounting screw
Combination meter mounting
screw
Combination meter back cover
mounting screw (NC700S/SA/SD)
EOP switch
Ignition switch mounting bolt
Neutral switch
Parking brake switch screw
(NC700XD/SD)

REMARKS

Apply sealant to the threads.
One way bolt; replace with a new
one.

22-3

dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES

TROUBLESHOOTING
SPEED SENSOR/SPEEDOMETER (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
The speedometer operation is abnormal
1. Fuse Inspection
Check for blown main fuse or sub fuse.
Is the fuse blown?
YES

– Replace the fuse.

NO

– GO TO STEP 2.

2. Battery Inspection
Make sure the battery is fully charged and in good condition.
Is the battery in good condition?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Charge or replace the battery (page 21-6).

3. VS Sensor Power Input Voltage Inspection
Disconnect the VS sensor 3P (Black) connector.
Measure the voltage at the VS sensor 3P (Black) connector terminals with the ignition switch turned ON.
CONNECTION: Pink/blue (+) – Green/red (–)
STANDARD:
Battery voltage
Is there Battery Voltage?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– • Loose or poor contact of related terminals
• Open circuit in Pink/blue wire
• Open circuit in Green/red wire

4. VS Sensor Signal Line Inspection
With the ignition switch OFF, check for continuity between the VS sensor 3P (Black) connector and
combination meter 16P (Gray) connector.
CONNECTION: Pink/green – Pink/green
Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 5.

NO

– Open circuit in Pink/green wire

5. VS Sensor Signal Inspection
Connect the VS sensor 3P (Black) connector.
Support the motorcycle using a hoist or other support to raise the rear wheel off the ground.
Measure the output voltage (sensor signal) at the speedometer with the ignition switch turned ON while
slowly turning the rear wheel by your hand.
CONNECTION: Pink/green (+) – Green/red (–)
STANDARD:
Repeat 0 to 5 V
Is the voltage within specified value?

22-4

YES

– Faulty combination meter

NO

– Faulty VS sensor

dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES

HEADLIGHT
For headlight unit removal/installation.
– NC700X/XA/XD (page 2-26)
– NC700S/SA/SD (page 2-27)

BULB REPLACEMENT (NC700X/XA/
XD)
Disconnect the headlight 3P (Black) connector [1].

[3]

[4]

Remove the dust cover [2].
Unhook the bulb retainer [3] and remove the headlight
bulb [4].

[6]
[5]

Avoid touching halogen headlight bulb. Finger prints
can create hot spots that cause a bulb to break.
Install a new bulb, while aligning its tabs with the slots
of the headlight unit.

[2]

Hook the bulb retainer into the headlight unit groove.
[1]

Install the dust cover tightly against the headlight unit.
Install the dust cover with its "TOP" mark [5] and arrow
mark [6] facing up.
Connect the headlight 3P (Black) connector.

BULB REPLACEMENT (NC700S/SA/
SD)
Remove the headlight/headlight stay (page 2-27).

[2]

Remove the dust cover [1].
Unhook the bulb retainer [2] and remove the headlight
bulb [3].

[5]

Avoid touching halogen headlight bulb. Finger prints
can create hot spots that cause a bulb to break.
Install a new bulb, while aligning its tabs with the slots
of the headlight unit.

[4]

Hook the bulb retainer into the headlight unit groove.
Install the dust cover tightly against the headlight unit.
Install the dust cover with its "TOP" mark [4] and arrow
mark [5] facing up.
Install the headlight/headlight stay (page 2-27).
[1]

[3]

22-5

dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES

TURN SIGNAL LIGHT
BULB REPLACEMENT
Remove the screws [1] and turn signal light lens [2].

[2]

While pushing in the bulb [3], turn it counterclockwise to
remove it.
Replace the bulb with a new one.
Check the packing [4] is installed in position and is in
good condition, replace it with a new one if necessary.
Install the turn signal light lens and screw.
Tighten the screw securely.
[3]
[1]

[4]

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FRONT (NC700X/XA/XD)
Remove the front side cowl (page 2-24).

[1]

Remove the turn signal light mounting screw [1], setting
plate [2] and turn signal light [3].
Remove the mounting rubber [4].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Route the wires properly (page 1-25).

[3]

TORQUE:
Turn signal light mounting screw:
2.5 N·m (0.3 kgf·m, 1.8 lbf·ft)
[2]

[4]

FRONT (NC700S/SA/SD)
Remove the headlight/headlight stay (page 2-27).
Disconnect the front turn signal light 3P connector [1].
Remove the turn signal light mounting screw [2], setting
plate [3] and turn signal light [4].
Remove the mounting rubber [5].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Route the wires properly (page 1-25).
TORQUE:
Turn signal light mounting screw:
2.5 N·m (0.3 kgf·m, 1.8 lbf·ft)

22-6

[4]
[2]
[5]

[3]

[1]

dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
REAR
Remove the tail light cover (page 2-10).

[4]

Remove the turn signal light mounting screw [1], setting
plate [2] and turn signal light [3].
Remove the mounting rubber [4].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

[3]

Route the wires properly (page 1-25).
TORQUE:
Turn signal light mounting screw:
2.5 N·m (0.3 kgf·m, 1.8 lbf·ft)
[2]

[1]

POSITION LIGHT
BULB REPLACEMENT (NC700X/XA/
XD)
Pull out the position light bulb socket [1].

[2]

Remove the bulb [2] from the socket, replace it with a
new one.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Route the wires properly (page 1-25).

[1]

BULB REPLACEMENT (NC700S/SA/
SD)
Remove the headlight/headlight stay (page 2-27).

[1]

[2]

Pull out the position light bulb socket [1].
Remove the bulb [2] from the socket, replace it with a
new one.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.

22-7

dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES

BRAKE/TAIL/LICENSE LIGHT
For brake/tail/license light removal/installation (page 210).

BULB REPLACEMENT
Remove the tail light cover (page 2-10).

[2]

Turn the bulb socket [1] counterclockwise and remove
it.
While pushing in the bulb [2], turn it counterclockwise to
remove it.
Replace the bulb with a new one.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
[1]

COMBINATION METER
SYSTEM INSPECTION (NC700X/XA/S/
SA)
Check for loose or poor contact terminals at the
combination meter 16P (Gray) connector.
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " ",
check that the tachometer segment [1] move to full
scale and then tachometer segment go off.
If the tachometer segment does not show initial
function, check the combination meter power input line
(page 22-10).
If the power and ground lines are OK, replace the
combination meter assembly.
– NC700X/XA (page 22-9)
– NC700S/SA (page 22-9)
If the MIL and engine oil pressure indicator are stay on
and tachometer, high coolant temperature indicator and
HISS indicator does not come on, inspect the following;
– DTC with the HDS (page 4-12)
– TXD/RXD line (page 22-11)

22-8

[1]

dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
SYSTEM INSPECTION (NC700XD/SD)
Check for loose or poor contact terminals at the
combination meter 16P (Gray) connector.
When the ignition switch is turned ON with the engine
stop switch " ", the combination meter will show the
entire digital display and the tachometer segments [1]
will reduce from full scale to zero.
If the tachometer segment does not show initial
function, check the combination meter power input line
(page 22-10).
If the power and ground lines are OK, replace the
combination meter assembly.
– NC700XD (page 22-9)
– NC700SD (page 22-9)
If the MIL and engine oil pressure indicator are stay on
and tachometer, high coolant temperature indicator and
HISS indicator does not come on, inspect the following;

[1]

– DTC with the HDS (page 4-12)
– TXD/RXD line (page 22-11)

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700X/
XA/XD)
Remove the windscreen (page 2-23).

[2]

[5]

Remove the dust cover [1].
Disconnect the
connector [2].

combination

meter

16P

(Gray)

Remove the screws [3], washer [4] and combination
meter [5].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
TORQUE:
Combination meter mounting screw:
1.0 N·m (0.1 kgf·m, 0.7 lbf·ft)
[3]/[4]

[1]

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700S/
SA/SD)
Remove the headlight/headlight stay (page 2-27).

[1]

[2]

Remove the combination meter back cover mounting
screws [1] and combination meter back cover [2].

22-9

dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
Remove the dust cover [1].
Disconnect the
connector [2].

combination

[1]/[2]

meter

16P

[5]

(Gray)

Remove the combination meter mounting screws [3],
washer [4] and combination meter [5].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
TORQUE:
Combination meter mounting screw:
1.0 N·m (0.1 kgf·m, 0.7 lbf·ft)
Combination meter back cover mounting screw:
0.3 N·m (0.03 kgf·m, 0.2 lbf·ft)
[3]/[4]

POWER/GROUND LINE INSPECTION
Remove the windscreen (page 2-23).

NC700X/XA/XD:

[2]

NC700S/SA/XD:

[2]

Remove the dust cover [1] and disconnect the
combination meter 16P (Gray) connector [2].
Check the following at the wire harness side connector
terminals of the combination meter.

[1]

POWER INPUT LINE
Measure the voltage at the combination meter 16P
(Gray) connector [1] of the wire harness side and
ground.

[1]

CONNECTION: Pink/blue (+) – Ground (–)
STANDARD:
Battery voltage
P/Bu

There should be battery voltage with the ignition switch
turned ON.
If there is no voltage, check the following:
– Open circuit in the Pink/blue wire
– Blown sub fuse 7.5 A (ILLUMI/STOP/HORN)

BACK-UP VOLTAGE LINE
Measure the voltage at the combination meter 16P
(Gray) connector [1] of the wire harness side and
ground.

[1]

CONNECTION: Red/white (+) – Ground (–)
STANDARD:
Battery voltage
There should be battery voltage at all times.
If there is no voltage, check the following:
– Open circuit in the Red/white wire
– Blown sub fuse 7.5 A (CLOCK/TURN)

22-10

R/W

[1]

dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
GROUND LINE
Check for continuity at the combination meter 16P
(Gray) connector [1] of the wire harness side and
ground.

[1]

CONNECTION: Green/red – Ground
There should be continuity.

G/R

If there is no continuity, check for open circuit in Green/
red wire.

TXD/RXD LINE INSPECTION
NC700X/XA/S/SA
If the MIL [1] and engine oil pressure indicator [2] are
stay on and tachometer, high coolant temperature
indicator and HISS indicator does not come on with the
ignition switch turned ON and engine stop switch " ",
check the combination meter TXD/RXD line (page 2212).

[1]

[2]

If the engine stop switch turned " ", the combination
meter indicate same operation.

NC700XD/SD
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop switch
" " and check the combination meter.

[1]

[2]

The TXD/RXD line is abnormal if the combination meter
shows following:
– MIL [1] and engine oil pressure indicator [2] stay on.
– Shift indicator "–" [3] is blinking.
– Tachometer, high coolant temperature indicator and
HISS indicator do not come on.
If the ignition switch is turned ON with the engine stop
switch turned " ", the same condition will occur.
Check the combination meter TXD/RXD line (page 2212).

[3]

22-11

dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
MIL AND ENGINE OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR ARE
STAY ON, TACHOMETER, HIGH COOLANT
TEMPERATURE INDICATOR AND HISS INDICATOR
DOES NOT COME ON AND SHIFT INDICATOR "–"
(NC700XD/SD) IS BLINKING (when the ignition
switch turned ON)
• Check the following items before starting the
inspection:
– Check for loose or poor contact on the
combination meter 16P (Gray) connector and
ECM/PCM 33P connector, then recheck the DTC.
– Inspect the sub fuse 7.5 A (ENG STOP)
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)
1. Combination Meter Serial Line Short Circuit
Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.

NC700X/XA/XD:

[2]

NC700S/SA/SD:

[2]

Remove the windscreen (page 2-23).
Remove the dust cover [1] and disconnect the
combination meter 16P (Gray) connector [2].

[1]

Remove the following:

NC700X/XA/S/SA:

– Shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA) (page 2-14)
– Side cowl (NC700S/SA) (page 2-13)
– Center cross plate (NC700XD/SD) (page 2-32)
Disconnect the following:
– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
[1]
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD) [2]

[1]
NC700XD/SD:

[2]

22-12

[1]

dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
Check for continuity between the combination meter
16P (Gray) connector [1] of the wire harness side
and ground.
Connection: Red/blue – Ground

[1]

Is there continuity?
YES

– Short circuit in Red/blue wire

NO

– GO TO STEP 2.

R/Bu

2. Combination Meter Serial Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Check for continuity between the combination meter
16P (Gray) connector [1] and ECM/PCM 33P
connector [2] of the wire harness side.
Connection: Red/blue – Red/blue
TOOL:
Test probe

[1]

07ZAJ-RDJA110

[2]

R/Bu

Is there continuity?

R/Bu

YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Open circuit in Red/blue wire

3. Combination Meter Serial Line Output Voltage
Inspection
Connect the
connector.

combination

meter

16P

(Gray)

Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch
" " while pushing and holding combination meter A
button [1] and B button [2] over 10 seconds.
The combination meter enters the communication
diagnostic mode.

[1]

Measure the voltage at the ECM/PCM 33P
connector [1] of the wire harness side and ground.
Connection: Red/blue (+) – Ground (–)
Standard:
8 V or more (Every 5 seconds)
TOOL:
Test probe

[2]

[1]

07ZAJ-RDJA110
R/Bu

Does the standard voltage exist?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– • Replace the combination
assembly.
– NC700X/XA/XD (page 22-9)
– NC700S/SA/SD (page 22-9)

meter

22-13

dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
4. ECM Serial Line Output Voltage Inspection
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the combination meter 16P (Gray)
connector.
Connect the ECM/PCM 33P connector.
Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).
Remove the DLC [1] from the battery box.
Short the DLC terminals using a special tool.
Connection: Brown – Green
TOOL:
SCS connector [2]

070PZ-ZY30100
[1]

[2]

Rotate and hold the throttle grip [1] to the fully open
position.
Turn the ignition switch ON while holding the throttle
grip at the fully open position over 10 seconds.
The ECM/PCM
diagnostic mode.

enters

the

communication

[1]

Measure the voltage at the combination meter 16P
(Gray) connector [1] of the wire harness side and
ground.
Connection: Red/blue (+) – Ground (–)
Standard:
8 V or more (Every 5 seconds)

[1]

Does the standard voltage exist?
YES

– Inspect the combination meter (page 2210).

NO

– Replace the ECM/PCM with a known good
one, and recheck.

R/Bu

COMBINATION METER DIGITAL
CLOCK SET PROCEDURE
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Push and hold both the combination meter A button [1]
and B button [2] until the minute digits [3] indicate "1",
"2" or "3".
The combination meter enter the back light setting
mode.

[1]

22-14

[3]

[2]

dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
Push the A button, then hour digits [1] start blinking.
The combination meter enter the clock setting mode.

[1]

Push the B button until the desired hour [1] and AM/PM
are displayed.
Push and hold to advance the hour fast.

[1]

Push the A button, then the minute digits [1] start
blinking.

[1]

Push the B button until the desired minute [1] is
displayed.
Push and hold to advance the minute fast.
Push the A button, then digital clock is set.
Push the A button and B button.
The combination meter return to the normal mode.

[1]

22-15

dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES

SPEEDOMETER/VS SENSOR
SYSTEM INSPECTION (NC700X/XA/S/
SA)
Perform the combination meter system inspection
(page 22-8).

NC700X/XA:

[2]

NC700S/SA:

[2]

Remove the windscreen (page 2-23).
Remove the dust cover [1].
If the system fails the inspection, shift the transmission
into neutral, the combination meter 16P (Gray)
connector [2] is connected, then turn the ignition switch
ON.

[1]

Measure the voltage at the combination meter 16P
(Gray) connector [1] of the wire harness side.

[1]

[1]

CONNECTION: Pink/green (+) – Green/red (–)
STANDARD:
Repeat 0 to 5 V
Slowly turn the rear wheel by hand.

P/G

G/R

There should be 0 to 5 V pulse voltage.
– If pulse voltage appears, replace the combination
meter assembly.
– NC700X/XA (page 22-9)
– NC700S/SA (page 22-9)
– If pulse voltage does not appear, check for open or
short circuit in Pink/green wire.
If the Pink/green wire is OK, check for the VS sensor
signal line (page 22-17)

SYSTEM INSPECTION (NC700XD/SD)
If the speedometer does not operate, check the
following:

NC700XD:

[2]

NC700SD:

[2]

– Combination meter system inspection (page 22-9)
– MIL blinking: If the MIL blinks 11, check the VS
sensor system (page 4-51)
– Shift indicator "–" blinking: If the shift indicator "–"
blinks 66, check the VS sensor system (page 1289).
If the above items are OK, check the VS sensor line as
follows:
Remove the windscreen (page 2-23).
Remove the dust cover [1] and disconnect the
combination meter 16P (Gray) connector [2].

22-16

[1]

[1]

dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
Turn the ignition switch ON with the engine stop switch
" ".

[1]

Measure the voltage at the combination meter 16P
(Gray) connector [1] of the wire harness side.
CONNECTION: Pink/green (+) – Green/red (–)
P/G

Slowly turn the rear wheel by hand.

G/R

There should be 0 to 5 V pulse voltage.
– If pulse voltage appears, replace the combination
meter assembly.
– NC700XD (page 22-9)
– NC700SD (page 22-9)
– If pulse voltage does not appear, the Pink/green wire
has an open circuit.

VS SENSOR SIGNAL LINE
INSPECTION (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Remove the windscreen (page 2-23).
Disconnect the
connector [1].

combination

meter

NC700X/XA:

16P

[1]

NC700S/SA:

[1]

(Gray)

Disconnect the VS sensor 3P (Black) connector [1].

Check for continuity between the combination meter
16P (Gray) connector [1] and VS sensor 3P (Black)
connector [2] of the wire harness side.

[1]

[2]

[1]

CONNECTION: Pink/green – Pink/green
If there is no continuity, check for open circuit in Pink/
green wire and loose contact of the wire harness
connectors.

P/G

P/G

22-17

dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
VS SENSOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION
Disconnect the VS sensor 3P (Black) connector [1].

[1]

Remove the bolt [2] and VS sensor [3].
Remove the O-ring [4].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Replace the O-ring with a new one.
• Apply engine oil to a new O-ring.

[2]

TACHOMETER
SYSTEM INSPECTION
If the tachometer does not operate, check the following:
– Combination meter system inspection
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 22-8)
– NC700XD/SD (page 22-9)
– TXD/RXD line (page 22-11)
– CKP sensor
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 5-7)
– NC700XD/SD (page 5-8)
If the above items are OK, replace the combination
meter assembly.
– NC700X/XA/XD (page 22-9)
– NC700S/SA/SD (page 22-9)

HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE
INDICATOR/ECT SENSOR
SYSTEM INSPECTION
If the high coolant temperature indicator does not
operate properly, check the following:
– Combination meter system inspection
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 22-8)
– NC700XD/SD (page 22-9)
– TXD/RXD line (page 22-11)
– MIL blinking: If the MIL blinks 7, check the ECT
sensor system (page 4-45).
– ECT sensor (page 22-19)
If the above items are OK, replace the combination
meter assembly.
– NC700X/XA/XD (page 22-9)
– NC700S/SA/SD (page 22-9)
If the MIL and engine oil pressure indicator are stay on,
tachometer, high coolant temperature indicator and
HISS indicator does not come on and shift indicator "–"
(NC700XD/SD) is blinking, inspect the following;
– DTC with the HDS (page 4-12)
– TXD/RXD line (page 22-11)

22-18

[1]

[3]

[4]

dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
ECT SENSOR UNIT INSPECTION
Remove the ECT sensor (page 4-64).
Suspend the ECT sensor [1] in a pan of coolant (50 –
50 mixture) on an electric heating element and measure
the resistance through the sensor as the coolant heats
up.
• Soak the ECT sensor in coolant up to its threads
with at least 40 mm (1.6 in) from the bottom of the
pan to the bottom of the sensor.
• Keep the temperature constant for 3 minutes before
testing. A sudden change of temperature will result
in incorrect readings. Do not let the thermometer or
ECT sensor touch the pan.
[1]

Measure the resistance between the ECT sensor
terminals [1].
Temperature
Resistance

40°C (104°F)
1.0 – 1.3 kΩ

100°C (212°F)
0.1 – 0.2 kΩ

Replace the ECT sensor if it is out of specification.

[1]

ENGINE OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR/
EOP SWITCH
SYSTEM INSPECTION
The engine oil pressure indicator [1] comes on when
the ignition switch is turned ON, then goes off when the
engine starts.

[1]

If the engine oil pressure indicator does not come on
with the ignition switch turned ON, check the
combination meter system inspection.
– NC700X/XA/S/SA (page 22-8)
– NC700XD/SD (page 22-9)
The engine oil pressure indicator does not go out when
the engine running, check the following:
– Engine oil level (page 3-12)
– TXD/RXD line (page 22-11)
– MIL blinking: If the MIL blinks 87, check the EOP
switch system (page 4-62)
– Engine oil pressure (page 9-6)
– EOP switch line (page 22-20)
– Replace the EOP switch, and recheck (page 22-20).
If the above items are OK, replace the combination
meter assembly.
– NC700X/XA/XD (page 22-9)
– NC700S/SA/SD (page 22-9)
If the MIL and engine oil pressure indicator are stay on
and tachometer, high coolant temperature indicator and
HISS indicator does not come on, inspect the following;
– DTC with the HDS (page 4-12)
– TXD/RXD line (page 22-11)

22-19

dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
EOP SWITCH LINE INSPECTION
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the EOP switch 1P (Gray) connector [1].
Check for continuity between the EOP switch connector
terminal and ground.
CONNECTION: Light green – Ground

Lg

– If there is continuity, the Light green wire has a short
circuit.
– If there is no continuity, replace the ECM/PCM with
a known good one, and recheck.
• If the ECM/PCM is replaced, perform the following:
– Key Registration Procedure (page 23-6)
– Clutch Initialize Learning Procedure (NC700XD/
SD) (page 12-120)

[1]

EOP SWITCH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION
Remove the radiator reserve tank (page 8-14).

[2]

Disconnect the EOP switch 1P (Gray) connector [1].
Remove the EOP switch [2] from the crankcase.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
TORQUE: 18 N·m (1.8 kgf·m, 13 lbf·ft)
• Apply sealant to the EOP switch threads.
• Route the wires and hoses properly (page 1-25).
Check the engine oil level (page 3-12).
[1]

22-20

dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES

FUEL LEVEL SENSOR
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR INSPECTION
Remove the fuel pump unit (page 7-11).
Connect the ohmmeter to the fuel pump unit 3P (Black)
connector [1] terminals.
CONNECTION: Red/black – Black/white
Inspect the resistance of the float [2] at the top and
bottom positions.
Resistance

FULL
4–6Ω

EMPTY
80 – 83 Ω

[1]

[2]

[1]

Bl/W

R/Bl

FUEL METER INSPECTION
If the fuel meter blinks as shown [1] with ignition switch
is ON, perform the inspection as follow:
Disconnect the combination
connector (page 22-8).

meter

16P

[1]

(Gray)

Disconnect the fuel pump unit 3P (Black) connector
(page 7-10).
Check for continuity between the combination meter
16P (Gray) connector [2] and fuel pump unit 3P (Black)
connector [3] of the wire harness side.
CONNECTION: Black/green – Black/green
If there is no continuity, check for open circuit in Black/
green wire and loose contact of the wire harness
connectors.

[2]

[3]

Bl/G

Bl/G

22-21

dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES

PARKING BRAKE INDICATOR/SWITCH
(NC700XD/SD)
SYSTEM INSPECTION
If the parking brake indicator [1] does not operate
properly, check the combination meter system
inspection (page 22-9).

[1]

If the combination meter system inspection is OK,
check the parking brake switch line as follows:
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the parking brake switch connectors [1].
Connect the connector terminals with a jumper wire.
Turn the ignition switch ON.
The parking brake indicator should come on.
If the indicator does not come on, check for open circuit
in the Black, Brown and Green wires.
If the indicator comes on, check the parking brake
switch (page 22-22).

[1]

PARKING BRAKE SWITCH
INSPECTION
Disconnect the parking brake switch connectors.
Check for continuity between the parking brake switch
terminals [1].
There should be continuity with the parking brake lever
pulled, and no continuity with the lever released.
If the parking brake switch does not operate properly,
replace the switch (page 22-23).

[1]

22-22

dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION
Remove the parking brake lever holder cover [1].

[1]

Disconnect the parking brake switch connectors [1].

[2]

[3]

Remove the parking brake switch screw [2], parking
brake switch [3] and switch spring [4].

[4]
[1]

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Apply grease to the parking brake switch spring
sliding surface.
• Align the parking brake lever holder cover hole with
the holder boss.
TORQUE:
Parking brake switch screw:
1.2 N·m (0.1 kgf·m, 0.9 lbf·ft)

Align

22-23

dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES

IGNITION SWITCH
INSPECTION
Remove the shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA/XD) (page
2-14).

NC700X/XA:

NC700S/SA/SD:

Remove the headlight/headlight stay (NC700S/SA/SD)
(page 2-27).
Disconnect the ignition switch 2P (Brown) connector [1].
Check for continuity between the wire terminals of the
ignition switch connector in each switch position.
Refer to the wiring diagram for the terminals and switch
status:
–
–
–
–
–
–

NC700X (page 24-2)
NC700XA (page 24-3)
NC700XD (page 24-4)
NC700S (page 24-5)
NC700SA (page 24-6)
NC700SD (page 24-7)

[1]

[1]

NC700XD:

[1]

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the top bridge (page 17-33).

[1]

Remove the ignition switch mounting bolts [1] and
ignition switch [2].
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
TORQUE:
Ignition switch mounting bolt:
25 N·m (2.5 kgf·m, 18 lbf·ft)
Replace the ignition switch mounting bolts with new
ones.
[2]

22-24

dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES

HANDLEBAR SWITCHES
RIGHT HANDLEBAR SWITCH
Remove the shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA/XD) (page
2-14).

NC700X/XA:

NC700S/SA:

Remove the headlight/headlight stay (NC700S/SA/SD)
(page 2-27).
Disconnect the following:
– Right handlebar switch 8P (Blue) connector [1]
– Right handlebar switch 6P (Black) connector
(NC700XD) [2]
– Right handlebar switch 7P (Green) connector
(NC700SD) [3]
Check for continuity between the wire terminals of the
handlebar switch connector in each switch position.
Refer to the wiring diagram for the terminals and switch
status:
–
–
–
–
–
–

NC700X (page 24-2)
NC700XA (page 24-3)
NC700XD (page 24-4)
NC700S (page 24-5)
NC700SA (page 24-6)
NC700SD (page 24-7)

[1]
NC700XD:

[1]
NC700SD:

[1]

[2]

[1]

[3]

LEFT HANDLEBAR SWITCHES
Remove the shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA/XD) (page
2-14).

NC700X/XA:

NC700S/SA:

Remove the headlight/headlight stay (NC700S/SA/SD)
(page 2-27).
Disconnect the following:
– Left handlebar switch 10P (Gray) connector [1]
– Left handlebar switch 3P (Black) connector
(NC700XD) [2]
– Left handlebar switch 7P (Green) connector
(NC700SD) [3]
Check for continuity between the wire terminals of the
handlebar switch connector in each switch position.
Refer to the wiring diagram for the terminals and switch
status:
–
–
–
–
–
–

NC700X (page 24-2)
NC700XA (page 24-3)
NC700XD (page 24-4)
NC700S (page 24-5)
NC700SA (page 24-6)
NC700SD (page 24-7)

[1]

[1]

NC700XD:

NC700SD:

[1]

[1]

[2]

[3]

22-25

dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES

BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH
FRONT
Disconnect the front brake light switch connectors and
check for continuity between the terminals.
There should be continuity with the brake lever applied,
and there should be no continuity with the brake lever
released.

REAR
Remove the shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA/XD) (page
2-14).
Remove the shelter/side cover (NC700S/SA/SD) (page
2-15).
Disconnect the rear brake light switch 3P (Black)
connector [1] and check for continuity between the
terminals.
There should be continuity with the brake pedal applied,
and there should be no continuity with the brake pedal
released.

[1]

CLUTCH SWITCH (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Disconnect the clutch switch connectors and check for
continuity between the terminals.
There should be continuity with the clutch lever applied,
and there should be no continuity with the clutch lever
released.

22-26

dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES

NEUTRAL SWITCH
INSPECTION (NC700X/XA/S/SA)
Make sure that the neutral indicator [1] come on with
the ignition switch turned ON and transmission is in
neutral.

[1]

If the neutral indicator does not come on, inspect as
follows:

Remove the left rear cover (page 2-29).
Disconnect the neutral switch connector [1].
Check for continuity between the switch terminal and
engine ground.
There should be continuity with the transmission is in
neutral, and no continuity when the transmission is into
gear.
If the continuity inspection is normal, open circuit in
Light green wire between the neutral switch connector
and neutral diode or Light green/red wire between the
neutral diode and neutral indicator.
If the continuity inspection is abnormal, replace the
neutral switch (page 22-28).

[1]

INSPECTION (NC700XD/SD)
Make sure that the neutral indicator [1] comes on when
the ignition switch is turned ON and transmission is in
neutral and goes off when the transmission is in gear.

[1]

If the neutral indicator does not operate properly, check
the shift indicator blinking with the ignition switch ON
and the engine stop switch " ".
If DTC 52 is indicated with the shift indicator, check the
neutral switch system (page 12-78).
If the shift indicator does not indicate any DTC and the
neutral indicator does not light with the transmission in
neutral, check for open circuit in the Light green wire
between the combination meter and neutral switch.
If the Light green wire is OK, replace the combination
meter assembly.
– NC700XD (page 22-9)
– NC700SD (page 22-9)

22-27

dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700X/
XA/S/SA)
Drain the engine oil (page 3-13).

[2]/[3]

Remove the left rear cover (page 2-29).
Disconnect the neutral switch connector [1].
Remove the neutral switch [2] and sealing washer [3].
Install the neutral switch with a new sealing washer.
Tighten the neutral switch to the specified torque.
TORQUE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Connect the neutral switch connector.
Fill the engine with the recommended engine oil (page
3-12).
[1]

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION (NC700XD/
SD)
Remove the shift control motor/reduction gears (page
12-109).

[2]

[3]

Disconnect the neutral switch connector [1].
Remove the neutral switch [2] and sealing washer [3]
from the crankcase.
Install the neutral switch with a new sealing washer and
tighten it.
TORQUE: 12 N·m (1.2 kgf·m, 9 lbf·ft)
Connect the neutral switch connector.
Install the reduction gears/shift control motor (page 12110).
[1]

SIDESTAND SWITCH
INSPECTION
Remove the following:

[1]

[1]

– Shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA/XD) (page 2-14)
– Shelter/side cover (NC700S/SA/SD) (page 2-15)
– Left rear cover (page 2-29)
Disconnect the sidestand switch 3P (Green) connector
[1].
Check for continuity between the wire terminals of the
sidestand switch 3P (Green) connector switch side.
CONNECTION: Green/white – Green
Continuity should exist only when the sidestand is up.

22-28

G

G/W

dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA/XD) (page
2-14).

[1]

Remove the shelter/side cover (NC700S/SA/XD) (page
2-15)
Disconnect the sidestand switch 3P (Green) connector
[1].
Remove the sidestand switch wire clamp [2].

[2]

Remove the wire band [1] and sidestand switch wire
clamp [2].

NC700X/XA/S/SA:

[1]

NC700XD/SD:

[2]

Remove the sidestand switch mounting bolt [1] and
sidestand switch [2].

[1]

[2]

[2]

Align

Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Replace the sidestand switch mounting bolt with a
new one.
• Align the sidestand switch tab with the sidestand
hole.
• Align the sidestand switch groove with the return
spring holding pin.
• Route the wire properly (page 1-25).

[1]
Align

HORN
INSPECTION
Remove the lower cowl (page 2-28).

[2]

Disconnect the wire connectors [1] from the horn [2].
Connect the 12 V battery to the horn terminal directly.
The horn is normal if it sounds when the 12 V battery is
connected across the horn terminals.

Battery
[1]

22-29

dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the lower cowl (page 2-28).

[4]

[2]

Disconnect the wire connectors [1] from the horn [2].
Remove the bolt [3] and horn.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
• Install the horn against the frame stopper [4].
• Route the wire properly (page 1-25).

[3]

[1]

TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD RELAY
SYSTEM INSPECTION
Remove the center cover (NC700X/XA/XD) (page 216).

[1]

Remove the side cowl (NC700S/SA/SD) (page 2-13).
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Release the turn signal/hazard relay [1] from the
luggage box.
Disconnect the turn signal/hazard relay 4P connector
[2] from the turn signal/hazard relay.
Check the following at the wire harness side 4P
connector.
[2]

1. Battery Power
Inspection

Source

Line

Open

Circuit

Measure the voltage between the 4P connector [1]
terminal and ground.
Connection: Red/white (+) – Ground (–)

[1]

Is there battery voltage?

22-30

YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– • Open circuit in the Red/white wire
• Blown sub fuse 7.5 A (CLOCK/TURN)

R/W

dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
2. Ground Line Open Circuit Inspection
Check for continuity between the 4P connector [1]
terminal and ground.
Connection: Green – Ground

[1]

G

Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Open circuit in the Green wire

3. Turn Signal/hazard Switch Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Connect the 4P connector [1] terminals with a
jumper wire.
Connection: Red/white – Gray

[1]

Operate the turn signal switch or push the hazard
switch.

Gr

Do the turn signal light illuminate?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– • Open circuit in the Gray wire
• Faulty turn signal switch or hazard
switch (left handlebar switch)
• Faulty turn signal light circuits

R/W

4. Ignition Switch Power Source Line Open Circuit
Inspection
Turn the ignition switch ON.
Measure the voltage between the 4P connector [1]
terminal and ground.
Connection: Pink/blue (+) – Ground (–)
Is there battery voltage?
YES

– System is normal, replace the turn signal/
hazard relay.

NO

– • Open circuit in the Pink/blue wire
• Blown sub fuse 7.5 A (ILLUMI/STOP/
HORN)

[1]

P/Bu

22-31

dummyhead

LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the center cover (NC700X/XA/XD) (page 216).

[1]

Remove the side cowl (NC700S/SA/SD) (page 2-13).
Release the turn signal/hazard relay [1] from the
luggage box.
Disconnect the turn signal/hazard relay 4P connector
[2] and remove the turn signal/hazard relay.
Installation is in the reverse order of removal.
Route the wire properly (page 1-25).
[2]

22-32

dummytext

23. IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS)

SYSTEM LOCATION···································23-2

TROUBLESHOOTING ································ 23-8

SYSTEM DIAGRAM ····································23-2

HISS INDICATOR ····································· 23-10

SERVICE INFORMATION ···························23-3

ECM (NC700X/XA/S/SA)/
PCM (NC700XD/SD) ································· 23-11

KEY REGISTRATION PROCEDURES ·······23-3
IMMOBILIZER RECEIVER························ 23-12
DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDICATION ·············23-6

23

23-1

dummyhead

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS)

SYSTEM LOCATION
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS)

ENGINE STOP SWITCH
IGNITION SWITCH/
IMMOBILIZER RECEIVER

MAIN FUSE 30 A
BATTERY
ECM/PCM
BANK ANGLE SENSOR

FUSE BOX

CKP SENSOR

SYSTEM DIAGRAM
CLOCK/TURN
7.5 A

MAIN 30 A
R
Bl

HISS
INDICATOR

R/W

Bl

ENGINE STOP
SWITCH
R
W/Y

BATTERY

Bl/R

ENG STOP
7.5 A

IGNITION
SWITCH
R/Bl

G/R

8P
(BLUE)
W/Y
CKP
SENSOR
Y

G/Y

P
Bu

2P
(RED)

Y/R
4P
(BLACK)

Bl: Black
Bu: Blue
G: Green
O: Orange
P: Pink
R: Red
W: White
Y: Yellow

23-2

O/Bu
G/O

W/Y

Y/R

P
Y/R

G/Y
Bu

R/Bu
Bl

P

IMMOBILIZER
RECEIVER

ECM/PCM

G/O
Y

G

G/O

dummyhead

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS)

SERVICE INFORMATION
GENERAL
• When checking the immobilizer system (HISS), follow the steps in the troubleshooting flow chart (page 23-8).
• Keep the immobilizer key away from the other vehicle's immobilizer key when using it. The jamming of the key code signal may
occur and the proper operation of the system will be obstructed.
• The key has built-in electronic part (transponder). Do not drop and strike the key against a hard material object, and do not leave
the key on the dashboard in the car, etc. where the temperature will rise. Do not leave the key in the water for a prolonged time
such as by washing the clothes.
• The ECM/PCM as well as the transponder keys must be replaced if all transponder keys have been lost.
• The system does not function with a duplicated key code is registered into the transponder with the immobilizer system (HISS).
• The ECM/PCM can store up to four key codes. (The four keys can be registered.)
• Do not modify the immobilizer system as it can cause the system failure. (The engine cannot be started.)
• For ignition system inspection (page 5-6).
• For ignition switch servicing (page 22-24).
• For engine stop switch inspection (page 22-25).
• For bank angle sensor inspection (page 4-65).
• The following color codes are used throughout this section.
Bl = Black
Bu = Blue

G = Green
O = Orange

P = Pink
R = Red

W = White
Y = Yellow

KEY REGISTRATION PROCEDURES
When the key has been lost, or additional spare key is required:
1. Obtain a new transponder key.
2. Grind the key in accordance with the shape of the original key.
3. Apply 12 V battery voltage to the CKP sensor lines of the ECM/PCM using the special tool (page 23-6).
4. Turn the ignition switch ON with the original key and engine stop switch " ". The HISS indicator comes on and it remains on.
• The code of the original key recognized by the ECM/PCM.
• If there is any problem in the immobilizer system (HISS), the system will enter the diagnostic mode and the indicator will remain
on for approx. ten seconds, then it will indicate the diagnostic code (page 23-7).
5. Disconnect the red clip of the inspection adaptor from the battery positive (+) terminal for two seconds or more, then connect it
again. The indicator remains on for approx. two seconds, then it blinks four times repeatedly.
ON

OFF

2 sec.

• The immobilizer system (HISS) enters the registration mode. Registrations of all key except the original key inserted in the
ignition switch are cancelled. (Registration of the lost key or spare key is cancelled.)
The spare key must be registered again.
6. Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the key.
7. Turn the ignition switch ON with a new key or the spare key. (Never use the key registered in previous steps.) The indicator
comes on for two seconds then it blinks four times repeatedly.
ON

OFF

2 sec.

• The new key or spare key is registered in the ECM/PCM.
• If there is any problem in the registration, the system will enter the diagnostic mode and the indicator will remain for approx. ten
seconds, then it will indicate the diagnostic code (page 23-7).
• Keep the other transponder key away from the immobilizer receiver more than 50 mm (2.0 in).

23-3

dummyhead

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS)
8. Repeat the steps 6 and 7 when you continuously register the other new key.
The ECM/PCM can store up to four key codes. (The four keys can be registered.)
9. Turn the ignition switch OFF, remove the inspection adaptor and connect the CKP sensor 2P (Red) connector.
10.Turn the ignition switch ON with the registered key.
• The immobilizer system (HISS) returns to the normal mode.
11.Check that the engine can be started using all registered key.

When the ignition switch is faulty:
1. Obtain a new ignition switch assembly.
2. Remove the ignition switch (page 22-24).
3. Apply 12 V battery voltage to the CKP sensor lines of the ECM/PCM using the special tool (page 23-6).
4. Set the original (registered) key near the immobilizer receiver so that the transponder in the key can communicate with the
receiver.
5. Connect a new ignition switch to the wire harness, then turn it to ON with a new transponder key. (keep the ignition switch away
from the receiver) and engine stop switch " ". The HISS indicator comes on and it remains on.
• The code of the original key recognized by the ECM/PCM.
• If there is any problem in the immobilizer system (HISS), the system will enter the diagnostic mode and the indicator will remain
on for approx. ten seconds, then it will indicate the diagnostic code (page 23-7).
6. Disconnect the red clip of the inspection adaptor from the battery positive (+) terminal for two seconds or more, then connect it
again. The indicator remains on for approx. two seconds then it blinks four times repeatedly.
ON

OFF

2 sec.

• The immobilizer system (HISS) enters the registration mode. Registrations of all key except the original key set near the receiver
are cancelled.
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the key.
8. Install the ignition switch (page 22-24).
9. Turn the ignition switch ON with a first new key. The indicator comes on for two seconds then it blinks four times repeatedly.
ON

OFF

2 sec.

• The first key or spare key is registered in the ECM/PCM.
• If there is any problem in the registration, the system will enter the diagnostic mode and the indicator will remain for approx. ten
seconds, then it will indicate the diagnostic code (page 23-7).
10.Turn the ignition switch OFF and disconnect the red clip of the inspection adaptor from the battery positive (+) terminal.
11.Turn the ignition switch ON (with the first key registered in step 9). The HISS indicator comes on for two seconds then it goes off.
• The immobilizer system (HISS) returns to the normal mode.
12.Turn the ignition switch OFF and connect the red clip of the inspection adaptor to the battery positive (+) terminal.
13.Turn the ignition switch ON (with the first key registered in step 9). The HISS indicator comes on and it remains on.
• The code if the first key is recognized by the ECM/PCM.
• If there is any problem in the immobilizer system (HISS), the system will enter the diagnostic mode and the indicator will remain
on for approx. ten seconds, then it will indicate the diagnostic code (page 23-7).

23-4

dummyhead

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS)
14.Disconnect the red clip of the inspection adaptor from the battery positive (+) terminal for two seconds or more, then connect it
again. The indicator remains on for approx. two seconds then it blinks four times repeatedly.
• The immobilizer system (HISS) enters the registration mode. Registration of the original key used in step 4 is cancelled.
15.Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the key.
16.Turn the ignition switch ON with a second new key. (Never use the key registered in previous step.) The indicator comes on for
two seconds then it blinks four times repeatedly.
• The second key or spare key is registered in the ECM/PCM.
• If there is any problem in the registration, the system will enter the diagnostic mode and the indicator will remain for approx. ten
seconds, then it will indicate the diagnostic code (page 23-7).
• Keep the other transponder key away from the immobilizer receiver more than 50 mm (2.0 in).
17.Repeat the steps 15 and 16 when you continuously register the other new key.
The ECM/PCM can store up to four key codes. (The four keys can be registered.)
18.Turn the ignition switch OFF, remove the inspection adaptor and connect the CKP sensor 2P (Red) connector.
19.Turn the ignition switch ON with the registered key.
• The immobilizer system (HISS) returns to the normal mode.
20.Check that the engine can be started using all registered key.

When all keys have been lost:
1. Obtain a new ECM/PCM and new key set.
2. Replace the ignition switch with a new one (page 22-24).
3. Replace the ECM/PCM with a new one (page 4-67).
4. Turn the ignition switch ON with a first new key and engine stop switch " ". The HISS indicator comes on for two seconds, then
it blinks four times repeatedly.
• The first key is registered in the ECM/PCM.
• If there is any problem in the registration, the system will enter the diagnostic mode and the indicator will remain for approx. ten
seconds, then it will indicate the diagnostic code (page 23-7).
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the first key.
6. Turn the ignition switch ON with a second new key. The HISS indicator comes on for two seconds, then it blinks four times
repeatedly.
• The second key is registered in the ECM/PCM.
• If there is any problem in the registration, the system will enter the diagnostic mode and the indicator will remain for approx. ten
seconds, then it will indicate the diagnostic code (page 23-7).
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the second key.
• The system (ECM/PCM) will not enter the normal mode unless the two keys are registered in ECM/PCM.
• The third new key cannot be continuously registered. When it is necessary to register the third key, follow the procedures "When
the key has been lost, or additional key is required" (page 23-3).
8. Check that the engine can be started using all registered keys.
9. Replace the remaining key set parts.

23-5

dummyhead

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS)
When the ECM/PCM is faulty:
1. Obtain a new ECM/PCM and two new transponder keys.
2. Grind the keys in accordance with the shape of the original key (or use the key number plate when all key have been lost).
3. Replace the ECM/PCM with a new one (page 4-67).
4. Turn the ignition switch ON with a first new key and engine stop switch " ". The HISS indicator comes on for two seconds, then
it blinks four times repeatedly.
• The first key is registered in the ECM/PCM.
• If there is any problem in the registration, the system will enter the diagnostic mode and the indicator will remain for approx. ten
seconds, then it will indicate the diagnostic code (page 23-7).
5. Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the first key.
6. Turn the ignition switch ON with a second new key. The HISS indicator comes on for two seconds, then it blinks four times
repeatedly.
• The second key is registered in the ECM/PCM.
• If there is any problem in the registration, the system will enter the diagnostic mode and the indicator will remain for approx. ten
seconds, then it will indicate the diagnostic code (page 23-7).
7. Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the second key.
• The system (ECM/PCM) will not enter the normal mode unless the two keys are registered in ECM/PCM.
• The third new key cannot be continuously registered. When it is necessary to register the third key, follow the procedures "When
the key has been lost, or additional key is required" (page 23-3).
8. Check that the engine can be started using all registered keys.

DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDICATION
Remove the maintenance lid (page 21-6).

[2]

Disconnect the CKP sensor 2P (Red) connector [1].
Connect the inspection adaptor [2] to the wire side connector.
Connect the Red clip of the adaptor to the 12 V battery [3] positive (+)
terminal and Black clip to the negative (–) terminal.
TOOL:
Inspection adaptor

07XMZ-MBW0101

[1]

Turn the ignition switch ON with the properly registered key and engine stop
switch " ".
The HISS indicator [1] will come on for approx. ten seconds then it will start
blinking to indicate the diagnostic code if the system is abnormal.
The blinking frequency is repeated.
The HISS indicator remains on when the system is normal. (The system is
in the normal mode and the diagnostic code does not appear.)

23-6

[1]

[3]

dummyhead

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS)
DIAGNOSTIC CODE
When the system (ECM/PCM) enters the diagnostic mode from the normal mode:
BLINKING PATTERN
ON

SYMPTOM
ECM/PCM data is
abnormal.

PROBLEM
Faulty ECM/PCM

PROCEDURE
Replace the ECM/PCM.

Code signals
cannot send or
receive.

Faulty immobilizer
receiver or wire
harness

Follow the troubleshooting (page
23-8).

Identification code
is disagree.

Jamming by the
other transponder

Keep the other vehicle's
transponder key away from the
immobilizer receiver more than 50
mm (2.0 in).

OFF
10 sec.

Secret code is
disagree.

When the system (ECM/PCM) enters the diagnostic mode from the registration mode:
BLINKING PATTERN
ON

SYMPTOM
Registration is
overlapped.

PROBLEM
The key is already
registered
properly.

PROCEDURE
Use a new key or cancelled key.

Code signals
cannot send or
receive.

Communication
fails

Follow the troubleshooting (page
23-8).

Registration is
impossible.

The key is already
registered on the
other system.

Use a new key.

OFF
10 sec.

23-7

dummyhead

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS)

TROUBLESHOOTING
The immobilizer indicator comes on for approx. two seconds then it goes off, when the ignition switch is turned
ON with the properly registered key and the HISS functions normally. If there is any problem or the properly
registered key is not used, the indicator will remains on.
Immobilizer indicator does not come on when the ignition switch is turned ON
1. Fuse Inspection
Check for blown sub fuse 7.5 A (CLOCK/TURN) and/or sub fuse 7.5 A (ENG STOP).
Is the fuse blown?
YES

– Replace the fuse.

NO

– GO TO STEP 2.

2. Combination Meter Inspection
Check that the neutral indicator come on with the ignition switch turned ON.
Is the indicator come on?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– GO TO STEP 3.

3. Combination Meter Power Input Line Inspection
Check the power input line (Red/white wire) at the combination meter 16P (Gray) connector (page 23-10).
Is the voltage specified value?
YES

– Faulty combination meter.

NO

– Open circuit in Red/white wire

4. TXD/RXD Line Inspection between The ECM/PCM and Combination Meter
Check the TXD/RXD line (Red/blue wire) between the ECM/PCM 33P connector and combination meter
16P (Gray) connector (page 23-10).
Is there continuity?
NO

– Open circuit in Red/blue wire

YES

– GO TO STEP 5.

5. Power Input Line Inspection at The ECM/PCM Connector
Check the power input line (Black/red and Black wire) at the ECM/PCM 33P connector (page 23-11).
Is the voltage specified value?
YES

– GO TO STEP 6.

NO

– Open circuit in Black/red and Black wire

6. Ground Line Inspection at The ECM/PCM Connector
Check the ground line (Green/orange and Green wire) at the ECM/PCM 33P connector (page 23-11).
Is there continuity?
YES

– • Loose or poor contact of the ECM/PCM 33P connector
• Faulty ECM/PCM

NO

– • Open circuit in Green/orange wire
• Open circuit in Green wire

Immobilizer indicator remains on with the ignition switch turned ON
1. Immobilizer Receiver Jamming Inspection
Check that there is any metal obstruction or the other vehicle‘s transponder key near the immobilizer
receiver and key.
Is there any metal obstruction or the other transponder key?

23-8

YES

– Remove it and recheck.

NO

– GO TO STEP 2.

dummyhead

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS)
2. First Transponder Key Inspection
Turn the ignition switch ON with the spare transponder key and check the immobilizer indicator.
The indicator should came on for 2 seconds then go off.
Is the indicator go off?
YES

– Faulty first transponder key

NO

– GO TO STEP 3.

3. Diagnostic Code Inspection
Perform the diagnostic code indication procedure (page 23-6).
Check that the immobilizer indicator comes on then it starts blinking.
Is the indicator brinks or stay lit?
BRINKS–Read the diagnostic code (page 23-7).
STAY LIT–GO TO STEP 4.
4. TXD/RXD Line Inspection between The ECM/PCM and Combination Meter
Check the TXD/RXD line (Red/blue wire) between the ECM/PCM 33P connector and combination meter
16P (Gray) connector (page 23-10).
Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 5.

NO

– Open circuit in Red/blue wire

5. CKP sensor Line Inspection
Check the CKP sensor lines (Yellow, White/yellow and Green/orange wires) between the ECM/PCM 33P
connector and CKP sensor 2P (Red) connector (page 23-11).
Is there continuity?
YES

– • Open circuit in Yellow wire
• Open circuit in White/yellow and/or Green/orange wire

NO

– Faulty ECM/PCM

Diagnostic code

is indicated (Code signals cannot send or receive)

1. Immobilizer Receiver Power Input Line Inspection
Check the power input line (Yellow/red wire) at the immobilizer receiver 4P (Black) connector (page 23-12).
Is there approx. 5 V?
YES

– GO TO STEP 2.

NO

– Open or short circuit in Yellow/red wire

2. Immobilizer Receiver Ground Line Inspection
Check the ground line (Green/yellow wire) at the immobilizer receiver 4P (Black) connector (page 23-12).
Is there continuity?
YES

– GO TO STEP 3.

NO

– Open circuit in Green/yellow wire

3. Immobilizer Receiver Signal Line Inspection 1
Check the signal line (Pink wire) at the immobilizer receiver 4P (Black) connector (page 23-12).
Is there approx. 5 V?
YES

– GO TO STEP 4.

NO

– Open or short circuit in Pink wire

4. Immobilizer Receiver Signal Line Inspection 2
Check the signal line (Blue wire) between the immobilizer receiver 4P (Black) connector and ECM/PCM
33P connector (page 23-12).
Is there continuity?
YES

– • Short circuit in Blue wire
• Faulty immobilizer receiver.

NO

– Open circuit in Blue wire

23-9

dummyhead

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS)

HISS INDICATOR
INSPECTION
If the MIL and engine oil pressure indicator are stay on
and tachometer, high coolant temperature indicator and
HISS indicator does not come on and shift indicator "–"
(NC700XD/SD) is blinking, inspect the TXD/RXD line.
Remove the windscreen (page 2-23).

NC700X/XA/XD:

[2]

NC700S/SA/SD:

[2]

Perform the following inspections with the combination
meter 16P (Gray) connector [1] connected.

[1]

[1]

POWER INPUT LINE INSPECTION
Measure the voltage between the combination meter
16P (Gray) connector terminals.

[1]

CONNECTION: Red/white (+) – Green/red (–)
There should be battery voltage at all times.

R/W

G/R

TXD/RXD LINE INSPECTION
Disconnect the following:

[2]

[1]

– ECM 33P (Black) connector (NC700X/XA/S/SA) [1]
– PCM 33P (Gray) connector (NC700XD/SD) [1]
– Combination meter 16P (Gray) connector [2]
Check for continuity between the ECM/PCM 33P
connector and combination meter 16P (Gray)
connector.
CONNECTION: Red/blue – Red/blue
TOOL:
Test probe

07ZAJ-RDJA110

There should be continuity.
If there is no continuity, replace the wire harness.

23-10

R/Bu
R/Bu

dummyhead

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS)

ECM (NC700X/XA/S/SA)/PCM
(NC700XD/SD)
INSPECTION
NC700X/XA/S/SA:

Remove the shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA) (page 214).

NC700X/XA/S/SA:

Remove the side cowl (NC700S/SA) (page 2-13).
Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the ECM 33P (Black) connector [1].
Perform the following inspections at the wire harness
side connector of the ECM.

[1]
NC700XD/SD:

Remove the luggage box lid/hinge assembly (page 219).

NC700XD/SD:

Turn the ignition switch OFF.
Disconnect the PCM 33P (Gray) connector [1].
Perform the following inspections at the wire harness
side connector of the PCM.

[1]

POWER INPUT LINE INSPECTION
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " ".

[1]

Measure the voltage between the ECM/PCM 33P
connector [1] terminal and ground.
CONNECTION: Black (+) – Ground (–)
STANDARD:
Battery voltage
TOOL:
Test probe

Bl

07ZAJ-RDJA110

There should be battery voltage.

23-11

dummyhead

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS)
GROUND LINE INSPECTION
Check for continuity between the ECM/PCM 33P
connector [1] terminals and ground.

[1]

CONNECTION: Green/orange – Ground
Green – Ground
TOOL:
Test probe

07ZAJ-RDJA110

G/O

G

There should be continuity at all times.

CKP SENSOR LINE INSPECTION
Disconnect the CKP sensor 2P (Red) connector [1]
(page 23-6).

[2]

Check for continuity between the ECM/PCM 33P
connector [2] and CKP sensor 2P (Red) connector
terminals.
CONNECTION: Yellow – Yellow
Green/orange – Green/orange

G/O
G/O
Y

TOOL:
Test probe

Y

07ZAJ-RDJA110

There should be continuity between the same color wire
terminals.
[1]

IMMOBILIZER RECEIVER
INSPECTION
Remove the shroud/side cover (NC700X/XA/XD) (page
2-14).

NC700X/XA:

NC700S/SA/SD:

Remove the headlight/headlight stay (NC700S/SA/SD)
(page 2-27).
Disconnect the
connector [1].

immobilizer

receiver

4P

(Black)

[1]
NC700XD:

[1]

23-12

[1]

dummyhead

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS)
POWER INPUT LINE INSPECTION
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " ".

[1]

Measure the voltage between the immobilizer receiver
4P (Black) connector [1] terminal and ground at the wire
side.
CONNECTION: Yellow/red (+) – Ground (–)
Y/R

There should be approx. 5 V.

GROUND LINE INSPECTION
Check for continuity between the immobilizer receiver
4P (Black) connector [1] terminal and ground at the wire
side.

[1]

CONNECTION: Green/yellow – Ground
There should be continuity at all times.

G/Y

SIGNAL LINE INSPECTION
Turn the ignition switch ON and engine stop switch " ".

[1]

Measure the voltage between the immobilizer receiver
4P (Black) connector [1] terminal and ground at the wire
side.
CONNECTION: Pink (+) – Ground (–)
P

There should be approx. 5 V.

Disconnect the ECM/PCM 33P connector [1] (page 2311).

[2]

[1]

Check for continuity between the ECM/PCM 33P
connector and immobilizer receiver 4P (Black)
connector [2] terminals at the wire side.
CONNECTION: Blue – Blue
TOOL:
Test probe

Bu

07ZAJ-RDJA110

Bu

There should be continuity.

23-13

dummyhead

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS)
Check for continuity between the ECM/PCM 33P
connector [1] terminal and ground at the wire side.

[1]

CONNECTION: Blue – Ground
TOOL:
Test probe

07ZAJ-RDJA110
Bu

There should be no continuity.

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Remove the top bridge (page 17-33).

[2]

Remove the screws [1] and the immobilizer receiver [2].
Route the receiver
wire properly (page
1-25).

Install a new receiver and tighten the screws.
Install the top bridge (page 17-38).

[1]

REPLACEMENT PARTS FOR PROBLEM
Problem

Transponder Immobilizer
Key
receiver

Replacement parts
Ignition
ECM/PCM
switch
assembly

One Key has been
lost, or additional
spare key is
required
All key has been
lost
ECM/PCM is faulty
Immobilizer
receiver is faulty
Ignition switch is
faulty
*Accessory lock is
faulty
*Accessory lock means the luggage box lid lock and seat lock.

23-14

Key set

*Accessory
lock and key

dummytext

24. WIRING DIAGRAM

NC700X························································24-2

NC700S ······················································· 24-5

NC700XA ·····················································24-3

NC700SA····················································· 24-6

NC700XD ·····················································24-4

NC700SD····················································· 24-7

24

24-1

INDEX
dummytext

INDEX
ABS CONNECTOR LOCATIONS ·································20-5
ABS INDICATOR CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING ···20-12
ABS INDICATOR PROBLEM CODE INDEX ··············20-10
ABS MODULATOR ·····················································20-29
ABS SYSTEM DIAGRAM ·············································20-3
ABS SYSTEM LOCATION············································20-2
ABS TROUBLESHOOTING········································20-15
ABS TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION················20-7
AIR CLEANER ································································3-7
AIR CLEANER HOUSING ············································7-14
AIR DUCT (NC700X/XA/XD) ········································2-13
ALTERNATOR CHARGING COIL ································21-9
ALTERNATOR COVER ················································13-5
AT/MT MODE SWITCH TROUBLESHOOTING ·········12-96
BALANCER·································································14-26
BANK ANGLE SENSOR ···············································4-65
BATTERY······································································21-6
BATTERY BOX ·····························································2-31
BODY PANEL LOCATIONS (NC700S/SA)·····················2-4
BODY PANEL LOCATIONS (NC700SD)························2-5
BODY PANEL LOCATIONS (NC700X/XA)·····················2-2
BODY PANEL LOCATIONS (NC700XD)························2-3
BRAKE FLUID·······························································3-21
BRAKE FLUID REPLACEMENT/AIR BLEEDING
(NC700X/S)···································································19-8
BRAKE FLUID REPLACEMENT/AIR BLEEDING
(NC700XA/XD/SA/SD) ················································19-11
BRAKE LIGHT SWITCH
LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES·······························22-26
MAINTENANCE ·······················································3-24
BRAKE LOCK OPERATION (NC700XD/SD) ···············3-24
BRAKE PAD/DISC ······················································19-16
BRAKE PADS WEAR ···················································3-22
BRAKE PEDAL ···························································19-37
BRAKE SYSTEM ··························································3-23
BRAKE/TAIL/LICENSE LIGHT ·····································22-8
BRAKE/TAIL/LICENSE LIGHT/TAIL LIGHT COVER ···2-10
CABLE & HARNESS ROUTING ···································1-25
CAM CHAIN TENSIONER ··········································10-11
CAMSHAFT ································································10-13
CENTER COVER (NC700X/XA/XD)·····························2-16
CENTER CROSS PLATE ·············································2-32
CENTER SEAT COWL ···················································2-8
CHARGING SYSTEM INSPECTION ····························21-7
CKP SENSOR·······························································5-11
CLUTCH········································································11-7
CLUTCH EOP SENSOR···········································12-117
CLUTCH INITIALIZE LEARNING (PCM) ··················12-120
CLUTCH LEVER (NC700X/XA/S/SA)·························17-42
CLUTCH OIL FILTER (NC700XD/SD)··························3-14
CLUTCH SWITCH (NC700X/XA/S/SA) ······················22-26
CLUTCH SYSTEM (NC700X/XA/S/SA)························3-26
COMBINATION METER ···············································22-8
COMPONENT LOCATION
ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH ························13-2
CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE
(NC700X/XA/S/SA)···················································11-2
CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER ··········14-2
CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER························15-2
CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES ·····································10-2
DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT)
(NC700XD/SD) ·························································12-2
ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION·······················16-2
FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING ···········17-2
FUEL SYSTEM···························································7-2
HYDRAULIC BRAKE················································19-2
REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION ·································18-2
COOLANT REPLACEMENT···········································8-6
COOLING SYSTEM······················································3-16
A

B

C

CRANKCASE ASSEMBLY ········································· 14-28
CRANKCASE BREATHER············································· 3-8
CRANKCASE SEPARATION ······································· 14-7
CRANKPIN BEARING ················································ 15-11
CRANKSHAFT ····························································· 15-5
CYLINDER COMPRESSION TEST ····························· 10-5
CYLINDER HEAD······················································· 10-16
CYLINDER HEAD COVER··········································· 10-5
DCT CONNECTOR LOCATIONS ································ 12-8
DCT ELECTRICAL SYSTEM LOCATION ···················· 12-6
DCT SHIFT PEDAL (OPTIONAL)····························· 12-118
DCT SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING ······················ 12-5
DCT SYSTEM DIAGRAM············································· 12-7
DCT TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION ············· 12-11
DELAY VALVE ··························································· 20-28
DIAGNOSTIC CODE INDICATION ······························ 23-6
DRIVE CHAIN······························································· 3-16
DRIVE CHAIN SLIDER················································· 3-20
DTC INDEX
DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT)
(NC700XD/SD)······················································· 12-15
PGM-FI SYSTEM····················································· 4-15
DTC TROUBLESHOOTING
DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT)
(NC700XD/SD)······················································· 12-20
PGM-FI SYSTEM····················································· 4-21
DUAL CLUTCH························································· 12-105
ECM (NC700X/XA/S/SA)/PCM (NC700XD/SD)
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS) ···························· 23-11
PGM-FI SYSTEM····················································· 4-67
ECT SENSOR ······························································ 4-64
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS ······························· 1-86
ENGINE IDLE SPEED·················································· 3-15
ENGINE INSTALLATION (NC700X/XA/S/SA) ··········· 16-15
ENGINE INSTALLATION (NC700XD/SD)·················· 16-21
ENGINE OIL ································································· 3-12
ENGINE OIL FILTER···················································· 3-13
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR/
EOP SWITCH ····························································· 22-19
ENGINE REMOVAL (NC700X/XA/S/SA) ····················· 16-5
ENGINE REMOVAL (NC700XD/SD)···························· 16-9
EOT SENSOR ·························································· 12-118
EXHAUST PIPE/MUFFLER·········································· 2-32
FAN CONT. RELAY······················································ 8-15
FLYWHEEL ·································································· 13-7
FORK·········································································· 17-25
FRONT BRAKE CALIPER (NC700X/S) ····················· 19-26
FRONT BRAKE CALIPER (NC700XA/XD/SA/SD)····· 19-28
FRONT FENDER·························································· 2-28
FRONT MASTER CYLINDER ···································· 19-20
FRONT SIDE COWL (NC700X/XA/XD) ······················· 2-24
FRONT UNDER COVER (NC700X/XA/XD) ················· 2-25
FRONT WHEEL·························································· 17-20
FUEL CUT RELAY ······················································· 4-64
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR ·············································· 22-21
FUEL LINE ····································································· 3-5
FUEL LINE REPLACEMENT·········································· 7-4
FUEL PUMP UNIT························································ 7-10
FUEL TANK ···································································· 7-8
GEARSHIFT LINKAGE
CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE
(NC700X/XA/S/SA) ················································ 11-16
DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT)
(NC700XD/SD)····················································· 12-112
GEARSHIFT PEDAL ·················································· 11-19
GRAB RAIL ···································································· 2-8
GUARD PIPE (NC700XD/SD) ······································ 2-30
HANDLEBAR······························································ 17-10
HANDLEBAR SWITCHES·········································· 22-25
D

E

F

25

G

H

25-1

dummytext

INDEX
HEADLIGHT ································································· 22-5
HEADLIGHT AIM·························································· 3-25
HEADLIGHT COVER (NC700S/SA/SD) ······················ 2-27
HEADLIGHT/FRONT CENTER COWL
(NC700X/XA/XD)·························································· 2-26
HEADLIGHT/HEADLIGHT STAY (NC700S/SA/SD) ···· 2-27
HIGH COOLANT TEMPERATURE INDICATOR/ECT
SENSOR ···································································· 22-18
HISS INDICATOR ······················································ 23-10
HORN ········································································· 22-29
IACV ············································································· 7-22
IGNITION COIL ···························································· 5-10
IGNITION SWITCH ···················································· 22-24
IGNITION SYSTEM INSPECTION································· 5-6
IGNITION TIMING ·························································· 5-9
IMMOBILIZER RECEIVER········································· 23-12
INJECTOR···································································· 7-20
INNER UPPER COVER (NC700X/XA/XD) ·················· 2-25
KEY REGISTRATION PROCEDURES ························ 23-3
LEFT REAR COVER ···················································· 2-29
LOWER COWL····························································· 2-28
LUBRICATION & SEAL POINTS ································· 1-23
LUBRICATION SYSTEM DIAGRAM······························ 9-2
LUGGAGE BOX ··························································· 2-19
LUGGAGE BOX LID····················································· 2-17
LUGGAGE BOX LID/HINGE ASSEMBLY···················· 2-19
MAIN JOURNAL BEARING·········································· 15-8
MAINSHAFT SENSOR············································· 12-115
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE········································· 3-3
METER STAY (NC700X/XA/XD)·································· 2-24
MIL CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING··························· 4-63
MIL TROUBLESHOOTING ·········································· 4-43
MODE/SHIFT INDICATOR CIRCUIT
TROUBLESHOOTING ··············································· 12-95
MODEL IDENTIFICATION ············································· 1-3
MUD GUARD ······························································· 2-11
NEUTRAL DIODE (NC700X/XA/S/SA) ························ 6-12
NEUTRAL SWITCH···················································· 22-27
NUTS, BOLTS, FASTENERS ······································ 3-29
O2 SENSOR ································································· 4-69
OIL PRESSURE INSPECTION ······································ 9-6
OIL PUMP (NC700X/XA/S/SA) ······································ 9-6
OIL PUMP (NC700XD/SD)············································· 9-8
OIL STRAINER····························································· 9-11
PARKING BRAKE CALIPER (NC700XD/SD) ············ 19-32
PARKING BRAKE INDICATOR/SWITCH
(NC700XD/SD) ··························································· 22-22
PARKING BRAKE LEVER (NC700XD/SD)················ 19-38
PCV ············································································ 20-28
PGM-FI CONNECTOR LOCATIONS ····························· 4-8
PGM-FI SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING··················· 4-7
PGM-FI SYSTEM DIAGRAM ········································· 4-4
PGM-FI SYSTEM LOCATION········································ 4-2
PGM-FI TROUBLESHOOTING INFORMATION·········· 4-11
PILLION SEAT ······························································· 2-7
PISTON/CYLINDER ··················································· 15-14
POSITION LIGHT························································· 22-7
PRIMARY DRIVE GEAR/CKP SENSOR ROTOR
CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE
(NC700X/XA/S/SA) ················································ 11-15
DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT)
(NC700XD/SD) ···················································· 12-108
RADIATOR ····································································· 8-9
RADIATOR COOLANT················································· 3-15
RADIATOR RESERVE TANK ······································ 8-14
REAR BRAKE CALIPER ············································ 19-30
REAR FENDER A ························································ 2-12
REAR FENDER B ························································ 2-12
REAR FENDER MUD GUARD (U type)······················· 2-10
I

K

L

M

N

O

P

R

25-2

REAR MASTER CYLINDER······································· 19-23
REAR WHEEL ······························································ 18-6
REGULATOR/RECTIFIER············································ 21-8
RIGHT CRANKCASE COVER
CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE
(NC700X/XA/S/SA) ·················································· 11-5
DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT)
(NC700XD/SD) ······················································· 12-97
RIGHT ENGINE SIDE COVER (NC700XD/SD) ··········· 2-30
ROCKER ARM······························································ 10-8
SEAT COWL··································································· 2-9
SENSOR UNIT POWER LINE INSPECTION··············· 4-17
SERVICE INFORMATION
ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH ························ 13-4
ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM (ABS)······················· 20-4
BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM····························· 21-3
CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE
(NC700X/XA/S/SA) ·················································· 11-3
COOLING SYSTEM ··················································· 8-3
CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER ·········· 14-4
CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER························ 15-3
CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES ····································· 10-3
DUAL CLUTCH TRANSMISSION (DCT)
(NC700XD/SD) ························································· 12-3
ELECTRIC STARTER ················································ 6-4
ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ······················ 16-4
FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM··········· 2-6
FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING ··········· 17-8
FUEL SYSTEM ·························································· 7-3
HYDRAULIC BRAKE ··············································· 19-5
IGNITION SYSTEM···················································· 5-4
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS) ······························ 23-3
LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES ································ 22-3
LUBRICATION SYSTEM ··········································· 9-4
MAINTENANCE ························································· 3-2
PGM-FI SYSTEM ······················································· 4-6
REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION ································· 18-4
SERVICE RULES ··························································· 1-2
SHELTER/SIDE COVER (NC700S/SA/SD) ················· 2-15
SHIFT CONTROL MOTOR/REDUCTION GEARS··· 12-109
SHIFT INDICATOR TROUBLESHOOTING················ 12-61
SHIFT SPINDLE ANGLE SENSOR·························· 12-116
SHOCK ABSORBER ·················································· 18-14
SHOCK LINKAGE······················································· 18-13
SHROUD/SIDE COVER (NC700X/XA/XD) ·················· 2-14
SIDE COWL (NC700S/SA/SD) ····································· 2-13
SIDESTAND ································································· 3-27
SIDESTAND SWITCH ················································ 22-28
SINGLE SEAT ································································ 2-7
SPARK PLUG ································································· 3-8
SPECIFICATIONS ·························································· 1-6
SPEEDOMETER/VS SENSOR ·································· 22-16
STARTER CLUTCH···················································· 13-10
STARTER MOTOR························································· 6-8
STARTER RELAY (NC700XD/SD)······························· 6-12
STARTER RELAY SWITCH ········································· 6-10
STATOR ····································································· 13-13
STEERING HEAD BEARINGS ····································· 3-30
STEERING STEM······················································· 17-33
SUSPENSION ······························································ 3-28
SWINGARM································································ 18-16
SYSTEM DIAGRAM
BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM····························· 21-2
ELECTRIC STARTER ················································ 6-3
IGNITION SYSTEM···················································· 5-3
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS) ······························ 23-2
SYSTEM FLOW PATTERN ············································ 8-2
SYSTEM LOCATION
BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM····························· 21-2
S

dummytext

INDEX
ELECTRIC STARTER ················································6-2
IGNITION SYSTEM ····················································5-2
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS)·······························23-2
LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES·································22-2
SYSTEM TESTING·························································8-5
TACHOMETER ···························································22-18
TECHNICAL FEATURES··············································1-87
THERMOSTAT/THERMOSTAT HOUSING····················8-7
THROTTLE BODY ························································7-15
THROTTLE OPERATION ···············································3-5
TORQUE VALUES························································1-15
TR SENSOR ·····························································12-115
TRANSMISSION (NC700X/XA/S/SA)···························14-8
TRANSMISSION (NC700XD/SD) ·······························14-17
TROUBLESHOOTING
ALTERNATOR/STARTER CLUTCH ························13-4
BATTERY/CHARGING SYSTEM ·····························21-5
CLUTCH/GEARSHIFT LINKAGE
(NC700X/XA/S/SA)···················································11-4
COOLING SYSTEM ···················································8-4
CRANKCASE/TRANSMISSION/BALANCER ··········14-6
CRANKSHAFT/PISTON/CYLINDER························15-4
CYLINDER HEAD/VALVES ·····································10-4
T

ELECTRIC STARTER················································ 6-5
FRAME/BODY PANELS/EXHAUST SYSTEM ·········· 2-6
FRONT WHEEL/SUSPENSION/STEERING ··········· 17-9
HYDRAULIC BRAKE ··············································· 19-7
IGNITION SYSTEM ··················································· 5-5
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (HISS) ······························ 23-8
LIGHTS/METERS/SWITCHES ································ 22-4
LUBRICATION SYSTEM ··········································· 9-5
REAR WHEEL/SUSPENSION································· 18-5
TURN SIGNAL LIGHT ·················································· 22-6
TURN SIGNAL/HAZARD RELAY ······························· 22-30
VALVE CLEARANCE ··················································· 3-10
WATER PUMP ····························································· 8-12
WHEEL SPEED SENSOR·········································· 20-24
WHEELS/TIRES ··························································· 3-29
WINDSCREEN ····························································· 2-23
WIRING DIAGRAM
NC700S···································································· 24-5
NC700SA ································································· 24-6
NC700SD ································································· 24-7
NC700X···································································· 24-2
NC700XA ································································· 24-3
NC700XD ································································· 24-4
V

W

25-3